Chevrolet - Impala - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008 (2)

Factory Workshop Manual Make Chevrolet Model Impala Engine and year V8-5.3L (2008) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Front of the Passenger Compartment, in the Steering Column 1 - Ignition Switch 2 - Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) 3 - Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10 Alarm Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The content theft deterrent (CTD) system is a software based system in which the body control module (BCM) actively monitors certain inputs to determine if unauthorized vehicle access is being attempted. The driver door lock cylinder switch is used as an input to disarm the CTD system. The BCM monitors the door lock key switch unlock signal circuit to determine if the driver door cylinder is being rotated, indicating a vehicle key is being used to unlock the vehicle and the CTD system should be disarmed. The door key cylinder switch, located in the driver door latch assembly, provides a switched ground for the signal circuit. Circuit/System Verification Ignition ON, verify the scan tool Door Key Cyl. Unlock Switch parameter cycles between Inactive and Active while turning the driver door lock cylinder with the vehicle key. Circuit/System Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the driver door latch assembly. 2. Ignition OFF, test for less than 10 ohms of resistance between the ground circuit terminal 8 and ground. ‹› If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 3. Ignition ON, verify the scan tool Door Key Cyl. Unlock Switch parameter is Inactive. ‹› If not the specified value, test the signal circuit terminal 9 for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the BCM. 4. Install a 3-A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 9 and ground. Verify the scan tool Door Key Cyl. Unlock Switch parameter is Active. ‹› If not the specified value, test the signal circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the BCM. 5. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the door latch assembly. Component Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the driver door latch assembly. 2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal terminal 9 and the ground terminal 8 with the switch in the open position. ‹› If not the specified value, replace the door latch assembly. 3. Test for less than 2.0 ohms of resistance between the signal terminal 9 and the ground terminal 8 with the switch in the closed position. ‹› If greater than the specified range, replace the door latch assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock > Page 13 4. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the door latch assembly housing/case. ‹› If not the specified value, replace the door latch assembly. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Front Side Door Lock Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock > Page 14 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Content Theft Deterrent Malfunction Content Theft Deterrent Malfunction Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The content theft deterrent (CTD) system is a software based system in which the body control module (BCM) actively monitors certain inputs to determine if unauthorized vehicle access is being attempted. Based on inputs such as the door ajar switches, the rear compartment ajar switch, and the hood ajar switch, the BCM determines whether a CTD alarm is warranted. If unauthorized access is being detected, the BCM will pulse the vehicle horn and flash the turn signals as a means of theft deterrence. Circuit/System Verification 1. Individually open and close each vehicle door while observing the door ajar indicator/message. The indicator/message should accurately transition between the door ajar and door closed state when each door is opened and closed. ‹› If the door ajar indicator/message does not properly transition when each door is opened and closed, refer to Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction 2. Open and close the trunk while observing the trunk ajar indicator/message. The indicator/message should accurately transition between the trunk ajar and trunk closed state when the trunk is opened and closed. ‹› If the trunk ajar indicator/message does not properly transition when the trunk is opened and closed, refer to Trunk Ajar Indicator Malfunction. 3. Insert the vehicle key into the driver door key cylinder and rotate the cylinder between the lock and unlock positions. Verify the scan tool Door Key Cyl. Unlock Switch parameter cycles between Idle/Inactive and Unlock/Active. ‹› If the scan tool parameter does not cycle between the specified parameters, refer to Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock. See: Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock 4. Completely lower the driver door window and close all vehicle doors. 5. Ignition OFF, arm the CTD system using the keyless entry system by pressing the transmitter LOCK button twice. Verify the scan tool CTD Status parameter displays Armed. ‹› If the parameter does not equal the specified value, refer to Keyless Entry System Inoperative. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Keyless Entry System Inoperative 6. Without disarming the system, reach in through the open driver window, unlock and open the driver door. Verify the scan tool CTD Status parameter displays Alarm Active. ‹› If the parameter does not equal the specified value, replace the BCM. 7. With the door open, verify the vehicle horn is pulsing and the exterior lamps are flashing. ‹› If the horn is not pulsing, refer to Horns Malfunction. See: Lighting and Horns/Horn/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Horns Malfunction ‹› If the exterior lights are not flashing, refer to Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction. See: Lighting and Horns/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) Does Not Disarm with Key Lock > Page 15 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Security Indicator Malfunction Security Indicator Malfunction Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provide an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The security indicator acts as a status indicator for the content theft deterrent (CTD) system when the ignition is OFF and as a fault indicator for the immobilizer system when the ignition is ON. When either the body control module (BCM) or theft deterrent module (TDM) requires the security indicator to be illuminated, a serial data message is sent to the instrument panel cluster (IPC), which will illuminate the indicator. Circuit/System Verification Ignition ON, verify the security indicator illuminates when performing the scan tool IPC Display Test. If the security indicator does not illuminate, replace the IPC. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 16 Alarm Module: Service and Repair Theft Deterrent Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Locations Central Control Module: Locations Luggage Compartment/Rear of Vehicle Component Views Left Side of Rear Compartment 1 - Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) (UE1) 2 - Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) Battery (UE1) 3 - Data Link Resistor (UE1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 20 Central Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) X1 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 21 Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) Battery Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Central Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 22 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 31 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 32 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 33 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Technical Service Bulletin # 10037 Date: 100420 Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Bulletin No.: 10037 Date: April 20, 2010 Subject: 10037 - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) Models: 2003 Buick LeSabre 2004-2006 Buick Rendezvous 2005 Buick LeSabre, Terraza 2005-2006 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2008 Buick LaCrosse/Allure 2008-2009 Buick Enclave 2003 Cadillac CTS 2004 Cadillac Escalade 2004-2005 Cadillac CTS-V, Deville 2005 Cadillac Escalade ESV, SRX 2005-2006 Cadillac STS 2005-2008 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade EXT 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade ESV 2008 Cadillac SRX, STS 2002 Chevrolet Impala 2003-2008 Chevrolet Suburban 2003-2009 Chevrolet Silverado 2004-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2005 Chevrolet Colorado, Corvette, Malibu 2005-2006 Chevrolet Uplander 2005-2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 Chevrolet HHR, Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2008 Chevrolet HHR 2008-2009 Chevrolet Cobalt, Colorado, Malibu, Uplander 2003 GMC Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon XL 2004-2008 GMC Yukon 2005-2009 GMC Sierra 2005-2008 GMC Yukon XL 2006-2008 GMC Envoy 2007 GMC Canyon 2007-2009 GMC Acadia 2006 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2008 HUMMER H2 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette 2005 Montana SV6 2005-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006 Pontiac G6, Vibe 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007-2008 Pontiac Solstice 2008 Pontiac G6, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G5, G8 2009 Pontiac G3, Montana SV6 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2006-2009Saturn VUE 2007-2008 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 39 THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL APRIL 30, 2011. Condition Certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may have a condition in which the vehicle's OnStar(R) system repeatedly makes incomplete calls to OnStar(R) without the vehicle's occupant(s) input or knowledge. Customer initiated Blue Button call, Emergency calls, and Automatic Crash Notification calls will also fail to establish a data connection with the OnStar(R) Call Center. Eventually, the customer's call will connect as a voice only line and the customer will be able to talk with an OnStar(R) advisor; however, the advisor will not get crucial customer data such as vehicle identification and location. Correction Dealers/retailers are to replace the OnStar(R) module (VCIM). Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2002-2009 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R), and built within these VIN breakpoints: Note: Some model years/models have only one vehicle involved. Important Dealers/retailers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using GMVIS (dealers/retailers using WINS) or the Investigate Vehicle History link (dealers/retailers using GWM). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers/retailers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided to dealers/retailers through the GM GlobalConnect Recall Reports. Dealers/retailers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information US: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting Autocraft Electronics via the web at www.autocraft.com, and selecting the catalog item that contains bulletin number 10037 (or PIC 4893B), or by calling 1-800-336-3998. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. Canada: OnStar(R) modules required for this program are to be obtained by contacting MASS Electronics at 1-877-410-6277. Dealer must provide the VIN, R.O. number, and the current vehicle mileage. DO NOT ORDER ONSTAR(R) MODULES FROM GENERAL MOTORS CUSTOMER CARE AND AFTERSALES (GMCC&A;), SATURN SERVICE PARTS OPERATION (SSPO), OR THE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (TAC). Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers/retailers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information 1. Submit a claim using the table below. 2. Courtesy Transportation - For dealers/retailers using WINS, submit using normal labor code; for dealers/retailers using GWM - submit as Net Item under the repair labor code. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 40 * Dealers using WINs: Add 0.2 hours to the labor time for administrative allowance for the module exchange. Dealers using GWM: Submit 0.2 hours administrative allowance under "Administration Time" for the module exchange. ** The $25 represents the additional net amount allowed for the module exchange. *** Dealers are to claim only administrative allowance of 0.2 hours when the module is replaced by Masscomp's Mobile Unit. Dealers using WINS should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance in labor time. Dealer using GWM should submit the 0.2 hours administrative allowance under Administrative Time. Customer Notification OnStar will notify customers of this program on their vehicle. Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers'/retailers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Dealers/retailers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through April 30, 2011. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer/retailer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer/retailer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10037 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - Unwanted Repeat Calls to OnStar(R) > Page 41 In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is in your dealership/facility for service through April 30, 2011, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Service Procedure Service Procedure Note Do NOT replace the inside rear view mirror in tandem with this concern. The mirror has no bearing on this specific issue. 1. Remove the OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module removal instructions. Note Inform customer that all Bluetooth devices must be paired with the new VCIM. Bluetooth devices that have not been paired to the new VCIM will not function properly. 2. Install the new OnStar(R) module (referred to as the Communication Interface Module (CIM) or Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) in SI). Refer to SI for module installation instructions. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B Date: February 11, 2010 Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007 Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except 2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers. Note On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled. OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY) General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty. TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate. OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY. The Reimbursement Program This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R). Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center. How to Order To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com. The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness, the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide. Warranty Information The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web. Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 46 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-46-005B Date: February 11, 2010 Subject: Availability of OnStar(R) for Hearing Impaired Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) Except 2007 Cadillac CTS Except 2007-2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT Except 2007 Pontiac Montana SV6 Except 2007-2010 Pontiac Vibe Except 2007 Saturn ION, VUE Except 2008 Saturn Astra Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a Note regarding 2009 Bluetooth(R)-equipped vehicles, additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-46-005A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important This service bulletin is not applicable to 'GM of Canada' dealers and retailers. Note On 2009 and newer model year vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth(R) feature (option code UPF), when up-fitted with TTY capabilities, the Bluetooth(R) feature will be disabled. OnStar with Text Telephone Capability (TTY) General Motors is pleased to announce that the safety and security of OnStar is now available to our deaf, hard of hearing and speech impaired customers. The current vehicles listed above, as well as forthcoming vehicles equipped with OnStar hardware version 7.0 or higher, have the ability to utilize texting telephones. Vehicle specific TTY capability can be determined by utilizing the VIN lookup Tool. Additional information may be found by referring to www.onstar.com/tty. TTY equipment allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing or speech impaired, in-vehicle access to 911 and basic OnStar(R) services by pressing the OnStar(R) blue button or red emergency button. The keypad provides a means to communicate by allowing customers to type messages back and forth, with an OnStar(R) advisor or other party when using the OnStar(R) Hands-Free Calling feature. A TTY is required at both ends of the conversation in order to communicate. OnStar(R) Turn by Turn Navigation and Virtual Advisor are not available with the addition of TTY. The Reimbursement Program This equipment will be made available to eligible customers through GM Mobility and OnStar(R). Under this program, the customer must complete a GM Mobility application form. To take advantage of the program, vehicles must be adapted at the time of delivery for purchase / lease and a dealer claim ($1,000 Maximum per GM Mobility guidelines) with the application form submitted to GM Mobility. Saab dealers must fax documents. GM Dealers will receive electronic reimbursement directly from GM Mobility. Saab dealers will receive a check directly from OnStar(R). Additional questions or concerns should be directed to the OnStar Dealer Center. How to Order To order the dealer installed kit, contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web at www.autocraft.com. The kit consists of an OnStar Interface Module, a Dial Pad (for making calls), OTIM wiring harness, the TTY device, installation/Tech 2(R) programming instructions and owner's guide. Warranty Information The Ultra-Tec Compact C TTY device is manufactured by an independent manufacturer and is covered by the manufacturer's warranty. It is not covered under the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. All other parts (OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness) are covered by the standard GM new vehicle parts and labor warranty. Replacement parts are available through AutoCraft Electronics. Contact AutoCraft Electronics or via the web. Warranty claims for the OTIM, dial pad and OTIM wiring harness should be submitted through normal warranty procedures using a sublet warranty claim with GM Labor Operation R5140. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 06-08-46-005B > Feb > 10 > OnStar(R) - Availability for Hearing Impaired > Page 52 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communication Interface Module Replacement Communications Control Module: Service and Repair Communication Interface Module Replacement Communication Interface Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communication Interface Module Replacement > Page 55 Communications Control Module: Service and Repair Communication Interface Module Battery Replacement Communication Interface Module Battery Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communication Interface Module Replacement > Page 56 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 65 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 70 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: Customer Interest OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 75 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 76 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-004C Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: OnStar(R) Phone Number Concerns (Phone Number Incorrect/Assigned to Another Vehicle/Phone) That Occur During Diagnosis of OnStar(R) System Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years up to 2011. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). During diagnosis of an OnStar(R) concern, the technician may be told that the OnStar(R) phone number is incorrect or tied to another vehicle and/or phone of some kind. To resolve these concerns, the Tech 2(R) with software version 22.005 (or higher), has the capability to change the OnStar(R) phone number. Service Procedure 1. With the Tech 2(R), build the vehicle to specifications within the Diagnostics area of the Tech 2(R). 2. For vehicles with physical-based diagnostics - under Body, go to the OnStar(R) section. Then select the Special Functions menu. For vehicles with functional-based diagnostics - under Body and Accessories, go to the Cellular Communication section. Select Module Setup and then Vehicle Communication Interface Module. 3. Locate the Program Phone Number prompt and select it. The original phone number will be displayed on the Tech 2(R) screen. 4. Contact the OnStar(R) team at the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to obtain a new phone number. 5. Highlight the digits of the phone number one at a time and enter the new phone number using the number keys on the Tech 2(R). 6. Press the Soft key at the base of the screen for Done once these numbers have been changed on the screen. 7. Press the Soft key for Done again. The area code or new phone number has now been programmed into the phone. 8. Cycle the ignition to Off and open the driver's door. 9. Press the blue OnStar(R) button to make sure that a normal connection can be made to the OnStar(R) call center. If applicable, make sure the Hands-Free Calling (HFC) works properly by making a phone call. 10. If the system is working properly, fax or voicemail a case closing into the OnStar(R) team at TAC with the results. Dealers in Canada should submit case closing information through the GM infoNET. Please follow this diagnostic process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved WITHOUT completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If the procedure above does not resolve the condition, you must contact TAC for further assistance. This diagnostic approach was developed specifically for this condition and should not automatically be used for other vehicles with similar symptoms. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-004C > Dec > 10 > OnStar(R) - Number Incorrect/Incorrectly Assigned > Page 82 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-006C Date: January 08, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Incorrect OnStar(R) Global Positioning System (GPS) Location Reported During OnStar(R) Call Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-006B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). A small number of the above-mentioned vehicles may exhibit a condition in which the vehicle reports an inaccurate location to the OnStar(R) Call Center. This condition can only be identified via a button press to the OnStar(R) Call Center by the customer. Call Center personnel will be able to identify this inaccurate location condition. Customers will then be notified through the mail by OnStar(R) if their vehicle exhibits this condition. Once this condition has been identified OnStar(R) will instruct the customer to return to the dealership to have this condition corrected. It is not necessary to reconfigure the vehicle after the following procedure. In order to correct this condition you must cycle power to the OnStar(R) system. This can be done by either removing the fuses powering the OnStar(R) system or disconnecting the OnStar(R) module (VCIM) from the vehicle. As a last resort you can disconnect the vehicle's battery. The power needs to be removed from the system for approximately 15 minutes. After completing this procedure the vehicle should be taken to an area with an unobstructed view of the sky. The vehicle should be kept running for approximately 10 minutes to allow the vehicle to reacquire the global positioning system (GPS). Then contact the OnStar(R) Call Center via the blue OnStar(R) button and ask the advisor to verify the GPS position. If the OnStar(R) advisor still has an inaccurate GPS location refer to the Navigation Systems and Cellular Communications sub-sections in the Service Manual in order to diagnose and repair the concern. If the normal diagnostics lead to module replacement you will need to contact Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis and if appropriate order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part you will avoid a significant non-return core charge. Warranty Information (excluding Saab US Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab US Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-006C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Incorrect GPS Position Reported During Call > Page 99 For vehicles repaired under warranty use, the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues Bulletin No.: 02-08-46-007C Date: November 19, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on OnStar(R) System - Possible Loss of GPS Signal, Hands-Free Calling Minutes Expire Prematurely and/or Inability to Add Hands-Free Calling Minutes Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) System (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year, warranty information and to provide GPS signal recovery steps (under Dealer Action heading) to do PRIOR to determining if the VIU/VCIM needs replacement. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-46-007B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). If the vehicle currently has analog-upgradable OnStar(R) hardware, then the customer should be made aware of the digital upgrade program per the latest version of Service Bulletin # 05-08-46-006. Any analog OnStar system that is not upgraded prior to the end of 2007 will be deactivated due to the upcoming phase-out of the analog cellular network in the U.S. and Canada. If the vehicle has recently been upgraded or has had a service replacement unit installed, this bulletin may not be applicable. Certain 2001-2008 model year vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) may exhibit a condition with the Global Positioning System (GPS) that causes inaccuracies in the GPS clock. The GPS system is internal to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Interface Unit (VIU) or the Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM). This inaccuracy can result in a symptom where the OnStar(R) Call Center is unable to obtain an accurate GPS signal, hands-Free Calling minutes expire prematurely and/or the inability to add Hands-Free calling minutes. Customer Notification OnStar(R) will notify the customer by mail with instructions to contact their dealership service department. Dealer Action Not all vehicles will require VIU/VCIM replacement. The GPS signal in some vehicles may be recoverable. To determine if the signal is recoverable, simply connect the Tech2(R) and using the GPS information data display option, observe the GPS date and time. If the date/time stamps are equal to a date approximately 19 years in the future, the GPS clock has exceeded its capacity and the VIU/VCIM will need to be replaced. If the date/time stamp is in the past or near future, the GPS clock has simply generated an inaccurate value and may be recoverable by performing the following power-up reset. To initiate a power-up reset, battery voltage (batt. +) must be removed from the VIU/VCIM. The preferred methods, in order, of initiating the reset are outlined below. Remove the fuse that supplies Battery positive (Batt. +) voltage to the module (refer to the applicable Service Information schematics for the appropriate fuse). The next preferred method is to remove the connector to the OnStar(R) unit that Batt + is contained. The least preferable method is to remove the negative terminal of the vehicle battery. This will not only initiate the power-up reset, but it may also result in the loss of radio presets and other stored personalization information/settings in other modules as well. After initiating the power-up reset, the GPS data will be set to the defaulted date and time and will require an acquisition of the GPS signal in order to gain the proper date and time. Acquiring the GPS signal requires running the vehicle in an open/unobstructed view of the sky. First, contact OnStar(R) Technical Support by pressing the blue button. Allow the OnStar(R) Technical Advisor to activate the GPS recovery process. This should take approximately 10 minutes. Continue to Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 104 monitor the Tech2(R) for the current time and date. REMINDER - Keep in mind that the time displayed on the Tech2(R) is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the offset is based on the time zones relationship to GMT. If replacement of the VIU/VCIM is necessary, you MUST reconfigure the OnStar® system. Failure to reconfigure the system will result in an additional customer visit for repair. OnStar® VIU, Generations 2 and 3, will require the technician to press the blue OnStar® button to reconfigure the vehicle with an OnStar® advisor. OnStar(R) VCIM, Generations 4-7 will require the technician to reconfigure the vehicle with the use of the TIS2WEB and SPS applications (pass thru only), along with the Tech2(R). The configuration and set-up procedure is a two-step process that must be completed step-by-step without interruption or delay in between each step. This procedure enables an automated activation without a button press by the technician to the OnStar(R) Call Center. Following this procedure, it may take up to 24 hours for all OnStar(R) services to be fully activated. How to Order Parts If the OnStar(R) GPS date/time stamp is non-recoverable and the unit needs to be replaced, dealers in the U.S. should contact Autocraft Electronics select the catalog item that contains this bulletin number. Canadian dealers should contact MASS Electronics. Dealers DO NOT need to call the GM Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for replacement approval. Autocraft Electronics and MASS Electronics will be responsible for verifying that the subject vehicle is a candidate for a replacement VIU/VCIM. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-46-007C > Nov > 07 > OnStar(R) - Loss of GPS Signal/Hands Free Issues > Page 105 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 110 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 111 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 112 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 113 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 02-08-44-007D > May > 09 > OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Negative Impact of Cloth/Vinyl Roofs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-44-007D Date: May 12, 2009 Subject: Negative Impact of Dealer-Installed Cloth/Vinyl Roofs on XM Radio and/or OnStar(R) Systems Models: 2002-2009 Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with XM Radio (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2009 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-44-007C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Dealers should not install a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles that have been ordered with the XM radio option (RPO U2K) and/or OnStar(R) (RPO UE1). The performance of these systems may be negatively impacted by the installation of the cloth/vinyl roof. Additionally, water leaks may result from installing a cloth or vinyl roof on vehicles with roof-mounted antenna systems. Relocating the antenna to another spot on the vehicle exterior, in order to install a cloth or vinyl roof, is not advised either. The performance of the OnStar(R) and XM Radio antennas has been optimized for their current locations. Relocating the antennas may result in a performance degradation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 08-08-46-004 > Aug > 08 > OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Aftermarket Device Interference Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-46-004 Date: August 14, 2008 Subject: Information on Aftermarket Device Interference with OnStar(R) Diagnostic Services Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Car and Truck (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) This bulletin is being issued to provide dealer service personnel with information regarding aftermarket devices connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC) and the impact to OnStar(R) diagnostic probes and Vehicle Diagnostic e-mails. Certain aftermarket devices, when connected to the Diagnostic Link Connector, such as, but not limited to, Scan Tools, Trip Computers, Fuel Economy Analyzers and Insurance Tracking Devices, interfere with OnStar's ability to perform a diagnostic probe when requested (via a blue button call) by a subscriber. These devices also prohibit the ability to gather diagnostic and tire pressure data for a subscriber's scheduled OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail. These aftermarket devices utilize the Vehicles serial data bus to perform data requests and/or information gathering. When these devices are requesting data, OnStar(R) is designed not to interfere with any data request being made by these devices as required by OBD II regulations. The OnStar(R) advisor is unable to definitively detect the presence of these devices and will only be able to inform the caller or requester of the unsuccessful or incomplete probe and may in some cases refer the subscriber/requester to take the vehicle to a dealer for diagnosis of the concern. When performing a diagnostic check for an unsuccessful or incomplete OnStar(R) diagnostic probe, or for concerns regarding completeness of the OnStar(R) Vehicle Diagnostic (OVD) e-mail, verify that an aftermarket device was not present at the time of the requested probe. Regarding the OVD e-mail, if an aftermarket device is interfering (including a Scan Tool of any type), the e-mail will consistently display a "yellow" indication in diagnostics section for all vehicle systems except the OnStar(R) System and Tire Pressure data (not available on all vehicles) will not be displayed (i.e. section is collapsed). Successful diagnostic probes and complete OVD e-mails will resume following the removal or disconnecting of the off-board device. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 00-08-46-004C > Jan > 08 > OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Re-establishing OnStar(R) Communications Bulletin No.: 00-08-46-004C Date: January 17, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Re-establishing Communications with OnStar(R) Center After Battery Disconnect Models: 2000-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) with Digital OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-08-46-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). When servicing any of the above models and a battery cable is disconnected or power to the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) is interrupted for any reason the following procedure must be performed to verify proper Global Positioning System (GPS) function. Never swap OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Modules (VCIM) from other vehicles. Transfer of OnStar(R) modules from other vehicles should not be done. Each OnStar(R) module has a unique identification number. The VCIM has a specific Station Identification (STID). This identification number is used by the National Cellular Telephone Network and OnStar(R) systems and is stored in General Motors Vehicle History files by VIN. After completing ALL repairs to the vehicle you must perform the following procedure: Move the vehicle into an open area of the service lot. Sit in the vehicle with the engine running and the radio turned on for five minutes. Press the OnStar(R) button in the vehicle. When the OnStar(R) advisor answers ask the advisor to verify the current location of the vehicle. If the vehicle location is different than the location the OnStar(R) advisor gives contact GM Technical Assistance (TAC) and choose the OnStar(R) prompt. GM OnStar(R) TAC will assist in the diagnosis of a failed VCIM and, if appropriate, order a replacement part. Replacement parts are usually shipped out within 24 hours, and a pre-paid return package label will be included for returning the faulty part. By returning the faulty part, you will avoid a non-return core charge. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Emergency Contact Module: All Technical Service Bulletins OnStar(R) - Language Change Information Bulletin No.: 05-08-46-009B Date: June 29, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Language Change for OnStar(R) System (U.S. and Canada Only) Models: 2006-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2008 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2008 Saab 9-7X with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Built After and Including VIN Breakpoints Listed Below (2006 MY Only) Attention: This bulletin only applies to vehicles equipped with OnStar(R) Generation 6.1 or later with a Station Identification (STID) Number in the following range: 16,000,000-17,000,000 or 20,000,000-21,999,999 or 23,500,001-26,000,000 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the service procedure and add a Canadian procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Numbers 05-08-46-009A and 05-08-46-008A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 131 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 132 Built After and Including the VIN Breakpoints shown. The Generation (Gen) 6.1 OnStar(R) system found in these vehicles has the capability to change the default English voice recognition to French or Spanish. Changing the language of the OnStar(R) system will change the following features to the language you select: Voice recognition command prompts will be played in the language selected. The voice recognition system will only recognize commands given in the selected language. Once completed, this process completely changes all voice recognition and voice commands of the OnStar(R) system. The process will need to be repeated in its entirety to change to a different language, including English. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 133 Method 1 Method 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Emergency Contact Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Emergency Contact Module: > 05-08-46-009B > Jun > 07 > OnStar(R) - Language Change Information > Page 134 Method 3 The Gen 6.1 version of OnStar(R) does not require the use of the Service Programming System (SPS) to change the voice recognition system. However, there are three ways to change the language. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement > Page 139 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 148 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 149 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 150 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 156 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 157 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 158 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Door Lock Relay > Component Information > Locations Door Lock Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Antenna Replacement > Page 167 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Heater Control Module: > 10-08-50-001 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - No Crank/Start Discharged or Low Battery Seat Heater Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - No Crank/Start Discharged or Low Battery TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-001 Date: February 15, 2010 Subject: No Crank, No Start, Discharged or Low Battery (Reprogram Heated Seat Module) Models: 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent Equipped with Front Heated Seats Condition Some customers may comment on a no crank, no start, discharged or low battery. Note This condition may be intermittent, therefore it is important to check if a revised calibration has been released on TIS2WEB for this concern, even if the condition cannot be duplicated at the dealer. Cause This condition may be caused by the heated seat module discharging the battery. The module keeps the serial data bus active, which creates a cumulative, continuous amperage draw on the battery after the vehicle is shut down, until the state of charge reaches three volts. Correction Important DO NOT replace the heated seat module or the battery for this concern. Reprogram the heated seat module with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the heated seat module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Heater Control Module: > 10-08-50-001 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - No Crank/Start Discharged or Low Battery > Page 176 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Heater Control Module: > 10-08-50-001 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - No Crank/Start Discharged or Low Battery Seat Heater Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - No Crank/Start Discharged or Low Battery TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-001 Date: February 15, 2010 Subject: No Crank, No Start, Discharged or Low Battery (Reprogram Heated Seat Module) Models: 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent Equipped with Front Heated Seats Condition Some customers may comment on a no crank, no start, discharged or low battery. Note This condition may be intermittent, therefore it is important to check if a revised calibration has been released on TIS2WEB for this concern, even if the condition cannot be duplicated at the dealer. Cause This condition may be caused by the heated seat module discharging the battery. The module keeps the serial data bus active, which creates a cumulative, continuous amperage draw on the battery after the vehicle is shut down, until the state of charge reaches three volts. Correction Important DO NOT replace the heated seat module or the battery for this concern. Reprogram the heated seat module with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the heated seat module using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the Service Programming System (SPS) procedures in SI. When using a Tech 2(R) or a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Heater Control Module: > 10-08-50-001 > Feb > 10 > Electrical - No Crank/Start Discharged or Low Battery > Page 182 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 183 Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AH5) 2 - Heated Seat Element - Driver - Back (KA1) 3 - Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver 4 - Heated Seat Control Module (KA1) 5 - Horizontal Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Driver) 6 - Front Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Driver) 7 - Rear Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Driver) 8 Heated Seat Element - Driver - Seat (KA1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 184 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Heated Seat Control Module X1 Heated Seat Control Module X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 185 Heated Seat Control Module X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 186 Heated Seat Control Module X4 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 187 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Front Seat Heater Control Module Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-05-25-001 > Jun > 09 > ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-05-25-001 Date: June 02, 2009 Subject: Intermittent Service Stabilitrak Message After Key Cycle, DTC C0292 Set (Reprogram Electronic Brake Control Module) Models: 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Stabilitrak message is displayed intermittently after the vehicle is first started. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning lights may also come on the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) intermittently. This may be the result of setting DTC C0292. The DTC will appear as a history code. This condition can be very intermittent (every ten key cycles or more) and would occur before the gear selector is taken out of Park. Cause The Service Stabilitrak message and the DTC is a result of the Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) software not updated to the latest version. Some additional key factors that trigger the occurrences of this condition and the EBCM DTC C0292 include the following: - Initial battery voltage is less than 11.8 volts going into CRANK mode. - When starting the vehicle, the customer quickly enters CRANK and then releases to allow for the starter relay control to take over engine start. This quick return to RUN allows the EBCM diagnostics to start monitoring for diagnostic faults. In the case of DTC C0292 , the low voltage is measured at the Yaw/Lateral Accelerometer sensor and the Service StabiliTrak message is then displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Correction Important The TECH 2(R) can provide some additional information or aid during diagnosis. Using a TECH 2(R), interrogate the EBCM Freeze Frame Data or Additional DTC Information to confirm the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A. If the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A, the revised EBCM software calibration improvement will reduce the occurrence of the DTC C0292 diagnostic fault from setting. Reprogram the EBCM with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the EBCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Programming and Setup procedures in SI. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-05-25-001 > Jun > 09 > ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-05-25-001 Date: June 02, 2009 Subject: Intermittent Service Stabilitrak Message After Key Cycle, DTC C0292 Set (Reprogram Electronic Brake Control Module) Models: 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Stabilitrak message is displayed intermittently after the vehicle is first started. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning lights may also come on the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) intermittently. This may be the result of setting DTC C0292. The DTC will appear as a history code. This condition can be very intermittent (every ten key cycles or more) and would occur before the gear selector is taken out of Park. Cause The Service Stabilitrak message and the DTC is a result of the Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) software not updated to the latest version. Some additional key factors that trigger the occurrences of this condition and the EBCM DTC C0292 include the following: - Initial battery voltage is less than 11.8 volts going into CRANK mode. - When starting the vehicle, the customer quickly enters CRANK and then releases to allow for the starter relay control to take over engine start. This quick return to RUN allows the EBCM diagnostics to start monitoring for diagnostic faults. In the case of DTC C0292 , the low voltage is measured at the Yaw/Lateral Accelerometer sensor and the Service StabiliTrak message is then displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Correction Important The TECH 2(R) can provide some additional information or aid during diagnosis. Using a TECH 2(R), interrogate the EBCM Freeze Frame Data or Additional DTC Information to confirm the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A. If the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A, the revised EBCM software calibration improvement will reduce the occurrence of the DTC C0292 diagnostic fault from setting. Reprogram the EBCM with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the EBCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Programming and Setup procedures in SI. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 210 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 211 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 212 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 213 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 219 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 220 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 221 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 222 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 225 Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 226 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) (without JL4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 227 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) (JL4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 228 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 229 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 08266 Date: 080812 Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming # 08266: Customer Satisfaction - Reduced Heating and Cooling-Reprogram Module - (Aug 12, 2008) Subject: 08266 -- Reduced Heating and Cooling - Reprogram - Module - (Aug 12, 2008) Models: 2008 Chevrolet Impala With Dual Zone Manual Climate Control (RPO CJ3) THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL AUGUST 31, 2009. Condition Certain 2008 model year Chevrolet Impala vehicles equipped with dual zone manual climate control (RPO CJ3) may have software that does not allow the heating and air conditioning system to deliver maximum cold or maximum hot output. If this occurs, the vehicle may not warm or cool as intended. Correction Dealers are to reprogram the HVAC control head module. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2008 model year Chevrolet Impala vehicles equipped with dual zone manual climate control (RPO CJ3) and built within the VIN breakpoints shown above. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided through the applicable system listed below. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. - US dealers - GM DealerWorld Recall Information - Canadian dealers - GMinfoNet Recall Reports The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information No parts are required for the program. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2(R) scan tool and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/30/08 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. Service Programming System (SPS) For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. Review the information below to ensure proper programming protocol. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 242 Important: ^ DO NOT program a control module unless you are directed by a service procedure or you are directed by a General Motors Corporation service bulletin. Programming a control module at any other time will not permanently correct a customer's concern. ^ It is essential that the Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2(R) and the TIS terminal are equipped with the latest software before performing (SPS). ^ Due to the time requirements of programming a controller, it is recommended that an external power source be used to maintain system voltage. Stable battery voltage is critical during programming. Any fluctuation, spiking, over voltage or loss of voltage will interrupt programming. To ensure trouble-free programming, GM recommends using one of the following external power sources: - A Midtronic PCS charger. - A fully charged 12V jumper or booster pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply. - Some modules will require additional programming/setup events performed before or after programming. - Some vehicles may require the use of a CANDi module for programming. - Review the appropriate service information for these procedures. - DTCs may set during programming. Clear DTCs after programming is complete. - Clearing powertrain DTCs will set the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system status indicators to NO. Ensure the following conditions are met before programming a control module: - Flex Fuel (E85) Vehicles - The fuel composition learn function is inactive. Programming with the fuel composition learn active will result in fuel trim DTCs. - If necessary, drive the vehicle until the scan tool indicates that the fuel composition learn is inactive. Vehicle System Voltage - There is not a charging system concern. All charging system concerns must be repaired before programming a control module. - Battery voltage is greater than 12 volts but less than 16 volts. The battery must be fully charged before programming the control module. - Turn OFF or disable any system that may put a load on the vehicles battery, such as the following components: - Twilight sentinel - Interior lights - Daytime running lights (DRL) - Applying the parking brake, on most vehicles, disables the DRL system - Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems - Engine cooling fans, radio, etc. The ignition switch must be in the proper position. SPS prompts you to turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. DO NOT change the position of the ignition switch during the programming procedure, unless instructed to do so Make certain all tool connections are secure, including the following components and circuits: - The RS-232 communication cable port. - The connection at the data link connector (DLC) - The voltage supply circuits DO NOT disturb the tool harnesses while programming. If an interruption occurs during the programming procedure, programming failure or control module damage may occur. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 243 DO NOT turn OFF the ignition if the programming procedure is interrupted or unsuccessful. Ensure that all control module and DLC connections are secure and the TIS terminal operating software is up to date. Attempt to reprogram the control module. If the control module cannot be programmed, replace the control module. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use approved Midtronics PCS charger, a fully charged 12V jumper, or booster pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the HVAC control module. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 2.1 Connect the MDI or Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Important: Select J2534 MDI or Tech 2(R) Legacy Pass-Thru and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. The J2534 MDI will reprogram the module in less time than the Tech 2(R) scan tool. 2.2. Select HVAC Control Module from the Supported Controllers screen. 2.3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Select HVAC Control Module with Manual Dual Zone (RPO CJ3). 2.4. Select Latest New Calibrations to Enable OAT for use with up level instrument panel (RPO UH8). 3. Using the MDI or Tech 2(R), clear all DTCs if required. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information Submit a Product Claim with the information shown above. Refer to the General Motors WINS Claims Processing Manual for details on Product Recall Claim Submission. Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 244 Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through August 31, 2009. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is inventory, or is in your dealership for service through August 31, 2009, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-01-39-008A > Apr > 09 > A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature Control Module HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-01-39-008A Date: April 17, 2009 Subject: HVAC System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature Inside Vehicle (Update HVAC Control Module Software) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2008 Chevrolet Impala with Manual Control HVAC System (RPO C67) or Manual Control HVAC System (RPO CJ3) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update RPO Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-01-39-008 (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment that the temperature selected on the HVAC control head is not being maintained inside the vehicle. Cause This condition may be caused by the temperature doors losing their positions. Correction Important There are two calibrations part numbers that are valid for HVAC. Read the descriptions and RPO Codes to determine the correct calibration for your vehicle. A new calibration has been released that periodically relearns the temperature door positions and prevents the doors from becoming lost. Technicians are to reprogram the HVAC control module with the updated software calibration using SPS. This new service calibration is available on TIS2WEB. It is recommended that the HVAC actuators be recalibrated after the HVAC control module software is updated. Refer to Actuator Recalibration in the HVAC Control Module Programing and Setup section of SI for more information. When completed, the command state for the actuators will change from "None" to "On". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-01-39-008A > Apr > 09 > A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature > Page 250 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 07-01-39-008A > Apr > 09 > A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-01-39-008A Date: April 17, 2009 Subject: HVAC System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature Inside Vehicle (Update HVAC Control Module Software) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2008 Chevrolet Impala with Manual Control HVAC System (RPO C67) or Manual Control HVAC System (RPO CJ3) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update RPO Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-01-39-008 (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment that the temperature selected on the HVAC control head is not being maintained inside the vehicle. Cause This condition may be caused by the temperature doors losing their positions. Correction Important There are two calibrations part numbers that are valid for HVAC. Read the descriptions and RPO Codes to determine the correct calibration for your vehicle. A new calibration has been released that periodically relearns the temperature door positions and prevents the doors from becoming lost. Technicians are to reprogram the HVAC control module with the updated software calibration using SPS. This new service calibration is available on TIS2WEB. It is recommended that the HVAC actuators be recalibrated after the HVAC control module software is updated. Refer to Actuator Recalibration in the HVAC Control Module Programing and Setup section of SI for more information. When completed, the command state for the actuators will change from "None" to "On". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 07-01-39-008A > Apr > 09 > A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature > Page 256 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 08266 Date: 080812 Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming # 08266: Customer Satisfaction - Reduced Heating and Cooling-Reprogram Module - (Aug 12, 2008) Subject: 08266 -- Reduced Heating and Cooling - Reprogram - Module - (Aug 12, 2008) Models: 2008 Chevrolet Impala With Dual Zone Manual Climate Control (RPO CJ3) THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL AUGUST 31, 2009. Condition Certain 2008 model year Chevrolet Impala vehicles equipped with dual zone manual climate control (RPO CJ3) may have software that does not allow the heating and air conditioning system to deliver maximum cold or maximum hot output. If this occurs, the vehicle may not warm or cool as intended. Correction Dealers are to reprogram the HVAC control head module. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2008 model year Chevrolet Impala vehicles equipped with dual zone manual climate control (RPO CJ3) and built within the VIN breakpoints shown above. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided through the applicable system listed below. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. - US dealers - GM DealerWorld Recall Information - Canadian dealers - GMinfoNet Recall Reports The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information No parts are required for the program. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2(R) scan tool and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/30/08 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. Service Programming System (SPS) For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. Review the information below to ensure proper programming protocol. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 261 Important: ^ DO NOT program a control module unless you are directed by a service procedure or you are directed by a General Motors Corporation service bulletin. Programming a control module at any other time will not permanently correct a customer's concern. ^ It is essential that the Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2(R) and the TIS terminal are equipped with the latest software before performing (SPS). ^ Due to the time requirements of programming a controller, it is recommended that an external power source be used to maintain system voltage. Stable battery voltage is critical during programming. Any fluctuation, spiking, over voltage or loss of voltage will interrupt programming. To ensure trouble-free programming, GM recommends using one of the following external power sources: - A Midtronic PCS charger. - A fully charged 12V jumper or booster pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply. - Some modules will require additional programming/setup events performed before or after programming. - Some vehicles may require the use of a CANDi module for programming. - Review the appropriate service information for these procedures. - DTCs may set during programming. Clear DTCs after programming is complete. - Clearing powertrain DTCs will set the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system status indicators to NO. Ensure the following conditions are met before programming a control module: - Flex Fuel (E85) Vehicles - The fuel composition learn function is inactive. Programming with the fuel composition learn active will result in fuel trim DTCs. - If necessary, drive the vehicle until the scan tool indicates that the fuel composition learn is inactive. Vehicle System Voltage - There is not a charging system concern. All charging system concerns must be repaired before programming a control module. - Battery voltage is greater than 12 volts but less than 16 volts. The battery must be fully charged before programming the control module. - Turn OFF or disable any system that may put a load on the vehicles battery, such as the following components: - Twilight sentinel - Interior lights - Daytime running lights (DRL) - Applying the parking brake, on most vehicles, disables the DRL system - Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems - Engine cooling fans, radio, etc. The ignition switch must be in the proper position. SPS prompts you to turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. DO NOT change the position of the ignition switch during the programming procedure, unless instructed to do so Make certain all tool connections are secure, including the following components and circuits: - The RS-232 communication cable port. - The connection at the data link connector (DLC) - The voltage supply circuits DO NOT disturb the tool harnesses while programming. If an interruption occurs during the programming procedure, programming failure or control module damage may occur. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 262 DO NOT turn OFF the ignition if the programming procedure is interrupted or unsuccessful. Ensure that all control module and DLC connections are secure and the TIS terminal operating software is up to date. Attempt to reprogram the control module. If the control module cannot be programmed, replace the control module. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use approved Midtronics PCS charger, a fully charged 12V jumper, or booster pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the HVAC control module. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 2.1 Connect the MDI or Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Important: Select J2534 MDI or Tech 2(R) Legacy Pass-Thru and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. The J2534 MDI will reprogram the module in less time than the Tech 2(R) scan tool. 2.2. Select HVAC Control Module from the Supported Controllers screen. 2.3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Select HVAC Control Module with Manual Dual Zone (RPO CJ3). 2.4. Select Latest New Calibrations to Enable OAT for use with up level instrument panel (RPO UH8). 3. Using the MDI or Tech 2(R), clear all DTCs if required. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information Submit a Product Claim with the information shown above. Refer to the General Motors WINS Claims Processing Manual for details on Product Recall Claim Submission. Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 263 Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through August 31, 2009. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is inventory, or is in your dealership for service through August 31, 2009, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 07-01-39-008A > Apr > 09 > A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature Control Module HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-01-39-008A Date: April 17, 2009 Subject: HVAC System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature Inside Vehicle (Update HVAC Control Module Software) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2008 Chevrolet Impala with Manual Control HVAC System (RPO C67) or Manual Control HVAC System (RPO CJ3) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update RPO Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-01-39-008 (Section 01 - HVAC). Condition Some customers may comment that the temperature selected on the HVAC control head is not being maintained inside the vehicle. Cause This condition may be caused by the temperature doors losing their positions. Correction Important There are two calibrations part numbers that are valid for HVAC. Read the descriptions and RPO Codes to determine the correct calibration for your vehicle. A new calibration has been released that periodically relearns the temperature door positions and prevents the doors from becoming lost. Technicians are to reprogram the HVAC control module with the updated software calibration using SPS. This new service calibration is available on TIS2WEB. It is recommended that the HVAC actuators be recalibrated after the HVAC control module software is updated. Refer to Actuator Recalibration in the HVAC Control Module Programing and Setup section of SI for more information. When completed, the command state for the actuators will change from "None" to "On". Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 07-01-39-008A > Apr > 09 > A/C - System Unable to Maintain Desired Temperature > Page 269 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming Technical Service Bulletin # 08266 Date: 080812 Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming # 08266: Customer Satisfaction - Reduced Heating and Cooling-Reprogram Module - (Aug 12, 2008) Subject: 08266 -- Reduced Heating and Cooling - Reprogram - Module - (Aug 12, 2008) Models: 2008 Chevrolet Impala With Dual Zone Manual Climate Control (RPO CJ3) THIS PROGRAM IS IN EFFECT UNTIL AUGUST 31, 2009. Condition Certain 2008 model year Chevrolet Impala vehicles equipped with dual zone manual climate control (RPO CJ3) may have software that does not allow the heating and air conditioning system to deliver maximum cold or maximum hot output. If this occurs, the vehicle may not warm or cool as intended. Correction Dealers are to reprogram the HVAC control head module. Vehicles Involved Involved are certain 2008 model year Chevrolet Impala vehicles equipped with dual zone manual climate control (RPO CJ3) and built within the VIN breakpoints shown above. Important: Dealers are to confirm vehicle eligibility prior to beginning repairs by using the GM Vehicle Inquiry System (GMVIS). Not all vehicles within the above breakpoints may be involved. For dealers with involved vehicles, a listing with involved vehicles containing the complete vehicle identification number, customer name, and address information has been prepared and will be provided through the applicable system listed below. Dealers will not have a report available if they have no involved vehicles currently assigned. - US dealers - GM DealerWorld Recall Information - Canadian dealers - GMinfoNet Recall Reports The listing may contain customer names and addresses obtained from Motor Vehicle Registration Records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than follow-up necessary to complete this program is a violation of law in several states/provinces/countries. Accordingly, you are urged to limit the use of this report to the follow-up necessary to complete this program. Parts Information No parts are required for the program. Service Procedure Do not attempt to order the calibration number from GMSPO. The calibration numbers required for this service procedure are programmed into control modules via a Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2(R) scan tool and TIS2WEB with the calibration update. Use TIS2WEB on or after 07/30/08 to obtain the calibration. If you cannot access the calibration, call the Techline Customer Support Center and it will be provided. Service Programming System (SPS) For step-by-step programming instructions, please refer to SI and the Techline Information System (TIS) terminal. Review the information below to ensure proper programming protocol. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 275 Important: ^ DO NOT program a control module unless you are directed by a service procedure or you are directed by a General Motors Corporation service bulletin. Programming a control module at any other time will not permanently correct a customer's concern. ^ It is essential that the Multiple Diagnostic Interface (MDI) or Tech 2(R) and the TIS terminal are equipped with the latest software before performing (SPS). ^ Due to the time requirements of programming a controller, it is recommended that an external power source be used to maintain system voltage. Stable battery voltage is critical during programming. Any fluctuation, spiking, over voltage or loss of voltage will interrupt programming. To ensure trouble-free programming, GM recommends using one of the following external power sources: - A Midtronic PCS charger. - A fully charged 12V jumper or booster pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply. - Some modules will require additional programming/setup events performed before or after programming. - Some vehicles may require the use of a CANDi module for programming. - Review the appropriate service information for these procedures. - DTCs may set during programming. Clear DTCs after programming is complete. - Clearing powertrain DTCs will set the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system status indicators to NO. Ensure the following conditions are met before programming a control module: - Flex Fuel (E85) Vehicles - The fuel composition learn function is inactive. Programming with the fuel composition learn active will result in fuel trim DTCs. - If necessary, drive the vehicle until the scan tool indicates that the fuel composition learn is inactive. Vehicle System Voltage - There is not a charging system concern. All charging system concerns must be repaired before programming a control module. - Battery voltage is greater than 12 volts but less than 16 volts. The battery must be fully charged before programming the control module. - Turn OFF or disable any system that may put a load on the vehicles battery, such as the following components: - Twilight sentinel - Interior lights - Daytime running lights (DRL) - Applying the parking brake, on most vehicles, disables the DRL system - Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems - Engine cooling fans, radio, etc. The ignition switch must be in the proper position. SPS prompts you to turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. DO NOT change the position of the ignition switch during the programming procedure, unless instructed to do so Make certain all tool connections are secure, including the following components and circuits: - The RS-232 communication cable port. - The connection at the data link connector (DLC) - The voltage supply circuits DO NOT disturb the tool harnesses while programming. If an interruption occurs during the programming procedure, programming failure or control module damage may occur. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 276 DO NOT turn OFF the ignition if the programming procedure is interrupted or unsuccessful. Ensure that all control module and DLC connections are secure and the TIS terminal operating software is up to date. Attempt to reprogram the control module. If the control module cannot be programmed, replace the control module. 1. Verify that there is a battery charge of 12 to 16 volts. The battery must be able to maintain a charge during programming. Only use approved Midtronics PCS charger, a fully charged 12V jumper, or booster pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply to maintain proper battery voltage during programming. 2. Reprogram the HVAC control module. Refer to SI and Service Programming System (SPS) documentation for programming instructions, if required. 2.1 Connect the MDI or Tech2(R) to the vehicle. Important: Select J2534 MDI or Tech 2(R) Legacy Pass-Thru and Reprogram ECU from the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process screen. The J2534 MDI will reprogram the module in less time than the Tech 2(R) scan tool. 2.2. Select HVAC Control Module from the Supported Controllers screen. 2.3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Select HVAC Control Module with Manual Dual Zone (RPO CJ3). 2.4. Select Latest New Calibrations to Enable OAT for use with up level instrument panel (RPO UH8). 3. Using the MDI or Tech 2(R), clear all DTCs if required. Courtesy Transportation The General Motors Courtesy Transportation program is intended to minimize customer inconvenience when a vehicle requires a repair that is covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranties. The availability of courtesy transportation to customers whose vehicles are within the warranty coverage period and involved in a product program is very important in maintaining customer satisfaction. Dealers are to ensure that these customers understand that shuttle service or some other form of courtesy transportation is available and will be provided at no charge. Dealers should refer to the General Motors Service Policies and Procedures Manual for Courtesy Transportation guidelines. Claim Information Submit a Product Claim with the information shown above. Refer to the General Motors WINS Claims Processing Manual for details on Product Recall Claim Submission. Customer Notification General Motors will notify customers of this program on their vehicle (see copy of customer letter shown in this bulletin). Dealer Program Responsibility All unsold new vehicles in dealers' possession and subject to this program must be held and inspected/repaired per the service procedure of this program bulletin before customers take possession of these vehicles. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Control Module HVAC: > 08266 > Aug > 08 > Campaign - A/C Control Module Reprogramming > Page 277 Dealers are to service all vehicles subject to this program at no charge to customers, regardless of mileage, age of vehicle, or ownership, through August 31, 2009. Customers who have recently purchased vehicles sold from your vehicle inventory, and for which there is no customer information indicated on the dealer listing, are to be contacted by the dealer. Arrangements are to be made to make the required correction according to the instructions contained in this bulletin. A copy of the customer letter is provided in this bulletin for your use in contacting customers. Program follow-up cards should not be used for this purpose, since the customer may not as yet have received the notification letter. In summary, whenever a vehicle subject to this program enters your vehicle inventory, or is inventory, or is in your dealership for service through August 31, 2009, you must take the steps necessary to be sure the program correction has been made before selling or releasing the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 278 Control Module HVAC: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Interior HVAC Components 1 - HVAC Module 2 - Mode Actuator 3 - Air Temperature Actuator (C67), Air Temperature Actuator - Right (CJ3) 4 - Recirculation Actuator 5 - Blower Motor 6 - Blower Motor Control Module 7 - Air Temperature Actuator - Left (CJ3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 279 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Blower Motor Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 280 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Blower Motor Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 07-09-41-008B > Feb > 08 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1019 Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1019 Bulletin No.: 07-09-41-008B Date: February 07, 2008 TECHNICAL Subject: Air Bag Readiness Light On, DTC B1019 Set in Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) (Reprogram Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)) Models: 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne Built Prior to January 8, 2008 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Built Prior to November 19, 2007 (VIN Breakpoint 89276078) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 Buick Lucerne and to provide production implementation dates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-41-008A (Section 09 Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on the air bag readiness light being illuminated. A scan tool may reveal DTC B1019 with a symptom code of 3A set as history in the SDM. If the code is set as current, use the appropriate SI instructions for this DTC to troubleshoot this concern. Cause The instrument panel cluster (IPC) has failed to detect the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator due to a software timing concern and has transmitted this information to the SDM. The IPC can fail to detect this ON/OFF indicator if there is an unbuckled passenger and the vehicle is running because the IPC is checking the status of the indicator at the incorrect timing interval. This DTC can also set more frequently in low voltage operation. Correction A revised IPC calibration has been developed to address this issue. Reprogram the IPC with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 07-09-41-008B > Feb > 08 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1019 > Page 290 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 07-09-41-008B > Feb > 08 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1019 Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1019 Bulletin No.: 07-09-41-008B Date: February 07, 2008 TECHNICAL Subject: Air Bag Readiness Light On, DTC B1019 Set in Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) (Reprogram Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)) Models: 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne Built Prior to January 8, 2008 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Built Prior to November 19, 2007 (VIN Breakpoint 89276078) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 Buick Lucerne and to provide production implementation dates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-09-41-008A (Section 09 Restraints). Condition Some customers may comment on the air bag readiness light being illuminated. A scan tool may reveal DTC B1019 with a symptom code of 3A set as history in the SDM. If the code is set as current, use the appropriate SI instructions for this DTC to troubleshoot this concern. Cause The instrument panel cluster (IPC) has failed to detect the passenger airbag ON/OFF indicator due to a software timing concern and has transmitted this information to the SDM. The IPC can fail to detect this ON/OFF indicator if there is an unbuckled passenger and the vehicle is running because the IPC is checking the status of the indicator at the incorrect timing interval. This DTC can also set more frequently in low voltage operation. Correction A revised IPC calibration has been developed to address this issue. Reprogram the IPC with updated calibration files using the TIS2WEB Service Programming System (SPS) application. As always make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 07-09-41-008B > Feb > 08 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC B1019 > Page 296 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Locations DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) RELAY The Daytime Running Lamps PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations FOG LAMPS RELAY The Fog Lamps PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > High Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations High Beam Relay: Locations HIGH BEAM RELAY The High Beam PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations HORN RELAY The Horn PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Low Beam Relay > Component Information > Locations Low Beam Relay: Locations LOW BEAM RELAY The Low Beam PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations PARK LAMPS RELAY The Park Lamps PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Important: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 324 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Tools Required J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Important: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Notice: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 3. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 325 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 332 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 333 Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-47-004C Date: December 04, 2009 Subject: Information on Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2007-2010 Buick Enclave 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express, Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2010 Saturn VUE 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models, model years and information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-47-004B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealers of an issue that could cause internal module damage to the Body Control Module (BCM). The BCM may be damaged when the module is supplied with battery power and the ground path is removed. You must remove the negative battery cable first before removing a BCM ground. Issue 1 Below is a list of vehicles and the components that the BCM ground path passes through. The negative battery cable must be removed when removing the components noted below. - 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 (Instrument panel electrical center) - 2008-2010 Saturn VUE (I/P splice pack) Issue 2 It is important to note when removing a ring terminal ground, splice pack connector, or inline harness connector for all the vehicles listed in the model section above, that it doesn't include a BCM ground path. You must remove the negative battery cable if you determine that it is a BCM ground path. As an example: If the BCM grounds become disconnected, internal damage to the BCM will occur. Other systems controlled by the BCM will also be affected, such as an inoperative or intermittent condition in one or more of the following systems: - Interior lighting will remain on or will not work - Exterior lighting will remain on or will not work - Remote keyless entry - Door locks - Power windows and mirrors - Remote vehicle start - Remote trunk release Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 334 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 335 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Near the Steering Column 1 - Instrument Panel Carrier 2 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 3 - Steering Column 4 Body Control Module (BCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 336 Body Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Body Control Module (BCM) X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 337 Body Control Module (BCM) X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 338 Body Control Module (BCM) X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 339 Body Control Module (BCM) X4 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 340 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 341 Body Control Module (BCM) X5 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 342 Body Control Module (BCM) X6 Body Control Module (BCM) X7 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 343 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 344 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 349 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 350 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 351 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 352 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 353 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 354 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026B Date: April 07, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and information about retrieving calibrations on a Global A vehicle. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine, transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 355 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 356 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 357 Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views > Page 360 Engine Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 363 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 364 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 365 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 366 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 367 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 368 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 369 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 370 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 371 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 372 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 373 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 374 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 375 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 376 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 377 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 378 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 379 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 380 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 381 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 382 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 383 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 384 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 385 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 386 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 387 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 388 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 389 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 390 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 391 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 392 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 393 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 394 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 395 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 396 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 397 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 398 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 399 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 400 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 401 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 402 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 403 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 404 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 405 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 406 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 407 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 408 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 409 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 410 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 411 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 412 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 413 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 414 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 415 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 416 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 417 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 418 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 419 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 420 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 421 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 422 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 423 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 424 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 425 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 426 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 427 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 428 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 429 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 430 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 431 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 432 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 433 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 434 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 435 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 436 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 437 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 438 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 439 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 440 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 441 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 442 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 443 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 444 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 445 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 446 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 447 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 448 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 449 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 450 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 451 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 452 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 453 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 454 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 455 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 456 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 457 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 458 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 459 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 460 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 461 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 462 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 463 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 464 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 465 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 466 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 467 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 468 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 469 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 470 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 471 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 472 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 473 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 474 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 475 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 476 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 477 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 478 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 479 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 480 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 481 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 482 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 483 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 484 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 485 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 486 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 487 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 488 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 489 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 490 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Engine Control Module (ECM) X1 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 491 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 492 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 1 To 33) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 493 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 34 To 73) Engine Control Module (ECM) X3 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 494 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 495 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Powertrain Control Module and Electrostatic Discharge Notice Notice: Do not touch the connector pins or soldered components on the circuit board in order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the PCM. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 496 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The engine control module (ECM) is the control center of this system. The ECM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The ECM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the ECM. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: * The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. * The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. * The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. * The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. * When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. * When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 497 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Service of the engine control module (ECM) should normally consist of either replacement of the ECM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for ECM replacement, inspect the ECM first to see if the replacement is the correct part. If the ECM is faulty, remove the ECM and install the new service ECM. The new service ECM will not be programmed. You must program the new ECM. DTC P0602 indicates the EEPROM is not programmed or has malfunctioned. Notice: In order to prevent any possible electrostatic discharge damage to the ECM, do not touch the connector pins or the soldered components on the circuit board. Notice: Always turn the ignition off when installing or removing the ECM connectors in order to prevent damage to the components. Removal Procedure Important: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100 percent. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil. Record the remaining engine oil life, if required. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the left front inner fender brace. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. Disconnect the ECM electrical connectors (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 498 6. Remove the ECM from the air cleaner lower housing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the ECM to the air cleaner lower housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 499 2. Connect the ECM electrical connectors (2). 3. Install the air cleaner assembly. 4. Install the left front inner fender brace. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. 6. Program the new ECM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 503 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 504 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Air Injection Pump Relay: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Pump Relay (NU3) Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Solenoid Relay (NU3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 509 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 516 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 517 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 518 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 519 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 520 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 521 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 522 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 523 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 524 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 525 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 526 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 527 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 528 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 529 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 530 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 531 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 532 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 533 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 534 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 535 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 536 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 537 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 538 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 539 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 540 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 541 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 542 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 543 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 544 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 545 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 546 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 547 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 548 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 549 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 550 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 551 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 552 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 553 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 554 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 555 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 556 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 557 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 558 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 559 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 560 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 561 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 562 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 563 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 564 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 565 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 566 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 567 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 568 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 569 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 570 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 571 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 572 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 573 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 574 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 575 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 576 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 577 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 578 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 579 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 580 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 581 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 582 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 583 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 584 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 585 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 586 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 587 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 588 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 589 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 590 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 591 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 592 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 593 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 594 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 595 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 596 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 597 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 598 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 599 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 600 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 601 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 602 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 603 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 604 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 605 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 606 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 607 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 608 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 609 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 610 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 611 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 612 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 613 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 614 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 615 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 616 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 617 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 618 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 619 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 620 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 621 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 622 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 623 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 624 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 625 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 626 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 627 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 628 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 629 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 630 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 631 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 632 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 633 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 634 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 635 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 636 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 637 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 638 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 639 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 640 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 641 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 642 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 646 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 647 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 08-09-41-002F > Jun > 10 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set Air Bag Control Module: Customer Interest Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-002F Date: June 10, 2010 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System, Intermittent AIR BAG Indicator/Lamp Illuminated with DTC(s) B0012, B0013, B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, B0023, B0026, B0033, B0040, B0042 or B0044 Set (Inspect and Replace Connector Position Assurance (CPA) Retainer) Models: 2005-2007 Buick Rainier 2006-2009 Buick Allure (Canada only), LaCrosse, Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade Models 2008-2009 Cadillac SRX, XLR 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS, STS 2005-2006 Chevrolet SSR 2005-2009 Chevrolet TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Corvette, HHR, Impala, Malibu Models (includes Malibu Classic) 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2005-2009 GMC Envoy Models 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit 2005-2009 Pontiac G6 2006-2009 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2009 Pontiac G5, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2009 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY 2008-2009 Saturn VUE 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X 2007-2009 Opel GT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information and add Saab Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-002E (Section 09 Restraints). Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent or current AIR BAG indicator or lamp being illuminated on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). Important This bulletin only applies to the following DTCs: - Technicians may observe DTC(s) B0012 04, 0D, 0E; B0013 04, 0D, 0E; B0015 04, 0D, 0E; B0016 04, 0D, 0E; B0019 04, 0D, 0E; B0020 04, 0D, 0E; B0022, B0023 04, 0D, 0E; B0033 04, 0D, 0E; B0040 04, 0D, 0E; B0042 or B0044 set as Current or in History in the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Cause This condition may be caused by a loose, missing, or damaged connector position assurance (CPA) retainer at a supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) module electrical connector, or a deployment loop wiring harness electrical connector. Correction Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 08-09-41-002F > Jun > 10 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set > Page 657 Caution When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check-Vehicle. 2. Identify the DTC that is set AND review the DTC Descriptor in the corresponding diagnostic procedure. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List-Vehicle in SI. 3. Using the information from the DTC Descriptor, determine the location of the affected electrical connector. Refer to SIR Identification Views and the Master Electrical Component List in SI. 4. Turn OFF the ignition and disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 5. BEFORE removing, INSPECT the CPA retainer at the electrical connector. Note The connector and connector position assurance (CPA) may seat independent of each other. Both the connector and CPA should seat with an audible and/or tactile click. The CPA isolates the shorting-bars within the connector allowing the deployment circuit to operate properly. ‹› If the CPA retainer is loose, damaged, or will not seat in the connector, replace it with a new one. Reinstall the CPA correctly by first pushing the connector body in completely, and then pushing the CPA retainer in completely. ‹› If the CPA retainer is not loose or damaged and is properly seated, proceed to Step 6. 6. Remove the CPA retainer and disconnect the electrical connector. Inspect the terminals for the following conditions: - Corrosion - Contamination - Terminal tension - Damage Important The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. DO NOT substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. ‹› If the terminals are damaged, corrosion is observed, or have poor tension, repair or replace as necessary. Apply dielectric grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) on the connector pins and terminals when reassembling. Refer to SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs in SI. Note The connector and connector position assurance (CPA) may seat independent of each other. Both the connector and CPA should seat with an audible and/or tactile click. The CPA isolates the shorting-bars within the connector allowing the deployment circuit to operate properly. 7. Connect the electrical connector, and install the CPA retainer. 8. Enable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 9. Clear the DTC with a scan tool. 10. Verify that the DTC does not reset by performing the Diagnostic Repair Verification in SI. ‹› If any DTC resets, then refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Parts Information Note If the CPA retainer P/N 54590003 (Orange CPA) cannot be located in the J-38125 SIR/SRS terminal repair kit, contact Kent Moore Tools and order P/N 54590003-PKG to obtain a package of 5. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Bag Control Module: > 08-09-41-002F > Jun > 10 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set > Page 658 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Select the appropriate Labor Operation for the repair that is performed. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 08-09-41-002F > Jun > 10 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set Air Bag Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-09-41-002F Date: June 10, 2010 Subject: Diagnostic Information for Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System, Intermittent AIR BAG Indicator/Lamp Illuminated with DTC(s) B0012, B0013, B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, B0023, B0026, B0033, B0040, B0042 or B0044 Set (Inspect and Replace Connector Position Assurance (CPA) Retainer) Models: 2005-2007 Buick Rainier 2006-2009 Buick Allure (Canada only), LaCrosse, Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade Models 2008-2009 Cadillac SRX, XLR 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS, STS 2005-2006 Chevrolet SSR 2005-2009 Chevrolet TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2005-2010 Chevrolet Cobalt 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Corvette, HHR, Impala, Malibu Models (includes Malibu Classic) 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2005-2009 GMC Envoy Models 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2005-2006 Pontiac Pursuit 2005-2009 Pontiac G6 2006-2009 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2009 Pontiac G5, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2007-2009 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY 2008-2009 Saturn VUE 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2008 Daewoo G2X 2007-2009 Opel GT Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information and add Saab Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-09-41-002E (Section 09 Restraints). Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent or current AIR BAG indicator or lamp being illuminated on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). Important This bulletin only applies to the following DTCs: - Technicians may observe DTC(s) B0012 04, 0D, 0E; B0013 04, 0D, 0E; B0015 04, 0D, 0E; B0016 04, 0D, 0E; B0019 04, 0D, 0E; B0020 04, 0D, 0E; B0022, B0023 04, 0D, 0E; B0033 04, 0D, 0E; B0040 04, 0D, 0E; B0042 or B0044 set as Current or in History in the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Cause This condition may be caused by a loose, missing, or damaged connector position assurance (CPA) retainer at a supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) module electrical connector, or a deployment loop wiring harness electrical connector. Correction Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 08-09-41-002F > Jun > 10 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set > Page 664 Caution When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check-Vehicle. 2. Identify the DTC that is set AND review the DTC Descriptor in the corresponding diagnostic procedure. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List-Vehicle in SI. 3. Using the information from the DTC Descriptor, determine the location of the affected electrical connector. Refer to SIR Identification Views and the Master Electrical Component List in SI. 4. Turn OFF the ignition and disable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 5. BEFORE removing, INSPECT the CPA retainer at the electrical connector. Note The connector and connector position assurance (CPA) may seat independent of each other. Both the connector and CPA should seat with an audible and/or tactile click. The CPA isolates the shorting-bars within the connector allowing the deployment circuit to operate properly. ‹› If the CPA retainer is loose, damaged, or will not seat in the connector, replace it with a new one. Reinstall the CPA correctly by first pushing the connector body in completely, and then pushing the CPA retainer in completely. ‹› If the CPA retainer is not loose or damaged and is properly seated, proceed to Step 6. 6. Remove the CPA retainer and disconnect the electrical connector. Inspect the terminals for the following conditions: - Corrosion - Contamination - Terminal tension - Damage Important The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. DO NOT substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. ‹› If the terminals are damaged, corrosion is observed, or have poor tension, repair or replace as necessary. Apply dielectric grease, GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) on the connector pins and terminals when reassembling. Refer to SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs in SI. Note The connector and connector position assurance (CPA) may seat independent of each other. Both the connector and CPA should seat with an audible and/or tactile click. The CPA isolates the shorting-bars within the connector allowing the deployment circuit to operate properly. 7. Connect the electrical connector, and install the CPA retainer. 8. Enable the supplemental inflatable restraint (SIR) system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling in SI. 9. Clear the DTC with a scan tool. 10. Verify that the DTC does not reset by performing the Diagnostic Repair Verification in SI. ‹› If any DTC resets, then refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Parts Information Note If the CPA retainer P/N 54590003 (Orange CPA) cannot be located in the J-38125 SIR/SRS terminal repair kit, contact Kent Moore Tools and order P/N 54590003-PKG to obtain a package of 5. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > 08-09-41-002F > Jun > 10 > Restraints - Air Bag Lamp ON/Multiple DTC Set > Page 665 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important Select the appropriate Labor Operation for the repair that is performed. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 666 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Under the Passenger Seat 1 - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) 2 - Front Passenger Floor Panel Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 667 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 668 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 669 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 690 Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 691 Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Transmission Control Module (TCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 692 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 693 Control Module: Service and Repair Transmission Control Module Replacement Transmission Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations Rear Defogger Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Relay > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Relay: Locations WINDSHIELD WASHER RELAY The Windshield Washer PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Wiper High Relay Wiper Relay: Locations Wiper High Relay WIPER HIGH RELAY The Wiper High PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Wiper High Relay > Page 706 Wiper Relay: Locations Wiper Relay WIPER RELAY The Wiper PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Under the Hood Latch Trim Panel 1 - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor 2 - Hood Ajar Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 712 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Hood Ajar Switch (AP3, AP8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 716 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Pedal Positioning Sensor: Procedures Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria The brake pedal position sensor (BPPS) receives a low reference signal and a 10-volt reference signal from the body control module (BCM). Whenever the brake pedal is applied, the brake pedal position sensor applies a variable voltage signal to the BCM through the stop lamp switch signal circuit. Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or BCM have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set brake pedal position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via the class 2 communication bus. Calibration Procedure Important: If the master brake cylinder has been replaced, verify that the correct pushrod is installed before attempting to calibrate the brake pedal position sensor. 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 2. Install a scan tool, select the proper vehicle and options. 3. Navigate to the BCM menu. 4. Select Module Setup menu item. 5. Select the BPPS sensor calibration procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 719 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Removal and Replacement Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation Remote Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Inadvertent Steering Wheel Button Activation INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-028 Date: August 28, 2008 Subject: Information On Inadvertent Steering Wheel Control (SWC) Button Press Causing Radio Anomalies Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X All Vehicles with Steering Wheel Controls This bulletin is being issued to provide a recommendation for vehicles with a customer concern of the radio station tuning changing by itself, volume changing by itself, radio changing by itself, or radio muting or going silent when driving and turning the steering wheel. The switches on the right hand side of the steering wheel are easily pressed and may inadvertently be pressed when turning the steering wheel. These concerns may be affected by the location of the steering wheel controls. Recommendation Do Not Replace The Radio 1. Please determine that the switch controls on the steering wheel are functioning correctly. 2. Ask the customer if their hand was in close proximity to the steering wheel controls when the condition happened. Explain to the customer that bumping the controls would have caused this undesired action. Explain to the customer the proper use and function of the steering wheel controls. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Mounted Controls Assembly: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Control Switch Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Under the Hood Latch Trim Panel 1 - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor 2 - Hood Ajar Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 732 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Hood Ajar Switch (AP3, AP8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 736 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Pedal Position Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Pedal Positioning Sensor: Procedures Brake Pedal Position Sensor Calibration Calibration Criteria The brake pedal position sensor (BPPS) receives a low reference signal and a 10-volt reference signal from the body control module (BCM). Whenever the brake pedal is applied, the brake pedal position sensor applies a variable voltage signal to the BCM through the stop lamp switch signal circuit. Brake pedal position sensor calibration must be performed after the brake pedal position sensor or BCM have been serviced. The calibration procedure will set brake pedal position sensor home value. This value is used by the BCM to determine the action of the driver applying the brake system and to provide this information to the vehicle subsystems via the class 2 communication bus. Calibration Procedure Important: If the master brake cylinder has been replaced, verify that the correct pushrod is installed before attempting to calibrate the brake pedal position sensor. 1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 2. Install a scan tool, select the proper vehicle and options. 3. Navigate to the BCM menu. 4. Select Module Setup menu item. 5. Select the BPPS sensor calibration procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 739 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Removal and Replacement Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door 1 - Door Frame 2 - Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - Door Lock Switch - Driver 4 - Window Switch - Driver 5 - Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - Window Motor - Driver 7 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Left (AY1) 8 - Door Lock - Driver Passenger Door Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 743 1 - Door Lock Switch - Passenger 2 - Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 3 - Door Frame 4 Door Lock - Passenger 5 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Right (AY1) 6 - Window Switch - Passenger 7 - Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 744 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Door Lock Switch - Driver Door Lock Switch - Passenger Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 745 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 746 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Door Lock Switch Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door 1 - Door Frame 2 - Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - Door Lock Switch - Driver 4 - Window Switch - Driver 5 - Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - Window Motor - Driver 7 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Left (AY1) 8 - Door Lock - Driver Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 750 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Outside Rearview Mirror Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 751 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Power Mirror Switch Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Driver Seat Components 1 - Seat Recline Motor - Driver (AH5) 2 - Heated Seat Element - Driver - Back (KA1) 3 - Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver 4 - Heated Seat Control Module (KA1) 5 - Horizontal Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Driver) 6 - Front Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Driver) 7 - Rear Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Driver) 8 Heated Seat Element - Driver - Seat (KA1) Passenger Seat Components Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 755 1 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Back (KA1) 2 - Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 3 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger 4 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger, Connector 5 - Rear Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 6 - Front Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 7 - Horizontal Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 8 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Sensor 10 - Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger (AG2) 11 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Seat (KA1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 756 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AG1) Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver (AH5) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 757 Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger (AG2) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat and Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch Knob Replacement (Impala) Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Driver Seat and Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch Knob Replacement (Impala) Driver Seat and Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch Knob Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat and Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch Knob Replacement (Impala) > Page 760 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch Replacement (Impala) Power Seat Switch Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel 1 - Headlamp Switch 2 - Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil 4 - Driver Information Center (DIC) Switch 5 - Ambient Light Sensor 6 - Inflatable Restraint Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator (without 9C1/9C3) 7 - Radio 8 - Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module 9 - Instrument Panel Trim Panel 10 - Heated Seat Switch - Passenger (KA1) 11 - HVAC Control Module 12 - Heated Seat Switch - Driver (KA1) 13 - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Headliner Components 1 - Headliner 2 - Dome/Reading Lamps 3 - Garage Door Opener (UG1) 4 - Sunroof Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 767 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Sunroof Switch (CF5) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 768 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Yaw Sensor with Vehicle Lateral Accelerometer Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Remove the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer mounting nuts (2). 4. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 5. Remove the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 773 1. Install the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer nuts (2). Tighten the nuts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Connect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 4. Install the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install a scan tool. 6. Using the special functions menu on the scan tool, reset the yaw rate sensor. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 778 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Rear of Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 779 1 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 2 - Brake Booster 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 780 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG, LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 781 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the booster. 3. Remove the brake booster vacuum sensor grommet (2) from the booster. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 782 1. Install the brake booster vacuum sensor grommet (2) to the booster. 2. Install the brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the booster. 3. Connect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 787 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Rear of Engine Compartment 1 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 2 - Brake Booster 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch Right Front of the Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 788 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 789 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 790 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from brake fluid level sensor. 2. Remove the brake fluid level sensor. Using needle nose pliers, carefully depress the retaining tabs on the end of the brake fluid level sensor (1) and press the sensor through the reservoir to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Place the brake fluid level sensor (1) into the reservoir, press into place to secure the sensor retaining tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the brake fluid level sensor (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Release Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 794 Parking Brake Release Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left side instrument panel insulator. 2. Remove the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the mounting screw. 5. Remove the parking brake indicator switch (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the parking brake indicator switch (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the mounting screw. Tighten the mounting screw to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. Check the operation of the switch. 4. Install the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install the left side instrument panel insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Electronic Traction Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-05-25-004A Date: October 27, 2008 Subject: Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) Light On, DTCs C0035-C0052 Set (Perform Diagnostic Component Test Procedure and Repair as Necessary) Models: 2007 Buick Terraza 2007-2009 Buick Allure, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2007-2008 Cadillac XLR 2007-2009 Cadillac DTS, SRX, and STS 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Uplander 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2007-2009 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007 Saturn Relay Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-05-25-004 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment that the Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) (if equipped) warning lights are illuminated. Upon investigation, one or more of the following DTCs may be in history or current. Correction Begin diagnostics with the component test procedure listed below. If the cause is not found, proceed to the Circuit/System Testing on the applicable Diagnostic Information and Procedures document for the vehicle you are working on. SI Diagnostic Information and Procedures are being revised to reflect this change in strategy. 1. With the ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 2. Test for 850-1350 ohms between the signal terminal A and the low reference signal terminal B. During the test, check for an intermittent circuit condition by gently moving the wheel speed sensor pigtail harness. If not within the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set > Page 809 3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle. Reverse the test leads, test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle again. If less than the specified value, replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 4. Spin the wheel while monitoring the voltage between the signal terminal A and the low reference terminal B. The voltage should be greater than 100 mV AC. If less than the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the applicable bearing and hub assembly published labor code. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-05-25-004A Date: October 27, 2008 Subject: Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) Light On, DTCs C0035-C0052 Set (Perform Diagnostic Component Test Procedure and Repair as Necessary) Models: 2007 Buick Terraza 2007-2009 Buick Allure, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2007-2008 Cadillac XLR 2007-2009 Cadillac DTS, SRX, and STS 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Uplander 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2007-2009 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007 Saturn Relay Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-05-25-004 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment that the Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) (if equipped) warning lights are illuminated. Upon investigation, one or more of the following DTCs may be in history or current. Correction Begin diagnostics with the component test procedure listed below. If the cause is not found, proceed to the Circuit/System Testing on the applicable Diagnostic Information and Procedures document for the vehicle you are working on. SI Diagnostic Information and Procedures are being revised to reflect this change in strategy. 1. With the ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 2. Test for 850-1350 ohms between the signal terminal A and the low reference signal terminal B. During the test, check for an intermittent circuit condition by gently moving the wheel speed sensor pigtail harness. If not within the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set > Page 815 3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle. Reverse the test leads, test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle again. If less than the specified value, replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 4. Spin the wheel while monitoring the voltage between the signal terminal A and the low reference terminal B. The voltage should be greater than 100 mV AC. If less than the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the applicable bearing and hub assembly published labor code. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-64-033C Date: April 29, 2008 Subject: Rubbing/Squealing/Grinding Noise When Door Glass Is Raised Or Lowered, Scratches in Door Glass (Replace Door Glass Belt Sealing Strip) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Built Prior to November 2007 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add the build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-64-033B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rubbing, squealing or grinding noise when opening or closing the left or right front or rear door glass. They may also comment of scratches in the door glass. Cause This condition may be cause by dirt accumulating on the lip of the belt sealing strip. Correction Replace the door glass outer belt sealing strip with a newly designed outer belt sealing strip . Refer to Front Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement or Rear Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement in SI. Clean the glass with glass cleaner and if scuffs or scratches are found it may be necessary to replace the glass as well. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicle repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated > Page 821 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated > Page 827 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 828 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Similar) 1 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Rear (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Rear Similar) Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Similar) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 829 1 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Connector - Right Front (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Connector Left Front Similar) 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Front (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Left Front Similar) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 830 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Front Reverse Lockout Solenoid Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 831 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Front Reverse Lockout Solenoid Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 832 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Yaw Rate Sensor: Procedures Yaw Rate Reference Table Resetting Circuit Description Optimum vehicle stability enhancement system (VSES) function is dependant on many variables. The characteristics of a specific vehicle, that affect vehicle handling or input signals to the electronic brake control module (EBCM), ultimately determine how the VSES operates. The basic EBCM software must be fine tuned as the vehicle is operated. This logic is referred to as adaptive learning. Adaptive learning is accomplished by maintaining a yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table in the EBCM memory. As the vehicle is operated, the table is populated with data that is later referenced, and sometimes modified, to allow the EBCM to provide the best possible stability control for the specific vehicle. Important: If the data in the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table becomes unreliable, false activations of the VSES, poor VSES performance or false setting of DTC C0186 or C0196 may result. A replacement EBCM may have some unreliable data stored in the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table. For this reason, it is important to perform the yaw rate reference table reset procedure after replacing the EBCM. Replacement of the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer or the installation of different size tires may also the data stored in the table to become unreliable. Therefore, the yaw rate reference table reset procedure must be performed. This procedure is to be used only for vehicles equipped with VSES (JL4). 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer harness connector. 3. Start the engine. 4. Apply firm and steady pressure to the brake pedal for at least 10 seconds. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Reconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer harness connector. 7. Turn ON the ignition and use the scan tool to clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 837 Yaw Rate Sensor: Removal and Replacement Vehicle Yaw Sensor with Vehicle Lateral Accelerometer Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Remove the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer mounting nuts (2). 4. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 5. Remove the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 838 1. Install the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer nuts (2). Tighten the nuts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Connect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 4. Install the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install a scan tool. 6. Using the special functions menu on the scan tool, reset the yaw rate sensor. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 849 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 850 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 851 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 852 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 858 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 859 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 860 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 861 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 862 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 863 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 864 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the ECT sensor. Installation Procedure Notice: Replacement components must be the correct part number for the application. Components requiring the use of the thread locking compound, lubricants, corrosion inhibitors, or sealants are identified in the service procedure. Some replacement components may come with these coatings already applied. Do not use these coatings on components unless specified. These coatings can affect the final torque, which may affect the operation of the component. Use the correct torque specification when installing components in order to avoid damage. Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 865 1. Coat the thread of the ECT sensor with sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 870 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 871 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 872 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 873 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 874 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 875 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 876 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 877 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 878 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 879 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 880 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 881 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 882 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 883 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 884 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 885 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 886 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 887 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 888 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 889 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 890 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 891 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 892 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 893 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 894 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 895 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 896 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 897 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 898 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 899 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 900 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 901 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 902 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 903 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 904 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 905 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 906 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 907 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 908 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 909 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 910 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 911 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 912 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 913 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 914 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 915 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 916 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 917 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 918 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 919 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 920 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 921 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 922 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 923 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 924 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 925 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 926 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 927 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 928 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 929 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 930 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 931 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 932 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 933 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 934 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 935 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 936 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 937 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 938 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 939 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 940 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 941 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 942 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 943 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 944 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 945 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 946 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 947 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 948 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 949 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 950 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 951 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 952 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 953 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 954 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 955 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 956 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 957 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 958 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 959 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 960 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 961 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 962 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 963 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 964 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 965 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 966 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 967 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 968 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 969 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 970 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 971 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 972 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 973 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 974 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 975 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 976 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 977 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 978 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 979 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 980 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 981 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 982 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 983 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 984 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 985 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 986 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 987 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 988 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 989 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 990 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 991 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 992 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 993 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 994 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 995 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 996 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Level Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1001 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1002 Oil Level Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Level Switch (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1003 Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Level Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Drain the oil from the oil pan. 3. Disconnect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the oil level sensor bolt (751). 5. Remove the oil level sensor (727) and O-ring (728) from the oil pan. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1004 1. Install the oil level sensor (727) and O-ring (728) to the oil pan. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the oil level sensor bolt (751). Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Refill the engine oil to the proper level. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Top of Engine (LS4) Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1008 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1009 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1010 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Sensor Socket Removal Procedure 1. If necessary, remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 3. Using J 41712 , remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1011 1. Apply sealant to the threads of the oil pressure sensor. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Using J 41712 , install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 4. If necessary, install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Under the Hood Latch Trim Panel 1 - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor 2 - Hood Ajar Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1016 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1017 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 1022 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1023 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1024 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Replacement Tools Required J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor. 3. Remove the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor from the evaporator tube. Installation Procedure 1. Replace the O-ring seal for the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1025 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor to the evaporator tube. Tighten the sensor to 4.7 N.m (41 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the A/C refrigerant pressure sensor. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Leak test the fittings of the component using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left side instrument panel insulator. 2. Remove the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the mounting screw. 5. Remove the parking brake indicator switch (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the parking brake indicator switch (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the mounting screw. Tighten the mounting screw to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. Check the operation of the switch. 4. Install the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install the left side instrument panel insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel 1 - Headlamp Switch 2 - Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil 4 - Driver Information Center (DIC) Switch 5 - Ambient Light Sensor 6 - Inflatable Restraint Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator (without 9C1/9C3) 7 - Radio 8 - Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module 9 - Instrument Panel Trim Panel 10 - Heated Seat Switch - Passenger (KA1) 11 - HVAC Control Module 12 - Heated Seat Switch - Driver (KA1) 13 - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1037 Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Ambient Light Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel 1 - Headlamp Switch 2 - Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil 4 - Driver Information Center (DIC) Switch 5 - Ambient Light Sensor 6 - Inflatable Restraint Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator (without 9C1/9C3) 7 - Radio 8 - Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module 9 - Instrument Panel Trim Panel 10 - Heated Seat Switch - Passenger (KA1) 11 - HVAC Control Module 12 - Heated Seat Switch - Driver (KA1) 13 - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1041 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch X1 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1042 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel 1 - Headlamp Switch 2 - Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil 4 - Driver Information Center (DIC) Switch 5 - Ambient Light Sensor 6 - Inflatable Restraint Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator (without 9C1/9C3) 7 - Radio 8 - Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module 9 - Instrument Panel Trim Panel 10 - Heated Seat Switch - Passenger (KA1) 11 - HVAC Control Module 12 - Heated Seat Switch - Driver (KA1) 13 - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Headlamp Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1047 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Headlamp Switch Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Steering Wheel Components 1 - Steering Wheel 2 - Steering Wheel Control Switch - Right 3 - Steering Wheel Control Switch Left 4 - Horn Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1051 Horn Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Horn Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1052 Horn Switch: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Horn Switch Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel 1 - Headlamp Switch 2 - Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) 3 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module Coil 4 - Driver Information Center (DIC) Switch 5 - Ambient Light Sensor 6 - Inflatable Restraint Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator (without 9C1/9C3) 7 - Radio 8 - Inflatable Restraint Instrument Panel Module 9 - Instrument Panel Trim Panel 10 - Heated Seat Switch - Passenger (KA1) 11 - HVAC Control Module 12 - Heated Seat Switch - Driver (KA1) 13 - Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1056 Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch X1 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1057 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to SIR Caution . 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . 2. Remove the upper and lower trim covers. Refer to Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement) . Important: The abrasion sleeve located on the steering column wire harness assembly must be reinstalled. Make note of what connector is coming out of the abrasion sleeve for installation purposes. 3. Remove the wire harness assembly (1) from the wire harness strap (2). 4. Disconnect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector from the SIR system coil connector. 5. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly out of the bulkhead connector (1). 6. Remove the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2). 7. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement > Page 1060 Installation Procedure 1. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) onto the steering column tilt head assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: Be sure that the electrical contact of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly (2) rests on the turn signal cancel cam assembly. 2. Screw the 2 pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) into the turn signal and multifunction assembly (2). Tighten the pan head tapping screws (1) and (3) to 1 N.m (11 lb in). 3. Slide the 2 connectors (2) of the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly into the bulkhead connector (1). 4. Connect the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly connector to the SIR coil connector. Important: The abrasion sleeve must be installed back onto the steering column wire harness assembly. The ignition lock cylinder case wires and connector must be hanging out of the middle of the abrasion sleeve. 5. Install the wire harness assembly (1) into the wire harness strap (2). 6. Install the upper and lower trim covers. Refer to Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement > Page 1061 Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement) . 7. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement > Page 1062 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Turn Signal Switch Housing Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to SIR Caution . 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . 2. Remove the tilt head components. Refer to Turn Signal Cancel Cam and Steering Shaft Upper Bearing Spring Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Cancel Cam and Steering Shaft Upper Bearing Spring Replacement) . 3. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Refer to Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement) . 4. Slide the turn signal switch housing off of the steering column shaft assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement > Page 1063 Important: The switch mounting bracket must be pressed firmly against the steering column tilt head. 1. Slide the turn signal switch housing onto the steering column shaft assembly. 2. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Refer to Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Multifunction Switch Replacement) . 3. Install the tilt head components. Refer to Turn Signal Cancel Cam and Steering Shaft Upper Bearing Spring Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Turn Signal Cancel Cam and Steering Shaft Upper Bearing Spring Replacement) . 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1069 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1070 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1071 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 1076 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 1077 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1080 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1081 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1082 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1083 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1084 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1085 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1086 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1087 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1088 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1089 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1090 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1091 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1092 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1093 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1094 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1095 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1096 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1097 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1098 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1099 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1100 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1101 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1103 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1104 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1105 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1106 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1107 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1108 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1109 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1110 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1111 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1112 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1113 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1114 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1115 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1116 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1117 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1118 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1119 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1120 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1121 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1122 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1123 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1124 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1125 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1126 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1127 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1128 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1129 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1130 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1131 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1132 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1133 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1134 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1135 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1136 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1137 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1138 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1139 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1140 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1141 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1142 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1143 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1144 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1145 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1146 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1147 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1148 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1149 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1150 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1151 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1152 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1153 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1154 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1155 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1156 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1157 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1158 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1159 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1160 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1161 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1162 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1163 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1164 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1165 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1166 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1167 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1168 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1169 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1170 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1171 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1172 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1173 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1174 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1175 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1176 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1177 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1178 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1179 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1180 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1181 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1182 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1183 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1184 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1185 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1186 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1187 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1188 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1189 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1190 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1191 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1192 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1193 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1194 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1195 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1196 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1197 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1198 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1199 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1200 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1201 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1202 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1203 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1204 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1205 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1206 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1207 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1208 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1209 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Battery Current Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 1214 Battery Current Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1215 Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1216 Battery Current Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Current Sensor Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 2. Remove the positive and negative battery cable. 3. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 4. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 5. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1217 Installation Procedure Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the battery prior to installation. 1. Slide the NEW battery current sensor (1) up onto the battery cable. 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 3. Install the positive and negative battery cable. 4. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1223 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1224 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1225 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1226 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1227 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1228 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1229 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1230 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1231 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1232 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1233 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1234 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1235 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1236 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1237 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1238 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1239 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1240 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1241 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1242 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1243 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1244 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1245 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1246 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1247 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1248 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1249 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1250 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1251 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1253 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1254 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1255 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1256 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1257 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1258 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1259 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1260 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1261 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1262 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1263 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1264 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1265 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1266 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1267 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1268 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1269 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1270 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1271 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1272 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1273 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1274 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1275 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1276 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1277 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1278 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1279 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1280 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1281 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1282 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1283 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1284 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1285 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1286 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1287 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1288 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1289 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1290 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1291 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1292 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1293 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1294 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1295 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1296 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1297 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1298 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1299 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1300 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1301 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1302 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1303 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1304 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1305 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1306 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1307 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1308 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1309 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1310 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1311 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1312 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1313 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1314 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1315 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1316 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1317 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1318 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1319 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1320 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1321 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1322 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1323 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1324 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1325 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1326 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1327 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1328 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1329 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1330 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1331 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1332 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1333 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1334 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1335 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1336 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1337 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1338 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1339 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1340 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1341 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1342 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1343 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1344 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1345 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1346 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1347 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1348 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1349 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1350 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1351 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1352 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1361 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1362 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1363 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1364 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1370 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1371 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1372 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 1373 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1374 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1375 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1376 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the ECT sensor. Installation Procedure Notice: Replacement components must be the correct part number for the application. Components requiring the use of the thread locking compound, lubricants, corrosion inhibitors, or sealants are identified in the service procedure. Some replacement components may come with these coatings already applied. Do not use these coatings on components unless specified. These coatings can affect the final torque, which may affect the operation of the component. Use the correct torque specification when installing components in order to avoid damage. Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1377 1. Coat the thread of the ECT sensor with sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1383 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1384 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1385 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1386 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1387 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1388 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1389 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1390 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1391 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1392 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1393 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1394 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1395 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1396 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1397 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1398 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1399 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1400 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1401 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1402 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1403 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1404 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1405 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1406 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1407 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1408 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1409 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1410 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1411 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1412 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1413 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1414 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1415 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1416 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1417 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1418 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1419 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1420 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1421 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1422 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1423 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1424 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1425 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1426 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1427 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1428 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1429 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1430 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1431 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1432 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1433 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1434 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1435 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1436 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1437 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1438 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1439 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1440 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1441 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1442 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1443 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1444 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1445 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1446 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1447 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1448 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1449 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1450 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1451 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1452 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1453 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1454 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1455 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1456 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1457 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1458 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1459 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1460 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1461 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1462 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1463 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1464 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1465 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1466 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1467 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1468 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1469 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1470 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1471 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1472 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1473 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1474 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1475 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1476 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1477 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1478 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1479 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1480 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1481 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1482 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1483 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1484 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1485 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1486 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1487 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1488 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1489 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1490 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1491 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1492 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1493 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1494 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1495 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1496 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1497 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1498 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1499 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1500 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1501 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1502 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1503 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1504 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1505 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1506 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1507 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1508 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1509 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1510 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1513 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 1514 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1518 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1519 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Fuel Vapors can collect while servicing fuel system parts in enclosed areas such as a trunk. To reduce the risk of fire and increased exposure to vapors: * Use forced air ventilation such as a fan set outside of the trunk. * Plug or cap any fuel system openings in order to reduce fuel vapor formation. * Clean up any spilled fuel immediately. * Avoid sparks and any source of ignition. * Use signs to alert others in the work area that fuel system work is in process. 1. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 2. Using two flat-bladed tools, carefully pull both locking tabs (1) outward while simultaneously lifting the level sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1520 3. Using a small bladed tool, push in the electrical terminals (1) while simultaneously pulling out. Installation Procedure 1. Push in the electrical terminals (1) and ensure the terminals are secure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1521 2. Carefully insert the level sensor until the locking tabs (1) snap into the locking position. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Tank Components 1 - Fuel Tank 2 - Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 3 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor 4 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1525 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1526 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1527 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 1532 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 1533 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1534 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1535 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1536 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1540 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1543 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1544 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1545 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1546 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1547 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1548 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1549 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1550 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1551 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1552 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1553 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1554 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1555 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1556 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1557 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1558 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1559 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1560 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1561 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1562 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1563 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1564 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1565 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1566 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1567 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1569 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1570 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1571 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1572 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1573 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1574 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1575 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1576 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1577 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1578 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1579 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1580 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1581 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1582 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1583 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1584 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1585 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1586 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1587 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1588 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1589 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1590 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1591 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1592 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1593 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1594 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1595 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1596 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1597 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1598 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1599 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1600 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1601 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1602 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1603 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1604 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1605 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1606 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1607 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1608 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1609 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1610 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1611 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1612 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1613 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1614 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1615 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1616 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1617 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1618 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1619 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1620 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1621 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1622 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1623 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1624 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1625 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1626 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1627 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1628 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1629 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1630 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1631 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1632 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1633 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1634 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1635 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1636 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1637 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1638 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1639 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1640 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1641 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1642 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1643 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1644 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1645 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1646 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1647 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1648 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1649 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1650 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1651 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1652 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1653 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1654 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1655 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1656 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1657 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1658 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1659 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1660 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1661 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1662 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1663 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1664 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1665 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1666 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1667 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1668 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1669 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1670 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1671 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1672 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1673 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1674 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1675 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1676 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Top of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1680 Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1681 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1682 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1683 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (714) from the intake manifold. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1684 1. Lubricate the MAP sensor grommet with clean engine oil, if required. 2. Install the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. 3. Install the MAP sensor (714). 4. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Top of Engine (LS4) Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1688 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1689 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1690 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Sensor Socket Removal Procedure 1. If necessary, remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 3. Using J 41712 , remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1691 1. Apply sealant to the threads of the oil pressure sensor. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Using J 41712 , install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 4. If necessary, install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Oxygen Sensor: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Recalls Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Oxygen Sensor: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 1700 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Oxygen Sensor: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 1701 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 1707 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 1708 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1709 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Underbody Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1710 1 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1713 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1714 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1715 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1716 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1717 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1718 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1719 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1720 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1721 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1722 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1723 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1724 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1725 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1726 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1727 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1728 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1729 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1730 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1731 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1732 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1733 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1734 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1735 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1736 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1737 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1738 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1739 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1740 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1741 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1742 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1743 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1744 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1745 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1746 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1747 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1748 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1749 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1750 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1751 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1752 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1753 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1754 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1755 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1756 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1757 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1758 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1759 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1760 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1761 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1762 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1763 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1764 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1765 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1766 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1767 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1768 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1769 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1770 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1771 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1772 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1773 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1774 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1775 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1776 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1777 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1778 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1779 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1780 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1781 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1782 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1783 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1784 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1785 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1786 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1787 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1788 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1789 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1790 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1791 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1792 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1793 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1794 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1795 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1796 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1797 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1798 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1799 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1800 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1801 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1802 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1803 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1804 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1805 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1806 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1807 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1808 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1809 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1810 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1811 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1812 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1813 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1814 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1815 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1816 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1817 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1818 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1819 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1820 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1821 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1822 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1823 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1824 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1825 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1826 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1827 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1828 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1829 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1830 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1831 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1832 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1833 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1834 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1835 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1836 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1837 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1838 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1839 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1840 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 (LS4) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1841 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 1844 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 1845 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 1846 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 1847 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor Notice Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 1848 Notice: Handle the oxygen sensors carefully in order to prevent damage to the component. Keep the electrical connector and the exhaust inlet end free of contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents on the sensor. Do not drop or mishandle the sensor. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Notice: Do not solder heated oxygen sensor wires. Soldering the wires will result in the loss of the air reference to the sensor. Refer to Engine Electrical for proper wire and connection repair techniques. Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Notice: The heated oxygen sensors each use a permanently attached pigtail and connector. Do not remove the pigtail from the heated oxygen sensor. Damage or removal of the pigtail or the connector affects proper operation of the heated oxygen sensor. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the oxygen sensor. Keep the in-line connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, the connector, or the terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, the terminals, or the connector is damaged. Proper oxygen sensor operation requires an external air reference. This external air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, the connectors, or the terminals results in the obstruction of the air reference and degrades the oxygen sensor performance. A dropped oxygen sensor is a bad oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Remove the intake manifold sight shield. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (1). 3. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the bank 1 sensor 1 from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is used on the HO2S threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1851 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 1 sensor 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Install the CPA retainer (1). 5. Install the intake manifold sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1852 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 3. Disconnect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Remove the bank 2 sensor 2 from the catalytic converter. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is use on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burns away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 1853 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with the anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 2 sensor 2 to the catalytic converter. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Install the CPA retainer. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1858 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1859 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1860 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1861 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1862 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1863 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1864 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1865 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1866 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1867 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1868 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1869 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1870 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1871 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1872 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1873 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1874 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1875 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1876 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1877 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1878 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1879 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1880 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1881 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1882 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1883 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1884 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1885 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1886 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1887 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1888 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1889 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1890 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1891 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1892 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1893 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1894 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1895 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1896 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1897 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1898 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1899 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1900 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1901 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1902 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1903 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1904 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1905 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1906 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1907 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1908 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1909 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1910 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1911 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1912 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1913 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1914 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1915 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1916 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1917 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1918 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1919 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1920 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1921 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1922 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1923 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1924 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1925 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1926 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1927 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1928 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1929 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1930 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1931 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1932 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1933 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1934 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1935 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1936 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1937 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1938 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1939 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1940 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1941 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1942 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1943 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1944 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1945 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1946 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1947 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1948 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1949 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1950 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1951 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1952 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1953 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1954 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1955 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1956 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1957 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1958 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1959 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1960 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1961 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1962 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1963 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1964 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1965 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1966 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1967 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1968 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1969 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1970 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1971 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1972 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1973 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1974 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1975 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1976 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1977 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1978 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1979 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1980 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1981 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1982 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1983 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1984 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle > Page 1989 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1990 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1991 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 4. Remove the VSS bolt (9). 5. Remove the VSS (10) from the extension case. 6. Remove the O-ring (11) from the VSS (10). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1992 1. Install the O-ring (11) to the VSS (10). 2. Install the VSS (10). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the VSS bolt (9). Tighten the bolt (9) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 4. Connect the VSS electrical connector. 5. Install the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1997 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1998 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1999 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 2004 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 2005 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2008 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2009 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2010 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2011 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2012 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2013 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2014 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2015 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2016 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2017 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2018 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2019 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2020 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2021 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2022 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2023 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2024 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2025 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2026 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2027 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2028 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2029 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2030 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2031 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2032 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2033 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2034 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2035 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2036 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2037 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2038 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2039 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2040 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2041 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2042 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2043 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2044 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2045 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2046 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2047 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2048 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2049 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2050 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2051 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2052 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2053 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2054 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2055 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2056 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2057 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2058 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2059 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2060 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2061 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2062 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2063 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2064 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2065 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2066 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2067 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2068 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2069 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2070 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2071 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2072 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2073 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2074 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2075 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2076 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2077 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2078 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2079 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2080 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2081 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2082 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2083 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2084 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2085 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2086 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2087 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2088 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2089 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2090 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2091 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2092 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2093 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2094 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2095 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2096 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2097 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2098 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2099 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2100 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2101 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2102 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2103 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2104 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2105 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2106 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2107 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2108 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2109 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2110 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2111 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2112 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2113 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2114 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2115 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2116 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2117 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2118 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2119 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2120 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2121 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2122 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2123 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2124 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2125 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2126 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2127 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2128 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2129 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2130 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2131 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2132 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2133 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2134 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2135 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2136 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2137 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2142 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2143 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2144 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2145 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2146 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2147 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2148 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2149 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2150 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2151 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2152 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2153 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2154 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2155 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2156 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2157 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2158 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2159 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2160 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2161 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2162 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2163 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2164 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2165 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2166 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2167 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2168 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2169 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2170 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2171 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2172 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2173 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2174 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2175 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2176 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2177 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2178 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2179 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2180 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2181 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2182 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2183 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2184 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2185 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2186 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2187 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2188 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2189 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2190 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2191 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2192 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2193 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2194 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2195 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2196 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2197 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2198 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2199 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2200 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2201 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2202 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2203 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2204 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2205 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2206 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2207 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2208 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2209 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2210 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2211 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2212 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2213 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2214 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2215 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2216 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2217 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2218 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2219 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2220 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2221 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2222 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2223 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2224 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2225 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2226 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2227 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2228 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2229 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2230 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2231 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2232 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2233 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2234 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2235 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2236 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2237 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2238 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2239 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2240 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2241 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2242 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2243 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2244 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2245 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2246 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2247 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2248 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2249 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2250 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2251 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2252 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2253 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2254 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2255 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2256 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2257 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2258 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2259 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2260 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2261 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2262 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2263 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2264 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2265 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2266 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2267 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2268 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2275 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2276 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2277 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2278 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2279 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2280 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2281 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2282 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2283 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2284 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2285 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2286 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2287 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2288 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2289 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2290 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2291 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2292 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2293 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2294 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2295 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2296 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2297 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2298 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2299 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2300 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2301 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2302 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2303 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2304 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2305 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2306 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2307 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2308 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2309 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2310 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2311 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2312 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2313 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2314 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2315 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2316 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2317 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2318 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2319 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2320 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2321 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2322 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2323 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2324 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2325 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2326 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2327 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2328 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2329 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2330 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2331 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2332 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2333 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2334 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2335 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2336 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2337 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2338 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2339 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2340 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2341 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2342 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2343 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2344 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2345 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2346 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2347 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2348 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2349 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2350 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2351 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2352 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2353 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2354 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2355 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2356 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2357 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2358 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2359 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2360 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2361 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2362 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2363 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2364 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2365 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2366 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2367 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2368 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2369 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2370 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2371 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2372 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2373 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2374 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2375 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2376 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2377 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2378 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2379 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2380 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2381 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2382 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2383 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2384 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2385 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2386 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2387 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2388 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2389 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2390 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2391 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2392 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2393 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2394 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2395 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2396 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2397 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2398 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2399 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2400 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2401 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2402 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2403 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2404 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2410 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2411 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2412 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2413 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2415 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2416 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2417 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2418 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2419 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2420 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2421 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2422 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2423 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2424 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2425 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2426 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2427 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2428 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2429 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2430 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2431 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2432 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2433 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2434 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2435 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2436 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2437 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2438 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2439 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2440 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2441 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2442 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2443 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2444 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2445 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2446 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2447 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2448 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2449 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2450 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2451 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2452 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2453 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2454 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2455 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2456 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2457 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2458 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2459 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2460 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2461 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2462 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2463 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2464 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2465 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2466 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2467 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2468 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2469 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2470 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2471 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2472 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2473 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2474 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2475 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2476 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2477 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2478 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2479 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2480 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2481 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2482 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2483 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2484 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2485 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2486 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2487 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2488 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2489 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2490 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2491 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2492 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2493 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2494 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2495 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2496 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2497 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2498 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2499 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2500 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2501 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2502 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2503 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2504 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2505 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2506 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2507 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2508 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2509 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2510 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2511 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2512 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2513 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2514 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2515 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2516 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2517 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2518 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2519 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2520 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2521 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2522 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2523 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2524 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2525 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2526 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2527 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2528 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2529 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2530 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2531 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2532 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2533 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2534 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2535 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2536 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2537 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 2540 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 2541 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Front of the Passenger Compartment, in the Steering Column 1 - Ignition Switch 2 - Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) 3 - Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 2546 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Procedures Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Special Tools BO-48370 Lock Cylinder Cap Installer Ignition Lock Cylinder The column-mount ignition lock cylinder uses 7 of the 10 key cut positions, 1, 2, and 4 through 8, when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on one side and 3 on the other. Important: The ignition lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the tumbler retainers (4) are properly staked into the cylinder. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder assembly (1) positioned so the side with the retention lug is facing upward, spring-loaded retainer facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 3 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 1, the first number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. It may be necessary to move the sidebar (5), already pre-assembled into the uncoded cylinder assembly, out slightly to fully install the tumbler into the correct tumbler slot. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 2 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5 and 7. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 6. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) so that the side with the retention lug is facing downward, spring-loaded retainer facing upward, and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2549 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 2. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 4, 6, and 8. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the cylinder assembly (1), install and stake one tumbler retainer (4) into the recessed area on the cylinder. Be careful not to damage the cylinder assembly in any way while staking the tumbler retainer. 13. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) to the opposite side and repeat the procedure defined in the previous step. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder The front side door lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3 through 10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Important: The front side door lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case assembly (4). Left side shown, right side opposite. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing upward, as shown. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check the correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing downward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2550 are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. Hold the case assembly (4), left side shown, right side opposite, with the pre-staked detent spring retainer facing downward. 13. First insert one detent spring (5) and then one detent ball (6) into the detent spring hole located to the rear and inside of the cylinder case assembly (4). The detent spring and detent ball are not self-retaining and must be held in place until the coded cylinder is installed into the case assembly. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 14. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case assembly (4). Make sure the detent spring (5) and detent ball (6) are held in place until the coded cylinder is fully installed. The detent ball should line up with the V-shaped groove on the rear of the cylinder, which will prevent the detent spring and detent ball from falling out of the case assembly. 15. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case assembly (4). 16. Insert one shutter spring (7) each into the two shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 17. Install the shutter assembly (8) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. 18. Install the lock cylinder cap (9) by aligning the drain hole in the cap with the bottom of the case assembly (4). Snap the cap into place with light hand pressure. Be sure the cap is securely retained on the case assembly. Also, be sure that the shutter springs (7) push the shutter assembly (8) up against the inside surface of the cap. 19. Install the lever (10), left side shown, right side opposite, onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (11) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (10) to the cylinder. Rear Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder - Police Vehicles 9C1 and 9C3 The rear compartment lid lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3-10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2551 Important: The rear compartment lid lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key is not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case (4). 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the drain hole is facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so that the side with the drain hole is facing upward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the open tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers into the tumbler slots located at key Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2552 cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case (4). 13. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case (4). 14. Insert one shutter spring (5) each into the 2 shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 15. Install the shutter assembly (6) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. Important: Be careful not to scratch or dent the cosmetic surface of the cap or damage the lock cylinder in any way while staking the cap. 16. Stake the cap (7) onto the head of the case (4) by using the appropriate staking tool BO-48370. Ensure proper orientation and set the cylinder assembly (14), (which includes the case (4), coded cylinder (1), shutter springs (5), and shutter assembly (6)) and the cap (7) into the staking cup (15) and clamp into vise. Remove any debris and install the cleaned staking ram (16) into staking cup (15) and with a dead blow hammer, hit the staking ram (16) with moderate force 2 or 3 times. Check to determine if cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly (14). Repeat previous step until cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly. Remove assembly from the staking cup (15). If necessary, insert the removal punch (17) into the opposite end of the staking cup and tap lightly. Confirm that the shutter springs (5) push the shutter assembly (6) up against the inside surface of the cap (7). 17. Install the gasket (8) over the end of the cylinder assembly and slide it all the way up the case (4) until it seats behind the cap (7). 18. Install the return spring (9) over the back end of the cylinder (1) with the straight hook facing the rear of the case (4). Engage the straight hook of the return spring with the hook feature on the rear of the case. 19. Install the spacer (10) and lever (11) onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (12) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (11) to the cylinder. Engage the bent hook of the return spring (9) with the lever. 21. Install the theft deterrent switch (13) onto the end of the cylinder (1) and snap the switch legs onto the case (4). Be sure the theft deterrent switch is engaged with the end of the cylinder and is securely attached to the case. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2553 22. Check the operation of the lock assembly. The return spring (9) should provide a counterclockwise snap back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2554 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. Remove the ignition switch. 4. Remove the steering column tilt head components. 5. Remove the turn signal switch housing. 6. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2555 7. Remove the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case in the following way: 1. Use a small blade to push against the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1). 2. Disconnect the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case. 8. Remove the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) from the ignition lock cylinder case (1). 9. Remove the ignition lock cylinder case (1) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the ignition lock cylinder case (1) with the steering column tilt head assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Screw the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) into the ignition lock cylinder case (1). Tighten the 3 TORX(R) screws to 7 N.m (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2556 3. Press the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1) into the slot in the ignition lock cylinder case. Important: Press the turn signal switch housing firmly against the steering column tilt head in order for the screws from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly to align. 4. Install the turn signal switch housing. 5. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. 6. Install the steering column tilt head components. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2557 7. Install the ignition switch only. 8. Install the ignition lock cylinder. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2561 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2564 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2565 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2566 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2567 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2569 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2570 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2571 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2572 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2573 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2574 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2575 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2576 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2577 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2578 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2579 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2580 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2581 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2582 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2583 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2584 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2585 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2586 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2587 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2588 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2589 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2590 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2591 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2592 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2593 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2594 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2595 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2596 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2597 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2598 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2599 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2600 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2601 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2602 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2603 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2604 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2605 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2606 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2607 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2608 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2609 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2610 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2611 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2612 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2613 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2614 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2615 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2616 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2617 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2618 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2619 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2620 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2621 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2622 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2623 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2624 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2625 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2626 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2627 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2628 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2629 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2630 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2631 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2632 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2633 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2634 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2635 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2636 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2637 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2638 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2639 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2640 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2641 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2642 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2643 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2644 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2645 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2646 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2647 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2648 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2649 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2650 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2651 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2652 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2653 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2654 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2655 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2656 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2657 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2658 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2659 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2660 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2661 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2662 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2663 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2664 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2665 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2666 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2667 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2668 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2669 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2670 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2671 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2672 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2673 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2674 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2675 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2676 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2677 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2678 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2679 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2680 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2681 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2682 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2683 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2684 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2685 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2686 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2687 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2688 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2689 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2690 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2691 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2692 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2693 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2694 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2695 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2696 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2697 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Impact Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Seat Components 1 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Back (KA1) 2 - Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 3 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger 4 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger, Connector 5 - Rear Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 6 - Front Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 7 - Horizontal Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 8 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Sensor 10 - Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger (AG2) 11 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Seat (KA1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views > Page 2703 Impact Sensor: Locations Door Component Views Door Component Views Driver Door 1 - Door Frame 2 - Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - Door Lock Switch - Driver 4 - Window Switch - Driver 5 - Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - Window Motor - Driver 7 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Left (AY1) 8 - Door Lock - Driver Passenger Door Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views > Page 2704 1 - Door Lock Switch - Passenger 2 - Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 3 - Door Frame 4 Door Lock - Passenger 5 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Right (AY1) 6 - Window Switch - Passenger 7 - Window Motor - Passenger Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views > Page 2705 Impact Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Right Front of the Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views > Page 2706 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views > Page 2707 Impact Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Right Front of the Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views > Page 2708 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2709 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2710 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) - Left (AY1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2711 Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Right (AY1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement (Impala) Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement (Impala) Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor Replacement (Impala) > Page 2714 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Left Front Seat of the Vehicle 1 - Seat Belt Switch - Driver Front Seat Airbag Inlines Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2718 1 - Seat Belt Switch-Passenger 2 - Passenger 3 - X314 4 - Seat Belt Switch-Driver 5 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Module-Left 6 - X312 7 - Driver Seat 8 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Module-Right Passenger Seat Components Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2719 1 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Back (KA1) 2 - Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 3 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger 4 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger, Connector 5 - Rear Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 6 - Front Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 7 - Horizontal Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 8 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Sensor 10 - Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger (AG2) 11 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Seat (KA1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2720 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Seat Belt Switch - Driver Seat Belt Switch - Passenger Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Locations Passenger Compartment/Roof Component Views Passenger Seat Components 1 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Back (KA1) 2 - Seat Belt Switch - Passenger 3 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger 4 - Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger, Connector 5 - Rear Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 6 - Front Vertical Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 7 - Horizontal Motor (Part of the Seat Adjuster Motor Assembly - Passenger) 8 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Module 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front Passenger Presence System (PPS) Sensor 10 - Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger (AG2) 11 - Heated Seat Element - Passenger - Seat (KA1) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2724 Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Seat Belt Tension Sensor - Passenger Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information > Page 2729 Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - DTC B0071/B0074/B0081 Code Clearing Bulletin No.: 07-09-41-004 Date: June 13, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: New Procedure for Clearing Passenger Presence System (PPS) and Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) DTCs B0071, B0074, B0081 Models: 2006-2008 Buick Lucerne 2006-2008 Cadillac DTS 2007-2008 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2006-2007 Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2008 Chevrolet Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2007-2008 GMC Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali A condition exists where the passenger presence system (PPS) may continue to output a fault to the sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) after the PPS has been cleared. The fault may continue to report to the SDM if the buss has not been allowed to go to sleep prior to clearing B0081 DTC in the SDM. If B0071, B0074 or B0081/0F is received, the following procedure should be followed to clear the codes. With the Ignition OFF, open and close the driver door. With a scan tool, clear PPS DTC (B0071 or B0074). While continuing to keep the doors closed, wait 60 seconds with the ignition OFF. DO NOT operate any functions in the vehicle during this time. Verify that the PPS does not have any DTCs. If PPS DTCs exist, please perform the necessary repair. With the scan tool, clear DTC B0081. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2730 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Inflatable Restraint Passenger Presence System Replacement - Front (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2731 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Battery Current Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 2737 Battery Current Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2738 Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2739 Battery Current Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Current Sensor Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 2. Remove the positive and negative battery cable. 3. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 4. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 5. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2740 Installation Procedure Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the battery prior to installation. 1. Slide the NEW battery current sensor (1) up onto the battery cable. 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 3. Install the positive and negative battery cable. 4. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Front of the Passenger Compartment, in the Steering Column 1 - Ignition Switch 2 - Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) 3 - Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 2745 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Procedures Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Special Tools BO-48370 Lock Cylinder Cap Installer Ignition Lock Cylinder The column-mount ignition lock cylinder uses 7 of the 10 key cut positions, 1, 2, and 4 through 8, when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on one side and 3 on the other. Important: The ignition lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the tumbler retainers (4) are properly staked into the cylinder. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder assembly (1) positioned so the side with the retention lug is facing upward, spring-loaded retainer facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 3 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 1, the first number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. It may be necessary to move the sidebar (5), already pre-assembled into the uncoded cylinder assembly, out slightly to fully install the tumbler into the correct tumbler slot. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 2 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5 and 7. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 6. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) so that the side with the retention lug is facing downward, spring-loaded retainer facing upward, and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2748 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 2. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 4, 6, and 8. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the cylinder assembly (1), install and stake one tumbler retainer (4) into the recessed area on the cylinder. Be careful not to damage the cylinder assembly in any way while staking the tumbler retainer. 13. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) to the opposite side and repeat the procedure defined in the previous step. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder The front side door lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3 through 10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Important: The front side door lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case assembly (4). Left side shown, right side opposite. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing upward, as shown. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check the correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing downward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2749 are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. Hold the case assembly (4), left side shown, right side opposite, with the pre-staked detent spring retainer facing downward. 13. First insert one detent spring (5) and then one detent ball (6) into the detent spring hole located to the rear and inside of the cylinder case assembly (4). The detent spring and detent ball are not self-retaining and must be held in place until the coded cylinder is installed into the case assembly. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 14. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case assembly (4). Make sure the detent spring (5) and detent ball (6) are held in place until the coded cylinder is fully installed. The detent ball should line up with the V-shaped groove on the rear of the cylinder, which will prevent the detent spring and detent ball from falling out of the case assembly. 15. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case assembly (4). 16. Insert one shutter spring (7) each into the two shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 17. Install the shutter assembly (8) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. 18. Install the lock cylinder cap (9) by aligning the drain hole in the cap with the bottom of the case assembly (4). Snap the cap into place with light hand pressure. Be sure the cap is securely retained on the case assembly. Also, be sure that the shutter springs (7) push the shutter assembly (8) up against the inside surface of the cap. 19. Install the lever (10), left side shown, right side opposite, onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (11) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (10) to the cylinder. Rear Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder - Police Vehicles 9C1 and 9C3 The rear compartment lid lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3-10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2750 Important: The rear compartment lid lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key is not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case (4). 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the drain hole is facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so that the side with the drain hole is facing upward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the open tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers into the tumbler slots located at key Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2751 cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case (4). 13. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case (4). 14. Insert one shutter spring (5) each into the 2 shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 15. Install the shutter assembly (6) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. Important: Be careful not to scratch or dent the cosmetic surface of the cap or damage the lock cylinder in any way while staking the cap. 16. Stake the cap (7) onto the head of the case (4) by using the appropriate staking tool BO-48370. Ensure proper orientation and set the cylinder assembly (14), (which includes the case (4), coded cylinder (1), shutter springs (5), and shutter assembly (6)) and the cap (7) into the staking cup (15) and clamp into vise. Remove any debris and install the cleaned staking ram (16) into staking cup (15) and with a dead blow hammer, hit the staking ram (16) with moderate force 2 or 3 times. Check to determine if cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly (14). Repeat previous step until cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly. Remove assembly from the staking cup (15). If necessary, insert the removal punch (17) into the opposite end of the staking cup and tap lightly. Confirm that the shutter springs (5) push the shutter assembly (6) up against the inside surface of the cap (7). 17. Install the gasket (8) over the end of the cylinder assembly and slide it all the way up the case (4) until it seats behind the cap (7). 18. Install the return spring (9) over the back end of the cylinder (1) with the straight hook facing the rear of the case (4). Engage the straight hook of the return spring with the hook feature on the rear of the case. 19. Install the spacer (10) and lever (11) onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (12) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (11) to the cylinder. Engage the bent hook of the return spring (9) with the lever. 21. Install the theft deterrent switch (13) onto the end of the cylinder (1) and snap the switch legs onto the case (4). Be sure the theft deterrent switch is engaged with the end of the cylinder and is securely attached to the case. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2752 22. Check the operation of the lock assembly. The return spring (9) should provide a counterclockwise snap back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2753 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. Remove the ignition switch. 4. Remove the steering column tilt head components. 5. Remove the turn signal switch housing. 6. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2754 7. Remove the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case in the following way: 1. Use a small blade to push against the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1). 2. Disconnect the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case. 8. Remove the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) from the ignition lock cylinder case (1). 9. Remove the ignition lock cylinder case (1) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the ignition lock cylinder case (1) with the steering column tilt head assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Screw the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) into the ignition lock cylinder case (1). Tighten the 3 TORX(R) screws to 7 N.m (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2755 3. Press the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1) into the slot in the ignition lock cylinder case. Important: Press the turn signal switch housing firmly against the steering column tilt head in order for the screws from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly to align. 4. Install the turn signal switch housing. 5. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. 6. Install the steering column tilt head components. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2756 7. Install the ignition switch only. 8. Install the ignition lock cylinder. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to SIR Caution . 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . 2. Remove the steering column from the vehicle. Refer to Steering Column Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Replacement) . 3. Remove the following from the steering shaft: 1. The boot seal (5) 2. The steering shaft seal (4) 3. The sensor retainer (3) 4. The sensor locator (2) 4. Remove the steering wheel position sensor (1). Refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering) . 5. Remove the adapter and bearing assembly from the steering jacket assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the adapter and bearing assembly to the steering jacket assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2763 2. Install the following onto the steering shaft: 1. The steering wheel position sensor (1)-Refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering) . 2. The sensor locator (2) 3. The sensor retainer (3) 4. The steering shaft seal (4) 5. The boot seal (5) 3. Install the steering column into the vehicle. Refer to Steering Column Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Replacement) . 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2764 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering Removal Procedure Important: Identify the type of steering wheel position sensor from the illustrations shown BEFORE removing the sensor from the steering column. Once you have identified the steering wheel position sensor, follow the instructions listed in the removal procedure. 1. Verify the type of steering wheel position sensor. 2. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor (1) connector will be on the right. Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you do not have to align the sensor before removal. Centering is not required when it is time to reinstall. 3. Remove the connector from the sensor. 4. Remove the sensor (1) from the adapter and bearing assembly. 5. To install the sensor, proceed to step 1 in the installation section. 6. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A foam ring (2) * A pin hole (1) for centering the pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A flush rotor flange cuff (4) Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must make an alignment mark on the rotor flange cuff (3) before removing the sensor. Failure to do so will cause misalignment when installing the sensor. A new sensor will be required if misaligned. 7. Make an alignment mark on the flush rotor flange cuff (3). 8. Remove the connector from the sensor. 9. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 10. To install the sensor, proceed to step 5 in the installation procedure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2765 11. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A raised rotor flange cuff (3) * An alignment mark (2) on the rotor flange cuff (3) for installation * A pin hole (1) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. 12. Remove the connector from the sensor. 13. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 14. To install the sensor, proceed to step 9 in the installation procedure. 15. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A raised rotor flange cuff (3) * An alignment mark (2) on the rotor flange cuff (3) for installation * A pin hole (1) for the centering pin-Note location of the pin hole. * A sensor clip in FRONT of the sensor 16. Remove the connector from the sensor. 17. Remove the sensor clip from the sensor. 18. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 19. To install the sensor, proceed to step 13 in the installation procedure. 20. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A flush rotor flange cuff (3) * A pin hole (1) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * An alignment mark (2) on the flush rotor flange cuff (3) for installation Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2766 21. Remove the connector from the sensor. 22. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 23. To install the sensor, proceed to step 17 in the installation procedure. 24. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A flush rotor flange cuff (4) * A pin hole (2) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * An alignment mark (3) on the flush rotor flange cuff (4) for installation * A foam ring (1) 25. Remove the connector from the sensor. 26. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 27. To install the sensor, proceed to step 21 in the installation procedure. Installation Procedure Important: If reusing the existing sensor, no centering of the sensor is required. 1. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. 2. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor (1) connector will be on your right. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor (2) connector will be on your left. 3. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 4. Install the connector to the sensor. 5. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2767 * A foam ring (4) * A pin hole (7) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A flushed rotor flange cuff (6) * An alignment mark (5) for installation 6. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have: * Double D flats (1) * A foam ring (3) * An alignment tab (2) for installing into the adapter and bearing assembly * A view of the inside of the connector Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the flush rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 7. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 8. Install the connector to the sensor. 9. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (3) for the centering pin-Note location of the pin hole. * A raised rotor flange cuff (5) * An alignment mark (4) for installation 10. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have: * Double D flats (1) * An alignment tab (2) for installing into the adapter and bearing assembly Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the raised rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 11. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 12. Install the connector to the sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2768 13. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (2) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A raised rotor flange cuff (4) * An alignment mark (3) for installation 14. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have an alignment tab (1) for installation. This sensor does not have double D flats. Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the raised rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 15. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 16. Install the connector to the sensor. 17. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (2) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A flush rotor flange cuff (4) * An alignment mark (3) for installation 18. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have an alignment tab (1) for installation. This sensor does not have double D flats. Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the flush rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 19. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 20. Install the connector to the sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2769 21. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (3) for the centering pin-Note location of the pin hole. * A flush rotor flange cuff (5) * An alignment mark (4) for installation * A foam ring (6) 22. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have: * Double D flats (1) * An alignment tab (2) for installing into the adapter and bearing assembly Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the flush rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 23. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 24. Install the connector to the sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to SIR Caution . 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . 2. Remove the steering column from the vehicle. Refer to Steering Column Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Replacement) . 3. Remove the following from the steering shaft: 1. The boot seal (5) 2. The steering shaft seal (4) 3. The sensor retainer (3) 4. The sensor locator (2) 4. Remove the steering wheel position sensor (1). Refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering) . 5. Remove the adapter and bearing assembly from the steering jacket assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the adapter and bearing assembly to the steering jacket assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2775 2. Install the following onto the steering shaft: 1. The steering wheel position sensor (1)-Refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering) . 2. The sensor locator (2) 3. The sensor retainer (3) 4. The steering shaft seal (4) 5. The boot seal (5) 3. Install the steering column into the vehicle. Refer to Steering Column Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Replacement) . 4. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2776 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering Steering Wheel Position Sensor Centering Removal Procedure Important: Identify the type of steering wheel position sensor from the illustrations shown BEFORE removing the sensor from the steering column. Once you have identified the steering wheel position sensor, follow the instructions listed in the removal procedure. 1. Verify the type of steering wheel position sensor. 2. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor (1) connector will be on the right. Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you do not have to align the sensor before removal. Centering is not required when it is time to reinstall. 3. Remove the connector from the sensor. 4. Remove the sensor (1) from the adapter and bearing assembly. 5. To install the sensor, proceed to step 1 in the installation section. 6. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A foam ring (2) * A pin hole (1) for centering the pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A flush rotor flange cuff (4) Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must make an alignment mark on the rotor flange cuff (3) before removing the sensor. Failure to do so will cause misalignment when installing the sensor. A new sensor will be required if misaligned. 7. Make an alignment mark on the flush rotor flange cuff (3). 8. Remove the connector from the sensor. 9. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 10. To install the sensor, proceed to step 5 in the installation procedure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2777 11. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A raised rotor flange cuff (3) * An alignment mark (2) on the rotor flange cuff (3) for installation * A pin hole (1) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. 12. Remove the connector from the sensor. 13. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 14. To install the sensor, proceed to step 9 in the installation procedure. 15. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A raised rotor flange cuff (3) * An alignment mark (2) on the rotor flange cuff (3) for installation * A pin hole (1) for the centering pin-Note location of the pin hole. * A sensor clip in FRONT of the sensor 16. Remove the connector from the sensor. 17. Remove the sensor clip from the sensor. 18. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 19. To install the sensor, proceed to step 13 in the installation procedure. 20. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A flush rotor flange cuff (3) * A pin hole (1) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * An alignment mark (2) on the flush rotor flange cuff (3) for installation Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2778 21. Remove the connector from the sensor. 22. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 23. To install the sensor, proceed to step 17 in the installation procedure. 24. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A flush rotor flange cuff (4) * A pin hole (2) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * An alignment mark (3) on the flush rotor flange cuff (4) for installation * A foam ring (1) 25. Remove the connector from the sensor. 26. Remove the sensor from the adapter and bearing assembly. 27. To install the sensor, proceed to step 21 in the installation procedure. Installation Procedure Important: If reusing the existing sensor, no centering of the sensor is required. 1. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. 2. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor (1) connector will be on your right. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor (2) connector will be on your left. 3. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 4. Install the connector to the sensor. 5. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2779 * A foam ring (4) * A pin hole (7) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A flushed rotor flange cuff (6) * An alignment mark (5) for installation 6. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have: * Double D flats (1) * A foam ring (3) * An alignment tab (2) for installing into the adapter and bearing assembly * A view of the inside of the connector Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the flush rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 7. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 8. Install the connector to the sensor. 9. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (3) for the centering pin-Note location of the pin hole. * A raised rotor flange cuff (5) * An alignment mark (4) for installation 10. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have: * Double D flats (1) * An alignment tab (2) for installing into the adapter and bearing assembly Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the raised rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 11. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 12. Install the connector to the sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2780 13. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (2) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A raised rotor flange cuff (4) * An alignment mark (3) for installation 14. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have an alignment tab (1) for installation. This sensor does not have double D flats. Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the raised rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 15. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 16. Install the connector to the sensor. 17. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (2) for the centering pin-Note the location of the pin hole. * A flush rotor flange cuff (4) * An alignment mark (3) for installation 18. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have an alignment tab (1) for installation. This sensor does not have double D flats. Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the flush rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 19. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 20. Install the connector to the sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Steering Angle Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Wheel Position Sensor or Steering Shaft Lower Bearing Replacement > Page 2781 21. From the technicians point of view, the FRONT of the sensor will have: * A pin hole (3) for the centering pin-Note location of the pin hole. * A flush rotor flange cuff (5) * An alignment mark (4) for installation * A foam ring (6) 22. From the technicians point of view, the BACK of the sensor will have: * Double D flats (1) * An alignment tab (2) for installing into the adapter and bearing assembly Important: If reusing the existing sensor, you must align the marks on the flush rotor flange cuff before installation. The alignment mark must stay aligned until the sensor is seated into the adapter and bearing assembly. If installing a new sensor, it will come with a pin installed in the sensor. Do not remove the pin until the sensor is seated. If the new sensor did not come with a pin installed, you must reorder a new sensor. 23. Looking at the FRONT of the sensor, align the sensor with the steering shaft and install into the adapter and bearing assembly. 24. Install the connector to the sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2787 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2788 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2789 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2790 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 2791 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2792 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement (Snap In Style) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 3. Dismount the tire from the rim. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . Important: When servicing the tire pressure sensor always use a new Schrader(R) tire pressure monitor (TPM) and a new TORX screw during installation. 4. Remove the TORX screw (1) from the tire pressure sensor (2) and pull it straight off the tire pressure valve stem (3). Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 5. Remove the tire pressure valve stem by pulling it through the rim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2793 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: * Ensure the flat of the valve, lines up with the flats of the snap in the enclosure. * TPM valves and TORX screws are one-time use only. 1. Assemble the tire pressure sensor (2) to the valve stem and install the new TORX screw (3). Tighten the TORX screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). Important: Use and approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 2. Apply tire soap to the rubber portion of the valve stem (1). 3. Using a tire valve stem mounting tool, pull the valve stem through in a direction parallel to the valve hole on the rim. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2794 Important: Snap Fit TPM sensors are still shipped in the OFF mode. However, the TPM no longer needs to be spun to remove it from the OFF mode. The sensor will exit its OFF state when the tire is inflated. The technician can then program the vehicle as normal. 4. Mount the tire to the rim. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor Learn () . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 2801 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2802 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2803 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness. 3. Remove the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the fluid pressure manual valve position switch to the control valve body (300). Important: When removing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 4. Carefully remove the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). 5. Inspect the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395) for the following conditions: * Damaged electrical connector terminals * Damaged seals * Damaged switch membranes * Debris on the switch membranes Installation Procedure Important: When installing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 1. Carefully install the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the TFP switch to the control valve body (300). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (375) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (379) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (381) to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Connect the transaxle wiring harness. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2804 Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Mode Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 2809 Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2810 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 2815 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2816 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (AT ISS) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2817 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 4. Remove the input speed sensor (440). 5. Inspect the input speed sensor (440) for the following conditions: * Damaged or missing magnet * Damaged housing * Bent or missing electrical terminals * Damaged speed sensor clip (441) Installation Procedure 1. Install the input speed sensor (440). 2. Install the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 3. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle > Page 2823 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2824 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness assembly from the fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (391). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fluid temperature sensor (391). 2. Connect the wiring harness assembly to the with fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 4. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 2827 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Thermo Element Replacement Thermo Element Replacement Tools Required J 34094-A Thermo Element Height Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the thermo element pins (120, 123) and the washers. 4. Remove the thermo element (121) and the thermo element plate (122). Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 34094-A to set the middle thermo pin (123). 2. Install the new thermo element plate (122). 3. Install the pin (120) and the washer. 4. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the pin and the washer furthest from the accumulator. 5. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the second pin (120) and the washer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 2828 6. Install the thermo element (121) between the two pins (120). The V in the thermo element (121) must contact the thermo element plate (122). 7. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 9. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Window Switch: > 08-08-110-007 > Mar > 08 > Interior - Driver's Power Window Switch Sticks/Binds Power Window Switch: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Power Window Switch Sticks/Binds TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-110-007 Date: March 31, 2008 Subject: Driver Side Window Switch Sticks (Replace Window Switch Bezel and/or Window Switch) Models: 2008 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that driver side window switch does not operate the window correctly or the switch sticks. Cause This condition may be caused because the bezel trim has excess flashing, causing the switch to bind in the bezel. Damage to the window switch may result from this condition. Correction Replace the bezel and/or window switch. Refer to Front Side Door Window Switch Bezel Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Window Switch: > 08-08-110-007 > Mar > 08 > Interior - Driver's Power Window Switch Sticks/Binds Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Power Window Switch Sticks/Binds TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-110-007 Date: March 31, 2008 Subject: Driver Side Window Switch Sticks (Replace Window Switch Bezel and/or Window Switch) Models: 2008 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that driver side window switch does not operate the window correctly or the switch sticks. Cause This condition may be caused because the bezel trim has excess flashing, causing the switch to bind in the bezel. Damage to the window switch may result from this condition. Correction Replace the bezel and/or window switch. Refer to Front Side Door Window Switch Bezel Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2843 Power Window Switch: Locations Door Component Views Driver Door 1 - Door Frame 2 - Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver 3 - Door Lock Switch - Driver 4 - Window Switch - Driver 5 - Outside Rearview Mirror Switch 6 - Window Motor - Driver 7 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Left (AY1) 8 - Door Lock - Driver Passenger Door Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2844 1 - Door Lock Switch - Passenger 2 - Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger 3 - Door Frame 4 Door Lock - Passenger 5 - Inflatable Restraint Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Right (AY1) 6 - Window Switch - Passenger 7 - Window Motor - Passenger Left Rear Door Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2845 1 - Door Frame 2 - Window Switch - Left Rear 3 - Window Motor - Left Rear 4 - Door Lock - Left Rear Right Rear Door Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2846 1 - Window Switch - Right Rear 2 - Door Frame 3 - Door Lock - Right Rear 4 - Window Motor Right Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2847 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Window Switch - Driver X1 Window Switch - Driver X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2848 Window Switch - Left Rear Window Switch - Passenger Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2849 Window Switch - Right Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2850 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement > Page 2853 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 2859 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2860 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2861 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Solvent Level Switch Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2867 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2868 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2869 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2870 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2871 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2872 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 2873 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications Alignment: Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Fastener Tightening Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 2876 Alignment: Specifications Trim Height Specifications Trim Height Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Fastener Tightening Specifications > Page 2877 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear . Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 2880 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Description Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 2881 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe Description Toe Description Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 2882 Alignment: Description and Operation Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 2883 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Description Caster Description Caster Description Caster is the tilting of the uppermost point of the steering axis either forward or backward, when viewed from the side of the vehicle. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Caster influences directional control of the steering but does not affect the tire wear . Caster is affected by the vehicle height, therefore it is important to keep the body at its designed height. Overloading the vehicle or a weak or sagging rear spring will affect caster. When the rear of the vehicle is lower than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a more positive caster. If the rear of the vehicle is higher than its designated trim height, the front suspension moves to a less positive caster. With too little positive caster, steering may be touchy at high speed and wheel returnability may be diminished when coming out of a turn. If one wheel has more positive caster than the other, that wheel will pull toward the center of the vehicle. This condition will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the least amount of positive caster. Camber Description Camber Description Camber Description Camber is the tilting of the wheels from the vertical when viewed from the front of the vehicle. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt is measured in degrees from the vertical. Camber settings influence the directional control and the tire wear. Too much positive camber will result in premature wear on the outside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Too much negative camber will result in premature wear on the inside of the tire and cause excessive wear on the suspension parts. Unequal side-to-side camber of 1 degree or more will cause the vehicle to pull or lead to the side with the most positive camber. Toe Description Toe Description Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 2884 Toe Description Toe is a measurement of how much the front and/or rear wheels are turned in or out from a straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in, toe is positive (+). When the wheels are turned out, toe is negative (-). The actual amount of toe is normally only a fraction of a degree. The purpose of toe is to ensure that the wheels roll parallel. Toe also offsets the small deflections of the wheel support system that occur when the vehicle is rolling forward. In other words, with the vehicle standing still and the wheels set with toe-in, the wheels tend to roll parallel on the road when the vehicle is moving. Improper toe adjustment will cause premature tire wear and cause steering instability. Setback Description Setback Description Setback applies to both the front and the rear wheels. Setback is the amount that one wheel may be aligned behind the other wheel. Setback may be the result of a road hazard or a collision. The first clue is a caster difference from side-to-side of more than 1 degree. Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description Thrust Angles Description The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle. The rear wheels control tracking. This tracking action relates to the thrust angle (3). The thrust angle is the path that the rear wheels take. Ideally, the thrust angle is geometrically aligned with the body centerline (2). In the illustration, toe-in is shown on the left rear wheel, moving the thrust line (1) off center. The resulting deviation from the centerline is the thrust angle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 2885 If the thrust angle is not set properly the vehicle may "dog track", the steering wheel may not be centered or it could be perceived as a bent axle. Thrust angle can be checked during a wheel alignment. Positive thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the right hand side (RHS) of the vehicle. Negative thrust angle means the thrust line is pointing to the left hand side (LHS) of the vehicle. If the thrust angle is out of specification, moving the axle to body relationship will change the thrust angle reading. If the vehicle is out in the Positive (+) direction-moving the RHS forward and/or LHS rearward will move the thrust angle towards zero degrees. If the vehicle is out in the Negative (-) direction-moving the RHS rearward and/or LHS forward will move the thrust angle towards zero degrees. Lead/Pull Description Lead/Pull Description At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Important: Vehicles will tend to lead/pull in the direction of the road slope as part of normal operation. Lead/pull is usually caused by the following factors: * Road slope * Variability in tire construction * Wheel alignment (front cross caster and camber) * Unbalanced steering gear * Electronic Power Steering (EPS) steering position and torque sensors not calibrated correctly, if equipped. Torque Steer Description Torque Steer Description A vehicle pulls or leads in one direction during hard acceleration. A vehicle pulls or leads in the other direction during deceleration. The following factors may cause torque steer to be more apparent on a particular vehicle: * A slightly smaller diameter tire on the right front increases a right torque lead. Inspect the front tires for differences in the brand, the construction, or the size. If the tires appear to be similar, change the front tires from side-to-side and retest the vehicle. Tire and wheel assemblies have the most significant effect on torque steer correction. * A large difference in the right and left front tire pressure * Left-to-right differences in the front view axle angle may cause significant steering pull in a vehicle. The pull will be to the side with the most downward sloping axle from the differential to the wheels. Axles typically slope downward from the differential. The slope of the transaxle pan to Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Caster Description > Page 2886 level ground may be used as an indication of bias axle angles. The side with the higher transaxle pan, shown on the left side of the illustration, has the most downward sloping axle angle. Memory Steer Description Memory Steer Description Memory steer is when the vehicle wants to lead or pull in the direction the driver previously turned the vehicle. Additionally, after turning in the opposite direction, the vehicle will want to lead or pull in that direction. Wander Description Wander Description Wander is the undesired drifting or deviation of a vehicle to either side from a straight path with hand pressure on the steering wheel. Wander is a symptom of the vehicle's sensitivity to external disturbances, such as road crown and crosswind, and accentuated by poor on-center steering feel. Scrub Radius Description Scrub Radius Description Ideally, the scrub radius is as small as possible. Normally, the SAI angle and the centerline of the tire and the wheel intersect below the road surface, causing a positive scrub radius. With struts, the SAI angle is much larger than the long arm/short arm type of suspension. This allows the SAI angle to intersect the camber angle above the road surface, forming a negative scrub radius. The smaller the scrub radius, the better the directional stability. Installing aftermarket wheels that have additional offset will dramatically increase the scrub radius. The newly installed wheels may cause the centerline of the tires to move further away from the spindle. This will increase the scrub radius. A large amount of scrub radius can cause severe shimmy after hitting a bump. Four-wheel drive vehicles with large tires use a steering damper to compensate for an increased scrub radius. Scrub radius is not directly measurable by the conventional methods. Scrub radius is projected geometrically by engineers during the design phase of the suspension. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 2887 Alignment: Testing and Inspection Trim Height Inspection Trim Height Measurements Trim height is a predetermined measurement relating to vehicle ride height. Incorrect trim heights can cause bottoming out over bumps, damage to the suspension components, and symptoms similar to wheel alignment problems. Check the trim heights when diagnosing suspension concerns and before checking the wheel alignment. Perform the following before measuring the trim heights: 1. Set the tire pressures to the pressure shown on the certification label. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label . 2. Check the fuel level. Add additional weight if necessary to simulate a full tank. 3. Make sure the rear compartment is empty except for the spare tire. 4. Make sure the vehicle is on a level surface, such as an alignment rack. 5. Close the doors. 6. Close the hood. 7. All dimensions are measured vertical to the ground. Trim heights should be within 13 mm (0.5 in) to be considered correct. Z Height Measurement The Z height dimension measurement determines the proper ride height for the front end of the vehicle. There is no adjustment procedure. Repair may require replacement of suspension components. 1. Lift the front bumper of the vehicle up about 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands. Let the vehicle settle. 3. Repeat this operation for a total of 3 times. Measuring the Z Dimension 4. Measure from the pivot bolt center line down to the lower corner of the lower ball joint in order to obtain the Z height measurement. 5. Push the front bumper of the vehicle down about 38 mm (1.5 in). 6. Gently remove your hands. 7. Allow the vehicle to settle into position. 8. Repeat the jouncing operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 9. Measure the Z dimension. 10. The true Z height dimension number is the average of the high and the low measurements. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications) . D Height Measurement The D height dimension measurement determines the proper rear end ride height. There is no adjustment procedure. Repair may require replacement of suspension components. 1. With the vehicle on a flat surface, lift upward on the rear bumper 38 mm (1.5 in). 2. Gently remove your hands. Allow the vehicle to settle into position. 3. Repeat the jouncing operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 2888 Measuring D Height 4. The D height is measured from a point 30 mm (1.1 in) outboard of the rear brake hose bracket bolt centerline to the bolt centerline of the trailing arm to the knuckle attachment. 5. Push the rear bumper downward to 38 mm (1.5 in). 6. Gently remove your hands. Allow the vehicle to settle into position. 7. Repeat the jouncing operation 2 more times for a total of 3 times. 8. Measure the D height dimension. 9. The true D height dimension number is the average of the high and the low measurements. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications) . 10. If these measurements are out of specifications, inspect for the following conditions: * Improper weight distribution * Collision damage * Worn or damaged suspension components Measuring the P and R Dimension Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 2889 Use the following procedure to check the P and R dimensions. 1. Use your hands to lift the front bumper approximately 38 mm (1.59 in). 2. Remove your hands and allow the vehicle to lower. 3. Use your hands to jounce the front of the vehicle downward approximately 38 mm (1.59 in). 4. Remove your hands and allow the vehicle to rise. 5. The dimension (P) for the left and right side of the vehicle is measured from the bottom lip of the wheel opening to the ground measured at the center line of the front wheel. 6. Compare the measurement to the specification table. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications) . 7. If the measurement is outside of the specified range, replace the front springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Suspension Strut/Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement) . 8. Use your hands to lift the rear bumper approximately 38 mm (1.59 in). 9. Remove your hands and allow the vehicle to lower. 10. Use your hands to jounce the rear of the vehicle downward approximately 38 mm (1.59 in). 11. The dimension (R) for the left and right side of the vehicle is measured from the bottom lip of the wheel opening to the ground measured at the center line of the rear wheel. 12. Compare the measurement to the specification table. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications) . 13. If the measurement is outside of the specified range, replace the rear springs. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension Strut/Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement Alignment: Service and Repair Wheel Alignment Measurement Wheel Alignment Measurement Steering and vibration complaints are not always the result of improper alignment. One possible cause is wheel and tire imbalance. Another possibility is tire lead due to worn or improperly manufactured tires. Lead/pull is defined as follows: At a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, lead/pull is the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight path. Lead is the vehicle deviation from a straight path on a level road without pressure on the steering wheel. Refer to Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction) in order to determine if the vehicle has a tire lead problem. Before performing any adjustment affecting wheel alignment, perform the following inspections and adjustments in order to ensure correct alignment readings: * Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, Anti-Theft, and Service Parts ID Label and Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear (See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Tire Diagnosis - Irregular or Premature Wear) . * Inspect the runout of the wheels and the tires. Refer to Tire and Wheel Runout Specifications . * Inspect the wheel bearings for backlash and excessive play. Refer to Wheel Bearings Diagnosis (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Wheel Bearings Diagnosis) . * Inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends for looseness or wear. * Inspect the control arms and stabilizer shaft for looseness or wear. * Inspect the steering gear for looseness at the frame. Refer to Fastener Tightening Specifications (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Specifications) . * Inspect the struts/shock absorbers for wear, leaks, and any noticeable noises. Refer to Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Suspension Strut and Shock Absorber Testing - On Vehicle) . * Inspect the vehicle trim height. Refer to Trim Height Specifications (See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Suspension/System Specifications/Trim Height Specifications) . * Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. * Inspect the fuel level. The fuel tank should be full or the vehicle should have a compensating load added. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. If normally carried in the vehicle, these items should remain in the vehicle during alignment adjustments. Give consideration also to the condition of the equipment being used for the alignment. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment settings. However, if the setting exceeds the service allowable specifications, correct the alignment to the service preferred specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications) . Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. Important: When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front alignment angles. 4. Adjust alignment angles to vehicle specification, if necessary. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 2892 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Camber Adjustment Front Camber Adjustment Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle and provide suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies from the front and the rear axles. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the strut from the vehicle. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Suspension Strut/Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement) . 4. Place the strut in a vise and file the hole lateral - oblong. Compare the appearance of the holes before filing (2) with after filing (3). 5. File the lower strut-to-knuckle attaching hole for a front camber adjustment . Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 1. Install the strut to the vehicle. Refer to Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Suspension Strut/Strut, Strut Component, and Spring Replacement) . Tighten the strut-to-knuckle nuts as far as to allow movement of the knuckle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 2893 2. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 3. Adjust the camber (1). Tighten the strut-to-knuckle nuts to 130 N.m (96 lb ft). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 2894 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Remove the small seal clamp from the inner tie rod boot. 2. Position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position. 3. Loosen the hex nut on the tie rod (2). Turn the tie rod shaft (1) in order to obtain the proper toe angle. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications ( See: Specifications) . 4. Confirm the number of threads showing on each tie rod end is nearly equal. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Confirm that the tie rod ends (3) are square before you tighten the lock nuts (2). Tighten the hex nuts at the tie rod ends to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). Important: Ensure the seals do not twist. 6. Install the seal clamps. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 2895 Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. Loosen the jam nuts at the rear wheel spindle rod - rear. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 2896 2. Turn the adjusting nut to change the toe angle. 3. Adjust the toe to the proper setting. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications (See: Specifications) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Alignment Measurement > Page 2897 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Tighten the jam nuts on the rear wheel spindle rod - rear. Tighten the rear wheel spindle rod end jam nuts to 70 N.m (52 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Pressure: Technician Safety Information Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 2904 Fuel Pressure: Vehicle Damage Warnings Fuel Pressure Notice Notice: Do not allow the fuel pressure to exceed the specified value because damage to the fuel pressure regulator or the fuel pressure gage may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2907 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2908 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the fuel pump module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter and the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pump also supplies fuel to a venturi pump located on the bottom of the fuel pump module. The function of the venturi pump is to fill the fuel pump module reservoir. The fuel pressure regulator, a part of the fuel pump module, maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. Special Tools * CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage * J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Important: * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. You should hear the fuel pump turn ON and OFF. ^ If the fuel pump does not operate, refer to Fuel Pump Electrical Circuit Diagnosis. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH-48027. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. Circuit/System Testing Important: * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gage while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 2909 ^ If the fuel pressure is greater than the specified range, replace the fuel pump module. ^ If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 1. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Install the J 37287 between the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287. 4. Ignition ON, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH-48027. 5. Command the fuel pump relay ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, locate and replace the leaking fuel injector(s). ^ If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the fuel pump module. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 minutes. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the fuel pump module. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH-48027. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ^ If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 4. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Computers and Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement * Fuel Injector Replacement * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Not supplied by manufacturer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube from the air inlet duct. 2. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. 3. Remove the air inlet duct from the throttle body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2917 4. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. 5. Remove the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Install the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the MAF/IAT sensor. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2918 3. Install the air inlet duct to the throttle body. 4. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 5. Connect the PCV tube to the air inlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Release the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing cover. 4. Remove the air filter element. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW air filter element. 2. Install the air cleaner housing cover. 3. Engage the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Pressure Release: Procedures Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Remove the engine cover, if required. 3. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 6. Connect the CH-48027-3 (4) to the fuel rail service port. 7. Connect the CH-48027-2 (2) to the CH-48027-3 (4). 8. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 9. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 10. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 11. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2927 * The areas surrounding the connections Important: If relieving the fuel pressure for the fuel pressure gage installation and removal, it is NOT necessary to proceed with the following steps. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 12. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 13. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 14. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 15. Install the engine cover, if required. 16. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 3. Remove the engine cover, if required. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port and using a small flat-bladed tool, depress (open) the fuel rail test port valve. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 7. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 8. Install the engine cover, if required. 9. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2928 Fuel Pressure Release: Removal and Replacement Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2929 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ...........................................................397-1,337 ohms Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2936 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires. Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: * Tearing * Piercing * Arcing * Carbon tracking * Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2937 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair Spark Plug Wire Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spark plug wire from the spark plug. 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the spark plug. 2. Remove the spark plug wire from the ignition coil (724). 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the ignition coil. Installation Procedure 1. Install the spark plug wire to the ignition coil (724). 2. Install the spark plug wire to the spark plug. 3. Inspect the spark plug wire for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap.................................................................................................................................... .......................................................1.02 mm - 0.040 in Spark Plug Torque.......................................... ................................................................................................................................................15 N.m 11 lb ft Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2941 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type..........................................................................................................................................GM P/N 12571164 (AC Spark Plug P/N 41-985) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2942 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Verify that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling - colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage - hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2943 * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively-wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over-torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation - Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon Fouled - Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils * Worn ignition wires * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit Fouling - Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2944 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: This engine has aluminum cylinder heads. Do not remove the spark plugs from a hot engine, allow it to cool first. Removing the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause spark plug thread damage or cylinder head damage. 1. Remove the spark plug wire. 2. Loosen the spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or using compressed air, blow away any dirt from around the spark plug. 4. Remove the spark plug. If removing more than one plug, place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder number. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2945 1. Correctly position the spark plug washer. 2. Inspect the spark plug gap. Adjust the gap as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.016 mm (0.040 in). 3. Hand start the spark plug in the corresponding cylinder. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Tighten the spark plug. Tighten the plug to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 5. Install the spark plug wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2949 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Charge the battery if the battery is not fully charged. 2. Disable the ignition system. 3. Disable the fuel injection system. 4. Remove all spark plugs. 5. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 6. Depress the accelerator pedal to position the throttle plate wide open. 7. Start with the compression gage at zero and crank the engine through 4 compression strokes, 4 puffs. 8. Measure the compression for each cylinder. Record the readings. 9. If a cylinder has low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 tablespoon) of engine oil into the combustion chamber through the spark plug hole. Measure the compression again and record the reading. 10. The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any 1 cylinder is 1 035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). (1 035 x 70% = 725) (150 x 70% = 105). * Normal - Compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression for each cylinder. * Piston Rings Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression builds up with the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. * Valves Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression usually does not build up on the following strokes. Compression does not improve much when you add oil. * If 2 adjacent cylinders have lower than normal compression, and injecting oil into the cylinders does not increase the compression, the cause may be a head gasket leaking between the cylinders. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations ^ Inspect the sprockets for proper alignment. The mark on the camshaft sprocket (1) should be located in the 6 o'clock position and the mark on the crankshaft sprocket (2) should be located in the 12 o'clock position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2957 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 2958 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2959 Drive Belt: Service Precautions Belt Dressing Notice Notice: Do not use belt dressing on the drive belt. Belt dressing causes the breakdown of the composition of the drive belt. Failure to follow this recommendation will damage the drive belt. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2960 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: * The drive belt * The drive belt tensioner * The drive belt idler pulley * The crankshaft balancer pulley * The accessory drive component mounting brackets * The accessory drive components - The power steering pump, if belt driven - The generator - The A/C compressor, if equipped - The engine cooling fan, if belt driven - The water pump, if belt driven - The vacuum pump, if equipped - The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use 1 belt or 2 belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers, chloroprene or EPDM, and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids * A chirping or squeal noise may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belts or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belts in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. * If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. * A chirping, squeal or whine noise may be caused by a loose or improper installation of a body or suspension component. Other items of the vehicle may also cause the noise. * The drive belts will not cause a whine noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belts one at a time and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it can be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across 2 or 3 pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 15. This test is to verify that the drive belt is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 16. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across 2 or 3 pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 17. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. 19. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2963 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2964 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2965 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Excessive wear on a drive belt is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt fall off. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may have occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across 2 or 3 pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut , spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. 13. The inspection is to verify the drive belt is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt by one groove on a pulley. 14. The installation of a drive belt that is too wide or too narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 15. This inspection is to verify the drive belt is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2966 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2967 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. Vibration can be caused by, but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. The drive belt may have a rumbling condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt, completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belts are installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that one of the drive belts is causing the rumbling noise or vibration. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belts the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belts is to ensure that they are not causing the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. 9. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that the wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 11. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smooth operation and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 12. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 2968 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2969 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory Tools Required EN-47988 Serpentine Belt Tension Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the passenger side diagonal brace, if more clearance is required. Refer to Front Fender Upper Diagonal Brace Replacement . 2. Reposition the underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC), if more clearance is required. 3. Install the EN-47988 , to the drive belt tensioner. 4. Rotate the EN-47988 clockwise in order to relieve the tension on the belt tensioner. 5. Remove the drive belt (1) from over the power steering pump pulley. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2970 6. Slowly release the EN-47988 . 7. Remove the EN-47988 from the belt tensioner. 8. Remove the drive belt (1) from around all the other pulleys. 9. Clean and inspect the belt surfaces of all the pulleys. Installation Procedure 1. Install and route the drive belt around all the pulleys except for the power steering pump pulley. 2. Ensure that when installing the EN-47988 (1), to the belt tensioner that the EN-47988 is NOT installed above the drive belt (2). 3. Ensure that when installing the EN-47988 (1), to the belt tensioner that the EN-47988 is installed below the drive belt (2). 4. Rotate the EN-47988 clockwise in order to relieve the tension on the belt tensioner. 5. Ensure that the drive belt is still properly routed around all the other pulleys, then install the drive belt over the power steering pump pulley. 6. Slowly release the EN-47988 . 7. Remove the EN-47988 from the belt tensioner. 8. Inspect the drive belt for proper installation and alignment. 9. Position the UBEC, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2971 10. Install the passenger side diagonal brace, if required. Refer to Front Fender Upper Diagonal Brace Replacement . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube from the air inlet duct. 2. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. 3. Remove the air inlet duct from the throttle body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2977 4. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. 5. Remove the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Install the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the MAF/IAT sensor. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2978 3. Install the air inlet duct to the throttle body. 4. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 5. Connect the PCV tube to the air inlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Release the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing cover. 4. Remove the air filter element. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW air filter element. 2. Install the air cleaner housing cover. 3. Engage the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Position the windshield wipers in the UP position, by keying the ignition OFF when the wiper reach the desired position. 2. Open the hood. 3. Position aside the rear hood seal halfway to the center. Refer to Hood Rear Seal Replacement. 4. Remove the washer hose from the right air inlet grill panel and position aside. 5. Remove the 2 push pin retainers from the right air inlet grill panel. Important: Do not remove the third push pin retainer from the right air inlet grill panel. 6. Position the left side of the right air inlet grill panel on to the windshield. 7. Remove the water deflector cover. 8. Remove the passenger compartment air filter. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2985 1. Install the passenger compartment air filter. 2. Install the water deflector cover. Ensure the three tabs of the water deflector engage the rear cowl edge. 3. Install the air inlet grill panel into position. 4. Install the push pin retainers to the air inlet grill panel. 5. Position the washer hose in to the right air inlet grill panel clips. 6. Install the rear hood seal. 8. Return the windshield wipers to the PARK position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil pan (24) and the gasket (25). Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the filter (100). Remove the lip ring seal (101) pressed into the case only if replacement is necessary. 3. Inspect the oil pan and the filter for the following foreign material: * metal particles * clutch facing material * rubber particles * engine coolant 4. Determine the source of the contamination if foreign material is evident. 5. Correct the source of the contamination. Installation Procedure 1. If removed, install a new seal (101). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2989 2. Install the filter (100). 3. Install the gasket (25) and the oil pan (24). Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Pressure Release: Procedures Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Remove the engine cover, if required. 3. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 6. Connect the CH-48027-3 (4) to the fuel rail service port. 7. Connect the CH-48027-2 (2) to the CH-48027-3 (4). 8. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 9. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 10. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 11. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2995 * The areas surrounding the connections Important: If relieving the fuel pressure for the fuel pressure gage installation and removal, it is NOT necessary to proceed with the following steps. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 12. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 13. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 14. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 15. Install the engine cover, if required. 16. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 3. Remove the engine cover, if required. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port and using a small flat-bladed tool, depress (open) the fuel rail test port valve. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 7. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 8. Install the engine cover, if required. 9. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2996 Fuel Pressure Release: Removal and Replacement Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2997 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 3006 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Filter: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Filter: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 3012 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Filter: > 07-06-01-016B > Jul > 09 > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Filter: > 07-06-01-016B > Jul > 09 > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3022 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the oil fill cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). 5. Allow the oil to drain into an appropriate container. 6. Remove the engine oil filter (437). Allow the rest of the engine oil to drain into an appropriate container. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3023 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: Prior to installing a NEW oil filter, ensure that the old oil filter gasket has been removed from the engine block. If not, remove the old gasket. 1. Install a NEW engine oil filter (437). Tighten the filter to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 2. Install the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). Tighten the drain plug to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Fill the engine with the appropriate amount and type of NEW engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities and Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations . 5. Check the oil level. 6. Install the oil fill cap. 7. Close the hood. 8. Reset the engine oil life monitor, if necessary. Refer to GM Oil Life System Resetting . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Refrigerant Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Refrigerant Filter: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (AC) Refrigerant Filter Replacement Tools Required J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedure 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the A/C line coupling from the evaporator tube to condenser tube. 4. Disconnect the evaporator tube from the condenser. 5. Remove and discard the O-ring seals. 6. Remove the refrigerant filter from the evaporator tube. Installation Procedure 1. Replace the O-ring seals on the evaporator tube. 2. Install a new refrigerant filter to the evaporator tube. 3. Connect the evaporator tube to the condenser. 4. Install the A/C line coupling to the evaporator tube and condenser tube. 5. Install the air cleaner assembly. 6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 7. Leak test the fittings of the component using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Air Bleed Hose Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain a small amount of coolant from the radiator. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Reposition the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the coolant air bleed pipe (307). 3. Reposition the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the water manifold. 4. Remove the coolant air bleed hose from the water manifold. 5. Remove the coolant air bleed hose from the coolant air bleed pipe. 6. Remove the clamps from the coolant air bleed hose, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the clamps onto the coolant air bleed hose, if necessary. 2. Install the coolant air bleed hose onto the coolant air bleed pipe. 3. Install the coolant air bleed hose onto the water manifold. 4. Position the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the water manifold. 5. Position the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the coolant air bleed pipe (307). 6. Refill the coolant system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) , as necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose clamp at the heater pipe. Important: Cap or plug the cooling components to prevent system contamination. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose (1) from the heater pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3035 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose clamp at the heater core. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose (1) from the heater core. Installation Procedure 1. Connect heater inlet hose (1) to the heater core. 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose to the heater core clamp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3036 3. Install the heater inlet hose (1) to the heater pipe. 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose to the heater pipe clamp. 5. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3037 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater pipe. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3038 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose to the heater core clamp. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater core. Installation Procedure 1. Connect heater outlet hose (2) to the heater core. 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose to heater core clamp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3039 3. Install the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater pipe. 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose to the heater pipe clamp. 5. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3040 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 3. Release and reposition the heater inlet and outlet hose clamps using the J 38185. Important: Cap or plug the cooling components to prevent system contamination. 4. Remove the heater hoses from heater pipes. Notice: Do not apply excessive force on the heater core pipes during hose removal. Applying excessive force on the heater core pipes may damage the heater core pipes. 5. Remove the heater pipe assembly retaining bolts from the rear the of engine. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3041 6. Remove the heater pipe assembly retaining bolt from the front of the engine. 7. Release and reposition the heater pipe hose clamps at the engine using the J 38185. 8. Remove the heater pipe hoses from the engine. 9. Remove the heater pipe assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, carefully clean the sealing surfaces of the heater pipe assembly at the engine and heater hoses. 2. Install the heater pipe assembly into position in the vehicle. 3. Install the heater pipe hoses to the engine. 4. Reposition and release the heater pipe hose clamps at the engine using the J 38185. 5. Loosely install the heater pipe assembly retaining bolt to the front of the engine. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 3042 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Install the heater pipe assembly retaining bolts to the rear of the engine. Tighten all the heater pipe assembly bolts to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 7. Connect heater hoses to the heater pipe assembly. 8. Install the heater hose clamps into position using the J 38185. 9. Install the air cleaner assembly. 10. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement Tools Required J 39400-A Halogen Leak Detector Removal Procedure 1. Recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 2. Locate the A/C coupling assembly's locking tab access slots (1). Important: When separating the A/C coupling assembly, apply light pressure between the two halves of the coupling to prevent the Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement > Page 3047 locking tabs from reengaging. 3. Carefully insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into the first locking tab access slot and gently lift the locking tab to release the lock. 4. Carefully insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into the second locking tab access slot and gently lift the locking tab to release the lock. 5. Open and remove the A/C coupling assembly from the A/C refrigerant component. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement > Page 3048 Important: Inspect the A/C coupling assembly locking tabs for damage or wear. Replace the A/C coupler assembly if any conditions exist. 1. Install the A/C coupling assembly to the A/C refrigerant component. Important: Ensure that the A/C coupling assembly is latched securely to the A/C refrigerant component. 2. Close the A/C coupling assembly. 3. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging. 4. Leak test the fittings of the component using J 39400-A. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement > Page 3049 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement Compressor Hose Assembly Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement > Page 3050 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning Line/Tube Connector Removal/Replacement > Page 3051 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Suction Screen Replacement Suction Screen Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service Precautions Power Steering Line/Hose: Service Precautions Power Steering Hose Disconnected Notice Notice: Do not start the vehicle with any power steering gear inlet or outlet hoses disconnected. When disconnected, plug or cap all openings of components. Failure to do so could result in contamination or loss of power steering fluid and damage to the system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3057 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3058 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3059 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3060 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3061 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3062 Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3063 Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3064 Power Steering Return Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Return Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) > Page 3065 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (5.3L) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 3070 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (5.3L) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Including Reservoir ................................................................................................................................................ 13.3 quarts (12.6 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3081 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-037E Date: April 07, 2011 Subject: Release of DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saturn Relay 2005 and Prior Saturn L-Series 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2005-2008 Saturn VUE with 4T45-E 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Except 2008 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Equinox Except 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Epica Except 2007 and Prior Chevrolet Optra Except 2008 and Prior Pontiac Torrent, Vibe, Wave Except 2003-2005 Saturn ION with CVT or AF23 Only Except 1991-2002 Saturn S-Series Except 2008 and Prior Saturn VUE with CVT, AF33 or 5AT (MJ7/MJ8) Transmission Only Except 2008 Saturn Astra Attention: DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-037D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSFER CASES and POWER STEERING The content of this bulletin does not apply to manual transmissions or transfer cases. Any vehicle that previously required DEXRON(R)-III for a manual transmission or transfer case should now use P/N 88861800. This fluid is labeled Manual Transmission and Transfer Case Fluid. Some manual transmissions and transfer cases require a different fluid. Appropriate references should be checked when servicing any of these components. Power Steering Systems should now use P/N 9985010 labeled Power Steering Fluid. Consult the Parts Catalog, Owner's Manual, or Service Information (SI) for fluid recommendations. Some of our customers and/or General Motors dealerships/Saturn Retailers may have some concerns with DEXRON(R)-VI and DEXRON(R)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and transmission warranty claims. DEXRON(R)-VI is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids (except as noted above). Please remember that the clean oil reservoirs of the J-45096 - Flushing and Flow Tester machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI for testing, flushing or filling General Motors transmissions/transaxles (except as noted above). DEXRON(R)-VI can be used in any proportion in past model vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission/transaxle in place of DEXRON(R)-III (i.e. topping off the fluid in the event of a repair or fluid change). DEXRON(R)-VI is also compatible with any former version of DEXRON(R) for use in automatic transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON(R)-VI ATF General Motors Powertrain has upgraded to DEXRON(R)-VI ATF with the start of 2006 vehicle production. Current and prior automatic transmission models that had used DEXRON(R)-III must now only use DEXRON(R)-VI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 3086 All 2006 and future model transmissions that use DEXRON(R)-VI are to be serviced ONLY with DEXRON(R)-VI fluid. DEXRON(R)-VI is an improvement over DEXRON(R)-III in the following areas: * These ATF change intervals remain the same as DEXRON(R)-III for the time being. 2006-2008 Transmission Fill and Cooler Flushing Some new applications of the 6L80 six speed transmission will require the use of the J 45096 Flushing and Flow Tester to accomplish transmission fluid fill. The clean oil reservoir of the machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 3087 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 3088 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Bottom Pan Removal (2WD) ............................................................................................................... ....................................................... 7.0L (7.4 Quarts) Complete Overhaul (2WD) .............................. ......................................................................................................................................... 9.5L (10.0 Quarts) Dry (2WD) ............................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 12.7L (13.4 Quarts) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3091 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3092 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Transmission Fluid Check Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 3101 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 3107 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 3108 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 3113 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 3119 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 3120 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3123 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for two things: 1.GM6094M Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. 2.SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3124 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the oil fill cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). 5. Allow the oil to drain into an appropriate container. 6. Remove the engine oil filter (437). Allow the rest of the engine oil to drain into an appropriate container. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3125 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: Prior to installing a NEW oil filter, ensure that the old oil filter gasket has been removed from the engine block. If not, remove the old gasket. 1. Install a NEW engine oil filter (437). Tighten the filter to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 2. Install the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). Tighten the drain plug to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Fill the engine with the appropriate amount and type of NEW engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities and Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations . 5. Check the oil level. 6. Install the oil fill cap. 7. Close the hood. 8. Reset the engine oil life monitor, if necessary. Refer to GM Oil Life System Resetting . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING SYSTEM GM Power Steering Fluid GM P/N 89021184 (Canadian P/N 89021186) or equivalent. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3129 Power Steering Fluid: Service Precautions Using Proper Power Steering Fluid Notice Notice: When adding fluid or making a complete fluid change, always use the proper power steering fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid will cause hose and seal damage and fluid leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Equipment Bulletin No.: 08-01-38-001 Date: January 25, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Information On New GE-48800 CoolTech Refrigerant Recovery/Recharge Equipment Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Attention: This bulletin is being issued to announce the release of GM approved Air Conditioning (A/C) Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Equipment that meets the new Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2788 Refrigerant Recovery Standards. The ACR2000 (J-43600) cannot be manufactured in its current state after December 2007 and will be superseded by GE-48800. The new J2788 standard does not require that GM Dealers replace their ACR2000 units. ACR2000's currently in use are very capable of servicing today's refrigerant systems when used correctly and can continue to be used. Details regarding the new SAE J2788 standard are outlined in GM Bulletin 07-01-38-004. Effective February 1 2008, new A/C Refrigerant Recovery/Recharging equipment (P/N GE-48800) will be released as a required replacement for the previously essential ACR2000 (J-43600). This equipment is SAE J2788 compliant and meets GM requirements for A/C Refrigerant System Repairs on all General Motors vehicles, including Hybrid systems with Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil. This equipment will not be shipped as an essential tool to GM Dealerships. In addition, this equipment is Hybrid compliant and designed to prevent oil cross contamination when servicing Hybrid vehicles with Electric A/C Compressors that use POE refrigerant oil. The ACR2000 (J-43600) will need to be retrofitted with a J-43600-50 (Hose - ACR2000 Oil Flush Loop) to be able to perform Hybrid A/C service work. All Hybrid dealers will receive the J-43600-50, with installation instructions, as a component of the Hybrid essential tool package. Dealerships that do not sell Hybrids, but may need to service Hybrids, can obtain J-43600-50 from SPX Kent Moore. Refer to GM Bulletin 08-01-39-001 for the ACR2000 Hose Flush procedure. The High Voltage (HV) electric A/C compressor used on Two Mode Hybrid vehicles uses a Polyolester (POE) refrigerant oil instead of a Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oil. This is due to the better electrical resistance of the POE oil and its ability to provide HV isolation. Failure to flush the hoses before adding refrigerant to a Hybrid vehicle with an electric A/C compressor may result in an unacceptable amount of PAG oil entering the refrigerant system. It may cause a Battery Energy Control Module Hybrid Battery Voltage System Isolation Lost Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC P1AE7) to be set. Additionally, the A/C system warranty will be voided. Warranty Submission Requirements The Electronically Generated Repair Data (snapshot summary) and printer functions have been eliminated from the GE-48800. The VGA display and temperature probes were eliminated to reduce equipment costs. As a result, effective immediately the 18 digit "Snapshot/Charge Summary" code is no longer required for Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system repairs that are submitted for warranty reimbursement. The charge summary data from before and after system repairs will continue to required, but documented on the repair order only. Both high and low pressures and the recovery and charge amounts should be noted during the repair and entered on the repair order. If using ACR2000 (J-43600), the "Snapshot/Charge Summary" printouts should continue to be attached to the shops copy of the repair order. The labor codes that are affected by this requirement are D3000 through D4500. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant System Capacities Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3136 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant System Capacities Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3137 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Recovery and Recharging Tools Required * J 43600 ACR 2000 Air Conditioning Service Center * J 45037 A/C Oil Injector Caution: Avoid breathing the A/C Refrigerant 134a (R-134a) and the lubricant vapor or the mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and throat. Work in a well ventilated area. In order to remove R-134a from the A/C system, use service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J 2210 (R-134a recycling equipment). If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before continuing service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. Caution: For personal protection, goggles and gloves should be worn and a clean cloth wrapped around fittings, valves, and connections when doing work that includes opening the refrigerant system. If R-134a comes in contact with any part of the body severe frostbite and personal injury can result. The exposed area should be flushed immediately with cold water and prompt medical help should be obtained. Notice: R-134a is the only approved refrigerant for use in this vehicle. The use of any other refrigerant may result in poor system performance or component failure. Notice: To avoid system damage use only R-134a dedicated tools when servicing the A/C system. Notice: Use only Polyalkylene Glycol Synthetic Refrigerant Oil (PAG) for internal circulation through the R-134a A/C system and only 525 viscosity mineral oil on fitting threads and O-rings. If lubricants other than those specified are used, compressor failure and/or fitting seizure may result. Notice: R-12 refrigerant and R-134a refrigerant must never be mixed, even in the smallest of amounts, as they are incompatible with each other. If the refrigerants are mixed, compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to the manufacturer instructions included with the service equipment before servicing. The J 43600 is a complete air conditioning service center for R-134a. The ACR 2000 recovers, recycles, evacuates and recharges A/C refrigerant quickly, accurately and automatically. The unit has a display screen that contains the function controls and displays prompts that will lead the technician through the recover, recycle, evacuate and recharge operations. R-134a is recovered into and charged out of an internal storage vessel. The ACR 2000 automatically replenishes this vessel from an external source tank in order to maintain a constant 5.45-6.82 kg (12-15 lbs) of A/C refrigerant. The ACR 2000 has a built in A/C refrigerant identifier that will test for contamination, prior to recovery and will notify the technician if there are foreign gases present in the A/C system. If foreign gases are present, the ACR 2000 will not recover the refrigerant from the A/C system. The ACR 2000 also features automatic air purge, single pass recycling and an automatic oil drain. Refer to the J 43600 ACR 2000 manual for operation and setup instruction. Always recharge the A/C System with the proper amount of R-134a. Refer to Refrigerant System Capacities for the correct amount. A/C Refrigerant System Oil Charge Replenishing If oil was removed from the A/C system during the recovery process or due to component replacement, the oil must be replenished. Oil can be injected into a charged system using J 45037. For the proper quantities of oil to add to the A/C refrigerant system, refer to Refrigerant System Capacities. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Specifications PAG Oil GM P/N 12378526 for United States PAG Oil GM P/N 88900060 for Canada Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Important: * Before performing the ABS Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . * The automated bleed procedure must be performed when a new brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) is installed, because the secondary circuits of the new BPMV are not prefilled with brake fluid. * The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: * Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel * Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred * Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out away from the brake modulator assembly, which is then forced out at the brake corners by the pressure bleeder. Automated Bleed Procedure Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Prepare the brake bleeding equipment and the vehicle for a pressure bleed of the base hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . 6. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test . 7. Install a scan tool. 8. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 9. With the scan tool, perform the following steps: 1. Select Diagnostics 2. Select the appropriate vehicle information 3. Select Chassis 4. Select Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5. Select Special Functions 6. Select Automated Bleed 10. With an assistant ready, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Important: * Apply the brake pedal when instructed, using moderate effort. * Ensure the pedal remains applied until instructed to release by the scan tool. * Do not exceed the time period allowed by the scan tool for having the bleeder valves open. * The bleed sequence for each corner is as follows: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 3145 - Left front - Right front Right rear - Left rear 11. Perform the automated bleed procedure as instructed by the scan tool. 12. If the automated bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to diagnose the DTC. 13. After completion of the automated bleed procedure, press and hold the brake pedal to inspect for pedal firmness. 14. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleed procedure completely. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Adjust the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling) . 19. Road test the vehicle while confirming the brake pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 3146 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding Manual Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. Important: If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding, disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, replaced the ABS pressure modulator valve, or disconnected the jumper lines from the master cylinder to the ABS pressure valve, you MUST use the pressure bleeding procedure to remove all the air from the system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 4. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 5. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 6. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 7-9 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 19. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Important: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure (See: ) must be performed. 20. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection) . 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 21. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 3147 22. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Pressure Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Tools Required * J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent * J 35589-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, replaced the ABS pressure modulator valve, or disconnected the brake lines between master cylinder and ABS on this vehicle, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. If removal of the reservoir cap is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port, and rotate the line at the master cylinder at least 30 degrees, so that the line will be positioned BELOW the MAX fill line on the brake master cylinder reservoir. Tighten the line nut securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.5-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder - after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.5-3.7, ensuring that the line is rotated below the master cylinder MAX fill line. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened, and that they remain in their new rotated positions below the MAX fill line of the brake fluid reservoir. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 35589-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Check the brake fluid level in the J 29532 , or equivalent. Add Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the half-full point. 7. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 35589-A . 8. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 14. Repeat steps 11-13 for the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. It is important that both bleeder valves be open at the same time. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 16. With the right rear and left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear and left front hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR and RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 3148 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat step 15. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Loosen the rear master cylinder jumper line nut slightly (just enough to rotate the line), and rotate the rear master cylinder hydraulic pipe back to the original position, and tighten the line nut. 20. Reposition the front master cylinder jumper line to the original position in a similar manner to step 19. 21. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 35589-A . 22. Remove the J 35589-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 23. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 24. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 25. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection) . 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the BPMV. Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure (See: ) . 26. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 27. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 3149 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. 1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination: * Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Swirled appearance - oil-based substance - Layered appearance - silicone-based substance * Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Cloudy appearance - moisture - Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust 2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid contamination. 3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated by fluid separation and/or a swollen master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform the following: 1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Overhaul (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Overhaul) or Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) ; also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement) . Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 3150 * Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Brake Caliper Overhaul) or Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul) or Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust, corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system. 5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canada P/N 992667) or equivalent, DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair SIR Disabling and Enabling SIR component location affects how a vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the SIR system installed in various locations around a vehicle. To find the location of the SIR components refer to SIR Identification Views. There are several reasons for disabling the SIR system, such as repairs to the SIR system or servicing a component near or attached to an SIR component. There are several ways to disable the SIR system depending on what type of service is being performed. The following information covers the proper procedures for disabling/enabling the SIR system. SIR Service Precautions Caution: When performing service on or near the SIR components or the SIR wiring, the SIR system must be disabled. Failure to observe the correct procedure could cause deployment of the SIR components. Serious injury can occur. Failure to observe the correct procedure could also result in unnecessary SIR system repairs. The inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy supply. The reserved energy supply provides deployment power for the air bags if the SDM loses battery power during a collision. Deployment power is available for as much as 1 minute after disconnecting the vehicle power. Waiting 1 minute before working on the system after disabling the SIR system prevents deployment of the air bags from the reserved energy supply. General Service Instructions The following are general service instructions which must be followed in order to properly repair the vehicle and return it to its original integrity: * Do not expose inflator modules to temperatures above 65°C (150°F). * Verify the correct replacement part number. Do not substitute a component from a different vehicle. * Use only original GM replacement parts available from your authorized GM dealer. Do not use salvaged parts for repairs to the SIR system. Discard any of the following components if it has been dropped from a height of 91 cm (3 feet) or greater: * Inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) * Any Inflatable restraint air bag module * Inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil * Any Inflatable restraint sensor * Inflatable restraint seat belt pretensioners * Inflatable restraint Passenger Presence System (PPS) module or sensor Disabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. Important: The SDM may have more than one fused power input. To ensure there is no unwanted SIR deployment, personal injury, or unnecessary SIR system repairs, remove all fuses supplying power to the SDM. With all SDM fuses removed and the ignition switch in the ON position, the AIR BAG warning indicator illuminates. This is normal operation, and does not indicate a SIR system malfunction. 3. Locate and remove the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. 4. Wait 1 minute before working on the system. Enabling Procedure - Air Bag Fuse Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3154 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Install the fuse(s) supplying power to the SDM. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle Disabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicles wheels are pointing straight ahead. 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 3. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery. 4. Wait 1 minute before working on system. Enabling Procedure - Negative Battery Cable 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 2. Connect the negative battery cable to the battery. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The AIR BAG indicator will flash then turn OFF. 4. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle if the AIR BAG warning indicator does not operate as described. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Circuit Breaker 1 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Circuit Breaker 2 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3159 Circuit Breaker 3 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Fuse: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Bulletin No.: 07-08-43-004C Date: November 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: EI07089 - Windshield Washer Inoperative, Poor Performance (Replace WSW Fuse) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include 2008 Impala. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-43-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customer's may comment that the windshield washer pump operation is intermittent. Correction DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP. Engineering has determined that windshield washer pump intermittent operation or poor performance conditions may be corrected by replacing the current 10 amp WSW fuse with a 15 amp fuse. The WSW (windshield washer) fuse is located in the UBEC (underhood bussed electrical center). Be sure to update the UBEC fuse label to indicate the use of a 15 amp fuse for the Windshield Washer (WSW). Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance > Page 3168 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Bulletin No.: 07-08-43-004C Date: November 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: EI07089 - Windshield Washer Inoperative, Poor Performance (Replace WSW Fuse) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include 2008 Impala. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-43-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customer's may comment that the windshield washer pump operation is intermittent. Correction DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP. Engineering has determined that windshield washer pump intermittent operation or poor performance conditions may be corrected by replacing the current 10 amp WSW fuse with a 15 amp fuse. The WSW (windshield washer) fuse is located in the UBEC (underhood bussed electrical center). Be sure to update the UBEC fuse label to indicate the use of a 15 amp fuse for the Windshield Washer (WSW). Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance > Page 3174 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 07-08-45-002 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 07-08-45-002 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK The fuse block is located on the passenger side of the vehicle in the carpet molding. Remove the fuse block door to access the fuses. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... USAGE PWR/SEAT .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... Power Seats PWR/WNDW ....................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... Power Window RAP ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................... Retained Accessory Power HTD/SEAT .......................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Heated Seats AUX ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Auxiliary Outlets AMP ............................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Amplifier S/ROOF ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................ Sunroof XM ......................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... XM Radio CNSTR ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................. Canister DR/LCK .............................................. ............................................................................................................................................................ Door Locks Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 3186 PWR/MIR ............................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... Power Mirrors AIRBAG ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................... Airbags TRUNK ................................................................................................................................................ .................................................................... Trunk TRUNK ................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... Trunk Relay Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 3187 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 3188 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 3189 Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 3190 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 3191 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3194 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3195 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3196 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3197 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3198 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3199 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3200 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3201 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3202 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3203 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3204 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3205 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3206 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3207 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3208 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3209 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3210 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3211 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3212 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3213 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3214 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3215 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3216 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3217 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3218 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3219 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3220 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3221 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3222 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3223 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3224 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3225 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3226 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3227 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3228 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3229 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3230 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3231 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3232 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3233 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3234 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3235 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3236 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3237 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3238 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3239 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3240 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3241 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3242 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3243 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3244 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3245 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3246 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3247 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3248 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3249 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3250 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3251 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3252 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3253 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3254 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3255 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3256 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3257 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3258 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3259 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3260 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3261 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3262 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3263 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3264 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3265 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3266 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3267 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3268 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3269 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3270 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3271 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3272 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3273 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3274 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3275 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3276 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3280 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3283 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3284 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3285 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3286 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3287 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3288 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3289 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3290 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3291 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3292 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3293 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3294 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3295 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3296 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3297 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3298 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3299 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3300 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3301 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3302 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3303 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3304 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3305 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3306 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3307 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3308 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3309 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3310 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3311 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3312 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3313 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3314 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3315 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3316 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3317 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3318 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3319 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3320 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3323 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3324 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3325 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 3326 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel Harness - Rear of the Instrument Panel Carrier 1 - J282 2 - J203 3 - J239 4 - J250 5 - J218 6 - Instrument Panel Carrier 7 - J259 8 - J269 9 - Fuse Block - Auxiliary Right Front of the Passenger Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 3331 1 - Dash Panel 2 - Fuse Block - Instrument Panel 3 - X303 4 - G302 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 3332 Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Battery Attachments (LZE/LZ4/LZ8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 3333 1 - G102 2 - X105 3 - Fuse Block - Underhood Positive Battery Cable Terminal 4 - Battery 5 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 3334 Fuse Block: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3350 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3351 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3352 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3353 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3354 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3355 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3356 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3357 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3358 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3359 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3360 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3361 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3362 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3363 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3364 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3365 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3366 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3367 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3368 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3369 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3370 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3371 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3372 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3373 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3374 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3375 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3376 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3377 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3378 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3379 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3380 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3381 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3382 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3383 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3384 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3385 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3386 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3387 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3388 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3389 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3390 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3391 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3392 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3393 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3394 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3395 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3396 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3397 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3398 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3399 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3400 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3401 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3402 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3403 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3404 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3405 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3406 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3407 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3408 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3409 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3410 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3411 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3412 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3413 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3414 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3415 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3416 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3417 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3418 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3419 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3420 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3421 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3422 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3423 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3424 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3425 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3426 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3427 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3428 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3429 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3430 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3431 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3432 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3433 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3434 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3435 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3436 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3437 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3438 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3439 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3440 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3441 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3442 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3443 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3444 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3445 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3446 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3447 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3448 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3449 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3450 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3451 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3452 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3453 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3454 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3455 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3456 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3457 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3458 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3459 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3460 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3461 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3462 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3464 Fuse Block: Connector Views Underhood Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood - Top View Fuse Block - Underhood - Bottom View Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3465 Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3466 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3467 Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3468 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3469 Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3470 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3471 Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3472 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3473 I/P Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P Top View Fuse Block - I/P X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3474 Fuse Block - I/P X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3475 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) > Page 3478 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover (1). 2. Disconnect the positive battery cable from junction box. 3. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). 4. Unlock the tabs on the electrical center board. 5. Lift up on the electrical center board. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) > Page 3479 6. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center bracket (2) to vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 1. Install fasteners (1) securing the electrical center (2) to vehicle. Tighten the fasteners to 10 N.m (86 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) > Page 3480 2. Install the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). Tighten the fasteners to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Connect the positive battery cable. 4. Install the electrical center cover (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3486 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3487 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3488 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3489 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3490 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair SERVICE VEHICLE SOON or SERVICE ENGINE SOON INDICATOR If your vehicle is equipped with a "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator. This indicator is not a maintenance indicator and does not mean a maintenance service is required. For additional "SERVICE VEHICLE SOON"or a "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" indicator information refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp. For Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator, refer to Oil Change Reminder Lamp. See: Oil Change Reminder Lamp/Service and Repair Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module (ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. Circuit/System Verification Ignition ON, the MIL should turn ON and OFF when commanded with a scan tool. Circuit/System Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the instrument panel cluster (IPC). 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the ignition circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal and the ignition circuit fuse is open, replace the IPC. 3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit and the ignition circuit. 4. Command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states. ^ If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. ^ If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 5. If all circuits test normal, replace the IPC. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Instrument Cluster Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM WHEN TO CHANGE ENGINE OIL Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message will come on. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. HOW TO RESET THE ENGINE OIL LIFE SYSTEM The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior to a "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message being turned on, reset the system. Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil Life System: 1. Display the "OIL LIFE REMAINING" on the Driver Information Center (DIC). 2. Press and hold the "SET/RESET" button on the DIC for more than five seconds. The oil life will change to 100%. If the "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" message comes back on when you start your vehicle, the Engine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeat the procedure. WHAT TO DO WITH USED OIL Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling center for help. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Vehicle Lifting: Technician Safety Information Vehicle Lifting Caution Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to the hoist. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 3505 Vehicle Lifting: Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Lifting and Jacking Notice Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3506 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to the hoist. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Automotive Lift and Floor Jack Contact Points 1 - Floor Jacking-Front Location 2 - Suspension Contact Lift-Front Location 3 - Frame Contact Lift-Front Location 4 - Frame Contact Lift-Rear Location 5 - Suspension Contact Lift-Rear Location 6 - Floor Jacking-Rear Location Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3507 When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads at the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads at the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Lifting-Suspension Contact Lift When lifting the vehicle with a suspension-contact lift, place the front post lift points at the lower control arms in the area shown (1). Lift the rear of the vehicle with the rear post lift points ONLY under the rear wheels. Vehicle Jacking Under the Front Frame When lifting the front of the vehicle with a floor jack, place the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front frame. Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3508 Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3523 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3524 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3525 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3526 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3527 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3528 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement (Snap In Style) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 3. Dismount the tire from the rim. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . Important: When servicing the tire pressure sensor always use a new Schrader(R) tire pressure monitor (TPM) and a new TORX screw during installation. 4. Remove the TORX screw (1) from the tire pressure sensor (2) and pull it straight off the tire pressure valve stem (3). Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 5. Remove the tire pressure valve stem by pulling it through the rim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3529 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: * Ensure the flat of the valve, lines up with the flats of the snap in the enclosure. * TPM valves and TORX screws are one-time use only. 1. Assemble the tire pressure sensor (2) to the valve stem and install the new TORX screw (3). Tighten the TORX screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). Important: Use and approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 2. Apply tire soap to the rubber portion of the valve stem (1). 3. Using a tire valve stem mounting tool, pull the valve stem through in a direction parallel to the valve hole on the rim. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3530 Important: Snap Fit TPM sensors are still shipped in the OFF mode. However, the TPM no longer needs to be spun to remove it from the OFF mode. The sensor will exit its OFF state when the tire is inflated. The technician can then program the vehicle as normal. 4. Mount the tire to the rim. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor Learn () . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3536 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3537 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3538 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3539 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3540 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Module: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3553 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - TPM Sensor Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-16-003 Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Warranty Reduction - Transfer of Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors to Replacement Wheels and Allowable TPM Sensor Replacements Models: 2000-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7x with On-Wheel TPM Sensors TPM Sensor / Wheel Warranty Reviews During the last warranty review period it was noted that wheels being returned under the GM New Vehicle Warranty were being shipped back to General Motors with the TPM sensor still attached to the wheel. Return rates ran as high as 60% with the TPM sensors still attached. Operational TPM sensors should not be returned to GM and are to be transferred to replacement wheels if they become necessary. Important: Operational TPM Sensors that are returned under warranty to General Motors will be charged back to the dealer.Sensors have a 10 year /150,000 mile (240,000 km) battery life, and should be transferred if one or more wheels are replaced. TPM Valve Stem / Grommet (0-ring) Replacement When the TPM sensors are transferred to new wheels you should replace the component used to seal the TPM sensor stem to the wheel. On sensors with an aluminum stem and visible nut on the outside of the wheel a replacement grommet (0-ring) should be used to assure a proper seal. The sensor retaining nut (except Aveo) should be tightened to 7 N.m (62 lb in) for all vehicles except Pontiac Vibe (4.0 N.m (35.4 lb in)). Important: ^ DO NOT overtorque the retaining nut. Notice: ^ Factory installed TPM Sensors come with plastic aluminum or nickel-plated brass stem caps. These caps should not be changed. Chrome plated steel caps may cause corrosion of aluminum valve stems due to incompatibility of the metals. On current style sensors the entire rubber stem is replaceable. The service interval on the revised TPM sensor with replaceable stem is the same as for any other traditional valve stem. Replace the stem at the time of tire replacement sensor transfer or whenever air seepage is suspected at the valve stem. When replacing the valve stem tighten the screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). For either style of TPM sensor see the service parts guide for the correct GM part numbers to order and use. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3554 Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Minimizing Damage to TPM Sensors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-007 Date: May 16, 2008 Subject: Minimizing Damage to Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Sensors During Tire Mounting/Dismounting Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors Minimizing Damage To TPM Sensors All GM vehicles now in production and sold in the U.S., as well as many vehicles sold in Canada, feature Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems that have valve stem mounted Tire Pressure Sensors. When dismounting and mounting tires, care must be taken when breaking the bead loose from the wheel. If the tire machines bead breaking fixture is positioned too close to the tire pressure sensor, as the tire bead breaks away from the wheel it may be forced into, or catch on the edge of the tire pressure sensor. This can damage the sensor and require the sensor to be replaced. Care must also be taken when transferring the tire bead to the other side of the wheel rim. As the tire machine rotates and the tire bead is stretched around the wheel rim, the bead can come in contact with the sensor if it is not correctly positioned in relation to the mounting/dismounting head prior to tire mounting/dismounting. This can also cause sensor damage requiring replacement. Procedure Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 1. Remove the valve core from the valve stem. 2. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp European-type tire changers are recommended. 3. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Follow steps 4-7 to remove the tire from the wheel. 4. When separating the tire bead from the wheel position the bead breaking fixture 90, 180 and 270 degrees from the valve stem. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3555 5. Position the wheel and tire so the valve stem is situated at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the outer tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 6. Position the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated again at the 2 o'clock position relative to the head. The tire iron or pry bar can be inserted when prying the inner tire bead up and over the mounting/dismounting head. 7. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM replace the tire pressure sensor. 8. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Important: If bead seat corrosion has been identified as an air loss concern on the wheel being worked on, refer to GM Service Bulletin # 08-03-10-006 for additional information on correcting the leak. 9. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (in Canada, P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3556 10. Using the tire machine, rotate the tire/wheel assembly clockwise when transferring the tire bead to the inside of the wheel rim. 11. Position the rim so that the valve stem (1) is situated at the 3 o'clock position relative to the head (2). This will protect the sensor when the bottom bead seats. 12. After the bottom bead is on the wheel, reposition the wheel and tire so that the valve stem is situated at the 9 o'clock position relative to the head. This will protect the sensor while mounting the tire bead to the outside of the wheel. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs > Page 3557 13. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, lubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflating may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Important: Allowable bead seating pressure is 345 kPa (50 psi) on Extended Mobility Tires. 14. Inflate the tire until it passes the bead humps. Be sure that the valve core is not installed at this time. 15. Install the valve core to the valve core stem. 16. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 17. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Parts Information The product shown above is available from GM SPO. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3558 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement (Snap In Style) Removal Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable support. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire/wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 3. Dismount the tire from the rim. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . Important: When servicing the tire pressure sensor always use a new Schrader(R) tire pressure monitor (TPM) and a new TORX screw during installation. 4. Remove the TORX screw (1) from the tire pressure sensor (2) and pull it straight off the tire pressure valve stem (3). Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. 5. Remove the tire pressure valve stem by pulling it through the rim. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3559 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: * Ensure the flat of the valve, lines up with the flats of the snap in the enclosure. * TPM valves and TORX screws are one-time use only. 1. Assemble the tire pressure sensor (2) to the valve stem and install the new TORX screw (3). Tighten the TORX screw to 1.3 N.m (11.5 lb in). Important: Use and approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 2. Apply tire soap to the rubber portion of the valve stem (1). 3. Using a tire valve stem mounting tool, pull the valve stem through in a direction parallel to the valve hole on the rim. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3560 Important: Snap Fit TPM sensors are still shipped in the OFF mode. However, the TPM no longer needs to be spun to remove it from the OFF mode. The sensor will exit its OFF state when the tire is inflated. The technician can then program the vehicle as normal. 4. Mount the tire to the rim. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 5. Install the tire/wheel assembly on the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Learn the tire pressure sensors. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor Learn () . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3565 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3566 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3567 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3569 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 10-03-16-001 > Jul > 10 > TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3579 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3580 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3581 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3582 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3583 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires > Page 3588 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips # 09-03-16-002A: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information - (Apr 27, 2010) Subject: Dealership Service Consultant Procedure as Vehicle Comes into Service Drive for Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System Message, Light and Customer Information Models: 2006-2011 Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 ATTENTION The information found in this bulletin is to be used as a dealership service consultant procedures for customers coming into the service lane with an illuminated "low tire light" or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. Maintaining proper tire pressures is an Owner's Maintenance item and is not covered under warranty. This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update additional bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-03-16-002 (Section 03 -- Suspension). Customer Concerns and Confusion with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System The following procedure should be used by dealership service consultants when a customer comes into the service drive with a "low tire light" on or comments on a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire or service tire monitor system message. The service consultant should perform the following steps: Procedure Turn the key to ON, without starting the engine. ^ If the low tire light comes on and stays on solid with a check tire pressure/low tire pressure/add air to tire message (on vehicles equipped with DIC), advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels and driving the vehicle will turn the light off (refer to the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". ^ If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light blinks for one minute then stays on solid with a service tire monitor system message (on vehicles equipped with DIC): - A TPM system problem exists. The vehicle should be written up accordingly and sent to your service department for further DTC diagnosis and service. - If dashes (--) are displayed in only one or two of the tire pressure readouts, it is likely caused by a previous TPM system relearn that was performed incorrectly due to interference from another vehicle's TPM system during the relearn process (refer to the Important statement later in this bulletin regarding TPM relearn with a Tech 2(R)). - If dashes (--) are displayed in all four of the tire pressure readouts, there is a system problem. Follow the appropriate SI service procedures. ^ If a customer indicates the low tire light comes on for a few minutes when the vehicle is started, then goes off after driving a while, advise the customer: - The system is working properly. - Most likely, air pressure in one or more of the tires is low enough to turn the light on when tires are cold. After driving for a while, tires will heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3593 up, allowing tire air pressure to increase above the threshold causing the light to go off. Properly adjusting all tire air pressures to the recommended levels will correct this (Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Label on the driver side door). - More detailed information can be found in the Owner Manual. - Service is not covered under warranty - this maintenance is the responsibility of the owner. - Give the customer a copy of the "GM Customer TPMS Information". For more detailed information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-16-004C and TPMS Training Course 13044.12T2. Tire Pressure Light At key on, without starting the vehicle: Steady Solid Glowing TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a steady glowing yellow lamp (as above), the system is functioning properly and you should add air to the tires to correct this condition. Blinking TPM Indicator If the TPM indicator appears as a BLINKING yellow lamp for one minute and then stays on solid, diagnostic service is needed. The Effect of Outside Temperature on Tire Pressures Important: As a rule of thumb, tire pressure will change about 7kPa (1 psi) for every 6°C (10°F) decrease in temperature - Tire pressure will drop when it gets colder outside, and rise when it gets warmer. Under certain situations such as extreme outside temperature changes, the system may bring on a solid light with a check tire pressure message. This should be considered normal and the system is working properly. The light will turn off upon adding the proper amount of air to the tires (refer to the Tire & Loading Information label in the driver's door opening). When properly adjusting tire air pressure, the following steps are important to help optimize the system and prolong bringing a tire pressure light on: ^ Use an accurate, high quality tire pressure gauge. ^ Never set the tire pressure below the specified placard value regardless of tire temperature or ambient temperature. ^ Tire pressure should be set to the specified placard pressure at the lowest seasonal temperature the vehicle will encounter during operation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3594 ^ When adding proper tire air pressure, it is important to remember fluctuations in outside air temperatures and tire temperatures effect tire air pressures. ^ After you have added the proper tire pressure, if the vehicle has a DIC (after the system has updated), check to see if DIC displays are the same readings as the tire pressure gauge used (adjust as necessary). ^ Only perform a TPM sensor re-learn after a tire rotation or system part replacements and use the Tech 2(R) to initiate the relearn whenever possible to avoid invalid sensor I.D. learns. Important: Always take outside temperature and tire temperature into consideration to properly set tire pressures. Foe example, on colder days (20°F/-7°C), if setting tire pressure when the vehicle has been indoors (60°F/16°C) or the tires are warm from being driven, it will be necessary to compensate for the low outside temperature by adding 21-27 kPa (3-4 psi) more then the placecard pressure. At some later time, when the vehicle has been parked outside for a while, the tires will cool off and the pressures will drop back into the placecard range. Important: Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general customer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. Tires inflated with nitrogen gas may exhibit less of a pressure change in response to outside temperature changes. Nitrogen gas inflation is compatible with GM TPM sensors. For additional information, refer to Corporate Service Bulletin 05-03-10-020C. Important: All Models (Except the Pontiac Vibe): Do not perform a TPM relearn at PDI, the system has already been set at the Assembly Plant. Do not perform a TPM relearn after adding air to the tires. The low tire light is similar to the low fuel indicator and adding something (fuel, air) to the vehicle makes that light turn back off again. Note that because of system behavior, some vehicles must be driven a short distance before the sensors recognize the increase in pressure and turns the light off again. Pontiac Vibe Only: Do not use the TPMS reset button to turn off the light. The system will update and light will turn off when all tire pressures have been adjusted followed by short distance drive. Important: All models (except the Pontiac Vibe): Each tire monitor sensor is learned to a specific vehicle corner. When performing a TPM relearn (only after a tire rotation or replacement of a TPM sensor or Module), always use the Tech2(R) to initiate the J 46079 relearned process. Tech 2(R) - initiated relearns lock out other vehicle TPM signals that may be broadcasting in the area. Only signals initiated by the J 46079 tool will be accepted. This method avoids storing false TPM I.D.s and will prevent customers from returning with dashes (--) displayed in tire pressure readouts and/or a flashing tire pressure monitor (TPM) light. Checking the four TPM I.D.s with the Tech 2(R) prior to and following relearn to verify they are the same can prevent invalid I.D. learns. Pontiac Vibe Only: Tire Monitor Sensors are not learned to a specific vehicle corner. Do not perform a TPM Reset after tire rotation. The TPMS Reset button must only be used during pre-delivery inspection by the dealer to initialize the system (after all tire pressures have been adjusted properly) or when a Tire Pressure Monitor System component is replaced. The J 46079 tool does not work on Vibe TPM sensors. A TPMS relearn on Vibe must be preformed with a Tech 2(R) to set the TPMS Module in learn mode. The TPMS sensor IDs are entered through the Tech 2(R). Refer to SI for further Vibe TPMS information. Labor Operation and Repair Order/Warranty System Claim Required Documentation Important: The ONLY time labor operation E0726 or E0722 should be used is to diagnose for a system issue. That should ONLY occur if, at key ON, without starting the engine, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) blinks for one minute and then stays on solid with a Service Tire Monitor System message (on vehicles equipped with a DIC) If that occurs, a TPM system problem exists and the system will have set a DTC. If one of these operastions is used, the following Repair Order and Warranty System documentation are required: ^ Document the customer complaint on the Repair Order. ^ Document the TPMS DTC that has set on the Repair Order. ^ Enter the TPMS DTC in the Warranty System (WINS) in the Failure Code/DTC field on the claim submission (refer to the Claims Processing Manual, Section IV, Warranty claim Data, Page 6, Item G). If the above information is not documented on the Repair Order and Warranty System, the claim may be rejected. If the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) generates a request, this repair order documentation must be sent back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3595 Customer TPMS Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3596 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-03-16-002A > Apr > 10 > Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM System Message/Service Tips > Page 3597 Frequently Asked Questions Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 07-03-10-008B > Aug > 09 > Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Slight/Mild Edge Feathering Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-03-10-008B Date: August 13, 2009 Subject: Information on Slight or Mild Tire Feathering and Recommended Practices (Normal Tire Wear Condition) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2006-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-03-10-008A (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin provides information regarding the normal tire wear condition of slight or mild tire feathering and recommended practices. If a vehicle comes into a dealership with a concern of slight or mild feathering-type wear on the tires, review with the customer their past tire rotation history. Tires should be rotated every 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi) for applicable vehicles with tires where a tire rotation is possible or recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-015B for information on tire rotation for vehicles with different front/rear tire/wheel sizes. SOME TIRE FEATHERING IS A NORMAL PART OF TIRE WEAR AND THROUGH PROPER TIRE ROTATION AND INFLATION, THIS TIRE WEAR CAN BE MINIMIZED AND TIRE LIFE MAXIMIZED. If the customer has not rotated the tires within the last 8,000 to 13,000 km (5,000 to 8,000 mi), a tire rotation in the modified X-pattern is necessary to clean-up the feathering, rather than placing the vehicle on the alignment machine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-90-002J Date: January 28, 2009 Subject: Information on Proper Tire Pressure Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and clarify additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-90-002I (Section 00 - General Information). Important: ^ Adjustment of tire pressure for a customer with a Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light on and no codes in the TPM system is NOT a warrantable repair. Claims to simply adjust the tire pressure will be rejected. ^ ALL tires (including the spare tire) MUST be set to the recommended inflation pressure stated on the vehicle's tire placard (on driver's door) during the PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI). Recommended inflation pressure is not the pressure printed on tire sidewall. ^ Tires may be over-inflated from the assembly plant due to the mounting process. ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature change will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure change. ^ 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 Only - The H2 comes standard with Light Truck "D" Load Range tires with a recommended cold inflation pressure of 289 kPa (42 psi). These tires will alert the driver to a low pressure situation at roughly 262 kPa (38 psi) due to a requirement in FMVSS 138 which specifies a Minimum Activation Pressure for each tire type. This creates a relatively narrow window of "usable" pressure values and the warning will be more sensitive to outside temperature changes during the colder months. As with other cold temperature/tire pressure issues, there is nothing wrong with the system itself. If a vehicle is brought in with this concern, check for tire damage and set all tires to the Recommended Cold Inflation Pressure shown on the vehicle placard. Accurate tire pressures ensure the safe handling and appropriate ride characteristics of GM cars and trucks. It is critical that the tire pressure be adjusted to the specifications on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard during PDI. Ride, handling and road noise concerns may be caused by improperly adjusted tire pressure. The first step in the diagnosis of these concerns is to verify that the tires are inflated to the correct pressures. The recommended tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver¡C■s side front or rear door edge, center pillar, or the rear compartment lid. Tip ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature increase will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure increase. ^ The definition of a "cold" tire is one that has been sitting for at least 3 hours, or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ On extremely cold days, if the vehicle has been indoors, it may be necessary to compensate for the low external temperature by adding additional air to the tire during PDI. ^ During cold weather, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator light (a yellow horseshoe with an exclamation point) may illuminate. If this indicator turns off after the tires warm up (reach operating temperature), the tire pressure should be reset to placard pressure at the cold temperature. ^ The TPM system will work correctly with nitrogen in tires. ^ The TPM system is compatible with the GM Vehicle Care Tire Sealant but may not be with other commercially available sealants. Important: ^ Do not use the tire pressure indicated on the tire itself as a guide. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information > Page 3606 ^ Always inspect and adjust the pressure when the tires are cold. ^ Vehicles that have different pressures for the front and the rear need to be adjusted after tire rotation. Improper tire inflation may result in any or all of the following conditions: ^ Premature tire wear ^ Harsh ride ^ Excessive road noise ^ Poor handling ^ Reduced fuel economy ^ Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Light ON ^ Low Tire Pressure Message on the Drivers Information Center (DIC) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3607 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins TPMS System - Service And Re-Learning Sensor IDs INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-03-16-001 Date: July 19, 2010 Subject: TPMS System Service and Re-Learning Sensor IDs Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2 2009 and Prior HUMMER H3 2010 and Prior Saturn Models 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Wheel-Mounted Tire Pressure Sensors In the event that the spare tire, which is normally not equipped with a tire pressure monitor (TPM) sensor, is installed in place of one of the road tires and the vehicle is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for 20 minutes or more, the TPM indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) will flash for approximately one minute and then remain on steady each time the ignition is turned ON, indicating a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has been set. The driver information center (DIC), if equipped, will also display a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR type message. When the road tire is repaired and reinstalled in the original location, the TPM indicator icon illumination and DIC message may remain displayed until the DTC is cleared. To ensure that the TPM indicator and the DIC message are cleared after service, it is necessary to clear any TPM DTCs using a scan tool. If a scan tool is unavailable, performing the TPM relearn procedure using a TPM diagnostic tool will provide the same results. It is advised to perform the relearn procedure away from other vehicles to prevent picking up a stray sensor signal. If one or more of the TPM sensors are missing or damaged and have been replaced, then the relearn procedure must be performed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3608 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3609 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3610 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3611 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3612 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3613 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3614 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > Page 3615 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description Tires: Description and Operation Tread Wear Indicators Description Tread Wear Indicators Description Tread Wear Indicators Description The original equipment tires have tread wear indicators that show when you should replace the tires. The location of these indicators are at 60 degree intervals around the outer diameter of the tire. The indicators appear as a 6 mm (0.25 in) wide band when the tire tread depth becomes 1.6 mm (2/32 in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 3618 Tires: Description and Operation Tire Inflation Description Tire Inflation Description When you inflate the tires to the recommended inflation pressures, the factory-installed wheels and tires are designed in order to handle loads to the tire's rated load capacity. Incorrect tire pressures, or under-inflated tires, can cause the following conditions: * Vehicle handling concerns * Poor fuel economy * Shortened tire life * Tire overloading Inspect the tire pressure when the following conditions apply: * The vehicle has been sitting at least 3 hours. * The vehicle has not been driven for more than 1.6 km (1 mi). * The tires are cool. Inspect the tires monthly or before any extended trip. Adjust the tire pressure to the specifications on the tire label. Install the valve caps or the extensions on the valves. The caps or the extensions keep out dust and water. The kilopascal (kPa) is the metric term for pressure. The tire pressure may be printed in both kilopascal (kPa) and psi. One psi equals 6.9 kPa. Tires with a higher than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: * A hard ride * Tire bruising * Rapid tread wear at the center of the tire Tires with a lower than recommended pressure can cause the following conditions: * A tire squeal on turns * Hard steering * Rapid wear and uneven wear on the edge of the tread * Tire rim bruises and tire rim rupture * Tire cord breakage * High tire temperatures * Reduced vehicle handling * High fuel consumption * Soft riding Unequal pressure on the same axle can cause the following conditions: * Uneven braking * Steering lead Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 3619 * Reduced vehicle handling Refer to the Tire Placard for specific tire and wheel applications and tire pressures. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 3620 Tires: Description and Operation Tire Chain Usage Description Tire Chain Usage Description Tire Chain Usage Description When you use tire chains, most current vehicles require the following chain types: * SAE Class S or 1100 Series, Type PL tire chains (1) * SAE Class U or 1200 Series, Type P tire chains (2) * 1800 Series Lug Reinforced tire chains (3) These chains are specially designed in order to limit the fly-off effect that occurs when the wheel rotates. Manufacturers of tire chains have a specific chain size for each tire size. These ensure a proper fit when the chains are installed. Purchase the correct chains for the tires on which the chains will be used. Do not use rubber adjusters to take up slack in chains that are loose due to incorrect size. Always follow the chain manufacturer's installation instructions. The use of chains may adversely affect handling. When using chains, remember the following information: * Ensure that the vehicle is designed for chain clearance. * Adjust the speed to road conditions. * Avoid sharp turns. * Avoid locked-wheel braking in order to prevent chain damage to the vehicle. * Install the chains as tightly as possible on the drive tires. Tighten the chains again after driving 0.4-0.8 km (0.25-0.5 mi). Do not use chains on the non-drive tires. These chains may contact and damage the vehicle. If you use chains on the non-drive tires, ensure that there is enough clearance. * Do not exceed 70 km/h (45 mph). Do not exceed the chain manufacturer's speed limit, if lower. * Drive in a restrained manner. Avoid large bumps, potholes, severe turns, and other maneuvers that cause the tires to bounce up and down. * Follow any other instructions from the chain manufacturer that do not disagree with the above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 3621 Tires: Description and Operation All Seasons Tires Description All Seasons Tires Description Most GM vehicles are equipped with steel belted all-season radial tires as standard equipment. These tires qualify as snow tires, with a higher than average rating for snow traction than the non-all season radial tires previously used. Other performance areas, such as wet traction, rolling resistance, tread life, and air retention, are also improved. This is done by improvements in both tread design and tread compounds. These tires are identified by an M + S molded in the tire side wall after the tire size. The suffix MS is also molded in the tire side wall after the TPC specification number. The optional handling tires used on some vehicles now also have the MS marking after the tire size and the TPC specification number. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tread Wear Indicators Description > Page 3622 Tires: Description and Operation P-Metric Sized Tires Description P-Metric Sized Tires Description P-Metric Sized Tires Description Replacement tires should be of the same tire performance criteria (TPC) specification number. This will ensure the same size, the same load range, and the same construction as those originally installed on the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures Tire Repair Tire Repair Caution: * Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. * Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. * NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. * NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important: * NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32 in) remaining depth. * NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4 in). * NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. * NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). * Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. * Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. * Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3625 injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4 in) should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3626 Clean the Injury Channel 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. For combination repair/plug units skip this step. Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3627 Important: Do not install the repair unit in this step. 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3628 Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed. Do not spread the beads excessively. Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3629 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Some run flat tires may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3630 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle . For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) 1400 K Street, N.W., Suite 900 Washington, DC 20005-2403 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotate the tires and wheels at frequent intervals to equalize wear. Refer to tire rotation in Maintenance and Lubrication. In addition to scheduled rotation, rotate the tire and wheel whenever uneven tire wear is noticed. Radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly in front positions. Radial tires in non-drive locations may develop an irregular wear pattern that may increase tire noise. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) for tire removal. Always use a 4-wheel rotation. After rotation, check the wheel nuts for specified torque. Then, set the tire pressure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3631 Tires: Removal and Replacement Tire Mounting and Dismounting Notice: Use a tire changing machine in order to dismount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone in order to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or the wheel rim could result. Notice: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel. Notice: Damage to either the tire bead or the wheel mounting holes can result from the use of improper wheel attachment or tire mounting procedures. It takes up to 70 seconds for all of the air to completely exhaust from a large tire. Failure to follow the proper procedures could cause the tire changer to put enough force on the tire to bend the wheel at the mounting surface. Such damage may result in vibration and/or shimmy, and under severe usage lead to wheel cracking. 1. Deflate the tire completely. Important: Rim-clamp, sometimes called-European-type tire changers are recommended. 2. Use the tire changer in order to remove the tire from the wheel. 3. Remove all residual liquid sealant from the inside of the tire and wheel surfaces. If any tire sealant is noted upon tire dismounting on vehicles equipped with TPM, replace the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement (Snap In Style) (See: Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires/Tire Pressure Sensor/Service and Repair) . 4. Use a wire brush or coarse steel wool in order to remove any rubber, light rust or corrosion from the wheel bead seats. Notice: When mounting the tires, use an approved tire mounting lubricant. DO NOT use silicon or corrosive base compounds to lubricate the tire bead and the wheel rim. A silicon base compound can cause the tire to slip on the rim. A corrosive type compound can cause tire or rim deterioration. 5. Apply GM P/N 12345884 (Canadian P/N 5728223) or equivalent to the tire bead and the wheel rim. 6. Use the tire changer in order to install the tire to the wheel. Caution: To avoid serious personal injury, do not stand over tire when inflating. The bead may break when the bead snaps over the safety hump. Do not exceed 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure when inflating any tire if beads are not seated. If 275 kPa (40 psi) pressure will not seat the beads, deflate, relubricate the beads and reinflate. Overinflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. 7. Inflate the tire to the proper air pressure. 8. Ensure that the locating rings are visible on both sides of the tire in order to verify that the tire bead is fully seated on the wheel. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3640 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3641 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3642 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 3647 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3652 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3653 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3654 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3660 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3661 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3662 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 3667 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3672 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3673 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3678 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3679 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3680 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 3685 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-03-10-006C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat) Models: 2000-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006B (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a tire that slowly loses air pressure over a period of days or weeks. Cause Abrasive elements in the environment may intrude between the tire and wheel at the bead seat. There is always some relative motion between the tire and wheel (when the vehicle is driven) and this motion may cause the abrasive particles to wear the wheel and tire materials. As the wear continues, there may also be intrusion at the tire/wheel interface by corrosive media from the environment. Eventually a path for air develops and a 'slow' leak may ensue. This corrosion may appear on the inboard or outboard bead seating surface of the wheel. This corrosion will not be visible until the tire is dismounted from the wheel. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to wheel bead seat corrosion that may result in an air leak. For issues related to porosity of the wheel casting that may result in an air leak, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-006F - Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Correction In most cases, this type of air loss can be corrected by following the procedure below. Important DO NOT replace a wheel for slow air loss unless you have evaluated and/or tried to repair the wheel with the procedure below. Notice The repair is no longer advised or applicable for chromed aluminum wheels. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly for diagnosis. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. 2. After a water dunk tank leak test, if you determine the source of the air leak to be around the bead seat of the wheel, dismount the tire to examine the bead seat. Shown below is a typical area of bead seat corrosion.Typical Location of Bead Seat Corrosion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3690 Important Other forms of slow air leaks are possible. If the body of the tire, valve stem and wheel flange show no signs of air seepage, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003D for additional information on possible wheel porosity issues. 3. Bead seat corrosion is identified by what appears like blistering of the wheel finish, causing a rough or uneven surface that is difficult for the tire to maintain a proper seal on. Below is a close-up photo of bead seat corrosion on an aluminum wheel that was sufficient to cause slow air loss. Close-Up of Bead Seat Corrosion 4. If corrosion is found on the wheel bead seat, measure the affected area as shown below. - For vehicles with 32,186 km (20,000 mi) or less, the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 100 mm (4 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. - For vehicles that have exceeded 32,186 km (20,000 mi), the total allowable combined linear area of repairable corrosion is 200 mm (8 in) or less. If the total area(s) of corrosion exceed these dimensions, the wheel should be replaced. 5. In order to correct the wheel leak, use a clean-up (fine cut) sanding disc or biscuit to remove the corrosion and any flaking paint. You should remove the corrosion back far enough until you reach material that is stable and firmly bonded to the wheel. Try to taper the edge of any flaking paint as best you can in order to avoid sharp edges that may increase the chance of a leak reoccurring. The photo below shows an acceptable repaired surface. Notice Corrosion that extends up the lip of the wheel, where after the clean-up process it would be visible with the tire mounted, is only acceptable on the inboard flange. The inboard flange is not visible with the wheel assembly in the mounted position. If any loose coatings or corrosion extend to the visible surfaces on the FACE of the wheel, that wheel must be replaced. Important Remove ONLY the material required to eliminate the corrosion from the bead seating surface. DO NOT remove excessive amounts of material. ALWAYS keep the sealing surface as smooth and level as possible. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3691 Acceptably Prepared (Cleaned-Up) Wheel Surface 6. Once the corrosion has been eliminated, you should coat the repaired area with a commercially available tire sealant such as Patch Brand Bead Sealant or equivalent. Commercially available bead sealants are black rubber-like coatings that will permanently fill and seal the resurfaced bead seat. At 21°C (70°F) ambient temperature, this sealant will set-up sufficiently for tire mounting in about 10 minutes.Coated and Sealed Bead Seat 7. Remount the tire and install the repaired wheel and tire assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in SI. Parts Information Patch Brand Bead Sealer is available from Myers Tires at 1-800-998-9897 or on the web at www.myerstiresupply.com. The one-quart size can of sealer will repair about 20 wheels. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 08-03-10-006C > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Slowly Goes Flat/Warning Light ON > Page 3692 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3702 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3703 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3704 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 3709 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3714 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3715 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description Wheels: Description and Operation Replacement Wheels Description Replacement Wheels Description Replace the wheel if any of the following conditions exist: * The wheel exhibits excessive runout. * The wheel is bent. * The wheel is cracked. * The wheel is severely rusted. * The wheel is severely corroded. Important: Air leaks caused by porosity on aluminum wheels are repairable. * The wheel leaks air. Caution: If you are replacing the wheel(s), the wheel stud(s), the wheel nut(s) or the wheel bolt(s), install only new GM original equipment parts. Installation of used parts or non-GM original equipment parts may cause the wheel to loosen, loss of tire air pressure, poor vehicle handling and loss of vehicle control resulting in personal injury. Notice: The use of non-GM original equipment wheels may cause: * Damage to the wheel bearing, the wheel fasteners and the wheel * Tire damage caused by the modified clearance to the adjacent vehicle components * Adverse vehicle steering stability caused by the modified scrub radius * Damage to the vehicle caused by the modified ground clearance * Speedometer and odometer inaccuracy Replace the wheel, the wheel studs and the wheel/nuts, or the wheel bolts if applicable, if any of the following conditions exist: * The wheel has elongated bolt holes. * The wheel/nuts, or bolts if applicable, loosen repeatedly. Steel wheel identification is stamped into the wheel near the valve stem. Aluminum wheel identification is cast into the inboard side of the wheel. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Replacement Wheels Description > Page 3722 Wheels: Description and Operation Steel Wheel Repair Description Steel Wheel Repair Description Notice: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening or repair damage from striking curbs, etc. Do not weld wheels. The alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated and uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Notice: The use of tubes in tubeless tires is not a recommended repair due to the fact that speed ratings are greatly reduced. You can repair porosity in aluminum wheels. If leaks are found in a steel wheel, replace the wheel with a wheel of original equipment quality. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair 1. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Inflate the tire to the manufactures specified pressure as stated on the tire. 3. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order to locate the leak. 4. Inscribe a mark on the wheel in order to indicate the leak areas. 5. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 6. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . Important: Do not damage the exterior surface of the wheel. 7. Use number 80 grit sandpaper to scuff the inside of the rim surface at the leak area. 8. Use general purpose cleaner such as 3M(R), P/N 08984 or equivalent, to clean the leak area. 9. Apply 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of adhesive/sealant, GM P/N 12378478 (Canadian P/N 88900041) or equivalent, to the leak area. 10. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. 11. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 12. Install the tire to the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi). 14. Submerge the tire/wheel into a water bath in order ensure the leak is sealed. 15. Inflate the tire to the specified pressure as stated on the tire placard. 16. Balance the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off Vehicle . 17. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Aluminum Wheel Porosity Repair > Page 3725 Wheels: Service and Repair Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Finish Damage Evaluation Procedure Important: * If the wheels are chrome-plated, do not re-plate or refinish the wheels. * If the wheels are polished aluminum, do not refinish the wheels in the dealer environment. Utilize a refinisher that meets manufacturer guidelines. 1. Inspect the wheels for damage from uncoated wheel balance weights or from automatic car wash facilities. 2. Inspect the wheels for the following conditions: * Corrosion * Scrapes * Gouges 3. Verify the damage is not deeper than what sanding can remove. 4. Inspect the wheels for cracks. If a wheel has cracks, discard the wheel. 5. Inspect the wheels for bent rim flanges. If a rim flange is bent, discard the wheel. Refinishing Procedure Caution: To avoid serious personal injury when applying any two part component paint system, follow the specific precautions provided by the paint manufacturer. Failure to follow these precautions may cause lung irritation and allergic respiratory reaction. 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the balance weights from the wheel. 3. Remove the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 4. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel: * Lubricants * Wax * Dirt Important: * Do not re-machine the wheel. * Do not use chemicals in order to strip the paint from the wheel. 5. Use plastic media blasting in order to remove the paint from the wheel. 6. If the wheel had a machined aluminum finish, spin the wheel and use sand paper in order to restore the circular machined appearance. Important: The wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface must remain free of paint. 7. Mask the wheel mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surface. 8. Follow the paint manufacturer's instructions for painting the wheel. 9. Unmask the wheel. 10. Install a new valve stem. Important: Use new coated balance weights in order to balance the wheel. 11. Install the tire to the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting (See: Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement) . 12. Use a suitable cleaner in order to remove the following contaminants from the wheel mounting surface: * Corrosion * Overspray * Dirt 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly to the vehicle. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearings Diagnosis Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Tools Required J 42129 Wheel Hub Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (2), if equipped. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector from the bracket, if equipped. 5. Remove the front wheel drive shaft nut. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 6. Remove the brake rotor. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3731 7. Use 3 wheel nuts in order to attach the J 42129 to the wheel bearing/hub. 8. Use the J 42129 in order to push the wheel drive shaft out of the wheel bearing/hub. 9. Remove and DISCARD the wheel bearing/hub bolts. Remove the J 42129 from the hub. Important: Ensure that the wheel drive shaft outer seal/boot is not damaged. 10. Remove the wheel bearing/hub and splash shield-noting the position of the shield for re-installation. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub with the splash shield as noted during removal. Caution: These fasteners MUST be replaced with new fasteners anytime they become loose or are removed. Failure to replace these fasteners after they become loose or are removed may cause loss of vehicle control and personal injury. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3732 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install NEW wheel bearing/hub bolts. Tighten the NEW wheel bearing/hub bolts to 130 N.m (96 lb ft). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement . 4. Install the front wheel drive shaft nut. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . Important: Ensure that the connector clip engages the bracket properly. 5. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the bracket, if equipped. 6. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (2), if equipped. 7. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3733 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Removal Procedure Important: The wheel bearing in the rear wheel hub is integrated into one unit. The hub is non-serviceable. If the hub and/or bearing is damaged, replace the complete hub and bearing assembly. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the brake rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement . Rear Wheel Speed Sensors 4. Remove the ABS electrical connector from the wheel speed sensor (1), if equipped. 5. Remove the park brake cable from the park brake actuator. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) . 6. Remove the mounting bolts from the rear bearing/hub. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub and park brake assembly from the knuckle. 8. Remove the park brake actuator from the rear wheel bearing/hub. Refer to Parking Brake Actuator Replacement . Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake actuator to the rear wheel bearing/hub. Refer to Parking Brake Actuator Replacement . 2. Install the wheel bearing/hub and park brake assembly to the knuckle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3734 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the wheel bearing/hub-to-knuckle bolts. Tighten the bolts to 75 N.m (55 lb ft). 4. Install the park brake cable to the park brake actuator. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) . Rear Wheel Speed Sensors 5. Install the ABS electrical connector to the wheel speed sensor (1), if equipped. 6. Install the brake rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement . 7. Install the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Nut: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 3744 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Nut: Customer Interest Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 3750 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3751 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel drive shaft nut. Tighten the nut to ................................................................................... ................................................................................................ 160 N.m (118 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nuts Tighten in sequence shown. Tighten to ........................................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 140 Nm (100 lb ft.) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3755 Wheel Fastener: Description and Operation Metric Wheel Nuts and Bolts Description Metric wheel/nuts and bolts are identified in the following way: * The wheel/nut has the word Metric stamped on the face. * The letter M is stamped on the end of the wheel bolt. The thread sizes of metric wheel/nuts and the bolts are indicated by the following example: M12 x 1.5. * M = Metric * 12 = Diameter in millimeters * 1.5 = Millimeters gap per thread Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement Tools Required J 6627-A Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 3. Without disconnecting the hydraulic brake hose, remove and support the brake caliper and bracket as an assembly. 4. Remove the brake rotor. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement . 5. Rotate the bearing hub to a position where the least amount of interference between the stud and the steering knuckle exists. 6. Using the J 6627-A , release the wheel stud (1) from the bearing hub (2) and discard the stud. Important: Some models may require additional clearance for stud removal. 7. If necessary, loosen the wheel bearing/hub assembly retaining bolts enough to walk the bearing away slightly from the knuckle. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3758 1. Install the NEW stud in the bearing hub. 2. Tighten the wheel bearing/hub assembly bolts, if loosened during removal. Refer to Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 3. Add enough washers (3) in order to draw the stud into the hub (2). 4. Install the wheel nut (1) with the flat side against the washers (3). Important: Fully seat the wheel stud against the hub flange (2). 5. Tighten the wheel nut (1) until the head of the wheel stud is fully seated against the back of the bearing hub flange. 6. Remove the wheel nut (1) and the washers (3). 7. Install the brake rotor, and the brake caliper and bracket as an assembly. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement . 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 9. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3759 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Wheel Stud Replacement Tools Required J 6627-A Tie Rod Puller Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the rear wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension) . 4. Separate the support from the rear hub. Refer to Park Brake Support Replacement . 5. Use the J 6627-A in order to extract the stud (1) from the hub (2). Installation Procedure 1. Install a replacement stud in the wheel hub. 2. Add enough washers (3) in order to draw the stud into the hub (2). 3. Install the wheel nut (1) with the flat side against the washers (3). Important: Fully seat the wheel stud against the hub flange (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3760 4. Tighten the wheel nut (1) until the wheel stud is fully seated against the hub flange. 5. Back off the wheel nut (1) and remove the washers (3). 6. Install the support. Refer to Park Brake Support Replacement . 7. Install the rear wheel bearing/hub assembly. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement (See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension) . 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Service and Repair) . 9. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Vehicle Lifting: Technician Safety Information Vehicle Lifting Caution Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to the hoist. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 3765 Vehicle Lifting: Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Lifting and Jacking Notice Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3766 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when major components are removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is supported by a hoist, support the vehicle with jack stands at the opposite end from which the components are being removed and strap the vehicle to the hoist. Caution: To avoid any vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death, always use the jackstands to support the vehicle when lifting the vehicle with a jack. Notice: Perform the following steps before beginning any vehicle lifting or jacking procedure: * Remove or secure all of the vehicle's contents in order to avoid any shifting or any movement that may occur during the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment weight rating must meet or exceed the weight of the vehicle and any vehicle contents. * The lifting equipment or the jacking equipment must meet the operational standards of the lifting equipment or jacking equipment's manufacturer. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure on a clean, hard, dry, level surface. * Perform the vehicle lifting or jacking procedure only at the identified lift points. DO NOT allow the lifting equipment or jacking equipment to contact any other vehicle components. Failure to perform the previous steps could result in damage to the lifting equipment or the jacking equipment, the vehicle, and/or the vehicle's contents. Automotive Lift and Floor Jack Contact Points 1 - Floor Jacking-Front Location 2 - Suspension Contact Lift-Front Location 3 - Frame Contact Lift-Front Location 4 - Frame Contact Lift-Rear Location 5 - Suspension Contact Lift-Rear Location 6 - Floor Jacking-Rear Location Vehicle Lifting-Frame Contact Lift Front Lift Pads Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3767 When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the front lift pads at the front pinchweld flanges. Rear Lift Pads When lifting the vehicle with a frame-contact lift, place the rear lift pads at the rear pinchweld flanges. Vehicle Lifting-Suspension Contact Lift When lifting the vehicle with a suspension-contact lift, place the front post lift points at the lower control arms in the area shown (1). Lift the rear of the vehicle with the rear post lift points ONLY under the rear wheels. Vehicle Jacking Under the Front Frame When lifting the front of the vehicle with a floor jack, place the floor jack lift pad at the center of the front frame. Under the Center of the Rear Suspension Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3768 Lift the rear of the vehicle by placing the floor jack lift pad at the center of the rear suspension. Supporting the Vehicle with Jackstands Important: Place jackstands ONLY under strong and stable vehicle structures. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3777 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3778 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3779 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3780 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3781 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3782 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3783 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3784 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3785 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3786 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3787 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3788 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3789 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3790 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3791 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3792 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3793 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3794 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3795 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3796 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3797 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3798 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3799 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3800 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3801 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3802 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3803 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3804 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3805 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3806 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3807 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3808 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3809 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3810 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3811 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3812 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3813 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3814 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3815 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3816 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3817 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3818 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3819 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3820 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3821 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3822 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3823 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3824 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3825 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3826 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3827 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3828 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3829 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3830 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3831 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3832 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3833 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3834 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3835 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3836 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3837 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3838 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3839 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3840 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3841 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3842 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3843 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3844 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3845 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3846 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3847 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3848 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3849 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3850 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3851 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3852 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3853 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3854 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3855 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3856 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3857 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3858 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3859 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3860 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3861 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3862 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3863 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3864 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3865 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3866 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3867 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3868 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3869 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3870 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3871 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3872 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3873 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3874 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3875 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3876 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3877 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3878 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3879 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3880 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3881 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3882 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3883 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3884 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3885 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3886 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3887 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3888 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3889 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3890 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3891 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3892 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3893 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3894 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3895 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3896 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3897 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3898 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3899 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3900 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3901 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3902 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3903 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3904 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3905 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Description and Operation Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) System Description To provide maximum fuel economy under light load driving conditions, the engine control module (ECM) will command the cylinder deactivation system ON to deactivate engine cylinders 1 and 7 on the left bank, and cylinders 4 and 6 on the right bank, switching to a V4 mode. The engine will operate on 8 cylinders, or V8 mode, during engine starting, engine idling, and medium to heavy throttle applications. When commanded ON, the ECM will determine what cylinder is firing, and begin deactivation on the next closest deactivated cylinder in firing order sequence. The Gen IV engine has a firing order of 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3. If cylinder number 1 is on its combustion event when cylinder deactivation is commanded ON, the next cylinder in the firing order sequence that can be deactivated is cylinder number 7. If cylinder number 5 is on its combustion event when cylinder deactivation is commanded ON, then the next cylinder in the firing order sequence that can be deactivated is cylinder number 4. Cylinder deactivation is accomplished by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open on the selected cylinders by using special valve lifters. The deactivation lifters contain spring loaded locking pins that connect the internal pin housing of the lifter to the outer housing. The pin housing contains the lifter plunger and pushrod seat which interfaces with the pushrod. The outer housing contacts the camshaft lobe through a roller. During V8 mode, the locking pins are pushed outward by spring force, locking the pin housing and outer housing together causing the lifter to function as a normal lifter. When V4 mode is commanded ON, the locking pins are pushed inward with engine oil pressure directed from the valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) assembly solenoids. When the lifter pin housing is unlocked from the outer housing, the internal pin housing will remain stationary, while the outer housing will move with the profile of the camshaft lobe, which results in the valve remaining closed. One VLOM solenoid controls both the intake and exhaust valves for each deactivating cylinder. There are 2 distinct oil passages going to each cylinder deactivation lifter bore, one for the hydraulic lash-adjusting feature of the lifter, and one for controlling the locking pins used for cylinder deactivation. Although both intake and exhaust valve lifters are controlled by the same solenoid in the VLOM, the intake and exhaust valves do not become deactivated at the same time. Cylinder deactivation is timed so that the cylinder is on an intake event. During an intake event, the intake cam lobe is pushing the valve lifter upwards to open the intake valve against the force of the valve spring. The force exerted by the valve spring is acting on the side of the lifter locking pins, preventing them from moving until the intake valve has closed. When the intake valve lifter reaches the base circle of the camshaft lobe, the valve spring force is reduced, allowing the locking pins to move, deactivating the intake valve. However, when cylinder deactivation is commanded ON, the exhaust valve for the deactivated cylinder is in the closed position, allowing the locking pins on the valve lifter to move immediately, and deactivate the exhaust valve. By deactivating the exhaust valve first, this allows the capture of a burnt air/fuel charge or exhaust gas charge in the combustion chamber. The capture of exhaust gases in the combustion chamber will contribute to a reduction in oil consumption, noise and vibration levels, and exhaust emissions when operating in V4 mode. During the transition from V8 to V4 mode, the fuel injectors will be turned OFF on the deactivated cylinders. The ignition system secondary voltage or spark is still present across the spark plug electrodes on the deactivated cylinders. If all enabling conditions are met and maintained for cylinder deactivation operation, the ECM calibrations will limit cylinder deactivation to a cycle time of 10 minutes in V4 mode, and then return to V8 mode for 1 minute. Switching between V8 and V4 mode is accomplished in less than 250 milliseconds, making the transitions seamless and transparent to the vehicle operator. The 250 milliseconds includes the time for the ECM to sequence the transitions, the response time for the VLOM solenoids to energize, and the time for the valve lifters to deactivate, all within 2 revolutions of the engine crankshaft. The cylinder deactivation system consists of the following components: * The VLOM assembly * Eight special valve lifters, 2 per deactivating cylinder * The engine oil pressure regulator valve for cylinder deactivation operation * Gen IV cylinder deactivation engine block * The ECM Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly The cylinder deactivation system uses an electro-hydraulic actuator device called the valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) assembly. The VLOM is bolted to the top of the engine valley, below the intake manifold assembly. The VLOM consists of 4 electrically operated Normally Closed Solenoids. Each solenoid controls the application of engine oil pressure to the intake and exhaust valve lifters on the cylinders selected to deactivate. Engine oil pressure is routed to the VLOM assembly from a passage on the rear of the cylinder block. All 4 VLOM solenoids are connected in parallel to a fused ignition 1 voltage circuit, supplied by the powertrain relay. The ground or control circuit for each solenoid is connected to the engine control module (ECM). When all enabling conditions are met for cylinder deactivation, the ECM will ground each solenoid control circuit in firing order sequence, allowing current to flow through the solenoid windings. With the coil windings energized, the solenoid valve opens, redirecting engine oil pressure through the VLOM into 8 separate vertical passages in the engine lifter valley. The 8 vertical passages, 2 per cylinder, are connected to the valve lifter bores of the cylinders to be deactivated. When vehicle-operating conditions require a return to V8 mode, the ECM will turn OFF the control circuit for the solenoids, allowing the solenoid valves to close. With the solenoid valves closed, engine oil pressure in the control ports is exhausted through the body of the Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3906 solenoids into the engine block lifter valley. The housing of the VLOM incorporates several bleeds in the oil passages to purge any air trapped in the VLOM or engine block. To control any contamination to the hydraulic circuits, a small replaceable oil screen is located in the VLOM oil inlet passage, below the oil pressure sensor. The oil pressure sensor is a 3-wire sensor which provides oil pressure information to the ECM. During service, use extreme care in keeping the VLOM assembly free of any contamination or foreign material. Engine Control Module (ECM) The engine control module (ECM) is responsible for the management and control of all engine functions. Each ECM comes equipped with a specific set of software/calibrations designed for that engine and vehicle application. The ECM will determine engine operating parameters, based upon information from a network of switches, sensors, modules and communication with other controllers located throughout vehicle. Internal to the ECM is an integrated circuit device called a low-side driver. The low-side driver is designed to operate internally, like an electronic switch. An individual low-side driver controls each valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) solenoid. When enabling conditions for V4 mode are met, the ECM will command the low-side driver to ground each VLOM solenoid control circuit, in firing order sequence. Internal to the low-side driver is a fault detection circuit, which monitors the solenoid control circuit for an incorrect voltage level. If an incorrect voltage level, such as an open, high resistance, or short to ground, is detected, the low-side driver, along with the fault detection circuit, will communicate the condition to the central processor in the ECM. The ECM will then command a return to V8 mode, set a corresponding DTC, and illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel. Cylinder Deactivation Inhibit Reasons Listed below are the powertrain conditions that will inhibit V4 mode, while operating under light load driving conditions: * Engine manifold vacuum low * Brake booster vacuum pressure low * Accelerator pedal position rate of increase too high, electronic throttle control * Accelerator pedal position too high, electronic throttle control * Ignition voltage out of range * Engine oil pressure out of range * Engine oil temperature out of range * Engine RPM out of range * Transmission gear incorrect * Transmission range incorrect * Transmission gear shift in progress * All cylinders activated via scan tool output control * Minimum time in V8 mode not met * Maximum V4 mode time exceeded * Engine oil aeration present * Decel fuel cutoff active * Fuel shut-off timer active * Minimum heater temp low, HVAC system * Reduced engine power active, electronic throttle control * Brake torque management active * Axle torque limiting active * Engine metal over temperature protection active * Catalytic converter over temperature protection active * Piston protection active, knock detected * Hot coolant mode active * Engine over speed protection active * Fault Active or Fault Pending-cylinder deactivation is disabled for the following faults: - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor - Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Vehicle Speed Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Engine Misfire Detected - Cylinder Deactivation Solenoid Driver Circuit The scan tool output control is used to deactivate half of the engine cylinders, V4 mode, by commanding all of the solenoids ON, or deactivate one cylinder switching to a V7 mode, by commanding ON one solenoid. Listed below are the powertrain conditions that will inhibit V4 mode, or V7 mode, with the engine running, while using the scan tool output control function: * Engine speed out of range Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3907 * Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor fault * Accelerator pedal position too high, electronic throttle control * Piston protection active, knock detected * Engine oil temperature out of range * Engine oil pressure out of range * Engine oil aeration present * Engine metal over temperature protection active * Accelerator pedal position rate of increase too high, electronic throttle control * Cylinder deactivation solenoid driver circuit fault * Engine coolant temperature sensor fault * Catalytic converter over temperature protection active * Brake booster vacuum pressure low * Brake Booster Vacuum Pressure Sensor Fault * Axle torque limiting active * Brake torque management active * Vehicle speed sensor fault * Engine coolant temperature too high * Engine not running * Vehicle speed not zero * Engine coolant temperature low * Reduced Engine Power Active, electronic throttle control * Transmission gear incorrect * Transmission range incorrect * Ignition voltage out of range * Maximum V4 mode time exceeded Listed below are the powertrain conditions that will inhibit a cylinder deactivation solenoid from being energized, with the ignition ON and the engine OFF, while using the scan tool output control function: * Engine speed not zero * Vehicle speed not zero * Transmission not in park or neutral * Ignition voltage out of range For the system description covering the hydraulic/mechanical system of cylinder deactivation, refer to Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) System Description. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3908 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit Description To provide maximum fuel economy under light load driving conditions, the engine control module (ECM) will command the valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) solenoids ON, to deactivate engine cylinders 1 and 7 on the left bank, and cylinders 4 and 6 on the right bank. The VLOM consists of 4 electrically operated normally closed solenoids, which directs pressurized engine oil to 8 deactivating valve lifters. All 4 VLOM solenoids are connected in parallel to a fused ignition circuit supplied by the powertrain relay. The control circuit for each solenoid is connected to an individual low side driver internal to the ECM. When enabling conditions for V4 mode are met, the ECM will command each low side driver to turn ON, in engine firing order sequence. Diagnostic Aids The VLOM solenoids are assigned to the following engine cylinders: * Solenoid #1-Cylinder #1 * Solenoid #2-Cylinder #4 * Solenoid #3-Cylinder #6 * Solenoid #4-Cylinder #7 Circuit/System Verification 1. If any DTCs are set, then repair those DTC first. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Start and idle the engine. 3. Allow the engine to reach normal engine operating temperature. The engine should idle smoothly without any misfires. If the engine misfires, refer to DTC P0300-P0308. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0300 4. Monitor the cylinder deactivation system data parameters with a scan tool. 5. Road test the vehicle under light throttle and load conditions that will allow the ECM to command V4 mode. If all enabling conditions are met for cylinder deactivation, and if no internal engine hydraulic/mechanical fault conditions are present, the ECM will continue operation in V4 mode. ^ If the vehicle passes the Circuit/System Verification test, then review the active fuel management driving information in the Features and Controls section of the owners manual with the vehicle operator, or instruct the vehicle operator in the proper driving techniques to obtain V4 mode. ^ If the vehicle does not pass the Circuit/System Verification test, then review the cylinder deactivation inhibit reasons listed on the scan tool. Circuit/System Testing Electrical System Testing Ignition ON and the engine OFF, command each VLOM solenoid ON and OFF using the scan tool. Standing next to the engine compartment, you should be able to hear the solenoid energize and de-energize with each command. If you cannot hear each solenoid energize and de-energize, then refer to DTC P3401, P3425, P3441, or P3449. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P3425 Mechanical System Testing 1. Connect a vacuum gage to the EVAP vacuum tube fitting on the electronic throttle body. DO NOT use a compound pressure and vacuum gage. The vacuum gage on a hand held vacuum pump will work fine for this test. 2. Start the engine. Allow the engine to reach normal operation temperature. 3. With a scan tool, command each VLOM solenoid ON, one at a time. Each time a solenoid is command ON, you should observe a fluctuating drop of intake manifold vacuum, and a misfire on the cylinder that was deactivated. ^ If there is no fluctuating drop in engine vacuum, or the engine does not misfire, then refer to Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3909 System Diagnosis. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3913 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Charge the battery if the battery is not fully charged. 2. Disable the ignition system. 3. Disable the fuel injection system. 4. Remove all spark plugs. 5. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 6. Depress the accelerator pedal to position the throttle plate wide open. 7. Start with the compression gage at zero and crank the engine through 4 compression strokes, 4 puffs. 8. Measure the compression for each cylinder. Record the readings. 9. If a cylinder has low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 tablespoon) of engine oil into the combustion chamber through the spark plug hole. Measure the compression again and record the reading. 10. The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any 1 cylinder is 1 035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). (1 035 x 70% = 725) (150 x 70% = 105). * Normal - Compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression for each cylinder. * Piston Rings Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression builds up with the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. * Valves Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression usually does not build up on the following strokes. Compression does not improve much when you add oil. * If 2 adjacent cylinders have lower than normal compression, and injecting oil into the cylinders does not increase the compression, the cause may be a head gasket leaking between the cylinders. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolt - 1-Bolt Sprocket - First Pass ............................................................................................................................... 75 N.m (55 lb ft) Camshaft Sprocket Bolt - 1-Bolt Sprocket - Final Pass ........................................................................................................................................ 50 degrees Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine. Refer to Engine Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Replacement) . 2. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 3. Remove the oil level indicator. Refer to Oil Level Indicator and Tube Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 4. Remove the left and right exhaust manifolds. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) and Exhaust Manifold Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 5. Remove the water pump. Refer to Water Pump Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 6. Remove the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement (See: Water Pump/Service and Repair) . 7. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 8. Remove the valve lifter oil manifold. Refer to Valve Lifter Oil Manifold Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 9. Remove the coolant air bleed pipe. Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe and Hole Cover Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 10. Remove the left and right valve rocker arm covers. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Removal - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) and Valve Rocker Arm Cover Removal - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 11. Remove the valve rocker arms and pushrods. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 12. Remove the valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 13. Remove the oil pan-to-front cover bolts. 14. Remove the front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 15. Remove the camshaft retainer bolts (204) and retainer (203). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3921 Notice: All camshaft journals are the same diameter, so care must be used in removing or installing the camshaft to avoid damage to the camshaft bearings. 16. Remove the camshaft. 1. Install the camshaft sprocket bolt into the camshaft front bolt hole. 2. Using the bolt as a handle, carefully rotate and pull the camshaft out of the engine block. 3. Remove the bolt from the front of the camshaft. Installation Procedure Important: If camshaft replacement is required, the valve lifters must also be replaced. 1. Lubricate the camshaft journals and the bearings with clean engine oil. 2. Install the camshaft sprocket bolt into the camshaft front bolt hole. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3922 Notice: All camshaft journals are the same diameter, so care must be used in removing or installing the camshaft to avoid damage to the camshaft bearings. 3. Using the bolt as a handle, carefully install the camshaft into the engine block. 4. Remove the bolt from the front of the camshaft. Important: The gasket surface on the engine block should be clean and free of dirt or debris. 5. Install the camshaft retainer (203) and the bolts (204). Install the retainer with the sealing gasket facing the front of the engine block. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 6. Tighten the camshaft retainer bolts. * Tighten the first design hex head bolts (3) to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3923 * Tighten the second design TORX(R) head bolts (4) to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 7. Install the front cover. Refer to Engine Front Cover Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 8. Install the oil pan-to-front cover bolts. Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 9. Install the valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Installation (5.3L) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 10. Install the valve rocker arms and pushrods. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 11. Install the left and right valve rocker arm covers. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) and Valve Rocker Arm Cover Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 12. Install the coolant air bleed pipe. Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Pipe and Hole Cover Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 13. Install the valve lifter oil manifold. Refer to Valve Lifter Oil Manifold Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 14. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 15. Install the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement (See: Water Pump/Service and Repair) . 16. Install the water pump. Refer to Water Pump Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 17. Install the left and right exhaust manifolds. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Installation - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) and Exhaust Manifold Installation - Right Side (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 18. Install the oil level indicator. Refer to Oil Level Indicator and Tube Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 19. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 20. Install the engine. Refer to Engine Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Lifter / Lash Adjuster: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Customer Interest Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Lifter / Lash Adjuster: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 3932 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Lifter / Lash Adjuster: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Lifter / Lash Adjuster: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Lifter / Lash Adjuster: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 3938 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). Important: Do not allow debris to enter the oil passages of the intake manifold. 3. Remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). 4. Remove the oil filter (452) and O-ring seal (454). 5. Inspect the O-ring seal (454) for cuts or damage. 6. If the filter is plugged or the O-ring seal is cut or damaged, replace the filter and O-ring seal as an assembly. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3941 1. Install a NEW oil filter (452) and O-ring seal (454). 2. Apply sealant to the threads of the NEW oil pressure sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 4. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 5. Install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3942 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Oil Manifold Replacement Valve Lifter Oil Manifold Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Do not lift the manifold assembly by the electrical lead frame. 3. Remove the valve lifter oil manifold bolts (506). Important: Do not allow dirt or debris to enter the oil passages of the manifold. Plug as required. 4. Remove the valve lifter oil manifold (451). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3943 Important: Remove only the outer gasket from the manifold. Do not disassemble any of the internal components of the manifold in an attempt to remove the eight inner sealing gaskets. If the inner gaskets are cut or damaged, replace the manifold as an assembly. Only use a wire-cutter type tool in order to minimize the amount of debris. Do not use a rotary-type cutting tool on the retaining straps. 5. Identify the 8 gasket retaining strap locations (1-8). 6. Using a wire-cutter type tool, snip the 8 retaining straps of the outer gasket. 7. Remove the outer gasket (556) from the manifold. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3944 Installation Procedure Important: All gasket surfaces should be free of oil or other foreign material during assembly. 1. Do not lift the manifold assembly by the electrical lead frame. 2. Install the outer gasket (556) onto the manifold. 3. Install the valve lifter oil manifold (451). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3945 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the valve lifter oil manifold bolts (506). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3946 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Valve Lifter Replacement Valve Lifter Replacement Special Tools J 3049-A Valve Lifter Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair) and/or Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the lifter guide bolts (211). Important: Note the installed position of the guides. The notched area of the guide is to align with the locating tab of the block. 3. Remove the lifter guides (210) with lifters. Important: Some valve lifters may be stuck in their bores because of gum or varnish deposits. 4. Use the J 3049-A or equivalent in order to remove the valve lifters, if necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3947 5. Remove the valve lifters (209, 219) from the guide (210). 6. Organize or mark the components so that they can be installed in the same location from which they were removed. The displacement on demand lifters are installed into the guide by aligning the notched area of the guide (1) with the raised surface on the side of the lifter (2). 7. Clean and inspect the valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter and Guide Cleaning and Inspection (5.3L) (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . Installation Procedure Important: * When reusing the valve lifters, install the lifters in their original locations. * If camshaft replacement is required, the valve lifters must also be replaced. * Each of the four valve guide assemblies will contain two displacement on demand valve lifters and two non-displacement on demand valve lifters. * With the lifters and guides properly installed, cylinders 1, 4, 6, and 7 lifter bores will each contain two displacement on demand valve lifters. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3948 1. Lubricate the valve lifters (209, 219) and engine block valve lifter bores with clean engine oil. 2. Insert the valve lifters into the lifter guides. * Align the flat area (3) on the top of the non-displacement on demand lifter with the flat area in the lifter guide bore. * The displacement on demand lifters are to be installed into the guide, with the notch in the guide (2) of the lifter. 3. Install the valve lifter guides (210) with lifters to the engine block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Lifter Oil Filter Replacement > Page 3949 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the valve lifter guide bolts (211). Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Install the cylinder head. Refer to Cylinder Head Replacement - Left Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair) and/or Cylinder Head Replacement - Right Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair Push Rod: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side) . Important: Place the valve rocker arm, pushrod, and pivot support, in a rack so that the can be installed in the same location from which they were removed. 2. Remove the valve rocker arm bolt. 3. Remove the valve rocker arm. 4. Remove the valve rocker arm pivot support. 5. Remove the pushrod. 6. Clean and inspect the valve rocker arm and pushrod. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . Installation Procedure Important: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3953 * When reusing the valve train components, always install the components to their original location and position. * Valve lash is net build, no valve adjustment is required. 1. Lubricate the valve rocker arm and pushrod with clean engine oil. 2. Lubricate the flange of the valve rocker arm bolt with clean engine oil. 3. Install the valve rocker arm pivot support. Important: Make sure that the pushrod seats properly to the valve lifter socket. 4. Install the pushrod. Important: Ensure that the pushrod seat properly to the ends of the rocker arm. DO NOT tighten the rocker arm bolt at this time. 5. Install the rocker arm and bolt. 6. Rotate the crankshaft until the number one piston is at top dead center (TDC) of the compression stroke. In this position, cylinder number one rocker arms will be off lobe lift, and the crankshaft sprocket key will be at the 1:30 position. The engine firing order is 1, 8, 7, 2, 6, 5, 4, 3. Cylinders 1, 3, 5, and 7 are the left bank. Cylinder 2, 4, 6, and 8 are the right bank. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 7. With the engine in the number one firing position, tighten the following valve rocker arm bolts: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3954 * Tighten cylinders 1, 2, 7, and 8 exhaust valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). * Tighten cylinders 1, 3, 4, and 5 intake valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 8. Rotate the crankshaft 360 degrees. 9. Tighten the following valve rocker arm bolts: * Tighten cylinders 3, 4, 5, and 6 exhaust valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). * Tighten cylinders 2, 6, 7, and 8 intake valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 10. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side) . Important: Place the valve rocker arm, pushrod, and pivot support, in a rack so that the can be installed in the same location from which they were removed. 2. Remove the valve rocker arm bolt. 3. Remove the valve rocker arm. 4. Remove the valve rocker arm pivot support. 5. Remove the pushrod. 6. Clean and inspect the valve rocker arm and pushrod. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . Installation Procedure Important: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3958 * When reusing the valve train components, always install the components to their original location and position. * Valve lash is net build, no valve adjustment is required. 1. Lubricate the valve rocker arm and pushrod with clean engine oil. 2. Lubricate the flange of the valve rocker arm bolt with clean engine oil. 3. Install the valve rocker arm pivot support. Important: Make sure that the pushrod seats properly to the valve lifter socket. 4. Install the pushrod. Important: Ensure that the pushrod seat properly to the ends of the rocker arm. DO NOT tighten the rocker arm bolt at this time. 5. Install the rocker arm and bolt. 6. Rotate the crankshaft until the number one piston is at top dead center (TDC) of the compression stroke. In this position, cylinder number one rocker arms will be off lobe lift, and the crankshaft sprocket key will be at the 1:30 position. The engine firing order is 1, 8, 7, 2, 6, 5, 4, 3. Cylinders 1, 3, 5, and 7 are the left bank. Cylinder 2, 4, 6, and 8 are the right bank. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 7. With the engine in the number one firing position, tighten the following valve rocker arm bolts: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3959 * Tighten cylinders 1, 2, 7, and 8 exhaust valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). * Tighten cylinders 1, 3, 4, and 5 intake valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 8. Rotate the crankshaft 360 degrees. 9. Tighten the following valve rocker arm bolts: * Tighten cylinders 3, 4, 5, and 6 exhaust valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). * Tighten cylinders 2, 6, 7, and 8 intake valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 10. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side (See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance - Production ........................................................................................................ 0.023-0.065 mm (0.0009-0.0025 in) Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance - Service ................................................................................................................ 0.023-0.076 mm (0.0009-0.003 in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Revised Connecting Rod Bolt Torque Connecting Rod: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Connecting Rod Bolt Torque Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-002 Date: March 05, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Revised Connecting Rod Bolt Torque for Small Block GEN III and GEN IV Vortec(TM) V8 Engines Models A new connecting rod bolt torque specification was introduced to the GEN III and GEN IV Vortec(TM) small block V8 engines. The connecting rod bolts should continue to be tightened using two passes. The second pass value has been increased from 75 degrees to 85 degrees. Install the connecting rod bolts and tighten. Refer to Piston, Connecting Rod, and Bearing Installation in SI. Tighten Tighten the connecting rod bolts a first pass to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Tighten the connecting rod bolts a final pass to 85 degrees using the J 45059 Angle Meter. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Revised Connecting Rod Bolt Torque > Page 3968 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3969 Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bore Diameter - Bearing End ............................................................................................................ 56.505-56.525 mm (2.224-2.225 in) Connecting Rod Bore Out-of-Round - Bearing End - Production ............................................................................. 0.004-0.008 mm (0.00015-0.0003 in) Connecting Rod Bore Out-of-Round - Bearing End - Service ................................................................................... 0.004-0.008 mm (0.00015-0.0003 in) Connecting Rod Side Clearance ........................................................................................................................................ 0.11-0.51 mm (0.00433-0.02 in) Connecting Rod Bolts - First Pass ....................................................................................................... ........................................................ 20 N.m (15 lb ft) Connecting Rod Bolts - Final Pass .................. ...................................................................................................................................................... 85 degrees Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance - Production ......................................................................................................... 0.02-0.052 mm (0.0008-0.0021 in) Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance - Service ............................................................................................................... 0.02-0.065 mm (0.0008-0.0025 in) Crankshaft Bearing Cap M8 Bolts .............................................................................................................................................................. 25 N.m (18 lb ft) Crankshaft Bearing Cap M10 Bolts - First Pass in Sequence ...................................................................................................................... 20 N.m (15 lb ft) Crankshaft Bearing Cap M10 Bolts - Final Pass in Sequence ............................................................................................................................... 80 degrees Crankshaft Bearing Cap M10 Studs - First Pass in Sequence ..................................................................................................................... 20 N.m (15 lb ft) Crankshaft Bearing Cap M10 Studs - Final Pass in Sequence .............................................................................................................................. 51 degrees Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Connecting Rod Journal Diameter - Production .................................................................................................. 53.318-53.338 mm (2.0991-2.0999 in) Connecting Rod Journal Diameter - Service ................................................................................................................................ 53.308 mm (2.0987 in) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round - Production ..................................................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Connecting Rod Journal Out-of-Round - Service ............................................................................................................................. 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) Connecting Rod Journal Taper - Maximum for 1/2 of Journal Length - Production ...................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) Connecting Rod Journal Taper Maximum for 1/2 of Journal Length - Service ........................................................................... 0.02 mm (0.00078 in) Crankshaft End Play ...................................................................................................................................................... 0.04-0.2 mm (0.0015-0.0078 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter - Production ..................................................................................................... 64.992-65.008 mm (2.558-2.559 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter - Service .................................................................................................................................. 64.992 mm (2.558 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round - Production ................................................................................................................ 0.003 mm (0.000118 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Out-of-Round - Service .......................................................................................................................... 0.008 mm (0.0003 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper - Production ................................................................................................................................... 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) Crankshaft Main Journal Taper - Service ....................................................................................................................................... 0.02 mm (0.00078 in) Crankshaft Rear Flange Runout .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.05 mm (0.002 in) Crankshaft Reluctor Ring Runout - Measured 1.0 mm (0.04 in) Below Tooth Diameter ..................................................................... 0.7 mm (0.028 in) Crankshaft Thrust Surface - Production ..................................................................................................................... 26.14-26.22 mm (1.029-1.0315 in) Crankshaft Thrust Surface - Service ............................................................................................................................................... 26.22 mm (1.0315 in) Crankshaft Thrust Surface Runout ................................................................................................................................................... 0.025 mm (0.001 in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Engine Block Heater: Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3984 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3985 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3986 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3987 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Engine Block Heater: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3993 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3994 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3995 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 3996 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Block Heater: > 07-08-50-009A > Jun > 10 > Interior - Front Power Seats Inop/Bind When Moving Power Seat Drive Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Front Power Seats Inop/Bind When Moving TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-50-009A Date: June 08, 2010 Subject: Front Driver or Passenger Power Seat Inoperative/Binds When Moving Forward or Rearward (Install Horizontal Seat Adjuster Cable/Shaft and Synchronize Seat Track) Models: 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo with RPOs AG1, AG2 or AH5 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-50-009 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the driver or passenger front seat may not move forward or backward or bind while moving forward or backward. Cause The horizontal seat adjuster cable may become dislodged from the adjuster. This may cause the seat track assembly to become out of synchronization or inoperative. Correction Install the horizontal seat adjuster cable and synchronize the seat track assembly using the following procedure: 1. Using the power seat switch, position the inoperative seat to the full up position. 2. Visually inspect under the front seat to see if the horizontal cable (first longest cable) is dislodged from the actuator or motor. 3. If the cable is installed properly and the seat track is inoperative, then do not proceed to the next step. Refer to the Power Seat Inoperative diagnostics in SI. 4. Inspect the loose cable end and make sure the end is not frayed or mushroomed. 5. If the cable is not damaged, you can re-use the old cable and old clip. 6. If the cable end is damaged, you will need to install a new cable, P/N 19124257, which will come with a new cable retainer clip. 7. Install the cable by indexing the square end of the cable into the motor and/or the actuator. Important The new style clip is not serviced separately, it will only come with the new cable. 8. Install the old clip or the new cable retainer clip onto the seat track frame bar (1) and secure the cable retainer clip onto the second seat track frame bar (2) as shown in the graphic above. 9. Move the seat to the full forward position using the power seat switch. 10. Unbolt the seat belt from the seat assembly. 11. Remove the two rear seat bolts. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Block Heater: > 07-08-50-009A > Jun > 10 > Interior - Front Power Seats Inop/Bind When Moving > Page 4002 12. Remove the two rear plastic track trim covers. 13. Activate the power seat switch to the full back position until the track stops. Important Do not disconnect the power seat electrical connector. 14. Tilt the seat forward to release the seat from the two front retaining seat hooks. 15. Lay the seat back assembly down towards the floor of the vehicle with the track bottom facing upward. Visually inspect the adjusters and the drive units. 16. Inspect the position of the drive units (1) to see if the units are bottom out against the adjuster stops. 17. If both drive units are bottomed out against the adjuster stops, the inboard and outboard tracks are synchronized and will function properly. No further action is required - proceed to Step 19. 18. If there are any gaps between the adjuster stops and the drive units on either side, then the tracks are not synchronized. This condition may cause binding during seat track operation. 19. Determine which driver unit side is bottom out against the adjuster stop. - If the outboard drive unit is bottomed out against the adjuster stop, follow these steps: 1. Remove the horizontal cable from the motor or actuator 2. Activate the power seat switch forward until the inboard drive unit bottoms out against the adjuster stop. Both drive units should now be at the stops. 3. Reinstall the cable. The tracks are now synchronized. - If the inboard drive unit is bottomed out against the adjuster stop, follow these steps: 1. Remove the horizontal cable from the motor or actuator 2. Activate the power seat switch backward so that the inboard gap is greater than the outboard side gap. 3. Reinstall the cable. 4. Activate the power seat switch forward until the outboard drive unit is against the adjuster stop. 20. Install the seat assembly. 21. Install the rear seat bolts. Tighten Tighten the rear seat track bolts to 45 Nm(33 lb ft). 22. Install the rear seat track trim covers. 23. Install the seat belt and nut. Tighten Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Block Heater: > 07-08-50-009A > Jun > 10 > Interior - Front Power Seats Inop/Bind When Moving > Page 4003 Tighten the nut to 42 Nm(31 lb ft). 24. Verify the proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Block Heater: > 07-08-50-009A > Jun > 10 > Interior - Front Power Seats Inop/Bind When Moving > Page 4009 12. Remove the two rear plastic track trim covers. 13. Activate the power seat switch to the full back position until the track stops. Important Do not disconnect the power seat electrical connector. 14. Tilt the seat forward to release the seat from the two front retaining seat hooks. 15. Lay the seat back assembly down towards the floor of the vehicle with the track bottom facing upward. Visually inspect the adjusters and the drive units. 16. Inspect the position of the drive units (1) to see if the units are bottom out against the adjuster stops. 17. If both drive units are bottomed out against the adjuster stops, the inboard and outboard tracks are synchronized and will function properly. No further action is required - proceed to Step 19. 18. If there are any gaps between the adjuster stops and the drive units on either side, then the tracks are not synchronized. This condition may cause binding during seat track operation. 19. Determine which driver unit side is bottom out against the adjuster stop. - If the outboard drive unit is bottomed out against the adjuster stop, follow these steps: 1. Remove the horizontal cable from the motor or actuator 2. Activate the power seat switch forward until the inboard drive unit bottoms out against the adjuster stop. Both drive units should now be at the stops. 3. Reinstall the cable. The tracks are now synchronized. - If the inboard drive unit is bottomed out against the adjuster stop, follow these steps: 1. Remove the horizontal cable from the motor or actuator 2. Activate the power seat switch backward so that the inboard gap is greater than the outboard side gap. 3. Reinstall the cable. 4. Activate the power seat switch forward until the outboard drive unit is against the adjuster stop. 20. Install the seat assembly. 21. Install the rear seat bolts. Tighten Tighten the rear seat track bolts to 45 Nm(33 lb ft). 22. Install the rear seat track trim covers. 23. Install the seat belt and nut. Tighten Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Block Heater: > 07-08-50-009A > Jun > 10 > Interior - Front Power Seats Inop/Bind When Moving > Page 4010 Tighten the nut to 42 Nm(31 lb ft). 24. Verify the proper operation of the seat. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Replacement Coolant Heater Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Disconnect the coolant heater cord from the coolant heater. 4. Remove the coolant heater (114) and washer (115). 5. Remove and clean any burrs, compound, paint, or rough spots from the core plug hole. Installation Procedure 1. Apply a 3.175 mm (0.125 in) bead of sealant, GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or equivalent to the coolant heater. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the coolant heater (114) and washer (115). Tighten the coolant heater to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Connect the coolant heater cord to the coolant heater. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement > Page 4013 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Coolant Heater Cord Replacement Coolant Heater Cord Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Cut the tie strap attaching the coolant heater cord to the diagonal brace. 2. Cut the tie straps (1) attaching the coolant heater cord to the engine wiring harness. 3. Disconnect the coolant heater cord connection from the coolant heater. 4. Remove the coolant heater cord. Installation Procedure Notice: The heater cord must not touch the engine, hot pipes, manifold, or any moving parts. Route the cord to the left front of the engine compartment securing with tie straps as necessary to prevent damage. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Heater Replacement > Page 4014 1. Install the coolant heater cord. 2. Connect the coolant heater cord connection to the coolant heater. 3. Install NEW tie straps (1) attaching the coolant heater cord to the engine wiring harness. 4. Install a NEW tie strap attaching the coolant heater cord to the diagonal brace. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Balancer Bolt - Installation Pass to Ensure the Balancer is Completely Installed ................................................................. 330 N.m (240 lb ft) Crankshaft Balancer Bolt - First Pass Install a NEW Bolt After the Installation Pass and Tighten as Described in the First and Final Passes .............. 50 N.m (37 lb ft) Crankshaft Balancer Bolt - Final Pass ................................................................................................. ................................................................ 140 degrees Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4018 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Balancer Replacement Tools Required * EN 47699 Flywheel Holding Tool * J 41665 Crankshaft Balancer and Sprocket Installer * J 41816 Crankshaft Balancer Remover * J 41816-2 Crankshaft End Protector * J 42640 Steering Column Anti-Rotation Pin * J 45059 Torque Angle Meter Removal Procedure 1. Install a J 42640 . Refer to Steering Column Replacement . 2. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the air cleaner upper housing. Refer to Air Cleaner Assembly Replacement . 4. Remove the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair) . 5. Remove the starter motor. Refer to Starter Motor Replacement (LS4) Starter Motor Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 6. Remove the front fender splash shield. 7. Disconnect the transaxle cooler lines at the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection . 8. Remove the stabilizer shaft link lower nuts. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement . 9. Remove the intermediate steering shaft pinch bolt and separate the shaft from the steering gear. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 10. Remove the front lower air deflector braces and the deflector. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . 11. Remove the radiator to frame braces. 12. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture) . 13. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 14. Remove the frame-to-body bolts. 15. Remove the transmission-to-engine bolt located at approximately the 10 o'clock position when looking from the rear of the engine. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 16. Install the EN 47699 and bolt to the block and flywheel. Tighten the bolt to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4019 17. Remove the right front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 18. Lower the engine approximately 100 mm (4 in). 19. Remove the crankshaft balancer bolt (139). Do not discard the crankshaft balancer bolt. The balancer bolt will be used during the balancer installation procedure. 20. Install the J 41816 (1) and the J 41816-2 (2), to the crankshaft balancer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4020 21. Remove the crankshaft balancer (138). 22. Remove the J 41816 and the J 41816-2 from the crankshaft balancer. Installation Procedure Important: * The used crankshaft balancer bolt will be used only during the first pass of the balancer installation procedure. Install a NEW bolt and tighten as described in the second, third and forth passes of the balancer bolt tightening procedure. * The crankshaft balancer installation and bolt tightening involves a four stage tightening process. The first pass ensures that the balancer is installed completely onto the crankshaft. The second, third, and forth passes tighten the new bolt to the proper torque. * The balancer should be positioned onto the end of the crankshaft as straight as possible prior to tool installation. 1. Position the crankshaft balancer (138) onto the end of the crankshaft. 2. Using the J 41665 , install the crankshaft balancer. 1. Assemble the threaded rod, nut, washer and installer. Insert the smaller end of the installer into the front of the balancer. 2. Use a wrench and hold the hex end of the threaded rod. 3. Use a second wrench and rotate the installation tool nut clockwise until the balancer is started onto the crankshaft. 4. Remove the tool and reverse the installation tool. Position the larger end of the installer against the front of the balancer. 5. Use a wrench and hold the hex end of the threaded rod. 6. Use a second wrench and rotate the installation tool nut clockwise until the balancer is installed onto the crankshaft. 7. Remove the balancer installation tool. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4021 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the USED crankshaft balancer bolt (139). Tighten the USED bolt to 330 N.m (240 lb ft). 4. Remove the USED crankshaft balancer bolt. Important: The nose of the crankshaft should be recessed 2.4-4.48 mm (0.094-0.176 in) into the balancer bore. 5. Measure for a correctly installed balancer. If the balancer is not installed to the proper dimensions, install the J 41665 and repeat the installation procedure. 6. Install a NEW crankshaft balancer bolt (139). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4022 * Tighten the bolt a first pass to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). * Tighten the bolt a second pass to 140 degrees using J 45059 . 7. Remove the EN 47699 and bolt from the block and flywheel. 8. Install the transmission bellhousing bolt located at approximately the 10 o'clock position when looking from the rear of the engine. Tighten the bolt to 75 N.m (55 lb ft). 9. Raise and properly position the frame and install the frame to body bolts. Refer to Frame Replacement . 10. Install the frame to radiator braces. 11. Install the front lower air deflector. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . 12. Connect the intermediate steering shaft to the steering gear. Refer to Intermediate Steering Shaft Replacement . 13. Install the stabilizer shaft link lower nuts. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement . 14. Connect the transaxle cooler lines to the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection . 15. Remove the engine support fixture. 16. Install the front fender splash shield. 17. Install the starter motor. Refer to Starter Motor Replacement (LS4) Starter Motor Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 18. Install the air cleaner upper housing. Refer to Air Cleaner Assembly Replacement . 19. Install the accessory drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 20. Install the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine Mount/Service and Repair) . 21. Install the right front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 22. Perform the crankshaft position (CKP) system variation learn procedure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston - Piston Diameter - Measured Over Skirt Coating ........................................................................................ 96.002-96.036 mm (3.7796-3.7809 in) Piston - Piston to Bore Clearance - Production ............................................................................................. -0.036 to +0.016 mm (-0.0014 to +0.0006 in) Piston - Piston to Bore Clearance - Service Limit with Skirt Coating Worn Off ................................................................................ 0.071 mm (0.0028 in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications Pin - Piston Pin Clearance-to-Piston Pin Bore - Production ...................................................................................... 0.002-0.01 mm (0.00008-0.00004 in) Pin Piston Pin Clearance-to-Piston Pin Bore - Service ............................................................................................ 0.002-0.015 mm (0.00008-0.0006 in) Pin - Piston Pin Fit in Connecting Rod Bore - Production ......................................................................................... 0.007-0.02 mm (0.00027-0.00078 in) Pin Piston Pin Fit in Connecting Rod Bore - Service ............................................................................................ 0.007-0.022 mm (0.00027-0.00086 in) Pin - Piston Pin Diameter ......................................................................................................................................... 23.952-23.955 mm (0.9430-0.9431 in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Rings Piston Ring End Gap - First Compression Ring - Measured in Cylinder Bore - Production ........................................... 0.23-0.44 mm (0.009-0.017 in) Piston Ring End Gap - First Compression Ring - Measured in Cylinder Bore - Service ................................................. 0.23-0.5 mm (0.009-0.0196 in) Piston Ring End Gap - Second Compression Ring - Measured in Cylinder Bore - Production ......................................... 0.44-0.7 mm (0.017-0.027 in) Piston Ring End Gap Second Compression Ring - Measured in Cylinder Bore - Service ............................................. 0.44-0.76 mm (0.0173-0.03 in) Piston Ring End Gap - Oil Control Ring - Measured in Cylinder Bore - Production ...................................................... 0.18-0.75 mm (0.007-0.029 in) Piston Ring End Gap - Oil Control Ring - Measured in Cylinder Bore - Service ............................................................ 0.18-0.81 mm (0.007-0.032 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - First Compression Ring Production ............................................................. 0.04-0.085 mm (0.00157-0.00335 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - First Compression Ring - Service ................................................................... 0.04-0.085 mm (0.00157-0.00335 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Second Compression Ring - Production ........................................................... 0.04-0.078 mm (0.00157-0.0031 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Second Compression Ring - Service ................................................................ 0.04-0.078 mm (0.00157-0.0031 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Oil Control Ring - Production .............................................................................. 0.012-0.2 mm (0.0005-0.0078 in) Piston Ring to Groove Clearance - Oil Control Ring - Service .................................................................................... 0.012-0.2 mm (0.0005-0.0078 in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Rear Engine Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Engine Plate: Service and Repair Engine Rear Cover Replacement Tools Required J 41476 Front and Rear Cover Alignment Tool (at crankshaft seal area) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the oil pan-to-rear cover bolts. 3. Remove the rear cover bolts (517). 4. Remove the rear cover (518) and gasket (519). Discard the gasket. 5. Remove and discard the rear oil seal (141). Installation Procedure Important: * Do not reuse the crankshaft oil seal or rear cover gasket. * Do not apply any type of sealant to the rear cover gasket, unless specified. * The special tool in this procedure is used to properly center the crankshaft rear oil seal. * The crankshaft rear oil seal will be installed after the rear cover has been installed and aligned. Install the rear cover without the crankshaft oil seal. - All gasket surfaces should be free of oil or other foreign material during assembly. - The crankshaft rear oil seal MUST be centered in relation to the crankshaft. - An improperly aligned rear cover may cause premature rear oil seal wear and/or engine assembly oil leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Rear Engine Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4035 1. Apply a 5 mm (0.20 in) bead of sealant or equivalent 20 mm (0.80 in) long, to the oil pan to engine block junction. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) for the correct part number. 2. Install the rear cover gasket (519) and cover (518). 3. Install the rear cover bolts (517) until snug. Do not overtighten. 4. Install the oil pan-to-rear cover bolts until snug. Do not overtighten. 5. Rotate the crankshaft until two opposing flywheel bolt holes are parallel to the oil pan surface. Important: The tapered legs of the alignment tool must enter the rear cover oil seal bore. 6. Install the J 41476 and bolts onto the rear of the crankshaft. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 7. Tighten the J 41476 mounting bolts until snug. Do not overtighten. 1. Tighten the oil pan-to-rear cover bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 2. Tighten the engine rear cover bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 8. Remove the J 41476 . 9. Install a NEW crankshaft rear oil seal. Refer to Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Replacement (See: Seals and Gaskets/Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal/Service and Repair) . 10. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Pressure Release: Procedures Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Remove the engine cover, if required. 3. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 6. Connect the CH-48027-3 (4) to the fuel rail service port. 7. Connect the CH-48027-2 (2) to the CH-48027-3 (4). 8. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 9. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 10. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 11. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4041 * The areas surrounding the connections Important: If relieving the fuel pressure for the fuel pressure gage installation and removal, it is NOT necessary to proceed with the following steps. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 12. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 13. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 14. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 15. Install the engine cover, if required. 16. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 3. Remove the engine cover, if required. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port and using a small flat-bladed tool, depress (open) the fuel rail test port valve. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 7. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 8. Install the engine cover, if required. 9. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4042 Fuel Pressure Release: Removal and Replacement Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4043 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side (See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side (See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side) . Important: Place the valve rocker arm, pushrod, and pivot support, in a rack so that the can be installed in the same location from which they were removed. 2. Remove the valve rocker arm bolt. 3. Remove the valve rocker arm. 4. Remove the valve rocker arm pivot support. 5. Remove the pushrod. 6. Clean and inspect the valve rocker arm and pushrod. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . Installation Procedure Important: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4047 * When reusing the valve train components, always install the components to their original location and position. * Valve lash is net build, no valve adjustment is required. 1. Lubricate the valve rocker arm and pushrod with clean engine oil. 2. Lubricate the flange of the valve rocker arm bolt with clean engine oil. 3. Install the valve rocker arm pivot support. Important: Make sure that the pushrod seats properly to the valve lifter socket. 4. Install the pushrod. Important: Ensure that the pushrod seat properly to the ends of the rocker arm. DO NOT tighten the rocker arm bolt at this time. 5. Install the rocker arm and bolt. 6. Rotate the crankshaft until the number one piston is at top dead center (TDC) of the compression stroke. In this position, cylinder number one rocker arms will be off lobe lift, and the crankshaft sprocket key will be at the 1:30 position. The engine firing order is 1, 8, 7, 2, 6, 5, 4, 3. Cylinders 1, 3, 5, and 7 are the left bank. Cylinder 2, 4, 6, and 8 are the right bank. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 7. With the engine in the number one firing position, tighten the following valve rocker arm bolts: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4048 * Tighten cylinders 1, 2, 7, and 8 exhaust valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). * Tighten cylinders 1, 3, 4, and 5 intake valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 8. Rotate the crankshaft 360 degrees. 9. Tighten the following valve rocker arm bolts: * Tighten cylinders 3, 4, 5, and 6 exhaust valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). * Tighten cylinders 2, 6, 7, and 8 intake valve rocker arm bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 10. Install the valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side (See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side) and/or Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side (See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield, if required. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (3). 3. Disconnect the ignition coil main electrical connector (4). 4. Reposition the engine harness, as necessary. 5. Remove the spark plug wires (724) from the ignition coils. 1. Twist each plug wire 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the ignition coil. 6. Remove the ignition coil bracket bolts (720). 7. Remove the ignition coil and bracket assembly (719). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4053 8. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) clean air tube from the valve rocker arm cover. 9. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolts and cover. 10. Remove and discard the old the gasket (504) from the valve rocker arm cover. 11. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets, if cut or damaged. Important: Do not remove the oil fill tube from the rocker cover unless service is required. If the oil fill tube has been removed, install a NEW tube during assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4054 12. Remove the oil fill cap from the oil fill tube, if necessary. 13. Remove the oil fill tube, if necessary. 14. Discard the oil fill tube, if necessary. Installation Procedure Important: * All gasket surfaces should be free of oil an/or other foreign material during assembly. * DO NOT reuse the valve rocker arm cover gasket. * The valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets may be reused. 1. Install a NEW gasket (504) into the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Install a NEW oil fill tube to the valve rocker arm cover, if necessary. 3. Install NEW valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets, if necessary. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the valve rocker arm cover and bolts. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4055 5. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) clean air tube from the valve rocker arm cover. 6. Apply threadlock to the threads of the ignition coil bracket bolts. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . 7. Install the ignition coil and bracket assembly. 8. Install the ignition coil bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wires (724) to the ignition coils. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4056 10. Position the engine harness, as necessary. 11. Connect the ignition coil main electrical connector (4). 12. Install the CPA retainer (3). 13. Install the engine sight shield, if required. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4057 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield, if required. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (3). 3. Disconnect the ignition coil main electrical connector (4). 4. Reposition the engine harness, if necessary. 5. Remove the spark plug wires (724) from the ignition coils. 1. Twist each plug wire 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the ignition coil. 6. Remove the ignition coil bracket bolts (720). 7. Remove the ignition coil and bracket assembly (719). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4058 8. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) foul air hose from the intake manifold and valve rocker arm cover. 9. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolts and cover. 10. Remove and discard the old the gasket (504) from the valve rocker arm cover. 11. Remove the valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets, if cut or damaged. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4059 Important: * All gasket surfaces should be free of oil or other foreign material during assembly. * DO NOT reuse the valve rocker arm cover gasket. * The valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets may be reused. 1. Install a NEW gasket (504) into the groove of the valve rocker arm cover. 2. Install NEW valve rocker arm cover bolt grommets, if necessary. 3. Install the valve rocker arm cover and bolts. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the rocker arm cover bolts and grommets. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4060 5. Install the PCV foul air hose to the intake manifold and valve rocker arm cover. 6. Apply threadlock to the threads of the ignition coil bracket bolts. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . 7. Install the ignition coil and bracket assembly (719). 8. Install the ignition coil bracket bolts (720). Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 9. Install the spark plug wires (724) from the ignition coils. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Rocker Arm Cover Replacement - Left Side > Page 4061 10. Position the engine harness, if necessary. 11. Connect the ignition coil main electrical connector (4). 12. Install the CPA retainer (3). 13. Install the engine sight shield, if required. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service Precautions Valve Spring: Service Precautions Valve Springs Can Be Tightly Compressed Caution Caution: Valve springs can be tightly compressed. Use care when removing retainers and plugs. Personal injury could result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4065 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement Tools Required * J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter * J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair) . Important: Remove the spark plugs from the cylinder head with the engine at room temperature. 2. Loosen the spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or air blast away any dirt or debris from around the spark plug. 4. Remove the spark plug. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4066 5. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug hole. 6. Attach an air hose to the J 22794 . 7. Apply compressed air to the J 22794 in order to hold the valves in place. 8. Using the J 38606 compress the valve spring. 9. Remove the valve stem keys (225). 10. Using the J 38606 carefully release the valve spring tension. 11. Remove the J 38606 . 12. Remove the valve spring cap (224). 13. Remove the valve spring (223). 14. Remove the valve stem oil seal (222) . Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4067 1. Clean the cylinder head valve spring seat and area. 2. Install the valve stem oil seal (222). 3. Install the valve spring (223). 4. Install the valve spring cap (224). 5. Compress the valve spring using the J 38606 . 6. Install the valve stem keys. 1. Use grease in order to hold the valve stem keys in place. 2. Make sure the keys seat properly in the groove of the valve stem. 3. Using the J 38606 carefully release the valve spring tension, making sure the valve stem keys stay in place. 4. Remove the J 38606 . 5. Tap the end of the valve stem with a plastic faced hammer to seat the keys, if necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4068 7. Remove the compressed air supply from the J 22794 . 8. Remove the J 22794 from the spark plug port. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 9. Hand start the spark plug. Tighten the spark plug to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 10. Install the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement (See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 4074 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 4075 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4076 Drive Belt: Service Precautions Belt Dressing Notice Notice: Do not use belt dressing on the drive belt. Belt dressing causes the breakdown of the composition of the drive belt. Failure to follow this recommendation will damage the drive belt. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4077 Drive Belt: Description and Operation Drive Belt System Description The drive belt system consists of the following components: * The drive belt * The drive belt tensioner * The drive belt idler pulley * The crankshaft balancer pulley * The accessory drive component mounting brackets * The accessory drive components - The power steering pump, if belt driven - The generator - The A/C compressor, if equipped - The engine cooling fan, if belt driven - The water pump, if belt driven - The vacuum pump, if equipped - The air compressor, if equipped The drive belt system may use 1 belt or 2 belts. The drive belt is thin so that it can bend backwards and has several ribs to match the grooves in the pulleys. The drive belts are made of different types of rubbers, chloroprene or EPDM, and have different layers or plys containing either fiber cloth or cords for reinforcement. Both sides of the drive belt may be used to drive the different accessory drive components. When the back side of the drive belt is used to drive a pulley, the pulley is smooth. The drive belt is pulled by the crankshaft balancer pulley across the accessory drive component pulleys. The spring loaded drive belt tensioner keeps constant tension on the drive belt to prevent the drive belt from slipping. The drive belt tensioner arm will move when loads are applied to the drive belt by the accessory drive components and the crankshaft. The drive belt system may have an idler pulley, which is used to add wrap to the adjacent pulleys. Some systems use an idler pulley in place of an accessory drive component when the vehicle is not equipped with the accessory. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids * A chirping or squeal noise may be intermittent due to moisture on the drive belts or the pulleys. It may be necessary to spray a small amount of water on the drive belts in order to duplicate the customers concern. If spraying water on the drive belt duplicates the symptom, cleaning the belt pulleys may be the probable solution. * If the noise is intermittent, verify the accessory drive components by varying their loads making sure they are operated to their maximum capacity. An overcharged A/C system, power steering system with a pinched hose or wrong fluid, or a generator failing are suggested items to inspect. * A chirping, squeal or whine noise may be caused by a loose or improper installation of a body or suspension component. Other items of the vehicle may also cause the noise. * The drive belts will not cause a whine noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. The noise may not be engine related. This step is to verify that the engine is making the noise. If the engine is not making the noise do not proceed further with this table. 3. The noise may be an internal engine noise. Removing the drive belts one at a time and operating the engine for a brief period will verify the noise is related to the drive belt. When removing the drive belt the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspect all drive belt pulleys for pilling. Pilling is the small balls or pills or it can be strings in the drive belt grooves from the accumulation of rubber dust. 6. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across 2 or 3 pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 10. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 12. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 14. This test is to verify that the drive belt tensioner operates properly. If the drive belt tensioner is not operating properly, proper belt tension may not be achieved to keep the drive belt from slipping which could cause a squeal noise. 15. This test is to verify that the drive belt is not too long, which would prevent the drive belt tensioner from working properly. Also if an incorrect length drive belt was installed, it may not be routed properly and may be turning an accessory drive component in the wrong direction. 16. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across 2 or 3 pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure for that pulley. 17. This test is to verify that the pulleys are the correct diameter or width. Using a known good vehicle compare the pulley sizes. 19. Replacing the drive belt when it is not damaged or there is not excessive pilling will only be a temporary repair. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 4080 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 4081 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 4082 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Drive Belt Falls Off and Excessive Wear Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids If the drive belt repeatedly falls off the drive belt pulleys, this is because of pulley misalignment. An extra load that is quickly applied on released by an accessory drive component may cause the drive belt to fall off the pulleys. Verify the accessory drive components operate properly. If the drive belt is the incorrect length, the drive belt tensioner may not keep the proper tension on the drive belt. Excessive wear on a drive belt is usually caused by an incorrect installation or the wrong drive belt for the application. Minor misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will not cause excessive wear, but will probably cause the drive belt to make a noise or to fall off. Excessive misalignment of the drive belt pulleys will cause excessive wear but may also make the drive belt fall off. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This inspection is to verify the condition of the drive belt. Damage may have occurred to the drive belt when the drive belt fell off. The drive belt may of been damaged, which caused the drive belt to fall off. Inspect the belt for cuts, tears, sections of ribs missing, or damaged belt plys. 4. Misalignment of the pulleys may be caused from improper mounting of the accessory drive component, incorrect installation of the accessory drive component pulley, or the pulley bent inward or outward from a previous repair. Test for a misaligned pulley using a straight edge in the pulley grooves across 2 or 3 pulleys. If a misaligned pulley is found refer to that accessory drive component for the proper installation procedure of that pulley. 5. Inspecting the pulleys for being bent should include inspecting for a dent or other damage to the pulleys that would prevent the drive belt from not seating properly in all of the pulley grooves or on the smooth surface of a pulley when the back side of the belt is used to drive the pulley. 6. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent or cracked will let the drive belt fall off. 7. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that a wrong bolt, nut , spacer, or washer was installed. Missing. loose, or the wrong fasteners may cause pulley misalignment from the bracket moving under load. Over tightening of the fasteners may cause misalignment of the accessory component bracket. 13. The inspection is to verify the drive belt is correctly installed on all of the drive belt pulleys. Wear on the drive belt may be caused by mis-positioning the drive belt by one groove on a pulley. 14. The installation of a drive belt that is too wide or too narrow will cause wear on the drive belt. The drive belt ribs should match all of the grooves on all of the pulleys. 15. This inspection is to verify the drive belt is not contacting any parts of the engine or body while the engine is operating. There should be sufficient clearance when the drive belt accessory drive components load varies. The drive belt should not come in contact with an engine or a body component when snapping the throttle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 4083 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 4084 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Drive Belt Rumbling and Vibration Diagnosis Diagnostic Aids The accessory drive components can have an affect on engine vibration. Vibration from the engine operating may cause a body component or another part of the vehicle to make rumbling noise. Vibration can be caused by, but not limited to the A/C system over charged, the power steering system restricted or the incorrect fluid, or an extra load on the generator. To help identify an intermittent or an improper condition, vary the loads on the accessory drive components. The drive belt may have a rumbling condition that can not be seen or felt. Sometimes replacing the drive belt may be the only repair for the symptom. If replacing the drive belt, completing the diagnostic table, and the noise is only heard when the drive belts are installed, there might be an accessory drive component with a failure. Varying the load on the different accessory drive components may aid in identifying which component is causing the rumbling noise. Test Description The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the diagnostic table. 2. This test is to verify that the symptom is present during diagnosing. Other vehicle components may cause a similar symptom. 3. This test is to verify that one of the drive belts is causing the rumbling noise or vibration. Rumbling noise may be confused with an internal engine noise due to the similarity in the description. Remove only one drive belt at a time if the vehicle has multiple drive belts. When removing the drive belts the water pump may not be operating and the engine may overheat. Also DTCs may set when the engine is operating with the drive belts removed. 4. Inspecting the drive belts is to ensure that they are not causing the noise. Small cracks across the ribs of the drive belt will not cause the noise. Belt separation is identified by the plys of the belt separating and may be seen at the edge of the belt our felt as a lump in the belt. 5. Small amounts of pilling is normal condition and acceptable. When the pilling is severe the drive belt does not have a smooth surface for proper operation. 9. Inspecting of the fasteners can eliminate the possibility that the wrong bolt, nut, spacer, or washer was installed. 11. This step should only be performed if the water pump is driven by the drive belt. Inspect the water pump shaft for being bent. Also inspect the water pump bearings for smooth operation and excessive play. Compare the water pump with a known good water pump. 12. Accessory drive component brackets that are bent, cracked, or loose may put extra strain on that accessory component causing it to vibrate. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Chirping, Squeal, and Whine Diagnosis > Page 4085 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4086 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory Tools Required EN-47988 Serpentine Belt Tension Unloader Removal Procedure 1. Remove the passenger side diagonal brace, if more clearance is required. Refer to Front Fender Upper Diagonal Brace Replacement . 2. Reposition the underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC), if more clearance is required. 3. Install the EN-47988 , to the drive belt tensioner. 4. Rotate the EN-47988 clockwise in order to relieve the tension on the belt tensioner. 5. Remove the drive belt (1) from over the power steering pump pulley. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4087 6. Slowly release the EN-47988 . 7. Remove the EN-47988 from the belt tensioner. 8. Remove the drive belt (1) from around all the other pulleys. 9. Clean and inspect the belt surfaces of all the pulleys. Installation Procedure 1. Install and route the drive belt around all the pulleys except for the power steering pump pulley. 2. Ensure that when installing the EN-47988 (1), to the belt tensioner that the EN-47988 is NOT installed above the drive belt (2). 3. Ensure that when installing the EN-47988 (1), to the belt tensioner that the EN-47988 is installed below the drive belt (2). 4. Rotate the EN-47988 clockwise in order to relieve the tension on the belt tensioner. 5. Ensure that the drive belt is still properly routed around all the other pulleys, then install the drive belt over the power steering pump pulley. 6. Slowly release the EN-47988 . 7. Remove the EN-47988 from the belt tensioner. 8. Inspect the drive belt for proper installation and alignment. 9. Position the UBEC, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4088 10. Install the passenger side diagonal brace, if required. Refer to Front Fender Upper Diagonal Brace Replacement . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt Tensioner Diagnosis Inspection Procedure Notice: Allowing the drive belt tensioner to snap into the free position may result in damage to the tensioner. Important: When the engine is operating the drive belt tensioner arm will move. Do not replace the drive belt tensioner because of movement in the drive belt tensioner arm. 1. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 2. Move the drive belt tensioner through its full travel. * The movement should feel smooth. * There should be no binding. * The tensioner should return freely. 3. If any binding is observed, replace the drive belt tensioner. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement Accessory (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the drive belt. Refer to of Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4092 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement - Accessory Removal Procedure 1. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the right wheel and tire. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 4. Remove the right engine splash shield. 5. Remove the power steering gear inlet hose retainer bolt (2). 6. Remove the drive belt tensioner bolts. 7. Remove the drive belt tensioner. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4093 1. Install the drive belt tensioner. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the drive belt tensioner bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the power steering gear inlet hose retainer bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 4. Install the right engine splash shield. 5. Install the right wheel and tire. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Install the accessory drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Engine Mount: Testing and Inspection Engine Mount Inspection Inspection Procedure Important: Before replacing any engine mount due to suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the fluid is the engine mount, not the engine or accessories. 1. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture) . 2. Raise the engine in order to remove the weight from the engine mount and to create slight tension in the rubber. 3. Observe the engine mount while raising the engine. Replace the engine mount if the engine mount exhibits any of the following conditions: * The hard rubber surface is covered with heat check cracks. * The rubber is separated from the metal plate of the engine mount. * The rubber is split through the center of the engine mount. 4. If there is movement between the metal plate of the engine mount and its attaching points, lower the engine on the engine mount. Tighten the bolts or nuts attaching the engine mount to the frame or engine mount bracket. 5. For information on the transaxle mount, refer to Transmission Mount Inspection . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . 2. Remove the left exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side) . 3. Remove the upper engine mount nuts. 4. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture) . 5. Using the engine support fixture, raise the engine . 6. Remove the engine mount bracket bolts. 7. Remove the engine mount bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4099 1. Install the engine mount bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the engine mount bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Using the engine support fixture, lower the engine . 4. Remove the engine support fixture. 5. Install the upper engine mount nuts. Tighten the nuts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 6. Install the left exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side) . 7. Install the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4100 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . 2. Remove the right exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) ( See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side) . 3. Remove the upper engine mount nuts. 4. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture) . 5. Using the engine support fixture, raise the engine . 6. Remove the engine mount bracket bolts. 7. Remove the engine mount bracket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4101 1. Install the engine mount. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the lower engine mount nuts. Tighten the nuts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Using the engine support fixture, lower the engine . 4. Remove the engine support fixture. 5. Install the upper engine mount nuts. Tighten the nuts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 6. Install the right exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) ( See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side) . 7. Install the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4102 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Replacement - Left Engine Mount Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . 2. Remove the left exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side) . 3. Remove the upper engine mount nuts. 4. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture) . 5. Using the engine support fixture, raise the engine . 6. Remove the engine mount bracket bolts. 7. Remove the engine mount bracket. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4103 9. Remove the lower engine mount nuts. 10. Remove the engine mount. 11. Remove the engine mount heat shield, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the engine mount heat shield, if necessary. 2. Install the engine mount to the engine. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the lower engine mount nuts. Tighten the nuts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 4. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4104 5. Install the engine mount bracket. 6. Install the engine mount bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 7. Using the engine support fixture, lower the engine . 8. Remove the engine support fixture. 9. Install the upper engine mount nuts. Tighten the nuts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 10. Install the left exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side) . 11. Install the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4105 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Replacement - Right Engine Mount Replacement - Right Side Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . 2. Remove the right exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) ( See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side) . 3. Remove the upper engine mount nuts. 4. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Support Fixture) . 5. Using the engine support fixture, raise the engine . 6. Remove the engine mount bracket bolts. 7. Remove the engine mount bracket. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4106 9. Remove the lower engine mount nuts. 10. Remove the engine mount. Installation Procedure 1. Install the engine mount. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the lower engine mount nuts. Tighten the nuts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4107 4. Install the engine mount bracket. 5. Install the engine mount bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 6. Using the engine support fixture, lower the engine . 7. Remove the engine support fixture. 8. Install the upper engine mount nuts. Tighten the nuts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 9. Install the right exhaust manifold. Refer to Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPO LS4) (See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side)Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) ( See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair/Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side) . 10. Install the engine mount strut. Refer to Engine Mount Strut Replacement (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4108 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Strut Replacement Engine Mount Strut Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the forward engine mount strut bolt (3) and nut (1). 2. Remove the rear engine mount strut bolt (4) and nut (5). 3. Remove the engine mount strut (2). 4. Inspect the rubber in the engine mount strut for the following conditions: * Hardness * Splitting * Cracking 5. If necessary, remove the engine mount strut bracket bolts (body side). 6. If necessary, remove the engine mount strut bracket (body side). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4109 7. Remove the heater pipe bracket bolt from the engine mount. 8. If necessary, remove the engine mount strut bracket bolts (engine side). 9. If necessary, remove the engine mount strut bracket (engine side). Installation Procedure 1. If necessary, position the engine mount strut bracket (engine side) to the cylinder head. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. If necessary, install the engine mount strut bracket bolts (engine side). Tighten the bolts to 48 N.m (35 lb ft). 3. Install the heater pipe bracket bolt. Tighten the bolt to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Bracket Replacement - Left > Page 4110 4. If necessary, position the engine mount strut bracket (body side) to the vehicle. 5. If necessary, install the engine mount strut bracket bolts (body side). Tighten the bolt to 48 N.m (35 lb ft). 6. Install the engine mount strut (2). 7. Install the rear engine mount strut bolt (4) and nut (5). Tighten the bolt/nut to 48 N.m (35 lb ft). 8. Install the forward engine mount strut bolt (3) and nut (1). Tighten the bolt/nut to 48 N.m (35 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 2. Loosen the necessary drive belt idler pulley bolt. 3. Remove the necessary drive belt idler pulley. Installation Procedure 1. Position the necessary drive belt idler pulley to the coolant manifold and/or generator bracket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4114 2. Tighten the necessary drive belt idler pulley bolt. Tighten the bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure - Minimum Hot 1,000 engine RPM ............................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 6 psig (41 kPa) 2,000 engine RPM .............................................. .................................................................................................................................... 18 psig (124 kPa) 4,000 engine RPM ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 24 psig (165 kPa) Active Fuel Management Relief Valve - RPO LC9, LMG, LH6, L76 Oil Pressure ......................................................................................................................................... ...................... 55-75 psig (379-517 kPa) Min-Max. NOTE: As Measured at Oil Pressure Sensor Location. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4119 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Tools Required * EN-47971 Oil Pressure Gage Adapter * J 21867 Pressure Gage 1. With the vehicle on a level surface, run the vehicle for a few minutes. Allow adequate drain down time, 2-3 minutes, and measure the oil level. 2. If required, add the recommended grade engine oil and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures full on the oil level indicator. 3. Run the engine briefly, 10-15 seconds, and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle gage or light. 4. Listen for a noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 5. Inspect for the following conditions: * Oil diluted by water or glycol antifreeze Refer to Coolant in Engine Oil (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Coolant In Engine Oil) . * Foamy oil, which may be caused by a cut or damaged oil pump screen O-ring seal 6. Remove the oil filter and install the EN-47971 (1). 7. Install J 21867 (2), or equivalent to the EN-47971 (1). 8. Run the engine and measure the engine oil pressure. 9. Compare the readings to Engine Mechanical Specifications (See: Specifications/Service Limit & General Specifications) . 10. If the engine oil pressure is below specifications, inspect the engine for 1 or more of the following conditions: * Oil pump worn or dirty Refer to Oil Pump Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . * Oil pump-to-engine block bolts loose Refer to Oil Pump, Screen and Crankshaft Oil Deflector Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . * Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged * Oil pump screen O-ring seal missing or damaged * Malfunctioning oil pump pressure relief valve * Excessive bearing clearance * Cracked, porous, or restricted oil galleries * Oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed Refer to Engine Block Plug Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . * Improper operation of the active fuel management oil pressure relief valve Refer to Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) Oil Pressure Relief Valve Diagnosis and Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil level indicator (418) from the tube. 2. Remove the oil level indicator tube bolt (419). 3. Remove the oil level indicator tube (420) from the engine block. Important: Inspect the O-ring for cuts or damage. The seal may be reused if it is not cut or damaged. 4. Remove the O-ring seal from the tube, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal onto the oil level indicator tube, if necessary. 3. Install the oil level indicator tube (420) to the engine block. The tube must be installed with the collar flush to the block. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the oil level indicator tube bolt (419) Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 5. Install the oil level indicator (418) to the tube. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 4131 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 4137 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 4138 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 4143 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 4149 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil: > 11-00-90-001 > Mar > 11 > Engine GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 4150 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................... 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4153 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE OIL TYPE Look for two things: 1.GM6094M Your vehicle's engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. 2.SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. NOTICE: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4154 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the oil fill cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). 5. Allow the oil to drain into an appropriate container. 6. Remove the engine oil filter (437). Allow the rest of the engine oil to drain into an appropriate container. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4155 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: Prior to installing a NEW oil filter, ensure that the old oil filter gasket has been removed from the engine block. If not, remove the old gasket. 1. Install a NEW engine oil filter (437). Tighten the filter to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 2. Install the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). Tighten the drain plug to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Fill the engine with the appropriate amount and type of NEW engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities and Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations . 5. Check the oil level. 6. Install the oil fill cap. 7. Close the hood. 8. Reset the engine oil life monitor, if necessary. Refer to GM Oil Life System Resetting . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Control Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Control Valve: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Relief Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the oil fill cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). 5. Allow the oil to drain into an appropriate container. 6. Remove the engine oil filter (437). Allow the rest of the engine oil to drain into an appropriate container. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Control Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4159 7. Remove the oil pan cover bolts. 8. Remove the valve lifter oil pressure relief valve (455). Installation Procedure 1. Install the valve lifter oil pressure relief valve (455). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Control Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4160 2. Inspect the valve lifter oil pressure relief valve for proper operation. Lightly depress the valve (2). The valve spring (1) should seat the valve to the proper closed position. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the oil pan cover bolts and cover. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 4. Install a NEW engine oil filter (437). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Control Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4161 5. Install the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill the engine with the appropriate amount and type of NEW engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities and Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations . 8. Check the oil level. 9. Install the oil fill cap. 10. Open the hood. 11. Reset the engine oil lift monitor, if necessary. Refer to GM Oil Life System Resetting . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting Removal Procedure 1. Using a bent-tip screwdriver or equivalent, pull on one of the open ends of the retaining ring in order to rotate the retaining ring. 2. Rotate the retaining ring around the quick connector until the retaining ring is out of position and can be completely removed. 3. Remove the engine oil cooler line from the quick connector fitting. Pull the lines straight out from the connector. 4. Clean all of the components in a suitable solvent, and dry them with compressed air. 5. Inspect the fittings, the connectors, the cooler lines, and the cooler for damage, distortion, or restriction. Replace parts as necessary. Installation Procedure Important: Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring down over the fitting. 1. Install the retaining ring into each quick connector fitting. 2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting > Page 4166 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the connector until the retaining ring is positioned with all 3 ears through the 3 slots. 4. Ensure the 3 retaining ring ears can be seen from the inside of the connector and the retaining ring can move freely in the slots. 5. Install the engine oil cooler line into the quick connector fitting. Pull back on the engine oil cooler lines to ensure a proper connection. 6. Inspect and fill the engine oil to the proper level. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting > Page 4167 Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Engine Oil Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the right engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Right) Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Left) . 2. Remove the lower air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the support clip from the engine oil cooler lines. 4. Remove the engine oil cooler lines from the engine oil cooler. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting (See: Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting) . 5. Remove the engine oil cooler lines from the engine oil filter adapter. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting (See: Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting) . 6. Remove the engine oil cooler lines from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the engine oil cooler lines to the vehicle. 2. Install the engine oil cooler lines to the engine oil cooler. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting (See: Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting) . 3. Install the engine oil cooler lines to the engine oil filter adapter. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting (See: Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting) . 4. Install the engine oil cooler line support clip to the engine oil cooler lines. 5. Install the right engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Right) Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Left) . 6. Install the lower air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting > Page 4168 7. Add the proper amount of engine oil. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting > Page 4169 Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Auxiliary Engine Oil Cooler Replacement Auxiliary Engine Oil Cooler Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the upper air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Upper Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the right engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Right) Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Left) . 3. Remove the lower air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove the support clip from the engine oil cooler lines. 5. Reposition the hose clamps on the power steering cooler lines. 6. Remove the power steering oil cooler lines from the power steering cooler. 7. Remove the engine oil cooler lines from the engine oil cooler. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting (See: Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting) . 8. Remove the upper bolt (1) from the engine oil cooler/power steering cooler. 9. Remove the lower bolts (2) from the engine oil cooler/power steering cooler. 10. Remove the engine oil cooler/power steering cooler from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Install the engine oil cooler/power steering cooler to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the upper bolt (1) to the engine oil cooler/power steering cooler bracket. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting > Page 4170 Tighten the bolt to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 3. Install the lower bolts (2) to the engine oil cooler/power steering cooler bracket. Tighten the bolts to 2 N.m (18 lb in). 4. Install the engine oil cooler lines to the engine oil cooler. Refer to Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting (See: Engine Oil Cooler Pipe/Hose Quick Connect Fitting) . 5. Install the power steering oil cooler lines to the power steering cooler. 6. Reposition the hose clamps on the power steering cooler lines. 7. Install the support clip to the engine oil cooler lines. 8. Install the right engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Right) Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Left) . 9. Install the lower air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . 10. Install the upper air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Upper Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair) . 11. Add the proper amount of engine oil and power steering fluid. 12. Bleed the power steering system. Refer to Power Steering System Bleeding . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 4179 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 4185 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-01-016B > Jul > 09 > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Filter: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Filter: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 4195 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Filter: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 4201 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4202 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the oil fill cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). 5. Allow the oil to drain into an appropriate container. 6. Remove the engine oil filter (437). Allow the rest of the engine oil to drain into an appropriate container. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4203 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: Prior to installing a NEW oil filter, ensure that the old oil filter gasket has been removed from the engine block. If not, remove the old gasket. 1. Install a NEW engine oil filter (437). Tighten the filter to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 2. Install the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). Tighten the drain plug to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Fill the engine with the appropriate amount and type of NEW engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities and Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations . 5. Check the oil level. 6. Install the oil fill cap. 7. Close the hood. 8. Reset the engine oil life monitor, if necessary. Refer to GM Oil Life System Resetting . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair Oil Filter Adapter Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the oil fill cap. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). 5. Allow the oil to drain into an appropriate container. 6. Remove the engine oil filter (437). Allow the rest of the engine oil to drain into an appropriate container. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4207 7. Remove the oil filter adapter (438). Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: Prior to installing a NEW oil filter, ensure that the old oil filter gasket has been removed from the engine block. If not, remove the old gasket. 1. Install a NEW oil filter adapter (438). Tighten the adapter to 55 N.m (40 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4208 2. Install a NEW engine oil filter (437). Tighten the filter to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 3. Install the oil pan drain plug (430) and O-ring (429). Tighten the drain plug to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Fill the engine with the appropriate amount and type of NEW engine oil. Refer to Approximate Fluid Capacities and Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations . 6. Check the oil level. 7. Install the oil fill cap. 8. Close the hood. 9. Reset the engine oil life monitor, if necessary. Refer to GM Oil Life System Resetting . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Level Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4212 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4213 Oil Level Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Level Switch (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4214 Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Level Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Drain the oil from the oil pan. 3. Disconnect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the oil level sensor bolt (751). 5. Remove the oil level sensor (727) and O-ring (728) from the oil pan. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4215 1. Install the oil level sensor (727) and O-ring (728) to the oil pan. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the oil level sensor bolt (751). Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Refill the engine oil to the proper level. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan M6 Bolts - Oil Pan-to-Rear Housing ........................................................................................................................................... 12 N.m (106 lb in) Oil Pan M8 Bolts - Oil Pan-to-Engine Block and Oil Pan-to-Front Cover ................................................................................................. 25 N.m (18 lb ft) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4219 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine frame. Refer to Frame Replacement . 2. Drain the engine oil and remove the engine oil filter. 3. Reinstall the drain plug and oil filter until snug. 4. Remove the transaxle converter cover bolt/stud and cover. 5. Disconnect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove engine harness retainer from the front of oil pan. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4220 7. Position the drive belt tensioner aside in order to access the oil pan bolt. Refer to Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt Tensioner/Service and Repair) . 8. Remove the oil pan bolts. 9. Remove the oil pan. Important: DO NOT allow foreign material to enter the oil passages of the oil pan, cap or cover the openings as required. 10. Drill (3) out the oil pan gasket retaining rivets (2), if required. 11. Remove the gasket (1) from the pan. 12. Discard the gasket and rivets. 13. Clean and inspect the engine oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . Installation Procedure Important: * The alignment of the structural oil pan is critical. The rear bolt hole locations of the oil pan provide mounting points for the transmission housing. To ensure the rigidity of the powertrain and correct transmission alignment, it is important that the rear of the block and the rear of the oil pan are flush, or even. The rear of the oil pan must NEVER protrude beyond the engine block and transmission housing plane. * Do NOT reuse the oil pan gasket. * It is NOT necessary to rivet the NEW gasket to the oil pan. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4221 1. Apply a 5 mm (0.20 in) bead of sealant , or equivalent 20 mm (0.80 in) long to the engine block. Apply the sealant directly onto the tabs of the front/rear cover gasket that protrudes into the oil pan surface. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) for the correct part number. Important: Be sure to align the oil gallery passages in the oil pan and engine block properly with the oil pan gasket. 2. Pre-assemble the oil pan gasket to the pan. 1. Install the gasket onto the pan. 2. Install the oil pan bolts to the pan and through the gasket. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the oil pan, gasket, and bolts to the engine block. * Tighten the oil pan and oil pan-to-front cover bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). * Tighten the oil pan-to-rear cover bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the transmission housing, converter cover, and transmission bolts/stud to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 4. Install the drive belt tensioner. Refer to Drive Belt Tensioner Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt Tensioner/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4222 5. Install engine harness to front of oil pan. 6. Connect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 7. Install the transaxle converter cover and bolt/stud. Tighten the bolt/stud to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 8. Install new engine oil and a new oil filter. Refer to Engine Oil and Oil Filter Replacement (See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair) . 9. Install the engine frame. Refer to Frame Replacement . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Top of Engine (LS4) Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4226 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4227 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4228 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Sensor Socket Removal Procedure 1. If necessary, remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 3. Using J 41712 , remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4229 1. Apply sealant to the threads of the oil pressure sensor. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Using J 41712 , install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 4. If necessary, install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure - Minimum Hot 1,000 engine RPM ............................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 6 psig (41 kPa) 2,000 engine RPM .............................................. .................................................................................................................................... 18 psig (124 kPa) 4,000 engine RPM ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 24 psig (165 kPa) Active Fuel Management Relief Valve - RPO LC9, LMG, LH6, L76 Oil Pressure ......................................................................................................................................... ...................... 55-75 psig (379-517 kPa) Min-Max. NOTE: As Measured at Oil Pressure Sensor Location. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4234 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Tools Required * EN-47971 Oil Pressure Gage Adapter * J 21867 Pressure Gage 1. With the vehicle on a level surface, run the vehicle for a few minutes. Allow adequate drain down time, 2-3 minutes, and measure the oil level. 2. If required, add the recommended grade engine oil and fill the crankcase until the oil level measures full on the oil level indicator. 3. Run the engine briefly, 10-15 seconds, and verify low or no oil pressure on the vehicle gage or light. 4. Listen for a noisy valve train or a knocking noise. 5. Inspect for the following conditions: * Oil diluted by water or glycol antifreeze Refer to Coolant in Engine Oil (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Coolant In Engine Oil) . * Foamy oil, which may be caused by a cut or damaged oil pump screen O-ring seal 6. Remove the oil filter and install the EN-47971 (1). 7. Install J 21867 (2), or equivalent to the EN-47971 (1). 8. Run the engine and measure the engine oil pressure. 9. Compare the readings to Engine Mechanical Specifications (See: Specifications/Service Limit & General Specifications) . 10. If the engine oil pressure is below specifications, inspect the engine for 1 or more of the following conditions: * Oil pump worn or dirty Refer to Oil Pump Cleaning and Inspection (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . * Oil pump-to-engine block bolts loose Refer to Oil Pump, Screen and Crankshaft Oil Deflector Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . * Oil pump screen loose, plugged, or damaged * Oil pump screen O-ring seal missing or damaged * Malfunctioning oil pump pressure relief valve * Excessive bearing clearance * Cracked, porous, or restricted oil galleries * Oil gallery plugs missing or incorrectly installed Refer to Engine Block Plug Installation (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . * Improper operation of the active fuel management oil pressure relief valve Refer to Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) Oil Pressure Relief Valve Diagnosis and Testing (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement Intake Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-06-01-026C Date: February 03, 2010 Subject: Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement After Severe Internal Engine Damage Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-01-026B (Section 06 - Engine). When replacing an engine due to internal damage, extreme care should be taken when transferring the intake manifold to the new Goodwrench service engine long block. Internal damage may result in the potential discharge of internal engine component debris in the intake manifold via broken pistons and/or bent, broken, or missing intake valves. After removing the intake manifold from the engine, the technician should carefully inspect all of the cylinder head intake ports to see if the valve heads are still present and not bent. Usually when the valve heads are missing or sufficiently bent, internal engine component debris will be present to varying degrees in the intake port of the cylinder head. If this debris is present in any of the cylinder head intake ports, the intake manifold should be replaced. This replacement is required due to the complex inlet runner and plenum configuration of most of the intake manifolds, making thorough and complete component cleaning difficult and nearly impossible to verify complete removal of debris. Re-installation of an intake manifold removed from an engine with deposits of internal engine component debris may result in the ingestion of any remaining debris into the new Goodwrench service engine. This may cause damage or potential failure of the new service engine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4239 Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Bolts - First Pass in Sequence ............................................................................................................................................ 5 N.m (44 lb in) Intake Manifold Bolts - Final Pass in Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 10 N.m (89 lb in) Throttle Body Bolts .............................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 10 N.m (89 lb in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Replacement Intake Manifold Replacement Removal Procedure Important: The intake manifold, throttle body, fuel rail, and injectors may be removed as an assembly. If not servicing the individual components, remove the manifold as a complete assembly. 1. Remove the throttle body. Refer to Throttle Body Assembly Replacement . 2. Remove the fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Injector Replacement . 3. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (1) from the intake manifold (2) and the booster check valve (3). 4. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) clean air tube from the air intake duct and valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4242 5. Remove the PCV foul air tube from the intake manifold and valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service . 6. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) purge solenoid tube (2) from the solenoid and reposition. Refer to Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4243 7. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: * EVAP purge solenoid (1) * Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (2) * Oil pressure sensor (4) * Valve lifter oil manifold (5) 8. Remove the MAP sensor (714) from the intake manifold. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4244 9. Remove the EVAP purge solenoid valve and bracket. 10. Remove the intake manifold bolts (512). 11. Remove the intake manifold (500). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4245 12. Remove and discard the intake manifold gaskets (514). Installation Procedure 1. Install the NEW intake manifold gaskets (514). 2. Install the intake manifold (500). 3. Apply a band of threadlock to the threads of the intake manifold bolts (512). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4246 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the intake manifold bolts. * Tighten the bolts a first pass in sequence to 5 N.m (44 lb in). * Tighten the bolts a first pass in sequence to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 5. Install the EVAP purge solenoid bracket and solenoid. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4247 6. Install the MAP sensor (714) to the intake manifold. 7. Connect the following electrical connectors: * EVAP purge solenoid (1) * MAP sensor (2) * Oil pressure sensor (4) * Valve lifter oil manifold (5) 8. Position and install the EVAP purge solenoid tube (2) to the solenoid. Refer to Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4248 9. Install the PCV foul air tube to the intake manifold and valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service . 10. Install the PCV clean air tube to the air intake duct and valve rocker arm cover. Refer to Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4249 11. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (1) to the intake manifold (2) and the booster check valve (3). 12. Install the fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Injector Replacement . 13. Install the throttle body. Refer to Throttle Body Assembly Replacement . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Intake Manifold Replacement > Page 4250 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Pull up on the front and rear of the sight shield in order to disengage sight shield from the studs. 2. Remove the engine sight shield from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Important: When installing the engine sight shield, ensure the heater hoses sit on top of the shield to prevent wear over time. 1. Align the sight shield to the studs on the intake manifold. 2. Push down in the 3 locations in order to secure the sight shield to the studs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Replacement Special Tools * J 41479 Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Installer * J 41479-2A Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Installation Guide Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove and discard the crankshaft rear oil seal (141). Installation Procedure Important: For proper orientation, note the installation direction of the oil seal. The oil seal is a reverse-lip design. The part number is applied to the outside face of the seal, as shown. 1. Inspect the seal and identify the part number markings for proper orientation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4255 Important: * Do not lubricate the oil seal inside diameter (ID) or the crankshaft surface. * Do not reuse the crankshaft rear oil seal. 2. Lubricate the outside diameter (OD) of the oil seal (141) with clean engine oil. DO NOT allow oil or other lubricants to contact the seal surface. 3. Lubricate the rear cover oil seal bore with clean engine oil. DO NOT allow oil or other lubricants to contact the crankshaft surface. 4. Install the J 41479 tapered cone (2) with the J 41479-2A and bolts onto the rear of the crankshaft. 5. Tighten the bolts until snug. Do not overtighten. 6. Install the rear oil seal onto the tapered cone (2) and push the seal to the rear cover bore. 7. Install the oil seal with the part number markings facing away from the engine. 8. Thread the J 41479 threaded rod into the tapered cone until the tool (1) contacts the oil seal. 9. Align the oil seal into the tool (1). 10. Rotate the handle of the tool (1) clockwise until the seal enters the rear cover and bottoms into the cover bore. 11. Remove the J 41479 and the J 41479-2A . 12. Install the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Replacement Tools Required J 41478 Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Installer Removal Procedure 1. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove and discard the crankshaft oil seal (140). Installation Procedure Important: * Do not lubricate the oil seal sealing surface. * Do not reuse the crankshaft oil seal. 1. Lubricate the outer edge of the oil seal (140) with clean engine oil. 2. Lubricate the front cover oil seal bore with clean engine oil. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4259 3. Install the crankshaft front oil seal (140) onto the J 41478 . 4. Install the J 41478 threaded rod with nut, washer, guide, and oil seal into the end of the crankshaft. 5. Using the J 41478 , install the oil seal into the cover bore. 1. Use a wrench and hold the hex on the installer bolt. 2. Use a second wrench and rotate the installer nut clockwise until the seal bottoms in the cover bore. 3. Remove the J 41478 . 4. Inspect the oil seal for proper installation. The oil seal should be installed evenly and completely into the front cover bore. 6. Install the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Stem Oil Seal and Valve Spring Replacement Tools Required * J 22794 Spark Plug Port Adapter * J 38606 Valve Spring Compressor Removal Procedure 1. Remove the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair) . Important: Remove the spark plugs from the cylinder head with the engine at room temperature. 2. Loosen the spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or air blast away any dirt or debris from around the spark plug. 4. Remove the spark plug. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4263 5. Install the J 22794 into the spark plug hole. 6. Attach an air hose to the J 22794 . 7. Apply compressed air to the J 22794 in order to hold the valves in place. 8. Using the J 38606 compress the valve spring. 9. Remove the valve stem keys (225). 10. Using the J 38606 carefully release the valve spring tension. 11. Remove the J 38606 . 12. Remove the valve spring cap (224). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4264 13. Remove the valve spring (223). 14. Remove the valve stem oil seal (222) . Installation Procedure 1. Clean the cylinder head valve spring seat and area. 2. Install the valve stem oil seal (222). 3. Install the valve spring (223). 4. Install the valve spring cap (224). 5. Compress the valve spring using the J 38606 . 6. Install the valve stem keys. 1. Use grease in order to hold the valve stem keys in place. 2. Make sure the keys seat properly in the groove of the valve stem. 3. Using the J 38606 carefully release the valve spring tension, making sure the valve stem keys stay in place. 4. Remove the J 38606 . 5. Tap the end of the valve stem with a plastic faced hammer to seat the keys, if necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4265 7. Remove the compressed air supply from the J 22794 . 8. Remove the J 22794 from the spark plug port. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 9. Hand start the spark plug. Tighten the spark plug to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 10. Install the valve rocker arm. Refer to Valve Rocker Arm and Push Rod Replacement (See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Level Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4270 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4271 Oil Level Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Level Switch (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4272 Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Level Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Drain the oil from the oil pan. 3. Disconnect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the oil level sensor bolt (751). 5. Remove the oil level sensor (727) and O-ring (728) from the oil pan. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4273 1. Install the oil level sensor (727) and O-ring (728) to the oil pan. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the oil level sensor bolt (751). Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil level sensor electrical connector. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Refill the engine oil to the proper level. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Top of Engine (LS4) Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4277 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4278 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4279 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Sensor Socket Removal Procedure 1. If necessary, remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 3. Using J 41712 , remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4280 1. Apply sealant to the threads of the oil pressure sensor. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Using J 41712 , install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 4. If necessary, install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolt - 1-Bolt Sprocket - First Pass ............................................................................................................................... 75 N.m (55 lb ft) Camshaft Sprocket Bolt - 1-Bolt Sprocket - Final Pass ........................................................................................................................................ 50 degrees Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair Timing Chain: Service and Repair Timing Chain and Sprocket Replacement Tools Required * J 8433 Two Jaw Puller * J 41816-2 Crankshaft End Protector * J 41558 Crankshaft Sprocket Remover * J 41665 Crankshaft Balancer and Sprocket Installer Removal Procedure Notice: Do not turn the crankshaft assembly after the timing chain has been removed in order to prevent damage to the piston assemblies or the valves. 1. Remove the oil pump. Refer to Oil Pump, Screen, and Crankshaft Oil Deflector Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove and discard the camshaft sprocket bolt (206). 3. Remove the camshaft sprocket (205) and timing chain (208). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4288 4. Remove the bolts (231) and timing chain tensioner (232). 5. Use the J 41816-2 (1), the J 41558 (2), bolts (3), and the J 8433 (4) in order to remove the crankshaft sprocket. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4289 6. Remove the crankshaft sprocket (207). 7. Remove the crankshaft sprocket key, as required. Installation Procedure 1. Install the key into the crankshaft keyway, if previously removed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4290 2. Tap the key (122) into the keyway until both ends of the key bottom onto the crankshaft. 3. Install the crankshaft sprocket (207) onto the front of the crankshaft. Align the crankshaft key with the crankshaft sprocket keyway. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4291 4. Use the J 41478 (1) and the J 41665 (2) in order to install the crankshaft sprocket. Install the sprocket onto the crankshaft until fully seated against the crankshaft flange. 5. Rotate the crankshaft sprocket until the alignment mark is in the 12 o'clock position. 6. Compress the timing chain tensioner guide and install the EN 46330 . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4292 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 7. Install the timing chain tensioner (232) and bolts (231). Tighten the timing chain tensioner bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Important: * Do not use the camshaft sprocket bolt again. Install a NEW bolt during assembly. * The sprocket teeth and timing chain must mesh. * The camshaft and the crankshaft sprocket alignment marks MUST be aligned properly. 8. Install the camshaft sprocket (205), timing chain (208), and NEW bolt (206). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4293 9. Inspect the sprockets for proper alignment. The mark on the camshaft sprocket (1) should be located in the 6 o'clock position and the mark on the crankshaft sprocket (2) should be located in the 12 o'clock position. 10. Remove the EN 46330 . Important: Do not apply threadlock to the flex plate bolts at this time. 11. Temporarily install the automatic transmission flex plate and bolts. Refer to Engine Flywheel Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4294 12. Install the EN 47699 (2), spacer (1), and bolts (3) to the block and flex plate. 13. Tighten the EN 47699 bolt (1). Tighten the bolt to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4295 14. Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt. 1. Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt a first pass to 75 N.m (55 lb ft). 2. Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt a final pass an additional 50 degrees using the J 45059 . 15. Remove the J 42386-A and bolts. 16. Remove the automatic transmission flex plate and bolt. Refer to Engine Flywheel Removal (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . 17. Install the oil pump. Refer to Oil Pump, Screen, and Crankshaft Oil Deflector Replacement (See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts ............................................................................................................. ....................................................... 25 N.m (18 lb ft) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations ^ Inspect the sprockets for proper alignment. The mark on the camshaft sprocket (1) should be located in the 6 o'clock position and the mark on the crankshaft sprocket (2) should be located in the 12 o'clock position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Front Cover Bolts ................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 25 N.m (18 lb ft) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4305 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Replacement Tools Required J 41476 Front and Rear Cover Alignment Tool (at crankshaft seal area) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the generator. Refer to Generator Replacement (LS4) Generator Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 2. Remove the power steering pump. Refer to Power Steering Pump Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Replacement (LS4) . 3. Remove the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement (See: Water Pump/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove the crankshaft balancer. Refer to Crankshaft Balancer Replacement (See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair) . 5. Remove the belt tensioner bolt and reposition the tensioner (which blocks the front cover bolt). 6. Remove the oil pan-to-front cover bolts. 7. Remove the front cover bolts (1). 8. Remove the front cover (2) and gasket (3). 9. Discard the front cover gasket. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4306 10. Remove the oil seal (4). 11. Remove the bolt (1) and camshaft position (CMP) sensor (2). 12. Remove the O-ring (3) from the sensor, as required. Installation Procedure Important: * Do not reuse the crankshaft oil seal or front cover gasket. * Do not apply any type of sealant to the front cover gasket (unless specified). * The special tool in this procedure is used to properly center the front crankshaft front oil seal. - All gasket surfaces should be free of oil or other foreign material during assembly. - The crankshaft front oil seal MUST be centered in relation to the crankshaft. - An improperly aligned front cover may cause premature front oil seal wear and/or engine oil leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4307 1. Install the front cover gasket (3), front cover (2), and bolts (1). 2. Tighten the cover bolts finger tight. Do not overtighten. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: Start the tool-to-front cover bolts. Do not tighten the bolts at this time. 3. Install the J 41480 . Tighten the tool-to-engine block bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). Important: Align the tapered legs of the tool with the machined alignment surfaces on the front cover. 4. Install the J 41476 . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4308 5. Install the crankshaft balancer bolt. 1. Tighten the crankshaft balancer bolt by hand until snug. Do not overtighten. 2. Tighten the J 41480 . 3. Tighten the engine front cover bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Remove the tools. 7. Measure the oil pan surface flatness, front cover-to-engine block. 1. Place a straight edge across the engine block and front cover oil pan sealing surfaces. Avoid contact with the portion of the gasket that protrudes into the oil pan surface. 2. Insert a feeler gage between the front cover and the straight edge tool. The cover must be flush with the oil pan surface, or no greater than 0.5 mm (0.02 in) below flush. 8. If the front cover-to-engine block oil pan surface alignment is not within specifications, repeat the cover alignment procedure. 9. If the correct front cover-to-engine block alignment cannot be obtained, replace the front cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4309 10. Inspect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor O-ring seal (3) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be used again. 11. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 12. Install the O-ring seal onto the sensor (2). 13. Install the sensor to the cover. 14. Install the bolt (1). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 15. Install the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement (See: Water Pump/Service and Repair) . 16. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (3) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 17. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 18. Install the O-ring seal (3) onto the CMP sensor. 19. Install the CMP sensor (2) and bolt (1) from the front cover. Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 20. Position the belt tensioner and install the bolt. Tighten the bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 21. Install the power steering pump. Refer to Power Steering Pump Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Replacement (LS4) . 22. Install the generator. Refer to Generator Replacement (LS4) Generator Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Pressure: Technician Safety Information Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4316 Fuel Pressure: Vehicle Damage Warnings Fuel Pressure Notice Notice: Do not allow the fuel pressure to exceed the specified value because damage to the fuel pressure regulator or the fuel pressure gage may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4319 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4320 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the fuel pump module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter and the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pump also supplies fuel to a venturi pump located on the bottom of the fuel pump module. The function of the venturi pump is to fill the fuel pump module reservoir. The fuel pressure regulator, a part of the fuel pump module, maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. Special Tools * CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage * J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Important: * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. You should hear the fuel pump turn ON and OFF. ^ If the fuel pump does not operate, refer to Fuel Pump Electrical Circuit Diagnosis. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH-48027. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. Circuit/System Testing Important: * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gage while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 4321 ^ If the fuel pressure is greater than the specified range, replace the fuel pump module. ^ If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 1. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Install the J 37287 between the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287. 4. Ignition ON, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH-48027. 5. Command the fuel pump relay ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, locate and replace the leaking fuel injector(s). ^ If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the fuel pump module. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 minutes. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the fuel pump module. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH-48027. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ^ If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 4. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Computers and Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement * Fuel Injector Replacement * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Not supplied by manufacturer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube from the air inlet duct. 2. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. 3. Remove the air inlet duct from the throttle body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4329 4. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. 5. Remove the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Install the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the MAF/IAT sensor. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4330 3. Install the air inlet duct to the throttle body. 4. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 5. Connect the PCV tube to the air inlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Release the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing cover. 4. Remove the air filter element. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW air filter element. 2. Install the air cleaner housing cover. 3. Engage the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Pressure Release: Procedures Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Remove the engine cover, if required. 3. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 6. Connect the CH-48027-3 (4) to the fuel rail service port. 7. Connect the CH-48027-2 (2) to the CH-48027-3 (4). 8. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 9. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 10. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 11. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4339 * The areas surrounding the connections Important: If relieving the fuel pressure for the fuel pressure gage installation and removal, it is NOT necessary to proceed with the following steps. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 12. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 13. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 14. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 15. Install the engine cover, if required. 16. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 3. Remove the engine cover, if required. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port and using a small flat-bladed tool, depress (open) the fuel rail test port valve. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 7. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 8. Install the engine cover, if required. 9. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4340 Fuel Pressure Release: Removal and Replacement Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4341 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ...........................................................397-1,337 ohms Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4348 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires. Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: * Tearing * Piercing * Arcing * Carbon tracking * Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4349 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair Spark Plug Wire Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spark plug wire from the spark plug. 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the spark plug. 2. Remove the spark plug wire from the ignition coil (724). 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the ignition coil. Installation Procedure 1. Install the spark plug wire to the ignition coil (724). 2. Install the spark plug wire to the spark plug. 3. Inspect the spark plug wire for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap.................................................................................................................................... .......................................................1.02 mm - 0.040 in Spark Plug Torque.......................................... ................................................................................................................................................15 N.m 11 lb ft Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4353 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type..........................................................................................................................................GM P/N 12571164 (AC Spark Plug P/N 41-985) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4354 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Verify that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling - colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage - hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4355 * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively-wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over-torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation - Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon Fouled - Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils * Worn ignition wires * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit Fouling - Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4356 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: This engine has aluminum cylinder heads. Do not remove the spark plugs from a hot engine, allow it to cool first. Removing the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause spark plug thread damage or cylinder head damage. 1. Remove the spark plug wire. 2. Loosen the spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or using compressed air, blow away any dirt from around the spark plug. 4. Remove the spark plug. If removing more than one plug, place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder number. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4357 1. Correctly position the spark plug washer. 2. Inspect the spark plug gap. Adjust the gap as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.016 mm (0.040 in). 3. Hand start the spark plug in the corresponding cylinder. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Tighten the spark plug. Tighten the plug to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 5. Install the spark plug wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 4361 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Charge the battery if the battery is not fully charged. 2. Disable the ignition system. 3. Disable the fuel injection system. 4. Remove all spark plugs. 5. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 6. Depress the accelerator pedal to position the throttle plate wide open. 7. Start with the compression gage at zero and crank the engine through 4 compression strokes, 4 puffs. 8. Measure the compression for each cylinder. Record the readings. 9. If a cylinder has low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 tablespoon) of engine oil into the combustion chamber through the spark plug hole. Measure the compression again and record the reading. 10. The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any 1 cylinder is 1 035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). (1 035 x 70% = 725) (150 x 70% = 105). * Normal - Compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression for each cylinder. * Piston Rings Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression builds up with the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. * Valves Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression usually does not build up on the following strokes. Compression does not improve much when you add oil. * If 2 adjacent cylinders have lower than normal compression, and injecting oil into the cylinders does not increase the compression, the cause may be a head gasket leaking between the cylinders. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolts ................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 10 N.m (89 lb in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair) . 2. Loosen the water pump bolts (318). 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove fluid from the power steering pump reservoir. 5. Remove the power steering pump pulley. Refer to Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LS4) . 6. Disconnect the power steering hoses and pipes from the power steering pump and reservoir. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) and Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) . 7. Remove the bolt that retains a clip that retains the pressure pipe to the front of the engine. 8. Remove the water pump bolts (318). 9. Remove the water pump (300) and gasket (314). Discard the gasket. 10. Remove the camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement . 11. Unclip the wiring harness from the front of the engine. 12. Disconnect the engine coolant air bleed pipe hoses and clamps. Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Hose Replacement (LS4) (See: Cooling System/Coolant Line/Hose/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 4367 13. Remove the three coolant pump manifold to cylinder head bolts. 14. Disconnect the heater hoses at the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Heater Pipes Replacement (LZE, LZ4, LZG) . 15. Disconnect the radiator hoses from the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (See: Cooling System/Radiator Hose/Service and Repair). 16. Remove the coolant pump manifold bolts (301). 17. Remove the coolant pump manifold (315) and gaskets (306). Discard the gaskets. 18. Clean and inspect the water pump manifold mounting surfaces. 19. Remove the thermostat housing bolts (302), if necessary. 20. Remove the thermostat housing (303) and O-ring seal (304), if necessary. 21. Remove the thermostat (305), if necessary. 22. Remove the power steering pump and reservoir from the coolant pump manifold. 23. Remove the drive belt idler pulleys from the coolant pump manifold. Installation Procedure Notice: DO NOT use cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, unless otherwise instructed. The use of cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, may restrict coolant flow through the passages of the cooling system or the engine components. Restricted coolant flow may cause engine overheating and/or damage to the cooling system or the engine components/assembly. Important: All gasket surfaces are to be free of oil and other foreign material during assembly. 1. Install the drive belt idler pulleys to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Idler Pulley/Service and Repair) . 2. Install the power steering pump and reservoir to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Power Steering Pump Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Replacement (LS4) and Remote Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement . 3. Install the thermostat (305), if necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 4368 4. Install the thermostat housing (303) and O-ring seal (304), if necessary. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the thermostat housing bolts (302), if necessary. Tighten the bolts to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 6. Install the water pump manifold (315) and NEW gaskets (306). 1. Tighten the M10 bolts to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 2. Tighten the M8 bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 7. Install the water pump manifold bolts (301). 8. Install the camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement . 9. Install the cylinder head to coolant pump manifold bolts. 10. Connect the engine coolant air bleed pipe hose and clamp. 11. Install the water pump (300) and a NEW gasket (314). 12. Install the water pump bolts (318) until sung. 13. Connect the power steering pipes and hoses to the pump and reservoir. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) and Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) . 14. Install the power steering pump pulley. Refer to Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LS4) . 15. Install the bolt that retains the power steering pipe to the front of the engine. 16. Install the wiring harness to the clips on the front of the engine. 17. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 4369 Repair) . 18. Tighten the water pump bolts (318). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 19. Connect the heater hoses to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Heater Pipes Replacement (LZE, LZ4, LZG) . 20. Connect the radiator hoses to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement. See: Cooling System/Radiator Hose/Service and Repair 21. Fill and bleed the power steering system. Refer to Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid and Power Steering System Bleeding . 22. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 4370 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement Water Pump Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) . 2. Remove the battery and battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (LS4) Battery Tray Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove the water pump bolts (318). 5. Remove the water pump (300) and gasket (314). Discard the gasket. 6. Clean and inspect the water pump gasket mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the water pump (300) and a NEW gasket (314). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Tighten the water pump bolts (318). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 4371 Repair) . 4. Install the battery tray and battery. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (LS4) Battery Tray Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 5. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Cooling System/Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Cooling System Air Bleeder Pipe / Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Cooling System Air Bleeder Pipe / Hose: Service and Repair Coolant Air Bleed Pipe Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Removal of the intake manifold is NOT required to service the coolant air bleed pipe, but is required to service the coolant air bleed pipe covers and/or gaskets. 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the hose clamp and hose from the coolant fill neck. 4. Remove the coolant air bleed pipe bolts (309). 5. Remove the coolant air bleed pipe (307) with hose and seals (308). 6. Remove the hose (311) and clamps (322) from the coolant air bleed pipe (307) as required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Cooling System Air Bleeder Pipe / Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4376 7. Remove the engine coolant air bleed cover bolts (312). 8. Remove the covers (313) with seals (308). 9. Remove the seals (308) from the pipe and covers. Discard the seals. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Cooling System Air Bleeder Pipe / Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4377 Important: Position the O-ring seal onto the nipple portion of the pipe. 1. Install NEW seals (308) onto the engine coolant air bleed pipe and covers. 2. Install the covers (313) with seals (308). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the engine coolant air bleed cover bolts (312). Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Cooling System Air Bleeder Pipe / Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4378 4. Install the hose (311) and clamps (322) to the coolant air bleed pipe (307) as required. 5. Install the coolant air bleed pipe (307) with hose and seals (308). 6. Install the coolant air bleed pipe bolts (309). Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 7. Install the intake manifold. Refer to Intake Manifold Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 8. Connect the clamp and hose to coolant fill neck. 9. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - DEX-COOL(R) Coolant Leak Detection Dye Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-002B Date: January 18, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: DEX-COOL(R) Coolant - New Leak Detection Dye J 46366 - Replaces J 29545-6 Models: 1996-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Light/Medium Duty Trucks* (including Saturn) 1997-2008 Isuzu T-Series Medium Duty Tilt Cab Models Built in Janesville and Flint 1999-2008 Isuzu N-Series Medium Duty Commercial Models with 5.7L or 6.0L Gas Engine 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X *EXCLUDING 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Epica, Optra, Vivant and Pontiac Matiz, Wave Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-002A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Leak detection dye P/N 12378563 (J 29545-6) (in Canada P/N 88900915) may cause DEX-COOL(R) coolant to appear green in a black vessel making it appear to be conventional (green) coolant. This may cause a technician to add conventional coolant to a low DEX-COOL(R) system thus contaminating it. The green DEX-COOL(R) appearance is caused by the color of the leak detection dye which alters the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. A new leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (J 46366) (in Canada P/N 89022220) has been released that does not alter the appearance of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant. When adding the new leak detection dye the color of the DEX-COOL(R) coolant will not change. For detecting leaks on any system that uses DEX-COOL(R) leak detection dye P/N 89022219 (in Canada P/N 89022220) should be used. The new leak detection dye can be used with both conventional and DEX-COOL(R) coolant. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Including Reservoir ................................................................................................................................................ 13.3 quarts (12.6 liters) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level. Recheck fluid level after filling. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4385 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL extended life coolant. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant will: ^ Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). ^ Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). ^ Protect against rust and corrosion. ^ Help keep the proper engine temperature. ^ Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. NOTICE: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. WHAT TO USE Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won't damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don't need to add anything else. CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle's coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, check your cooling system. NOTICE: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed for the cooling system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Air Bleed Hose Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain a small amount of coolant from the radiator. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair )Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Reposition the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the coolant air bleed pipe (307). 3. Reposition the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the water manifold. 4. Remove the coolant air bleed hose from the water manifold. 5. Remove the coolant air bleed hose from the coolant air bleed pipe. 6. Remove the clamps from the coolant air bleed hose, if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the clamps onto the coolant air bleed hose, if necessary. 2. Install the coolant air bleed hose onto the coolant air bleed pipe. 3. Install the coolant air bleed hose onto the water manifold. 4. Position the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the water manifold. 5. Position the coolant air bleed hose clamp (322) at the coolant air bleed pipe (307). 6. Refill the coolant system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) , as necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Reservoir Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the front fender upper diagonal brace. Refer to Front Fender Upper Diagonal Brace Replacement . 2. Reposition the coolant recovery reservoir hose clamp aside at the radiator overflow fitting. 3. Disconnect the coolant recovery reservoir hose from the radiator overflow hose. 4. Remove the coolant recovery reservoir nuts from the shock tower studs. 5. Remove the coolant recovery reservoir from the lower retainer and the shock tower studs. 6. Drain the coolant from the coolant recovery reservoir into a clean container. Installation Procedure 1. Install the coolant recovery reservoir to the lower retainer and the shock tower studs. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the nuts to the shock tower studs. Tighten the nuts to 3.3 N.m (29 lb in). 3. Lubricate the reservoir hose with clean water. Install the coolant reservoir hose to the radiator overflow hose. 4. Position the coolant reservoir hose clamp to the radiator overflow hose fitting. 5. Install the front fender upper diagonal brace. Refer to Front Fender Upper Diagonal Brace Replacement . 6. Fill the coolant recovery reservoir to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4392 Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4398 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4399 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4400 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4401 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4402 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4403 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4404 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4405 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4406 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4407 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4408 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4409 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4410 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4411 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4412 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4413 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4415 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4416 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4417 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4418 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4419 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4420 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4421 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4422 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4423 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4424 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4425 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4426 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4427 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4428 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4429 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4430 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4431 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4432 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4433 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4434 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4435 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4436 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4437 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4438 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4439 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4440 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4441 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4442 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4443 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4444 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4445 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4446 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4447 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4448 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4449 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4450 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4451 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4452 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4453 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4454 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4455 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4456 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4457 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4458 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4459 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4460 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4461 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4462 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4471 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4474 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4475 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4476 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4477 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4478 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4479 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4480 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4481 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4482 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4483 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4484 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4485 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4486 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4487 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4488 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4489 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4490 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4491 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4492 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4493 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4494 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4495 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4496 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4497 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4498 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4499 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4500 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4501 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4502 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4503 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4504 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4505 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4506 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4507 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4508 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4509 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4510 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4511 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4512 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4513 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4514 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4515 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4516 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4517 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4518 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4519 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4520 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4521 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4522 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4523 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4524 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4525 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Fan Motor Replacement Tools Required GE-47827 Socket Removal Procedure Caution: An electric fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Caution: To help avoid personal injury or damage to the vehicle, a bent, cracked, or damaged fan blade or housing should always be replaced. Caution: Unless directed otherwise, the ignition and start switch must be in the OFF or LOCK position, and all electrical loads must be OFF before servicing any electrical component. Disconnect the negative battery cable to prevent an electrical spark should a tool or equipment come in contact with an exposed electrical terminal. Failure to follow these precautions may result in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or its components. 1. Remove the fan shroud assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Fan Shroud Replacement (See: Fan Shroud/Service and Repair) . Important: Hold the fan blade to prevent rotation. 2. Using GE-47827 turn the fan motor drive plate in the opposite direction of the arrow on the fan blade until the motor drive plate disengages from the fan blade. 3. Remove and discard the fan blade. Notice: Failure to tape off all of the entry points to the cooling fan motor(s) will allow debris to enter and damage the motor(s). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4526 Important: When reusing the fan motor tape off the front and rear entry points of the fan motor before drilling the rivets. 4. Center punch each of the rivets (1) from the rear of the motor. 5. Drill the head of the rivets (1) from the fan motor using a 6.35 mm (0.25 in) drill bit. 6. Tap the rivets out of the fan shroud. 7. Remove the fan motor from the fan shroud. Important: Blow off any excess debris from the fan motor. 8. Remove the tape covering the entry points from the fan motor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4527 1. Install the engine cooling fan motor to the fan shroud. Important: Position the fan motor to the fan shroud and insert the bolts from the front side. 2. Install the cooling fan motor bolts. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the cooling fan motor nuts. Tighten the nuts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4528 Notice: Failure to heat the fan hub in hot tap water before installation will result in cooling fan failure due to cracking. Allowing the heated fan to cool for more than one minute prior to installation will also result in failure due to cracking. Important: Using hot tap water at a minimum of 49°C (120°F), hold the new fan blade hub under the running water for a minimum of 60 seconds to heat the fan blade to the temperature of the water. Immediately after heating, position the fan blade on the fan motor drive plate. 4. Install the new engine cooling fan blade. Important: Hold the fan blade to prevent rotation. 5. Using the GE-47827 turn the fan motor drive plate in the same direction of the arrow on the fan blade until the fan motor drive plate engages to the fan blade. Full engagement is attained when the motor drive plate fully occupies the three slots in the face of the fan blade. 6. Rotate the cooling fan blade to ensure proper rotation. 7. Install the fan shroud assembly to the vehicle. Refer to Fan Shroud Replacement (See: Fan Shroud/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set Technical Service Bulletin # 09-06-03-007 Date: 090827 Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-007 Date: August 27, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P0480 and/or P0481 Set Temperature Gage Indicates Hot - Cooling Fans Intermittent or Inoperative (Install Revised Cooling Fan Relay and Harness Assembly) Models: 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (RPO 9C1 Only) 2010 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (with RPO 9C1 and without RPO WRH) Condition Some customers may comment that the instrument panel temperature gage indicates hot. Some customers may also comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is illuminated. The technician may observe that DTC P0480 and/or P0481 are set as current or in history and/or the engine cooling fans are intermittent or inoperative. Cause This condition may be caused by high underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) temperatures which may result in the cooling fans becoming intermittent or inoperative under certain operating conditions. Disclaimer Part # 1 A revised engine cooling fan relay and harness assembly has been released, to reposition the cooling fan relays for increased air circulation. 1. Turn OFF the ignition, all electrical components, lamps, accessories and the scan tool. Open the hood. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4537 2. Remove the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Release the retainer that secures the wiring harness from the bottom of the brace (2), then remove the upper diagonal brace. 3. Loosen the negative battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 4. Open the positive battery cable terminal cover, loosen the battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. 5. Remove the battery insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4538 6. Remove the battery hold down bolt and the hold down. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during removal. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Release the inner RH headlamp retainer by pulling the retainer upward. 9. Remove the RH headlamp assembly bolt. 10. Pull the headlamp from the outboard edge in order to release the lock pin from the fender flange retainer. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector before removing the headlamp from the vehicle. 12. Remove the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). Note Observe the positions and orientations of the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links on the studs before removing. 13. At the top of the fuse block disconnect the two fasteners on the fuse block battery studs and remove the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). 14. Unlock the tabs on the electrical center board, then evenly lift up on the board in order to remove it. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4539 15. In the illustration above observe the orientation of the schematic for the fuse block. Identify the location of connectors X1 and X3. 16. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X1, Circuit 473, 0.35 D-BU, Pin C7, High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control - Connector X1, Circuit 335, 0.35 D-GN, Pin H7, Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control 17. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X3, Circuit 409, 3 L-BU, Pin D1, Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage - Connector X3, Circuit 532, 3 GY, Pin E1, Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference - Connector X3, Circuit 504, 3 WH, Pin F2, Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4540 18. Remove both fuse block engine harness connectors X1 (1) and X3 (2) from their respective cavities. 1. Release and remove the bottom cover on both connectors. 2. Examine the X3 connector pins (1) and connector wiring (1) for evidence of overheating as shown. ^ If evidence of overheating is observed, continue with this repair. ^ If evidence of overheating is not observed refer to the appropriate DTCs in Engine Cooling or Symptoms - Engine Cooling in SI. 19. Position a ruler on the top of the upper radiator support (2) as shown. Align the ruler with the arrows (1) and mark the 165 mm (6.5 in) area with a paint stick or suitable marker. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4541 1. Position the inboard edge of the cooling fan relay bracket (3) that was supplied with the revised harness assembly, 22 mm (0.86 in) from the outboard edge of the RH engine mount strut and tightly against the back edge of the radiator support. Note Align/adjust the ends of the bracket (3) over the radiator (2) slightly if necessary so that the holes in the bracket DO NOT sit over any spot welds (1). 2. Mark the location of the holes in the bracket on the upper radiator support. Drill the holes using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. 20. Secure the bracket and relay assembly to the radiator core support using the rivets that were supplied. 21. Remove the screw from the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange in order to provide additional clearance for routing the revised harness. 22. Route the revised harness (1) out from the engine compartment through the opening. Note Route the maxi fuse leads one at a time through the fender flange opening. Route the harness back into the engine compartment between the windshield washer solvent container filler neck (2) and the RF fender flange. 23. Verify the proper routing of the harness as shown. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4542 24. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (3) for the X1 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit - Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit 25. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (4) for the X3 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit Important Examine the cooling fan supply voltage and low reference circuit wires for discoloration, loss of insulation and brittleness in order to determine a good point to cut and splice. 26. When performing the following steps, adjust the location of the cuts at least 40 mm (1.5 in) apart in order to allow the splices to lay end to end. 1. Cut both of the fan supply voltage circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 2. Cut the fan low reference circuit approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 3. Cut both of the fan relay control circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block. 27. Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each of the five wires to be spliced. 1. Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. 2. If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the DuraSeal splices. 28. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a green DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (1) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4543 29. Insert the D-BU High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 30. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. 31. Repeat steps 29 and 30 for the opposite end of the splice. 32. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 33. Repeat steps 28 through 32 for the D-GN Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wire. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the Dura Seal splices. Part # 2 34. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a yellow DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (3) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (3). 35. Insert the Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 36. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4544 37. Repeat steps 35 and 36 for the opposite end of the splice. 38. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 39. Repeat steps 34 through 38 for the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit 40. Reinsert the High and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires coming from the ECM back into the respective conduit for the harness and tape as needed. 41. Route the new spliced High Speed and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires under the fuse block and toward the RH fender flange. 42. Insert any excess wire length for the Cooling Fan Low Reference Circuit, Right Supply Voltage Circuit and Left Supply Voltage Circuit back into the conduit (1) from which it was extracted in the area by the RH fender flange and tape as needed. 43. Install the ground wire grommet from the revised harness assembly at the existing G 100 ground location (1) as shown. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 44. Install and seat the X1 and X3 electrical connectors into the fuse block. Verify the proper positioning of all four connectors in the fuse block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4545 45. Install the electrical center board (2). Ensure that the tabs have locked in place. Install the fasteners (1). Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 46. Install the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links (1) to the LH and RH fuse block battery studs in their original positions and orientations. 47. Route the shortest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (2) to the RH fuse block stud (2). Maintain sufficient clearance. Route the longest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (1) over the top of the fuse block to the LH fuse block stud (1). Maintain sufficient clearance. Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4546 48. Install the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). 49. Enclose as much as possible of the revised harness assembly in protective conduit and tape as needed. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during installation. 50. Install the battery. 51. Install the battery hold down and bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 52. Install the battery insulator. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 53. Install the positive battery cable terminal to the battery. 54. Tighten the positive battery cable terminal nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 55. Snap closed the positive battery cable terminal cover. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 56. Install the negative battery cable terminal to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 57. Tighten the negative battery cable. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 58. Install the screw at the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange. Tighten Tighten the screw to 1Nm (9 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4547 59. Install the retainer that secures the wiring harness to the bottom of the brace (2), then install the upper diagonal brace. Install the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 60. Connect the electrical connector to the headlamp. 1. While installing the headlamp, guide the lock pin into the RH fender flange lock pin retainer. 2. Install the headlamp bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 2Nm (18 lb in). 3. Secure the inner headlamp retainer. 61. Use the scan tool to clear any existing DTCs. 62. Use the scan tool output controls to command the Fan Relay 1, Fan Relay 2 & 3, and Fan Relays 1, 2 & 3 ON and OFF. Visually inspect both of the cooling fans for the correct ON/OFF actions when activated. Refer to Engine Control Module Scan Tool Output Controls in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set Technical Service Bulletin # 09-06-03-007 Date: 090827 Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-007 Date: August 27, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P0480 and/or P0481 Set Temperature Gage Indicates Hot - Cooling Fans Intermittent or Inoperative (Install Revised Cooling Fan Relay and Harness Assembly) Models: 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (RPO 9C1 Only) 2010 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (with RPO 9C1 and without RPO WRH) Condition Some customers may comment that the instrument panel temperature gage indicates hot. Some customers may also comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is illuminated. The technician may observe that DTC P0480 and/or P0481 are set as current or in history and/or the engine cooling fans are intermittent or inoperative. Cause This condition may be caused by high underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) temperatures which may result in the cooling fans becoming intermittent or inoperative under certain operating conditions. Disclaimer Part # 1 A revised engine cooling fan relay and harness assembly has been released, to reposition the cooling fan relays for increased air circulation. 1. Turn OFF the ignition, all electrical components, lamps, accessories and the scan tool. Open the hood. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4553 2. Remove the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Release the retainer that secures the wiring harness from the bottom of the brace (2), then remove the upper diagonal brace. 3. Loosen the negative battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 4. Open the positive battery cable terminal cover, loosen the battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. 5. Remove the battery insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4554 6. Remove the battery hold down bolt and the hold down. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during removal. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Release the inner RH headlamp retainer by pulling the retainer upward. 9. Remove the RH headlamp assembly bolt. 10. Pull the headlamp from the outboard edge in order to release the lock pin from the fender flange retainer. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector before removing the headlamp from the vehicle. 12. Remove the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). Note Observe the positions and orientations of the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links on the studs before removing. 13. At the top of the fuse block disconnect the two fasteners on the fuse block battery studs and remove the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). 14. Unlock the tabs on the electrical center board, then evenly lift up on the board in order to remove it. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4555 15. In the illustration above observe the orientation of the schematic for the fuse block. Identify the location of connectors X1 and X3. 16. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X1, Circuit 473, 0.35 D-BU, Pin C7, High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control - Connector X1, Circuit 335, 0.35 D-GN, Pin H7, Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control 17. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X3, Circuit 409, 3 L-BU, Pin D1, Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage - Connector X3, Circuit 532, 3 GY, Pin E1, Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference - Connector X3, Circuit 504, 3 WH, Pin F2, Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4556 18. Remove both fuse block engine harness connectors X1 (1) and X3 (2) from their respective cavities. 1. Release and remove the bottom cover on both connectors. 2. Examine the X3 connector pins (1) and connector wiring (1) for evidence of overheating as shown. ^ If evidence of overheating is observed, continue with this repair. ^ If evidence of overheating is not observed refer to the appropriate DTCs in Engine Cooling or Symptoms - Engine Cooling in SI. 19. Position a ruler on the top of the upper radiator support (2) as shown. Align the ruler with the arrows (1) and mark the 165 mm (6.5 in) area with a paint stick or suitable marker. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4557 1. Position the inboard edge of the cooling fan relay bracket (3) that was supplied with the revised harness assembly, 22 mm (0.86 in) from the outboard edge of the RH engine mount strut and tightly against the back edge of the radiator support. Note Align/adjust the ends of the bracket (3) over the radiator (2) slightly if necessary so that the holes in the bracket DO NOT sit over any spot welds (1). 2. Mark the location of the holes in the bracket on the upper radiator support. Drill the holes using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. 20. Secure the bracket and relay assembly to the radiator core support using the rivets that were supplied. 21. Remove the screw from the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange in order to provide additional clearance for routing the revised harness. 22. Route the revised harness (1) out from the engine compartment through the opening. Note Route the maxi fuse leads one at a time through the fender flange opening. Route the harness back into the engine compartment between the windshield washer solvent container filler neck (2) and the RF fender flange. 23. Verify the proper routing of the harness as shown. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4558 24. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (3) for the X1 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit - Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit 25. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (4) for the X3 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit Important Examine the cooling fan supply voltage and low reference circuit wires for discoloration, loss of insulation and brittleness in order to determine a good point to cut and splice. 26. When performing the following steps, adjust the location of the cuts at least 40 mm (1.5 in) apart in order to allow the splices to lay end to end. 1. Cut both of the fan supply voltage circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 2. Cut the fan low reference circuit approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 3. Cut both of the fan relay control circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block. 27. Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each of the five wires to be spliced. 1. Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. 2. If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the DuraSeal splices. 28. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a green DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (1) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4559 29. Insert the D-BU High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 30. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. 31. Repeat steps 29 and 30 for the opposite end of the splice. 32. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 33. Repeat steps 28 through 32 for the D-GN Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wire. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the Dura Seal splices. Part # 2 34. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a yellow DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (3) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (3). 35. Insert the Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 36. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4560 37. Repeat steps 35 and 36 for the opposite end of the splice. 38. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 39. Repeat steps 34 through 38 for the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit 40. Reinsert the High and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires coming from the ECM back into the respective conduit for the harness and tape as needed. 41. Route the new spliced High Speed and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires under the fuse block and toward the RH fender flange. 42. Insert any excess wire length for the Cooling Fan Low Reference Circuit, Right Supply Voltage Circuit and Left Supply Voltage Circuit back into the conduit (1) from which it was extracted in the area by the RH fender flange and tape as needed. 43. Install the ground wire grommet from the revised harness assembly at the existing G 100 ground location (1) as shown. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 44. Install and seat the X1 and X3 electrical connectors into the fuse block. Verify the proper positioning of all four connectors in the fuse block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4561 45. Install the electrical center board (2). Ensure that the tabs have locked in place. Install the fasteners (1). Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 46. Install the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links (1) to the LH and RH fuse block battery studs in their original positions and orientations. 47. Route the shortest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (2) to the RH fuse block stud (2). Maintain sufficient clearance. Route the longest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (1) over the top of the fuse block to the LH fuse block stud (1). Maintain sufficient clearance. Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4562 48. Install the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). 49. Enclose as much as possible of the revised harness assembly in protective conduit and tape as needed. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during installation. 50. Install the battery. 51. Install the battery hold down and bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 52. Install the battery insulator. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 53. Install the positive battery cable terminal to the battery. 54. Tighten the positive battery cable terminal nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 55. Snap closed the positive battery cable terminal cover. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 56. Install the negative battery cable terminal to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 57. Tighten the negative battery cable. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 58. Install the screw at the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange. Tighten Tighten the screw to 1Nm (9 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 4563 59. Install the retainer that secures the wiring harness to the bottom of the brace (2), then install the upper diagonal brace. Install the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 60. Connect the electrical connector to the headlamp. 1. While installing the headlamp, guide the lock pin into the RH fender flange lock pin retainer. 2. Install the headlamp bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 2Nm (18 lb in). 3. Secure the inner headlamp retainer. 61. Use the scan tool to clear any existing DTCs. 62. Use the scan tool output controls to command the Fan Relay 1, Fan Relay 2 & 3, and Fan Relays 1, 2 & 3 ON and OFF. Visually inspect both of the cooling fans for the correct ON/OFF actions when activated. Refer to Engine Control Module Scan Tool Output Controls in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4564 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4567 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4569 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4570 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4571 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4572 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4573 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4574 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4575 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4576 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4577 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4578 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4579 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4580 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4581 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4582 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4583 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4584 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4585 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4586 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4587 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4588 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4589 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4590 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4591 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4592 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4593 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4594 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4595 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4596 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4597 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4598 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4599 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4600 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4601 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4602 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4603 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4604 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4605 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4606 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4607 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4608 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4609 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4610 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4611 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4612 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4613 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4614 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4615 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4616 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4617 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4618 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4619 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4620 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4621 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4622 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4623 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4624 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4625 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4626 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4627 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4628 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4629 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4630 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4631 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4632 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4633 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4634 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4635 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4636 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4637 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4638 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4639 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4640 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4641 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4642 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4643 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4644 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4645 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4646 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4647 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4648 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4649 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4650 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4651 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4652 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4653 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4654 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4655 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4656 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4657 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4658 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4659 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4660 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4661 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4662 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4663 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4664 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4665 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4666 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4667 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4668 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4669 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4670 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4671 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4672 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4673 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4674 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4675 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4676 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4677 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4678 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4679 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4680 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4681 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4682 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4683 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4684 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4685 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4686 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4687 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4688 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4689 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4690 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4691 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4692 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4693 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4698 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4699 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4700 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4701 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4702 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4703 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4704 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4705 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4706 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4707 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4708 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4709 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4710 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4711 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4712 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4713 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4714 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4715 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4716 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4717 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4718 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4719 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4720 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4721 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4722 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4723 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4724 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4725 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4726 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4727 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4728 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4729 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4730 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4731 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4732 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4733 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4734 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4735 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4736 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4737 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4738 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4739 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4740 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4741 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4742 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4743 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4744 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4745 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4746 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4747 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4748 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4749 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4750 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4751 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4752 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4753 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4754 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4755 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4756 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4757 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4758 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4759 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4760 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4761 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4762 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4763 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4764 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4765 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4766 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4767 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4768 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4769 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4770 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4771 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4772 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4773 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4774 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4775 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4776 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4777 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4778 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4779 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4780 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4781 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4782 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4783 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4784 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4785 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4786 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4787 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4788 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4789 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4790 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4791 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4792 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4793 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4794 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4795 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4796 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4797 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4798 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4799 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4800 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4801 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4802 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4803 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4804 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4805 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4806 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4807 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4808 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4809 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4810 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4811 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4812 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4813 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4814 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4815 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4816 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4817 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4818 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4819 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4820 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4821 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4822 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4823 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4824 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4834 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4835 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4836 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4837 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4843 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4844 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4845 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 4846 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4847 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4848 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4849 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the ECT sensor. Installation Procedure Notice: Replacement components must be the correct part number for the application. Components requiring the use of the thread locking compound, lubricants, corrosion inhibitors, or sealants are identified in the service procedure. Some replacement components may come with these coatings already applied. Do not use these coatings on components unless specified. These coatings can affect the final torque, which may affect the operation of the component. Use the correct torque specification when installing components in order to avoid damage. Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4850 1. Coat the thread of the ECT sensor with sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4855 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4856 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4857 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4858 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4859 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4860 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4861 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4862 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4863 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4864 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4865 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4866 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4867 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4868 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4869 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4870 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4871 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4872 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4873 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4874 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4875 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4876 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4877 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4878 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4879 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4880 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4881 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4882 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4883 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4884 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4885 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4886 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4887 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4888 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4889 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4890 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4891 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4892 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4893 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4894 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4895 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4896 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4897 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4898 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4899 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4900 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4901 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4902 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4903 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4904 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4905 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4906 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4907 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4908 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4909 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4910 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4911 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4912 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4913 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4914 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4915 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4916 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4917 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4918 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4919 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4920 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4921 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4922 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4923 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4924 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4925 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4926 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4927 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4928 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4929 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4930 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4931 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4932 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4933 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4934 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4935 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4936 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4937 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4938 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4939 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4940 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4941 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4942 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4943 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4944 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4945 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4946 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4947 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4948 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4949 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4950 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4951 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4952 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4953 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4954 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4955 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4956 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4957 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4958 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4959 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4960 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4961 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4962 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4963 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4964 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4965 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4966 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4967 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4968 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4969 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4970 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4971 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4972 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4973 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4974 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4975 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4976 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4977 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4978 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4979 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4980 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4981 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Fan Shroud Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4985 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 4990 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 4991 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Core Cover Replacement Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Cover Replacement Heater Core Cover Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Core Cover Replacement > Page 4994 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core Replacement Heater Core Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose clamp at the heater pipe. Important: Cap or plug the cooling components to prevent system contamination. 3. Remove the heater inlet hose (1) from the heater pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 4999 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose clamp at the heater core. 5. Remove the heater inlet hose (1) from the heater core. Installation Procedure 1. Connect heater inlet hose (1) to the heater core. 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose to the heater core clamp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 5000 3. Install the heater inlet hose (1) to the heater pipe. 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater inlet hose to the heater pipe clamp. 5. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 5001 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Heater Outlet Hose Replacement (LS4) Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose clamp to the heater pipe. 3. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 5002 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose to the heater core clamp. 5. Remove the heater outlet hose (2) from the heater core. Installation Procedure 1. Connect heater outlet hose (2) to the heater core. 2. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose to heater core clamp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 5003 3. Install the heater outlet hose (2) to the heater pipe. 4. Use J 38185 to reposition the heater outlet hose to the heater pipe clamp. 5. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 5004 Heater Hose: Service and Repair Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 2. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 3. Release and reposition the heater inlet and outlet hose clamps using the J 38185. Important: Cap or plug the cooling components to prevent system contamination. 4. Remove the heater hoses from heater pipes. Notice: Do not apply excessive force on the heater core pipes during hose removal. Applying excessive force on the heater core pipes may damage the heater core pipes. 5. Remove the heater pipe assembly retaining bolts from the rear the of engine. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 5005 6. Remove the heater pipe assembly retaining bolt from the front of the engine. 7. Release and reposition the heater pipe hose clamps at the engine using the J 38185. 8. Remove the heater pipe hoses from the engine. 9. Remove the heater pipe assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure 1. Using a lint-free clean, dry cloth, carefully clean the sealing surfaces of the heater pipe assembly at the engine and heater hoses. 2. Install the heater pipe assembly into position in the vehicle. 3. Install the heater pipe hoses to the engine. 4. Reposition and release the heater pipe hose clamps at the engine using the J 38185. 5. Loosely install the heater pipe assembly retaining bolt to the front of the engine. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heater Inlet Hose Replacement (LS4) > Page 5006 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Install the heater pipe assembly retaining bolts to the rear of the engine. Tighten all the heater pipe assembly bolts to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 7. Connect heater hoses to the heater pipe assembly. 8. Install the heater hose clamps into position using the J 38185. 9. Install the air cleaner assembly. 10. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Radiator Drain Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Drain Plug: Service and Repair Radiator Drain Cock Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service Precautions Radiator Cap: Service Precautions Radiator Cap Removal Caution Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 5014 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Pressure Cap Testing Tools Required * J 24460-01 Cooling System Pressure Tester * J 42401 Radiator Cap/Surge Tank Test Adapter Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 1. Remove the pressure cap. 2. Wash the pressure cap sealing surface with water. Important: Lubricate J-42401 and pressure cap o-rings with coolant and press cap to seat o-ring on J-42401 before turning to engage threads. 3. Use the J 24460-01 (1) with J 42401 (2) in order to test the pressure cap. 4. Test the pressure cap for the following conditions: * Pressure release when the J 24460-01 exceeds the pressure rating of the pressure cap. * Maintain the rated pressure for at least 10 seconds. Note the rate of pressure loss. 5. Replace the pressure cap under the following conditions: * The pressure cap does not release pressure which exceeds the rated pressure of the cap. * The pressure cap does not hold the rated pressure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (5.3L) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement > Page 5019 Radiator Hose: Service and Repair Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement Radiator Outlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (5.3L) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set Technical Service Bulletin # 09-06-03-007 Date: 090827 Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-007 Date: August 27, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P0480 and/or P0481 Set Temperature Gage Indicates Hot - Cooling Fans Intermittent or Inoperative (Install Revised Cooling Fan Relay and Harness Assembly) Models: 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (RPO 9C1 Only) 2010 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (with RPO 9C1 and without RPO WRH) Condition Some customers may comment that the instrument panel temperature gage indicates hot. Some customers may also comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is illuminated. The technician may observe that DTC P0480 and/or P0481 are set as current or in history and/or the engine cooling fans are intermittent or inoperative. Cause This condition may be caused by high underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) temperatures which may result in the cooling fans becoming intermittent or inoperative under certain operating conditions. Disclaimer Part # 1 A revised engine cooling fan relay and harness assembly has been released, to reposition the cooling fan relays for increased air circulation. 1. Turn OFF the ignition, all electrical components, lamps, accessories and the scan tool. Open the hood. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5029 2. Remove the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Release the retainer that secures the wiring harness from the bottom of the brace (2), then remove the upper diagonal brace. 3. Loosen the negative battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 4. Open the positive battery cable terminal cover, loosen the battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. 5. Remove the battery insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5030 6. Remove the battery hold down bolt and the hold down. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during removal. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Release the inner RH headlamp retainer by pulling the retainer upward. 9. Remove the RH headlamp assembly bolt. 10. Pull the headlamp from the outboard edge in order to release the lock pin from the fender flange retainer. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector before removing the headlamp from the vehicle. 12. Remove the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). Note Observe the positions and orientations of the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links on the studs before removing. 13. At the top of the fuse block disconnect the two fasteners on the fuse block battery studs and remove the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). 14. Unlock the tabs on the electrical center board, then evenly lift up on the board in order to remove it. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5031 15. In the illustration above observe the orientation of the schematic for the fuse block. Identify the location of connectors X1 and X3. 16. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X1, Circuit 473, 0.35 D-BU, Pin C7, High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control - Connector X1, Circuit 335, 0.35 D-GN, Pin H7, Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control 17. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X3, Circuit 409, 3 L-BU, Pin D1, Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage - Connector X3, Circuit 532, 3 GY, Pin E1, Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference - Connector X3, Circuit 504, 3 WH, Pin F2, Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5032 18. Remove both fuse block engine harness connectors X1 (1) and X3 (2) from their respective cavities. 1. Release and remove the bottom cover on both connectors. 2. Examine the X3 connector pins (1) and connector wiring (1) for evidence of overheating as shown. ^ If evidence of overheating is observed, continue with this repair. ^ If evidence of overheating is not observed refer to the appropriate DTCs in Engine Cooling or Symptoms - Engine Cooling in SI. 19. Position a ruler on the top of the upper radiator support (2) as shown. Align the ruler with the arrows (1) and mark the 165 mm (6.5 in) area with a paint stick or suitable marker. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5033 1. Position the inboard edge of the cooling fan relay bracket (3) that was supplied with the revised harness assembly, 22 mm (0.86 in) from the outboard edge of the RH engine mount strut and tightly against the back edge of the radiator support. Note Align/adjust the ends of the bracket (3) over the radiator (2) slightly if necessary so that the holes in the bracket DO NOT sit over any spot welds (1). 2. Mark the location of the holes in the bracket on the upper radiator support. Drill the holes using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. 20. Secure the bracket and relay assembly to the radiator core support using the rivets that were supplied. 21. Remove the screw from the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange in order to provide additional clearance for routing the revised harness. 22. Route the revised harness (1) out from the engine compartment through the opening. Note Route the maxi fuse leads one at a time through the fender flange opening. Route the harness back into the engine compartment between the windshield washer solvent container filler neck (2) and the RF fender flange. 23. Verify the proper routing of the harness as shown. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5034 24. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (3) for the X1 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit - Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit 25. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (4) for the X3 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit Important Examine the cooling fan supply voltage and low reference circuit wires for discoloration, loss of insulation and brittleness in order to determine a good point to cut and splice. 26. When performing the following steps, adjust the location of the cuts at least 40 mm (1.5 in) apart in order to allow the splices to lay end to end. 1. Cut both of the fan supply voltage circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 2. Cut the fan low reference circuit approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 3. Cut both of the fan relay control circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block. 27. Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each of the five wires to be spliced. 1. Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. 2. If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the DuraSeal splices. 28. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a green DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (1) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5035 29. Insert the D-BU High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 30. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. 31. Repeat steps 29 and 30 for the opposite end of the splice. 32. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 33. Repeat steps 28 through 32 for the D-GN Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wire. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the Dura Seal splices. Part # 2 34. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a yellow DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (3) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (3). 35. Insert the Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 36. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5036 37. Repeat steps 35 and 36 for the opposite end of the splice. 38. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 39. Repeat steps 34 through 38 for the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit 40. Reinsert the High and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires coming from the ECM back into the respective conduit for the harness and tape as needed. 41. Route the new spliced High Speed and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires under the fuse block and toward the RH fender flange. 42. Insert any excess wire length for the Cooling Fan Low Reference Circuit, Right Supply Voltage Circuit and Left Supply Voltage Circuit back into the conduit (1) from which it was extracted in the area by the RH fender flange and tape as needed. 43. Install the ground wire grommet from the revised harness assembly at the existing G 100 ground location (1) as shown. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 44. Install and seat the X1 and X3 electrical connectors into the fuse block. Verify the proper positioning of all four connectors in the fuse block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5037 45. Install the electrical center board (2). Ensure that the tabs have locked in place. Install the fasteners (1). Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 46. Install the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links (1) to the LH and RH fuse block battery studs in their original positions and orientations. 47. Route the shortest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (2) to the RH fuse block stud (2). Maintain sufficient clearance. Route the longest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (1) over the top of the fuse block to the LH fuse block stud (1). Maintain sufficient clearance. Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5038 48. Install the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). 49. Enclose as much as possible of the revised harness assembly in protective conduit and tape as needed. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during installation. 50. Install the battery. 51. Install the battery hold down and bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 52. Install the battery insulator. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 53. Install the positive battery cable terminal to the battery. 54. Tighten the positive battery cable terminal nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 55. Snap closed the positive battery cable terminal cover. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 56. Install the negative battery cable terminal to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 57. Tighten the negative battery cable. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 58. Install the screw at the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange. Tighten Tighten the screw to 1Nm (9 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5039 59. Install the retainer that secures the wiring harness to the bottom of the brace (2), then install the upper diagonal brace. Install the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 60. Connect the electrical connector to the headlamp. 1. While installing the headlamp, guide the lock pin into the RH fender flange lock pin retainer. 2. Install the headlamp bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 2Nm (18 lb in). 3. Secure the inner headlamp retainer. 61. Use the scan tool to clear any existing DTCs. 62. Use the scan tool output controls to command the Fan Relay 1, Fan Relay 2 & 3, and Fan Relays 1, 2 & 3 ON and OFF. Visually inspect both of the cooling fans for the correct ON/OFF actions when activated. Refer to Engine Control Module Scan Tool Output Controls in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set Technical Service Bulletin # 09-06-03-007 Date: 090827 Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-007 Date: August 27, 2009 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P0480 and/or P0481 Set Temperature Gage Indicates Hot - Cooling Fans Intermittent or Inoperative (Install Revised Cooling Fan Relay and Harness Assembly) Models: 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (RPO 9C1 Only) 2010 Chevrolet Impala Police Sedan (with RPO 9C1 and without RPO WRH) Condition Some customers may comment that the instrument panel temperature gage indicates hot. Some customers may also comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is illuminated. The technician may observe that DTC P0480 and/or P0481 are set as current or in history and/or the engine cooling fans are intermittent or inoperative. Cause This condition may be caused by high underhood bussed electrical center (UBEC) temperatures which may result in the cooling fans becoming intermittent or inoperative under certain operating conditions. Disclaimer Part # 1 A revised engine cooling fan relay and harness assembly has been released, to reposition the cooling fan relays for increased air circulation. 1. Turn OFF the ignition, all electrical components, lamps, accessories and the scan tool. Open the hood. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5045 2. Remove the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Release the retainer that secures the wiring harness from the bottom of the brace (2), then remove the upper diagonal brace. 3. Loosen the negative battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 4. Open the positive battery cable terminal cover, loosen the battery cable terminal nut and remove the battery cable terminal from the battery. 5. Remove the battery insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5046 6. Remove the battery hold down bolt and the hold down. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during removal. 7. Remove the battery. 8. Release the inner RH headlamp retainer by pulling the retainer upward. 9. Remove the RH headlamp assembly bolt. 10. Pull the headlamp from the outboard edge in order to release the lock pin from the fender flange retainer. 11. Disconnect the electrical connector before removing the headlamp from the vehicle. 12. Remove the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). Note Observe the positions and orientations of the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links on the studs before removing. 13. At the top of the fuse block disconnect the two fasteners on the fuse block battery studs and remove the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). 14. Unlock the tabs on the electrical center board, then evenly lift up on the board in order to remove it. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5047 15. In the illustration above observe the orientation of the schematic for the fuse block. Identify the location of connectors X1 and X3. 16. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X1, Circuit 473, 0.35 D-BU, Pin C7, High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control - Connector X1, Circuit 335, 0.35 D-GN, Pin H7, Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control 17. Locate and mark for reference, the following circuit terminals: - Connector X3, Circuit 409, 3 L-BU, Pin D1, Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage - Connector X3, Circuit 532, 3 GY, Pin E1, Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference - Connector X3, Circuit 504, 3 WH, Pin F2, Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5048 18. Remove both fuse block engine harness connectors X1 (1) and X3 (2) from their respective cavities. 1. Release and remove the bottom cover on both connectors. 2. Examine the X3 connector pins (1) and connector wiring (1) for evidence of overheating as shown. ^ If evidence of overheating is observed, continue with this repair. ^ If evidence of overheating is not observed refer to the appropriate DTCs in Engine Cooling or Symptoms - Engine Cooling in SI. 19. Position a ruler on the top of the upper radiator support (2) as shown. Align the ruler with the arrows (1) and mark the 165 mm (6.5 in) area with a paint stick or suitable marker. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5049 1. Position the inboard edge of the cooling fan relay bracket (3) that was supplied with the revised harness assembly, 22 mm (0.86 in) from the outboard edge of the RH engine mount strut and tightly against the back edge of the radiator support. Note Align/adjust the ends of the bracket (3) over the radiator (2) slightly if necessary so that the holes in the bracket DO NOT sit over any spot welds (1). 2. Mark the location of the holes in the bracket on the upper radiator support. Drill the holes using a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. 20. Secure the bracket and relay assembly to the radiator core support using the rivets that were supplied. 21. Remove the screw from the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange in order to provide additional clearance for routing the revised harness. 22. Route the revised harness (1) out from the engine compartment through the opening. Note Route the maxi fuse leads one at a time through the fender flange opening. Route the harness back into the engine compartment between the windshield washer solvent container filler neck (2) and the RF fender flange. 23. Verify the proper routing of the harness as shown. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5050 24. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (3) for the X1 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit - Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit 25. Using a suitable tool, open the engine harness conduit (4) for the X3 connector approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block and extract the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit Important Examine the cooling fan supply voltage and low reference circuit wires for discoloration, loss of insulation and brittleness in order to determine a good point to cut and splice. 26. When performing the following steps, adjust the location of the cuts at least 40 mm (1.5 in) apart in order to allow the splices to lay end to end. 1. Cut both of the fan supply voltage circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 2. Cut the fan low reference circuit approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block or at a point where the insulation and flexibility of the wire appear normal. 3. Cut both of the fan relay control circuits approximately 100 mm (4 in) from the entry point at the fuse block. 27. Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each of the five wires to be spliced. 1. Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. 2. If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the DuraSeal splices. 28. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a green DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (1) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5051 29. Insert the D-BU High Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 30. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. 31. Repeat steps 29 and 30 for the opposite end of the splice. 32. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 33. Repeat steps 28 through 32 for the D-GN Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wire. Note Adding heat shrink tubing to the wire before splicing is advised in order to protect the integrity of the Dura Seal splices. Part # 2 34. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically opens the J-38125-8 Splice Crimp Tool. Place a yellow DuraSeal splice sleeve in nest (3) as indicated above. Position the sleeve so that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. Close the tool handles slightly in order to firmly hold the splice sleeve in the proper nest (3). 35. Insert the Cooling Fan - Left Low Reference circuit wire (1) into the barrel (2) of the splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop (3). 36. Compress handles until the ratchet mechanism automatically releases in order to obtain a secure crimp. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5052 37. Repeat steps 35 and 36 for the opposite end of the splice. 38. Use a heat torch to apply heat to the center area of the sleeve while rotating and gradually moving to the open ends of the tubing. The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage has occurred. 39. Repeat steps 34 through 38 for the: - Cooling Fan - Right Supply Voltage Circuit - Cooling Fan - Left Supply Voltage Circuit 40. Reinsert the High and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires coming from the ECM back into the respective conduit for the harness and tape as needed. 41. Route the new spliced High Speed and Low Speed Cooling Fan Relay Control Circuit wires under the fuse block and toward the RH fender flange. 42. Insert any excess wire length for the Cooling Fan Low Reference Circuit, Right Supply Voltage Circuit and Left Supply Voltage Circuit back into the conduit (1) from which it was extracted in the area by the RH fender flange and tape as needed. 43. Install the ground wire grommet from the revised harness assembly at the existing G 100 ground location (1) as shown. Tighten Tighten the fastener to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 44. Install and seat the X1 and X3 electrical connectors into the fuse block. Verify the proper positioning of all four connectors in the fuse block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5053 45. Install the electrical center board (2). Ensure that the tabs have locked in place. Install the fasteners (1). Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). 46. Install the forward lamp battery supply harness terminal and the fusible links (1) to the LH and RH fuse block battery studs in their original positions and orientations. 47. Route the shortest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (2) to the RH fuse block stud (2). Maintain sufficient clearance. Route the longest Maxi-Fuse ring terminal lead (1) over the top of the fuse block to the LH fuse block stud (1). Maintain sufficient clearance. Tighten Tighten the fasteners to 7 Nm (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5054 48. Install the fuse block underhood electrical center cover (1). 49. Enclose as much as possible of the revised harness assembly in protective conduit and tape as needed. Note Do not tip the battery more than 40 degrees during installation. 50. Install the battery. 51. Install the battery hold down and bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 18 Nm (13 lb ft). 52. Install the battery insulator. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 53. Install the positive battery cable terminal to the battery. 54. Tighten the positive battery cable terminal nut. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 55. Snap closed the positive battery cable terminal cover. Note Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. 56. Install the negative battery cable terminal to the battery. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection in SI. 57. Tighten the negative battery cable. Tighten Tighten the nut to 15 Nm (11 lb ft). 58. Install the screw at the top of the windshield washer solvent container filler neck at the RF fender flange. Tighten Tighten the screw to 1Nm (9 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: > 09-06-03-007 > Aug > 09 > Cooling System - MIL ON DTC P0480/P0481 Set > Page 5055 59. Install the retainer that secures the wiring harness to the bottom of the brace (2), then install the upper diagonal brace. Install the RH front fender upper diagonal brace bolts (1). Tighten Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb in). 60. Connect the electrical connector to the headlamp. 1. While installing the headlamp, guide the lock pin into the RH fender flange lock pin retainer. 2. Install the headlamp bolt. Tighten Tighten the bolt to 2Nm (18 lb in). 3. Secure the inner headlamp retainer. 61. Use the scan tool to clear any existing DTCs. 62. Use the scan tool output controls to command the Fan Relay 1, Fan Relay 2 & 3, and Fan Relays 1, 2 & 3 ON and OFF. Visually inspect both of the cooling fans for the correct ON/OFF actions when activated. Refer to Engine Control Module Scan Tool Output Controls in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5056 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5059 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5060 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5061 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5062 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5063 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5064 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5065 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5066 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5067 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5068 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5069 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5070 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5071 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5072 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5073 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5074 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5075 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5076 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5077 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5078 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5079 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5080 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5081 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5082 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5083 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5084 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5085 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5086 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5087 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5088 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5089 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5090 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5091 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5092 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5093 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5094 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5095 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5096 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5097 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5098 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5099 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5100 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5101 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5102 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5103 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5104 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5105 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5106 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5107 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5108 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5109 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5110 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5111 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5112 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5113 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5114 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5115 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5116 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5117 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5118 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5119 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5120 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5121 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5122 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5123 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5124 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5125 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5126 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5127 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5128 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5129 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5130 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5131 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5132 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5133 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5134 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5135 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5136 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5137 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5138 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5139 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5140 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5141 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5142 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5143 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5144 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5145 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5146 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5147 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5148 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5149 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5150 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5151 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5152 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5153 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5154 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5155 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5156 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5157 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5158 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5159 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5160 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5161 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5162 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5163 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5164 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5165 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5166 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5167 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5168 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5169 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5170 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5171 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5172 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5173 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5174 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5175 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5176 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5177 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5178 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5179 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5180 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5181 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5182 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5183 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5184 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5185 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5196 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5197 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5198 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5199 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5205 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5206 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5207 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 5208 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-64-033C Date: April 29, 2008 Subject: Rubbing/Squealing/Grinding Noise When Door Glass Is Raised Or Lowered, Scratches in Door Glass (Replace Door Glass Belt Sealing Strip) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Built Prior to November 2007 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add the build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-64-033B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rubbing, squealing or grinding noise when opening or closing the left or right front or rear door glass. They may also comment of scratches in the door glass. Cause This condition may be cause by dirt accumulating on the lip of the belt sealing strip. Correction Replace the door glass outer belt sealing strip with a newly designed outer belt sealing strip . Refer to Front Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement or Rear Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement in SI. Clean the glass with glass cleaner and if scuffs or scratches are found it may be necessary to replace the glass as well. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicle repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated > Page 5214 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated > Page 5220 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5221 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5222 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5223 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the ECT sensor. Installation Procedure Notice: Replacement components must be the correct part number for the application. Components requiring the use of the thread locking compound, lubricants, corrosion inhibitors, or sealants are identified in the service procedure. Some replacement components may come with these coatings already applied. Do not use these coatings on components unless specified. These coatings can affect the final torque, which may affect the operation of the component. Use the correct torque specification when installing components in order to avoid damage. Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5224 1. Coat the thread of the ECT sensor with sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5229 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5230 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5231 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5232 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5233 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5234 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5235 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5236 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5237 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5238 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5239 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5240 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5241 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5242 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5243 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5244 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5245 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5246 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5247 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5248 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5249 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5250 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5251 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5253 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5254 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5255 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5256 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5257 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5258 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5259 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5260 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5261 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5262 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5263 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5264 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5265 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5266 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5267 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5268 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5269 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5270 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5271 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5272 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5273 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5274 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5275 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5276 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5277 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5278 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5279 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5280 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5281 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5282 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5283 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5284 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5285 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5286 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5287 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5288 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5289 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5290 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5291 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5292 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5293 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5294 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5295 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5296 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5297 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5298 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5299 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5300 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5301 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5302 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5303 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5304 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5305 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5306 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5307 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5308 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5309 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5310 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5311 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5312 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5313 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5314 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5315 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5316 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5317 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5318 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5319 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5320 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5321 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5322 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5323 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5324 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5325 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5326 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5327 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5328 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5329 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5330 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5331 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5332 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5333 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5334 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5335 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5336 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5337 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5338 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5339 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5340 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5341 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5342 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5343 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5344 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5345 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5346 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5347 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5348 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5349 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5350 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5351 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5352 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5353 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5354 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5355 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications When the coolant temperature is below 91°C (195°F), the thermostat valve remains closed. This prevents circulation of the coolant to the radiator and allows the engine to warm up quickly. After the coolant temperature reaches 91°C (195°F), the thermostat valve will open. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5359 Thermostat: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Special Tools J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the radiator air lower baffle and deflector. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Radiator/Service and Repair) . 2. Reposition the radiator inlet hose. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (See: Radiator Hose/Service and Repair)Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (LZE, LZ4, LZG) (See: Radiator Hose/Service and Repair) . 3. Partially drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 4. Use the J 38185 in order to reposition the hose clamp from the water outlet housing. 5. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the water outlet housing. 6. Remove the water outlet housing bolts (302). 7. Remove the water outlet housing (303) and O-ring seal (304). 8. Remove the thermostat (305). 9. Clean and inspect the water outlet housing O-ring seal mating surfaces. Installation Procedure Notice: DO NOT use cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, unless otherwise instructed. The use of cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, may restrict coolant flow through the passages of the cooling system or the engine components. Restricted coolant flow may cause engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5360 overheating and/or damage to the cooling system or the engine components/assembly. 1. Install the thermostat (305). 2. Install the O-ring seal (304) and water outlet housing (303). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the water outlet housing bolts (302). Tighten the bolts to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 4. Install the radiator inlet hose to the water outlet housing. 5. Use the J 38185 in order to reposition and install the hose clamp to the water outlet housing. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 7. Install the radiator inlet hose. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (See: Radiator Hose/Service and Repair)Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (LZE, LZ4, LZG) (See: Radiator Hose/Service and Repair) . 8. Install the radiator air lower baffle and deflector. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement (See: Radiator/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat Housing Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Tools Required J 38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Partially drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Use the J 38185 in order to reposition the hose clamp from the water outlet housing. 3. Remove the radiator inlet hose from the water outlet housing. 4. Remove the water outlet housing bolts (302). 5. Remove the water outlet housing (303) and O-ring seal (304). 6. Remove the thermostat (305). 7. Clean and inspect the water outlet housing O-ring seal mating surfaces. Installation Procedure Notice: DO NOT use cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, unless otherwise instructed. The use of cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, may restrict coolant flow through the passages of the cooling system or the engine components. Restricted coolant flow may cause engine overheating and/or damage to the cooling system or the engine components/assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5364 1. Install the thermostat (305). 2. Install the O-ring seal (304) and water outlet housing (303). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the water outlet housing bolts (302). Tighten the bolts to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 4. Install the radiator inlet hose to the water outlet housing. 5. Use the J 38185 in order to reposition and install the hose clamp to the water outlet housing. 6. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolts ................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 10 N.m (89 lb in) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Loosen the water pump bolts (318). 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement Accessory (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove fluid from the power steering pump reservoir. 5. Remove the power steering pump pulley. Refer to Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LS4) . 6. Disconnect the power steering hoses and pipes from the power steering pump and reservoir. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) and Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) . 7. Remove the bolt that retains a clip that retains the pressure pipe to the front of the engine. 8. Remove the water pump bolts (318). 9. Remove the water pump (300) and gasket (314). Discard the gasket. 10. Remove the camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement . 11. Unclip the wiring harness from the front of the engine. 12. Disconnect the engine coolant air bleed pipe hoses and clamps. Refer to Engine Coolant Air Bleed Hose Replacement (LS4) (See: Coolant Line/Hose/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 5370 13. Remove the three coolant pump manifold to cylinder head bolts. 14. Disconnect the heater hoses at the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Heater Pipes Replacement (LZE, LZ4, LZG) . 15. Disconnect the radiator hoses from the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement (RPO LS4) (See: Radiator Hose/Service and Repair). 16. Remove the coolant pump manifold bolts (301). 17. Remove the coolant pump manifold (315) and gaskets (306). Discard the gaskets. 18. Clean and inspect the water pump manifold mounting surfaces. 19. Remove the thermostat housing bolts (302), if necessary. 20. Remove the thermostat housing (303) and O-ring seal (304), if necessary. 21. Remove the thermostat (305), if necessary. 22. Remove the power steering pump and reservoir from the coolant pump manifold. 23. Remove the drive belt idler pulleys from the coolant pump manifold. Installation Procedure Notice: DO NOT use cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, unless otherwise instructed. The use of cooling system seal tabs, or similar compounds, may restrict coolant flow through the passages of the cooling system or the engine components. Restricted coolant flow may cause engine overheating and/or damage to the cooling system or the engine components/assembly. Important: All gasket surfaces are to be free of oil and other foreign material during assembly. 1. Install the drive belt idler pulleys to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Drive Belt Idler Pulley Replacement (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Idler Pulley/Service and Repair) . 2. Install the power steering pump and reservoir to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Power Steering Pump Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Replacement (LS4) and Remote Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Replacement . 3. Install the thermostat (305), if necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 5371 4. Install the thermostat housing (303) and O-ring seal (304), if necessary. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the thermostat housing bolts (302), if necessary. Tighten the bolts to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 6. Install the water pump manifold (315) and NEW gaskets (306). 1. Tighten the M10 bolts to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). 2. Tighten the M8 bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 7. Install the water pump manifold bolts (301). 8. Install the camshaft position sensor. Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement . 9. Install the cylinder head to coolant pump manifold bolts. 10. Connect the engine coolant air bleed pipe hose and clamp. 11. Install the water pump (300) and a NEW gasket (314). 12. Install the water pump bolts (318) until sung. 13. Connect the power steering pipes and hoses to the pump and reservoir. Refer to Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (3.5L and 3.9L) Power Steering Cooler Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) and Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pressure Pipe/Hose Replacement (LS4) . 14. Install the power steering pump pulley. Refer to Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LZ4/LZE/LZ9) Power Steering Pump Pulley Replacement (LS4) . 15. Install the bolt that retains the power steering pipe to the front of the engine. 16. Install the wiring harness to the clips on the front of the engine. 17. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 5372 Belt/Service and Repair) . 18. Tighten the water pump bolts (318). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 19. Connect the heater hoses to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Heater Pipes Replacement (LS4) Heater Pipes Replacement (LZE, LZ4, LZG) . 20. Connect the radiator hoses to the coolant pump manifold. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement. See: Radiator Hose/Service and Repair 21. Fill and bleed the power steering system. Refer to Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid and Power Steering System Bleeding . 22. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 5373 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Replacement Water Pump Replacement (LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) . 2. Remove the battery and battery tray. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (LS4) Battery Tray Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement Accessory (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove the water pump bolts (318). 5. Remove the water pump (300) and gasket (314). Discard the gasket. 6. Clean and inspect the water pump gasket mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the water pump (300) and a NEW gasket (314). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Tighten the water pump bolts (318). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Install the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belt Replacement - Accessory (See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Pump Manifold Replacement > Page 5374 Belt/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the battery tray and battery. Refer to Battery Tray Replacement (LS4) Battery Tray Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 5. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) (See: Service and Repair)Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst Shield > Component Information > Service and Repair Catalyst Shield: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Heat Shield Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement See: Service and Repair 2. Remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) wiring harness from the clips on the catalytic converter heat shield. 3. Drill out the catalytic converter heat shield rivets. 4. Remove the catalytic converter heat shield. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst Shield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5380 1. Position the catalytic converter heat shield to the underbody. 2. Install NEW catalytic converter heat shield rivets. 3. Install the HO2S wiring harness from the clips on the catalytic converter heat shield. 4. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement See: Service and Repair Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Bolts - First Pass ............................................................................................................................................................ 15 N.m (11 lb ft) Exhaust Manifold Bolts - Final Pass ........................................................................................................................................................... 20 N.m (15 lb ft) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side (RPO LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe heat shield in order to access the cross pipe to the exhaust manifold nuts. 3. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe nuts from the left exhaust manifold. 4. Remove the left side spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement . 5. Remove the oil level indicator tube. Refer to Oil Level Indicator and Tube Replacement (See: Engine/Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil Dip Stick Dip Stick Tube/Service and Repair) . 6. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (604). 7. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield (603). 8. Remove the heater hose retainer bolts in order to be able to remove the manifold. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side > Page 5386 9. Remove the exhaust manifold bolts. 10. Remove the exhaust manifold. 11. Remove and discard the exhaust manifold gasket. Installation Procedure Important: * Tighten the exhaust manifold bolts as specified in the service procedure. Improperly installed and/or leaking exhaust manifold gaskets my affect vehicle emissions and/or On Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system performance. * The cylinder head exhaust manifold bolt hole threads must be clean and free of debris or threadlocking material. * DO NOT apply threadlock to the first three thread of the bolts. 1. Apply a 5 mm (0.2 in) wide band of threadlock GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) or equivalent to the threads of the exhaust manifold bolts. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install a NEW exhaust manifold gasket, the exhaust manifold and bolts. * Tighten the bolts a first pass to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Tighten the bolts beginning with the center 2 bolts. Alternate from side to side, and work toward the outside. * Tighten the bolts a final pass to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Tighten the bolts beginning with the center 2 bolts. Alternate from side to side, and work toward the outside. 3. Using a flat punch, bend over the exposed edge of the exhaust manifold gasket at the rear of the left cylinder head. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side > Page 5387 4. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield (603). 5. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (604). Tighten the bolts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 6. Install the oil level indicator tube. Refer to Oil Level Indicator and Tube Replacement (See: Engine/Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil Dip Stick Dip Stick Tube/Service and Repair) . 7. Install the left side spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement . 8. Install the exhaust crossover pipe nuts from the left exhaust manifold. Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 9. Install the exhaust crossover pipe heat shield. 10. Install the heater pipe retainer bolts. Tighten the bolts to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). 11. Install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side > Page 5388 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Right Side (RPO LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement . 3. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe nuts from the right exhaust manifold. 4. Disconnect the catalytic converter from the exhaust manifold. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . 5. Support the catalytic convertor and exhaust system with the mechanics wire. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement . 8. Remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). Refer to Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 . 9. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (604). 10. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield (603). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side > Page 5389 11. Remove the exhaust manifold bolts. 12. Remove the exhaust manifold. 13. Remove and discard the exhaust manifold gasket. Installation Procedure Important: * Tighten the exhaust manifold bolts as specified in the service procedure. Improperly installed and/or leaking exhaust manifold gaskets my affect vehicle emissions and/or On Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system performance. * The cylinder head exhaust manifold bolt hole threads must be clean and free of debris or threadlocking material. * DO NOT apply threadlock to the first three thread of the bolts. 1. Apply a 5 mm (0.2 in) wide band of threadlock GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) or equivalent to the threads of the exhaust manifold bolts. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install a NEW exhaust manifold gasket, the exhaust manifold and bolts. * Tighten the bolts a first pass to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). Tighten the bolts beginning with the center 2 bolts. Alternate from side to side, and work toward the outside. * Tighten the bolts a final pass to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Tighten the bolts beginning with the center 2 bolts. Alternate from side to side, and work toward the outside. 3. Using a flat punch, bend over the exposed edge of the exhaust manifold gasket at the rear of the right cylinder head. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold Replacement - Left Side > Page 5390 4. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield (603). 5. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts (604). Tighten the bolts to 9 N.m (80 lb in). 6. Install the O2 sensor. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement . 7. Raise the vehicle. 8. Remove the mechanics wire from the exhaust system and connect the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . 9. Install the exhaust crossover pipe nuts to the right exhaust manifold. Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 10. Install the ignition coil. Refer to Ignition Coil Replacement . 11. Install the spark plugs. Refer to Spark Plug Replacement . 12. Install the fuel injector sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Crossover Pipe Replacement (RPO LS4) (5.3L) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement . 3. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe heat shield. 4. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe nuts. 5. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe. 6. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe seal. Installation Procedure 1. Install the exhaust crossover pipe seal to the exhaust crossover pipe at the right exhaust manifold connection. 2. Install the exhaust crossover pipe. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the exhaust crossover pipe nuts. Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the exhaust crossover pipe heat shield. 5. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement . 6. Install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: Service and Repair Converter Hanger Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Using a suitable jack, support the exhaust system, if necessary. 3. Remove and discard the catalytic converter pipe hangers (1), if necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Install the NEW catalytic converter pipe hangers (1), if necessary. 2. Remove the support from the exhaust system, if necessary. 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Muffler Replacement (Dual Outlet) Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler Replacement (Dual Outlet) Muffler Replacement (Dual Outlet) Removal Procedure Important: The muffler is serviced as a complete assembly and cannot be serviced separately. 1. Remove the catalytic converter. Refer toCatalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . 2. Support the exhaust system. 3. With the aid of an assistant, remove the exhaust system from the exhaust hangers. 4. Clean the catalytic converter and the muffler mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. With the aid of an assistant, install the muffler to the exhaust hangers. 2. Remove the support from the exhaust system. 3. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Muffler Replacement (Dual Outlet) > Page 5401 Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler Replacement (Single Outlet) Muffler Replacement (Single Outlet) Removal Procedure Important: The muffler is serviced as a complete assembly and cannot be serviced separately. 1. Remove the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . 2. Have an assistant support the muffler assembly. 3. Remove the muffler assembly from the exhaust insulators. 4. Clean the catalytic converter to muffler mating surfaces. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Muffler Replacement (Dual Outlet) > Page 5402 1. Lubricate the insulators with spray lubricant. 2. With the aid of an assistant, install the muffler assembly to the exhaust insulators. 3. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Pipe Gasket > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe Gasket: Service and Repair Exhaust Seal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove and discard the exhaust manifold pipe gasket (2), if equipped with regular production options (RPOs) LZE/LZ9. 3. Remove and discard the exhaust manifold pipe gasket (1), if equipped with RPO LS4. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Pipe Gasket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5407 4. Remove and discard the catalytic converter to muffler gasket (2), if equipped with RPO LZE. 5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter to muffler seal, if equipped with RPOs LS4/LZ9. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Pipe Gasket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5408 1. Install a NEW catalytic converter to muffler seal, if equipped with RPOs LS4/LZ9. 2. Install a NEW catalytic converter to muffler gasket (2), if equipped with RPO LZE. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Pipe Gasket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5409 3. Install a NEW exhaust manifold pipe gasket (1), if equipped with RPO LS4. 4. Install a NEW exhaust manifold pipe gasket (2), if equipped with RPOs LZE/LZ9. 5. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair)Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) (See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 5417 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 5418 Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-47-004C Date: December 04, 2009 Subject: Information on Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2007-2010 Buick Enclave 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express, Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2010 Saturn VUE 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models, model years and information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-47-004B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealers of an issue that could cause internal module damage to the Body Control Module (BCM). The BCM may be damaged when the module is supplied with battery power and the ground path is removed. You must remove the negative battery cable first before removing a BCM ground. Issue 1 Below is a list of vehicles and the components that the BCM ground path passes through. The negative battery cable must be removed when removing the components noted below. - 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 (Instrument panel electrical center) - 2008-2010 Saturn VUE (I/P splice pack) Issue 2 It is important to note when removing a ring terminal ground, splice pack connector, or inline harness connector for all the vehicles listed in the model section above, that it doesn't include a BCM ground path. You must remove the negative battery cable if you determine that it is a BCM ground path. As an example: If the BCM grounds become disconnected, internal damage to the BCM will occur. Other systems controlled by the BCM will also be affected, such as an inoperative or intermittent condition in one or more of the following systems: - Interior lighting will remain on or will not work - Exterior lighting will remain on or will not work - Remote keyless entry - Door locks - Power windows and mirrors - Remote vehicle start - Remote trunk release Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 5419 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5420 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Near the Steering Column 1 - Instrument Panel Carrier 2 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 3 - Steering Column 4 Body Control Module (BCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5421 Body Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Body Control Module (BCM) X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5422 Body Control Module (BCM) X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5423 Body Control Module (BCM) X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5424 Body Control Module (BCM) X4 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5425 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5426 Body Control Module (BCM) X5 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5427 Body Control Module (BCM) X6 Body Control Module (BCM) X7 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5428 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5429 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5434 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5435 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5436 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5437 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5438 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5439 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026B Date: April 07, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and information about retrieving calibrations on a Global A vehicle. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine, transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5440 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5441 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 5442 Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views > Page 5445 Engine Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5448 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5449 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5450 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5451 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5452 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5453 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5454 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5455 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5456 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5457 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5458 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5459 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5460 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5461 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5462 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5463 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5464 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5465 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5466 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5467 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5468 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5469 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5470 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5471 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5472 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5473 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5474 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5475 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5476 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5477 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5478 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5479 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5480 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5481 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5482 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5483 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5484 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5485 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5486 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5487 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5488 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5489 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5490 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5491 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5492 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5493 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5494 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5495 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5496 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5497 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5498 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5499 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5500 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5501 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5502 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5503 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5504 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5505 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5506 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5507 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5508 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5509 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5510 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5511 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5512 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5513 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5514 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5515 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5516 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5517 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5518 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5519 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5520 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5521 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5522 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5523 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5524 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5525 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5526 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5527 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5528 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5529 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5530 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5531 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5532 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5533 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5534 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5535 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5536 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5537 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5538 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5539 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5540 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5541 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5542 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5543 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5544 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5545 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5546 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5547 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5548 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5549 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5550 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5551 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5552 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5553 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5554 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5555 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5556 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5557 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5558 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5559 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5560 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5561 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5562 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5563 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5564 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5565 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5566 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5567 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5568 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5569 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5570 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5571 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5572 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5573 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5574 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5575 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Engine Control Module (ECM) X1 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5576 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5577 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 1 To 33) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5578 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 34 To 73) Engine Control Module (ECM) X3 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5579 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5580 Engine Control Module: Electrical Diagrams For information regarding diagrams for this component, please refer to Powertrain Management diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Engine Controls Diagram Index Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5581 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Powertrain Control Module and Electrostatic Discharge Notice Notice: Do not touch the connector pins or soldered components on the circuit board in order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the PCM. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5582 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The engine control module (ECM) is the control center of this system. The ECM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The ECM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the ECM. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: * The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. * The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. * The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. * The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. * When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. * When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5583 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Service of the engine control module (ECM) should normally consist of either replacement of the ECM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for ECM replacement, inspect the ECM first to see if the replacement is the correct part. If the ECM is faulty, remove the ECM and install the new service ECM. The new service ECM will not be programmed. You must program the new ECM. DTC P0602 indicates the EEPROM is not programmed or has malfunctioned. Notice: In order to prevent any possible electrostatic discharge damage to the ECM, do not touch the connector pins or the soldered components on the circuit board. Notice: Always turn the ignition off when installing or removing the ECM connectors in order to prevent damage to the components. Removal Procedure Important: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100 percent. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil. Record the remaining engine oil life, if required. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the left front inner fender brace. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. Disconnect the ECM electrical connectors (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5584 6. Remove the ECM from the air cleaner lower housing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the ECM to the air cleaner lower housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5585 2. Connect the ECM electrical connectors (2). 3. Install the air cleaner assembly. 4. Install the left front inner fender brace. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. 6. Program the new ECM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 5589 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 5590 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Air Injection Pump Relay: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Pump Relay (NU3) Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Solenoid Relay (NU3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5595 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5602 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5603 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5604 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5605 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5606 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5607 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5608 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5609 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5610 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5611 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5612 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5613 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5614 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5615 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5616 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5617 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5618 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5619 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5620 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5621 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5622 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5623 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5624 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5625 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5626 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5627 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5628 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5629 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5630 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5631 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5632 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5633 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5634 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5635 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5636 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5637 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5638 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5639 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5640 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5641 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5642 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5643 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5644 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5645 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5646 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5647 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5648 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5649 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5650 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5651 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5652 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5653 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5654 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5655 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5656 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5657 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5658 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5659 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5660 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5661 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5662 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5663 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5664 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5665 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5666 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5667 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5668 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5669 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5670 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5671 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5672 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5673 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5674 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5675 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5676 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5677 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5678 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5679 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5680 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5681 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5682 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5683 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5684 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5685 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5686 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5687 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5688 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5689 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5690 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5691 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5692 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5693 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5694 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5702 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5703 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5704 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5705 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5706 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5707 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5708 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5709 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5710 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5711 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5712 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5713 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5714 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5715 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5716 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5717 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5718 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5719 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5720 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5721 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5722 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5723 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5724 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5725 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5726 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5727 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5728 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 5732 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 5733 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5739 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5740 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5741 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 5746 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 5747 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5750 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5751 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5752 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5753 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5754 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5755 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5756 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5757 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5758 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5759 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5760 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5761 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5762 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5763 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5764 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5765 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5766 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5767 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5768 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5769 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5770 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5771 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5772 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5773 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5774 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5775 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5776 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5777 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5778 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5779 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5780 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5781 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5782 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5783 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5784 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5785 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5786 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5787 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5788 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5789 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5790 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5791 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5792 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5793 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5794 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5795 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5796 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5797 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5798 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5799 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5800 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5801 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5802 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5803 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5804 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5805 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5806 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5807 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5808 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5809 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5810 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5811 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5812 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5813 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5814 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5815 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5816 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5817 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5818 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5819 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5820 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5821 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5822 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5823 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5824 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5825 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5826 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5827 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5828 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5829 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5830 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5831 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5832 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5833 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5834 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5835 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5836 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5837 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5838 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5839 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5840 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5841 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5842 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5843 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5844 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5845 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5846 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5847 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5848 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5849 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5850 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5851 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5852 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5853 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5854 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5855 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5856 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5857 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5858 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5859 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5860 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5861 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5862 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5863 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5864 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5865 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5866 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5867 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5868 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5869 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5870 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5871 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5872 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5873 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5874 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5875 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5876 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5877 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5878 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5879 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Battery Current Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 5884 Battery Current Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5885 Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5886 Battery Current Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Current Sensor Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 2. Remove the positive and negative battery cable. 3. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 4. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 5. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5887 Installation Procedure Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the battery prior to installation. 1. Slide the NEW battery current sensor (1) up onto the battery cable. 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 3. Install the positive and negative battery cable. 4. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5893 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5894 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5895 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5896 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5897 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5898 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5899 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5900 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5901 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5902 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5903 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5904 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5905 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5906 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5907 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5908 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5909 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5910 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5911 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5912 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5913 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5914 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5915 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5916 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5917 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5918 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5919 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5920 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5921 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5922 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5923 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5924 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5925 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5926 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5927 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5928 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5929 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5930 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5931 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5932 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5933 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5934 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5935 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5936 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5937 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5938 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5939 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5940 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5941 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5942 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5943 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5967 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5968 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5969 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5970 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5971 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5972 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5973 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5974 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5975 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5976 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5977 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5978 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5979 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5980 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5981 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5982 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5983 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5984 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5985 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5986 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5987 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5988 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5989 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5990 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5991 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5992 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5993 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5994 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5995 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5996 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5997 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5998 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5999 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6000 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6015 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6016 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6017 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6018 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6019 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6020 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6021 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6022 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6031 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6032 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6033 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6034 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6040 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6041 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6042 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 6043 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6044 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6045 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6046 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the ECT sensor. Installation Procedure Notice: Replacement components must be the correct part number for the application. Components requiring the use of the thread locking compound, lubricants, corrosion inhibitors, or sealants are identified in the service procedure. Some replacement components may come with these coatings already applied. Do not use these coatings on components unless specified. These coatings can affect the final torque, which may affect the operation of the component. Use the correct torque specification when installing components in order to avoid damage. Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6047 1. Coat the thread of the ECT sensor with sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6053 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6054 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6055 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6056 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6057 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6058 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6059 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6060 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6061 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6062 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6063 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6064 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6065 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6066 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6067 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6068 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6090 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6091 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6092 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6093 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6099 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6100 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6101 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6102 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6103 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6104 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6105 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6106 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6107 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6108 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6109 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6110 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6111 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6112 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6113 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6115 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6116 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6117 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6118 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6119 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6120 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6121 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6122 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6123 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6124 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6125 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6126 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6127 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6128 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6129 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6130 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6131 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6132 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6133 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6134 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6135 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6136 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6137 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6138 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6139 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6140 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6141 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6142 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6143 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6144 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6145 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6146 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6147 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6148 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6149 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6150 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6151 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6152 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6153 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6154 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6155 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6156 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6157 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6158 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6159 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6160 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6161 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6162 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6163 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6164 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6165 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6166 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6167 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 6183 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 6184 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6188 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6189 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Fuel Vapors can collect while servicing fuel system parts in enclosed areas such as a trunk. To reduce the risk of fire and increased exposure to vapors: * Use forced air ventilation such as a fan set outside of the trunk. * Plug or cap any fuel system openings in order to reduce fuel vapor formation. * Clean up any spilled fuel immediately. * Avoid sparks and any source of ignition. * Use signs to alert others in the work area that fuel system work is in process. 1. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 2. Using two flat-bladed tools, carefully pull both locking tabs (1) outward while simultaneously lifting the level sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6190 3. Using a small bladed tool, push in the electrical terminals (1) while simultaneously pulling out. Installation Procedure 1. Push in the electrical terminals (1) and ensure the terminals are secure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6191 2. Carefully insert the level sensor until the locking tabs (1) snap into the locking position. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Tank Components 1 - Fuel Tank 2 - Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 3 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor 4 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6195 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6196 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6197 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 6202 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 6203 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6204 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6205 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6206 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6210 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6213 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6214 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6215 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6216 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6217 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6218 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6219 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6220 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6221 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6222 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6223 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6224 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6225 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6226 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6227 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6228 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6229 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6230 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6231 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6232 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6233 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6234 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6235 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6236 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6237 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6238 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6239 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6240 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6241 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6242 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6243 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6244 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6245 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6246 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6247 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6248 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6249 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6250 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6251 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6252 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6253 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6254 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6255 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6256 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6257 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6258 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6259 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6260 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6261 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6262 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6263 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6264 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6265 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6266 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6267 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6268 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6269 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6270 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6271 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6272 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6273 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6274 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6275 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6276 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6277 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6278 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6279 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6280 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6281 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6282 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6283 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6284 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6285 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6286 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6287 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6288 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6289 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6290 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6291 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6292 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6293 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6294 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6295 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6296 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6297 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6298 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6299 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6300 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6301 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6302 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6303 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6304 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6305 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6306 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6307 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6308 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6309 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6310 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6311 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6312 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6313 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6314 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6315 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6337 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6338 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6339 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6340 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6341 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6342 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6343 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6344 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6345 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6346 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Top of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6350 Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6351 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6352 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6353 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (714) from the intake manifold. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6354 1. Lubricate the MAP sensor grommet with clean engine oil, if required. 2. Install the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. 3. Install the MAP sensor (714). 4. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Top of Engine (LS4) Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6358 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6359 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6360 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Sensor Socket Removal Procedure 1. If necessary, remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 3. Using J 41712 , remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6361 1. Apply sealant to the threads of the oil pressure sensor. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Using J 41712 , install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 4. If necessary, install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Recalls Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 6370 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 6371 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 6377 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 6378 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 09-05-25-001 > Jun > 09 > ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-05-25-001 Date: June 02, 2009 Subject: Intermittent Service Stabilitrak Message After Key Cycle, DTC C0292 Set (Reprogram Electronic Brake Control Module) Models: 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Stabilitrak message is displayed intermittently after the vehicle is first started. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning lights may also come on the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) intermittently. This may be the result of setting DTC C0292. The DTC will appear as a history code. This condition can be very intermittent (every ten key cycles or more) and would occur before the gear selector is taken out of Park. Cause The Service Stabilitrak message and the DTC is a result of the Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) software not updated to the latest version. Some additional key factors that trigger the occurrences of this condition and the EBCM DTC C0292 include the following: - Initial battery voltage is less than 11.8 volts going into CRANK mode. - When starting the vehicle, the customer quickly enters CRANK and then releases to allow for the starter relay control to take over engine start. This quick return to RUN allows the EBCM diagnostics to start monitoring for diagnostic faults. In the case of DTC C0292 , the low voltage is measured at the Yaw/Lateral Accelerometer sensor and the Service StabiliTrak message is then displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Correction Important The TECH 2(R) can provide some additional information or aid during diagnosis. Using a TECH 2(R), interrogate the EBCM Freeze Frame Data or Additional DTC Information to confirm the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A. If the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A, the revised EBCM software calibration improvement will reduce the occurrence of the DTC C0292 diagnostic fault from setting. Reprogram the EBCM with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the EBCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Programming and Setup procedures in SI. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6389 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Underbody Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6390 1 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6393 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6394 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6395 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6396 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6397 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6398 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6399 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6400 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6401 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6402 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6403 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6404 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6405 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6406 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6407 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6408 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6409 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6410 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6411 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6412 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6413 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6415 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6416 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6417 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6418 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6419 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6420 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6421 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6422 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6423 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6424 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6425 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6426 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6427 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6428 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6429 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6430 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6431 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6432 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6433 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6434 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6435 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6436 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6437 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6438 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6439 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6440 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6441 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6442 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6443 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6444 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6445 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6446 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6447 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6448 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6449 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6450 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6451 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6452 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6453 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6454 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6455 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6456 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6457 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6458 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6459 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6460 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6461 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6462 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6463 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6464 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6465 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6466 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6467 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6468 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6469 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6470 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6471 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6472 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6473 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6474 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6475 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6476 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6477 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6478 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6479 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6480 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6481 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6482 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6483 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6484 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6485 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6486 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6487 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6488 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6489 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6490 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6491 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6492 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6493 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6494 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6495 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6496 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6497 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6498 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6499 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6500 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6501 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6502 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6503 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6504 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6505 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6506 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6507 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6508 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6509 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6510 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6511 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6512 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6513 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6514 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6515 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6516 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6517 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6518 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6519 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6520 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 (LS4) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6521 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 6524 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 6525 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 6526 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 6527 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor Notice Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 6528 Notice: Handle the oxygen sensors carefully in order to prevent damage to the component. Keep the electrical connector and the exhaust inlet end free of contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents on the sensor. Do not drop or mishandle the sensor. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Notice: Do not solder heated oxygen sensor wires. Soldering the wires will result in the loss of the air reference to the sensor. Refer to Engine Electrical for proper wire and connection repair techniques. Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Notice: The heated oxygen sensors each use a permanently attached pigtail and connector. Do not remove the pigtail from the heated oxygen sensor. Damage or removal of the pigtail or the connector affects proper operation of the heated oxygen sensor. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the oxygen sensor. Keep the in-line connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, the connector, or the terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, the terminals, or the connector is damaged. Proper oxygen sensor operation requires an external air reference. This external air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, the connectors, or the terminals results in the obstruction of the air reference and degrades the oxygen sensor performance. A dropped oxygen sensor is a bad oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Remove the intake manifold sight shield. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (1). 3. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the bank 1 sensor 1 from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is used on the HO2S threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 6531 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 1 sensor 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Install the CPA retainer (1). 5. Install the intake manifold sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 6532 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 3. Disconnect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Remove the bank 2 sensor 2 from the catalytic converter. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is use on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burns away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 6533 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with the anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 2 sensor 2 to the catalytic converter. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Install the CPA retainer. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6538 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6539 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6540 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6541 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6542 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6543 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6544 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6545 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6546 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6547 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6548 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6549 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6550 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6551 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6552 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6553 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6554 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6555 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6556 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6557 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6558 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6559 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6560 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6561 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6562 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6563 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6564 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6565 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6566 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6567 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6568 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6569 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6570 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6571 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6572 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6573 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6574 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6575 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6576 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6577 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6578 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6579 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6580 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6581 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6582 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6583 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6584 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6585 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6586 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6587 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6588 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6589 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6590 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6591 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6592 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6593 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6594 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6595 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6596 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6597 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6598 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6599 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6600 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6601 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6602 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6603 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6604 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6605 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6606 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6607 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6608 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6609 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6610 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6611 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6612 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6613 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6614 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6615 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6616 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6617 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6618 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6619 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6620 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6621 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6622 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6623 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6624 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6625 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6626 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6627 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6628 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6629 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6630 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6631 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6632 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6633 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6634 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6635 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6636 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6637 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6638 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6639 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6640 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6641 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6642 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6643 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6644 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6645 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6646 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6647 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6648 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6649 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6650 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6651 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6652 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6653 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6654 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6655 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6656 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6657 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6658 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6659 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6660 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6661 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6662 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6663 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6664 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle > Page 6669 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6670 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6671 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 4. Remove the VSS bolt (9). 5. Remove the VSS (10) from the extension case. 6. Remove the O-ring (11) from the VSS (10). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6672 1. Install the O-ring (11) to the VSS (10). 2. Install the VSS (10). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the VSS bolt (9). Tighten the bolt (9) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 4. Connect the VSS electrical connector. 5. Install the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6677 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6678 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6679 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 6684 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 6685 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6688 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6689 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6690 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6691 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6692 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6693 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6694 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6695 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6696 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6697 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6698 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6699 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6700 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6701 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6702 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6703 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6704 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6705 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6706 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6707 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6708 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6709 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6710 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6711 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6712 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6713 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6714 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6715 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6716 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6717 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6718 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6719 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6720 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6721 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6722 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6723 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6724 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6725 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6726 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6727 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6728 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6729 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6730 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6731 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6732 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6733 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6734 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6735 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6736 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6737 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6738 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6739 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6740 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6741 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6742 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6743 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6744 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6745 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6746 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6747 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6748 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6749 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6750 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6751 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6752 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6753 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6754 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6755 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6756 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6757 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6758 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6759 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6760 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6761 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6762 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6763 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6764 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6765 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6766 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6767 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6768 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6769 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6770 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6771 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6772 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6773 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6774 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6775 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6776 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6777 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6778 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6779 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6780 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6781 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6782 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6783 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6784 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6785 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6786 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6787 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6788 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6789 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6790 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6791 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6792 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6793 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6794 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6795 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6796 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6797 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6798 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6799 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6800 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6801 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6802 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6803 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6804 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6805 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6806 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6807 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6808 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6809 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6810 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6811 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6812 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6813 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6814 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6815 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6816 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6817 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6822 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6823 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6824 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6825 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6826 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6827 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6828 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6829 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6830 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6831 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6832 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6833 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6834 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6835 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6836 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6837 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6838 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6839 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6840 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6841 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6842 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6843 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6844 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6845 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6846 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6847 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6848 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6849 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6850 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6851 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6852 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6853 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6854 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6855 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6856 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6861 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6862 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6863 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6864 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6865 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6866 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6867 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6868 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6869 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6870 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6871 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6872 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6873 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6874 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6875 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6876 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6877 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6878 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6879 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6880 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6881 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6882 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6883 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6884 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6885 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6886 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6887 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6888 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6889 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6890 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6891 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6892 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6893 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6894 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6895 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6896 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6897 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6898 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6899 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6900 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6901 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6902 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6903 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6904 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6905 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6906 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6907 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6908 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6909 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6910 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6911 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6912 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6913 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6914 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6915 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6916 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6917 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6918 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6919 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6920 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6921 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6922 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6923 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6924 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6925 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6926 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6927 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6928 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6929 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6930 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6931 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6932 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6933 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6934 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6935 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6936 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6937 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6938 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6939 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6940 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6941 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6942 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6943 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6944 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6945 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6946 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6947 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6948 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6955 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6956 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6957 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6958 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6959 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6960 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6961 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6962 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6963 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6964 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6965 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6966 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6967 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6968 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6969 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6970 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6971 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6972 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6973 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6974 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6975 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6976 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6977 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6978 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6979 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6980 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6981 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6982 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6983 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6984 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6985 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6986 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6987 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6988 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6989 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6990 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6991 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6992 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6993 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6994 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6995 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6996 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6997 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6998 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6999 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7000 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7001 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7002 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7003 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7004 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7005 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7006 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7007 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7008 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7009 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7010 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7011 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7012 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7013 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7014 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7015 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7016 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7017 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7018 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7019 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7020 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7021 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7022 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7023 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7024 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7025 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7026 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7027 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7028 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7029 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7030 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7031 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7032 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7033 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7034 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7035 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7036 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7037 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7038 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7039 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7040 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7041 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7042 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7043 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7044 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7045 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7046 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7047 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7048 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7049 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7050 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7051 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7052 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7053 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7054 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7055 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7056 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7057 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7058 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7059 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7060 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7061 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7062 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7063 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7064 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7065 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7066 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7067 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7068 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7069 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7070 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7071 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7072 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7073 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7074 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7075 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7076 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7077 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7078 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7079 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7080 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7081 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7082 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7083 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7084 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7090 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7091 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7092 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7093 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7094 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7095 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7096 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7097 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7098 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7099 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7100 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7101 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7103 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7104 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7105 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7106 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7107 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7108 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7109 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7110 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7111 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7112 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7113 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7114 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7115 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7116 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7117 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7118 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7119 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7120 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7121 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7122 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7123 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7124 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7125 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7126 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7127 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7128 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7129 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7130 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7131 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7132 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7133 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7134 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7135 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7136 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7137 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7138 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7139 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7140 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7141 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7142 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7143 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7144 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7145 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7146 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7147 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7148 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7149 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7150 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7151 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7152 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7153 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7154 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7155 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7156 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7157 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7158 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7159 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7160 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7161 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7162 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7163 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7164 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7165 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7166 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7167 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7168 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7169 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7170 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7171 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7172 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7173 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7174 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7175 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7176 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7177 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7178 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7179 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7180 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7181 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7182 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7183 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7184 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7185 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7186 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7187 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7188 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7189 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7190 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7191 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7192 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7193 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7194 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7195 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7196 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7197 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7198 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7199 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7200 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7201 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7202 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7203 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7204 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7205 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7206 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7207 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7208 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7209 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7210 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7211 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7212 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7213 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7214 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7215 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7216 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7217 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7220 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7221 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Front of the Passenger Compartment, in the Steering Column 1 - Ignition Switch 2 - Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) 3 - Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 7226 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Procedures Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Special Tools BO-48370 Lock Cylinder Cap Installer Ignition Lock Cylinder The column-mount ignition lock cylinder uses 7 of the 10 key cut positions, 1, 2, and 4 through 8, when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on one side and 3 on the other. Important: The ignition lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the tumbler retainers (4) are properly staked into the cylinder. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder assembly (1) positioned so the side with the retention lug is facing upward, spring-loaded retainer facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 3 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 1, the first number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. It may be necessary to move the sidebar (5), already pre-assembled into the uncoded cylinder assembly, out slightly to fully install the tumbler into the correct tumbler slot. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 2 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5 and 7. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 6. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) so that the side with the retention lug is facing downward, spring-loaded retainer facing upward, and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7229 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 2. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 4, 6, and 8. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the cylinder assembly (1), install and stake one tumbler retainer (4) into the recessed area on the cylinder. Be careful not to damage the cylinder assembly in any way while staking the tumbler retainer. 13. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) to the opposite side and repeat the procedure defined in the previous step. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder The front side door lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3 through 10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Important: The front side door lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case assembly (4). Left side shown, right side opposite. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing upward, as shown. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check the correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing downward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7230 are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. Hold the case assembly (4), left side shown, right side opposite, with the pre-staked detent spring retainer facing downward. 13. First insert one detent spring (5) and then one detent ball (6) into the detent spring hole located to the rear and inside of the cylinder case assembly (4). The detent spring and detent ball are not self-retaining and must be held in place until the coded cylinder is installed into the case assembly. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 14. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case assembly (4). Make sure the detent spring (5) and detent ball (6) are held in place until the coded cylinder is fully installed. The detent ball should line up with the V-shaped groove on the rear of the cylinder, which will prevent the detent spring and detent ball from falling out of the case assembly. 15. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case assembly (4). 16. Insert one shutter spring (7) each into the two shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 17. Install the shutter assembly (8) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. 18. Install the lock cylinder cap (9) by aligning the drain hole in the cap with the bottom of the case assembly (4). Snap the cap into place with light hand pressure. Be sure the cap is securely retained on the case assembly. Also, be sure that the shutter springs (7) push the shutter assembly (8) up against the inside surface of the cap. 19. Install the lever (10), left side shown, right side opposite, onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (11) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (10) to the cylinder. Rear Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder - Police Vehicles 9C1 and 9C3 The rear compartment lid lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3-10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7231 Important: The rear compartment lid lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key is not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case (4). 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the drain hole is facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so that the side with the drain hole is facing upward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the open tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers into the tumbler slots located at key Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7232 cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case (4). 13. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case (4). 14. Insert one shutter spring (5) each into the 2 shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 15. Install the shutter assembly (6) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. Important: Be careful not to scratch or dent the cosmetic surface of the cap or damage the lock cylinder in any way while staking the cap. 16. Stake the cap (7) onto the head of the case (4) by using the appropriate staking tool BO-48370. Ensure proper orientation and set the cylinder assembly (14), (which includes the case (4), coded cylinder (1), shutter springs (5), and shutter assembly (6)) and the cap (7) into the staking cup (15) and clamp into vise. Remove any debris and install the cleaned staking ram (16) into staking cup (15) and with a dead blow hammer, hit the staking ram (16) with moderate force 2 or 3 times. Check to determine if cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly (14). Repeat previous step until cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly. Remove assembly from the staking cup (15). If necessary, insert the removal punch (17) into the opposite end of the staking cup and tap lightly. Confirm that the shutter springs (5) push the shutter assembly (6) up against the inside surface of the cap (7). 17. Install the gasket (8) over the end of the cylinder assembly and slide it all the way up the case (4) until it seats behind the cap (7). 18. Install the return spring (9) over the back end of the cylinder (1) with the straight hook facing the rear of the case (4). Engage the straight hook of the return spring with the hook feature on the rear of the case. 19. Install the spacer (10) and lever (11) onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (12) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (11) to the cylinder. Engage the bent hook of the return spring (9) with the lever. 21. Install the theft deterrent switch (13) onto the end of the cylinder (1) and snap the switch legs onto the case (4). Be sure the theft deterrent switch is engaged with the end of the cylinder and is securely attached to the case. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7233 22. Check the operation of the lock assembly. The return spring (9) should provide a counterclockwise snap back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7234 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. Remove the ignition switch. 4. Remove the steering column tilt head components. 5. Remove the turn signal switch housing. 6. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7235 7. Remove the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case in the following way: 1. Use a small blade to push against the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1). 2. Disconnect the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case. 8. Remove the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) from the ignition lock cylinder case (1). 9. Remove the ignition lock cylinder case (1) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the ignition lock cylinder case (1) with the steering column tilt head assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Screw the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) into the ignition lock cylinder case (1). Tighten the 3 TORX(R) screws to 7 N.m (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7236 3. Press the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1) into the slot in the ignition lock cylinder case. Important: Press the turn signal switch housing firmly against the steering column tilt head in order for the screws from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly to align. 4. Install the turn signal switch housing. 5. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. 6. Install the steering column tilt head components. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7237 7. Install the ignition switch only. 8. Install the ignition lock cylinder. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7241 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7244 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7245 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7246 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7247 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7248 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7249 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7250 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7251 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7253 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7254 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7255 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7256 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7257 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7258 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7259 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7260 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7261 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7262 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7263 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7264 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7265 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7270 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7271 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7272 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7273 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7274 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7275 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7276 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7277 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7278 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7279 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7280 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7281 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7282 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7283 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7284 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7285 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7286 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7287 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7288 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7289 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7290 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7291 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7292 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7293 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7294 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7295 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7296 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7297 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7298 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7299 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7300 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7301 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7302 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7303 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7304 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7305 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7306 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7307 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7308 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7309 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7310 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7311 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7312 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7313 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7314 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7315 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7316 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7317 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7318 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7319 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7320 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7321 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7322 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7323 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7324 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7325 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7326 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7327 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7328 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7329 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7330 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7331 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7332 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7333 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7334 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7335 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7336 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7337 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7338 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7339 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7340 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7341 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7342 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7343 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7344 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7345 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7346 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7347 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7348 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7349 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7350 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7351 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7352 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7353 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7354 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7355 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7356 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7357 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7358 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7359 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7360 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7361 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7362 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7363 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7364 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7365 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7366 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7367 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7368 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7369 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7370 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7371 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7372 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7373 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7374 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7375 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7376 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7377 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Pressure: Technician Safety Information Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7384 Fuel Pressure: Vehicle Damage Warnings Fuel Pressure Notice Notice: Do not allow the fuel pressure to exceed the specified value because damage to the fuel pressure regulator or the fuel pressure gage may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7387 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7388 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the fuel pump module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter and the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pump also supplies fuel to a venturi pump located on the bottom of the fuel pump module. The function of the venturi pump is to fill the fuel pump module reservoir. The fuel pressure regulator, a part of the fuel pump module, maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. Special Tools * CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage * J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Important: * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. You should hear the fuel pump turn ON and OFF. ^ If the fuel pump does not operate, refer to Fuel Pump Electrical Circuit Diagnosis. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH-48027. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. Circuit/System Testing Important: * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gage while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 7389 ^ If the fuel pressure is greater than the specified range, replace the fuel pump module. ^ If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 1. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Install the J 37287 between the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287. 4. Ignition ON, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH-48027. 5. Command the fuel pump relay ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, locate and replace the leaking fuel injector(s). ^ If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the fuel pump module. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 minutes. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the fuel pump module. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH-48027. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ^ If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 4. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Computers and Control Systems. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement * Fuel Injector Replacement * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Not supplied by manufacturer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube from the air inlet duct. 2. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. 3. Remove the air inlet duct from the throttle body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7397 4. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. 5. Remove the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Install the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the MAF/IAT sensor. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7398 3. Install the air inlet duct to the throttle body. 4. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 5. Connect the PCV tube to the air inlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Release the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing cover. 4. Remove the air filter element. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW air filter element. 2. Install the air cleaner housing cover. 3. Engage the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Pressure Release: Procedures Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Remove the engine cover, if required. 3. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 6. Connect the CH-48027-3 (4) to the fuel rail service port. 7. Connect the CH-48027-2 (2) to the CH-48027-3 (4). 8. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 9. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 10. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 11. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7407 * The areas surrounding the connections Important: If relieving the fuel pressure for the fuel pressure gage installation and removal, it is NOT necessary to proceed with the following steps. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 12. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 13. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 14. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 15. Install the engine cover, if required. 16. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 3. Remove the engine cover, if required. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port and using a small flat-bladed tool, depress (open) the fuel rail test port valve. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 7. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 8. Install the engine cover, if required. 9. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7408 Fuel Pressure Release: Removal and Replacement Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7409 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ...........................................................397-1,337 ohms Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7416 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires. Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: * Tearing * Piercing * Arcing * Carbon tracking * Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7417 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair Spark Plug Wire Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spark plug wire from the spark plug. 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the spark plug. 2. Remove the spark plug wire from the ignition coil (724). 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the ignition coil. Installation Procedure 1. Install the spark plug wire to the ignition coil (724). 2. Install the spark plug wire to the spark plug. 3. Inspect the spark plug wire for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap.................................................................................................................................... .......................................................1.02 mm - 0.040 in Spark Plug Torque.......................................... ................................................................................................................................................15 N.m 11 lb ft Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7421 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type..........................................................................................................................................GM P/N 12571164 (AC Spark Plug P/N 41-985) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7422 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Verify that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling - colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage - hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7423 * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively-wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over-torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation - Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon Fouled - Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils * Worn ignition wires * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit Fouling - Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7424 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: This engine has aluminum cylinder heads. Do not remove the spark plugs from a hot engine, allow it to cool first. Removing the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause spark plug thread damage or cylinder head damage. 1. Remove the spark plug wire. 2. Loosen the spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or using compressed air, blow away any dirt from around the spark plug. 4. Remove the spark plug. If removing more than one plug, place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder number. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7425 1. Correctly position the spark plug washer. 2. Inspect the spark plug gap. Adjust the gap as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.016 mm (0.040 in). 3. Hand start the spark plug in the corresponding cylinder. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Tighten the spark plug. Tighten the plug to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 5. Install the spark plug wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 7429 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Engine Compression Test 1. Charge the battery if the battery is not fully charged. 2. Disable the ignition system. 3. Disable the fuel injection system. 4. Remove all spark plugs. 5. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 6. Depress the accelerator pedal to position the throttle plate wide open. 7. Start with the compression gage at zero and crank the engine through 4 compression strokes, 4 puffs. 8. Measure the compression for each cylinder. Record the readings. 9. If a cylinder has low compression, inject approximately 15 ml (1 tablespoon) of engine oil into the combustion chamber through the spark plug hole. Measure the compression again and record the reading. 10. The minimum compression in any 1 cylinder should not be less than 70 percent of the highest cylinder. No cylinder should read less than 690 kPa (100 psi). For example, if the highest pressure in any 1 cylinder is 1 035 kPa (150 psi), the lowest allowable pressure for any other cylinder would be 725 kPa (105 psi). (1 035 x 70% = 725) (150 x 70% = 105). * Normal - Compression builds up quickly and evenly to the specified compression for each cylinder. * Piston Rings Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression builds up with the following strokes, but does not reach normal. Compression improves considerably when you add oil. * Valves Leaking - Compression is low on the first stroke. Compression usually does not build up on the following strokes. Compression does not improve much when you add oil. * If 2 adjacent cylinders have lower than normal compression, and injecting oil into the cylinders does not increase the compression, the cause may be a head gasket leaking between the cylinders. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7434 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7435 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7436 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 7441 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 7442 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7445 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7446 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7447 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7448 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7449 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7450 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7451 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7452 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7453 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7454 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7455 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7456 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7457 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7458 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7459 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7460 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7461 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7462 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7463 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7464 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7465 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7466 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7467 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7468 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7469 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7470 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7471 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7472 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7473 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7474 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7475 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7476 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7477 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7478 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7479 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7480 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7481 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7482 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7483 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7484 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7485 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7486 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7487 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7488 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7489 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7490 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7491 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7492 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7493 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7494 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7495 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7496 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7497 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7498 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7499 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7500 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7501 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7502 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7503 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7504 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7509 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7510 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7511 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7512 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7516 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7517 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7518 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7519 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7520 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7521 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7522 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7523 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7524 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7525 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7526 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7527 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7528 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7529 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7530 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7531 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7532 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7533 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7534 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7535 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7536 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7537 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7538 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7539 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7540 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7541 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7542 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7543 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7544 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7545 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7546 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7547 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7548 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7549 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7550 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7551 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7552 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7553 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7554 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7555 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7556 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7557 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7558 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7559 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7560 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7561 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7562 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7563 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7564 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7565 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7566 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7567 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7568 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7569 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7570 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7571 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7572 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7573 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7574 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 7579 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 7580 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7581 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7582 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7583 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Battery Current Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 7588 Battery Current Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7589 Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7590 Battery Current Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Current Sensor Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 2. Remove the positive and negative battery cable. 3. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 4. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 5. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7591 Installation Procedure Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the battery prior to installation. 1. Slide the NEW battery current sensor (1) up onto the battery cable. 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 3. Install the positive and negative battery cable. 4. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 7596 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 7597 Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-47-004C Date: December 04, 2009 Subject: Information on Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2007-2010 Buick Enclave 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express, Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2010 Saturn VUE 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models, model years and information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-47-004B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealers of an issue that could cause internal module damage to the Body Control Module (BCM). The BCM may be damaged when the module is supplied with battery power and the ground path is removed. You must remove the negative battery cable first before removing a BCM ground. Issue 1 Below is a list of vehicles and the components that the BCM ground path passes through. The negative battery cable must be removed when removing the components noted below. - 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 (Instrument panel electrical center) - 2008-2010 Saturn VUE (I/P splice pack) Issue 2 It is important to note when removing a ring terminal ground, splice pack connector, or inline harness connector for all the vehicles listed in the model section above, that it doesn't include a BCM ground path. You must remove the negative battery cable if you determine that it is a BCM ground path. As an example: If the BCM grounds become disconnected, internal damage to the BCM will occur. Other systems controlled by the BCM will also be affected, such as an inoperative or intermittent condition in one or more of the following systems: - Interior lighting will remain on or will not work - Exterior lighting will remain on or will not work - Remote keyless entry - Door locks - Power windows and mirrors - Remote vehicle start - Remote trunk release Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 7598 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7599 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Near the Steering Column 1 - Instrument Panel Carrier 2 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 3 - Steering Column 4 Body Control Module (BCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7600 Body Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Body Control Module (BCM) X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7601 Body Control Module (BCM) X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7602 Body Control Module (BCM) X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7603 Body Control Module (BCM) X4 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7604 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7605 Body Control Module (BCM) X5 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7606 Body Control Module (BCM) X6 Body Control Module (BCM) X7 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7607 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7608 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7614 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7615 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7616 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7617 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7618 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7619 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7620 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7621 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7622 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7623 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7624 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7625 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7626 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7627 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7628 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7629 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7630 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7631 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7632 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7633 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7634 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7635 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7636 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7637 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7638 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7639 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7640 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7641 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7642 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7643 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7644 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7645 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7646 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7647 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7648 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7649 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7650 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7651 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7652 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7653 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7654 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7655 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7656 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7657 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7658 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7659 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7660 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7661 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7662 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7663 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7664 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7665 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7666 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7667 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7668 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7669 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7670 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7671 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7672 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7673 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7674 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7675 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7676 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7677 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7678 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7679 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7680 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7681 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7682 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7683 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7684 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7685 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7686 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7687 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7688 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7689 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7690 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7691 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7692 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7693 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7694 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7695 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7696 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7697 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7698 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7699 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7700 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7701 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7702 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7703 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7704 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7705 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7706 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7707 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7708 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7709 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7710 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7711 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7712 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7713 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7714 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7715 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7716 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7717 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7718 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7719 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7720 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7721 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7722 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7723 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7724 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7725 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7726 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7727 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7728 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7729 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7730 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7731 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7732 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7733 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7734 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7735 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7736 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7737 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7738 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7739 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7740 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7741 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7742 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7743 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7752 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7753 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7754 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7755 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7761 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7762 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7763 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 7764 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7765 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7766 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7767 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the ECT sensor. Installation Procedure Notice: Replacement components must be the correct part number for the application. Components requiring the use of the thread locking compound, lubricants, corrosion inhibitors, or sealants are identified in the service procedure. Some replacement components may come with these coatings already applied. Do not use these coatings on components unless specified. These coatings can affect the final torque, which may affect the operation of the component. Use the correct torque specification when installing components in order to avoid damage. Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7768 1. Coat the thread of the ECT sensor with sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7774 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7775 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7776 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7777 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7778 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7779 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7780 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7781 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7782 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7783 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7784 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7785 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7786 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7787 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7788 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7789 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7790 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7791 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7792 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7793 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7794 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7795 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7796 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7797 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7798 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7799 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7800 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7801 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7802 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7803 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7804 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7805 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7806 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7807 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7808 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7809 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7810 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7811 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7812 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7813 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7814 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7815 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7816 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7817 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7818 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7819 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7820 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7821 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7822 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7823 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7824 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7825 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7826 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7827 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7828 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7829 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7830 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7831 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7832 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7833 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7834 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7835 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7836 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7837 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7838 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7839 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7840 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7841 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7842 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7843 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7844 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7845 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7846 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7847 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7848 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7849 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7850 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7851 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7852 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7853 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7854 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7855 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7856 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7857 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7858 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7859 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7860 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7861 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7862 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7863 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7864 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7865 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7866 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7867 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7868 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7869 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7870 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7871 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7872 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7873 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7874 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7875 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7876 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7877 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7878 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7879 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7880 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7881 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7882 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7883 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7884 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7885 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7886 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7887 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7888 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7889 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7890 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7891 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7892 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7893 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7894 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7895 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7896 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7897 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7898 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7899 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7900 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7901 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7904 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 7905 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Data Link Connector: Diagrams Data Link Connector (DLC) Connector Part Information - OEM: 15488184 - Service: 19115029 - Description: 16-Way F Metri-Pack 150 Series (BK) Terminal Part Information - Terminal/Tray: 12129484/19 - Core/Insulation Crimp: E/C - Release Tool/Test Probe: 12094429/J-35616-2A (GY) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7909 Data Link Connector: Service and Repair Data Link Connector Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disengage the data link connector (DLC) tab (1). 2. Remove the DLC from the instrument panel (I/P) trim pad. Installation Procedure 1. Align the DLC to the I/P trim pad. 2. Slide the DLC upward in order to engage the tab (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System Description Purpose The throttle actuator control (TAC) system delivers improved throttle response and greater reliability and eliminates the need for mechanical cable. The TAC system performs the following functions: * Accelerator pedal position sensing * Throttle positioning to meet driver and engine demands * Throttle position sensing * Internal diagnostics * Cruise control functions * Manage TAC electrical power consumption The TAC system includes the following components: * The accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors * The throttle body assembly * The engine control module (ECM) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor The accelerator pedal contains 2 individual APP sensors within the assembly. The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits: * A 5-volt reference circuit * A low reference circuit * A signal circuit The APP sensors are used to determine the pedal angle. The engine control module (ECM) provides each APP sensor a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensors provide the ECM with signal voltage proportional to the pedal movement. The APP sensor 1 signal voltage at rest position is less than 1 volt and increases to above 4 volts as the pedal is actuated. The APP sensor 2 signal voltage at rest position is near 0.5 volt and increases to more than 2 volts as the pedal is actuated. Throttle Body Assembly The throttle assembly contains the following components: * The throttle blade * The throttle actuator motor * The throttle position (TP) sensor 1 and 2 The throttle body functions similar to a conventional throttle body with the following exceptions: * An electric motor opens and closes the throttle valve. * The throttle blade is spring loaded in both directions and the default position is slightly open. * There are 2 individual TP sensors within the throttle body assembly. The TP sensors are used to determine the throttle plate angle. The TP sensors provide the engine control module (ECM) with a signal voltage proportional to throttle plate movement. The TP sensor 1 signal voltage at closed throttle is above 4 volts and decreases as the throttle plate is opened. The TP sensor 2 signal voltage at closed throttle is below 1 volt and increases as the throttle plate is opened. Engine Control Module The engine control module (ECM) is the control center for the throttle actuator control (TAC) system. The ECM determines the drivers intent and then calculates the appropriate throttle response. The ECM achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated voltage to the TAC motor. Modes of Operation Normal Mode During the operation of the throttle actuator control (TAC) system, several modes or functions are considered normal. The following modes may be entered during normal operation: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7913 * Minimum pedal value-At key-up the engine control module (ECM) updates the learned minimum pedal value. * Minimum throttle position (TP) values-At key-up the ECM updates the learned minimum TP value. In order to learn the minimum TP value, the throttle blade is moved to the closed position. * Ice break mode-If the throttle is not able to reach a predetermined minimum throttle position, the ice break mode is entered. During the ice break mode, the ECM commands the maximum pulse width several times to the throttle actuator motor in the closing direction. * Battery saver mode-After a predetermined time without engine RPM, the ECM commands the battery saver mode. During the battery saver mode, the TAC module removes the voltage from the motor control circuits, which removes the current draw used to maintain the idle position and allows the throttle to return to the spring loaded default position. Reduced Engine Power Mode When the ECM detects a condition with the TAC system, the ECM may enter a reduced engine power mode. Reduced engine power may cause one or more of the following conditions: * Acceleration limiting-The ECM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control; however, the vehicle acceleration is limited. * Limited throttle mode-The ECM will continue to use the accelerator pedal for throttle control; however, the maximum throttle opening is limited. * Throttle default mode-The ECM will turn off the throttle actuator motor and the throttle will return to the spring loaded default position. * Forced idle mode-The ECM will perform the following actions: - Limit engine speed to idle by positioning the throttle position, or by controlling the fuel and spark if the throttle is turned off. - Ignore the accelerator pedal input. * Engine shutdown mode-The ECM will disable fuel and de-energize the throttle actuator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7918 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7919 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7920 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7921 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7922 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7923 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026B Date: April 07, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and information about retrieving calibrations on a Global A vehicle. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine, transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7924 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7925 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 7926 Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views > Page 7929 Engine Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7932 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7933 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7934 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7935 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7936 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7937 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7938 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7939 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7940 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7941 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7942 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7943 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7944 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7945 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7946 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7947 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7948 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7949 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7950 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7951 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7952 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7953 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7954 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7955 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7956 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7957 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7958 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7959 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7960 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7961 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7962 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7963 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7964 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7965 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7966 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7967 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7968 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7969 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7970 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7971 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7972 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7973 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7974 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7975 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7976 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7977 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7978 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7979 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7980 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7981 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7982 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7983 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7984 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7985 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7986 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7987 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7988 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7989 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7990 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7991 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7992 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7993 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7994 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7995 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7996 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7997 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7998 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7999 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8000 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8001 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8002 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8003 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8004 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8005 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8006 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8007 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8008 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8009 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8010 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8011 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8012 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8013 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8014 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8015 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8016 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8017 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8018 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8019 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8020 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8021 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8022 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8023 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8024 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8025 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8026 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8027 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8028 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8029 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8030 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8031 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8032 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8033 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8034 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8035 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8036 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8037 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8038 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8039 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8040 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8041 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8042 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8043 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8044 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8045 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8046 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8047 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8048 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8049 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8050 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8051 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8052 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8053 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8054 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8055 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8056 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8057 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8058 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8059 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Engine Control Module (ECM) X1 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8060 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8061 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 1 To 33) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8062 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 34 To 73) Engine Control Module (ECM) X3 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8063 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8064 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Powertrain Control Module and Electrostatic Discharge Notice Notice: Do not touch the connector pins or soldered components on the circuit board in order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the PCM. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8065 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The engine control module (ECM) is the control center of this system. The ECM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The ECM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the ECM. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: * The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. * The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. * The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. * The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. * When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. * When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8066 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Service of the engine control module (ECM) should normally consist of either replacement of the ECM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for ECM replacement, inspect the ECM first to see if the replacement is the correct part. If the ECM is faulty, remove the ECM and install the new service ECM. The new service ECM will not be programmed. You must program the new ECM. DTC P0602 indicates the EEPROM is not programmed or has malfunctioned. Notice: In order to prevent any possible electrostatic discharge damage to the ECM, do not touch the connector pins or the soldered components on the circuit board. Notice: Always turn the ignition off when installing or removing the ECM connectors in order to prevent damage to the components. Removal Procedure Important: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100 percent. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil. Record the remaining engine oil life, if required. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the left front inner fender brace. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. Disconnect the ECM electrical connectors (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8067 6. Remove the ECM from the air cleaner lower housing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the ECM to the air cleaner lower housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8068 2. Connect the ECM electrical connectors (2). 3. Install the air cleaner assembly. 4. Install the left front inner fender brace. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. 6. Program the new ECM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8072 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8073 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Fuel Vapors can collect while servicing fuel system parts in enclosed areas such as a trunk. To reduce the risk of fire and increased exposure to vapors: * Use forced air ventilation such as a fan set outside of the trunk. * Plug or cap any fuel system openings in order to reduce fuel vapor formation. * Clean up any spilled fuel immediately. * Avoid sparks and any source of ignition. * Use signs to alert others in the work area that fuel system work is in process. 1. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 2. Using two flat-bladed tools, carefully pull both locking tabs (1) outward while simultaneously lifting the level sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8074 3. Using a small bladed tool, push in the electrical terminals (1) while simultaneously pulling out. Installation Procedure 1. Push in the electrical terminals (1) and ensure the terminals are secure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8075 2. Carefully insert the level sensor until the locking tabs (1) snap into the locking position. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Tank Components 1 - Fuel Tank 2 - Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 3 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor 4 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8079 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8080 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8081 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Service Precautions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service Precautions Handling Idle Air Control Valve Notice Notice: If the IAC valve has been in service: DO NOT push or pull on the IAC valve pintle. The force required to move the pintle may damage the threads on the worm drive. Also, DO NOT soak the IAC valve in any liquid cleaner or solvent, as damage may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8089 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8090 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8091 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8092 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8093 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8094 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8095 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8096 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8097 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8098 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8099 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8100 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8101 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8103 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8104 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8105 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8106 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8107 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8108 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8109 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8110 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8111 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8112 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8113 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8114 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8115 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8116 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8117 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8118 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8119 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8120 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8121 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8122 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8123 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8124 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8125 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8126 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8127 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8128 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8129 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8130 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8131 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8132 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8133 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8134 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8135 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8136 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8137 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8138 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8139 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8140 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8141 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8142 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8143 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8144 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8145 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8146 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8147 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8148 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8149 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8150 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8151 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8152 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8153 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8154 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8155 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8156 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8157 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8158 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8159 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8160 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8161 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8162 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8163 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8164 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8165 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8166 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8167 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8168 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8169 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8170 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8171 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8172 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8173 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8174 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8175 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8176 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8177 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8178 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8179 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8180 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8181 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8182 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8183 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8184 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8185 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8186 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8187 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8188 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8189 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8190 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8191 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8192 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8193 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8194 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8195 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8196 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8197 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8198 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8199 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8200 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8201 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8202 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8203 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8204 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8205 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8206 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8207 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8208 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8209 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8210 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8211 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8212 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8213 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8214 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8215 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8216 Information Bus: Description and Operation Data Link Communications Description and Operation Circuit Description The communication among control modules is performed through the High speed GMLAN serial data circuits and the Low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The modules that need real time communication are attached to the High speed GMLAN network. The body control module (BCM) is the gateway between the high and low speed networks. Communication is necessary between the high and low speed serial data modules for the vehicle to start. Refer to Body Control System Description and Operation for more information about the gateway. Signal supervision is the process of determining whether an expected signal is being received or not. Some messages are sent on a periodic basis and are interpreted as a heartbeat of a device. If such a signal is lost, the signal supervision part of the software will set a no communication DTC (U code) against the missing device. This code is mapped on the Tech 2 screen as a code against the physical device. A lost communication DTC typically is set in modules other than the module with a communication failure. GMLAN High Speed Circuit Description The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speed up to 500 Kb/s. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 ohms resistors, one is internal to the engine control module (ECM) and the other is after the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM). The VCIM is considered a DLC termination point of the link although it does not contain the resistor and can be used as a diagnostic point. The high speed GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data (-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level. The idle level, which is approximately 2.5 volts, is considered recessive transmitted data and is interpreted as a logic 1. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds one volt to the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and subtracts one volt from the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) wire. GMLAN Low Speed Circuit Description The data link connector (DLC) allows a scan tool to communicate with the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate control modules. Under normal vehicle operating conditions, the speed of the buss is 33.33 Kb/s. This protocol produces a simple pulse train sent out over the GMLAN low speed serial data bus. When a module pulls the buss high, 5 volts, this creates a logic state of 0 on the buss. When the buss is pulled low, 0 volts, it is translated as a logic state of 1. To wake the control modules connected to the GMLAN low speed serial data buss, a high voltage wake up pulse is sent out over the buss, the voltage level of the pulse is +10 volts. Modules connected to the GMLAN low speed buss can be part of a virtual network as described in GMLAN High Speed Circuit Description above. The modules on the GMLAN low speed serial data buss are connected to the buss using SP 205 as the common connection sometimes called a star connector. Data Link Connector (DLC) The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16-cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: * Pin 1 GMLAN low speed communications terminal * Pin 4 Scan tool power ground terminal * Pin 5 Common signal ground terminal * Pin 6 High speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) terminal * Pin 14 High speed GMLAN serial data bus (-) terminal * Pin 16 Scan tool power, battery positive voltage terminal Serial Data Reference The scan tool communicates over the various busses on the vehicle. In order to avert misdiagnoses of No Communication with a specific module and to determine if a module is low or high speed, refer to Data Link References for a list of modules, the busses they communicate with, and the RPO codes for a specific module. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Data Link References Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Diagnostic Starting Point - Data Communications Diagnostic Starting Point - Data Communications Begin the system diagnosis with Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. The Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will provide the following information: * The identification of the control modules which are not communicating * The identification of any stored diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and their status. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle The use of the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle will identify the correct procedures to begin vehicle diagnosis. These must be performed before system DTC or symptom diagnosis. Data Link References Data Link References This table identifies which serial data link that a particular module uses for in-vehicle data transmission. Some modules may use more than one data link to communicate. Some modules may have multiple communication circuits passing through them without actively communicating on that data link. This table is used to assist in correcting a communication malfunction. For the description and operation of these serial data communication circuits refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8219 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptoms - Data Communications Symptoms - Data Communications Important: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables. 1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of the following are true: * There are no DTCs set. * The control modules can communicate via the serial data links. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to: * Body Control System Description and Operation * Data Link Communications Description and Operation Visual/Physical Inspection * Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems. * Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom. Intermittent Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Symptom List Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: * Scan Tool Does Not Power Up * Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device * Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8220 Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The high speed GMLAN serial data circuits must be operational for the vehicle to start due to body control module (BCM) and engine control module (ECM) communications. The vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) module and ECM exchange information using the BCM as the gateway module allowing communication between the high and low speed serial data buses. The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit must also be operational for vehicle starting. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses two 120 ohm terminating resistors that are in parallel with the high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits. One of the resistors is internal to the ECM and the other is either behind the left kick panel (w/o UE1) or in the rear compartment (UE1). Diagnostic Aids * Communication may be available between the BCM and the scan tool with the high speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to the BCM using both the high and low speed GMLAN systems. * Use the Data Link References to identify the high speed GMLAN serial data modules. * This test is used for a total high speed GMLAN communication failure. If only 1 module is not communicating and sets no DTC, ensure that the vehicle is equipped with the module, then use DTC U0100-U0299 for diagnostics. * An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate to set up the vehicle on the tool and then not communicate with the vehicle. When the scan tool is to the point of communicating with the vehicle, a message on the scan tool will indicate "no CANdi module detected" and will not communicate. * The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data bus. The following conditions may cause a total loss of high speed GMLAN data communication: - A short between high speed GMLAN (+) and high speed GMLAN (-) circuits - Any of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits shorted to ground or voltage - A module internal malfunction that causes a short to voltage or ground on the high speed GMLAN circuits Circuit/System Testing 1. Test for less than 1.0 ohm of resistance between the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for open/high resistance. 2. Remove the terminator resistor. 3. Test for 110-130 ohms of resistance between the terminals of the resistor. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the resistor. 4. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X 3 of the BCM. 5. Ignition ON, test for less than 1 volt between the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit of the DLC terminal 6 and ground, and terminal 14 and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. 6. Test for infinite resistance between the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit of the DLC terminal 6 and ground, and terminal 14 and ground. ^ If less than the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. 7. Test for infinite resistance between the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits of the DLC terminal 6 and 14. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8221 ^ If less than the specified value, test the serial data circuits for a short between them. 8. Test for less than 2 ohms of resistance in the GMLAN serial data circuit between the DLC terminal 6 and BCM terminal 16. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the GMLAN serial data circuit for open/high resistance. 9. Ignition OFF, connect the terminator resistor, and disconnect the harness connector X 4 of the BCM. 10. Verify a test lamp illuminates between each ground circuit terminal of the BCM listed below and B+. * X 3 terminal 1 * X 3 terminal 5 * X 4 terminal 9 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 11. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal of the BCM listed below and ground. * X 4 terminal 1 * X 4 terminal 3 * X 4 terminal 4 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for an open/high resistance or short to ground. 12. Connect the harness connectors of the BCM. 13. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector of the ECM as listed: * RPO LS4 - X3 * RPO LZE, LZ4 or LZ8 - X1 14. Attempt to communicate with the BCM. Communication should not be available. ^ If communication is established, replace the ECM. 15. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector of the TCM. 16. Attempt to communicate with the BCM. Communication should not be available. ^ If communication is established, test the serial data circuits for a short between the circuits, short to voltage, or a short to ground between the TCM and the ECM. If the circuits test normal, replace the TCM. 17. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector of the EBCM, if equipped. Attempt to communicate with the BCM. Communication should not be available. ^ If communication is established, test the serial data circuits for a short between the circuits, short to voltage, or a short to ground between the EBCM and the TCM. If the circuits test normal, replace the EBCM. 18. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X3 of the BCM. 19. Ignition ON, test for less than 1 volt between the serial data circuits of BCM terminal 8 and ground, and between BCM terminal 9 and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the circuit for a short to voltage. 20. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuits of BCM terminal 8 and ground, and between BCM terminal 9 and ground. ^ If less than the specified value, test the circuit for a short to ground. 21. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuits of BCM terminal 8 terminal 9. ^ If less than the specified value, test the serial data circuits for a short between them. 22. If the circuits test normal, replace the BCM. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8222 * GMLAN Wiring Repairs. Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description Modules connected to the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the modules when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit must be operational for the vehicle to start so the vehicle theft deterrent (VTD) module and body control module (BCM) can communicate. The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit uses JX205 as the common connection between the modules and the data link connector (DLC). Diagnostic Aids * Use the Data Link References to identify the low speed GMLAN serial data modules. * This test is used for a total low speed GMLAN communication failure. If only 1 module is not communicating and sets no DTC, ensure that the vehicle is equipped with the module, then use DTC U0100-U0299 for diagnostics. * An open in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit between the splice pack and a module will only effect the specific module. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for the module effected, and the other modules will still communicate. * An open in the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate to set up the vehicle on the tool and then not communicate with the vehicle. When the scan tool is to the point of communicating with the vehicle, a message on the scan tool will indicate "no CANdi module detected" and will not communicate. The vehicle modules will still communicate, and the vehicle will start. * An open between the DLC and JX205 will only effect the communication with the scan tool. The vehicle modules will still communicate, and the vehicle will start. * The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit. The following conditions may cause a total loss of low speed GMLAN data communication: - The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit shorted to ground or voltage. - A module internal malfunction that causes a short to voltage or ground on the low speed GMLAN circuit. Circuit/System Testing Low Speed GMLAN Initial Test 1. Test for less than 1 ohm of resistance between the DLC ground circuit terminal 5 and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for open/high resistance. 2. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector (splice pack comb) at JX205. Test for infinite resistance between the following JX205 serial data circuit terminals and ground. * Terminal A * Terminal B Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8223 ^ If less than the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. 3. Test for less than 0.1 volt between the following JX205 serial data circuit terminals and ground. * Terminal A * Terminal B ^ If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. 4. Test for less than 1 ohm of resistance on the serial data circuit between terminal A of JX205 and terminal 1 of the DLC. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for open/high resistance. 5. Ignition OFF, install a 3-amp fused jumper wire between terminal A and terminal F of JX205. Attempt to communicate with the inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module (SDM). Communication should be available. ^ If no communication is established, refer to SDM Serial Data Circuit Test. Important: After each connection, cycle the ignition key off for 5 seconds, then ON before attempting to establish communication. 6. Ignition OFF, with the jumper wire still attached to terminal A, individually move the other end of the jumper wire to each of the terminals listed below and attempt to communicate with the applicable module. Communications should be available with each module listed. * Terminal D, radio * Terminal G, instrument panel cluster (IPC) * Terminal H, remote control door lock receiver (RCDLR) * Terminal K, TDM * Terminal L, HVAC control module * Terminal M, BCM ^ If any module does not communicate, test the serial data circuit between the applicable module harness connector and the JX205 harness connector for a short to ground or a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the applicable module. SDM Serial Data Circuit Test Important: Ensure a 3-amp fused jumper wire is installed between terminal A and terminal F of JX205. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector of the inflatable restraint passenger presence system (PPS) module. Attempt to communicate with the SDM. Communication should not be available. ^ If communication is established, replace the PPS module. 2. Ignition OFF, disconnect harness connector X3 at the heated seat control module if equipped (KA1). Attempt to communicate with the SDM. Communication should not be available. ^ If communication is established, replace the heated seat control module. 3. Ignition OFF, disconnect harness connector X1 at the vehicle communication interface module (VCIM) if equipped (UE1). Attempt to communicate with the SDM. Communication should not be available. ^ If communication is established, replace the VCIM. 4. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Digital radio receiver (DRR) if equipped (U2K). Attempt to communicate with the SDM. Communication should not be available. ^ If communication is established, replace the DRR. 5. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the SDM. Test for infinite resistance between the following SDM serial data circuit terminals and ground. * Terminal 2 * Terminal 3 ^ If less than the specified value, test the serial data circuit for a short to ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8224 6. Ignition ON, test for less than 0.1 volt between the following SDM serial data circuit terminals and ground. * Terminal 2 * Terminal 3 ^ If greater than the specified range, test the serial data circuit for a short to voltage. 7. If the circuits test normal, replace the SDM. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * GMLAN Wiring Repairs. Scan Tool Does Not Power Up Scan Tool Does Not Power Up Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Diagnostic Fault Information Circuit/System Description The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following: * Scan tool B+ voltage at terminal 16 * Scan tool ground at terminal 4 * Common ground at terminal 5 Diagnostic Aids * The scan tool will power up with the ignition OFF. Some modules however, will not communicate unless the ignition is ON and the power mode master (PMM) module sends the appropriate power mode message. * If the B+ circuit, ground circuits, and connections of the DLC are functioning properly, the malfunction must be due to the scan tool/CANdi module. Circuit/System Testing 1. Test for less than 2.0 ohms between the ground circuits terminal 4 of the DLC and ground, and terminal 5 of the DLC and ground. ^ If greater than the specified range, test the ground circuit for an open/high resistance. 2. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 16 at the DLC and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the voltage supply circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. 3. If all circuits test normal, refer to the scan tool/CANdi module user guide. Repair Instructions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8225 Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8229 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8232 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8233 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8234 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8235 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8236 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8237 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8238 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8239 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8240 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8241 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8242 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8243 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8244 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8245 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8246 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8247 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8248 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8249 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8250 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8251 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8253 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8254 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8255 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8256 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8257 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8258 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8259 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8260 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8261 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8262 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8263 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8264 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8265 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8266 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8267 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8268 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8269 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8270 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8271 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8272 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8273 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8274 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8275 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8276 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8277 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8278 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8279 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8280 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8281 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8282 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8283 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8284 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8285 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8286 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8287 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8288 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8289 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8290 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8291 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8292 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8293 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8294 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8297 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8298 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8299 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8300 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8301 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8302 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8303 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8304 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8305 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8306 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8307 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8308 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8309 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8310 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8311 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8312 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8313 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8314 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8315 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8316 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8317 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8318 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8319 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8320 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8321 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8322 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8323 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8324 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8325 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8326 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8327 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8328 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8329 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8330 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8331 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8332 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8333 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8334 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8335 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8336 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8337 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8338 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8339 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8340 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8341 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8342 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8343 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8344 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8345 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8346 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8347 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8348 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8349 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8350 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8351 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8352 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8353 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8354 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8355 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8356 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8357 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8358 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8359 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8360 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8361 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8362 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8363 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8364 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8365 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8369 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8370 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description Ignition voltage is supplied to the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). The engine control module (ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. Circuit/System Verification Ignition ON, the MIL should turn ON and OFF when commanded with a scan tool. Circuit/System Testing 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the instrument panel cluster (IPC). 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the ignition circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal and the ignition circuit fuse is open, replace the IPC. 3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit and the ignition circuit. 4. Command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. The test lamp should turn ON and OFF when changing between the commanded states. ^ If the test lamp is always ON, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. ^ If the test lamp is always OFF, test the control circuit for a short to voltage or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 5. If all circuits test normal, replace the IPC. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Instrument Cluster Replacement (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Top of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8377 Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8378 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8379 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8380 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (714) from the intake manifold. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8381 1. Lubricate the MAP sensor grommet with clean engine oil, if required. 2. Install the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. 3. Install the MAP sensor (714). 4. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Top of Engine (LS4) Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8385 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8386 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8387 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Sensor Socket Removal Procedure 1. If necessary, remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 3. Using J 41712 , remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8388 1. Apply sealant to the threads of the oil pressure sensor. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Using J 41712 , install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 4. If necessary, install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Recalls Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 8397 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 8398 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 8404 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 8405 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 08-08-44-008A > Apr > 08 > Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting Radio Receiver: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-008A Date: April 25, 2008 Subject: XM Radio Does Not Retain Station Setting From Previous Key Cycle and Changes To Channel 1, The Preview Channel, at Vehicle Start-up (Replace Digital Radio Receiver Assembly) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave, Lucerne 2008 Cadillac DTS, Escalade Models, SRX 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Impala, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2008 GMC Sierra, Yukon Models 2008 Pontiac Torrent 2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008 Saturn VUE 2008 Suzuki XL-7 with XM Satellite Radio (RPO U2K) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the Suzuki XL-7 model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-008 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the XM radio does not retain the station setting from the previous key cycle and changes to channel 1 at vehicle start-up. After start-up, the XM radio will be on the preview channel 1. Cause A software anomaly in the Digital Radio Receiver Assembly may cause this condition. Correction Technicians are to replace the Digital Radio Receiver Assembly with an updated design part. Refer to the Digital Radio Receiver Replacement procedure in SI. Also refer to the Digital Radio Receiver Setup procedure in SI for additional information. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 08-08-44-008A > Apr > 08 > Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting > Page 8411 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 08-08-44-008A > Apr > 08 > Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting > Page 8417 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8418 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Underbody Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8419 1 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8422 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8423 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8424 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8425 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8426 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8427 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8428 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8429 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8430 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8431 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8432 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8433 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8434 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8435 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8436 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8437 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8438 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8439 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8440 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8441 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8442 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8443 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8444 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8445 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8446 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8447 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8448 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8449 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8450 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8451 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8452 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8453 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8454 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8455 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8456 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8457 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8458 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8459 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8460 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8461 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8462 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8463 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8464 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8465 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8466 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8467 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8468 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8469 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8470 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8471 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8472 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8473 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8474 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8475 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8476 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8477 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8478 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8479 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8480 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8481 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8482 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8483 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8484 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8485 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8486 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8487 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8488 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8489 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8490 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8491 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8492 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8493 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8494 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8495 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8496 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8497 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8498 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8499 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8500 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8501 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8502 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8503 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8504 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8505 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8506 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8507 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8508 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8509 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8510 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8511 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8512 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8513 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8514 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8515 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8516 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8517 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8518 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8519 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8520 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8521 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8522 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8523 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8524 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8525 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8526 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8527 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8528 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8529 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8530 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8531 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8532 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8533 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8534 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8535 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8536 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8537 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8538 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8539 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8540 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8541 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8542 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8543 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8544 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8545 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8546 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8547 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8548 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8549 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 (LS4) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8550 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 8553 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 8554 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 8555 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 8556 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor Notice Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 8557 Notice: Handle the oxygen sensors carefully in order to prevent damage to the component. Keep the electrical connector and the exhaust inlet end free of contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents on the sensor. Do not drop or mishandle the sensor. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Notice: Do not solder heated oxygen sensor wires. Soldering the wires will result in the loss of the air reference to the sensor. Refer to Engine Electrical for proper wire and connection repair techniques. Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Notice: The heated oxygen sensors each use a permanently attached pigtail and connector. Do not remove the pigtail from the heated oxygen sensor. Damage or removal of the pigtail or the connector affects proper operation of the heated oxygen sensor. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the oxygen sensor. Keep the in-line connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, the connector, or the terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, the terminals, or the connector is damaged. Proper oxygen sensor operation requires an external air reference. This external air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, the connectors, or the terminals results in the obstruction of the air reference and degrades the oxygen sensor performance. A dropped oxygen sensor is a bad oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Remove the intake manifold sight shield. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (1). 3. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the bank 1 sensor 1 from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is used on the HO2S threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 8560 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 1 sensor 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Install the CPA retainer (1). 5. Install the intake manifold sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 8561 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 3. Disconnect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Remove the bank 2 sensor 2 from the catalytic converter. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is use on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burns away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 8562 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with the anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 2 sensor 2 to the catalytic converter. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Install the CPA retainer. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-47-001A Date: June 14, 2010 Subject: Unable to Reprogram Body Control Module (BCM), BCM Reprogramming Did Not Complete - Revised Reprogramming Instructions Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2010 Cadillac CTS Wagon 2010 Chevrolet Camaro 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL, Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2010 GMC Terrain 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2009 Saturn VUE Refer to GMVIS Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-47-001 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Some technicians may experience an unsuccessful body control module (BCM) reprogramming event, when choosing the Reprogram ECU selection on the Service Programming System (SPS). The technician may also notice that when attempting to reprogram the BCM again after this incident has occurred, the BCM may not complete the programming event. This condition may be caused by the following: - A reprogramming event that was interrupted due to a lack of communication between the vehicle and the TIS2WEB terminal. - The vehicle experienced low system voltage during the reprogramming event. Important Do not replace the BCM for this condition. SPS Programming Process Selection Perform this procedure first. 1. If reprogramming has failed during the initial reprogramming event, back out of the SPS application completely. 2. Re-select SPS from the TIS2WEB terminal application. 3. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 4. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 8568 During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. BCM Still Fails to Reprogram If the BCM still fails to reprogram perform this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the ignition, and remove the key. 2. Remove the fuses that power up the following modules/components for a minimum of 2 minutes: - BCM - EBCM - ECM - IS LPS (located in the left IP fusebox) - TCM 3. Open and close the driver door. Allow enough time for the retained accessory power (RAP) to turn OFF. 4. Reinstall the fuses. 5. When selecting the Programming Process , choose Replace and Program ECU , even though a new BCM is NOT being installed. 6. Reprogram the BCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest calibration available on TIS2WEB. Refer to the SPS procedures in SI. When using a multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. When using a Tech 2(R) for reprogramming, ensure that it is updated with the latest software version. During programming, the battery voltage must be maintained within the proper range of 12-15 Volts. Only use the approved Midtronics(R) PSC 550 Battery Maintainer (SPS Programming Support Tool EL-49642) or equivalent during programming. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 8569 Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Body Controls - Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-08-47-004C Date: December 04, 2009 Subject: Information on Body Control Module (BCM) Grounds Models: 2006-2010 Buick Lucerne 2007-2010 Buick Enclave 2006-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Cadillac SRX 2008-2010 Cadillac CTS 2006-2008 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2010 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2008-2010 Chevrolet Express, Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia 2008-2010 GMC Savana 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008-2010 Saturn VUE 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models, model years and information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-47-004B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). The purpose of this bulletin is to inform dealers of an issue that could cause internal module damage to the Body Control Module (BCM). The BCM may be damaged when the module is supplied with battery power and the ground path is removed. You must remove the negative battery cable first before removing a BCM ground. Issue 1 Below is a list of vehicles and the components that the BCM ground path passes through. The negative battery cable must be removed when removing the components noted below. - 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 (Instrument panel electrical center) - 2008-2010 Saturn VUE (I/P splice pack) Issue 2 It is important to note when removing a ring terminal ground, splice pack connector, or inline harness connector for all the vehicles listed in the model section above, that it doesn't include a BCM ground path. You must remove the negative battery cable if you determine that it is a BCM ground path. As an example: If the BCM grounds become disconnected, internal damage to the BCM will occur. Other systems controlled by the BCM will also be affected, such as an inoperative or intermittent condition in one or more of the following systems: - Interior lighting will remain on or will not work - Exterior lighting will remain on or will not work - Remote keyless entry - Door locks - Power windows and mirrors - Remote vehicle start - Remote trunk release Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Controls - Unable To Reprogram Body Control Module > Page 8570 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8571 Body Control Module: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Near the Steering Column 1 - Instrument Panel Carrier 2 - Inflatable Restraint Steering Wheel Module 3 - Steering Column 4 Body Control Module (BCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8572 Body Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Body Control Module (BCM) X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8573 Body Control Module (BCM) X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8574 Body Control Module (BCM) X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8575 Body Control Module (BCM) X4 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8576 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8577 Body Control Module (BCM) X5 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8578 Body Control Module (BCM) X6 Body Control Module (BCM) X7 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8579 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8580 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Body Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-054B Date: November 18, 2010 Subject: Info - Non-GM Parts and Accessories (Aftermarket) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update to the new U.S. Fixed Operation Manager (FOM) and Canada Warranty Manager (WM) names. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-054A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). The recent rise and expansion of companies selling non-GM parts and accessories has made it necessary to issue this reminder to dealers regarding GM's policy on the use and installation of these aftermarket components. When a dealer is performing a repair under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, they are required to use only genuine GM or GM-approved parts and accessories. This applies to all warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. Parts and accessories advertised as being "the same" as parts manufactured by GM, but not sold through GM, do not qualify for use in warranty repairs, special policy repairs or any repairs paid for by GM. During a warranty repair, if a GM original equipment part is not available through GM Customer Care and Aftersales (GM CC&A;), ACDelco(R) distributors, other GM dealers or approved sources, the dealer is to obtain comparable, non-GM parts and clearly indicate, in detail, on the repair order the circumstances surrounding why non-GM parts were used. The dealer must give customers written notice, prior to the sale or service, that such parts or accessories are not marketed or warranted by General Motors. It should also be noted that dealers modifying new vehicles and installing equipment, parts and accessories obtained from sources not authorized by GM are responsible for complying with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Certain non-approved parts or assemblies, installed by the dealer or its agent not authorized by GM, may result in a change to the vehicle's design characteristics and may affect the vehicle's ability to conform to federal law. Dealers must fully understand that non-GM approved parts may not have been validated, tested or certified for use. This puts the dealer at risk for potential liability in the event of a part or vehicle failure. If a GM part failure occurs as the result of the installation or use of a non-GM approved part, the warranty will not be honored. A good example of non-authorized modification of vehicles is the result of an ever increasing supply of aftermarket devices available to the customer, which claim to increase the horsepower and torque of the Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines. These include the addition of, but are not limited to one or more of the following modifications: - Propane injection - Nitrous oxide injection - Additional modules (black boxes) that connect to the vehicle wiring systems - Revised engine calibrations downloaded for the engine control module - Calibration modules which connect to the vehicle diagnostic connector - Modification to the engine turbocharger waste gate Although the installation of these devices, or modification of vehicle components, can increase engine horsepower and torque, they may also negatively affect the engine emissions, reliability and/or durability. In addition, other powertrain components, such as transmissions, universal joints, drive shafts, and front/rear axle components, can be stressed beyond design safety limits by the installation of these devices. General Motors does not support or endorse the use of devices or modifications that, when installed, increase the engine horsepower and torque. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Refer to the latest version of Bulletin 09-06-04-026 (V8 Gas Engines) or 06-06-01-007 (Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines) for more information on dealer requirements for calibration verification. These same policies apply as they relate to the use of non-GM accessories. Damage or failure from the use or installation of a non-GM accessory will not be covered under warranty. Failure resulting from the alteration or modification of the vehicle, including the cutting, welding or disconnecting of the vehicle's original equipment parts and components will void the warranty. Additionally, dealers will NOT be reimbursed or compensated by GM in the event of any legal inquiry at either the local, state or federal level that Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8585 results from the alteration or modification of a vehicle using non-GM approved parts or accessories. Dealers should be especially cautious of accessory companies that claim the installation of their product will not void the factory warranty. Many times these companies have even given direction on how to quickly disassemble the accessory in an attempt to preclude the manufacturer from finding out that is has been installed. Any suspect repairs should be reviewed by the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), and in Canada by the Warranty Manager (WM) for appropriate repair direction. If it is decided that a goodwill repair is to be made on the vehicle, even with the installation of such non-GM approved components, the customer is to be made aware of General Motors position on this issue and is to sign the appropriate goodwill documentation required by General Motors. It is imperative for dealers to understand that by installing such devices, they are jeopardizing not only the warranty coverage, but also the performance and reliability of the customer's vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8586 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8587 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8588 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8589 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8590 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026B Date: April 07, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and information about retrieving calibrations on a Global A vehicle. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine, transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8591 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8592 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Aftermarket Accessory Usage > Page 8593 Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Engine Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views > Page 8596 Engine Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8599 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8600 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8601 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8602 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8603 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8604 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8605 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8606 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8607 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8608 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8609 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8610 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8611 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8612 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8613 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8614 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8615 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8616 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8617 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8618 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8619 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8620 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8621 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8622 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8623 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8624 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8625 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8626 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8627 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8628 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8629 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8630 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8631 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8632 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8633 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8634 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8635 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8636 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8637 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8638 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8639 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8640 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8641 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8642 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8643 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8644 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8645 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8646 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8647 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8648 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8649 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8650 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8651 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8652 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8653 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8654 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8655 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8656 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8657 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8658 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8659 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8660 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8661 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8662 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8663 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8664 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8665 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8666 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8667 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8668 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8669 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8670 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8671 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8672 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8673 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8674 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8675 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8676 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8677 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8678 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8679 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8680 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8681 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8682 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8683 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8684 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8685 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8686 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8687 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8688 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8689 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8690 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8691 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8692 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8693 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8694 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8695 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8696 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8697 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8698 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8699 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8700 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8701 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8702 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8703 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8704 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8705 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8706 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8707 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8708 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8709 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8710 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8711 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8712 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8713 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8714 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8715 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8716 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8717 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8718 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8719 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8720 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8721 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8722 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8723 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8724 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8725 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8726 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Engine Control Module (ECM) X1 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8727 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8728 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 1 To 33) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8729 Engine Control Module (ECM) X2 (LS4) (Pin 34 To 73) Engine Control Module (ECM) X3 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8730 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8731 Engine Control Module: Service Precautions Powertrain Control Module and Electrostatic Discharge Notice Notice: Do not touch the connector pins or soldered components on the circuit board in order to prevent possible electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to the PCM. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8732 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Engine Control Module Description The powertrain has electronic controls to reduce exhaust emissions while maintaining excellent driveability and fuel economy. The engine control module (ECM) is the control center of this system. The ECM monitors numerous engine and vehicle functions. The ECM constantly monitors the information from various sensors and other inputs, and controls the systems that affect vehicle performance and emissions. The ECM also performs the diagnostic tests on various parts of the system. The ECM can recognize operational problems and alert the driver via the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). When the ECM detects a malfunction, the ECM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). The problem area is identified by the particular DTC that is set. The control module supplies a buffered voltage to various sensors and switches. Review the components and wiring diagrams in order to determine which systems are controlled by the ECM. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Operation The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located in the instrument panel cluster. The MIL will display as either SERVICE ENGINE SOON or one of the following symbols when commanded ON: The MIL indicates that an emissions related fault has occurred and vehicle service is required. The following is a list of the modes of operation for the MIL: * The MIL illuminates when the ignition is turned ON, with the engine OFF. This is a bulb test to ensure the MIL is able to illuminate. * The MIL turns OFF after the engine is started if a diagnostic fault is not present. * The MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started if the control module detects a fault. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is stored any time the control module illuminates the MIL due to an emissions related fault. The MIL turns OFF after three consecutive ignition cycles in which a Test Passed has been reported for the diagnostic test that originally caused the MIL to illuminate. * The MIL flashes if the control module detects a misfire condition which could damage the catalytic converter. * When the MIL is illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated as long as the ignition is ON. * When the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition is cycled OFF and then ON. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8733 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module Replacement Service of the engine control module (ECM) should normally consist of either replacement of the ECM or electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for ECM replacement, inspect the ECM first to see if the replacement is the correct part. If the ECM is faulty, remove the ECM and install the new service ECM. The new service ECM will not be programmed. You must program the new ECM. DTC P0602 indicates the EEPROM is not programmed or has malfunctioned. Notice: In order to prevent any possible electrostatic discharge damage to the ECM, do not touch the connector pins or the soldered components on the circuit board. Notice: Always turn the ignition off when installing or removing the ECM connectors in order to prevent damage to the components. Removal Procedure Important: It is necessary to record the remaining engine oil life. If the replacement module is not programed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil life will default to 100 percent. If the replacement module is not programmed with the remaining engine oil life, the engine oil will need to be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) from the last engine oil change. 1. Using a scan tool, retrieve the percentage of remaining engine oil. Record the remaining engine oil life, if required. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the left front inner fender brace. 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. Disconnect the ECM electrical connectors (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8734 6. Remove the ECM from the air cleaner lower housing. Installation Procedure 1. Install the ECM to the air cleaner lower housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8735 2. Connect the ECM electrical connectors (2). 3. Install the air cleaner assembly. 4. Install the left front inner fender brace. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. 6. Program the new ECM. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8739 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8740 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8745 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8746 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8747 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 8752 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 8753 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8756 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8757 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8758 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8759 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8760 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8761 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8762 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8763 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8764 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8765 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8766 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8767 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8768 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8769 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8770 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8771 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8772 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8773 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8774 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8775 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8776 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8777 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8778 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8779 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8780 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8781 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8782 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8783 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8784 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8785 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8786 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8787 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8788 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8789 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8790 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8791 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8792 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8793 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8794 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8795 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8796 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8797 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8798 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8799 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8800 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8801 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8802 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8803 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8804 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8805 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8806 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8807 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8808 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8809 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8810 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8811 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8812 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8813 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8814 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8815 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8816 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8817 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8818 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8819 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8820 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8821 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8822 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8823 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8824 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8825 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8826 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8827 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8828 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8829 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8830 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8831 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8832 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8833 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8834 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8835 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8836 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8837 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8838 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8839 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8840 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8841 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8842 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8843 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8844 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8845 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8846 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8847 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8848 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8849 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8850 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8851 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8852 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8853 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8854 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8855 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8856 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8857 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8858 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8859 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8860 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8861 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8862 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8863 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8864 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8865 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8866 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8867 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8868 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8869 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8870 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8871 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8872 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8873 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8874 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8875 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8876 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8877 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8878 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8879 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8880 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8881 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8882 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8883 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8884 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8885 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Battery Current Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 8890 Battery Current Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8891 Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8892 Battery Current Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Current Sensor Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 2. Remove the positive and negative battery cable. 3. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 4. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 5. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8893 Installation Procedure Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the battery prior to installation. 1. Slide the NEW battery current sensor (1) up onto the battery cable. 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 3. Install the positive and negative battery cable. 4. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8899 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8900 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8901 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8902 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8903 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8904 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8905 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8906 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8907 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8908 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8909 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8910 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8911 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8912 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8913 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8914 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8915 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8916 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8919 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8920 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8921 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8922 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8923 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8924 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8925 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8926 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8927 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8928 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8929 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8930 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8931 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8932 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8933 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8934 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8935 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8936 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8937 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8938 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8939 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8940 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8941 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8942 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8943 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8944 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8945 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8946 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8947 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8948 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8949 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8950 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8951 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8952 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8953 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8954 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8955 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8956 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8957 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8958 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8959 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8960 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8961 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8962 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8963 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8964 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8965 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8966 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8967 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8968 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8969 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8970 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8971 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8972 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8973 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8974 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8975 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8976 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8977 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8978 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8979 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8980 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8981 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8982 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8983 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8984 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8985 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8986 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8987 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8988 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8989 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8990 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8991 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8992 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8993 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8994 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8995 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8996 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8997 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8998 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8999 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9000 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9001 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9002 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9003 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9004 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9005 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9006 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9007 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9008 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9009 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9010 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9011 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9012 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9013 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9014 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9015 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9016 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9017 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9018 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9019 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9020 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9021 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9022 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9023 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9024 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9025 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9026 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9027 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9028 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Customer Interest Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9037 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9038 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9039 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9040 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9046 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9047 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9048 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 9049 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9050 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9051 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9052 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. 1. Drain the cooling system below the level of the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the ECT sensor. Installation Procedure Notice: Replacement components must be the correct part number for the application. Components requiring the use of the thread locking compound, lubricants, corrosion inhibitors, or sealants are identified in the service procedure. Some replacement components may come with these coatings already applied. Do not use these coatings on components unless specified. These coatings can affect the final torque, which may affect the operation of the component. Use the correct torque specification when installing components in order to avoid damage. Notice: Use care when handling the coolant sensor. Damage to the coolant sensor will affect the operation of the fuel control system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9053 1. Coat the thread of the ECT sensor with sealer GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480), or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the ECT sensor. Tighten the sensor to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9059 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9060 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9061 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9062 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9063 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9064 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9065 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9066 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9067 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9068 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9069 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9070 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9071 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9072 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9073 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9074 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9075 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9076 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9077 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9078 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9079 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9080 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9081 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9082 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9083 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9084 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9085 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9086 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9087 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9088 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9089 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9090 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9091 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9092 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9093 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9094 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9095 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9096 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9097 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9098 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9099 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9100 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9101 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9102 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9103 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9104 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9105 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9106 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9107 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9108 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9109 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9110 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9111 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9112 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9113 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9114 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9115 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9116 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9117 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9118 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9119 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9120 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9121 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9122 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9123 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9124 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9125 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9126 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9127 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9128 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9129 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9130 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9131 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9132 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9133 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9134 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9135 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9136 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9137 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9138 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9139 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9140 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9141 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9142 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9143 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9144 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9145 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9146 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9147 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9148 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9149 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9150 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9151 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9152 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9153 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9154 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9155 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9156 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9157 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9158 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9159 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9160 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9161 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9162 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9163 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9164 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9165 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9166 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9167 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9168 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9169 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9170 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9171 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9172 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9173 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9174 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9175 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9176 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9177 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9178 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9179 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9180 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9181 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9182 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9183 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9184 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9185 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9186 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 9189 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 9190 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9194 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9195 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Level Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Fuel Vapors can collect while servicing fuel system parts in enclosed areas such as a trunk. To reduce the risk of fire and increased exposure to vapors: * Use forced air ventilation such as a fan set outside of the trunk. * Plug or cap any fuel system openings in order to reduce fuel vapor formation. * Clean up any spilled fuel immediately. * Avoid sparks and any source of ignition. * Use signs to alert others in the work area that fuel system work is in process. 1. Remove the fuel sender assembly. 2. Using two flat-bladed tools, carefully pull both locking tabs (1) outward while simultaneously lifting the level sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9196 3. Using a small bladed tool, push in the electrical terminals (1) while simultaneously pulling out. Installation Procedure 1. Push in the electrical terminals (1) and ensure the terminals are secure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9197 2. Carefully insert the level sensor until the locking tabs (1) snap into the locking position. 3. Install the fuel sender assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Fuel Tank Components 1 - Fuel Tank 2 - Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly 3 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor 4 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9201 1 - Fuel Line Quick Connector 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Base Plate 4 - Fuel Strainer 5 - Fuel Level Sensor 6 - Springs 7 - Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9202 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9203 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 9208 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 9209 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9210 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9211 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9212 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9216 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9219 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9220 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9221 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9222 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9223 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9224 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9225 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9226 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9227 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9228 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9229 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9230 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9231 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9232 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9233 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9234 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9235 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9236 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9237 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9238 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9239 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9240 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9241 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9242 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9243 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9244 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9245 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9246 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9247 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9248 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9249 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9250 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9251 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9252 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9253 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9254 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9255 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9256 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9257 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9258 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9259 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9260 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9261 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9262 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9263 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9264 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9265 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9266 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9267 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9268 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9269 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9270 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9271 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9272 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9273 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9274 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9275 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9276 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9277 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9278 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9279 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9280 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9281 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9282 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9283 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9284 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9285 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9286 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9287 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9288 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9289 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9290 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9291 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9292 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9293 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9294 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9295 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9296 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9297 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9298 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9299 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9300 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9301 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9302 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9303 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9304 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9305 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9306 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9307 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9308 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9309 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9310 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9311 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9312 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9313 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9314 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9315 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9316 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9317 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9318 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9319 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9320 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9321 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9322 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9323 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9324 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9325 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9326 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9327 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9328 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9329 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9330 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9331 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9332 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9333 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9334 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9335 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9336 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9337 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9338 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9339 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9340 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9341 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9342 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9343 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9344 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9345 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9346 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9347 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9348 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9349 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9350 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9351 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9352 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Top of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9356 Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9357 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9358 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9359 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Disconnect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAP sensor (714) from the intake manifold. 4. Remove the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9360 1. Lubricate the MAP sensor grommet with clean engine oil, if required. 2. Install the MAP sensor grommet (715), if required. 3. Install the MAP sensor (714). 4. Connect the MAP sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Top of Engine (LS4) Top Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 8 2 - Fuel Injector 8 3 - Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve 4 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 5 - Throttle Body 6 - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor 7 - Fuel Injector 7 8 - Ignition Coil 7 9 - Fuel Injector 5 10 - Ignition Coil 5 11 - Fuel Injector 3 12 - Ignition Coil 3 13 - Fuel Injector 1 14 - Ignition Coil 1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9364 15 - Fuel Injector 2 16 - Ignition Coil 2 17 - Fuel Injector 4 18 - Ignition Coil 4 19 - Fuel Injector 6 20 - Ignition Coil 6 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9365 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9366 Oil Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor and/or Switch Replacement Tools Required J 41712 Oil Pressure Sensor Socket Removal Procedure 1. If necessary, remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 3. Using J 41712 , remove the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9367 1. Apply sealant to the threads of the oil pressure sensor. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Using J 41712 , install the oil pressure sensor (706) and washer (707). Tighten the sensor to 35 N.m (26 lb ft). 3. Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector (4). 4. If necessary, install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 9376 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 9377 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Oxygen Sensor: Recalls Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor Subject: Service Update for Inventory Vehicles Only-Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor Inspect/Replace - Expires September 30, 2007 # 07178 - (07/09/2007) Models: 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo 2008 Chevrolet Impala THIS SERVICE UPDATE INVOLVED VEHICLES IN DEALER INVENTORY ONLY AND WILL EXPIRE SEPTEMBER 30, 2007. Purpose This bulletin provides a service procedure to inspect and, if necessary, replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor on certain 2007 Chevrolet Impala, Monte Carlo; and 2008 Chevrolet Impala vehicles. These vehicles may have been built with an incorrect Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. This service procedure should be completed on involved vehicles currently in dealership inventory as soon as possible, but no later than September 30, 2007 at which time this bulletin will expire. Vehicles Involved Parts Information Parts required to complete this service update are to be obtained from General Motors Service and Parts Operations (GMSPO). Please refer to your "involved vehicles listing" before ordering parts. Normal orders should be placed on a DRO = Daily Replenishment Order. In an emergency situation, parts should be ordered on a CSO = Customer Special Order. Important: It is estimated that after Inspection less than 1% of involved vehicles will require a Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor replacement. Parts should only be ordered when the Inspection determines that it is necessary to replace the Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Service Procedure Post Catalyst 02 Sensor Inspection and Replacement Procedure Important: 2007 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Delphi" brand, P/N 12570149, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. 2008 model year Chevrolet vehicles should be equipped with the "Denso" brand, P/N 12608662, Post Catalyst Oxygen (02) Sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 9383 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Inspect the heated oxygen sensor bank 1 sensor 2 by pulling back the oxygen sensor protective sleeve (1). The wires should be the following colors: - Delphi P/N 12570149 - Used on Model Year 2007, Brown (2), Purple (1) and Tan (1). - Denso P/N 12608662 - Used on Model Year 2008, Black (2), White (1), and Blue (1). 3. If the inspection identifies that the vehicle was built with the incorrect sensor, replace bank 1 sensor 2 with the correct sensor as mentioned above. Refer to step 5 for the sensor replacement procedure, if necessary. 4. If the vehicle was built with the correct sensor, ensure that the protective sleeve is restored to its original position and lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 6. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 7. Remove the sensor from the catalytic converter. 8. Install the correct sensor as mentioned above to the catalytic converter. Tighten Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb-ft). 9. Connect the bank 1 sensor 2 electrical connector. 10. Install the CPA retainer. 11. Lower the vehicle. Claim Information For vehicles repaired under this service update, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07178 > Jul > 07 > Campaign - Inspect/Replace Post-Catalyst O2 Sensor > Page 9384 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up Lifter / Lash Adjuster: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-01-007C Date: February 09, 2011 Subject: Active Fuel Management (AFM) Engine, Valve Lifter Tick Noise at Start Up When Engine Has Been Off for 2 Hours or More (Evaluate Noise and/or Replace Valve Lifters) Models: 2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2007 Cadillac Escalade Built Prior to April 1, 2006 with 6.2L Engine RPO L92 (These engines were built with AFM Hardware but the AFM system was disabled) 2010-2011 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala 2007-2011 Chevrolet Avalanche, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer, TrailBlazer EXT 2010-2011 Chevrolet Camaro SS 2007-2011 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon Denali, Yukon XL, Yukon XL Denali 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with AFM (Active Fuel Management) and V8 Engine RPO L76, L94, L99, LC9, LFA, LH6, LMG, LS4, LY5 or LZ1 Attention: This bulletin only applies to the AFM V8 engines listed above. It DOES NOT apply to Non-AFM Engines. If you are dealing with a Non-AFM engine that is experiencing a similar noise, please refer to Engine Mechanical > Diagnostic Information and Procedures > Symptoms in SI. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-01-007B (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on an engine valve lifter tick noise that occurs after the engine has been shut off for at least two hours. The tick noise may last from two seconds to ten minutes. Cause This condition may be caused by any of the following: - Aerated oil in the valve lifter body, resulting in the valve lifter being unable to purge the air quickly. - A low engine oil level or incorrect oil viscosity. - Dirty or contaminated oil. - A low internal valve lifter oil reservoir level. - Debris in the valve lifter. - A high valve lifter leak down rate. Correction If the SI diagnostics do not isolate the cause of this valve lifter tick noise and normal oil pressure is noted during the concern, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the engine oil condition and level. Refer to Owner Manual > Service and Appearance Care > Checking Things Under the Hood > Description and Operation > Engine Oil in SI. ‹› If the engine oil is more than one quart low, an incorrect oil viscosity is being used or if poor quality/contamination is observed, change the oil and filter. Note Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 9390 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 10-06-01-007C > Feb > 11 > Engine - Valve Lifter Tick Noise At Start Up > Page 9396 Allow at least a two hour soak time between engine OFF and start up when evaluating the tick noise. 2. Start the engine and evaluate the valve lifter tick noise. ‹› If the valve lifter tick noise is still present, replace all 16 valve lifters. Refer to Valve Lifter Replacement in SI. Parts Information Note A V8 AFM engine requires 8 AFM lifters and 8 non-AFM lifters for a total of 16 lifters. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9397 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Underbody Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9398 1 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9401 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9402 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9403 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9404 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9405 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9406 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9407 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9408 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9409 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9410 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9411 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9412 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9413 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9415 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9416 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9417 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9418 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9419 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9420 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9421 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9422 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9423 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9424 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9425 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9426 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9427 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9428 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9429 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9430 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9431 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9432 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9433 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9434 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9435 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9436 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9437 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9438 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9439 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9440 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9441 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9442 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9443 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9444 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9445 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9446 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9447 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9448 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9449 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9450 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9451 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9452 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9453 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9454 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9455 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9456 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9457 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9458 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9459 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9460 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9461 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9462 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9463 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9464 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9465 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9466 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9467 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9468 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9469 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9470 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9471 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9472 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9473 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9474 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9475 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9476 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9477 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9478 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9479 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9480 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9481 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9482 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9483 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9484 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9485 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9486 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9487 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9488 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9489 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9490 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9491 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9492 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9493 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9494 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9495 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9496 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9497 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9498 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9499 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9500 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9501 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9502 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9503 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9504 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9505 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9506 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9507 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9508 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9509 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9510 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9511 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9512 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9513 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9514 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9515 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9516 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9517 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9518 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9519 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9520 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9521 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9522 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9523 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9524 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9525 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9526 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9527 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9528 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 (LS4) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9529 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 9532 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 9533 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 9534 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 9535 Oxygen Sensor: Service Precautions Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: Do not remove the pigtail from either the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) or the oxygen sensor (O2S). Removing the pigtail or the connector will affect sensor operation. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the HO2S. Keep the in-line electrical connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, connector or terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged. This external clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors, or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degraded sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor causing poor performance. * Do not damage the sensor pigtail and harness wires in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Ensure the sensor or vehicle lead wires are not bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends or kinks could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire, where applicable. Vehicles that utilize the ground wired sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will cause poor engine performance. * Ensure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector in order to prevent damage due to water intrusion. The engine harness may be repaired using Packard's Crimp and Splice Seals Terminal Repair Kit. Under no circumstances should repairs be soldered since this could result in the air reference being obstructed. Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Silicon Contamination of Heated Oxygen Sensors Notice Notice: Contamination of the oxygen sensor can result from the use of an inappropriate RTV sealant (not oxygen sensor safe) or excessive engine coolant or oil consumption. Remove the HO2S and visually inspect the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream in order to check for contamination. If contaminated, the portion of the sensor exposed to the exhaust stream will have a white powdery coating. Silicon contamination causes a high but false HO2S signal voltage (rich exhaust indication). The control module will then reduce the amount of fuel delivered to the engine, causing a severe driveability problem. Eliminate the source of contamination before replacing the oxygen sensor. Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Excessive Force and Oxygen Sensor Notice Notice: The oxygen sensor may be difficult to remove when the engine temperature is below 48°C (120°F). Excessive force may damage threads in the exhaust manifold or the exhaust pipe. Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Resistance Learn Reset Notice Notice: When replacing the HO2S perform the following: * A code clear with a scan tool, regardless of whether or not a DTC is set * HO2S heater resistance learn reset with a scan tool, where available Perform the above in order to reset the HO2S resistance learned value and avoid possible HO2S failure. Oxygen Sensor Notice Oxygen Sensor Notice Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice > Page 9536 Notice: Handle the oxygen sensors carefully in order to prevent damage to the component. Keep the electrical connector and the exhaust inlet end free of contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents on the sensor. Do not drop or mishandle the sensor. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Wire Repair Notice Notice: Do not solder heated oxygen sensor wires. Soldering the wires will result in the loss of the air reference to the sensor. Refer to Engine Electrical for proper wire and connection repair techniques. Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Heated Oxygen Sensor Pigtail Notice Notice: The heated oxygen sensors each use a permanently attached pigtail and connector. Do not remove the pigtail from the heated oxygen sensor. Damage or removal of the pigtail or the connector affects proper operation of the heated oxygen sensor. Handle the oxygen sensor carefully. Do not drop the oxygen sensor. Keep the in-line connector and the louvered end free of grease, dirt, or other contaminants. Do not use cleaning solvents of any type. Do not repair the wiring, the connector, or the terminals. Replace the oxygen sensor if the pigtail wiring, the terminals, or the connector is damaged. Proper oxygen sensor operation requires an external air reference. This external air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, the connectors, or the terminals results in the obstruction of the air reference and degrades the oxygen sensor performance. A dropped oxygen sensor is a bad oxygen sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Remove the intake manifold sight shield. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (1). 3. Disconnect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the bank 1 sensor 1 from the exhaust manifold. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is used on the HO2S threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burn away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 9539 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 1 sensor 1 to the exhaust manifold. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 1 sensor 1 electrical connector (2). 4. Install the CPA retainer (1). 5. Install the intake manifold sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 9540 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 2 Removal Procedure Notice: Refer to Heated Oxygen and Oxygen Sensor Notice. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer. 3. Disconnect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Remove the bank 2 sensor 2 from the catalytic converter. Installation Procedure Important: A special anti-seize compound is use on the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) threads. The compound consists of liquid graphite and glass beads. The graphite tends to burns away, but the glass beads remain, making the sensor easier to remove. New or service replacement sensors already have the compound applied to the threads. If the sensor is removed from an exhaust component and if for any reason the sensor is to be reinstalled, the threads must have anti-seize compound applied before reinstallation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor Replacement - Bank 1 Sensor 1 > Page 9541 1. If re-installing the old sensor, coat the threads with the anti-seize compound P/N 12377953, or equivalent. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the bank 2 sensor 2 to the catalytic converter. Tighten the sensor to 42 N.m (31 lb ft). 3. Connect the bank 2 sensor 2 electrical connector. 4. Install the CPA retainer. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9546 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9547 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9548 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9549 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9550 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9551 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9552 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9553 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9554 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9555 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9556 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9557 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9558 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9559 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9560 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9561 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9562 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9563 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9564 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9565 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9566 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9567 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9569 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9570 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9571 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9572 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9573 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9574 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9575 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9576 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9577 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9578 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9579 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9580 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9581 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9582 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9583 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9584 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9585 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9586 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9587 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9588 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9589 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9590 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9591 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9592 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9593 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9594 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9595 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9596 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9597 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9598 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9599 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9600 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9601 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9602 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9603 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9604 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9605 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9606 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9607 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9608 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9609 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9610 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9611 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9612 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9613 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9614 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9615 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9616 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9617 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9618 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9619 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9620 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9621 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9622 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9623 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9624 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9625 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9626 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9627 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9628 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9629 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9630 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9631 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9632 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9633 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9634 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9635 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9636 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9637 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9638 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9639 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9640 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9641 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9642 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9643 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9644 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9645 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9646 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9647 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9648 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9649 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9650 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9651 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9652 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9653 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9654 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9655 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9656 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9657 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9658 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9659 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9660 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9661 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9662 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9663 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9664 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9665 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9666 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9667 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9668 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9669 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9670 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9671 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9672 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 9677 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9678 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9679 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 4. Remove the VSS bolt (9). 5. Remove the VSS (10) from the extension case. 6. Remove the O-ring (11) from the VSS (10). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9680 1. Install the O-ring (11) to the VSS (10). 2. Install the VSS (10). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the VSS bolt (9). Tighten the bolt (9) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 4. Connect the VSS electrical connector. 5. Install the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9685 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9686 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9687 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9688 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9689 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9690 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9691 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9692 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9693 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9694 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9695 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9696 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9697 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9698 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9699 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9700 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9701 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9702 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9703 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9704 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9705 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9706 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9707 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9708 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9709 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9710 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9711 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9712 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9713 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9714 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9715 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9716 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9717 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9718 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9719 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9720 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9721 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9722 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9723 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9724 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9725 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9726 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9727 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9728 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9729 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9730 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9731 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9732 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9733 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9734 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9735 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9736 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9737 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9738 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9739 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9740 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9741 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9742 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9743 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9744 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9745 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9746 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9747 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9748 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9749 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9750 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9751 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9752 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9753 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9754 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9755 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9756 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9757 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9758 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9759 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9760 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9761 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9762 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9763 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9764 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9765 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9766 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9767 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9768 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9769 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9770 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9771 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9772 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9773 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9774 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9775 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9776 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9777 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9778 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9779 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9780 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9781 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9782 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9783 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9784 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9785 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9786 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9787 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9788 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9789 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9790 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9791 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9792 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9793 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9794 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9795 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9796 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9797 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9798 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9799 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9800 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9801 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9802 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9803 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9804 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9805 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9806 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9807 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9808 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9809 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9810 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9811 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9817 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9818 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9819 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9820 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9821 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9822 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9823 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9824 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9825 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9826 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9827 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9828 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9829 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9830 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9831 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9832 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9833 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9834 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9835 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9836 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9837 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9838 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9839 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9840 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9841 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9842 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9843 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9844 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9845 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9846 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9847 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9848 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9849 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9850 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9851 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9852 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9853 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9854 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9855 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9856 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9857 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9858 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9859 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9860 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9861 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9862 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9863 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9864 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9865 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9866 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9867 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9868 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9869 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9870 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9871 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9872 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9873 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9874 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9875 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9876 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9877 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9878 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9879 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9880 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9881 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9882 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9883 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9884 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9885 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9886 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9887 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9888 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9889 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9890 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9891 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9892 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9893 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9894 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9895 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9896 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9897 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9898 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9899 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9900 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9901 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9902 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9903 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9904 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9905 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9906 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9907 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9908 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9909 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9910 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9911 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9912 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9913 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9914 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9915 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9916 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9917 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9918 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9919 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9920 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9921 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9922 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9923 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9924 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9925 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9926 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9927 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9928 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9929 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9930 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9931 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9932 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9933 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9934 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9935 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9936 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9937 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9938 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9939 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9940 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9941 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9942 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9943 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9944 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9945 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Description and Operation Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) System Description To provide maximum fuel economy under light load driving conditions, the engine control module (ECM) will command the cylinder deactivation system ON to deactivate engine cylinders 1 and 7 on the left bank, and cylinders 4 and 6 on the right bank, switching to a V4 mode. The engine will operate on 8 cylinders, or V8 mode, during engine starting, engine idling, and medium to heavy throttle applications. When commanded ON, the ECM will determine what cylinder is firing, and begin deactivation on the next closest deactivated cylinder in firing order sequence. The Gen IV engine has a firing order of 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3. If cylinder number 1 is on its combustion event when cylinder deactivation is commanded ON, the next cylinder in the firing order sequence that can be deactivated is cylinder number 7. If cylinder number 5 is on its combustion event when cylinder deactivation is commanded ON, then the next cylinder in the firing order sequence that can be deactivated is cylinder number 4. Cylinder deactivation is accomplished by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open on the selected cylinders by using special valve lifters. The deactivation lifters contain spring loaded locking pins that connect the internal pin housing of the lifter to the outer housing. The pin housing contains the lifter plunger and pushrod seat which interfaces with the pushrod. The outer housing contacts the camshaft lobe through a roller. During V8 mode, the locking pins are pushed outward by spring force, locking the pin housing and outer housing together causing the lifter to function as a normal lifter. When V4 mode is commanded ON, the locking pins are pushed inward with engine oil pressure directed from the valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) assembly solenoids. When the lifter pin housing is unlocked from the outer housing, the internal pin housing will remain stationary, while the outer housing will move with the profile of the camshaft lobe, which results in the valve remaining closed. One VLOM solenoid controls both the intake and exhaust valves for each deactivating cylinder. There are 2 distinct oil passages going to each cylinder deactivation lifter bore, one for the hydraulic lash-adjusting feature of the lifter, and one for controlling the locking pins used for cylinder deactivation. Although both intake and exhaust valve lifters are controlled by the same solenoid in the VLOM, the intake and exhaust valves do not become deactivated at the same time. Cylinder deactivation is timed so that the cylinder is on an intake event. During an intake event, the intake cam lobe is pushing the valve lifter upwards to open the intake valve against the force of the valve spring. The force exerted by the valve spring is acting on the side of the lifter locking pins, preventing them from moving until the intake valve has closed. When the intake valve lifter reaches the base circle of the camshaft lobe, the valve spring force is reduced, allowing the locking pins to move, deactivating the intake valve. However, when cylinder deactivation is commanded ON, the exhaust valve for the deactivated cylinder is in the closed position, allowing the locking pins on the valve lifter to move immediately, and deactivate the exhaust valve. By deactivating the exhaust valve first, this allows the capture of a burnt air/fuel charge or exhaust gas charge in the combustion chamber. The capture of exhaust gases in the combustion chamber will contribute to a reduction in oil consumption, noise and vibration levels, and exhaust emissions when operating in V4 mode. During the transition from V8 to V4 mode, the fuel injectors will be turned OFF on the deactivated cylinders. The ignition system secondary voltage or spark is still present across the spark plug electrodes on the deactivated cylinders. If all enabling conditions are met and maintained for cylinder deactivation operation, the ECM calibrations will limit cylinder deactivation to a cycle time of 10 minutes in V4 mode, and then return to V8 mode for 1 minute. Switching between V8 and V4 mode is accomplished in less than 250 milliseconds, making the transitions seamless and transparent to the vehicle operator. The 250 milliseconds includes the time for the ECM to sequence the transitions, the response time for the VLOM solenoids to energize, and the time for the valve lifters to deactivate, all within 2 revolutions of the engine crankshaft. The cylinder deactivation system consists of the following components: * The VLOM assembly * Eight special valve lifters, 2 per deactivating cylinder * The engine oil pressure regulator valve for cylinder deactivation operation * Gen IV cylinder deactivation engine block * The ECM Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly The cylinder deactivation system uses an electro-hydraulic actuator device called the valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) assembly. The VLOM is bolted to the top of the engine valley, below the intake manifold assembly. The VLOM consists of 4 electrically operated Normally Closed Solenoids. Each solenoid controls the application of engine oil pressure to the intake and exhaust valve lifters on the cylinders selected to deactivate. Engine oil pressure is routed to the VLOM assembly from a passage on the rear of the cylinder block. All 4 VLOM solenoids are connected in parallel to a fused ignition 1 voltage circuit, supplied by the powertrain relay. The ground or control circuit for each solenoid is connected to the engine control module (ECM). When all enabling conditions are met for cylinder deactivation, the ECM will ground each solenoid control circuit in firing order sequence, allowing current to flow through the solenoid windings. With the coil windings energized, the solenoid valve opens, redirecting engine oil pressure through the VLOM into 8 separate vertical passages in the engine lifter valley. The 8 vertical passages, 2 per cylinder, are connected to the valve lifter bores of the cylinders to be deactivated. When vehicle-operating conditions require a return to V8 mode, the ECM will turn OFF the control circuit for the solenoids, allowing the solenoid valves to close. With the solenoid valves closed, engine oil pressure in the control ports is exhausted through the body of the Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9946 solenoids into the engine block lifter valley. The housing of the VLOM incorporates several bleeds in the oil passages to purge any air trapped in the VLOM or engine block. To control any contamination to the hydraulic circuits, a small replaceable oil screen is located in the VLOM oil inlet passage, below the oil pressure sensor. The oil pressure sensor is a 3-wire sensor which provides oil pressure information to the ECM. During service, use extreme care in keeping the VLOM assembly free of any contamination or foreign material. Engine Control Module (ECM) The engine control module (ECM) is responsible for the management and control of all engine functions. Each ECM comes equipped with a specific set of software/calibrations designed for that engine and vehicle application. The ECM will determine engine operating parameters, based upon information from a network of switches, sensors, modules and communication with other controllers located throughout vehicle. Internal to the ECM is an integrated circuit device called a low-side driver. The low-side driver is designed to operate internally, like an electronic switch. An individual low-side driver controls each valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) solenoid. When enabling conditions for V4 mode are met, the ECM will command the low-side driver to ground each VLOM solenoid control circuit, in firing order sequence. Internal to the low-side driver is a fault detection circuit, which monitors the solenoid control circuit for an incorrect voltage level. If an incorrect voltage level, such as an open, high resistance, or short to ground, is detected, the low-side driver, along with the fault detection circuit, will communicate the condition to the central processor in the ECM. The ECM will then command a return to V8 mode, set a corresponding DTC, and illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel. Cylinder Deactivation Inhibit Reasons Listed below are the powertrain conditions that will inhibit V4 mode, while operating under light load driving conditions: * Engine manifold vacuum low * Brake booster vacuum pressure low * Accelerator pedal position rate of increase too high, electronic throttle control * Accelerator pedal position too high, electronic throttle control * Ignition voltage out of range * Engine oil pressure out of range * Engine oil temperature out of range * Engine RPM out of range * Transmission gear incorrect * Transmission range incorrect * Transmission gear shift in progress * All cylinders activated via scan tool output control * Minimum time in V8 mode not met * Maximum V4 mode time exceeded * Engine oil aeration present * Decel fuel cutoff active * Fuel shut-off timer active * Minimum heater temp low, HVAC system * Reduced engine power active, electronic throttle control * Brake torque management active * Axle torque limiting active * Engine metal over temperature protection active * Catalytic converter over temperature protection active * Piston protection active, knock detected * Hot coolant mode active * Engine over speed protection active * Fault Active or Fault Pending-cylinder deactivation is disabled for the following faults: - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor - Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor - Vehicle Speed Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Engine Misfire Detected - Cylinder Deactivation Solenoid Driver Circuit The scan tool output control is used to deactivate half of the engine cylinders, V4 mode, by commanding all of the solenoids ON, or deactivate one cylinder switching to a V7 mode, by commanding ON one solenoid. Listed below are the powertrain conditions that will inhibit V4 mode, or V7 mode, with the engine running, while using the scan tool output control function: * Engine speed out of range Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9947 * Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor fault * Accelerator pedal position too high, electronic throttle control * Piston protection active, knock detected * Engine oil temperature out of range * Engine oil pressure out of range * Engine oil aeration present * Engine metal over temperature protection active * Accelerator pedal position rate of increase too high, electronic throttle control * Cylinder deactivation solenoid driver circuit fault * Engine coolant temperature sensor fault * Catalytic converter over temperature protection active * Brake booster vacuum pressure low * Brake Booster Vacuum Pressure Sensor Fault * Axle torque limiting active * Brake torque management active * Vehicle speed sensor fault * Engine coolant temperature too high * Engine not running * Vehicle speed not zero * Engine coolant temperature low * Reduced Engine Power Active, electronic throttle control * Transmission gear incorrect * Transmission range incorrect * Ignition voltage out of range * Maximum V4 mode time exceeded Listed below are the powertrain conditions that will inhibit a cylinder deactivation solenoid from being energized, with the ignition ON and the engine OFF, while using the scan tool output control function: * Engine speed not zero * Vehicle speed not zero * Transmission not in park or neutral * Ignition voltage out of range For the system description covering the hydraulic/mechanical system of cylinder deactivation, refer to Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) System Description. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9948 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit Description To provide maximum fuel economy under light load driving conditions, the engine control module (ECM) will command the valve lifter oil manifold (VLOM) solenoids ON, to deactivate engine cylinders 1 and 7 on the left bank, and cylinders 4 and 6 on the right bank. The VLOM consists of 4 electrically operated normally closed solenoids, which directs pressurized engine oil to 8 deactivating valve lifters. All 4 VLOM solenoids are connected in parallel to a fused ignition circuit supplied by the powertrain relay. The control circuit for each solenoid is connected to an individual low side driver internal to the ECM. When enabling conditions for V4 mode are met, the ECM will command each low side driver to turn ON, in engine firing order sequence. Diagnostic Aids The VLOM solenoids are assigned to the following engine cylinders: * Solenoid #1-Cylinder #1 * Solenoid #2-Cylinder #4 * Solenoid #3-Cylinder #6 * Solenoid #4-Cylinder #7 Circuit/System Verification 1. If any DTCs are set, then repair those DTC first. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle 2. Start and idle the engine. 3. Allow the engine to reach normal engine operating temperature. The engine should idle smoothly without any misfires. If the engine misfires, refer to DTC P0300-P0308. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0300 4. Monitor the cylinder deactivation system data parameters with a scan tool. 5. Road test the vehicle under light throttle and load conditions that will allow the ECM to command V4 mode. If all enabling conditions are met for cylinder deactivation, and if no internal engine hydraulic/mechanical fault conditions are present, the ECM will continue operation in V4 mode. ^ If the vehicle passes the Circuit/System Verification test, then review the active fuel management driving information in the Features and Controls section of the owners manual with the vehicle operator, or instruct the vehicle operator in the proper driving techniques to obtain V4 mode. ^ If the vehicle does not pass the Circuit/System Verification test, then review the cylinder deactivation inhibit reasons listed on the scan tool. Circuit/System Testing Electrical System Testing Ignition ON and the engine OFF, command each VLOM solenoid ON and OFF using the scan tool. Standing next to the engine compartment, you should be able to hear the solenoid energize and de-energize with each command. If you cannot hear each solenoid energize and de-energize, then refer to DTC P3401, P3425, P3441, or P3449. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P3425 Mechanical System Testing 1. Connect a vacuum gage to the EVAP vacuum tube fitting on the electronic throttle body. DO NOT use a compound pressure and vacuum gage. The vacuum gage on a hand held vacuum pump will work fine for this test. 2. Start the engine. Allow the engine to reach normal operation temperature. 3. With a scan tool, command each VLOM solenoid ON, one at a time. Each time a solenoid is command ON, you should observe a fluctuating drop of intake manifold vacuum, and a misfire on the cylinder that was deactivated. ^ If there is no fluctuating drop in engine vacuum, or the engine does not misfire, then refer to Cylinder Deactivation (Active Fuel Management) System Diagnosis. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9949 Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 9954 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9955 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9956 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 4. Remove the VSS bolt (9). 5. Remove the VSS (10) from the extension case. 6. Remove the O-ring (11) from the VSS (10). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9957 1. Install the O-ring (11) to the VSS (10). 2. Install the VSS (10). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the VSS bolt (9). Tighten the bolt (9) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 4. Connect the VSS electrical connector. 5. Install the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Air Injection Pump: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Pump (NU3) Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Pump Solenoid (NU3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9963 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Air Injection Pump Relay: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Pump Relay (NU3) Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Solenoid Relay (NU3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9967 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst Shield > Component Information > Service and Repair Catalyst Shield: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Heat Shield Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement See: Service and Repair 2. Remove the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) wiring harness from the clips on the catalytic converter heat shield. 3. Drill out the catalytic converter heat shield rivets. 4. Remove the catalytic converter heat shield. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Catalyst Shield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9972 1. Position the catalytic converter heat shield to the underbody. 2. Install NEW catalytic converter heat shield rivets. 3. Install the HO2S wiring harness from the clips on the catalytic converter heat shield. 4. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement See: Service and Repair Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9977 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Clean the evaporative emission (EVAP) connections and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the line in order the avoid possible system contamination. 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge solenoid electrical connector (1). 3. Disconnect the EVAP line (2) from the purge solenoid. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9978 4. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube from the solenoid. 5. Remove the EVAP canister purge solenoid from the bracket. Installation Procedure 1. Install the EVAP canister purge solenoid to the bracket. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9979 2. Connect the EVAP canister purge tube to the solenoid. 3. Connect the EVAP line (2) to the purge solenoid. 4. Connect the EVAP canister purge solenoid electrical connector (1). 5. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Canister Vent Valve: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9984 Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Clean the evaporative emission (EVAP) connections and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the line in order the avoid possible system contamination. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve from the EVAP emission canister hose. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9985 4. Remove the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve bracket bolt. 5. Remove the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve. Installation Procedure 1. Install the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve bracket bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Canister Vent Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9986 3. Connect the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve to the EVAP emission canister hose. 4. Connect the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve electrical connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Hoses/Pipes Replacement - Engine/Chassis Removal Procedure Important: Clean the evaporative emission (EVAP) connections and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the line in order the avoid possible system contamination. 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Remove the brake master cylinder and reposition. 4. Disconnect the EVAP (2) line from the purge solenoid. 5. Open the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 6. Remove the EVAP line from the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 7. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9990 8. Remove the fuel/brake line retainer bolt. 9. Remove the EVAP line from the retainer. 10. Remove the fuel/brake line push in retainer from the underbody. 11. Remove the EVAP line from the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9991 12. Remove the fuel/brake line retainer bolts. 13. Remove the EVAP line from the retainer. 14. Open the fuel/brake line retainer (1). 15. Remove the EVAP line from the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9992 16. Disconnect the EVAP (4) line from the fuel tank EVAP line (1). 17. Remove the EVAP line. Installation Procedure 1. Position the EVAP line. 2. Connect the EVAP (4) line to the fuel tank EVAP line (1). 3. Install the EVAP line to the retainer. 4. Close the fuel/brake line retainer (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9993 5. Install the EVAP line to the retainer. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Install the fuel/brake line retainer bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Install the EVAP line to the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9994 8. Install the fuel/brake line push in retainer to the underbody. 9. Install the EVAP line to the retainer. 10. Install the fuel/brake line retainer bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. Install the EVAP line to the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 13. Close the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9995 14. Connect the EVAP (2) line to the fuel rail. 15. Position and install the brake master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement. 16. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 17. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > System Information > Service Precautions Exhaust Gas Recirculation: Service Precautions Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Caution Caution: Avoid breathing fumes and swallowing EGR exhaust deposits when removing components for cleaning as bodily injury may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Hose/Pipe/Tube Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . 2. If removing the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) clean air tube perform the following: 1. Remove the PCV clean air tube from the air intake duct. 2. Remove the PCV clean air tube from the rocker arm cover. 3. Remove the PCV clean air tube. 3. If removing the PCV foul air tube perform the following: 1. Remove the PCV foul air tube from the intake manifold. 2. Remove the PCV foul air tube from the rocker arm cover. 3. Remove the PCV foul air tube. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10003 1. If installing the PCV foul air tube perform the following: 1. Install the PCV foul air tube. 2. Install the PCV foul air tube to the rocker arm cover. 3. Install the PCV foul air tube to the intake manifold. 2. If installing the PCV clean air tube perform the following: 1. Install the PCV clean air tube. 2. Install the PCV clean air tube to the rocker arm cover. 3. Install the PCV clean air tube to the air intake duct. 3. Install the engine sight shield. Refer to Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Air Injection Pump Relay: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Pump Relay (NU3) Secondary Air Injection (AIR) Solenoid Relay (NU3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10008 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Pressure: Technician Safety Information Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 10015 Fuel Pressure: Vehicle Damage Warnings Fuel Pressure Notice Notice: Do not allow the fuel pressure to exceed the specified value because damage to the fuel pressure regulator or the fuel pressure gage may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 10018 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 10019 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the fuel pump module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter and the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pump also supplies fuel to a venturi pump located on the bottom of the fuel pump module. The function of the venturi pump is to fill the fuel pump module reservoir. The fuel pressure regulator, a part of the fuel pump module, maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. Special Tools * CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage * J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Important: * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. You should hear the fuel pump turn ON and OFF. ^ If the fuel pump does not operate, refer to Fuel Pump Electrical Circuit Diagnosis. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH-48027. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. Circuit/System Testing Important: * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gage while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 10020 ^ If the fuel pressure is greater than the specified range, replace the fuel pump module. ^ If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 1. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Install the J 37287 between the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287. 4. Ignition ON, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH-48027. 5. Command the fuel pump relay ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, locate and replace the leaking fuel injector(s). ^ If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the fuel pump module. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 minutes. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the fuel pump module. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH-48027. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ^ If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 4. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Computers and Control Systems. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement * Fuel Injector Replacement * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Pressure Release: Procedures Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Remove the engine cover, if required. 3. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 6. Connect the CH-48027-3 (4) to the fuel rail service port. 7. Connect the CH-48027-2 (2) to the CH-48027-3 (4). 8. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 9. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 10. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 11. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10025 * The areas surrounding the connections Important: If relieving the fuel pressure for the fuel pressure gage installation and removal, it is NOT necessary to proceed with the following steps. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 12. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 13. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 14. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 15. Install the engine cover, if required. 16. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 3. Remove the engine cover, if required. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port and using a small flat-bladed tool, depress (open) the fuel rail test port valve. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 7. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 8. Install the engine cover, if required. 9. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10026 Fuel Pressure Release: Removal and Replacement Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10027 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Not supplied by manufacturer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10034 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10035 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10036 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube from the air inlet duct. 2. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. 3. Remove the air inlet duct from the throttle body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10041 4. Loosen the air inlet duct clamp at the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. 5. Remove the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Installation Procedure 1. Install the air inlet duct from the MAF/IAT sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the MAF/IAT sensor. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10042 3. Install the air inlet duct to the throttle body. 4. Tighten the air inlet duct clamp at the throttle body. Tighten the clamp to 3 N.m (27 lb in). 5. Connect the PCV tube to the air inlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Element Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 2. Release the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing cover. 4. Remove the air filter element. Installation Procedure 1. Install a NEW air filter element. 2. Install the air cleaner housing cover. 3. Engage the spring clamps on top of the air cleaner housing. 4. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 10050 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 10051 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10054 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10055 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10056 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10057 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10058 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10059 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10060 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10061 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10062 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10063 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10064 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10065 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10066 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10067 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10068 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10069 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10070 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10071 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10072 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10073 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10074 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10075 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10076 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10077 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10078 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10079 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10080 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10081 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10082 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10083 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10084 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10085 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10086 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10087 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10088 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10089 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10090 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10091 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10092 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10093 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10094 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10095 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10096 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10097 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10098 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10099 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10100 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10101 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10102 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10103 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10104 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10105 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10106 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10107 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10108 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10109 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10110 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10111 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10112 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10113 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10114 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10115 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10116 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10117 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10118 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10119 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10120 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10121 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10122 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10123 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10124 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10125 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10126 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10127 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10128 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10129 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10130 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10131 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10132 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10133 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10134 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10135 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10136 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10137 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10138 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10139 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10140 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10141 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10142 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10143 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10144 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10145 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10146 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10147 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10148 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10149 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10150 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10151 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10152 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10153 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10154 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10155 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10156 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10157 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10158 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10159 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10160 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10161 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10162 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10163 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10164 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10165 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10166 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10167 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10168 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10169 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10170 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10171 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10172 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10173 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10174 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10175 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10176 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10177 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10178 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10179 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10180 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10181 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10182 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10183 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-015 Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: General Motors' Position Regarding Use of E15 in Model Year 2007 and Newer Vehicles Models: 2007-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks General Motors' position regarding the Environmental Protection Agency announcement allowing the use of E 15 in 2007 and newer vehicles: - General Motors' remains focused on securing a safe and positive driving experience for our customers. GM believes that the waiver decision by the EPA regarding E 15 could lead to confusion for consumers as to what fuel their vehicle should use. In response, we will continue to encourage our customers to refer to their vehicle Owner Manual for proper fuel designation. The vehicle Owner Manual specifies that fuels containing more than 10 percent ethanol should not be used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel designation. - GM has the largest fleet of flex fuel vehicles on the road today (over 4 million in the U.S.) and these vehicles can safely use ethanol blends of up to 85 percent ethanol. So blends of E 15 (15 percent ethanol), as in the partial waiver announced, are appropriate for these vehicles. However, ethanol blends greater than E 10 should not be used in GM vehicles that do not have a flex fuel designation as they are not designed and certified to run on gasoline consisting of more than 10 percent ethanol-blend volume to avoid any unintended consequences, as per: their Owner Manual. - We believe biofuels, especially E 85 ethanol, are an effective near-term solution to reduce petroleum dependence and the carbon footprint of driving. As the global leader in producing vehicles designed to handle ethanol blends from E 0 to E 85, GM offers 19 flexible-fuel vehicles for the 2011 model year. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 10188 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 10189 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 10190 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 10191 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I Date: August 17, 2009 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards: - Chevron - Chevron-Canada - QuikTrip - Conoco Phillips 66 - 76 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 10192 - Shell - Shell-Canada - Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area. - MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri. - Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa. The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky. Aloha Petroleum - Tri-Par Oil Company - Turkey Hill Minit Markets - Texaco - Petro-Canada - Sunoco-Canada - Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers? On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi, BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 10193 Fuel: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - E85 Fuel Usage Precautions Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-035C Date: July 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Usage of E85 Fuels in GM Vehicles Models: 1997-2008 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 1997-2008 Isuzu NPR Commercial Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 model year and additional engines with E85 capability. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-035B (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Customer Interest in E85 Fuel As the retail price of gasoline increases, some locations in the country are seeing price differentials between regular gasoline and E85 where E85 is selling for substantially less than regular grade gasoline. One result of this is that some customers have inquired if they are able to use E85 fuel in non-E85 compatible vehicles. Only vehicles designated for use with E85 should use E85 blended fuel. E85 compatibility is designated for vehicles that are certified to run on up to 85% ethanol and 15% gasoline. All other gasoline engines are designed to run on fuel that contains no more than 10% ethanol. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Using E85 Fuels in Non-Compatible Vehicles General Motors is aware of an increased number of cases where customers have fueled non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85. Fueling non-FlexFuel designated vehicles with E85, or with fuels where the concentration of ethanol exceeds the ASTM specification of 10%, will result in one or more of the following conditions: Lean Driveability concerns such as hesitations, sags and/or possible stalling. SES lights due to OBD codes. Fuel Trim codes P0171 and/or P0174. Misfire codes (P0300). Various 02 sensor codes. Disabled traction control or Stability System disabled messages. Harsh/Firm transmission shifts. Fuel system and/or engine mechanical component degradation. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. If the dealer suspects that a non-FlexFuel designated vehicle brought in for service has been fueled with E85, the fuel in the vehicle's tank should be checked for alcohol content with tool J 44175. If the alcohol content exceeds 10% the fuel should be drained and the vehicle refilled with gasoline - preferably one of the Top Tier brands. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel - GM's Position on Use of E 15 in 2007 Newer M.Y. > Page 10194 Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. A complete list of GM's FlexFuel vehicles can be found in this Service Bulletin, or at www.livegreengoyellow.com. E85 Compatible Vehicles The only E85 compatible vehicles produced by General Motors are shown. Only vehicles that are listed in the E85 Compatible Vehicles section of this bulletin and/or www.livegreengoyellow.com are E85 compatible. All other gasoline and diesel engines are NOT E85 compatible. Use of fuel containing greater than 10% ethanol in non-E85 designated vehicles can cause driveability issues, service engine soon indicators as well as increased fuel system corrosion. Repairs to non-FlexFuel vehicles that have been fueled with E85 are not covered under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10195 Fuel: Specifications GASOLINE OCTANE Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle's acceleration may be slightly reduced, and you may notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. GASOLINE SPECIFICATIONS At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommends against the use of gasolines containing MMT. CALIFORNIA FUEL If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. GASOLINE ADDITIVES To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. In most cases, you should not have to add anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. FUELS IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty. To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution Fuel: Service Precautions Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution Caution: Gasoline or gasoline vapors are highly flammable. A fire could occur if an ignition source is present. Never drain or store gasoline or diesel fuel in an open container, due to the possibility of fire or explosion. Have a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher nearby. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution > Page 10198 Fuel: Service Precautions Actions to Take When Working with Fuel Caution Actions to Take When Working with Fuel Caution Caution: Fuel Vapors can collect while servicing fuel system parts in enclosed areas such as a trunk. To reduce the risk of fire and increased exposure to vapors: * Use forced air ventilation such as a fan set outside of the trunk. * Plug or cap any fuel system openings in order to reduce fuel vapor formation. * Clean up any spilled fuel immediately. * Avoid sparks and any source of ignition. * Use signs to alert others in the work area that fuel system work is in process. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10199 Fuel: Testing and Inspection Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Test Description Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector at the lowest point in the fuel injection system and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust or deterioration. Ethanol concentrations of greater than 10 percent in nonblended gasoline, or greater than 85 percent with E85 blended gasoline for flexible fuel applications, can cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or a no start, and may contribute to fuel system corrosion, deterioration of fuel system components, and a restricted fuel filter. Special Tools J 44175 Fuel Composition Tester System Verification The fuel sample should be drawn from the bottom of the tank so that any water present in the tank will be detected. The sample should be bright and clear. If the sample appears cloudy, or contaminated with water, as indicated by a water layer at the bottom of the sample, perform the Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure. If alcohol contamination is suspected, perform the Alcohol in Fuel Testing procedure. Alcohol in Fuel Testing with Special Tool 1. Test the fuel composition using J 44175 and Instruction Manual. 2. If water appears in the fuel sample, clean the fuel system. 3. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM in order to obtain the percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample. 4. If the nonblended gasoline fuel sample measures more than 15 percent ethanol, or if the E85 blended gasoline fuel sample measures more than 91 percent ethanol, add fresh regular gasoline to the vehicles's fuel tank. 5. Test the fuel composition. 6. If additional testing indicates that the ethanol percentage is still above 15 percent for a nonblended gasoline sample, drain and replace the vehicle's fuel. Refer to Fuel Tank Draining. If additional testing indicates that the E85 blended gasoline sample still measures above 91 percent, continue adding fresh, regular gasoline until the ethanol content is 85 percent or less. Alcohol in Fuel Testing without Special Tool 1. Using a 100 ml (3.38 oz) specified cylinder with 1 ml (0.034 oz) graduation marks, fill the cylinder with fuel to the 90 ml (3.04 oz) mark. 2. Add 10 ml (0.34 oz) of water in order to bring the total fluid volume to 100 ml (3.38 oz) and install a stopper. 3. Shake the cylinder vigorously for 10-15 seconds. 4. Carefully loosen the stopper in order to release the pressure. 5. Re-install the stopper and shake the cylinder vigorously again for 10-15 seconds. 6. Put the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow adequate liquid separation. If alcohol is present in the fuel, the volume of the lower layer, which would now contain both alcohol and water, will be more than 10 ml (0.34 oz). For example, if the volume of the lower layer is increased to 15 ml (0.51 oz), this indicates at least 5 percent alcohol in the fuel. The actual amount of alcohol may be somewhat more because this procedure does not extract all of the alcohol from the fuel. Particulate Contaminants in Fuel Testing Procedure 1. Using an approved fuel container, draw approximately 0.5 liter (0.53 qt) of fuel. 2. Place the container on a level surface for approximately 5 minutes in order to allow settling of the particulate contamination. Particulate contamination will show up in various shapes and colors. Sand will typically be identified by a white or light brown crystals. Rubber will appear as black and irregular particles. 3. Observe the fuel sample. If any physical contaminants or water are present, clean the fuel system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10200 Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Fuel System Cleaning See: Service and Repair Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Pressure Release: Procedures Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Remove the engine cover, if required. 3. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 6. Connect the CH-48027-3 (4) to the fuel rail service port. 7. Connect the CH-48027-2 (2) to the CH-48027-3 (4). 8. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 9. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 10. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 11. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10206 * The areas surrounding the connections Important: If relieving the fuel pressure for the fuel pressure gage installation and removal, it is NOT necessary to proceed with the following steps. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 12. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 13. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 14. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 15. Install the engine cover, if required. 16. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027) Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. 1. If the fuel system requires repair, prevent fuel spillage by removing the fuel pump fuse. Refer to Electrical Center Identification Views. 2. Loosen the fuel fill cap in order to relieve the fuel tank vapor pressure. 3. Remove the engine cover, if required. 4. Remove the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port and using a small flat-bladed tool, depress (open) the fuel rail test port valve. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 7. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 8. Install the engine cover, if required. 9. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10207 Fuel Pressure Release: Removal and Replacement Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10208 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10217 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10218 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10219 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10220 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's Fuel Injector: Customer Interest Fuel System - Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 03-06-04-030G Date: April 22, 2009 Subject: Various Driveability Symptoms Due to Clogged Fuel Injectors, MIL/SES DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0300, P1174, P1175 (Clean Fuel Injectors and/or Perform Injector Test With AFIT CH-47976) Models: 2005-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with Engine RPOs listed in the Table above and MULTEC(R) 2 Fuel Injectors Attention: GM does not support cleaning injectors on any engines that are not listed in this bulletin. Engines other than the ones listed in this bulletin that diagnosis indicates having restricted injectors should have those injectors replaced. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model year to 2009 and to provide applicable engine RPO table. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-06-04-030F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following various driveability symptoms: - Extended Crank Time - Hard to Start - MIL/SES Illuminated with DTCs - Hesitation - Lack of Power - Surge or Chuggle - Rough Idle - Light or Intermittent Misfire Cause Due to various factors, the fuel injectors may become restricted. Extensive testing has demonstrated that fuel related issues are the cause of clogged injectors. At this point, no specific fuel, fuel constituent, or engine condition has been identified as causing the restriction. The restriction causes the engine to operate at a lean air fuel ratio. This may either trigger the MIL to illuminate or the engine to develop various driveability symptoms. Correction Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10226 Fuel injector restrictions, deposits can be cleaned on the vehicle using the following procedure. Under NO circumstances should this procedure be modified, changed or shortened. As a long term solution, and to prevent reoccurrence, customers should be encouraged to use Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For further information on Top Tier detergent gasoline and fuel retailers, please refer to the following Corporate Bulletin Numbers: - 04-06-04-047G (U.S. Only) - 05-06-04-022D (Canada ONLY) Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent approved for use with General Motors fuel system components. Other injector cleaners may cause damage to plastics, plated metals or bearings. General Motors has completed extensive laboratory testing of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, and can assure its compatibility with General Motors fuel system components, as long as the cleaning procedure is followed correctly. Injector Cleaning Procedure The following tools, or their equivalent, are required: - CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) - J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner - J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42964 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - J 42873 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter - * One bottle of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner, P/N 88861802 (in Canada, P/N 88861804) - * One bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, P/N 88861011 (in Canada, P/N 88861012) Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976) Some dealers may not have an Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT- CH-47976). Dealers can contact to order an AFIT- CH-47976. Dealers still can test the fuel injectors without an AFIT. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/ J 39021 or Tech 2(R)) in SI. Important As mentioned in the AFIT User Guide, vehicles that are not listed in the AFIT menu can still be tested with the AFIT. Depending on the model, it may be possible to enter the previous model year and proceed with testing using the DLC connection. If this is not possible on the model that you are working on, it will be necessary to use the direct connection method outlined in the AFIT User Guide (See Pages 17-31). General Motors recommends that the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT) be used in testing fuel injectors. If the SI diagnostics do not isolate a cause for this concern, use the Active Fuel Injector Tester (AFIT - CH-47976) to perform an "Injector Test" as outlined in the AFIT User Guide. The AFIT "Injector Test" measures the flow characteristics of all fuel injectors, which is more precise when compared with the standard Tech 2(R) fuel injector balance test. As a result, the AFIT is more likely to isolate the cause of a P1174 DTC (for example: if it is being caused by a fuel injector concern). The CH-47976 (Active Fuel Injector Tester - AFIT) can also be used to measure fuel pressure and fuel system leak down. Also, as mentioned in the P1174 SI diagnosis, if the misfire current counters or misfire graph indicate any misfires, it may be an indicator of the cylinder that is causing the concern. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH-47976) in SI for additional instructions. Training (U.S.) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GM Training Website: 1. After logging into the training website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "web video library." 2. Then choose "technical." 3. Next, within the search box, type in September course number "10206.09D. 4. This will bring up a link with this course. Scroll through to choose "feature topic." 5. At this point, the seminar can be chosen to view or the video related to the AFIT. Additional training is available from the training website. Please see TECHassist 16044.18T2 Active Fuel Injector Tester and also see 16044.14D1 GM Powertrain Performance for more information on GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10227 Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Training (Canada) To access the training video on AFIT, take the following path at the GMPro LMS Training Website: 1. After logging into the website, choose the link on the left side of the page titled "Catalog." 2. Then choose "Catalog Search." 3. Next, within the search box, Select Course Number - Contains - "T" then select search. 4. This will bring up a list of TECHassist courses. Scroll through to choose "Active Fuel Injector Tester" and select "View." 5. At this point, a new window will open and the program can be Launched. Also, dealers can now download software updates for the AFIT at GM Dealer Equipment (GMDE). Techlink Additional information can be found on AFIT (June 2006 Edition) and GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner (November 2006 Edition) in Techlink. To access the articles, take the following path: 1. Go to GM DealerWorld (U.S.) or the GM GlobalConnect (Canada). 2. Click on the Service Tab in DealerWorld (in Canada, click Technican Resources in the Service Library of GM GlobalConnect). 3. Click on the GM Techlink Hyperlink. 4. Click on the Archives Hyperlink at GM Techlink. - Click on 06-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the Active Fuel Injector Tester Link in the June 2006 Techlink Article. - Click on 11-2006 in the Archives Section and Click on the GM Top Engine Cleaner Replaced Link in the November 2006 Techlink Article. Injector Cleaning Procedure Notice GM UPPER ENGINE AND FUEL INJECTOR CLEANER is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank. Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have any out of specification injectors replaced. 1. For 4, 5 and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A - Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 2. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner container into the J 35800-A Injector Cleaning Tank then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for a second time for an 8 cylinder engine (8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid 120 ml (4 oz) of Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 3. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 4. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by either removing the fuel pump fuse or the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10228 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 6. Relieve fuel pressure and disconnect the fuel feed and return lines at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return lines coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls, due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 11. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 12. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 13. Remove the J 37287, J 42873 or J 42964 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 14. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 15. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus (P/N 88861011 [in Canada, P/N 88861012]) into the tank and advise the customer to fill the tank. 16. Review the benefits of using Top Tier Detergent gasoline with the customer and recommend that they add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Parts Information * Only 1/8 of the cost may be claimed for 4 and 6 cylinder engines and 1/4 of the cost for 8 cylinder engines. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Injector: > 03-06-04-030G > Apr > 09 > Fuel System Driveability Issues/MIL/Multiple DTC's > Page 10229 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector Resistance....................................................................................................................... ..................................................................11-14 ohms Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 10232 Fuel Injector: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Pressure Drop...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................20 kPa (3 psi) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10235 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10236 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10237 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10238 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10239 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10240 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10241 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10242 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10243 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10244 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10245 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10246 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10247 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10248 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10249 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10250 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10251 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10253 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10254 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10255 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10256 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10257 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10258 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10259 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10260 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10261 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10262 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10263 Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10264 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10265 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10266 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10267 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10268 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10269 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10270 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10271 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10272 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10273 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10274 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10275 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10276 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10277 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10278 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10279 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10280 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10281 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10282 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10283 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10284 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10285 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10286 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10287 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10288 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10289 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10290 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10291 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10292 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10293 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10294 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10295 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10296 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10297 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10298 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10299 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10300 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10301 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10302 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10303 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10304 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10305 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10306 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10307 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10308 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10309 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10310 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10311 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10312 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10313 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10314 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10315 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10316 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10317 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10318 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10319 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10320 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10321 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10322 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10323 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10324 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10325 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10326 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10327 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10328 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10329 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10330 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10331 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10332 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10333 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10334 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10335 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10336 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10337 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10338 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10339 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10340 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10341 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10342 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10343 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10344 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10345 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10346 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10347 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10348 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10349 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10350 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10351 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10352 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10353 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10354 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10355 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10356 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10357 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10358 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10359 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10360 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10361 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10362 Fuel Injector: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Fuel Injector 1 (LS4) Fuel Injector 2 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10363 Fuel Injector 3 (LS4) Fuel Injector 4 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10364 Fuel Injector 5 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10365 Fuel Injector 6 (LS4) Fuel Injector 7 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10366 Fuel Injector 8 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10367 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Injector: Technician Safety Information Lower O-Ring Removal Caution Caution: Verify that the lower (small) O-ring of each injector does not remain in the lower manifold in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. If the O-ring is not removed with the injector, the replacement injector with new O-rings will not seat properly in the injector socket. Improper seating could cause a fuel leak. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 10370 Fuel Injector: Vehicle Damage Warnings Fuel Injector Balance Test Notice Notice: Do Not repeat any portion of this test before running the engine in order to prevent the engine from flooding. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/J 39021 or Tech 2) Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/J 39021 or Tech 2) Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/J39021 or w/Tech 2) Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The control module enables the appropriate fuel injector pulse for each cylinder. The ignition voltage is supplied directly to the fuel injectors. The control module controls each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit via a solid state device called a driver. A fuel injector coil winding resistance that is too high or too low will affect the engine driveability. A fuel injector control circuit DTC may not set, but a misfire may be apparent. The fuel injector coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases. When performing the fuel injector balance test, the scan tool is first used to energize the fuel pump relay. The fuel injector tester or the scan tool is then used to pulse each injector for a precise amount of time, allowing a measured amount of the fuel to be injected. This causes a drop in the system fuel pressure that can be recorded and used to compare each injector. Diagnostic Aids * Monitoring the misfire current counters, or misfire graph, may help to isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. * Operating the vehicle over a wide temperature range may help isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition. * Perform the fuel injector coil test within the conditions of the customer's concern. A fuel injector condition may only be apparent at a certain temperature, or under certain conditions. Special Tools * CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage * J 39021 Fuel Injector Coil and Balance Tester * J 44602 Injector Test Adapter Component Testing Fuel Injector Coil Test Verify the resistance of each fuel injector with one of the following methods: * If the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is between 10-32°C (50-90°F), the resistance of each fuel injector should be 11-14 ohms. ^ If the injectors measure OK, perform the Fuel Injector Balance Test-Fuel Pressure Test. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the fuel injector. * If the ECT sensor is not between 10-32°C (50-90°F), measure and record the resistance of each fuel injector with a DMM. Subtract the lowest resistance value from the highest resistance value. The difference between the lowest value and the highest value should be equal to or less than 3 ohms. ^ If the difference is equal to or less than 3 ohms, refer to Fuel Injector Balance Test-Fuel Pressure Test for further diagnosis of the fuel injectors. ^ If the difference is more than 3 ohms, add all of the fuel injector resistance values to obtain a total resistance value. Divide the total resistance value by the number of fuel injectors to obtain an average resistance value. Subtract the lowest individual fuel injector resistance value from the average resistance value. Compute the difference between the highest individual fuel injector resistance value and the average resistance value. Replace the fuel injector that displays the greatest difference above or below the average. Important: * DO NOT perform this test if the engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 94°C (201°F). Irregular fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding with this diagnostic. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/J 39021 or Tech 2) > Page 10373 * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. Fuel Injector Balance Test-Fuel Pressure Test 1. Install a fuel pressure gage. 2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Important: * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. Command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. 3. Observe the fuel pressure gage with the fuel pump commanded ON. The fuel pressure should be 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi). ^ If the fuel pressure is not 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi), refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 4. Monitor the fuel pressure gage for one minute. The fuel pressure should not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi). ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than 34 kPa (5 psi), refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 5. Perform the Fuel Injector Balance Test with Special Tool or the Fuel Injector Balance Test with Tech 2. Fuel Injector Balance Test with Special Tool 1. Set the amperage supply selector switch on the fuel injector tester to the Balance Test 0.5-2.5 amp position. 2. Connect the J 39021 to a fuel injector with a J 44602. 3. Command the fuel pump relay ON and then OFF three times with a scan tool. On the last command, as the fuel pressure begins to slowly degrade and stabilize, select a fuel pressure within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the maximum pump pressure. Record this fuel pressure. This is the starting pressure at which you will pulse each injector. 4. Command the fuel pump relay ON one more time and energize the fuel injector by depressing the Push to Start Test button on the J 39021 at the previously selected pressure. 5. After the injector stops pulsing, select Min from the Display Mode and record the Min pressure. Important: New test results will not be recorded if the Min/Max results are not cleared after each injector is tested. 6. Clear the Min/Max results. 7. Select Normal from the Display Mode. 8. Repeat steps 2 and 4 through 7 for each fuel injector. 9. Perform the Pressure Drop Calculation. Fuel Injector Balance Test with Tech 2 1. Command the fuel pump relay ON and then OFF three times with a scan tool. On the last command, as the fuel pressure begins to slowly degrade and stabilize, select a fuel pressure within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the maximum pump pressure. Record this fuel pressure. This is the starting pressure at which you will pulse each injector. 2. With a scan tool, select the Fuel Injector Balance Test function within the Special Functions menu. 3. Select an injector to be tested. 4. Press Enter to prime the fuel system. 5. Energize the fuel injector by depressing the Pulse Injector button on the scan tool at the previously selected pressure. 6. After the injector stops pulsing, select Min from the Display Mode on the CH-48027 and record the Min pressure. Important: New test results will not be recorded if the Min/Max results are not cleared after each injector is tested. 7. Clear the Min/Max results on the CH-48027. 8. Select Normal from the Display Mode on the CH-48027. 9. Press Enter on the scan tool to bring you back to the Select Injector screen. 10. Repeat steps 3 through 9 for each fuel injector. 11. Perform the Pressure Drop Calculation. Pressure Drop Calculation 1. Subtract the minimum pressure from the starting pressure for one fuel injector. The result is the pressure drop value. 2. Obtain a pressure drop value for each fuel injector. 3. Add all of the individual pressure drop values except for the injector suspected of being faulty. This is the total pressure drop. 4. Divide the total pressure drop by the number of fuel injectors that were added together. This is the average pressure drop. The difference between Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/J 39021 or Tech 2) > Page 10374 any individual pressure drop and the average pressure drop should not be more than 20 kPa (3 psi). ^ If the difference between any individual pressure drop and the average pressure drop is more than 20 kPa (3 psi), replace the fuel injector. Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Fuel Injector Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/J 39021 or Tech 2) > Page 10375 Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Fuel Injector Diagnosis (With CH 47976) Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/CH47976) Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The control module enables the appropriate fuel injector pulse for each cylinder. The ignition voltage is supplied directly to the fuel injectors. The control module controls each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit via a solid state device called a driver. A fuel injector coil winding resistance that is too high or too low will affect the engine driveability. A fuel injector control circuit DTC may not set, but a misfire may be apparent. The fuel injector coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases. The CH-47976 is used to test the fuel pump, the fuel system leak down, and the fuel injectors. Following the User Guide, CH 47976-11, and the on screen prompts or selections, will indicate the steps required to perform each of the available tests. The tester will perform all of the tests automatically and display results of the test. The results can also be down loaded for storage and printing. Special Tools CH-47976 Active Fuel Injector Tester Component Testing Fuel Injector Coil Test Verify the resistance of each fuel injector with one of the following methods: * If the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is between 10-32°C (50-90°F), the resistance of each fuel injector should be 11-14 ohms. ^ If the injectors measure OK, perform the AFIT Test Procedure. ^ If not within the specified range, replace the fuel injector. * If the ECT sensor is not between 10-32°C (50-90°F), measure and record the resistance of each fuel injector with a DMM. Subtract the lowest resistance value from the highest resistance value. The difference between the lowest value and the highest value should be equal to or less than 3 ohms. ^ If the difference is equal to or less than 3 ohms, refer to AFIT Test Procedure. ^ If the difference is more than 3 ohms, add all of the fuel injector resistance values to obtain a total resistance value. Divide the total resistance value by the number of fuel injectors to obtain an average resistance value. Subtract the lowest individual fuel injector resistance value from the average resistance value. Compute the difference between the highest individual fuel injector resistance value and the average resistance value. Replace the fuel injector that displays the greatest difference above or below the average. Important: * DO NOT perform this test if the engine coolant temperature (ECT) is above 94°C (201°F). Irregular fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding with this diagnostic. AFIT Test Procedure 1. Turn OFF all accessories. 2. Turn OFF the ignition. 3. Install the AFIT. 4. Turn ON the AFIT and select the vehicle. 5. Turn ON the ignition and perform the Injector Test. ^ If the AFIT aborts testing due to fuel pressure or fuel leak down, refer to Fuel System Diagnosis. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Fuel Injector Diagnosis (w/J 39021 or Tech 2) > Page 10376 6. View the test results. ^ If any injector exceeds the recommended tolerance, replace the injector(s). Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures Fuel Injector Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Fuel Injector: Procedures Fuel Injector Cleaning Tools Required * J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-Off Adapters * J 35800-A Fuel Injector Cleaner * J 42873-1 3/8 Fuel Line Shut-Off Valve * J 42873-2 5/16 Return Pipe Shut-Off Valve * J 42964-1 3/8 Fuel Pipe Shut-Off Valve * J 42964-2 5/16 Fuel Pipe Shut-Off Valve Notice: * GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner is the only injector cleaning agent recommended. DO NOT USE OTHER CLEANING AGENTS AS THEY MAY CONTAIN METHANOL, WHICH CAN DAMAGE FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS. * Under NO circumstances should the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner be added to the vehicle fuel tank, as it may damage the fuel pump and other system components. * Do not exceed the recommended cleaning solution concentration. Higher concentrations may damage fuel system components. Testing has demonstrated that exceeding the recommended cleaning solution concentration does not improve the effectiveness of this procedure. Important: Vehicles with less than 160 km (100 mi) on the odometer should not have the injectors cleaned. These vehicles should have the injectors replaced. 1. Obtain J 35800-A (2). Important: Make sure the valve at the bottom of the canister (3) is closed. 2. For 4, 5, and 6 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner twin reservoir container into the J 35800-A, injector cleaning tank, then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. 3. For 8 cylinder engines, empty two of the 30 ml (1 oz) reservoirs of the GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner twin reservoir container into the J 35800-A, injector cleaning tank, then add 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. If you are using any other brand of cleaning tank, you will need a total of 60 ml (2 oz) of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner mixed with 420 ml (14 oz) of regular unleaded gasoline. This procedure will need to be repeated for an 8 cylinder engine. The 8 cylinder engines receive 960 ml total fluid-120 ml (4 oz) of GM Upper Engine and Fuel Injector Cleaner and 840 ml (28 oz) of gasoline. 4. Fill the injector cleaning tank with regular unleaded gasoline. Be sure to follow all additional instructions provided with the tool. 5. Electrically disable the vehicle fuel pump by removing the fuel pump relay and disconnecting the oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the fuel feed and return line, if equipped, at the fuel rail. Plug the fuel feed and return line, if equipped, coming off the fuel rail with J 37287, or J 42964-1, and J 42964-2 or J 42873-1, and J 42873-2 as appropriate for the fuel system. 7. Connect the J 35800-A to the vehicle fuel rail. 8. Pressurize the J 35800-A to 510 kPa (75 psi). 9. Start and idle the engine until it stalls due to lack of fuel. This should take approximately 15-20 minutes. 10. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10379 11. Injectors should be flow-tested at this point. If further cleaning is needed, a repeat of the above procedure should be done. When the injector restriction returns to zero, proceed to step 12. 12. Disconnect the J 35800-A from the fuel rail. 13. Reconnect the vehicle fuel pump relay and oil pressure switch connector, if equipped. 14. Remove the J 37287, or J 42964-1 and J 42964-2, or J 42873-1 and J 42873-2 and reconnect the vehicle fuel feed and return lines. 15. Start and idle the vehicle for an additional two minutes to ensure residual injector cleaner is flushed from the fuel rail and fuel lines. 16. Pour the entire contents of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus, GM P/N 88861011 (Canadian P/N 88861012) into a nearly empty tank and advise the customer to refuel with up to 76 L (20 gal) of fuel. 17. Advise the customer to use only a Top Tier Detergent gasoline and to add a bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus to the fuel tank at every oil change. Regular use of GM Fuel System Treatment Plus should keep the customer from having to repeat the injector cleaning procedure. 18. Road test the vehicle to verify that the customer concern has been corrected. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 10380 Fuel Injector: Removal and Replacement Fuel Injector Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the fuel rail. 2. Remove the fuel injector retaining clip (521), as required. 3. Remove the fuel injector (533), as required 4. Remove and discard the fuel injector O-ring seals (532, 534), as required. Installation Procedure Important: Do not use the fuel injector O-ring seals again. Install NEW fuel injector O-ring seals during assembly. 1. Lubricate the NEW O-ring seals with clean engine oil. 2. Install the NEW fuel injector O-ring seals (532, 534) onto the injector, as required. 3. Install the fuel injector (533), as required 4. Install the fuel injector retaining clip (521), as required. 5. Install the fuel rail. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Special Tools J 37088-A Fuel Line Disconnect Tool Set Removal Procedure 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Remove the retainer from the fuel feed quick-connect fitting. Caution: Wear safety glasses when using compressed air, as flying dirt particles may cause eye injury. 3. Using compressed air, blow any dirt or debris from around the fitting. 4. Using the correct tool from the J 37088-A, insert the tool into the female connector, then push inward in order to release the quick connect locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 10385 5. Pull the fuel line connection apart. Notice: If necessary, remove rust or burrs from the fuel pipes with an emery cloth. Use a radial motion with the fuel pipe end in order to prevent damage to the O-ring sealing surface. Use a clean shop towel in order to wipe off the male tube ends. Inspect all the connections for dirt and burrs. Clean or replace the components and assemblies as required. 6. Use a clean shop towel in order to wipe off the male pipe end. 7. Inspect both ends of the fitting for dirt and burrs. Clean or replace the components as required. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Fuel Pipe Fitting Caution. 1. Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe end. 2. Push both sides of the fitting together in order to snap the retaining tabs into place. 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the fitting in order to make sure the connection is secure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 10386 4. Install the retainer to the fuel feed quick-connect fitting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 10387 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Plastic Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service Removal Procedure Important: There are several types of plastic fuel and evaporative emission (EVAP) quick connect fittings used on this vehicle. The following instructions apply to all types of plastic quick connect fittings except where indicated. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). Caution: Wear safety glasses when using compressed air, as flying dirt particles may cause eye injury. 2. Use compressed air, blow and dirt or debris from around the quick-connect fitting. 3. Squeeze the plastic quick connect fitting release tabs together to disengage the quick connect fitting. (This step applies to Bartholomew style fittings ONLY). 4. Squeeze where indicated by the arrows on both sides of the plastic ring to disengage the quick connect fitting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 10388 5. Squeeze where indicated by the arrows on both sides of the plastic ring to disengage the quick connect fitting. 6. Pull the quick connect fitting connection apart. Installation Procedure Caution: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury, before connecting fuel pipe fittings, always apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. During normal operation, the O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated. 1. Apply a few drops of clean oil to the male connection end. 2. Push both sides of the quick-connect fitting together in order to cause the retaining tabs to snap into place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Metal Collar Quick Connect Fitting Service > Page 10389 3. Once installed, pull on both sides of the quick connect fittings in order to ensure that the connection is secure. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Fuel Pressure (Key ON, Engine OFF).................................................................................................. ..............................................345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Pressure: Technician Safety Information Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution Caution: Remove the fuel tank cap and relieve the fuel system pressure before servicing the fuel system in order to reduce the risk of personal injury. After you relieve the fuel system pressure, a small amount of fuel may be released when servicing the fuel lines, the fuel injection pump, or the connections. In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, cover the fuel system components with a shop towel before disconnection. This will catch any fuel that may leak out. Place the towel in an approved container when the disconnection is complete. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 10396 Fuel Pressure: Vehicle Damage Warnings Fuel Pressure Notice Notice: Do not allow the fuel pressure to exceed the specified value because damage to the fuel pressure regulator or the fuel pressure gage may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal Special Tools CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Gasoline/Gasoline Vapors Caution. Caution: Refer to Relieving Fuel Pressure Caution. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Connect the CH-48027-1 (1) to the CH-48027-2 (2). 3. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. 4. Perform any tests and/or diagnostics as needed. For the proper usage of the CH-48027, refer to the manufactures directions. Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 10399 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure, if required. Perform the following steps: Caution: Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connection in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury. The towel will absorb any fuel leakage that occurs during the connection of the fuel pressure gage. Place the towel in an approved container when the connection of the fuel pressure gage is complete. 1. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel rail service port. 2. Place the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) into an approved gasoline container. 3. Open the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2) in order to bleed any fuel from the fuel rail. 4. Close the valve on the CH-48027-2 (2). 5. Remove the hose on the CH-48027-2 (2) from the approved gasoline container. 6. Remove the shop towel from around the fuel rail service port, and place in an approved gasoline container. Notice: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system: * The fuel pipe connections * The hose connections * The areas surrounding the connections Disconnect the CH-48027-1 (1) from the CH-48027-2 (2). 2. Disconnect the CH-48027-2 (2) from the CH-48027-3 (4). 3. Disconnect the CH-48027-3 (4) from the fuel rail service port. 4. Install the fuel rail service port cap. 5. Tighten the fuel fill cap. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 10400 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel System Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Circuit/System Description The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON. The fuel system is a returnless on-demand design. The fuel pressure regulator is a part of the fuel pump module, eliminating the need for a return pipe from the engine. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions. The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies high pressure fuel through the fuel filter and the fuel feed pipe to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump provides fuel at a higher rate of flow than is needed by the fuel injection system. The fuel pump also supplies fuel to a venturi pump located on the bottom of the fuel pump module. The function of the venturi pump is to fill the fuel pump module reservoir. The fuel pressure regulator, a part of the fuel pump module, maintains the correct fuel pressure to the fuel injection system. The fuel pump module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve and the fuel pressure regulator maintain fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail in order to prevent long cranking times. Special Tools * CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gage * J 37287 Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter Circuit/System Verification Important: * Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding. * Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding. * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * Before proceeding with this test review the User Manual CH 48027-5 for Safety Information and Instructions. 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. You should hear the fuel pump turn ON and OFF. ^ If the fuel pump does not operate, refer to Fuel Pump Electrical Circuit Diagnosis. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ignition OFF, all accessories OFF, install a CH-48027. 3. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi) and does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. Circuit/System Testing Important: * The fuel pump relay may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure. * DO NOT start the engine. Ignition ON, engine OFF, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and observe the fuel pressure gage while the fuel pump is operating. Verify the fuel pressure is between 345-414 kPa (50-60 psi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Pressure Gage Installation and Removal > Page 10401 ^ If the fuel pressure is greater than the specified range, replace the fuel pump module. ^ If the fuel pressure is less than the specified range, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections. 1. Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, perform the following procedure: 1. Ignition OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Install the J 37287 between the fuel feed pipe and the fuel rail. 3. Open the valve on the J 37287. 4. Ignition ON, command the fuel pump relay ON with a scan tool and bleed the air from the CH-48027. 5. Command the fuel pump relay ON and then OFF with a scan tool. 6. Close the valve on the J 37287. 7. Monitor the fuel pressure for 1 minute. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, locate and replace the leaking fuel injector(s). ^ If the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) within the specified time, replace the fuel pump module. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure to 69 kPa (10 psi). Verify that the fuel pressure does not decrease more than 14 kPa (2 psi) in 5 minutes. ^ If the fuel pressure decreases more than the specified value, replace the fuel pump module. 3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions of the customer's concern while monitoring the fuel pressure with the CH-48027. The fuel pressure should not drop off during acceleration, cruise or hard cornering. ^ If the fuel pressure drops off, test, inspect, and repair the items listed below. If all items test normal, replace the fuel pump module. * Restricted fuel feed pipe * Restricted or plugged fuel filter * Restricted or plugged strainer * Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections 4. If the fuel system tests normal, refer to Symptoms - Computers and Control Systems. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Engine Controls Repair Instructions Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests and Procedures * Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement * Fuel Injector Replacement * Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10407 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10408 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10409 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10410 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10411 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10412 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10413 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10415 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10416 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10417 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10418 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10419 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10420 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10421 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10422 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10423 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10424 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10425 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10426 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10427 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10428 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10429 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10430 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10431 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10432 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10433 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10434 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10435 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10436 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10437 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10438 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10439 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10440 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10441 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10442 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10443 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10444 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10445 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10446 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10447 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10448 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10449 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10450 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10451 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10452 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10453 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10454 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10455 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10456 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10457 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10458 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10459 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10460 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10461 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10462 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10463 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10464 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10465 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10466 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10467 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10468 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10469 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10470 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10471 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10472 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10473 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10474 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10475 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10476 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10477 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10478 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10479 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10480 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10481 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10482 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10483 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10484 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10485 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10486 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10487 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10488 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10489 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10490 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10491 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10492 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10493 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10494 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10495 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10496 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10497 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10498 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10499 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10500 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10501 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10502 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10503 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10504 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10505 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10506 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10507 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10508 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10509 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10510 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10511 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10512 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10513 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10514 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10515 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10516 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10517 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10518 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10519 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10520 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10521 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10522 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10523 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10524 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10525 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10526 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10527 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10528 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10529 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10530 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10531 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10532 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10533 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Fuel Rail: Customer Safety Information Fuel Rail Stop Bracket Installation Caution Caution: The fuel rail stop bracket must be installed onto the engine assembly. The stop bracket serves as a protective shield for the fuel rail in the event of a vehicle frontal crash. If the fuel rail stop bracket is not installed and the vehicle is involved in a frontal crash, fuel could be sprayed possibly causing a fire and personal injury from burns. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 10538 Fuel Rail: Vehicle Damage Warnings Fuel Rail Notice Notice: * Use care when servicing the fuel system components, especially the fuel injector electrical connectors, the fuel injector tips, and the injector O-rings. Plug the inlet and the outlet ports of the fuel rail in order to prevent contamination. * Do not use compressed air to clean the fuel rail assembly as this may damage the fuel rail components. * Do not immerse the fuel rail assembly in a solvent bath in order to prevent damage to the fuel rail assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10539 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Clean the fuel and evaporative emission (EVAP) connections and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the lines in order the avoid possible system contamination. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: * EVAP purge solenoid (1) * Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor (2) * Electronic throttle control (ETC) (3) * Oil pressure sensor (4) * Valve lifter oil manifold (5) 4. Disconnect the generator electrical connector (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10540 5. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (3). 6. Disconnect the main ignition coil harness electrical connector (4). Important: Mark the injector connectors to their corresponding injectors to ensure correct reassembly. 7. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors (1, 2). 8. Remove the CPA retainer (3). 9. Disconnect the main ignition coil harness electrical connector (1). Important: Mark the injector connectors to their corresponding injectors to ensure correct reassembly. 10. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors (2, 4). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10541 11. Remove the engine wiring harness retainers from the tabs on the fuel rail. Reposition the harness out of the way. 12. Disconnect the fuel feed (1) and EVAP (2) lines. 13. Note the location of the fuel rail ground strap (557). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10542 14. Remove the intake manifold bolt (512) and ground strap (557). 15. Remove the fuel rail bolts (511). 16. Remove the fuel rail (510) with injectors. Lift evenly on both sides of the fuel rail until all injectors have been removed from their bores. Important: Do not separate the fuel injectors from the fuel rail unless component service is required. 17. If replacing the fuel rail, remove the fuel injectors. Installation Procedure Important: Do not reuse the fuel injector O-ring seals. Install NEW O-ring seals during assembly. 1. Note the installed location of the fuel rail ground strap (557). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10543 2. If replacing the fuel rail, install the fuel injectors. 3. If necessary, Lubricate the NEW O-ring seals with clean engine oil. 4. If necessary, install NEW O-ring seals to the fuel injectors. 5. Install the fuel rail (510) with injectors. Push firmly on both sides of the rail until all the injectors have been seated into their bores. 6. Apply a 5 mm (0.2 in) band of threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent to the threads of the fuel rail bolts. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 7. Install the fuel rail bolts (511). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 8. Install the ground strap (557) and intake manifold bolt (512). Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 9. Connect the fuel feed (1) and EVAP (2) lines. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10544 10. Position the harness to the engine. Install the engine wiring harness retainers to the tabs on the fuel rail. Important: Install the marked injector connectors to their corresponding injectors. 11. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors (2, 4). 12. Connect the main ignition coil harness electrical connector (1). 13. Install the CPA retainer (3). Important: Install the marked injector connectors to their corresponding injectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 10545 14. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors (1, 2). 15. Connect the main ignition coil harness electrical connector (4). 16. Install the CPA retainer (3). 17. Connect the generator electrical connector (2). 18. Connect the following electrical connectors: * EVAP purge solenoid (1) * MAP sensor (2) * ETC (3) * Oil pressure sensor (4) * Valve lifter oil manifold (5) 19. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 20. Connect the negative battery cable. 21. Use the following steps to inspect for leaks: 1. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF, for 2 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition OFF for 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. 4. Inspect for leaks. 22. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Return Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Clean the fuel connection and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the lines in order to avoid possible system contamination. 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Remove the brake master cylinder and reposition. 4. Relieve the fuel system. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 5. Disconnect the fuel feed line (1) from the fuel rail. 6. Open the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 7. Remove the fuel feed line from the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10549 9. Remove the fuel/brake line retainer bolt. 10. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. 11. Remove the fuel/brake line push in retainer from the underbody. 12. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10550 13. Remove the fuel/brake line retainer bolts. 14. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. 15. Open the fuel/brake line retainer (1). 16. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10551 17. Disconnect the fuel feed (3) and evaporative emission (EVAP) (4) lines from the fuel tank lines (1, 2). 18. Remove the fuel feed line. Installation Procedure 1. Position the fuel feed line. 2. Connect the fuel feed (3) and EVAP (4) lines to the fuel tank lines (1, 2). 3. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. 4. Close the fuel/brake line retainer (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10552 5. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Install the fuel/brake line retainer bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10553 8. Install the fuel/brake line push in retainer to the underbody. 9. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. 10. Install the fuel/brake line retainer bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. Install the fuel feed line to the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 13. Close the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10554 14. Connect the fuel feed line (1) to the fuel rail. 15. Position and install the brake master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement. 16. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 17. Install the fuel fill cap. 18. Connect the negative battery cable. 19. Perform the following steps to inspect for leaks: 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect the system for leaks. 20. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Hose/Pipes Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Clean the fuel connection and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the lines in order to avoid possible system contamination. 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Remove the brake master cylinder and reposition. 4. Relieve the fuel system. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 5. Disconnect the fuel feed line (1) from the fuel rail. 6. Open the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 7. Remove the fuel feed line from the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10558 9. Remove the fuel/brake line retainer bolt. 10. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. 11. Remove the fuel/brake line push in retainer from the underbody. 12. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10559 13. Remove the fuel/brake line retainer bolts. 14. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. 15. Open the fuel/brake line retainer (1). 16. Remove the fuel feed line from the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10560 17. Disconnect the fuel feed (3) and evaporative emission (EVAP) (4) lines from the fuel tank lines (1, 2). 18. Remove the fuel feed line. Installation Procedure 1. Position the fuel feed line. 2. Connect the fuel feed (3) and EVAP (4) lines to the fuel tank lines (1, 2). 3. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. 4. Close the fuel/brake line retainer (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10561 5. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 6. Install the fuel/brake line retainer bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 7. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10562 8. Install the fuel/brake line push in retainer to the underbody. 9. Install the fuel feed line to the retainer. 10. Install the fuel/brake line retainer bolt. Tighten the bolt to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. Install the fuel feed line to the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). 13. Close the fuel/brake pipe retainers (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10563 14. Connect the fuel feed line (1) to the fuel rail. 15. Position and install the brake master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement. 16. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 17. Install the fuel fill cap. 18. Connect the negative battery cable. 19. Perform the following steps to inspect for leaks: 1. Turn ON the ignition for 2 seconds. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 10 seconds. 3. Turn ON the ignition. 4. Inspect the system for leaks. 20. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Clean the fuel and evaporative emission (EVAP) connections and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the lines in order to avoid possible system contamination. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Remove the fuel fill pipe screws from the fuel filler pocket. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the fill pipe bracket bolt (4) from the underbody rail. 5. Remove the EVAP line (2) from the bracket (3). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement > Page 10569 6. Loosen the fuel fill pipe clamp (1) at the fuel tank. 7. Remove the fuel fill pipe hose (2) from the fuel tank (3). 8. Disconnect the vent pipe quick connect fitting from the fuel tank vent pipe quick connect fitting. 9. Remove the fuel tank fill pipe. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement > Page 10570 1. Install the fuel tank fill pipe. 2. Install the fuel tank fill pipe hose (2) onto the fuel tank (3) 3. Connect the vent pipe quick connect fitting to the fuel tank vent pipe quick connect fitting. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Tighten the fuel fill pipe clamp (1) at the fuel tank. Tighten the clamp to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement > Page 10571 5. Install the EVAP line (2) to the bracket (3). 6. Install the fill pipe bracket bolt (4) to the underbody rail. Tighten the bolt to 13 N.m (115 lb in). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the fuel fill pipe screws to the fuel filler pocket. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement > Page 10572 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Filler Tube Replacement Filler Tube Replacement Removal Procedure Important: Clean the fuel and evaporative emission (EVAP) connections and surrounding areas prior to disconnecting the lines in order to avoid possible system contamination. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief (With CH 48027) Fuel Pressure Relief (Without CH 48027). 2. Remove the fuel fill pipe screws from the fuel filler pocket. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the fill pipe bracket bolt (4) from the underbody rail. 5. Remove the EVAP line (2) from the bracket (3). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement > Page 10573 6. Loosen the fuel fill pipe clamp (1) at the fuel tank. 7. Remove the fuel fill pipe hose (2) from the fuel tank (3). 8. Disconnect the vent pipe quick connect fitting from the fuel tank vent pipe quick connect fitting. 9. Remove the fuel tank fill pipe. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement > Page 10574 1. Install the fuel tank fill pipe. 2. Install the fuel tank fill pipe hose (2) onto the fuel tank (3) 3. Connect the vent pipe quick connect fitting to the fuel tank vent pipe quick connect fitting. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Tighten the fuel fill pipe clamp (1) at the fuel tank. Tighten the clamp to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Replacement > Page 10575 5. Install the EVAP line (2) to the bracket (3). 6. Install the fill pipe bracket bolt (4) to the underbody rail. Tighten the bolt to 13 N.m (115 lb in). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the fuel fill pipe screws to the fuel filler pocket. Tighten the screws to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in). 9. Install the intake manifold cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams Fuel Tank Unit: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Fuel Pump and Sender Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Service Precautions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service Precautions Handling Idle Air Control Valve Notice Notice: If the IAC valve has been in service: DO NOT push or pull on the IAC valve pintle. The force required to move the pintle may damage the threads on the worm drive. Also, DO NOT soak the IAC valve in any liquid cleaner or solvent, as damage may result. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10588 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10589 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10596 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10597 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10598 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10599 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10600 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10601 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10602 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10603 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10604 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10605 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10606 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10607 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10608 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10609 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10610 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10611 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10612 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10613 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10614 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10615 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10616 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10617 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10618 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10619 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10620 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10621 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10622 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10623 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10624 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10625 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10626 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10627 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10628 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10629 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10630 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10631 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10632 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10633 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10634 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10635 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10636 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10637 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10638 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10639 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10640 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10641 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10642 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10643 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10644 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10645 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10646 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10647 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10648 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10649 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10650 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10651 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10652 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10653 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10654 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10655 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10656 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10657 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10658 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10659 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10660 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10661 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10662 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10663 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10664 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10665 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10666 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10667 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10668 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10669 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10670 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10671 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10672 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10673 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10674 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10675 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10676 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10677 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10678 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10679 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10680 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10681 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10682 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10683 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10684 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10685 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10686 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10687 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10688 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10689 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10690 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10691 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10692 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10693 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10694 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10695 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10696 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10697 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10698 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10699 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10700 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10701 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10702 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10703 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10704 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10705 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10706 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10707 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10708 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10709 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10710 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10711 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10712 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10713 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10714 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10715 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10716 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10717 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10718 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10719 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10720 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10721 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10722 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IGN MAIN RELAY The Ign Main PCB relay is located in the Underhood Fuse Block (1). The Underhood Fuse Block (1) is located on the right side of the engine compartment, mounted to the strut tower. IMPORTANT: This relay is a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) relay, and is only repaired by replacing the Underhood Fuse Block. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10726 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Powertrain Relay Diagnosis Diagnostic Instructions * Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostic System Check Vehicle * Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach. * Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category. Typical Scan Tool Data Circuit/System Description The powertrain relay is a normally open relay. The relay armature is held in the open position by spring tension. Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the relay coil and the armature contact at all times. The engine control module (ECM) supplies the ground path to the relay coil control circuit via an internal integrated circuit called an output driver module (ODM). The ODM output control is configured to operate as a low side driver for the powertrain relay. The ODM for the powertrain relay also incorporates a fault detection circuit, which is continuously monitored by the ECM. When the ECM commands the powertrain relay ON, ignition 1 voltage is supplied to the ECM, and to several additional circuits. Diagnostic Aids This test procedure requires that the vehicle battery has passed a load test and is completely charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test. See: Starting and Charging/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Battery Inspection/Test Special Tools * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Circuit/System Verification 1. Engine running, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF, with a scan tool, while observing the following powertrain relay coil control circuit status parameters. * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Gnd Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Open Test Status * Powertrain relay coil control Ckt. Short Volts Test Status Each parameter should toggle between OK and Not Run or Not Run and OK 2. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a test lamp, probe both test points of all the fuses that are powered by the powertrain relay. The test lamp should illuminate ON for at least one test point of each fuse. 3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Circuit/System Testing Important: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first. 1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the powertrain relay. 2. Ignition ON, verify that a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain relay coil B+, and ground. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10727 ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, test or replace the battery positive cable to the underhood fuse block. 3. Ignition OFF, verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the powertrain relay coil B+ circuit and the control circuit. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the control circuit for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 4. Remove the test lamp. 5. Command the powertrain relay ON, with a scan tool. Verify with a scan tool that the powertrain relay Ckt. Short Volts Test Status parameter is OK. ^ If not the specified value, test the control circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 6. Test the coil side of the powertrain relay for 65-110 ohms. ^ If not within the specified value, replace the relay. 7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the ECM C1 connector. 8. Test the powertrain relay control circuit for an open/high resistance. ^ If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 9. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit and ground. ^ If the test lamp illuminates, test the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit for a short to voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 10. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the relay switch B+ and ground. ^ If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the relay switch B+ circuit for a short to ground, or an open/high resistance. If the circuits test normal, and the fuse for the ignition 1 voltage circuit is open, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit to the ECM for a short to ground. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the relay switch B+ and the relay ignition 1 voltage circuit. 12. Ignition ON, engine OFF, monitor the EC Ignition Relay Feedback parameter with a scan tool. The parameter should display B+. ^ If the parameter does not display B+, test the ignition 1 voltage circuit for an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the ECM. 13. If all circuits test normal, replace the relay. Repair Instructions * Engine Control Module Programming and Setup * Engine Control Module Replacement * Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Repair Verification 1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis. 2. Perform any adjustment, programming, or setup procedures that are required when a component or module is removed or replaced. 3. Clear the DTCs. 4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds. 5. Ignition ON, command the powertrain relay ON and OFF with a scan tool, while observing the powertrain relay circuit status parameters, The circuit status parameters should change from OK to Not Run or Not Run to OK. ^ If another DTC is present, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10732 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10733 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left instrument panel (I/P) sound insulator. 2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor electrical connector (1). 3. Remove the APP sensor assembly bolts. 4. Remove the APP sensor assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10734 1. Position the APP sensor assembly to the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the APP sensor assembly bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Connect APP sensor electrical connector (1) 4. Install the left I/P sound insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Top Side of Engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 10739 Left Top Side Of Engine 1 - Throttle Body 2 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 3 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 10740 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10743 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10744 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10745 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10746 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10747 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10748 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10749 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10750 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10751 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10752 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10753 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10754 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10755 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10756 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10757 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10758 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10759 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10760 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10761 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10762 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10763 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10764 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10765 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10766 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10767 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10768 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10769 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10770 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10771 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10772 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10773 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10774 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10775 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10776 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10777 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10778 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10779 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10780 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10781 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10782 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10783 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10784 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10785 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10786 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10787 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10788 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10789 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10790 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10791 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10792 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10793 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10794 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10795 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10796 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10797 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10798 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10799 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10800 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10801 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10802 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10803 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10804 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10805 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10806 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10807 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10808 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10809 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10810 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10811 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10812 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10813 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10814 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10815 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10816 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10817 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10818 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10819 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10820 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10821 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10822 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10823 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10824 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10825 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10826 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10827 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10828 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10829 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10830 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10831 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10832 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10833 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10834 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10835 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10836 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10837 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10838 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10839 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10840 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10841 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10842 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10843 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10844 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10845 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10846 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10847 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10848 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10849 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10850 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10851 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10852 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10853 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10854 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10855 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10856 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10857 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10858 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10859 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10860 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10861 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10862 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10863 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10864 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10865 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10866 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10867 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10868 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10869 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10870 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10871 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mass Airflow Sensor/Intake Air Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air intake duct. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF)/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor electrical connector (2). 3. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. 4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor from the air cleaner housing. 5. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10872 1. Install the MAF/IAT sensor seal, if necessary. 2. Install the MAF/IAT sensor to the air cleaner housing. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the MAF/IAT sensor bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 4. Connect the MAF/IAT sensor electrical connector (2). 5. Install the air intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10877 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10878 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10879 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10880 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10881 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10882 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10883 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10884 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10885 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10886 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10887 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10888 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10889 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10890 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10891 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10892 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10893 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10894 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10895 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10896 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10897 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10898 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10899 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10900 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10901 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10902 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10903 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10904 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10905 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10906 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10907 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10908 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10909 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10910 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10911 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10912 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10913 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10914 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10915 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10916 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10917 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10918 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10919 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10920 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10921 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10922 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10923 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10924 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10925 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10926 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10927 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10928 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10929 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10930 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10931 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10932 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10933 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10934 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10935 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10936 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10937 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10938 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10939 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10940 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10941 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10942 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10943 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10944 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10945 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10946 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10947 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10948 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10949 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10950 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10951 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10952 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10953 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10954 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10955 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10956 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10957 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10958 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10959 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10960 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10961 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10962 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10963 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10964 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10965 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10966 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10967 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10968 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10969 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10970 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10971 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10972 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10973 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10974 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10975 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10976 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10977 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10978 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10979 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10980 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10981 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10982 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10983 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10984 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10985 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10986 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10987 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10988 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10989 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10990 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10991 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10992 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10993 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10994 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10995 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10996 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10997 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10998 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10999 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11000 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11001 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11002 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11003 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Diagrams Throttle Body: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Throttle Body (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Throttle Body: Procedures Throttle Learn Throttle Learn Description The engine control module (ECM) learns the airflow through the throttle body to ensure the correct idle. The learned airflow values are stored within the ECM. These values are learned to adjust for production variation and will continuously learn during the life of the vehicle to compensate for reduced airflow due to coking. Anytime the throttle body airflow rate changes, for example due to cleaning or replacing, the values must be relearned. A vehicle that had a heavily coked throttle body that has been cleaned or replaced may take several drive cycles to learn out the coking. To accelerate the process, the scan tool has the ability to reset all learned values back to zero. A new ECM will also have values set to zero. The idle may be unstable or a DTC may set if the learned values do not match the actual airflow. Conditions for Running the Throttle Learn Procedure With Scan Tool - Reset Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * Ignition ON, engine OFF. * The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) is 0 km/h (0 mph). Without Scan Tool - Learn Procedure * DTCs P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0205, P0206, P0220, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0496, P0601, P0604, P0606, P060D, P0641, P0651, P1516, P2101, P2119, P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, or P2176 are not set. * The engine speed is between 450-4,000 RPM. * The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is greater than 5 kPa. * The mass air flow (MAF) is greater than 2 g/s. * The ignition 1 voltage is greater than 10 volts. Throttle Learn With Scan Tool - Reset Procedure 1. Ignition ON, engine OFF, with a scan tool, perform the Idle Learn Reset in Module Setup. 2. Start the engine, monitor the TB Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. The TB Idle Airflow Compensation value should equal 0 percent and the engine should be idling at a normal idle speed. 3. Clear the DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Without Scan Tool - Learn Procedure Important: Do NOT perform this procedure if DTCs are set. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 1. Start and idle the engine in PARK for 3 minutes. 2. With a scan tool, monitor desired and actual RPM. 3. The ECM will start to learn the new idle cells and Desired RPM should start to decrease. 4. Ignition OFF for 60 seconds. 5. Start and idle the engine in PARK for 3 minutes. 6. After the 3 minute run time the engine should be idling normal. Important: During the drive cycle the check engine light may come on with idle speed DTCs. If idle speed codes are set, clear codes so the ECM can continue to learn. ^ If the engine idle speed has not been learned the vehicle will need to be driven at speeds above 70 km/h (44 mph) with several decelerations and extended idles. 7. After the drive cycle, the engine should be idling normally. ^ If the engine idle speed has not been learned, turn OFF the ignition for 60 seconds and repeat step 6. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11009 8. Once the engine speed has returned to normal, clear DTCs and return to the diagnostic that referred you here. Throttle Body Cleaning Throttle Body Cleaning 1. Remove the air cleaner intake duct. Caution: Turn OFF the ignition before inserting fingers into the throttle bore. Unexpected movement of the throttle blade could cause personal injury. Notice: Do not insert any tools into the throttle body bore in order to avoid damage to the throttle valve plate. 2. Inspect the throttle body bore and the throttle plate for deposits. You will need to open the throttle plate in order to inspect all surfaces. Notice: Do not use any solvent that contains Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent may damage fuel system components. 3. Clean the throttle body bore and the throttle plate using a clean shop towel with GM Top Engine Cleaner, P/N 1052626 or AC-Delco Carburetor Tune-Up Conditioner, P/N X66-P, or an equivalent product. 4. Install the air cleaner intake duct. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11010 Throttle Body: Removal and Replacement Throttle Body Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Handle the electronic throttle control components carefully. Use cleanliness in order to prevent damage. Do not drop the electronic throttle control components. Do not roughly handle the electronic throttle control components. Do not immerse the electronic throttle control components in cleaning solvents of any type. Important: * DO NOT for any reason, insert a screwdriver or other small hand tool into the throttle body to hold open the throttle plate as a wedge, as the inside of the throttle body could be damaged. * An 8 digit part identification number is stamped on the throttle body casting. Refer to this number if servicing, or part replacement is required. 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. 3. Disconnect the throttle actuator control motor electrical connector (3). 4. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge tube from the throttle body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11011 5. Remove the throttle body bolts (538). 6. Remove the throttle body (508). 7. Remove and discard the throttle body gasket (509). Installation Procedure Important: DO NOT reuse the throttle body gasket. Install a NEW gasket during assembly. 1. Install a NEW throttle body gasket (509). Align the locating tab of the gasket with the notch in the manifold. 2. Position the throttle body (508) to the intake manifold. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the throttle body bolts (538). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11012 4. Connect the EVAP canister purge tube to the throttle body. Important: Verify that the throttle actuator motor harness connector and the connector seal are properly installed and not damaged. 5. Connect the throttle actuator control motor electrical connector (3). 6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. 7. Install the engine sight shield. 8. Connect a scan tool in order to test for proper throttle opening and throttle closing ranges. 9. Operate the accelerator pedal and monitor the throttle angles. The accelerator pedal should operate freely, without binding, between closed throttle, and wide open throttle (WOT). 10. Verify that the vehicle meets the following conditions: * The vehicle is not in a reduced engine power mode. * The ignition is ON. * The engine is OFF. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11017 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11018 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11019 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11020 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11021 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11022 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11023 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11024 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11025 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11026 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11027 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11028 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11029 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11030 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11031 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11032 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11033 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11034 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11035 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11036 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11037 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11038 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11039 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11040 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11041 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11042 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11043 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11044 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11045 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11046 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11047 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11048 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11049 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11050 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11051 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11052 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11053 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11054 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11055 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11056 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11057 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11058 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11059 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11060 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11061 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11062 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11063 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11064 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11065 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11066 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11067 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11068 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11069 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11070 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11071 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11072 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11073 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11074 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11075 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11076 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11077 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11078 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11079 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11080 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11081 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11082 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11083 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11084 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11085 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11086 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11087 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11088 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11089 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11090 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11091 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11092 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11093 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11094 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11095 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11096 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11097 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11098 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11099 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11100 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11101 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11102 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11103 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11104 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11105 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11106 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11107 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11108 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11109 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11110 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11111 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11112 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11113 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11114 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11115 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11116 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11117 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11118 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11119 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11120 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11121 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11122 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11123 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11124 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11125 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11126 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11127 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11128 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11129 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11130 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11131 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11132 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11133 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11134 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11135 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11136 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11137 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11138 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11139 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11140 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11141 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11142 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11143 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order.......................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11153 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11154 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11155 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11156 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11157 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11158 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11159 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11160 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11161 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11162 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11163 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11164 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11165 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11166 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11167 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11168 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11169 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11170 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11171 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11172 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11173 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11174 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11175 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11176 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11177 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11178 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11179 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11180 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11181 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11182 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11183 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11184 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11185 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11186 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11187 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11188 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11189 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11190 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11191 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11192 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11193 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11194 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11195 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11196 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11197 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11198 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11199 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11200 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11201 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11202 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11203 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11204 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11205 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11206 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11207 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11208 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11209 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11210 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11211 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11212 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11213 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11214 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11215 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11216 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11217 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11218 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11219 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11220 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11221 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11222 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11223 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11224 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11225 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11226 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11227 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11228 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11229 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11230 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11231 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11232 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11233 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11234 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11235 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11236 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11237 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11238 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11239 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11240 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11241 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11242 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11243 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11244 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11245 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11246 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11247 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11248 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11249 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11250 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11251 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11252 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11253 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11254 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11255 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11256 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11257 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11258 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11259 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11260 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11261 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11262 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11263 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11264 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11265 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11266 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11267 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11268 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11269 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11270 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11271 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11272 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11273 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11274 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11275 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11276 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11277 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11278 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11279 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11280 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11281 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11282 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11288 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11289 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11290 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11291 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11292 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11293 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11294 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11295 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11296 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11297 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11298 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11299 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11300 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11301 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11302 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11303 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11304 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11305 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11306 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11307 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11308 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11309 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11310 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11311 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11312 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11313 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11314 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11315 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11316 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11317 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11318 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11319 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11320 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11321 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11322 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11323 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11324 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11325 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11326 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11327 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11328 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11329 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11330 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11331 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11332 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11333 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11334 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11335 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11336 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11337 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11338 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11339 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11340 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11341 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11342 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11343 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11344 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11345 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11346 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11347 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11348 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11349 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11350 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11351 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11352 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11353 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11354 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11355 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11356 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11357 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11358 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11359 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11360 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11361 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11362 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11363 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11364 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11365 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11366 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11367 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11368 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11369 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11370 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11371 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11372 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11373 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11374 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11375 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11376 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11377 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11378 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11379 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11380 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11381 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11382 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11383 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11384 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11385 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11386 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11387 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11388 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11389 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11390 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11391 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11392 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11393 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11394 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11395 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11396 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11397 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11398 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11399 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11400 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11401 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11402 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11403 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11404 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11405 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11406 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11407 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11408 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11409 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11410 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11411 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11412 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11413 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11415 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 11418 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 11419 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Cable: Specifications Spark Plug Wire Resistance................................................................................................................. ...........................................................397-1,337 ohms Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11423 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark plug wire integrity is vital for proper engine operation. A thorough inspection will be necessary to accurately identify conditions that may affect engine operation. Inspect for the following conditions: 1. Correct routing of the spark plug wires. Incorrect routing may cause cross-firing. 2. Any signs of cracks or splits in the wires. 3. Inspect each boot for the following conditions: * Tearing * Piercing * Arcing * Carbon tracking * Corroded terminal If corrosion, carbon tracking, or arcing are indicated on a spark plug wire boot or on a terminal, replace the wire and the component connected to the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11424 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair Spark Plug Wire Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the spark plug wire from the spark plug. 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the spark plug. 2. Remove the spark plug wire from the ignition coil (724). 1. Twist the spark plug wire boot a 1/2 turn. 2. Pull only on the boot in order to remove the wire from the ignition coil. Installation Procedure 1. Install the spark plug wire to the ignition coil (724). 2. Install the spark plug wire to the spark plug. 3. Inspect the spark plug wire for proper installation: 1. Push sideways on each boot in order to inspect the seating. 2. Reinstall any loose boot. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams Ignition Coil: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Ignition Coil 1 (LS4) Ignition Coil 2 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11428 Ignition Coil 3 (LS4) Ignition Coil 4 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11429 Ignition Coil 5 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11430 Ignition Coil 6 (LS4) Ignition Coil 7 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11431 Ignition Coil 8 (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11432 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11433 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Replacement Removal Procedure Important: The following procedure shows the left side service procedure, the right side service procedure is similar. 1. Remove the engine sight shield. 2. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer (3). 3. Disconnect the ignition coil main electrical connector (4). 4. Remove the spark plug wire(s) (724) from the ignition coil(s), as necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11434 5. Remove the ignition coil bolts (723), as necessary. 6. Remove the ignition coil(s) (722), as necessary. Installation Procedure 1. Apply threadlock GM P/N 12345382 (Canadian P/N 10953489) or equivalent to the threads of the ignition coil bolts. 2. Install the ignition coil(s) (722), as necessary. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 3. Install the ignition coil bolts (723), as necessary. Tighten the bolts to 8 N.m (71 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11435 4. Install the spark plug wire(s) (724) to the ignition coil(s), as necessary. 5. Connect the left ignition coil main electrical connector (4). 6. Install the CPA retainer (3). 7. Install the engine sight shield. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11439 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11442 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11443 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11444 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11445 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11446 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11447 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11448 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11449 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11450 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11451 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11452 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11453 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11454 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11455 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11456 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11457 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11458 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11459 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11460 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11461 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11462 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11463 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11464 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11465 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11466 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11467 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11468 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11469 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11470 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11471 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11472 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11473 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11474 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11475 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11476 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11477 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11478 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11479 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11480 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11481 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11482 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11483 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11484 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11485 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11486 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11487 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11488 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11489 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11490 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11491 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11492 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11493 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11494 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11495 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11496 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11497 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11498 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11499 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11500 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11501 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11502 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11503 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11504 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11505 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11506 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11507 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11508 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11509 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11510 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11511 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11512 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11513 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11514 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11515 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11516 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11517 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11518 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11519 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11520 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11521 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11522 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11523 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11524 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11525 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11526 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11527 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11528 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11529 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11530 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11531 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11532 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11533 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11534 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11535 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11536 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11537 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11538 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11539 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11540 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11541 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11542 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11543 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11544 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11545 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11546 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11547 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11548 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11549 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11550 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11551 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11552 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11553 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11554 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11555 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11556 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11557 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11558 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11559 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11560 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11561 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11562 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11563 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11564 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11565 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11566 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11567 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11569 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11570 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11571 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11572 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11573 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11574 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11575 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11582 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11583 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11584 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11585 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11586 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11587 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11588 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11589 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11590 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11591 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11592 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11593 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11594 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11595 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11596 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11597 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11598 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11599 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11600 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11601 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11602 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11603 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11604 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11605 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11606 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11607 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11608 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11609 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11610 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11611 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11612 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11613 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11614 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11615 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11616 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11617 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11618 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11619 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11620 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11621 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11622 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11623 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11624 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11625 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11626 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11627 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11628 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11629 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11630 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11631 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11632 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11633 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11634 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11635 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11636 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11637 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11638 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11639 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11640 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11641 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11642 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11643 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11644 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11645 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11646 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11647 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11648 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11649 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11650 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11651 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11652 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11653 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11654 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11655 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11656 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11657 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11658 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11659 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11660 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11661 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11662 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11663 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11664 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11665 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11666 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11667 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11668 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11669 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11670 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11671 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11672 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11673 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11674 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11675 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11676 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11677 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11678 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11679 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11680 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11681 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11682 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11683 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11684 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11685 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11686 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11687 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11688 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11689 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11690 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11691 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11692 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11693 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11694 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11695 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11696 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11697 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11698 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11699 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11700 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11701 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11702 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11703 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11704 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11705 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11706 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11707 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11708 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11709 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11710 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). 3. Remove the CMP sensor (703). 4. Inspect the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704) for cuts or damage. If the seal is not cut or damaged, it may be reused. 5. Remove the CMP sensor O-ring seal (704), if necessary. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 11711 1. Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the O-ring seal (704) onto the CMP sensor, if necessary. 3. Install the CMP sensor (703). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Remove the CMP sensor bolt (705). Tighten the bolt to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Rear of Engine (LS4) Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11717 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11718 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11719 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11720 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11721 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11722 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11723 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11724 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11725 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11726 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11727 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11728 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11729 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11730 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11731 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11732 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11733 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11734 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11735 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11736 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11737 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11738 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11739 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11740 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11741 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11742 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11743 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11744 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11745 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11746 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11747 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11748 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11749 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11750 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11751 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11752 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11753 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11754 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11755 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11756 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11757 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11758 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11759 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11760 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11761 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11762 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11763 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11764 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11765 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11766 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11767 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11768 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11769 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11770 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11771 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11772 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11773 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11774 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11775 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11776 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11777 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11778 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11779 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11780 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11781 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11782 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11783 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11784 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11785 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11786 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11787 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11788 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11789 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11790 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11791 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11792 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11793 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11794 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11795 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11796 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11797 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11798 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11799 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11800 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11801 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11802 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11803 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11804 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11805 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11806 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11807 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11808 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11809 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11810 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11811 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11812 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11813 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11814 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11815 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11816 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11817 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11818 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11819 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11820 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11821 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11822 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11823 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11824 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11825 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11826 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11827 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11828 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11829 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11830 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11831 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11832 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11833 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11834 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11835 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11836 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11837 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11838 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11839 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11840 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11841 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11842 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11843 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11844 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Vehicle Lifting Caution. 1. Remove the right exhaust manifold. 2. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector (1). Important: Clean the area around the CKP before removal in order to avoid debris from entering the engine. 3. Remove the CKP sensor bolt. 4. Remove the CKP sensor. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 11847 1. Install the CKP sensor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the CKP sensor bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the right exhaust manifold. 5. Perform the CKP system variation learn procedure. Refer to Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn. See: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement > Page 11848 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn Crankshaft Position System Variation Learn 1. Install a scan tool. 2. Monitor the engine control module (ECM) for DTCs with a scan tool. If other DTCs are set, except DTC P0315, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 3. Select the crankshaft position (CKP) variation learn procedure with a scan tool. 4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: 1. Accelerate to wide open throttle (WOT). 2. Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. 3. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. 4. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. 5. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. 6. Block drive wheels. 7. Set parking brake. 8. DO NOT apply brake pedal. 9. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. 10. Apply and hold brake pedal. 11. Start and idle engine. 12. Turn A/C OFF. 13. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. 14. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: * CKP sensors activity-If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Camshaft position (CMP) sensor activity-If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. * Engine coolant temperature (ECT)-If the ECT is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature. 5. Enable the CKP System Variation Learn Procedure with a scan tool. Important: While the learn procedure is in progress, release the throttle immediately when the engine starts to decelerate. The engine control is returned to the operator and the engine responds to throttle position after the learn procedure is complete. 6. Accelerate to WOT. 7. Release when the fuel cut-off occurs. 8. Test in progress. 9. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool indicates that DTC P0315 ran and passed, the CKP Variation Learn Procedure is complete. If the scan tool indicates DTC P0315 failed or did not run, refer to DTC P0315. If any other DTCs set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for the applicable DTC that set. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0315 See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully. 11. The CKP Variation Learn Procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: * A CKP sensor replacement * An engine replacement * A ECM replacement * A harmonic balancer replacement * A crankshaft replacement * Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Front of the Passenger Compartment, in the Steering Column 1 - Ignition Switch 2 - Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) 3 - Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 11853 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Procedures Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Special Tools BO-48370 Lock Cylinder Cap Installer Ignition Lock Cylinder The column-mount ignition lock cylinder uses 7 of the 10 key cut positions, 1, 2, and 4 through 8, when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on one side and 3 on the other. Important: The ignition lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the tumbler retainers (4) are properly staked into the cylinder. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder assembly (1) positioned so the side with the retention lug is facing upward, spring-loaded retainer facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 3 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 1, the first number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. It may be necessary to move the sidebar (5), already pre-assembled into the uncoded cylinder assembly, out slightly to fully install the tumbler into the correct tumbler slot. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 2 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5 and 7. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 6. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) so that the side with the retention lug is facing downward, spring-loaded retainer facing upward, and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11856 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 2. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 4, 6, and 8. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the cylinder assembly (1), install and stake one tumbler retainer (4) into the recessed area on the cylinder. Be careful not to damage the cylinder assembly in any way while staking the tumbler retainer. 13. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) to the opposite side and repeat the procedure defined in the previous step. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder The front side door lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3 through 10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Important: The front side door lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case assembly (4). Left side shown, right side opposite. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing upward, as shown. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check the correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing downward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11857 are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. Hold the case assembly (4), left side shown, right side opposite, with the pre-staked detent spring retainer facing downward. 13. First insert one detent spring (5) and then one detent ball (6) into the detent spring hole located to the rear and inside of the cylinder case assembly (4). The detent spring and detent ball are not self-retaining and must be held in place until the coded cylinder is installed into the case assembly. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 14. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case assembly (4). Make sure the detent spring (5) and detent ball (6) are held in place until the coded cylinder is fully installed. The detent ball should line up with the V-shaped groove on the rear of the cylinder, which will prevent the detent spring and detent ball from falling out of the case assembly. 15. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case assembly (4). 16. Insert one shutter spring (7) each into the two shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 17. Install the shutter assembly (8) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. 18. Install the lock cylinder cap (9) by aligning the drain hole in the cap with the bottom of the case assembly (4). Snap the cap into place with light hand pressure. Be sure the cap is securely retained on the case assembly. Also, be sure that the shutter springs (7) push the shutter assembly (8) up against the inside surface of the cap. 19. Install the lever (10), left side shown, right side opposite, onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (11) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (10) to the cylinder. Rear Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder - Police Vehicles 9C1 and 9C3 The rear compartment lid lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3-10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11858 Important: The rear compartment lid lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key is not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case (4). 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the drain hole is facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so that the side with the drain hole is facing upward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the open tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers into the tumbler slots located at key Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11859 cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case (4). 13. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case (4). 14. Insert one shutter spring (5) each into the 2 shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 15. Install the shutter assembly (6) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. Important: Be careful not to scratch or dent the cosmetic surface of the cap or damage the lock cylinder in any way while staking the cap. 16. Stake the cap (7) onto the head of the case (4) by using the appropriate staking tool BO-48370. Ensure proper orientation and set the cylinder assembly (14), (which includes the case (4), coded cylinder (1), shutter springs (5), and shutter assembly (6)) and the cap (7) into the staking cup (15) and clamp into vise. Remove any debris and install the cleaned staking ram (16) into staking cup (15) and with a dead blow hammer, hit the staking ram (16) with moderate force 2 or 3 times. Check to determine if cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly (14). Repeat previous step until cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly. Remove assembly from the staking cup (15). If necessary, insert the removal punch (17) into the opposite end of the staking cup and tap lightly. Confirm that the shutter springs (5) push the shutter assembly (6) up against the inside surface of the cap (7). 17. Install the gasket (8) over the end of the cylinder assembly and slide it all the way up the case (4) until it seats behind the cap (7). 18. Install the return spring (9) over the back end of the cylinder (1) with the straight hook facing the rear of the case (4). Engage the straight hook of the return spring with the hook feature on the rear of the case. 19. Install the spacer (10) and lever (11) onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (12) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (11) to the cylinder. Engage the bent hook of the return spring (9) with the lever. 21. Install the theft deterrent switch (13) onto the end of the cylinder (1) and snap the switch legs onto the case (4). Be sure the theft deterrent switch is engaged with the end of the cylinder and is securely attached to the case. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11860 22. Check the operation of the lock assembly. The return spring (9) should provide a counterclockwise snap back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11861 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. Remove the ignition switch. 4. Remove the steering column tilt head components. 5. Remove the turn signal switch housing. 6. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11862 7. Remove the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case in the following way: 1. Use a small blade to push against the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1). 2. Disconnect the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case. 8. Remove the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) from the ignition lock cylinder case (1). 9. Remove the ignition lock cylinder case (1) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the ignition lock cylinder case (1) with the steering column tilt head assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Screw the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) into the ignition lock cylinder case (1). Tighten the 3 TORX(R) screws to 7 N.m (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11863 3. Press the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1) into the slot in the ignition lock cylinder case. Important: Press the turn signal switch housing firmly against the steering column tilt head in order for the screws from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly to align. 4. Install the turn signal switch housing. 5. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. 6. Install the steering column tilt head components. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11864 7. Install the ignition switch only. 8. Install the ignition lock cylinder. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of Engine (LS4) Front Of Engine 1 - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 - Ignition Coil 1 3 - Ignition Coil 3 4 - Ignition Coil 5 5 - Ignition Coil 7 6 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 7 - Throttle Body 8 - Engine Coolant Heater 9 - Knock Sensor (KS) 1 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Rear of Engine (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11868 Rear Of Engine 1 - Ignition Coil 7 2 - Throttle Body 3 - Ignition Coil 8 4 - Ignition Coil 6 5 - Ignition Coil 4 6 - Ignition Coil 2 7 - Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) 1 8 - Knock Sensor (KS) 2 9 - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 10 - Engine Oil Level Switch 11 - Valve Lifter Oil Manifold (VLOM) Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11871 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11872 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11873 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11874 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11875 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11876 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11877 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11878 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11879 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11880 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11881 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11882 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11883 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11884 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11885 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11886 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11887 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11888 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11889 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11890 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11891 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11892 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11893 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11894 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11895 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11896 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11897 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11898 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11899 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11900 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11901 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11902 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11903 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11904 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11905 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11906 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11907 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11908 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11909 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11910 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11911 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11912 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11913 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11914 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11915 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11916 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11917 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11918 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11919 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11920 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11921 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11922 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11923 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11924 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11925 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11926 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11927 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11928 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11929 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11930 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11931 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11932 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11933 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11934 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11935 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11936 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11937 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11938 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11939 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11940 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11941 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11942 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11943 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11944 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11945 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11946 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11947 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11948 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11949 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11950 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11951 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11952 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11953 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11954 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11955 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11956 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11957 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11958 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11959 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11960 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11961 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11962 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11963 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11964 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11965 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11966 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11967 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11968 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11969 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11970 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11971 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11972 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11973 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11974 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11975 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11976 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11977 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11978 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11979 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11980 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11981 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11982 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11983 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11984 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11985 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11986 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11987 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11988 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11989 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11990 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11991 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11992 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11993 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11994 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11995 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11996 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11997 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11998 Knock Sensor: Connector Views Component Connector End Views - Continued Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 1 Knock Sensor (KS) Bank 2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11999 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12000 Knock Sensor: Service Precautions Knock Sensor Service Caution Caution: Hot engine coolant may cause severe burns. Although the cooling system has been drained, coolant still remains in the engine water jacket. This coolant will drain with the removal of the knock sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12001 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Knock Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). 2. Disconnect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 3. Remove the left knock sensor bolt, if required. 4. Remove the left knock sensor, if required. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12002 5. Disconnect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 6. Remove the right knock sensor bolt, if required. 7. Remove the right knock sensor, if required. Installation Procedure 1. Position the right knock sensor to the engine block, if required. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12003 2. Install the right knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Connect the right knock sensor electrical connector (2), if required. 4. Position the left knock sensor to the engine block, if required. 5. Install the left knock sensor bolt, if required. Tighten the bolt to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12004 6. Connect the left knock sensor electrical connector, if required. 7. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap.................................................................................................................................... .......................................................1.02 mm - 0.040 in Spark Plug Torque.......................................... ................................................................................................................................................15 N.m 11 lb ft Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12008 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type..........................................................................................................................................GM P/N 12571164 (AC Spark Plug P/N 41-985) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12009 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection Spark Plug Usage * Verify that the correct spark plug is installed. An incorrect spark plug causes driveability conditions. Refer to Ignition System Specifications for the correct spark plug. * Ensure that the spark plug has the correct heat range. An incorrect heat range causes the following conditions: - Spark plug fouling - colder plug - Pre-ignition causing spark plug and/or engine damage - hotter plug Spark Plug Inspection * Inspect the terminal post (1) for damage. - Inspect for a bent or broken terminal post (1). - Test for a loose terminal post (1) by twisting and pulling the post. The terminal post (1) should NOT move. * Inspect the insulator (2) for flashover or carbon tracking, soot. This is caused by the electrical charge traveling across the insulator (2) between the terminal post (1) and ground. Inspect for the following conditions: - Inspect the spark plug boot for damage. - Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for moisture, such as oil, coolant, or water. A spark plug boot that is saturated causes arcing to ground. * Inspect the insulator (2) for cracks. All or part of the electrical charge may arc through the crack instead of the electrodes (3, 4). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12010 * Inspect for evidence of improper arcing. - Measure the gap between the center electrode (4) and the side electrode (3) terminals. An excessively-wide electrode gap can prevent correct spark plug operation. - Inspect for the correct spark plug torque. Insufficient torque can prevent correct spark plug operation. An over-torqued spark plug, causes the insulator (2) to crack. - Inspect for signs of tracking that occurred near the insulator tip instead of the center electrode (4). - Inspect for a broken or worn side electrode (3). - Inspect for a broken, worn, or loose center electrode (4) by shaking the spark plug. * A rattling sound indicates internal damage. * A loose center electrode (4) reduces the spark intensity. - Inspect for bridged electrodes (3, 4). Deposits on the electrodes reduce or eliminates the gap. - Inspect for worn or missing platinum pads on the electrodes (3, 4), if equipped. - Inspect for excessive fouling. * Inspect the spark plug recess area of the cylinder head for debris. Dirty or damaged threads can cause the spark plug not to seat correctly during installation. Spark Plug Visual Inspection * Normal operation - Brown to grayish-tan with small amounts of white powdery deposits are normal combustion by-products from fuels with additives. * Carbon Fouled - Dry, fluffy black carbon, or soot caused by the following conditions: - Rich fuel mixtures * Leaking fuel injectors * Excessive fuel pressure * Restricted air filter element * Incorrect combustion - Reduced ignition system voltage output * Weak coils * Worn ignition wires * Incorrect spark plug gap - Excessive idling or slow speeds under light loads can keep spark plug temperatures so low that normal combustion deposits may not burn off. * Deposit Fouling - Oil, coolant, or additives that include substances such as silicone, very white coating, reduces the spark intensity. Most powdery deposits will not effect spark intensity unless they form into a glazing over the electrode. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12011 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: This engine has aluminum cylinder heads. Do not remove the spark plugs from a hot engine, allow it to cool first. Removing the spark plugs from a hot engine may cause spark plug thread damage or cylinder head damage. 1. Remove the spark plug wire. 2. Loosen the spark plug 1 or 2 turns. 3. Brush or using compressed air, blow away any dirt from around the spark plug. 4. Remove the spark plug. If removing more than one plug, place each plug in a tray marked with the corresponding cylinder number. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 12012 1. Correctly position the spark plug washer. 2. Inspect the spark plug gap. Adjust the gap as needed. Spark plug gap: 1.016 mm (0.040 in). 3. Hand start the spark plug in the corresponding cylinder. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 4. Tighten the spark plug. Tighten the plug to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 5. Install the spark plug wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12019 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the pressure control solenoid (PCS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the PCS retaining clip (314E). 4. Remove the PCS (322). Installation Procedure 1. Install the PCS (322). 2. Install the PCS retaining clip (314E). 3. Connect the PCS electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 12028 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 12034 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12035 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Notice: To prevent component damage, DO NOT use metal tools to remove the trim. Important: Use only a plastic trim tool to lift the shift lever bezel or trim plate. Do not use any tool between the shift lever bezel or trim plate and the shifter. 2. Remove the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 4. Remove both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator from the pivot points. Installation Procedure 1. Install both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator to the pivot points. 2. Connect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 3. Install the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Shift Solenoid: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12041 Shift Solenoid: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views In the Center Console - Floor Shifter In the Center Console - Floor Shifter 1 - Floor Shifter 2 - A/T Shift Lock Control Solenoid Steering Column Components - Column Shift Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12042 Lower Steering Column Components 1 - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Solenoid 2 - Steering Column Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12045 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12046 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12047 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12048 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12049 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12050 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12051 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12052 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12053 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12054 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12055 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12056 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12057 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12058 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12059 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12060 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12061 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12062 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12063 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12064 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12065 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12066 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12067 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12068 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12069 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12070 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12071 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12072 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12073 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12074 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12075 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12076 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12077 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12078 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12079 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12080 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12081 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12082 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12083 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12084 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12085 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12086 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12087 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12088 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12089 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12090 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12091 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12092 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12093 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12094 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12095 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12096 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12097 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12098 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12099 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12100 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12101 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12102 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12103 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12104 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12105 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12106 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12107 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12108 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12109 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12110 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12111 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12112 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12113 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12114 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12115 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12116 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12117 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12118 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12119 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12120 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12121 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12122 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12123 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12124 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12125 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12126 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12127 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12128 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12129 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12130 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12131 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12132 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12133 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12134 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12135 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12136 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12137 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12138 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12139 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12140 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12141 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12142 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12143 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12144 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12145 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12146 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12147 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12148 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12149 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12150 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12151 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12152 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12153 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12154 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12155 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12156 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12157 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12158 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12159 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12160 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12161 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12162 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12163 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12164 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12165 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12166 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12167 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12168 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12169 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12170 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12171 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12172 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Component Connector End Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (1-2 SS) Valve 2-3 Shift Solenoid (2-3 SS) Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12173 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D) 4. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). Installation Procedure 1. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). 2. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D). 3. Connect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement > Page 12176 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 4. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B) and the O-ring (316). Installation Procedure 1. Install the O-ring (316) and the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B). 2. Install the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 3. Connect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that the transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn the TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12182 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12183 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12184 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12185 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12186 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12187 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12188 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12189 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12190 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12191 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12192 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12193 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12194 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12195 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12196 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12197 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12198 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12199 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12200 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12201 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12202 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12203 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12204 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12205 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12206 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12207 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12208 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12209 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12210 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12211 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12212 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12213 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12214 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12215 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12216 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12217 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12218 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12219 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12220 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12221 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12222 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12223 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12224 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12225 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12226 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12227 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12228 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12229 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12230 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12231 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12232 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12233 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12234 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12235 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12236 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12237 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12238 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12239 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12240 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12241 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12242 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12243 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12244 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12245 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12246 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12247 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12248 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12249 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12250 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12251 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12252 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12253 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12254 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12255 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12256 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12257 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12258 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12259 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12260 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12261 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12262 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12263 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12264 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12265 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12266 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12267 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12268 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12269 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12270 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12271 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12272 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12273 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12274 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12275 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12276 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12277 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12278 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12279 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12280 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12281 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12282 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12283 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12284 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12285 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12286 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12287 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12288 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12289 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12290 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12291 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12292 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12293 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12294 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12295 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12296 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12297 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12298 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12299 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12300 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12301 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12302 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12303 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12304 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12305 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12306 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12307 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12308 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314) 4. Remove the TCC solenoid (315). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC solenoid (315). 2. Install the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314). 3. Connect the TCC solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12311 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect and reposition the electrical connectors from the following: * If equipped internal mode switch * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) 3. Remove the oil pump bolts (230, 231). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12312 4. Remove the oil pump (200) from the valve body (300). 5. Disconnect the torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid electrical connector. 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid (334). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC PWM solenoid (334). 2. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 3. Connect the TCC PWM solenoid electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12313 4. Install the oil pump (200) to the valve body (300). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the oil pump body and cover bolts (230, 230). * Tighten the nine bolts (231) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the two bolts (230) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12314 6. Reposition and connect the electrical connectors to the following: * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * If equipped internal mode switch 7. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 8. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 12321 Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12322 Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Transmission Control Module (TCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12323 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12324 Control Module: Service and Repair Transmission Control Module Replacement Transmission Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12331 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12332 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12333 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness. 3. Remove the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the fluid pressure manual valve position switch to the control valve body (300). Important: When removing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 4. Carefully remove the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). 5. Inspect the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395) for the following conditions: * Damaged electrical connector terminals * Damaged seals * Damaged switch membranes * Debris on the switch membranes Installation Procedure Important: When installing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 1. Carefully install the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the TFP switch to the control valve body (300). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (375) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (379) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (381) to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Connect the transaxle wiring harness. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12334 Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Mode Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12339 Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12340 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12345 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12346 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (AT ISS) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12347 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 4. Remove the input speed sensor (440). 5. Inspect the input speed sensor (440) for the following conditions: * Damaged or missing magnet * Damaged housing * Bent or missing electrical terminals * Damaged speed sensor clip (441) Installation Procedure 1. Install the input speed sensor (440). 2. Install the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 3. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12353 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12354 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness assembly from the fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (391). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fluid temperature sensor (391). 2. Connect the wiring harness assembly to the with fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 4. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 12357 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Thermo Element Replacement Thermo Element Replacement Tools Required J 34094-A Thermo Element Height Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the thermo element pins (120, 123) and the washers. 4. Remove the thermo element (121) and the thermo element plate (122). Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 34094-A to set the middle thermo pin (123). 2. Install the new thermo element plate (122). 3. Install the pin (120) and the washer. 4. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the pin and the washer furthest from the accumulator. 5. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the second pin (120) and the washer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 12358 6. Install the thermo element (121) between the two pins (120). The V in the thermo element (121) must contact the thermo element plate (122). 7. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 9. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026C Date: August 13, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine , transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 12363 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 12364 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 12365 Note All pictures must be sent as a.jpg file. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 12366 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine/Transmission Aftermarket Calibrations INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-06-04-026B Date: April 07, 2010 Subject: Identifying Non-GM (Aftermarket) Engine and Transmission Calibrations for V8 Gas Engines Using Tech 2(R) or Global Diagnostic System (GDS) Models: 2006-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Excluding Saab 9-7X) 2006-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 Equipped with V8 Gas Powered Engines Only Attention: This bulletin applies to V8 gas powered engines ONLY. For Duramax(TM) diesel powered engines, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-04-006G. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and information about retrieving calibrations on a Global A vehicle. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-04-026A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). General Motors is identifying an increasing number of engine, transmission and catalytic converter part failures that are the result of non-GM (aftermarket) engine and transmission control calibrations being used. When alteration to the GM-released engine or transmission control calibrations occurs, it subjects powertrain and driveline components (engine, transmission, transfer case, driveshaft and rear axle) to stresses that were not tested by General Motors. It is because of these unknown stresses, and the potential to alter reliability, durability and emissions performance, that GM has adopted a policy that prevents any UNAUTHORIZED dealer warranty claim submissions to any remaining warranty coverage, to the powertrain and driveline components whenever the presence of a non-GM (aftermarket) calibration is confirmed - even if the non-GM control module calibration is subsequently removed. Warranty coverage is based on the equipment and calibrations that were released on the vehicle at time of sale, or subsequently updated by GM. That's because GM testing and validation matches the calibration to a host of criteria that is essential to assure reliability, durability and emissions performance over the life of the warranty coverage and beyond. Stresses resulting from calibrations different from those tested and released by GM can damage or weaken components, leading to poor performance and or shortened life. Additionally, non-GM (aftermarket) issued engine control modifications often do not meet the same emissions performance standards as GM issued calibrations. Depending on state statutes, individuals who install engine control module calibrations that put the vehicle outside the parameters of emissions certification standards may be subject to fines and/or penalties. This bulletin outlines a procedure to identify the presence of non-GM (aftermarket) calibrations. GM recommends performing this check whenever a hard part failure is seen on internal engine or transmission components, or before an engine assembly or transmission assembly is being replaced under warranty. It is also recommended that the engine calibration verification procedure be performed whenever diagnostics indicate that catalytic converter replacement is indicated. The PQC has a process to confirm the ECM/PCM calibration is GM issued. The PQC will require a picture of the engine calibration verification screen, as outlined in this bulletin, before authorizing any V8 gas powered engine replacement. If a non-GM calibration is found and verification has taken place through GM, the remaining powertrain and driveline warranty will be blocked and notated in GMVIS and the dealership will be notified. This block prevents any UNAUTHORIZED warranty claim submission. 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 2. Go to: Diagnostics and build the vehicle. 3. Select: Powertrain. 4. Select: Engine. 5. *Select: Engine Control Module or PCM. 6. *Select: Module ID Information or I/M Information System if the Module ID Information selection is not available. 7. *If "I/M information System" was selected, it may be necessary to select "Vehicle Information" in order to display the calibration information. ‹› If the CVN information is displayed as "N/A", it will be necessary to contact the TCSC to obtain the CVN information. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 12367 8. Take a CLEAR digital picture of the Tech 2(R) Vehicle Information screen showing the engine Calibration IDs and Verification Numbers as shown above. Retain the printout information and the Tech 2(R) screen photograph with the repair order. 9. E-mail a copy of the picture to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 10. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 11. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Tech 2(R) Displaying All Zeroes for the Verification Numbers on the Calibration ID and Verification Number Screen If the Tech 2(R) that you are using displays all zeroes for the Verification Numbers as shown, then perform the following steps: 1. Update the Tech 2(R) with the latest software from TIS2WEB. 2. Turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds. 3. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle. 4. Turn ON the ignition, and build the vehicle. Observe the Tech 2(R) Calibration ID and Verification Number screen for proper operation. ‹› If the Tech 2(R) screen still does not display properly, then turn OFF the ignition for 90 seconds again. Turn ON the ignition and observe the same screen for proper operation. Retrieving Calibrations From a Global A Vehicle This information applies to the 2010 Camaro and is typical of the procedure that will be used on Global A vehicles. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Connect the MDI to the Data Link Connector (DLC) of the vehicle. Note Use the USB port to make the following MDI connection: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 12368 3. Connect the MDI to a PC or laptop that has been downloaded with the GDS application from TIS2WEB. Note At least one Diagnostic Package must be installed on the PC to perform diagnostics. If GDS was just installed, select: Add New Diagnostic Package and then select: a Diagnostic Package to download. 4. Click: On the GDS icon on the PC. 5. The Login Page will appear. 6. Select: A User. 7. The ID Screen will appear. 8. Select: The serial number of the MDI being used. 9. Select: Connect. 10. Verify that the system status is ready by observing for a flashing PC light icon on the MDI. 11. Select: Make, Model and Model Year, in order to build the vehicle. 12. Click: Upload VIN, to allow the VIN to be reported to the PC. 13. At: The Verification step, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. 14. Select: Next Action. 15. The Home Page will appear. 16. Select: Next. 17. The Diagnostic Screen will appear. Note Due to vehicle build, software and RPO variations, GDS may ask for additional information in Step 18. 18. Select: Engine ID, if prompted. 19. Select: Module Diagnostics. 20. Select: ECM. 21. Select: ID Information. 22. The Diagnostics page will appear. Typical View of GDS Calibration History Screen Note GDS is capable of displaying up to 10 Calibration History events. 23. Select: Calibration History from the drop down menu in order to display the following items on the screen: - Calibration History Buffer - Number of Calibration History Events Stored - Calibration Part Number History - Calibration Verification Number History 24. Select: Screenshot. 25. Name and save the file in an appropriate folder. 26. Select : Print, and retain a copy of the screenshot with the repair order. 27. E-mail a copy of the screenshot to [email protected]. In the subject line of the e-mail include the phrase "V8 Cal" as well as the complete VIN and Dealer BAC. In the body of the e-mail, include the VIN, mileage, R.O. number and BAC. Include a brief description of the customer concern and cause of the concern. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine/Transmission - Aftermarket Calibrations > Page 12369 Note The dealer will receive an e-mail reply after the calibrations have been validated. The e-mail reply will advise the dealer if the calibrations are OEM. 28. Allow two hours for the PQC to verify the calibrations and set up the case details. ‹› If the PQC determines that the calibrations ARE aftermarket calibrations, DO NOT contact GM Technical Assistance to discuss warranty concerns on the aftermarket calibrations. ALL questions and concerns about warranty should be directed to the dealers Fixed Operations Manager (FOM), (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada). 29. You may call the PQC two hours after submitting the e-mail for authorization to replace the assembly. This will provide them time to receive, review and set up a case on the request. Please be prepared to provide all the usual documentation that is normally required when requesting an assembly authorization from the PQC. Warranty Information - The Dealership Service Management must be involved in any situation that would justify the use of labor operation Z1111. - Notify the Fixed Operations Manager (FOM) (Warranty Manager (WM) in Canada) of the situation. - All claims will have to be routed to the FOM (WM in Canada) for approval. - Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-016, Labor Operation Z1111 - Suspected Tampering or Vehicle Modifications for important information. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12376 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the pressure control solenoid (PCS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the PCS retaining clip (314E). 4. Remove the PCS (322). Installation Procedure 1. Install the PCS (322). 2. Install the PCS retaining clip (314E). 3. Connect the PCS electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 12385 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 12391 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12392 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Notice: To prevent component damage, DO NOT use metal tools to remove the trim. Important: Use only a plastic trim tool to lift the shift lever bezel or trim plate. Do not use any tool between the shift lever bezel or trim plate and the shifter. 2. Remove the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 4. Remove both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator from the pivot points. Installation Procedure 1. Install both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator to the pivot points. 2. Connect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 3. Install the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Shift Solenoid: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12398 Shift Solenoid: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views In the Center Console - Floor Shifter In the Center Console - Floor Shifter 1 - Floor Shifter 2 - A/T Shift Lock Control Solenoid Steering Column Components - Column Shift Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12399 Lower Steering Column Components 1 - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Solenoid 2 - Steering Column Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12402 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12403 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12404 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12405 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12406 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12407 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12408 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12409 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12410 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12411 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12412 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12413 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12415 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12416 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12417 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12418 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12419 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12420 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12421 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12422 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12423 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12424 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12425 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12426 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12427 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12428 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12429 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12430 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12431 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12432 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12433 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12434 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12435 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12436 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12437 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12438 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12439 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12440 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12441 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12442 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12443 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12444 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12445 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12446 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12447 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12448 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12449 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12450 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12451 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12452 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12453 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12454 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12455 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12456 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12457 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12458 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12459 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12460 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12461 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12462 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12463 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12464 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12465 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12466 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12467 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12468 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12469 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12470 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12471 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12472 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12473 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12474 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12475 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12476 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12477 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12478 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12479 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12480 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12481 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12482 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12483 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12484 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12485 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12486 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12487 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12488 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12489 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12490 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12491 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12492 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12493 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12494 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12495 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12496 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12497 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12498 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12499 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12500 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12501 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12502 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12503 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12504 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12505 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12506 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12507 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12508 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12509 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12510 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12511 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12512 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12513 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12514 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12515 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12516 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12517 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12518 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12519 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12520 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12521 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12522 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12523 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12524 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12525 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12526 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12527 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12528 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12529 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Component Connector End Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (1-2 SS) Valve 2-3 Shift Solenoid (2-3 SS) Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12530 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D) 4. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). Installation Procedure 1. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). 2. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D). 3. Connect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement > Page 12533 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 4. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B) and the O-ring (316). Installation Procedure 1. Install the O-ring (316) and the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B). 2. Install the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 3. Connect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that the transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn the TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12539 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12540 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12541 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12542 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12543 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12544 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12545 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12546 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12547 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12548 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12549 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12550 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12551 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12552 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12553 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12554 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12555 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12556 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12557 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12558 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12559 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12560 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12561 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12562 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12563 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12564 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12565 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12566 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12567 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12569 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12570 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12571 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12572 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12573 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12574 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12575 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12576 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12577 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12578 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12579 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12580 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12581 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12582 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12583 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12584 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12585 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12586 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12587 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12588 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12589 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12590 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12591 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12592 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12593 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12594 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12595 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12596 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12597 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12598 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12599 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12600 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12601 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12602 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12603 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12604 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12605 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12606 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12607 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12608 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12609 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12610 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12611 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12612 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12613 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12614 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12615 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12616 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12617 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12618 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12619 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12620 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12621 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12622 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12623 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12624 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12625 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12626 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12627 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12628 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12629 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12630 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12631 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12632 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12633 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12634 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12635 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12636 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12637 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12638 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12639 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12640 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12641 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12642 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12643 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12644 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12645 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12646 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12647 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12648 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12649 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12650 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12651 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12652 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12653 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12654 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12655 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12656 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12657 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12658 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12659 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12660 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12661 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12662 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12663 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12664 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12665 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314) 4. Remove the TCC solenoid (315). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC solenoid (315). 2. Install the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314). 3. Connect the TCC solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12668 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect and reposition the electrical connectors from the following: * If equipped internal mode switch * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) 3. Remove the oil pump bolts (230, 231). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12669 4. Remove the oil pump (200) from the valve body (300). 5. Disconnect the torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid electrical connector. 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid (334). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC PWM solenoid (334). 2. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 3. Connect the TCC PWM solenoid electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12670 4. Install the oil pump (200) to the valve body (300). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the oil pump body and cover bolts (230, 230). * Tighten the nine bolts (231) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the two bolts (230) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12671 6. Reposition and connect the electrical connectors to the following: * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * If equipped internal mode switch 7. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 8. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 12677 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the pressure control solenoid (PCS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the PCS retaining clip (314E). 4. Remove the PCS (322). Installation Procedure 1. Install the PCS (322). 2. Install the PCS retaining clip (314E). 3. Connect the PCS electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 12686 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 12692 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12693 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Notice: To prevent component damage, DO NOT use metal tools to remove the trim. Important: Use only a plastic trim tool to lift the shift lever bezel or trim plate. Do not use any tool between the shift lever bezel or trim plate and the shifter. 2. Remove the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 4. Remove both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator from the pivot points. Installation Procedure 1. Install both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator to the pivot points. 2. Connect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 3. Install the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Shift Solenoid: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12699 Shift Solenoid: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views In the Center Console - Floor Shifter In the Center Console - Floor Shifter 1 - Floor Shifter 2 - A/T Shift Lock Control Solenoid Steering Column Components - Column Shift Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 12700 Lower Steering Column Components 1 - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Solenoid 2 - Steering Column Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12703 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12704 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12705 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12706 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12707 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12708 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12709 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12710 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12711 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12712 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12713 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12714 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12715 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12716 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12717 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12718 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12719 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12720 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12721 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12722 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12723 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12724 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12725 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12726 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12727 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12728 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12729 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12730 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12731 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12732 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12733 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12734 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12735 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12736 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12737 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12738 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12739 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12740 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12741 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12742 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12743 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12744 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12745 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12746 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12747 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12748 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12749 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12750 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12751 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12752 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12753 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12754 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12755 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12756 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12757 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12758 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12759 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12760 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12761 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12762 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12763 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12764 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12765 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12766 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12767 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12768 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12769 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12770 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12771 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12772 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12773 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12774 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12775 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12776 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12777 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12778 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12779 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12780 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12781 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12782 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12783 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12784 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12785 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12786 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12787 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12788 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12789 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12790 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12791 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12792 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12793 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12794 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12795 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12796 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12797 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12798 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12799 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12800 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12801 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12802 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12803 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12804 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12805 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12806 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12807 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12808 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12809 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12810 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12811 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12812 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12813 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12814 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12815 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12816 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12817 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12818 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12819 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12820 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12821 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12822 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12823 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12824 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12825 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12826 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12827 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12828 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12829 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12830 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Component Connector End Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (1-2 SS) Valve 2-3 Shift Solenoid (2-3 SS) Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12831 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D) 4. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). Installation Procedure 1. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). 2. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D). 3. Connect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement > Page 12834 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 4. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B) and the O-ring (316). Installation Procedure 1. Install the O-ring (316) and the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B). 2. Install the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 3. Connect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that the transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn the TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12840 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12841 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12842 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12843 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12844 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12845 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12846 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12847 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12848 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12849 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12850 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12851 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12852 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12853 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12854 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12855 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12856 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12857 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12858 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12859 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12860 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12861 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12862 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12863 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12864 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12865 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12866 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12867 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12868 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12869 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12870 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12871 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12872 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12873 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12874 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12875 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12876 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12877 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12878 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12879 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12880 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12881 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12882 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12883 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12884 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12885 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12886 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12887 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12888 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12889 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12890 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12891 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12892 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12893 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12894 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12895 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12896 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12897 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12898 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12899 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12900 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12901 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12902 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12903 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12904 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12905 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12906 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12907 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12908 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12909 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12910 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12911 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12912 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12913 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12914 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12915 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12916 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12917 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12918 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12919 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12920 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12921 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12922 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12923 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12924 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12925 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12926 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12927 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12928 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12929 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12930 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12931 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12932 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12933 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12934 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12935 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12936 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12937 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12938 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12939 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12940 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12941 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12942 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12943 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12944 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12945 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12946 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12947 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12948 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12949 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12950 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12951 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12952 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12953 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12954 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12955 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12956 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12957 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12958 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12959 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12960 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12961 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12962 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12963 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12964 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12965 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12966 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314) 4. Remove the TCC solenoid (315). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC solenoid (315). 2. Install the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314). 3. Connect the TCC solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12969 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect and reposition the electrical connectors from the following: * If equipped internal mode switch * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) 3. Remove the oil pump bolts (230, 231). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12970 4. Remove the oil pump (200) from the valve body (300). 5. Disconnect the torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid electrical connector. 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid (334). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC PWM solenoid (334). 2. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 3. Connect the TCC PWM solenoid electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12971 4. Install the oil pump (200) to the valve body (300). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the oil pump body and cover bolts (230, 230). * Tighten the nine bolts (231) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the two bolts (230) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 12972 6. Reposition and connect the electrical connectors to the following: * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * If equipped internal mode switch 7. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 8. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Accumulator: Service and Repair Accumulator and 2-1 Manual Servo Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the filter. Refer to Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Replacement (See: Fluid Filter - A/T/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the accumulator bolts (131). 4. Remove the manual 2-1 band servo cover bolts (103). 5. Remove the accumulator assembly. 6. Remove the manual 2-1 band servo (106-116). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12976 1. Install the manual 2-1 band servo (106-116). 2. Install the accumulator assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the manual 2-1 band servo cover bolts (103). Tighten the bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 4. Install the accumulator cover bolts (131). Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 5. Install the filter. Refer to Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Replacement (See: Fluid Filter - A/T/Service and Repair) . 6. Lower the vehicle. Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 7. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reverse Servo Replacement Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair Reverse Servo Replacement Reverse Servo Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to the following: * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement for the 5.3L engine 2. Remove the exhaust crossover pipe. Refer to Exhaust Crossover Pipe Replacement (RPO LS4) Exhaust Crossover Pipe Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 3. Depress the reverse servo cover (40). 4. Remove the snap ring (39). 5. Pull the O-ring seal (41) out through the slot in the case. 6. Use side cutting pliers in order to cut the servo cover O-ring seal (41). 7. Depress the reverse servo cover (40), grasp one end of the cut seal (41) and pull the seal (41) out of the servo cover (40). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reverse Servo Replacement > Page 12981 8. Remove the reverse servo cover (40). 9. Remove the servo assembly (42-48). 10. Remove the servo spring (49). Installation Procedure Important: Follow this procedure exactly or the transaxle will have no reverse gear due to the servo pin missing the band. 1. Jack up the driver side of the car until the driver side is higher than the differential side. This ensures that the reverse band is in the proper location and not cocked to the channel plate side of the case. 2. Install the servo spring (49). 3. Install the servo assembly (42-48). 4. Install the reverse servo cover (40) with the new O-ring seal (41). 5. Compress the servo cover (40) and install the snap ring (39). 6. Install the exhaust crossover pipe. Refer to Exhaust Crossover Pipe Replacement (RPO LS4) Exhaust Crossover Pipe Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 7. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to the following: * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement for the 5.3L engine Important: It is recommended that the transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reverse Servo Replacement > Page 12982 8. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reverse Servo Replacement > Page 12983 Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair Forward Servo Replacement Forward Servo Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Install the engine support fixture. Refer to the following: * Engine Support Fixture for the 3.5L engine * Engine Support Fixture for the 3.9L engine * Engine Support Fixture for the 5.3L engine 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove and support the power steering gear. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove the transaxle mount lower nuts. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side) . 5. Remove the engine mount lower nuts. Refer to the following: * Engine Mount Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Engine Mount Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Engine Mount Replacement - Right Side for the 5.3L engine 6. Remove the power steering lines from the right side of the frame. 7. Support the rear of the frame with a jackstand. 8. Loosen the front frame bolts and remove the rear frame bolts. Refer to Frame Replacement . 9. Adjust the jackstand to lower the rear of the frame. 10. Position a drain pan under the forward servo cover. 11. Remove the servo cover bolts. 12. Remove the forward servo cover. 13. Remove the forward servo cover O-ring. 14. Remove the servo piston assembly. 15. Remove the servo spring. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Reverse Servo Replacement > Page 12984 1. Install the spring. 2. Install the piston assembly. 3. Install the O-ring. 4. Install the servo cover. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the servo cover bolts. Tighten the bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). 6. Remove the drain pan from under the forward servo cover. 7. Adjust the jackstand in order to raise the rear of the frame. 8. Install the frame bolts. Refer to Frame Replacement . 9. Remove the support from the rear of the frame. 10. Install the power steering lines to the right side of the frame. 11. Install the engine mount lower nuts. Refer to the following: * Engine Mount Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Engine Mount Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Engine Mount Replacement - Right Side for the 5.3L engine 12. Install the transaxle mount lower nuts. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side) . 13. Install the power steering gear. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair) . 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Remove the engine support fixture. Important: It is recommended that the transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 16. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Notice: Do not overfill the transmission. Overfilling will result in foaming, loss of fluid, and possible damage to the transmission. 17. Check and fill the transaxle as necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 12993 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 13003 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Channel Plate, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Channel Plate: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Channel Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 13027 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 13033 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 13038 Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13039 Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Transmission Control Module (TCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13040 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13041 Control Module: Service and Repair Transmission Control Module Replacement Transmission Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-016A > Apr > 08 > A/TSlips/Overheats/Won't Shift/MIL ON/DTCs P0218/P0894 Differential: Customer Interest A/T- Slips/Overheats/Won't Shift/MIL ON/DTCs P0218/P0894 INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-016A Date: April 15, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information on MH1, MN8, MT1, M15 Transmission Slips, Will Not Shift or May Overheat, SES/MIL May be Illuminated, DTCs P0218, P0894 Set Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rendezvous, Terraza 2006-2008 Buick LaCrosse, Lucerne, Allure (Canada Only) 2008 Buick LaCrosse Super, Lucerne Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2007 Cadillac DTS 2006-2007 Chevrolet Avalanche 2500 Series, Malibu, Malibu SS, Malibu Maxx SS, Monte Carlo, Monte Carlo SS, Silverado Classic, Suburban 2006-2008 Chevrolet Express, Impala, Impala SS, Uplander 2006-2007 GMC Sierra Classic, Yukon XL 2500 Series 2006-2008 GMC Savana 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix, Grand Prix GTP, Grand Prix GXP, G6, Montana SV6 2006-2007 Saturn Relay with HYDRA‐MATIC(R) 4T80‐E (MH1), 4T65‐E (M15), 4L80E (RPO MT1) or 4L85E (RPO MN8) Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-016 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Notice: It is critical that all internal transmission components are thoroughly cleaned and the transmission cooler be flushed using the J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool. It is also critical that the system be flushed in both directions to capture any friction material trapped in the cooler. Be sure to back-flush first to push material out of the cooler, following the instructions provided with the J 45096. The purpose of the bulletin is to provide technicians with additional diagnostic information on transmission slips, will not shift, or may overheat conditions. DTCs P0894 or P0218 may be set on the above transmissions. These conditions may be caused by friction material debonding from the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC). If any of these conditions are observed, the friction material from the TCC may have circulated throughout the transmission, the cooler lines, and the transmission cooler. Remove the transmission oil pan and inspect for friction material in the filter. If friction material is observed in the trans pan or filter, the torque converter is the possible cause and it will be necessary to disassemble the transmission completely for a cost comparison (include a torque converter and filter in the estimate). Refer to service bulletin 08-07-30-001 for cleaning and inspection instructions of the valve body assembly. After the cost comparison, either repair or replace the transmission in the most cost effective way. If it is necessary to replace the transmission, contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) per the most recent version of bulletin 02-07-30-029. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-016A > Apr > 08 > A/T- Slips/Overheats/Won't Shift/MIL ON/DTCs P0218/P0894 Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T- Slips/Overheats/Won't Shift/MIL ON/DTCs P0218/P0894 INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-016A Date: April 15, 2008 Subject: Diagnostic Information on MH1, MN8, MT1, M15 Transmission Slips, Will Not Shift or May Overheat, SES/MIL May be Illuminated, DTCs P0218, P0894 Set Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rendezvous, Terraza 2006-2008 Buick LaCrosse, Lucerne, Allure (Canada Only) 2008 Buick LaCrosse Super, Lucerne Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2007 Cadillac DTS 2006-2007 Chevrolet Avalanche 2500 Series, Malibu, Malibu SS, Malibu Maxx SS, Monte Carlo, Monte Carlo SS, Silverado Classic, Suburban 2006-2008 Chevrolet Express, Impala, Impala SS, Uplander 2006-2007 GMC Sierra Classic, Yukon XL 2500 Series 2006-2008 GMC Savana 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix, Grand Prix GTP, Grand Prix GXP, G6, Montana SV6 2006-2007 Saturn Relay with HYDRA‐MATIC(R) 4T80‐E (MH1), 4T65‐E (M15), 4L80E (RPO MT1) or 4L85E (RPO MN8) Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-016 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Notice: It is critical that all internal transmission components are thoroughly cleaned and the transmission cooler be flushed using the J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool. It is also critical that the system be flushed in both directions to capture any friction material trapped in the cooler. Be sure to back-flush first to push material out of the cooler, following the instructions provided with the J 45096. The purpose of the bulletin is to provide technicians with additional diagnostic information on transmission slips, will not shift, or may overheat conditions. DTCs P0894 or P0218 may be set on the above transmissions. These conditions may be caused by friction material debonding from the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC). If any of these conditions are observed, the friction material from the TCC may have circulated throughout the transmission, the cooler lines, and the transmission cooler. Remove the transmission oil pan and inspect for friction material in the filter. If friction material is observed in the trans pan or filter, the torque converter is the possible cause and it will be necessary to disassemble the transmission completely for a cost comparison (include a torque converter and filter in the estimate). Refer to service bulletin 08-07-30-001 for cleaning and inspection instructions of the valve body assembly. After the cost comparison, either repair or replace the transmission in the most cost effective way. If it is necessary to replace the transmission, contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) per the most recent version of bulletin 02-07-30-029. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Differential: > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-64-033C Date: April 29, 2008 Subject: Rubbing/Squealing/Grinding Noise When Door Glass Is Raised Or Lowered, Scratches in Door Glass (Replace Door Glass Belt Sealing Strip) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Built Prior to November 2007 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add the build date. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-64-033B (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on a rubbing, squealing or grinding noise when opening or closing the left or right front or rear door glass. They may also comment of scratches in the door glass. Cause This condition may be cause by dirt accumulating on the lip of the belt sealing strip. Correction Replace the door glass outer belt sealing strip with a newly designed outer belt sealing strip . Refer to Front Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement or Rear Side Door Window Belt Outer Sealing Strip Replacement in SI. Clean the glass with glass cleaner and if scuffs or scratches are found it may be necessary to replace the glass as well. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicle repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Differential: > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated > Page 13060 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Differential: > 06-08-64-033C > Apr > 08 > Body - Front/Rear Window Noise When Operated > Page 13066 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13067 Differential: Service and Repair Final Drive Replacement Tools Required J 42562 Axle Removal Wedge Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case extension housing. Refer to Case Extension Replacement (See: Extension Housing/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the left drive axle from the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 3. Rotate the differential carrier until the end of the output shaft can be seen and the differential pinion shaft (701) is in a horizontal position. 4. Place the J 42562 between the end of the output shaft and the differential pinion shaft. 5. Using a hammer, hit the end of the axle removal tool in order to compress the output shaft compression ring (509) and push the output shaft through the differential side gear. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13068 6. Remove the differential carrier (700). 7. Using snap ring pliers remove the compression ring (509) from the output shaft. 8. Remove the output shaft (510) through the left wheel opening. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13069 9. Remove the sun gear thrust bearing (698) from the differential carrier sun gear. The bearing may be stuck to the differential carrier. 10. Remove the differential carrier sun gear (697). 11. Remove the park gear (696). 12. Remove the internal gear thrust bearing (695) from the differential carrier internal gear. 13. Remove the sun gear shaft (689.) Installation Procedure 1. Assemble the sun gear thrust bearing (698), the differential carrier sun gear (697), the park gear (696), the internal gear thrust bearing (695) and the sun gear shaft (689) into the differential carrier (700). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13070 2. Install the differential carrier into the case. 3. Install the drive axle retainer rings (509) to the output shaft (510). 4. Hold the front differential carrier in place and carefully install the output shaft to the transmission through the left wheel opening. 5. Install the case extension housing. Refer Case Extension Replacement (See: Extension Housing/Service and Repair) . 6. Install left drive axle to the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Filler Tube Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the transaxle oil level indicator. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the catalytic converter from the exhaust manifold. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 4. Remove the fluid filler tube bracket bolt. 5. Remove the fluid filler tube. Installation Procedure Important: Do NOT place the fluid filler tube seal on the fluid filler tube when installing the tube or damage to the seal will result. 1. Install the fluid filler tube seal in the transaxle. 2. Position the fluid filler tube. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the fluid filler tube bracket bolt. Tighten the bolt to 13 N.m (115 lb in). 4. Install the catalytic converter. Refer to Catalytic Converter Replacement (LS4) Catalytic Converter Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 5. Lower the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Do Not Overfill the Transmission Notice . 6. Check and fill the transaxle as necessary. 7. Install the transaxle oil level indicator. 8. Inspect for fluid leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Extension Housing: Service and Repair Case Extension Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the right drive axle from the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 4. Remove the transaxle brace. Refer to Transmission Brace Replacement (RPO LS4) (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Brace Replacement)Transmission Brace Replacement (RPOs LZ9/LZE) (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Brace Replacement) . 5. Remove the vehicle speed sensor. Refer to Vehicle Speed Sensor Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems/Vehicle Speed Sensor/Service and Repair) . 6. Remove the case extension housing bolts (5). 7. Remove the case extension housing (6) with the axle seal and the O-ring (8). Installation Procedure 1. Install the O-ring (8) to the case extension housing (6). 2. Install the case extension housing (6) with the axle seal and the O-ring (8). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the case extension housing bolts (5). Tighten the bolts to 36 N.m (27 lb ft). 4. Install the vehicle speed sensor. Refer to Vehicle Speed Sensor Replacement (See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems/Vehicle Speed Sensor/Service and Repair) . 5. Install the transaxle brace. Refer to Transmission Brace Replacement (RPO LS4) (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Brace Replacement)Transmission Brace Replacement (RPOs LZ9/LZE) (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Brace Replacement) . 6. Install the right drive axle to the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13077 Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Notice: Refer to Do Not Overfill the Transmission Notice . 9. Check and fill the transaxle as necessary. 10. Inspect for fluid leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-037E Date: April 07, 2011 Subject: Release of DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saturn Relay 2005 and Prior Saturn L-Series 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2005-2008 Saturn VUE with 4T45-E 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Except 2008 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Equinox Except 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Epica Except 2007 and Prior Chevrolet Optra Except 2008 and Prior Pontiac Torrent, Vibe, Wave Except 2003-2005 Saturn ION with CVT or AF23 Only Except 1991-2002 Saturn S-Series Except 2008 and Prior Saturn VUE with CVT, AF33 or 5AT (MJ7/MJ8) Transmission Only Except 2008 Saturn Astra Attention: DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-037D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSFER CASES and POWER STEERING The content of this bulletin does not apply to manual transmissions or transfer cases. Any vehicle that previously required DEXRON(R)-III for a manual transmission or transfer case should now use P/N 88861800. This fluid is labeled Manual Transmission and Transfer Case Fluid. Some manual transmissions and transfer cases require a different fluid. Appropriate references should be checked when servicing any of these components. Power Steering Systems should now use P/N 9985010 labeled Power Steering Fluid. Consult the Parts Catalog, Owner's Manual, or Service Information (SI) for fluid recommendations. Some of our customers and/or General Motors dealerships/Saturn Retailers may have some concerns with DEXRON(R)-VI and DEXRON(R)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and transmission warranty claims. DEXRON(R)-VI is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids (except as noted above). Please remember that the clean oil reservoirs of the J-45096 - Flushing and Flow Tester machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI for testing, flushing or filling General Motors transmissions/transaxles (except as noted above). DEXRON(R)-VI can be used in any proportion in past model vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission/transaxle in place of DEXRON(R)-III (i.e. topping off the fluid in the event of a repair or fluid change). DEXRON(R)-VI is also compatible with any former version of DEXRON(R) for use in automatic transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON(R)-VI ATF General Motors Powertrain has upgraded to DEXRON(R)-VI ATF with the start of 2006 vehicle production. Current and prior automatic transmission models that had used DEXRON(R)-III must now only use DEXRON(R)-VI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 13082 All 2006 and future model transmissions that use DEXRON(R)-VI are to be serviced ONLY with DEXRON(R)-VI fluid. DEXRON(R)-VI is an improvement over DEXRON(R)-III in the following areas: * These ATF change intervals remain the same as DEXRON(R)-III for the time being. 2006-2008 Transmission Fill and Cooler Flushing Some new applications of the 6L80 six speed transmission will require the use of the J 45096 Flushing and Flow Tester to accomplish transmission fluid fill. The clean oil reservoir of the machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 13083 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 13084 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Bottom Pan Removal (2WD) ............................................................................................................... ....................................................... 7.0L (7.4 Quarts) Complete Overhaul (2WD) .............................. ......................................................................................................................................... 9.5L (10.0 Quarts) Dry (2WD) ............................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 12.7L (13.4 Quarts) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 13087 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13088 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Transmission Fluid Check Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter and Seal Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the oil pan (24) and the gasket (25). Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the filter (100). Remove the lip ring seal (101) pressed into the case only if replacement is necessary. 3. Inspect the oil pan and the filter for the following foreign material: * metal particles * clutch facing material * rubber particles * engine coolant 4. Determine the source of the contamination if foreign material is evident. 5. Correct the source of the contamination. Installation Procedure 1. If removed, install a new seal (101). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13092 2. Install the filter (100). 3. Install the gasket (25) and the oil pan (24). Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Fluid Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 13097 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the transaxle oil cooler (TOC) outlet hose from top side of the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the TOC hose retainer bolt. 4. Position a drain pan below the oil cooler hoses. 5. Disconnect the TOC outlet hose from the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 6. Disconnect the TOC inlet hose from the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13100 7. Disconnect the TOC inlet hose from the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 8. Disconnect the TOC hoses from the radiator support retainer. 9. Remove the TOC hoses from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Allow sufficient clearance around the transaxle oil cooler pipes and around the hoses to prevent damage or wear which may cause fluid loss. 1. Install the TOC hoses to the vehicle. 2. Connect the TOC hoses to the radiator support retainer. 3. Connect the TOC inlet hose to the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection ( See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13101 4. Connect the TOC inlet hose to the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 5. Connect the TOC outlet hose to the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 6. Install the TOC hose retainer and the bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Connect the TOC outlet hose to the top side of the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . Notice: Do NOT overfill the transaxle. The overfilling of the transaxle causes foaming, loss of fluid, shift complaints, and possible damage to the transaxle. 9. Adjust the fluid level. Refer to the following procedures: * Transmission Fluid Check (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Transmission Fluid Check) * Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations * Approximate Fluid Capacities Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13102 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Dam Replacement Transmission Fluid Dam Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Remove the oil reservoir weir (27). Installation Procedure 1. Install the oil reservoir weir (27). 2. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13103 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Connector Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Connector Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Allow sufficient clearance around the transaxle oil cooler pipes and around the hoses to prevent damage or wear which may cause fluid loss. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Position a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Remove the transaxle oil cooler hoses from the transaxle oil cooler fittings. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement (See: ) . 4. Remove the transaxle oil cooler fittings (28, 29) from the transaxle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: The correct thread engagement is critical. Crossthreaded fittings can achieve proper tightness and still leak. 1. Install the transaxle oil cooler fittings (28, 29) to the transaxle. Tighten the fittings to 38 N.m (28 lb ft). 2. Install the transaxle oil cooler hoses to the transaxle oil cooler fittings. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement (See: ) . 3. Lower the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Transmission Overfill Notice . 4. Adjust the fluid level. 5. Inspect for fluid leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fluid Leak Diagnosis) . 6. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13104 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection Removal Procedure Important: Perform the following procedure when removing the retaining rings and cooler lines from the quick connect fittings located on the radiator and/or the transmission. 1. Pull the plastic cap back from the quick connect fitting and down along the cooler line about 5 cm (2 in). 2. Using a bent-tip screwdriver, pull on one of the open ends of the retaining ring in order to rotate the retaining ring around the quick connect fitting until the retaining ring is out of position and can be completely removed. 3. Remove the retaining ring from the quick connect fitting. 4. Discard the retaining ring. 5. Pull the cooler line straight out from the quick connect fitting. Installation Procedure Important: * Do not reuse any of the existing oil lines or oil line fittings if there is excessive corrosion. * Do not reuse any of the existing retaining rings that were removed from the existing quick connect fittings. Install new retaining rings. * Ensure the following procedures are performed when installing the new retaining rings onto the fittings. 1. Install a new retaining ring into the quick connect fitting using the following procedure: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13105 2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connect fitting. 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the fitting until the retaining ring is positioned with all 3 ears through the 3 slots on the fitting. 4. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring. 5. Ensure that the 3 retaining ring ears are seen from inside the fitting and that the retaining ring moves freely in the fitting slots. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13106 6. Install the cooler line into the quick connect fitting. 7. Insert the cooler line end into the quick connect fitting until a click is either heard or felt. 8. Do not use the plastic cap on the cooler line in order to install the cooler line into the fitting. 9. Pull back sharply on the cooler line in order to ensure that the cooler line is fastened into the quick connect fitting. Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap. 10. Position (snap) the plastic cap onto the fitting. Do not manually depress the retaining ring when installing the plastic cap onto the quick connect fitting. 11. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting. 12. Ensure that no gap is present between the cap and the fitting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13107 13. Ensure that the yellow identification band on the tube is hidden within the quick connect fitting. 14. A hidden yellow identification band indicates proper joint seating. 15. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON(R) VI transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Check (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Transmission Fluid Check) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13108 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the transaxle oil cooler (TOC) outlet hose from top side of the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 3. Remove the TOC hose retainer bolt. 4. Position a drain pan below the oil cooler hoses. 5. Disconnect the TOC outlet hose from the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 6. Disconnect the TOC inlet hose from the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13109 7. Disconnect the TOC inlet hose from the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 8. Disconnect the TOC hoses from the radiator support retainer. 9. Remove the TOC hoses from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Allow sufficient clearance around the transaxle oil cooler pipes and around the hoses to prevent damage or wear which may cause fluid loss. 1. Install the TOC hoses to the vehicle. 2. Connect the TOC hoses to the radiator support retainer. 3. Connect the TOC inlet hose to the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection ( See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13110 4. Connect the TOC inlet hose to the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 5. Connect the TOC outlet hose to the transaxle. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 6. Install the TOC hose retainer and the bolt. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Connect the TOC outlet hose to the top side of the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . Notice: Do NOT overfill the transaxle. The overfilling of the transaxle causes foaming, loss of fluid, shift complaints, and possible damage to the transaxle. 9. Adjust the fluid level. Refer to the following procedures: * Transmission Fluid Check (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Transmission Fluid Check) * Fluid and Lubricant Recommendations * Approximate Fluid Capacities Transmission Fluid Dam Replacement Transmission Fluid Dam Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13111 2. Remove the oil reservoir weir (27). Installation Procedure 1. Install the oil reservoir weir (27). 2. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Connector Replacement Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Connector Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Allow sufficient clearance around the transaxle oil cooler pipes and around the hoses to prevent damage or wear which may cause fluid loss. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Position a drain pan under the vehicle. 3. Remove the transaxle oil cooler hoses from the transaxle oil cooler fittings. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement (See: ) . 4. Remove the transaxle oil cooler fittings (28, 29) from the transaxle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13112 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: The correct thread engagement is critical. Crossthreaded fittings can achieve proper tightness and still leak. 1. Install the transaxle oil cooler fittings (28, 29) to the transaxle. Tighten the fittings to 38 N.m (28 lb ft). 2. Install the transaxle oil cooler hoses to the transaxle oil cooler fittings. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement (See: ) . 3. Lower the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Transmission Overfill Notice . 4. Adjust the fluid level. 5. Inspect for fluid leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fluid Leak Diagnosis) . 6. Remove the drain pan from under the vehicle. Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection Removal Procedure Important: Perform the following procedure when removing the retaining rings and cooler lines from the quick connect fittings located on the radiator and/or the transmission. 1. Pull the plastic cap back from the quick connect fitting and down along the cooler line about 5 cm (2 in). 2. Using a bent-tip screwdriver, pull on one of the open ends of the retaining ring in order to rotate the retaining ring around the quick connect fitting until the retaining ring is out of position and can be completely removed. 3. Remove the retaining ring from the quick connect fitting. 4. Discard the retaining ring. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13113 5. Pull the cooler line straight out from the quick connect fitting. Installation Procedure Important: * Do not reuse any of the existing oil lines or oil line fittings if there is excessive corrosion. * Do not reuse any of the existing retaining rings that were removed from the existing quick connect fittings. Install new retaining rings. * Ensure the following procedures are performed when installing the new retaining rings onto the fittings. 1. Install a new retaining ring into the quick connect fitting using the following procedure: 2. Hook one of the open ends of the retaining ring in one of the slots in the quick connect fitting. 3. Rotate the retaining ring around the fitting until the retaining ring is positioned with all 3 ears through the 3 slots on the fitting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13114 4. Do not install the new retaining ring onto the fitting by pushing the retaining ring. 5. Ensure that the 3 retaining ring ears are seen from inside the fitting and that the retaining ring moves freely in the fitting slots. 6. Install the cooler line into the quick connect fitting. 7. Insert the cooler line end into the quick connect fitting until a click is either heard or felt. 8. Do not use the plastic cap on the cooler line in order to install the cooler line into the fitting. 9. Pull back sharply on the cooler line in order to ensure that the cooler line is fastened into the quick connect fitting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13115 Important: Do not manually depress the retaining clip when installing the plastic cap. 10. Position (snap) the plastic cap onto the fitting. Do not manually depress the retaining ring when installing the plastic cap onto the quick connect fitting. 11. Ensure that the plastic cap is fully seated against the fitting. 12. Ensure that no gap is present between the cap and the fitting. 13. Ensure that the yellow identification band on the tube is hidden within the quick connect fitting. 14. A hidden yellow identification band indicates proper joint seating. 15. Fill the transmission to the proper level with DEXRON(R) VI transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Check (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Transmission Fluid Check) . Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13116 Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Connector Replacement - Radiator Removal Procedure 1. Drain the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) . 2. Remove the transaxle oil cooler hoses from the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . Important: Do not remove the upper and lower transaxle oil cooler fittings from the radiator at the same time other wise the transaxle oil cooler will fall inside the radiator end tank. 3. Remove the oil cooler fitting from the radiator. Installation Procedure 1. Inspect the new O-ring seals for cracks, cuts or damage. Replace if necessary. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Important: The correct thread engagement is critical. Cross-threaded fittings can achieve proper tightness and still leak. 2. Install the oil cooler fitting to the radiator Tighten the fittings to 38 N.m (28 lb ft). 3. Install the transaxle oil cooler hoses to the oil cooler fittings on the radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13117 Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 4. Fill the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling (9C1, 9C3 Static Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, 9C1, 9C3, GE47716 Fill) Cooling System Draining and Filling (LZE, LZ4, LZG, Static Fill) . 5. Adjust the transmission fluid level. 6. Inspect for fluid leaks. Transmission Fluid Auxiliary Cooler Inlet and Outlet Pipe Replacement Transmission Fluid Auxiliary Cooler Inlet and Outlet Pipe Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Allow sufficient clearance around the transaxle oil cooler pipes and around the hoses to prevent damage or wear which may cause fluid loss. 1. Remove the lower radiator air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement . 2. Remove the auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines from the support clip (3). 3. Remove the auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines from the fan shroud support clip. 4. Remove the inlet and outlet auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines (1, 2) from the transmission and radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 5. Remove the inlet and outlet auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler. Refer to Transmission Fluid Auxiliary Cooler Replacement (See: Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair) . Installation Procedure 1. Install the inlet and outlet auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines to the auxiliary transmission oil cooler. Refer to Transmission Fluid Auxiliary Cooler Replacement (See: Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Replacement > Page 13118 2. Install the inlet and outlet auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines (1, 2) to the transmission and radiator. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: ) . 3. Install the support clip (3) to the auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines. 4. Install the auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines to the fan shroud support clip. 5. Install the lower radiator air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement . Notice: Do NOT overfill the transaxle. The overfilling of the transaxle causes foaming, loss of fluid, shift complaints, and possible damage to the transaxle. 6. Adjust the fluid level. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Install the 20 oil pan bolts (23). Tighten the bolts to ............................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 14 N.m (10 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13122 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Do NOT use any type of grease to retain parts during the assembly of this unit. Using greases other than the recommended assembly lube changes the transaxle fluid characteristics. Using greases other than the recommended assembly lube causes undesirable shift conditions and/or filter clogging. Use TRANSJEL(TM) J 36850 or equivalent during the assembly of this unit. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Place a drain pan under the transaxle oil pan. 3. Remove the transaxle oil pan bolts (23) from the front and the sides of the oil pan. 4. Loosen the rear transaxle oil pan bolts. Notice: Ensure care is taken NOT to damage the mating surfaces of the oil pan and of the case or oil leaks may occur. 5. Use a rubber mallet to lightly tap the oil pan or use a screwdriver to pry the oil pan loose. 6. Allow the fluid to drain. 7. Remove the remaining transaxle bolts (23). 8. Remove the oil pan (24) from the automatic transmission. 9. Remove the oil pan gasket (25). 10. Inspect the oil pan and the filter for the following foreign material: * Metal particles * Clutch facing material * Rubber particles * Engine coolant 11. Determine the source of the contamination. 12. Correct the source of the contamination. 13. Inspect the oil pan flange (1) for distortion. 14. Replace the oil pan (1) if bent or distorted. Do not attempt to straighten. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13123 15. When service requires the removal of the bottom oil, inspect the washers on the oil pan bolts. 16. If the washer is inverted, replace the bolt and the washer. Notice: Ensure the oil pan and the case flanges are dry and are free of any oil film or leakage may result. 17. Use solvent to clean the case. 18. Air dry the case. 19. Use solvent to clean the oil pan gasket surfaces. 20. Air dry the oil pan gasket surfaces. 21. Remove all traces of the old gasket material. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13124 1. Install the oil pan gasket (25). 2. Install the oil pan (24). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the oil pan bolts (23). Tighten the bolts to 14 N.m (10 lb ft). 4. Lower the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Do Not Overfill the Transmission Notice . 5. Fill the transaxle. Refer to Fluid Capacity Specifications (See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications) . 6. Place the gear selector in the PARK position. 7. Start the engine. 8. Run the engine at a slow idle. Do NOT race the engine. 9. Adjust the fluid level. 10. Inspect for leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13129 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13130 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13131 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness. 3. Remove the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the fluid pressure manual valve position switch to the control valve body (300). Important: When removing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 4. Carefully remove the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). 5. Inspect the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395) for the following conditions: * Damaged electrical connector terminals * Damaged seals * Damaged switch membranes * Debris on the switch membranes Installation Procedure Important: When installing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 1. Carefully install the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the TFP switch to the control valve body (300). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (375) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (379) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (381) to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Connect the transaxle wiring harness. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13132 Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Pump: Service and Repair Oil Pump Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Do NOT remove the three bolts which hold the pump together. 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Remove the oil pump bolts (230, 231). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13136 3. Remove the oil pump (200) from the valve body (300). 4. Clean and inspect the oil pump. Refer to Transmission Fluid Pump Disassemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) and Transmission Fluid Pump Assemble (See: Service and Repair/Overhaul) . Installation Procedure 1. Install the oil pump (200) to the valve body (300). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13137 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the oil pump bolts (230, 231). * Tighten the nine (231) M6 X 1.0 X 85 bolts to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the two (230) M6 X 1.0 X 95 bolts to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the engine control module (ECM), powertrain control module (PCM) or transmission control module (TCM) will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-042F Date: February 05, 2010 Subject: Information on 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and 4L70E transmission. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-042E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important For 2005 model year fullsize utilities and pickups, refer to Corporate Bulletin 05-07-30-012. Some vehicles may exhibit a clunk noise that can be heard on a 2-3 upshift or a 3-2 downshift. During a 2-3 upshift, the 2-4 band is released and the 3-4 clutch is applied. The timing of this shift can cause a momentary torque reversal of the output shaft that results in a clunk noise. This same torque reversal can also occur on a 3-2 downshift when the 3-4 clutch is released and the 2-4 band applied. This condition may be worse on a 4-wheel drive vehicle due to the additional tolerances in the transfer case. This is a normal condition. No repairs should be attempted. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13142 Output Shaft: Service and Repair Output Shaft Replacement Tool Required J 42562 Axle Removal Wedge Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case extension housing. Refer to Case Extension Replacement (See: Extension Housing/Service and Repair) . 2. Remove the left drive axle from the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 3. Rotate the differential carrier until the end of the output shaft can be seen and the differential pinion shaft (701) is in a horizontal position. 4. Place the J 42562 between the end of the output shaft and the differential pinion shaft. 5. Using a hammer, hit the end of the axle removal tool in order to compress the output shaft compression ring (509) and push the output shaft through the differential side gear. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13143 6. Remove the differential carrier (700). 7. Using snap ring pliers remove the compression ring (509) from the output shaft. 8. Remove the output shaft through the left wheel opening. 9. Inspect the output shaft (510) for the following: * Stripped splines * Damaged retainer ring groove * Damaged bushing journals Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13144 1. Install the drive axle retainer rings (509) to the output shaft (510). 2. Hold the front differential carrier in place and carefully install the output shaft (510) to the transmission through the left wheel opening. Extend the output shaft through the differential side gear. 3. Install the case extension housing. Refer to Case Extension Replacement (See: Extension Housing/Service and Repair) . 4. Install the left drive axle to the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13148 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the pressure control solenoid (PCS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the PCS retaining clip (314E). 4. Remove the PCS (322). Installation Procedure 1. Install the PCS (322). 2. Install the PCS retaining clip (314E). 3. Connect the PCS electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 13154 Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13155 Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Transmission Control Module (TCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13156 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13157 Control Module: Service and Repair Transmission Control Module Replacement Transmission Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 13166 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-07-30-032E > Sep > 08 > A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent > Page 13172 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 13173 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 13174 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 01-07-30-032E Date: 080929 A/T - 4T65E Fluid Leaking From A/T Vent TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-032E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Transmission Oil Leaking From Transmission Vent (Replace Transmission Case Cover (Channel Plate) Gasket) Models: 1997-2009 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) with Hydra-Matic 4T65-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MN3, MN7, M15, M76) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2008 and 2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-032D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak. Cause This condition may be caused by an improperly torqued channel plate gasket. Correction Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 13175 To correct this condition, replace the case cover (channel plate) gaskets (429 and 430). Refer to Unit Repair publication in SI of the appropriate vehicle being serviced. Visual inspection of the upper gasket (1) will reveal damage at the referenced area. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left Side Tools Required * J 34115 Left Side Axle Seal Installer * J 37292-B Axle Seal Protector Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the left front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the left stabilizer shaft link from the left lower control arm. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 4. Remove the left tie rod end from the left steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 5. Remove the left lower ball joint from the left steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 6. Remove the left drive axle from the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 7. Secure the left drive axle to the left steering knuckle and the strut. 8. Use a flat bladed screwdriver or a suitable tool to remove the oil seal (409) from the transaxle side case (401). Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the seal lip with transaxle fluid. Important: Carefully guide the axle shaft past the lip seal. Do NOT allow the shaft splines to contact any portion of the seal lip surface. 2. Install J 37292-B in the seal (409). 3. Use J 34115 to install the new seal. 4. Remove the J 37292-B . 5. Install the drive axle to the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 13178 6. Install the left lower ball joint to the left steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 7. Install the left tie rod end to the left steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 8. Install the left stabilizer shaft link to the left lower control arm. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 9. Install the left front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 10. Lower the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Do Not Overfill the Transmission Notice . 11. Adjust the fluid level. 12. Inspect for proper completion of the repairs. 13. Inspect for proper fluid level. 14. Inspect for fluid leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 13179 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Right Side Tools Required * J 6125-B Slide Hammer * J 23129 Universal Seal Remover * J 29130 Axle Shaft Seal Installer * J 37292-B Axle Seal Protector Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair ). 3. Remove the right stabilizer shaft link from the right lower control arm. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 4. Remove the right tie rod end from the right steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 5. Remove the right lower ball joint from the right steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 6. Remove the right drive axle from the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 7. Secure the right drive axle to the right steering knuckle and the strut. 8. Use the J 6125-B (3) and the J 23129 (4) to remove the oil seal (1) from the extension housing (2). Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the seal lip with transaxle fluid. 2. Install J 37292-B in the seal (4). 3. Use J 29130 to install the new seal (4). 4. Remove the J 37292-B . Important: Carefully guide the axle shaft past the lip seal. Do NOT allow the shaft splines to contact any portion of the seal lip surface. 5. Install the drive axle to the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal Replacement - Left > Page 13180 6. Install the right lower ball joint to the right steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 7. Install the right tie rod end to the right steering knuckle. Refer to Steering Knuckle Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 8. Install the right stabilizer shaft link to the right steering knuckle. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 9. Install the right front tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 10. Lower the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Transmission Overfill Notice . 11. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary. 12. Inspect for fluid leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13186 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13187 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13188 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness. 3. Remove the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the fluid pressure manual valve position switch to the control valve body (300). Important: When removing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 4. Carefully remove the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). 5. Inspect the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395) for the following conditions: * Damaged electrical connector terminals * Damaged seals * Damaged switch membranes * Debris on the switch membranes Installation Procedure Important: When installing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 1. Carefully install the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the TFP switch to the control valve body (300). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (375) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (379) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (381) to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Connect the transaxle wiring harness. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13189 Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Mode Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13194 Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13195 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13200 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13201 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (AT ISS) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13202 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 4. Remove the input speed sensor (440). 5. Inspect the input speed sensor (440) for the following conditions: * Damaged or missing magnet * Damaged housing * Bent or missing electrical terminals * Damaged speed sensor clip (441) Installation Procedure 1. Install the input speed sensor (440). 2. Install the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 3. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13208 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13209 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness assembly from the fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (391). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fluid temperature sensor (391). 2. Connect the wiring harness assembly to the with fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 4. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 13212 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Thermo Element Replacement Thermo Element Replacement Tools Required J 34094-A Thermo Element Height Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the thermo element pins (120, 123) and the washers. 4. Remove the thermo element (121) and the thermo element plate (122). Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 34094-A to set the middle thermo pin (123). 2. Install the new thermo element plate (122). 3. Install the pin (120) and the washer. 4. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the pin and the washer furthest from the accumulator. 5. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the second pin (120) and the washer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 13213 6. Install the thermo element (121) between the two pins (120). The V in the thermo element (121) must contact the thermo element plate (122). 7. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 9. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13223 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13229 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-08-110-007 > Mar > 08 > Interior - Driver's Power Window Switch Sticks/Binds Power Window Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Power Window Switch Sticks/Binds TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-110-007 Date: March 31, 2008 Subject: Driver Side Window Switch Sticks (Replace Window Switch Bezel and/or Window Switch) Models: 2008 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that driver side window switch does not operate the window correctly or the switch sticks. Cause This condition may be caused because the bezel trim has excess flashing, causing the switch to bind in the bezel. Damage to the window switch may result from this condition. Correction Replace the bezel and/or window switch. Refer to Front Side Door Window Switch Bezel Replacement in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13240 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Notice: To prevent component damage, DO NOT use metal tools to remove the trim. Important: Use only a plastic trim tool to lift the shift lever bezel or trim plate. Do not use any tool between the shift lever bezel or trim plate and the shifter. 2. Remove the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 4. Remove both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator from the pivot points. Installation Procedure 1. Install both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator to the pivot points. 2. Connect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 3. Install the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Shift Solenoid: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13246 Shift Solenoid: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views In the Center Console - Floor Shifter In the Center Console - Floor Shifter 1 - Floor Shifter 2 - A/T Shift Lock Control Solenoid Steering Column Components - Column Shift Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13247 Lower Steering Column Components 1 - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Solenoid 2 - Steering Column Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13250 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13251 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13253 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13254 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13255 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13256 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13257 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13258 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13259 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13260 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13261 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13262 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13263 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13264 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13265 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13266 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13267 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13268 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13269 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13270 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13271 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13272 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13273 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13274 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13275 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13276 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13277 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13278 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13279 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13280 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13281 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13282 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13283 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13284 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13285 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13286 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13287 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13288 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13289 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13290 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13291 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13292 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13293 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13294 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13295 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13296 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13297 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13298 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13299 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13300 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13301 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13302 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13303 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13304 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13305 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13306 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13307 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13308 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13309 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13310 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13311 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13312 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13313 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13314 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13315 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13316 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13317 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13318 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13319 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13320 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13321 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13322 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13323 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13324 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13325 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13326 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13327 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13328 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13329 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13330 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13331 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13332 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13333 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13334 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13335 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13336 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13337 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13338 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13339 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13340 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13341 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13342 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13343 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13344 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13345 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13346 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13347 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13348 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13349 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13350 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13351 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13352 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13353 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13354 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13355 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13356 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13357 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13358 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13359 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13360 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13361 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13362 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13363 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13364 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13365 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13366 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13367 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13368 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13369 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13370 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13371 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13372 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13373 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13374 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13375 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13376 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13377 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Component Connector End Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (1-2 SS) Valve 2-3 Shift Solenoid (2-3 SS) Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13378 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D) 4. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). Installation Procedure 1. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). 2. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D). 3. Connect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement > Page 13381 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 4. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B) and the O-ring (316). Installation Procedure 1. Install the O-ring (316) and the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B). 2. Install the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 3. Connect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that the transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn the TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shifter A/T: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shifter A/T: Customer Interest A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shifter A/T: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13390 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shifter A/T: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shifter A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shifter A/T: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13396 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Replacement Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Shift Lever Replacement Shift Lever Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to SIR Caution . 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . 2. Slide the shift lever seal (2) up the shift lever (4). 3. If necessary, remove the steering column trim covers. Refer to Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement) . 4. Disconnect the shift lever connector at the base of the column. 5. Remove the shift lever screw (3) from the shift lever assembly (4). 6. Remove the shift lever and seal from the linear shift assembly. Important: The shift lever seal must be removed by sliding the shift lever seal towards the narrow section of the shift lever. 7. Remove the shift lever seal (2) from the shift lever (4). Installation Procedure Important: The shift lever seal must be installed to the narrow end of the shift lever. 1. Install the shift lever seal (2) onto the shift lever assembly (4). 2. Install the shift lever assembly (4) to linear shift assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the shift lever screw (3) into the shift lever assembly (4). Tighten the screw to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 4. Slide the shift lever seal (2) down the shift lever assembly (4). 5. Align the shift lever seal into the steering column trim covers. 6. If necessary, install the steering column trim covers. Refer to Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column Trim Covers Replacement) . 7. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Replacement > Page 13399 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Control Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the console trim plate . Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 2. Remove the console wiring harness. 3. Remove the console shift control wiring harness. 4. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement (See: Shift Linkage/Shift Cable/Service and Repair) . 5. Disconnect the lightbulb and the retainer from the shiftier. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Replacement > Page 13400 6. Remove the console shift control retaining nuts. 7. Remove the console shift control assembly from the vehicle. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Replacement > Page 13401 1. Install the console shift control into the vehicle. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the console shift control retaining nuts. Tighten the console shift control retaining nuts to 24 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the automatic transaxle range selector cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement (See: Shift Linkage/Shift Cable/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Shift Lever Replacement > Page 13402 4. Install the console shift control wiring harness. 5. Install the console wiring harness. 6. Install the console trim plate. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment Adjustment Procedure 1. Apply the parking brake and ensure the vehicle is not running. 2. Ensure that the shift control assembly is in the park (P) position. 3. Pull back the white plastic cover (1) on the center connector. 4. Pull up on the center tabs of the lock button (2). Important: This step must be performed correctly to avoid a misadjusted cable. Do not grasp the shift cable end (2) during this procedure. 5. Release the shift cable end (2) and allow the blue spring to tension/adjust the shift cable system. 6. Pull the white cover (3) on the shift cable end (1) back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13407 7. Push the natural colored lock button (2) down to engage the locking teeth on the shift cable end (1). 8. Release the white cover (1). 9. Verify the white cover (1) conceals the natural colored lock (2). 10. If the white cover (1) does not conceal the natural colored lock (2), the shift cable must be readjusted. 11. Test the transmission for proper shift operation. 12. If all of the gear positions cannot be achieved, the shift cable must be readjusted. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13408 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Caution . 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to the following: * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement for the 5.3L engine 2. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable from the wiring harness clip or strap. 3. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable retainer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13409 4. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable from the automatic transaxle range selector lever. 5. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable from the automatic transaxle range selector cable bracket. 6. If equipped with a floor console, remove the front floor console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 7. Pull the carpet back to expose the automatic transaxle range selector cable. Refer to Floor Panel Carpet Replacement (Impala) . 8. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable retainer from the console shift control. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13410 9. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable from the console shift control. 10. Remove the automatic transaxle range selector cable from the console shift control bracket. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13411 11. If equipped with a steering column shift control, remove the left knee bolster bracket. Refer to Driver Knee Bolster Bracket Replacement . 12. Remove the automatic transmission range selector cable from the shift control lever. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13412 13. Install a piece of mechanics wire to the end of the automatic transmission range selector cable. 14. Remove the automatic transmission range selector cable through the hole in the cowl. Installation Procedure Caution: Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Cable Caution . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13413 1. Install the automatic transmission range selector cable through the hole in the cowl. 2. Remove the mechanics wire from the end of the automatic transmission range selector cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13414 3. If equipped with a steering column shift control, install the automatic transmission range selector cable to the shift control lever. 4. Install the left knee bolster bracket. Refer to Driver Knee Bolster Bracket Replacement . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13415 5. If equipped with a floor console shift control, install the automatic transaxle range selector cable to the console shift control bracket. 6. Install the automatic transaxle range selector cable to the console shift control. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13416 7. Install the automatic transaxle range selector cable retainer to the console shift control. 8. Install the carpet into position. Refer to Floor Panel Carpet Replacement (Impala) . 9. Install the Front Floor Console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 10. Properly route and position the automatic transmission range selector cable. 11. Install the automatic transaxle range selector cable to the automatic transaxle range selector cable bracket. 12. Install the automatic transaxle range selector cable to the automatic transaxle range selector lever. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13417 13. Install the automatic transaxle range selector cable retainer. 14. Place the transaxle in the Neutral position. 15. Place the shift control in the Neutral position. 16. Connect each cable section to the following before connecting the two cable sections. * Insert the metal end fitting of the shift control cable into the transaxle cable end. * Use the molded end fittings to push the metal end fitting of the shift control cable and the transaxle cable end together until the metal post snaps into place. 17. Depress the adjuster clip once. This mobilizes the adjuster housing toward the transaxle end fitting. 18. Line up the end fittings so they slide together until you feel the parts cam together and lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13418 19. Depress the adjuster clip completely. This locks the cable into its adjusted service position. 20. Pull the conduit in the opposite direction to assure full system adjustment of the shift cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13419 Important: The horseshoe clip with the tab is flush when fully engaged. 21. Ensure the conduit is fully engaged. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13420 22. The horseshoe clip with the tab is not flush when not fully engaged. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 13421 23. Install the automatic transaxle range selector cable to the wiring harness clip or strap. 24. Adjust the automatic transaxle range selector cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . 25. Install the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to the following: * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement for the 5.3L engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information Torque Converter: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-010C Date: May 12, 2008 Subject: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle Torque Converter Replacement Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Except VTi Equipped Vehicles (RPO M16 and M75) 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with ALL Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2007-2009 model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-010B (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The purpose of this bulletin is to help technicians determine when a torque converter should be replaced. Below is a list of general guidelines to follow. The converter should NOT be replaced if the following apply: ^ DTC P0742 - TCC stuck on is set. This code is almost always the result of a controls condition (i.e. stuck TCC solenoid/valve). Experience has shown that this code rarely indicates a mechanical concern within the torque converter. ^ The fluid has an odor or is discolored but no evidence of metal contamination. ^ Fine metal particles (traces of metal flakes/gray color to fluid ) are found in the converter. This is not harmful to the torque converter. ^ The vehicle has been exposed to high mileage. ^ A small amount of wear appears on the hub where the oil pump drive gear mates to the converter (RWD only). A certain amount of such wear is normal for both the hub and oil pump gear. Neither the converter nor the front pump assembly should be replaced. The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ^ The vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. First complete all electrical and hydraulic diagnosis and check for proper engine operation. The converter clutch may be damaged. Also the converter bushing and/or internal 0-ring may be damaged. ^ Evidence of damage to the oil pump assembly pump shaft turbine shaft drive sprocket support and bearing or metal chips/debris in the converter. ^ Metal chips/debris are found in the converter or when flushing the cooler and the cooler lines. ^ External leaks in the hub weld area lug weld or closure weld. ^ Converter pilot is broken damaged or fits poorly into the crankshaft. ^ The converter hub is scored or damaged. ^ The transmission oil is contaminated with engine coolant engine oil or water. ^ If excessive end play is found after measuring the converter for proper end play (refer to Service Manual). ^ If metal chips/debris are found in the fluid filter or on the magnet and no internal parts in the unit are worn or damaged. This indicates that the material came from the converter. ^ The converter has an unbalanced condition that results in a vibration that cannot be corrected by following Converter Vibration Procedures. ^ Blue converter or dark circular ring between lugs. This condition will also require a complete cleaning of the cooler and a check for adequate flow Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Torque Converter Replacement Information > Page 13426 through the cooler. ^ Converter bearing noise determined by noise from the bell housing area in Drive or Reverse at idle. The noise is gone in Neutral and Park. ^ If silicon from the viscous clutch is found in the lower pan (4T80-E ONLY). Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13427 Torque Converter: Service and Repair Flywheel to Torque Converter Bolt Replacement Tools Required J 37096 Flywheel Holder Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the torque converter cover bolts. 3. Remove the torque converter covers. 4. Install the J 37096 in order to gain access to the torque converter bolts and to prevent the flywheel from turning. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13428 5. Remove the flywheel to torque converter bolts. Installation Procedure 1. Install the J 37096 in order to gain access to the torque converter bolts and to prevent the flywheel from turning. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the flywheel to torque converter bolts. Tighten the bolts to 63 N.m (46 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13429 3. Install the torque converter covers. 4. Install the torque converter cover bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in) 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting Torque Converter Check Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-017B Date: November 25, 2008 Subject: Information on 4T65-E MN7, M15, M76, MN3 Automatic Transmission Case, Cooler Fitting and Torque Converter Drain Back Check Ball Change Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with one of the HYDRA-MATIC(R) Automatic Transmissions shown above. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Parts Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-017A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Effective with Julian date 4019 (January 19, 2004), the 4T65E transaxle cases and cooler fittings have changed and are not interchangeable with past models. The technician may find that when replacing the inlet or outlet transmission cooler lines, the new lines cannot be connected to the transmission. A change to the transmission cooler line fittings was implemented in production on February 1, 2004. The cooler line fittings were changed to a design with a longer lead in pilot (1). The cooler line fittings with the longer lead in pilot will not fit on models built before February 1, 2004. The longer lead in pilot fittings (1) (9/16-18 UNF) have replaced the shorter lead in pilot fittings (2) (3/8-18 NPSF w/check ball & 1/4-18 NPSF). If the transmission cooler lines will not connect, then replace them with the following cooler line fittings as appropriate with the older, shorter lead in pilot design: ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, P/N 20793004. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Hose, second design P/N 15264588. ^ For vehicles built prior to February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, P/N 20793005. ^ For vehicles built after February 1, 2004, use Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Hose, second design P/N 15264589. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Revised Converter Check Valve/Cooler Line Fitting > Page 13434 The torque specification has changed for the fittings to case. The torque has changed from 38 Nm (28 lb ft) to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). Tighten Tighten the new cooler fittings to 32 Nm (23 lb ft). The converter drain back check ball (420C) has been removed from the cooler line fitting and is now located in the channel plate. If you get a concern of no movement in the morning or after sitting for several hours, the cooler check ball should be inspected. The best way to determine where the check ball is located is to look at the cooler line fittings. The old fittings are different sizes (3/8-18 NPSF & 1/4-18 NPSF) and would contain the cooler check ball. The new fittings are the same size as each other (9/16-18 UNF) and do not have a cooler check ball. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Torque Converter Clutch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13443 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13444 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13445 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13446 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13447 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13448 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13449 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13450 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13451 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13452 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13453 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13454 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13455 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13456 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13457 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13458 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13459 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13460 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13461 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13462 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13463 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13464 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13465 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13466 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13467 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13468 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13469 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13470 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13471 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13472 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13473 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13474 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13475 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13476 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13477 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13478 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13479 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13480 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13481 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13482 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13483 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13484 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13485 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13486 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13487 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13488 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13489 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13490 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13491 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13492 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13493 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13494 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13495 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13496 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13497 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13498 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13499 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13500 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13501 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13502 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13503 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13504 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13505 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13506 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13507 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13508 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13509 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13510 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13511 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13512 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13513 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13514 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13515 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13516 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13517 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13518 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13519 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13520 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13521 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13522 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13523 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13524 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13525 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13526 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13527 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13528 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13529 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13530 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13531 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13532 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13533 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13534 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13535 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13536 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13537 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13538 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13539 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13540 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13541 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13542 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13543 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13544 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13545 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13546 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13547 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13548 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13549 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13550 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13551 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13552 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13553 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13554 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13555 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13556 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13557 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13558 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13559 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13560 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13561 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13562 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13563 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13564 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13565 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13566 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13567 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13568 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13569 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314) 4. Remove the TCC solenoid (315). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC solenoid (315). 2. Install the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314). 3. Connect the TCC solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 13572 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect and reposition the electrical connectors from the following: * If equipped internal mode switch * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) 3. Remove the oil pump bolts (230, 231). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 13573 4. Remove the oil pump (200) from the valve body (300). 5. Disconnect the torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid electrical connector. 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid (334). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC PWM solenoid (334). 2. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 3. Connect the TCC PWM solenoid electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 13574 4. Install the oil pump (200) to the valve body (300). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the oil pump body and cover bolts (230, 230). * Tighten the nine bolts (231) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the two bolts (230) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 13575 6. Reposition and connect the electrical connectors to the following: * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * If equipped internal mode switch 7. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 8. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Torque Converter Cover: Service and Repair Torque Converter Cover Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the torque converter cover bolts. 3. Remove the torque converter covers. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 13579 Important: If equipped with 5.3L V8-The tab must be on the engine side of the engine oil pan bolt. 1. Install the torque converter covers. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the torque converter cover bolts. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 3. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow(R) Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J 35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris. In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can be used for verification of flow test results. Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo). The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid. Notice Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure. The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature. Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of the ATF in the supply vessel. Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F) Important - The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use. - Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair expense would be the dealer's responsibility. - A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110 volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a thermostat to hold a constant temperature. Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the machine on Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 13584 each repair. With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the reservoir. Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the reservoir to the rays of the warm sun. Flush / Flow Test Procedure Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate procedure. Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure. Machine Displays After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position. - Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM) - Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit) - Cycle number (a number) - Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2) Warranty Information Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts) of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 13585 of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card, entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 13586 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 13587 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13588 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Auxiliary Cooler Replacement Removal Procedure Notice: Allow sufficient clearance around the transaxle oil cooler pipes and around the hoses to prevent damage or wear which may cause fluid loss. 1. Remove the upper radiator air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Upper Baffle and Deflector Replacement . 2. Remove the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler bolt from the upper radiator support. 3. Remove the lower radiator air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement . 4. Remove the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler bolts from the lower radiator support. 5. Remove the inlet and outlet auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines from the support clips. 6. Lower the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler below the front bumper. 7. Remove the inlet and outlet auxiliary transaxle oil cooler hoses from the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: Fluid Line/Hose/Service and Repair) . 8. Remove the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler. Installation Procedure 1. Install the inlet and outlet auxiliary transaxle oil cooler hoses to the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Hose/Pipe Quick-Connect Fitting Disconnection and Connection (See: Fluid Line/Hose/Service and Repair) . 2. Install the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler to the vehicle. 3. Install the inlet and outlet auxiliary transmission oil cooler lines to the support clips. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13589 4. Install the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler bolts to the lower radiator support. Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 5. Install the lower radiator air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Lower Baffle and Deflector Replacement . 6. Install the auxiliary transaxle oil cooler bolt to the upper radiator support. Tighten the bolt to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 7. Install the upper radiator air baffle. Refer to Radiator Air Upper Baffle and Deflector Replacement . 8. Adjust the fluid level. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Mode Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13594 Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13595 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mount: Testing and Inspection Transmission Mount Inspection Notice: In order to avoid oil pan damage and possible engine failure, insert a block of wood that spans the width of the oil pan bottom between the oil pan and the jack support. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Important: Before replacing any transmission/transaxle mount due to suspected fluid loss, verify that the source of the fluid is the transmission/transaxle mount, not the engine, transmission/transaxle or accessories. 2. Raise the transmission/transaxle in order to remove the weight from the transmission/transaxle mount and create slight tension in the rubber. 3. Observe the transmission/transaxle mount while raising the transmission/transaxle. Replace the transmission/transaxle mount if the transmission/transaxle mount exhibits any of the following conditions: * The hard rubber surface is covered with heat check cracks. * The rubber is separated from the metal plate of the transmission/transaxle mount. * The rubber is split through the center of the transmission/transaxle mount. * If the transaxle needs replaced. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side) . 4. If there is movement between the metal plate of the transmission/transaxle mount and its attaching points, lower the transmission/transaxle on the transmission/transaxle mount. Tighten the bolts or nuts attaching the transmission/transaxle mount to the frame or transmission/transaxle mount bracket. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement Left Side (See: Service and Repair/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side) . 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Brace Replacement Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Brace Replacement Transmission Brace Replacement (RPO LS4) Automatic Transmission Brace Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Brace Replacement > Page 13601 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Left Side Transmission Mount Bracket Replacement - Left Side (RPO LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Brace Replacement > Page 13602 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the left tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the left engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Right) Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Left) . 4. Position a transmission jack under the transaxle. 5. Remove the transaxle mount upper nuts from the transaxle bracket. 6. Carefully raise the transaxle assembly. 7. Remove the transaxle mount lower nuts from the frame. 8. Remove the transaxle mount from the frame. Installation Procedure 1. Position the transaxle mount to the frame. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the transaxle mount lower nuts to the frame. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Brace Replacement > Page 13603 Tighten the transaxle mount lower nuts to 63 N.m (46 lb ft). 3. Lower the transaxle so the transaxle mount studs install into the transaxle bracket. 4. Install the transaxle mount upper nuts to the transaxle mount. Tighten the transaxle mount upper nuts to 47 N.m (35 lb ft). 5. Remove the transmission jack from the transaxle. 6. Install the left engine splash shield. Refer to Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Right) Engine Splash Shield Replacement (Left) . 7. Install the left wheel and tire assembly. 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure Test Port, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13611 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13612 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (AT ISS) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13613 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 4. Remove the input speed sensor (440). 5. Inspect the input speed sensor (440) for the following conditions: * Damaged or missing magnet * Damaged housing * Bent or missing electrical terminals * Damaged speed sensor clip (441) Installation Procedure 1. Install the input speed sensor (440). 2. Install the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 3. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13619 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13620 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness assembly from the fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (391). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fluid temperature sensor (391). 2. Connect the wiring harness assembly to the with fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 4. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 13623 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Thermo Element Replacement Thermo Element Replacement Tools Required J 34094-A Thermo Element Height Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the thermo element pins (120, 123) and the washers. 4. Remove the thermo element (121) and the thermo element plate (122). Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 34094-A to set the middle thermo pin (123). 2. Install the new thermo element plate (122). 3. Install the pin (120) and the washer. 4. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the pin and the washer furthest from the accumulator. 5. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the second pin (120) and the washer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 13624 6. Install the thermo element (121) between the two pins (120). The V in the thermo element (121) must contact the thermo element plate (122). 7. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 9. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 Valve Body: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-002A Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Information On 4T65-E MN7, M15 and M76 Front Wheel Drive Automatic Transmission Valve Body Reconditioning, DTCs P0741, P0742, P0757, P842, Harsh Shifts or Slips Models Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to include Related Service Document information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The following new service information will aid technicians in providing easy to follow valve body reconditioning instructions and new illustrations to simplify reassembly of the valve body. Related Service Document Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-013 : Incorrect Transmission Shifts, Poor Engine Performance, Harsh 1-2 Upshifts, Slips 1st and Reverse, Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Stuck Off/On, DTCs P0757 P0741 P0742 P0730 P0756. Important: If valve body cleaning is not required, DO NOT disassemble bores unless it is necessary to verify movement of valves. Inspection Procedure 1. Using the exploded views below inspect each bore for freedom of valve(s) movement and evidence of debris. Pay particular attention to those valves related to the customer's concern. 2. Verify movement of the valves in their normal installed position. Valves may become restricted during removal or installation. This is normal due to small tolerances between the valves and bores. 3. If a valve is restricted and cannot be corrected by cleaning the valve and bore replace the valve body. Describe the restricted valve on the repair order. Notice: Be sure all solenoids are installed with the electrical connectors facing the non-machined (cast) side of the valve body. Otherwise the solenoids will bind against the transmission case as the valve body bolts are tightened and damage may occur. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13633 Disassembly/Reassembly 1. If a valve is restricted by a metal burr from machining that bore remove the valve and burr then inspect movement in the valve's normal position. If no other debris or restrictions are found reassemble the valve body and install in the transmission. 2. If the valve body has been contaminated with debris from another transmission component failure disassemble all bores for complete cleaning of all valve body components. If possible keep individual bore parts separated for ease of reassembly. Use the following illustrations in this bulletin for a positive identification and location of individual parts: ^ Left Side Control Valve Body Assembly ^ Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly ^ Control Valve Body Assembly Chart Valve Springs and Bore Plugs Caution: Use appropriate eye protection when cleaning the valve body to prevent injury. 3. Using GM Brake Clean or equivalent in a safe and clean environment (clean aluminum pan) clean the valve body and dry it with compressed air. 4. Clean individual valve body components with GM Brake Clean or equivalent. Coat each valve with clean ATF and reassemble in each bore. Check each valve for free movement during assembly of each bore. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13634 Left Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13635 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13636 Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13637 1997-2000 M.Y. Only - Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13638 Valve Body Spring and Bore Plug Chart (Metric) Valve Body Spring and Bore Plug Chart (Inch) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13639 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-002A Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: Information On 4T65-E MN7, M15 and M76 Front Wheel Drive Automatic Transmission Valve Body Reconditioning, DTCs P0741, P0742, P0757, P842, Harsh Shifts or Slips Models Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to include Related Service Document information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-002 (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The following new service information will aid technicians in providing easy to follow valve body reconditioning instructions and new illustrations to simplify reassembly of the valve body. Related Service Document Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-013 : Incorrect Transmission Shifts, Poor Engine Performance, Harsh 1-2 Upshifts, Slips 1st and Reverse, Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Stuck Off/On, DTCs P0757 P0741 P0742 P0730 P0756. Important: If valve body cleaning is not required, DO NOT disassemble bores unless it is necessary to verify movement of valves. Inspection Procedure 1. Using the exploded views below inspect each bore for freedom of valve(s) movement and evidence of debris. Pay particular attention to those valves related to the customer's concern. 2. Verify movement of the valves in their normal installed position. Valves may become restricted during removal or installation. This is normal due to small tolerances between the valves and bores. 3. If a valve is restricted and cannot be corrected by cleaning the valve and bore replace the valve body. Describe the restricted valve on the repair order. Notice: Be sure all solenoids are installed with the electrical connectors facing the non-machined (cast) side of the valve body. Otherwise the solenoids will bind against the transmission case as the valve body bolts are tightened and damage may occur. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13649 Disassembly/Reassembly 1. If a valve is restricted by a metal burr from machining that bore remove the valve and burr then inspect movement in the valve's normal position. If no other debris or restrictions are found reassemble the valve body and install in the transmission. 2. If the valve body has been contaminated with debris from another transmission component failure disassemble all bores for complete cleaning of all valve body components. If possible keep individual bore parts separated for ease of reassembly. Use the following illustrations in this bulletin for a positive identification and location of individual parts: ^ Left Side Control Valve Body Assembly ^ Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly ^ Control Valve Body Assembly Chart Valve Springs and Bore Plugs Caution: Use appropriate eye protection when cleaning the valve body to prevent injury. 3. Using GM Brake Clean or equivalent in a safe and clean environment (clean aluminum pan) clean the valve body and dry it with compressed air. 4. Clean individual valve body components with GM Brake Clean or equivalent. Coat each valve with clean ATF and reassemble in each bore. Check each valve for free movement during assembly of each bore. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13650 Left Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13651 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13652 Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13653 1997-2000 M.Y. Only - Right Side Control Valve Body Assembly Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13654 Valve Body Spring and Bore Plug Chart (Metric) Valve Body Spring and Bore Plug Chart (Inch) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 08-07-30-002A > Mar > 08 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Slipping/DTCs P0741/P0742/P0757/P842 > Page 13655 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 01-07-30-036H > Jan > 09 > A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - DTC P0756 Diagnostic Tips INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-036H Date: January 29, 2009 Subject: Diagnostic Tips for Automatic Transmission DTC P0756, Second, Third, Fourth Gear Start Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32 or M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009 model year and add details regarding spacer plates. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-036G (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Some dealership technicians may have difficulty diagnosing DTC P0756, 2-3 Shift Valve Performance on 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70E automatic transmissions. As detailed in the Service Manual, when the PCM detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, DTC P0756 will set. Some customers may also describe a condition of a second, third or fourth gear start that may have the same causes but has not set this DTC yet. Below are some tips when diagnosing this DTC: ^ This is a performance code. This means that a mechanical malfunction exists. ^ This code is not set by electrical issues such as a damaged wiring harness or poor electrical connections. Electrical problems would cause a DTC P0758, P0787 or P0788 to set. ^ The most likely cause is chips/debris plugging the filtered AFL oil at orifice # 29 on the top of the spacer plate (48). This is a very small hole and is easily plugged by a small amount of debris. It is important to remove the spacer plate and inspect orifice # 29 and the immediate area for the presence of chips/debris. Also, the transmission case passage directly above this orifice and the valve body passage directly below should be inspected and cleaned of any chips/debris. For 2003 and newer vehicles the spacer plate should be replaced. The service replacement spacer plate is a bonded style with gaskets and solenoid filter screens bonded to the spacer plate. These screens can help to prevent plugging of orifice # 29 caused by small debris or chips. ^ This code could be set if the 2-3 shift valve (368) were stuck or hung-up in its bore. Inspect the 2-3 shift valve (368) and the 2-3 shuttle valve (369) for free movement or damage and clean the valves, the bore and the valve body passages. ^ This code could be set by a 2-3 shift solenoid (367b) if it were cracked, broken or leaking. Refer to Shift Solenoid Leak Test in the appropriate Service Manual for the leak test procedure. Based on parts return findings, a damaged or leaking shift solenoid is the least likely cause of this condition. Simply replacing a shift solenoid will not correct this condition unless the solenoid has been found to be cracked, broken or leaking. It is important to also refer to the appropriate Service Manual or Service Information (SI) for further possible causes of this condition. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13661 Valve Body: Locations Component Location Ball Check Valves Ball Check Valves 1 - TCC Apply-Release 2 - 2nd-2nd Clutch 3 - Input Clutch-PRN 4 - 3rd Clutch-Lo/1st 5 Reverse-Reverse Servo Large 6 - D4-Servo Apply 7 - Lo-Lo/1st 8 - D2-Manual 2-1 Servo Feed 9 3rd-3rd Clutch 10 - Line-Lo/1st Gear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Control Valve Body Cover Replacement Tools Required J 36850 Transjel Lubricant Removal Procedure 1. Remove the engine site shield. Refer to the following: * Intake Manifold Cover Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Intake Manifold Cover Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement for the 5.3L engine 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet duct. Refer to the following: * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement for the 5.3L engine 3. Remove the transaxle shift cable from lever and bracket from the transaxle. 4. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness connector and disconnect the harness retainer from side cover stud. 5. Remove the engine mount struts. Refer to the following: * Engine Mount Strut Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Engine Mount Strut Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Engine Mount Strut Replacement for the 5.3L engine 6. Remove the top case side cover bolt (56, 58). 7. Install the engine support fixture to support the engine/transaxle assembly. Refer to the following: * Engine Support Fixture for the 3.5L engine * Engine Support Fixture for the 3.9L engine * Engine Support Fixture for the 5.3L engine 8. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13664 9. Remove the left front wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 10. Remove the left front fender liner. Refer to Front Fender Liner Replacement . 11. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness from 4 retainers on the lower control arm. 12. Remove the transmission mount-to-frame nuts. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side) . 13. Remove both stabilizer links and reposition stabilizer to access steering gear- to-frame bolts. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 14. Remove steering gear-to-frame bolts and support steering gear. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair) . 15. Remove the front splash shield. 16. Remove the positive battery cable center retainer at front frame rail. 17. Remove the left side ball joint and support the left frame rail with a jack stand. 18. Remove ONLY the left two frame-to-body bolts. DO NOT LOOSEN right side frame-to-body bolts. Refer to Frame Replacement . 19. Lower frame with a jackstand and remove jackstand. 20. Position the drain pan under the transaxle. 21. Remove the left drive axle from the transaxle. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 22. Secure the drive axle to the strut assembly. 23. Lower the vehicle. 24. Using the engine support fixture lower the engine assembly to access the transaxle case side cover. 25. Raise the vehicle. 26. Remove the transaxle mount bracket bolts and the bracket from the transaxle. 27. Remove the remaining case side cover bolts (56, 57, 58). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13665 28. Remove the case side cover (53). 29. Remove the case side cover gasket (54). 30. Remove the case side cover O-ring (59). 31. Clean the side cover gasket mating surfaces. Installation Procedure 1. Install the J 36850 to the case side cover O-ring (59). 2. Install the O-ring (59) to the case side cover. 3. Install the case side cover gasket (54). 4. Install the case side cover (53), by first installing any 2 of the upper case side cover bolts (56, 58). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the case side cover bolts (56, 57, 58). Tighten bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Install the transaxle mount bracket 7. Install the transaxle mount bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 95 N.m (70 lb ft) 8. Install a jackstand under the left frame rail and raise frame while aligning transaxle mount bolts with frame and ball joint with steering knuckle. 9. Install and tighten left side frame-to-body bolts. Refer to Frame Replacement . 10. Install the drive axle to the transaxle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13666 11. Remove the drain pan from under the transaxle. 12. Install transaxle mount nuts. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side (See: Transmission Mount/Service and Repair/Transmission Mount Replacement - Left Side) . 13. Install the ball joint nut and cotter pin. 14. Install steering gear-to-frame bolts. Refer to Steering Gear Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair ). 15. Install the positive battery cable center retainer on the front frame rail. 16. reposition stabilizer bar and install both stabilizer links. Refer to Stabilizer Shaft Link Replacement (See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Suspension) . 17. Install the front splash shield. 18. Install the wheel speed sensor harness to 4 retainers on the lower control arm. 19. Install the left front fender liner. Refer to Front Fender Liner Replacement . 20. Install the left front wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 21. Lower the vehicle. 22. Remove the engine support fixture. 23. Install the top case side cover bolt. Tighten bolts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 24. Install the shift cable to the shift lever and transaxle shift cable bracket bolts to shift cable bracket. Tighten bolts to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 25. Connect the transaxle wiring harness connector, and harness retainer to side cover stud. 26. Install the engine mount struts. Refer to the following: * Engine Mount Strut Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Engine Mount Strut Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Engine Mount Strut Replacement for the 5.3L engine 27. Install the air induction duct. Refer to the following: * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.5L engine * Air Cleaner Outlet Duct Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Air Cleaner Resonator Outlet Duct Replacement for the 5.3L engine 28. Install the engine site shield. Refer to the following: * Intake Manifold Cover Replacement for the 3.5L engine Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13667 * Intake Manifold Cover Replacement for the 3.9L engine * Upper Intake Manifold Sight Shield Replacement for the 5.3L engine Notice: Do not overfill the transmission. Overfilling will result in foaming, loss of fluid, and possible damage to the transmission. 29. Check and fill the transaxle as necessary. 30. Inspect for fluid leaks. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13668 Valve Body: Service and Repair Control Valve Body Replacement Control Valve Body Replacement Tools Required J 36850 Transjel Lubricant Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Remove the oil pump. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Fluid Pump/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the valve body bolts (374-381, 384). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13669 4. Remove the valve body (300) while keeping the spacer plate and gasket assembly (396) with the transaxle. 5. Remove the ball check valves (372 and 373) from the valve body. 6. Remove the spacer plate and gasket assembly (396) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13670 7. Remove the ball check valves (372) from the case cover. 8. Inspect each check valve seat in the spacer plate (370) for excessive peening. Place a ball check valve (372) on each seat and use a flashlight in order to look for visible light between the valve and the seat. Installation Procedure Notice: Do NOT use any type of grease to retain parts during the assembly of this unit. Using greases other than the recommended assembly lube changes the transaxle fluid characteristics. Using greases other than the recommended assembly lube causes undesirable shift conditions and/or filter clogging. Use TRANSJEL(TM) J 36850 or equivalent during the assembly of this unit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13671 1. Install the ball check valves (372) into the case cover. Use the J 36850 to retain the ball check valves in their proper locations. 2. Install the gasket and spacer plate assembly (396). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13672 3. Install the ball check valves (372 and 373) into the valve body. Use the J 36850 to retain the ball check valves in their proper locations. Important: Do NOT use impact type tools on the valve body or on the oil pump. 4. Install the spacer plate/gasket assembly (396) and the valve body (300). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Valve Body Cover Replacement > Page 13673 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the valve body bolts (374-381, 384). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 20 bolt (381) to 8 N.m (70 lb in). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 30 bolt (376) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 45 bolt (377) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 55 bolt (378) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 60 bolt (375) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 65 bolt (374) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 85 bolt (384) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the M6 X 1.0 X 95 bolt (379) to 16 N.m (11 lb ft). * Tighten the M8 X 1.25 X 90 bolt (380) to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 6. Install the oil pump. Refer to Oil Pump Replacement (See: Fluid Pump/Service and Repair) . 7. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 8. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Wiring Harness: Customer Interest A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13682 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13688 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13689 Wiring Harness: Service and Repair Wiring Harness Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool in order to remove the wiring harness from the solenoid valve (315A, 315B, 322, 334 and/or 440), TFP manual valve position switch (395) and the temperature sensor (391). 3. Remove the wiring harness (224). Installation Procedure 1. Install the wiring harness (224). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Wiring Harness, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13690 2. Install the wiring harness to the solenoid valve (315A, 315B, 322, 334 and/or 440), TFP manual valve position switch (395) and the temperature sensor (391). 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 4. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Controls Snapshot Data Upload Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-07-30-010B Date: June 19, 2009 Subject: Procedure to Take Snapshot Data with a Tech 2(R) and Upload Data to a Computer Using TIS Software Models: 2004-2010 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Truck (Including Saturn; excluding Astra models) 2004-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2004-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Sending a Snapshot to GM TAC section and add the 2010 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-07-30-010A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important Global Diagnostic System (GDS) will take the place of the Tech 2(R) on certain vehicles when communicating and diagnosing vehicle on-board electrical systems. This new diagnostic tool platform and software will be required for use with all GM Global Architecture (Global A) vehicles beginning with the 2010 Chevrolet Camaro, followed later by the Buick Allure/LaCrosse, Chevrolet Equinox, Cadillac SRX and the GMC Terrain. These vehicles will no longer permit Tech 2(R) communication for diagnostic purposes. For further information, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-019 (Introduction of New Global Diagnostic System (GDS)). This procedure is intended to show the user how to take snapshot data with a Tech 2(R) and upload it to a computer. The procedure is written for an automatic transmission data snapshot on a Saturn AURA, but is similar for all applications. This procedure is written with the assumption the user has a basic understanding of how to use a Tech 2(R) already. Capturing a Snapshot of the Vehicle Data Stream 1. Connect the Tech 2(R) to the vehicle Data Link Connector (DLC) as shown above. Use a CANdi module as required. 2. Power up the Tech 2(R) and press the ENTER key at the start-up screen. 3. From the Main Menu select F0: Diagnostics. 4. Enter all vehicle information as requested on the scan tool's display. Bolded selections are vehicle specific. - Select "2007" - Select "Passenger Car (F0)" - Select "Saturn" Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 13695 - Select "Z" - Select "Aura" - Select "Powertrain" - Select "3.6L LY7" - Select "Transmission" - Select "Transmission Data" 5. From the application menu, select F3: Snapshot. - Choose trigger type and trigger point, as described above. - It is preferred to trigger on "Any Code" (F1) - If multiple codes are setting, select "Single Code" and enter the code you are trying to capture on the next screen. - Select "Center (F5)" for the trigger point. This allows the requester/viewer of the data to see the events before and after the code sets. 6. Press the Record Snapshot soft key. The Tech 2(R) screen will display the parameters it is going to record for live viewing. - When the fault occurs, the Tech 2(R) will automatically start recording if the preferred settings (F1 and F5) are selected. - If manual trigger is selected during the setup procedure, you will have to hit the "Trigger" soft key to actually record data. Otherwise, it will automatically start recording when a DTC is set. - Allow the Tech 2(R) to record the data. Please note that a Tech 2(R) can record a maximum of 1 minute of data (30 seconds before and 30 seconds after the trigger point if center trigger is selected). Important The Tech(R)2 can only record two snapshots prior to uploading to a computer. If a third snapshot is requested, the first snapshot will be overwritten. 7. When the snap shot data has been recorded, exit to the Main Menu, then power down and disconnect the Tech 2(R) from the vehicle. Uploading and Sending a Snapshot via TIS2WEB Figure 8 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 13696 Figure 9 1. Once TIS2WEB is launched and you're at the main screen, select Snapshot, indicated with a arrow in Figure 8. 2. Select the Upload from Handheld button to launch the device selection screen just like the TIS 2000 procedure described above. Figure 10 3. Select the top button, "Upload from Handheld" which will launch the screen displayed in Figure 10. Make sure the Tech 2(R) is connected to the computer and plugged in. Select Tech 2(R) under Device and select OK. The screen of your Tech 2(R) should start blinking and a line will start scrolling across the screen indicating it is communicating with your computer. Figure 11 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 13697 4. Once communication is established and you select the file you want to upload, you will see a screen similar to below. You can email the file directly from TIS2WEB by going to the Snapshot drop down menu and selecting "Send to e-mail" as shown in Figure 11. Figure 12 5. After selecting Send to e-mail, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 12 will be displayed. Fill in the information as requested and then click send. Include the VIN in the subject line. 6. After all the information is entered, hit the send button. After sending the file, you will receive a confirmation box letting you know the e-mail was sent successfully. 7. It is recommended to now save the file to your computer using the same procedure as if you were using TIS 2000 in case your recipient doesn't receive your email with the snapshot data. Important Sending the file via e-mail through TIS2WEB does NOT save the file locally and there is no way to access your sent mail in TIS2WEB like a regular e-mail program. Sending a Snapshot to GM TAC Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 13698 During your call with GM TAC on a current case, you may be advised to send a copy of the Tech 2(R) or VDR Snapshot Data to the TAC e-mail box. U.S. Dealers - send to e-mail box [email protected] Canadian Dealers - send to e-mail box [email protected] Please complete the following: - Be sure to review the procedures listed above for uploading and sending a Snapshot via TIS2WEB. - If you are using a VDR to capture Snapshot Data, information can be accessed in the Techlink Website in the articles (December 2002, December 2003, July 2004 and January 2006). - Please be sure to identify the snapshot by placing the TAC Case Number, the last eight digits of the VIN and the type of data (i.e. engine or transmission) in the subject line of your e-mail. The email Subject Line MUST contain the TAC case number and last 8 digits of the VIN or their email can not be processed and will be deleted. Please send only REQUESTED Snapshot Data to the TAC e-mail box. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 13699 Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-01-029E Date: April 29, 2010 Subject: Unnecessary Flushing Services, Additive Recommendations and Proper Utilization of GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule to Enhance Customer Service Experience Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add information about the proper transmission flush procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-01-029D (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). An Overview of Proper Vehicle Service General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools and equipment to support a subsystem flushing procedures. These dedicated machines are in addition to many engine oil, cooling system, fuel system, A/C, transmission flush and steering system additives available to the consumer. GM Vehicles under normal usage do not require any additional procedures or additives beyond what is advised under the former Vehicle Maintenance Schedules or the current Simplified Maintenance Schedules. Do not confuse machines available from Kent-Moore/SPX that are designed to aid and accelerate the process of fluid changing with these flushing machines. Engine Crankcase Flushing General Motors Corporation does not endorse or recommend engine crankcase flushing for any of its gasoline engines. Analysis of some of the aftermarket materials used for crankcase flushing indicate incompatibility with GM engine components and the potential for damage to some engine seals and bearings. Damage to engine components resulting from crankcase flushing IS NOT COVERED under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. GM Authorized Service Information: Detailed, Descriptive, and Complete If a specific model vehicle or powertrain need is identified, GM will issue an Authorized Service Document containing a procedure and, if required, provide, make available, or require the specific use of a machine, tool or chemical to accomplish proper vehicle servicing. An example of this is fuel injector cleaning. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, GM has recognized the need for fuel injector cleaning methods on some engines, though under normal circumstances, this service is not part of the maintenance requirements. GM has published several gasoline fuel injector cleaning bulletins that fully outline the methods to be used in conjunction with GM Part Numbered solutions to accomplish proper and safe cleaning of the fuel injectors with preventative maintenance suggestions to maintain optimum performance. You may refer to Corporate Bulletin Numbers 03-06-04-030 and 04-06-04-051 for additional information on this subject. Subsystem Flushing Flushing of A/C lines, radiators, transmission coolers, and power steering systems are recognized practices to be performed after catastrophic failures or extreme corrosion when encountered in radiators. For acceptable A/C flushing concerns, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 01-01-38-006. This practice is NOT required or recommended for normal service operations. The use of external transmission fluid exchange or flush machines is NOT recommended for the automatic or manual transmission. Use of external machines to replace the fluid may affect the operation or durability of the transmission. Transmission fluid should only be replaced by draining and refilling following directions in SI. Refer to Automatic/Manual Transmission Fluid and Filter Replacement. Approved Transmission Flushing Tool (Transmission Cooler Only) The Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Tool is recommended for GM vehicles. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Flushing and Flow Test in SI using the J 45096. Service Is Important to You and Your Customer General Motors takes great pride in offering our dealerships and customers high quality vehicles that require extremely low maintenance over the life of the vehicle. This low cost of ownership builds repeat sales and offers our customers measurable economy of operation against competing vehicles. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Controls - Snapshot Data Upload Information > Page 13700 Providing responsible services at the proper intervals will greatly aid your dealership with repeat business, and additional services when required. Most customers appreciate and gain trust in the dealership that informs and offers them just what they need for continued trouble-free operation. Examine your service department's practices and verify that all Service Consultants and Technicians focus on customer satisfaction, vehicle inspections, and other products at time of service. Use this opportunity to upgrade the services you provide to your customers. Here are a few suggestions: - Take the time required to align your dealership service practices with the new GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule. Use the new vehicle Owner's Manual Maintenance I and II schedules to create a "mirror image" in your advertising and dealer service pricing that is easily understandable to your customer. Taking advantage of this new service strategy may greatly increase your dealership service sales and customer retention while decreasing the frequency of visits and inconvenience to your customer. - Review your program to ensure that all vehicles coming in are evaluated for safety and wear items. Examine all vehicles for tire condition, signs of misalignment, brake wear, exterior lamp functionality, exhaust condition, A/C cooling performance, SRS or Air Bag MIL, along with Service Engine Soon or Check Engine indicators. If the Service Engine Soon or Check Engine MIL is illuminated, it is vital that you inform the customer of the concerns with ignoring the indicator and what the required repair would cost. In addition to the possibility of increased emissions and driveability concerns, many customers are unaware that lower gas mileage may also result, with additional cost to the customer. - Be complete in your service recommendations. Some sales opportunities are not being fully pursued nationally. Focus on overlooked but required maintenance that has real benefits to the customer. Many vehicles are equipped with cabin air filters. If these filters are used beyond replacement time, they may impede airflow decreasing A/C and heating performance. Make sure these filters are part of your recommended service. Note that some of our vehicles may not have been factory equipped but will accept the filters as an accessory. - Express the value in maintaining the finish quality of the customer's vehicle at the Maintenance I and II visits. More fully utilize the vehicle prep personnel you already have in place. In today's world, many people simply ignore the finish of their vehicle, at best infrequently using an automatic car wash for exterior cleaning. Offer vehicle detailing services in stages from just a wash and wax to a complete interior cleaning. When paired with the Simplified Maintenance visit, this will increase customer satisfaction. On return, the customer gets a visibly improved vehicle that will be a source of pride of ownership along with a vehicle that is now fully maintained. Also, reinforce the improved resale value of a completely maintained vehicle. - For customers who clean and maintain the appearance of their vehicles themselves encourage the use of GM Vehicle Care products. Many customers may have never used GM Car Wash/Wax Concentrate, GM Cleaner Wax or a longtime product, GM Glass Cleaner, which is a favorite of many customers who try it just once. If your dealership give samples of these products with new car purchases, customers may already be sold on the product but not willing to make a special trip to the dealership. Capitalize on sales at this time. Stock shelves right at the Service counter with these products and consider instituting compensation programs for Service Consultants who suggest these products. Many consumers faced with an intimidating wall full of car care products sold at local auto parts stores may find it comforting to purchase a fully tested product sold by GM that they know will not harm the finish of their vehicle. We suggest these competitively priced basic vehicle care products to emphasize: In USA: - #12378401 GM Vehicle Care Wash/Wax Concentrate 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #89021822 GM Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner Aerosol 18 oz. (510 g) - #12377966 GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #1052929 GM Vehicle Care Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #88861431 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 24 fl. oz. (0.710L) In Canada: - #10953203 GM Vehicle Care Wash & Wax Concentrate 473 mL - #992727 GM Glass Cleaner Aerosol 500 g - #10952905 GM Vehicle Care Liquid Cleaner/Wax 473 mL - #10953013 GM Vehicle Care Chrome Cleaner and Polish 454 mL - #10953202 GM Vehicle Care Wheel Brite 473 mL - #88901678 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 473 mL - Display signboards with the installed price for popular GM Accessories such as running boards and Tonneau Covers. Customers may not think to ask about these desirable items at the time of a service visit. - Finally, take advantage of the GM Goodwrench initiatives (Tire Program, Goodwrench Credit Card, etc. / Dealer Marketing Association (DMA) Promotions in Canada) to provide the customer with more reasons to identify your dealership as the best place to go for parts and service. Remember to utilize ALL of the service aspects you possess in your dealership to satisfy and provide value to your customer. Many businesses exist profitably as an oil change location, a vehicle repair facility, or a detailing shop alone. You already have the capabilities of all three and provide these services with the inherent trust of your customer, under the GM Mark of Excellence. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 13711 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 13717 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Constant Velocity Joint: Testing and Inspection Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection Special Tools J 8059 Snap Ring Pliers Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the outer constant velocity (CV) joint and boot from the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . 2. Remove any grease from the CV joint. 3. Using the J 8059 , remove the retaining ring (3) from the wheel drive shaft (4). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 13721 4. Install the outer CV joint assembly in a vise. Important: The following procedure will have to be repeated until all the ball bearing are removed form the cage. 5. Using a brass drift (1), gentle tap the cage until the ball bearing can be removed from the cage. 6. Using a small screwdriver, remove the ball bearings from the CV joint. 7. Position the cage and the inner race so they are level. 8. Remove the ball bearings from the CV joint in sequence. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 13722 Important: Position the cage so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are facing up. 9. Position the cage at a 90° to the centerline of the outer race. 10. Align the cage windows with the lands of the outer race. 11. Lift and remove the cage and the inner race from the outer race. 12. Position the cage and the inner race so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are up. 13. Rotate the inner race 90° to the center line of the cage. 14. Align the lands of the inner race with the windows of the cage. 15. Move the inner race land into the cage window. 16. Rotate the inner race down and remove it from the cage. 17. Clean the following items thoroughly with the proper cleaning solvent: * The inner race * The outer race * The cage * The ball bearings * The exposed end of the wheel drive shaft Important: The internal parts of the CV joint are NOT SERVICED separately. The outer CV joint is serviced as an assembly. 18. If any of the above items are found to have excessive wear or are damaged, replace the outer CV joint as an assembly. Assembly Procedure 1. Position the cage so that the larger radius corners of the cage windows are up. 2. Position the inner race 90° to the centerline of the cage. 3. Insert the inner race through the bottom of the cage. 4. Align the lands of the inner race with the windows of the cage. 5. Move the inner race land into the cage window. 6. Rotate the inner race down and remove it from the cage. 7. Rotate the inner race within the cage so that the grooved surface of the inner race is facing up. 8. Align the inner race ball bearing tracks with the cage windows. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 13723 9. Wrap a clean shop towel around the CV joint outer race splined shaft. 10. Place the outer race vertically in a bench vise. 11. Position the cage and the inner race at a 90° to the centerline of the outer race. 12. With the inner race and the cage assembly in a vertical position, insert the cage and the inner race into the outer race. Important: The larger radius corners of the cage windows should be positioned up and the grooved surface of the inner race should be visible. 13. Position the cage and the inner race so that they are level in the vise. 14. Rotate the appropriate component (s), and align the cage windows and the inner race ball bearing tracks with the outer race ball bearing tracks. 15. Position a cage window and the inner race ball bearing track for the ball bearing installation. Important: When performing the following procedure, the opposing cage window and the inner ball bearing track will be accessible for the ball bearing installation. 16. Press down on the cage following one of the outer race ball bearing tracks. 17. Install the ball bearing through the cage window onto the inner race ball bearing track. Important: The following service procedure will have to be performed after each ball bearing has been installed. 18. After the first ball bearing has been installed, use a brass drift and a hammer and gently tap the cage in order to drive the cage and the inner race down completely in the outer race. Important: After the ball bearing has been installed, there should be NO GAP between the ball bearing and the inner race. 19. Position the cage and the inner race so that they are level. 20. Using a plastic hammer, lightly tap the ball bearing into place. 21. Install the ball bearings in sequence. 22. Repeat steps 18 thru 20 until all the ball bearings are installed. 23. Install the outer CV joint and boot on the wheel drive shaft. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Tools Required * J 8059 Snap Ring Pliers (Parallel Jaw) * J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers * J 41048 Drive Axle Swage Ring Clamp Removal Procedure Notice: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity joint. 1. Disconnect the swage ring from the halfshaft bar using a hand grinder to cut through the ring, taking care not to damage the halfshaft bar. 2. Remove the large seal retaining clamp (2) from the tripot joint with side cutters. Discard the large seal retaining clamp. 3. Separate the inboard seal from the trilobal tripot bushing (3) at the large diameter. 4. Slide the seal away from the joint along the halfshaft bar. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13726 5. Remove the housing (1) from the tripot joint spider and the halfshaft bar (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13727 6. Remove the spacer ring (1), spider assembly (2), spacer ring (3) (if equipped) using J 8059 , and tripot boot (4). Discard the boot and rings. 7. Clean the halfshaft bar (5). Use a wire brush in order to remove any rust in the boot mounting area (grooves). 8. Inspect the needle rollers, needle bearings, and trunnion. Check the tripot housing for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. Replace any damaged parts with the appropriate kit. Installation Procedure 1. Place the new small swage ring (2) onto the small end of the joint seal (1). Slide the joint seal (1) and the small swage ring (2) onto the halfshaft bar. 2. Position the small end of the joint seal (1) into the joint seal groove (3) on the halfshaft bar. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13728 3. Mount J 41048 in a vise and proceed as follows: 1. Position the inboard end (1) of the halfshaft assembly in tool J 41048 . 2. Align the top of seal neck on the bottom die using the indicator. 3. Place the top half of the J 41048 on the lower half . 4. Before proceeding, ensure there are no pinch points on the halfshaft inboard seal. This could cause damage to the halfshaft inboard seal. 5. Insert the bolts (2). 6. Tighten the bolts by hand until snug. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13729 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Align the following items: * The halfshaft inboard seal (1) * The halfshaft bar * The swage ring (2) Tighten each bolt of J 41048 180 degrees at a time using a ratchet wrench. Alternate between each bolt until both sides are bottomed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13730 5. If equipped, install the spacer ring (2) into the groove of the halfshaft bar using J 8059 . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13731 6. Slide the tripot joint spider assembly (4) as far as it will go on the halfshaft bar. 7. Install the spacer ring (2) into the groove of the halfshaft bar J 8059 . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13732 8. Place approximately half of the grease from the service kit in the halfshaft inboard seal. Use the remainder of the grease to repack the housing. Important: Ensure the trilobal tripot bushing (3) is flush with the face of the housing (1). 9. Install the new trilobal tripot bushing (3) to housing (1). 10. Position the larger new seal retaining clamp (2) on the halfshaft inboard seal. 11. Slide the housing (1) over the tripot joint spider assembly on the halfshaft bar. 12. Slide the large diameter of the halfshaft inboard seal (2), with the larger clamp (3) in place, over the outside of the trilobal tripot bushing and locate the lip of the seal in the groove. 13. Carefully insert a thin flat blunt tool, no sharp edges, between the large seal opening and the trilobal tripot bushing in order to equalize the pressure. Remove the tool. 14. Position the joint assembly at the proper vehicle dimension. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13733 * For 4.6L V8 engines, dimension a = 107 mm (4.21 in). * For 4.0L V6 engines, dimension a = 111 mm (4.37 in). * For 3.8L supercharged V6 engines, dimension a = 111 mm (4.37 in). * For all others, dimension a = 95 mm (3.75 in). 15. Align the following items while latching: * The halfshaft inboard seal * The tripot housing (2) * The large seal retaining clamp (3) Crimp the seal retaining clamp with J 35910 to 176 N.m (130 lb ft). Add the breaker bar (5) and the torque wrench (4) to J 35910 if necessary. 16. Check the gap dimension (a) on the clamp ear. If gap dimension is larger than shown, continue tightening until gap dimension of 2.60 mm (0.102 in) is reached. 17. Fully stroke the joint several times to disperse the grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13734 Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Tools Required * J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers * CH-48894 Wheel Drive Shaft Boot Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure Important: The following service procedure is to be performed after the wheel drive shaft has been removed from the vehicle. 1. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. Notice: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13735 joint. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool, remove the boot clamp (2) from the constant velocity (CV) joint (1) and the boot (3). 3. Using a pair of side cutters, remove the boot clamp (4) from the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). 4. Discard the boot clamps (2) and (4). Use NEW clamps only. 5. Using a block of wood and a hammer, remove the CV joint from the wheel drive shaft. 6. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 7. Inspect the outer CV joint for damage and wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection (See: Testing and Inspection) . Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13736 1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2). 2. Ensure that the boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3). 3. Place approximately half the grease from the service kit inside the outboard boot and pack the CV joint with the remaining grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13737 4. Using a block of wood and a hammer, install the CV joint on the wheel drive shaft. 5. Install the boot clamp (4) on the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). 6. Install the boot clamp (2) on the boot (3) and the CV joint housing (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13738 Important: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the boot. 7. Using the , crimp the boot clamp. 8. Measure the clamp end gap dimension. The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 in). The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 in). 9. Using the CH-48894 , close the boot clamp. Ensure the boot clamp is securely closed and seated properly on the boot. 10. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the bench vise. 11. Distribute the grease within the outer CV joint by rotating the joint in a circular motion four to five times. 12. Install the wheel drive shaft assembly. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement Tools Required * J 8059 Snap Ring Pliers (Parallel Jaw) * J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers * J 41048 Drive Axle Swage Ring Clamp Removal Procedure Notice: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity joint. 1. Disconnect the swage ring from the halfshaft bar using a hand grinder to cut through the ring, taking care not to damage the halfshaft bar. 2. Remove the large seal retaining clamp (2) from the tripot joint with side cutters. Discard the large seal retaining clamp. 3. Separate the inboard seal from the trilobal tripot bushing (3) at the large diameter. 4. Slide the seal away from the joint along the halfshaft bar. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13743 5. Remove the housing (1) from the tripot joint spider and the halfshaft bar (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13744 6. Remove the spacer ring (1), spider assembly (2), spacer ring (3) (if equipped) using J 8059 , and tripot boot (4). Discard the boot and rings. 7. Clean the halfshaft bar (5). Use a wire brush in order to remove any rust in the boot mounting area (grooves). 8. Inspect the needle rollers, needle bearings, and trunnion. Check the tripot housing for unusual wear, cracks, or other damage. Replace any damaged parts with the appropriate kit. Installation Procedure 1. Place the new small swage ring (2) onto the small end of the joint seal (1). Slide the joint seal (1) and the small swage ring (2) onto the halfshaft bar. 2. Position the small end of the joint seal (1) into the joint seal groove (3) on the halfshaft bar. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13745 3. Mount J 41048 in a vise and proceed as follows: 1. Position the inboard end (1) of the halfshaft assembly in tool J 41048 . 2. Align the top of seal neck on the bottom die using the indicator. 3. Place the top half of the J 41048 on the lower half . 4. Before proceeding, ensure there are no pinch points on the halfshaft inboard seal. This could cause damage to the halfshaft inboard seal. 5. Insert the bolts (2). 6. Tighten the bolts by hand until snug. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13746 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Align the following items: * The halfshaft inboard seal (1) * The halfshaft bar * The swage ring (2) Tighten each bolt of J 41048 180 degrees at a time using a ratchet wrench. Alternate between each bolt until both sides are bottomed. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13747 5. If equipped, install the spacer ring (2) into the groove of the halfshaft bar using J 8059 . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13748 6. Slide the tripot joint spider assembly (4) as far as it will go on the halfshaft bar. 7. Install the spacer ring (2) into the groove of the halfshaft bar J 8059 . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13749 8. Place approximately half of the grease from the service kit in the halfshaft inboard seal. Use the remainder of the grease to repack the housing. Important: Ensure the trilobal tripot bushing (3) is flush with the face of the housing (1). 9. Install the new trilobal tripot bushing (3) to housing (1). 10. Position the larger new seal retaining clamp (2) on the halfshaft inboard seal. 11. Slide the housing (1) over the tripot joint spider assembly on the halfshaft bar. 12. Slide the large diameter of the halfshaft inboard seal (2), with the larger clamp (3) in place, over the outside of the trilobal tripot bushing and locate the lip of the seal in the groove. 13. Carefully insert a thin flat blunt tool, no sharp edges, between the large seal opening and the trilobal tripot bushing in order to equalize the pressure. Remove the tool. 14. Position the joint assembly at the proper vehicle dimension. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13750 * For 4.6L V8 engines, dimension a = 107 mm (4.21 in). * For 4.0L V6 engines, dimension a = 111 mm (4.37 in). * For 3.8L supercharged V6 engines, dimension a = 111 mm (4.37 in). * For all others, dimension a = 95 mm (3.75 in). 15. Align the following items while latching: * The halfshaft inboard seal * The tripot housing (2) * The large seal retaining clamp (3) Crimp the seal retaining clamp with J 35910 to 176 N.m (130 lb ft). Add the breaker bar (5) and the torque wrench (4) to J 35910 if necessary. 16. Check the gap dimension (a) on the clamp ear. If gap dimension is larger than shown, continue tightening until gap dimension of 2.60 mm (0.102 in) is reached. 17. Fully stroke the joint several times to disperse the grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13751 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint and Boot Replacement Tools Required * J 35910 Drive Axle Seal Clamp Pliers * CH-48894 Wheel Drive Shaft Boot Clamp Pliers Removal Procedure Important: The following service procedure is to be performed after the wheel drive shaft has been removed from the vehicle. 1. Clamp the drive axle shaft in a soft jawed vice. Notice: Do not cut through the wheel drive shaft inboard boot during service. Cutting through the boot may damage the sealing surface of the housing and the tripot bushing. Damage to the sealing surface may lead to water and dirt intrusion and premature wear of the constant velocity Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13752 joint. 2. Use a flat-bladed tool, remove the boot clamp (2) from the constant velocity (CV) joint (1) and the boot (3). 3. Using a pair of side cutters, remove the boot clamp (4) from the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). 4. Discard the boot clamps (2) and (4). Use NEW clamps only. 5. Using a block of wood and a hammer, remove the CV joint from the wheel drive shaft. 6. Remove the boot (1) from the wheel drive shaft (2). 7. Inspect the outer CV joint for damage and wear. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Outer Joint Inspection (See: Constant Velocity Joint/Testing and Inspection) . Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13753 1. Position the boot (1) on the wheel drive shaft (2). 2. Ensure that the boot (1) is properly seated in the groove (2) in the wheel drive shaft (3). 3. Place approximately half the grease from the service kit inside the outboard boot and pack the CV joint with the remaining grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13754 4. Using a block of wood and a hammer, install the CV joint on the wheel drive shaft. 5. Install the boot clamp (4) on the boot (3) and the wheel drive shaft (5). 6. Install the boot clamp (2) on the boot (3) and the CV joint housing (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Drive Shaft Inner Joint and Boot Replacement > Page 13755 Important: Ensure that the boot clamp is properly positioned around the entire circumference of the boot. 7. Using the , crimp the boot clamp. 8. Measure the clamp end gap dimension. The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 in). The gap should not exceed 2.15 mm (0.85 in). 9. Using the CH-48894 , close the boot clamp. Ensure the boot clamp is securely closed and seated properly on the boot. 10. Remove the wheel drive shaft from the bench vise. 11. Distribute the grease within the outer CV joint by rotating the joint in a circular motion four to five times. 12. Install the wheel drive shaft assembly. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 08-07-30-009B > May > 08 > A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 13769 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 13770 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 08-07-30-009B Date: 080501 A/T - 4T80E, Slips in Gear/L/H Axle Seal Leaks TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-009B Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 13771 Date: May 01, 2008 Subject: HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E (MH1) Left Front Axle Seal Leak, Transmission Slips in Gear (Replace Third Clutch Housing with Revised Service Part) Models: 2001-2008 GM Passenger Cars with HYDRA-MATIC(R) Front Wheel Drive 4T80-E Automatic Transmission (RPO - MH1) Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to revise the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-009A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Condition Some customers may comment on a transmission oil leak and/or that the transmission slips in gear. Cause An oil leak may be caused by bushing wear in the third clutch housing, causing excessive fluid build-up at axe sea. Correction Important: DO NOT replace the transmission for above concerns. Replace the third clutch housing with service P/N 8682114, which has revised bushing material to extend life and reduce left front axle seal leaks. Refer to Automatic/Transaxle - 4T80-E Transmission Off-Vehicle Repair Instructions for the replacement of the third clutch housing in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearings Diagnosis Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension Front Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Tools Required J 42129 Wheel Hub Remover Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 3. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (2), if equipped. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor electrical connector from the bracket, if equipped. 5. Remove the front wheel drive shaft nut. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . 6. Remove the brake rotor. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 13777 7. Use 3 wheel nuts in order to attach the J 42129 to the wheel bearing/hub. 8. Use the J 42129 in order to push the wheel drive shaft out of the wheel bearing/hub. 9. Remove and DISCARD the wheel bearing/hub bolts. Remove the J 42129 from the hub. Important: Ensure that the wheel drive shaft outer seal/boot is not damaged. 10. Remove the wheel bearing/hub and splash shield-noting the position of the shield for re-installation. Installation Procedure 1. Install the wheel bearing/hub with the splash shield as noted during removal. Caution: These fasteners MUST be replaced with new fasteners anytime they become loose or are removed. Failure to replace these fasteners after they become loose or are removed may cause loss of vehicle control and personal injury. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 13778 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install NEW wheel bearing/hub bolts. Tighten the NEW wheel bearing/hub bolts to 130 N.m (96 lb ft). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement . 4. Install the front wheel drive shaft nut. Refer to Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement (See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair) . Important: Ensure that the connector clip engages the bracket properly. 5. Install the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the bracket, if equipped. 6. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (2), if equipped. 7. Install the tire and wheel. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 13779 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement Removal Procedure Important: The wheel bearing in the rear wheel hub is integrated into one unit. The hub is non-serviceable. If the hub and/or bearing is damaged, replace the complete hub and bearing assembly. 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the brake rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement . Rear Wheel Speed Sensors 4. Remove the ABS electrical connector from the wheel speed sensor (1), if equipped. 5. Remove the park brake cable from the park brake actuator. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) . 6. Remove the mounting bolts from the rear bearing/hub. 7. Remove the wheel bearing/hub and park brake assembly from the knuckle. 8. Remove the park brake actuator from the rear wheel bearing/hub. Refer to Parking Brake Actuator Replacement . Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake actuator to the rear wheel bearing/hub. Refer to Parking Brake Actuator Replacement . 2. Install the wheel bearing/hub and park brake assembly to the knuckle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 13780 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the wheel bearing/hub-to-knuckle bolts. Tighten the bolts to 75 N.m (55 lb ft). 4. Install the park brake cable to the park brake actuator. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) . Rear Wheel Speed Sensors 5. Install the ABS electrical connector to the wheel speed sensor (1), if equipped. 6. Install the brake rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement . 7. Install the tires and wheels. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation (See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Nut: Customer Interest Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 13790 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Nut: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Nut: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 13796 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13797 Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel drive shaft nut. Tighten the nut to ................................................................................... ................................................................................................ 160 N.m (118 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flex Plate Bolts - First Pass ................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 20 N.m (15 lb ft) Flex Plate Bolts - Second Pass ....................... ............................................................................................................................................. 50 N.m (37 lb ft) Flex Plate Bolts - Final Pass ................................................................................................. ..................................................................... 100 N.m (74 lb ft) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13801 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Engine Flywheel Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the automatic transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ9) Transmission Replacement (RPO LS4) . 2. Remove the flywheel bolts and flywheel. 3. Clean and inspect the engine flywheel. Refer to Engine Flywheel Cleaning and Inspection (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul) . Installation Procedure Important: The flywheel does not use a locating pin for alignment and will not initially seat against the crankshaft flange or spacer if applicable, but will be pulled onto the crankshaft by the engine flywheel bolts. This procedure requires a 3-stage tightening process. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 13802 1. Install the flywheel to the crankshaft. 2. Apply threadlock to the threads of the flywheel bolts. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers (See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the engine flywheel bolts. * Tighten the bolts a first pass in sequence to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). * Tighten the bolts a second pass in sequence to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). * Tighten the bolts a final pass in sequence to 100 N.m (74 lb ft). 4. Install the automatic transmission. Refer to Transmission Replacement (RPOs LZE/LZ9) Transmission Replacement (RPO LS4) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics Manual Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-07-29-004G Date: December 15, 2010 Subject: Manual Transmission Operating Characteristics Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC Medium Duty Trucks 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Manual Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and to add Cold Operation information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-07-29-004F (Section 07 Transmission/Transaxle). Important Even though this bulletin attempts to cover operating characteristics of manual transmissions, it cannot be all inclusive. Be sure to compare any questionable concerns to a similar vehicle and if possible, with similar mileage. Even though many of the conditions are described as characteristics and may not be durability issues, GM may attempt to improve specific issues for customer satisfaction. The purpose of this bulletin is to assist in identifying characteristics of manual transmissions that repair attempts will not change. The following are explanations and examples of conditions that will generally occur in all manual transmissions. All noises will vary between transmissions due to build variation, type of transmission (usually the more heavy duty, the more noise), type of flywheel and clutch, level of insulation, etc. Basic Information Many transmission noises are created by the firing pulses of the engine. Each firing pulse creates a sudden change in angular acceleration at the crankshaft. These changes in speed can be reduced with clutch damper springs and dual mass flywheels. However, some speed variation will make it through to the transmission. This can create noise as the various gears will accel and decel against each other because of required clearances. Cold Operation Manual transmission operation will be affected by temperature because the transmission fluid will be thicker when cold. The thicker fluid will increase the amount of force needed to shift the transmission when cold. The likelihood of gear clash will also increase due to the greater time needed for the synchronizer assembly to perform its function. Therefore when the transmission is cold, or before it has reached operating temperature, quick, hard shifts should be avoided to prevent damage to the transmission. Gear Rattle Rattling or grinding (not to be confused with a missed shift type of grinding, also described as a combustion knock type of noise) type noises usually occur while operating the engine at low RPMs (lugging the engine). This can occur while accelerating from a stop (for example, a Corvette) or while operating at low RPMs while under a load (for example, Kodiak in a lower gear and at low engine speed). Vehicles equipped with a dual-mass flywheel (for example, a 3500 HD Sierra with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)) will have reduced noise levels as compared to vehicles without (for example, a 4500 Kodiak with the 6-speed manual and Duramax(R)). However, dual-mass flywheels do not eliminate all noise. Neutral Rattle There are often concerns of rattle while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged. This is related to the changes in angular acceleration described earlier. This is a light rattle, and once again, vehicles with dual mass flywheels will have reduced noise. If the engine is shut off while idling in neutral with the clutch engaged, the sudden stop of the engine will create a rapid change in angular acceleration that even dual mass flywheels cannot compensate. Because of the mass of all the components, this will create a noise. This type of noise should not be heard if the clutch is released (pedal pushed to the floor). Backlash Backlash noise is created when changing engine or driveline loading. This can occur when accelerating from a stop, coming to a stop, or applying and releasing the throttle (loading and unloading the driveline). This will vary based on vehicle type, build variations, driver input, vehicle loading, etc. and is created from the necessary clearance between all of the mating gears in the transmission, axle(s) and transfer case (if equipped). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Manual Transmission - M/T Operating Characteristics > Page 13807 Shift Effort Shift effort will vary among different style transmissions and synchronizer designs. Usually the more heavy duty the transmission, the higher the shift effort because of the increased mass of the components. Shift effort can also be higher in cold weather because the fluid will be thicker. Medium duty transmissions will not shift as quickly as a Corvette transmission. To reduce shift effort, do not attempt to rush the shift - allow the synchronizers to work as designed. Shifting harder will only increase the chance of rushing past the synchronizer leading to grinding while shifting. Non-Synchronized Gears Some light duty truck transmissions in 1st gear (creeper-gear) and reverse gears in various transmissions, along with all gears in some medium duty transmissions, may be non-synchronized. This means there is not a mechanism to match input and output shaft speeds to allow for a smooth shift. This function is left up to the driver. This can be noticed if a shift into 1st or reverse is attempted while the vehicle is rolling or before the input shaft stops rotating leading to a gear grind. The grinding can be reduced by coming to a complete stop and pausing for a moment before shifting into the 1st or reverse gear. Some slight grinding can be expected. In medium duty non-synchronized transmissions, the driver must match input shaft (engine) speed to output shaft (driveshaft) speed with every shift. This can be accomplished by double clutching, or by using other methods. If the driver is not able to perform this function properly, there will be gear grinding with each improperly completed shift. Driver training may be required to correct this condition. Clutch brakes are used in medium duty non-synchronized transmissions to allow a shift into gear at a stop. The clutch brake is used to stop the input shaft from spinning, allowing a shift into gear at a stop without grinding. The clutch brake is activated by pressing the clutch pedal all the way to the floor. When the clutch brake is used, it is possible to have a blocked shift with the vehicle stationary. If this occurs, engage the clutch slightly to rotate the input gear to allow the shift. The clutch brake is intended to only be used while at a stop. Care must be taken to not activate the clutch brake while shifting between gears. This could lead to excessive grinding or a blocked or missed shift. Skip Shift Currently, the Cadillac CTS-V, Pontiac GTO, Chevrolet Corvette and Camaro SS (other models may follow) equipped with the 6-speed manual transmission have a feature referred to as a "skip-shift." This feature only allows a shift from 1st to 4th gear when the indicator lamp is illuminated on the dash. Dealers cannot disable this feature as it was established to help meet fuel economy standards. The conditions for this feature are: engine coolant at normal operating temperature, vehicle speed of 24-31 km/h (15-19 mph), 21% or less throttle being used (refer to Service Information or the Owner Manual for more details.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 13814 Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13815 Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Transmission Control Module (TCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13816 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13817 Control Module: Service and Repair Transmission Control Module Replacement Transmission Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle > Page 13824 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13825 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13826 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness. 3. Remove the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the fluid pressure manual valve position switch to the control valve body (300). Important: When removing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 4. Carefully remove the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). 5. Inspect the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395) for the following conditions: * Damaged electrical connector terminals * Damaged seals * Damaged switch membranes * Debris on the switch membranes Installation Procedure Important: When installing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 1. Carefully install the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the TFP switch to the control valve body (300). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (375) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (379) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (381) to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Connect the transaxle wiring harness. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13827 Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Mode Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13832 Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13833 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E Automatic Transaxle > Page 13838 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13839 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (AT ISS) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13840 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 4. Remove the input speed sensor (440). 5. Inspect the input speed sensor (440) for the following conditions: * Damaged or missing magnet * Damaged housing * Bent or missing electrical terminals * Damaged speed sensor clip (441) Installation Procedure 1. Install the input speed sensor (440). 2. Install the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 3. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13846 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13847 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness assembly from the fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (391). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fluid temperature sensor (391). 2. Connect the wiring harness assembly to the with fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 4. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 13850 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Thermo Element Replacement Thermo Element Replacement Tools Required J 34094-A Thermo Element Height Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the thermo element pins (120, 123) and the washers. 4. Remove the thermo element (121) and the thermo element plate (122). Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 34094-A to set the middle thermo pin (123). 2. Install the new thermo element plate (122). 3. Install the pin (120) and the washer. 4. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the pin and the washer furthest from the accumulator. 5. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the second pin (120) and the washer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 13851 6. Install the thermo element (121) between the two pins (120). The V in the thermo element (121) must contact the thermo element plate (122). 7. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 9. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 13858 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the pressure control solenoid (PCS) electrical connector. 3. Remove the PCS retaining clip (314E). 4. Remove the PCS (322). Installation Procedure 1. Install the PCS (322). 2. Install the PCS retaining clip (314E). 3. Connect the PCS electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: Customer Interest A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13867 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park Shift Interlock Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park ENGINEERING INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-007B Date: June 08, 2009 Subject: EI08045 - Key Cannot Be Removed from Ignition with Gear Selector in Park, Shifter Cannot Be Moved from Park Position (Repair/Reroute Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Solenoid Harness) Models: 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to end the need for information from the field and provide repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-007A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................. Condition Some customers may comment on either of the following conditions: - The key cannot be removed from the ignition. - The transmission gear selector (shifter) cannot be moved out of the PARK position. Cause This condition may be caused by an incorrectly routed brake transmission shift interlock (BTSI) solenoid harness which can make it difficult to install. In some instances, the wiring looms are tangled, causing stress on the wires in the connector at the BTSI. If the BTSI harness is routed incorrectly, it may also result in a wire pinching issue. Correction Important DO NOT use force to move the gear selector (shifter). Using force may cause damage to the BTSI. Inspection/Routing and Repair of the BTSI Wiring Harness/Connector 1. Check for wire damage at the BTSI connector terminal ends. Refer to SI for repair procedures. 2. For very intermittent issues, check the BTSI wire harness individual circuits for broken or crimped wires. Refer to SI for repair procedures. BTSI Wiring Harness Incorrectly Routed Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Interlock Solenoid: > 08-07-30-007B > Jun > 09 > A/T Key Cannot Be Removed/No Shift From Park > Page 13873 3. Inspect the routing of the wiring harness leading to the BTSI connector. The illustrations above show the BTSI harness routed incorrectly. BTSI Wiring Harness Routed Correctly 4. Reroute the wiring to create available slack and avoid future occurrences. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13874 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Service and Repair Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Actuator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Notice: To prevent component damage, DO NOT use metal tools to remove the trim. Important: Use only a plastic trim tool to lift the shift lever bezel or trim plate. Do not use any tool between the shift lever bezel or trim plate and the shifter. 2. Remove the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 4. Remove both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator from the pivot points. Installation Procedure 1. Install both ends of the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator to the pivot points. 2. Connect the automatic transaxle shift lock actuator electrical connector (1). 3. Install the center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPOs LZE/LZ4/LZ8) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Shift Solenoid: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13880 Shift Solenoid: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views In the Center Console - Floor Shifter In the Center Console - Floor Shifter 1 - Floor Shifter 2 - A/T Shift Lock Control Solenoid Steering Column Components - Column Shift Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 13881 Lower Steering Column Components 1 - Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Solenoid 2 - Steering Column Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13884 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13885 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13886 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13887 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13888 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13889 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13890 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13891 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13892 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13893 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13894 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13895 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13896 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13897 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13898 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13899 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13900 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13901 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13902 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13903 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13904 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13905 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13906 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13907 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13908 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13909 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13910 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13911 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13912 Shift Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13913 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13914 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13915 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13916 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13917 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13918 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13919 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13920 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13921 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13922 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13923 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13924 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13925 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13926 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13927 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13928 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13929 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13930 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13931 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13932 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13933 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13934 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13935 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13936 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13937 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13938 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13939 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13940 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13941 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13942 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13943 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13944 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13945 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13946 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13947 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13948 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13949 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13950 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13951 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13952 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13953 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13954 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13955 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13956 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13957 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13958 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13959 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13960 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13961 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13962 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13963 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13964 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13965 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13966 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13967 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13968 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13969 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13970 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13971 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13972 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13973 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13974 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13975 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13976 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13977 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13978 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13979 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13980 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13981 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13982 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13983 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13984 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13985 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13986 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13987 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13988 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13989 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13990 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13991 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13992 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13993 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13994 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13995 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13996 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13997 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13998 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13999 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14000 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14001 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14002 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14003 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14004 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14005 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14006 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14007 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14008 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14009 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14010 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14011 Shift Solenoid: Connector Views Component Connector End Views 1-2 Shift Solenoid (1-2 SS) Valve 2-3 Shift Solenoid (2-3 SS) Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14012 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D) 4. Remove the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). Installation Procedure 1. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid (315A). 2. Install the 1-2 shift solenoid retaining clip (314D). 3. Connect the 1-2 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement > Page 14015 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 4. Remove the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B) and the O-ring (316). Installation Procedure 1. Install the O-ring (316) and the 2-3 shift solenoid (315B). 2. Install the 2-3 shift solenoid retaining clip (314C). 3. Connect the 2-3 shift solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that the transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, the ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn the TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Locations Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14021 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14022 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14023 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14024 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14025 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14026 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14027 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14028 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14029 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14030 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14031 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14032 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14033 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14034 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14035 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14036 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14037 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14038 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14039 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14040 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14041 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14042 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14043 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14044 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14045 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14046 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14047 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14048 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14049 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14050 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14051 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14052 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14053 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14054 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14055 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14056 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14057 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14058 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14059 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14060 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14061 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14062 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14063 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14064 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14065 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14066 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14067 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14068 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14069 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14070 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14071 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14072 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14073 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14074 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14075 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14076 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14077 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14078 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14079 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14080 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14081 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14082 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14083 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14084 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14085 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14086 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14087 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14088 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14089 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14090 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14091 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14092 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14093 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14094 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14095 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14096 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14097 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14098 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14099 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14100 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14101 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14102 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14103 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14104 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14105 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14106 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14107 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14108 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14109 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14110 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14111 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14112 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14113 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14114 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14115 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14116 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14117 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14118 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14119 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14120 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14121 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14122 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14123 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14124 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14125 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14126 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14127 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14128 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14129 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14130 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14131 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14132 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14133 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14134 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14135 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14136 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14137 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14138 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14139 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14140 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14141 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14142 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14143 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14144 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14145 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14146 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14147 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid electrical connector. 3. Remove the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314) 4. Remove the TCC solenoid (315). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC solenoid (315). 2. Install the TCC solenoid retaining clip (314). 3. Connect the TCC solenoid electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 14150 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation Solenoid Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect and reposition the electrical connectors from the following: * If equipped internal mode switch * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) 3. Remove the oil pump bolts (230, 231). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 14151 4. Remove the oil pump (200) from the valve body (300). 5. Disconnect the torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid electrical connector. 6. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 7. Remove the TCC PWM solenoid (334). Installation Procedure 1. Install the TCC PWM solenoid (334). 2. Install the TCC PWM solenoid retaining clip (314F). 3. Connect the TCC PWM solenoid electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 14152 4. Install the oil pump (200) to the valve body (300). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 5. Install the oil pump body and cover bolts (230, 230). * Tighten the nine bolts (231) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the two bolts (230) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Replacement > Page 14153 6. Reposition and connect the electrical connectors to the following: * Automatic transaxle fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly (395) * 2-3 Shift solenoid valve assembly (315B) * If equipped internal mode switch 7. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 8. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14160 Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14161 Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Transmission Control Module (TCM) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14162 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14163 Control Module: Service and Repair Transmission Control Module Replacement Transmission Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 14170 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14171 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14172 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness. 3. Remove the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the fluid pressure manual valve position switch to the control valve body (300). Important: When removing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 4. Carefully remove the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). 5. Inspect the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395) for the following conditions: * Damaged electrical connector terminals * Damaged seals * Damaged switch membranes * Debris on the switch membranes Installation Procedure Important: When installing the TFP switch handle the switch carefully, the fluid pressure manual valve position switch is very delicate. 1. Carefully install the fluid pressure manual valve position switch (395). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the control valve body bolts (375, 379, 381) that mount the TFP switch to the control valve body (300). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (375) to 12 N.m (106 lb in). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (379) to 16 N.m (12 lb ft). * Tighten the control valve body bolt (381) to 8 N.m (70 lb in). 3. Connect the transaxle wiring harness. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14173 Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 5. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Mode Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 14178 Transmission Mode Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14179 Transmission Mode Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 14184 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14185 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (AT ISS) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14186 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Input Speed Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 4. Remove the input speed sensor (440). 5. Inspect the input speed sensor (440) for the following conditions: * Damaged or missing magnet * Damaged housing * Bent or missing electrical terminals * Damaged speed sensor clip (441) Installation Procedure 1. Install the input speed sensor (440). 2. Install the input speed sensor retaining clip (441). 3. Connect the input speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Specifications Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle Automatic Transmission Electronic Component Views Internal Electronic Component Locations Internal Electronic Component Location 10 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Assembly 315a - 1-2, 3-4 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 315b - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Assembly 322 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve Assembly 334 - Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC PWM) Solenoid Valve Assembly 391 - Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 395 - Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position Switch Assembly 440 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (A/T ISS) Sensor Assembly 811 - Lever Assembly-Manual Shaft Detent with Shift Position Switch Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > 4T65-E - Automatic Transaxle > Page 14192 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Transaxle 1 - Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve 2 - 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 3 - Automatic Transmission Input Shaft Speed (ISS) Sensor 4 - 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve 5 - Automatic Transmission Internal Mode Switch (IMS) 6 - Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) 7 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch 8 - Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor 9 - Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 14193 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . 2. Disconnect the wiring harness assembly from the fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Remove the fluid temperature sensor (391). Installation Procedure 1. Install the fluid temperature sensor (391). 2. Connect the wiring harness assembly to the with fluid temperature sensor (391). 3. Install the case side cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Control Valve Body Cover Replacement) . Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 4. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 14196 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Thermo Element Replacement Thermo Element Replacement Tools Required J 34094-A Thermo Element Height Gage Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 3. Remove the thermo element pins (120, 123) and the washers. 4. Remove the thermo element (121) and the thermo element plate (122). Installation Procedure 1. Use the J 34094-A to set the middle thermo pin (123). 2. Install the new thermo element plate (122). 3. Install the pin (120) and the washer. 4. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the pin and the washer furthest from the accumulator. 5. Use the J 34094-A to set the height of the second pin (120) and the washer. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement > Page 14197 6. Install the thermo element (121) between the two pins (120). The V in the thermo element (121) must contact the thermo element plate (122). 7. Install the oil pan. Refer to Oil Pan Replacement (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Fluid Pan/Service and Repair) . 8. Lower the vehicle. Important: It is recommended that transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) information be reset. Resetting the TAP values using a scan tool will erase all learned values in all cells. As a result, The ECM, PCM or TCM will need to relearn TAP values. Transmission performance may be affected as new TAP values are learned. 9. Reset the TAP values. Refer to Transmission Adaptive Functions (See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Description and Operation/Transmission Adaptive Functions) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Yaw Sensor with Vehicle Lateral Accelerometer Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Remove the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer mounting nuts (2). 4. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 5. Remove the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14203 1. Install the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer nuts (2). Tighten the nuts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Connect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 4. Install the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install a scan tool. 6. Using the special functions menu on the scan tool, reset the yaw rate sensor. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-05-25-001 > Jun > 09 > ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-05-25-001 Date: June 02, 2009 Subject: Intermittent Service Stabilitrak Message After Key Cycle, DTC C0292 Set (Reprogram Electronic Brake Control Module) Models: 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Stabilitrak message is displayed intermittently after the vehicle is first started. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning lights may also come on the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) intermittently. This may be the result of setting DTC C0292. The DTC will appear as a history code. This condition can be very intermittent (every ten key cycles or more) and would occur before the gear selector is taken out of Park. Cause The Service Stabilitrak message and the DTC is a result of the Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) software not updated to the latest version. Some additional key factors that trigger the occurrences of this condition and the EBCM DTC C0292 include the following: - Initial battery voltage is less than 11.8 volts going into CRANK mode. - When starting the vehicle, the customer quickly enters CRANK and then releases to allow for the starter relay control to take over engine start. This quick return to RUN allows the EBCM diagnostics to start monitoring for diagnostic faults. In the case of DTC C0292 , the low voltage is measured at the Yaw/Lateral Accelerometer sensor and the Service StabiliTrak message is then displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Correction Important The TECH 2(R) can provide some additional information or aid during diagnosis. Using a TECH 2(R), interrogate the EBCM Freeze Frame Data or Additional DTC Information to confirm the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A. If the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A, the revised EBCM software calibration improvement will reduce the occurrence of the DTC C0292 diagnostic fault from setting. Reprogram the EBCM with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the EBCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Programming and Setup procedures in SI. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-05-25-001 > Jun > 09 > ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-05-25-001 Date: June 02, 2009 Subject: Intermittent Service Stabilitrak Message After Key Cycle, DTC C0292 Set (Reprogram Electronic Brake Control Module) Models: 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Stabilitrak message is displayed intermittently after the vehicle is first started. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning lights may also come on the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) intermittently. This may be the result of setting DTC C0292. The DTC will appear as a history code. This condition can be very intermittent (every ten key cycles or more) and would occur before the gear selector is taken out of Park. Cause The Service Stabilitrak message and the DTC is a result of the Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) software not updated to the latest version. Some additional key factors that trigger the occurrences of this condition and the EBCM DTC C0292 include the following: - Initial battery voltage is less than 11.8 volts going into CRANK mode. - When starting the vehicle, the customer quickly enters CRANK and then releases to allow for the starter relay control to take over engine start. This quick return to RUN allows the EBCM diagnostics to start monitoring for diagnostic faults. In the case of DTC C0292 , the low voltage is measured at the Yaw/Lateral Accelerometer sensor and the Service StabiliTrak message is then displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Correction Important The TECH 2(R) can provide some additional information or aid during diagnosis. Using a TECH 2(R), interrogate the EBCM Freeze Frame Data or Additional DTC Information to confirm the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A. If the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A, the revised EBCM software calibration improvement will reduce the occurrence of the DTC C0292 diagnostic fault from setting. Reprogram the EBCM with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the EBCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Programming and Setup procedures in SI. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14219 Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14220 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) (without JL4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14221 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) (JL4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14222 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14223 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 14228 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 14229 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Electronic Traction Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-05-25-004A Date: October 27, 2008 Subject: Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) Light On, DTCs C0035-C0052 Set (Perform Diagnostic Component Test Procedure and Repair as Necessary) Models: 2007 Buick Terraza 2007-2009 Buick Allure, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2007-2008 Cadillac XLR 2007-2009 Cadillac DTS, SRX, and STS 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Uplander 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2007-2009 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007 Saturn Relay Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-05-25-004 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment that the Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) (if equipped) warning lights are illuminated. Upon investigation, one or more of the following DTCs may be in history or current. Correction Begin diagnostics with the component test procedure listed below. If the cause is not found, proceed to the Circuit/System Testing on the applicable Diagnostic Information and Procedures document for the vehicle you are working on. SI Diagnostic Information and Procedures are being revised to reflect this change in strategy. 1. With the ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 2. Test for 850-1350 ohms between the signal terminal A and the low reference signal terminal B. During the test, check for an intermittent circuit condition by gently moving the wheel speed sensor pigtail harness. If not within the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set > Page 14241 3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle. Reverse the test leads, test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle again. If less than the specified value, replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 4. Spin the wheel while monitoring the voltage between the signal terminal A and the low reference terminal B. The voltage should be greater than 100 mV AC. If less than the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the applicable bearing and hub assembly published labor code. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-05-25-004A Date: October 27, 2008 Subject: Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) Light On, DTCs C0035-C0052 Set (Perform Diagnostic Component Test Procedure and Repair as Necessary) Models: 2007 Buick Terraza 2007-2009 Buick Allure, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2007-2008 Cadillac XLR 2007-2009 Cadillac DTS, SRX, and STS 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Uplander 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2007-2009 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007 Saturn Relay Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-05-25-004 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment that the Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) (if equipped) warning lights are illuminated. Upon investigation, one or more of the following DTCs may be in history or current. Correction Begin diagnostics with the component test procedure listed below. If the cause is not found, proceed to the Circuit/System Testing on the applicable Diagnostic Information and Procedures document for the vehicle you are working on. SI Diagnostic Information and Procedures are being revised to reflect this change in strategy. 1. With the ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 2. Test for 850-1350 ohms between the signal terminal A and the low reference signal terminal B. During the test, check for an intermittent circuit condition by gently moving the wheel speed sensor pigtail harness. If not within the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set > Page 14247 3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle. Reverse the test leads, test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle again. If less than the specified value, replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 4. Spin the wheel while monitoring the voltage between the signal terminal A and the low reference terminal B. The voltage should be greater than 100 mV AC. If less than the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the applicable bearing and hub assembly published labor code. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14248 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Similar) 1 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Rear (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Rear Similar) Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Similar) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14249 1 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Connector - Right Front (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Connector Left Front Similar) 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Front (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Left Front Similar) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14250 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Front Reverse Lockout Solenoid Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14251 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Front Reverse Lockout Solenoid Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Yaw Rate Sensor: Procedures Yaw Rate Reference Table Resetting Circuit Description Optimum vehicle stability enhancement system (VSES) function is dependant on many variables. The characteristics of a specific vehicle, that affect vehicle handling or input signals to the electronic brake control module (EBCM), ultimately determine how the VSES operates. The basic EBCM software must be fine tuned as the vehicle is operated. This logic is referred to as adaptive learning. Adaptive learning is accomplished by maintaining a yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table in the EBCM memory. As the vehicle is operated, the table is populated with data that is later referenced, and sometimes modified, to allow the EBCM to provide the best possible stability control for the specific vehicle. Important: If the data in the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table becomes unreliable, false activations of the VSES, poor VSES performance or false setting of DTC C0186 or C0196 may result. A replacement EBCM may have some unreliable data stored in the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table. For this reason, it is important to perform the yaw rate reference table reset procedure after replacing the EBCM. Replacement of the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer or the installation of different size tires may also the data stored in the table to become unreliable. Therefore, the yaw rate reference table reset procedure must be performed. This procedure is to be used only for vehicles equipped with VSES (JL4). 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer harness connector. 3. Start the engine. 4. Apply firm and steady pressure to the brake pedal for at least 10 seconds. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Reconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer harness connector. 7. Turn ON the ignition and use the scan tool to clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14257 Yaw Rate Sensor: Removal and Replacement Vehicle Yaw Sensor with Vehicle Lateral Accelerometer Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Remove the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer mounting nuts (2). 4. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 5. Remove the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14258 1. Install the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer nuts (2). Tighten the nuts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Connect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 4. Install the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install a scan tool. 6. Using the special functions menu on the scan tool, reset the yaw rate sensor. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Important: * Before performing the ABS Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . * The automated bleed procedure must be performed when a new brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) is installed, because the secondary circuits of the new BPMV are not prefilled with brake fluid. * The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: * Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel * Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred * Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out away from the brake modulator assembly, which is then forced out at the brake corners by the pressure bleeder. Automated Bleed Procedure Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Prepare the brake bleeding equipment and the vehicle for a pressure bleed of the base hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . 6. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test . 7. Install a scan tool. 8. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 9. With the scan tool, perform the following steps: 1. Select Diagnostics 2. Select the appropriate vehicle information 3. Select Chassis 4. Select Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5. Select Special Functions 6. Select Automated Bleed 10. With an assistant ready, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Important: * Apply the brake pedal when instructed, using moderate effort. * Ensure the pedal remains applied until instructed to release by the scan tool. * Do not exceed the time period allowed by the scan tool for having the bleeder valves open. * The bleed sequence for each corner is as follows: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14263 - Left front - Right front Right rear - Left rear 11. Perform the automated bleed procedure as instructed by the scan tool. 12. If the automated bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to diagnose the DTC. 13. After completion of the automated bleed procedure, press and hold the brake pedal to inspect for pedal firmness. 14. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleed procedure completely. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Adjust the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling) . 19. Road test the vehicle while confirming the brake pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14264 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding Manual Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. Important: If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding, disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, replaced the ABS pressure modulator valve, or disconnected the jumper lines from the master cylinder to the ABS pressure valve, you MUST use the pressure bleeding procedure to remove all the air from the system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 4. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 5. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 6. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 7-9 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 19. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Important: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure (See: ) must be performed. 20. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection) . 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 21. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14265 22. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Pressure Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Tools Required * J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent * J 35589-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, replaced the ABS pressure modulator valve, or disconnected the brake lines between master cylinder and ABS on this vehicle, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. If removal of the reservoir cap is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port, and rotate the line at the master cylinder at least 30 degrees, so that the line will be positioned BELOW the MAX fill line on the brake master cylinder reservoir. Tighten the line nut securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.5-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder - after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.5-3.7, ensuring that the line is rotated below the master cylinder MAX fill line. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened, and that they remain in their new rotated positions below the MAX fill line of the brake fluid reservoir. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 35589-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Check the brake fluid level in the J 29532 , or equivalent. Add Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the half-full point. 7. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 35589-A . 8. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 14. Repeat steps 11-13 for the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. It is important that both bleeder valves be open at the same time. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 16. With the right rear and left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear and left front hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR and RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14266 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat step 15. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Loosen the rear master cylinder jumper line nut slightly (just enough to rotate the line), and rotate the rear master cylinder hydraulic pipe back to the original position, and tighten the line nut. 20. Reposition the front master cylinder jumper line to the original position in a similar manner to step 19. 21. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 35589-A . 22. Remove the J 35589-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 23. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 24. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 25. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection) . 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the BPMV. Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure (See: ) . 26. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 27. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Hydraulic System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14267 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. 1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination: * Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Swirled appearance - oil-based substance - Layered appearance - silicone-based substance * Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Cloudy appearance - moisture - Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust 2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid contamination. 3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated by fluid separation and/or a swollen master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform the following: 1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Overhaul (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Overhaul) or Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) ; also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement) . Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Brake Caliper Overhaul) or Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul) or Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14268 Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust, corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or particles to enter the hydraulic system. 5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canada P/N 992667) or equivalent, DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assembly Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left closeout/insulator panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement - Left Side . 2. Push the body control module (BCM) up and move the bottom of the BCM away from and out of the mounting bracket slot. Position the BCM aside. 3. Disconnect the brake pedal position sensor electrical connector. 4. Release the wiring harness clips from the bracket. 5. Remove the brake pedal pushrod retaining clip from the brake pedal. 6. Remove the brake pedal pushrod and washer from the brake pedal. 7. Remove the brake pedal nut and bolt. 8. Remove the brake pedal and bushings. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14272 1. Install the brake pedal and bushings. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the brake pedal nut and bolt. Tighten the brake pedal nut and bolt to 40 N.m (30 lb ft). 3. Install the brake pedal washer and pushrod to the brake pedal. 4. Install the brake pedal pushrod retaining clip to the brake pedal. 5. Secure the wiring harness clips to the bracket. 6. Connect the brake pedal position sensor electrical connector. 7. Insert the top of the BCM up into the mounting bracket, then engage the bottom of the BCM into the mounting bracket slot. 8. Install the left closeout/insulator panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement - Left Side . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Brake Caliper: Technician Safety Information Caliper Piston Removing Caution Caution: Do not place fingers in front of the caliper piston(s) in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. The piston(s) can fly out with force and could result in serious bodily injury. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 14278 Brake Caliper: Vehicle Damage Warnings Brake Caliper Notice Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 14279 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Inspection 1. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires replacement. 2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper seating in the caliper body. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores: The movement of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores should be smooth and even. If the caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement. * For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore. * For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14282 Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, then no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, then remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 3. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the rear tire and the wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 5. Hand tighten 2 wheel lug nuts to retain the rotor to the hub. 6. Install a large C-clamp (3) over the top of the brake caliper (2) and against the back of the outboard brake pad. 7. Tighten the C-clamp (3) until the caliper piston is pushed into the caliper bore enough to slide the caliper off the rotor. 8. Remove the C-clamp (3) from the caliper. 9. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt (1) from the caliper. Discard the 2 copper brake hose gaskets (3). These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 10. Plug the opening in the rear brake hose (2) to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14283 11. Remove the caliper bolts (1 and 3). 12. Remove the caliper (3) from the rotor (4) and the caliper bracket (1). 13. Inspect the caliper bracket bolt boots on the caliper bracket for the following conditions: * Cuts * Tears * Deterioration Replace any damaged caliper bracket bolt boots. Refer to Rear Disc Brake Hardware Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake Hardware Replacement) . 14. Inspect the caliper bolts (2) for corrosion or damage. If corrosion is found, use new caliper bolts, including bushings, when installing caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the caliper (3) over the rotor (4) and the caliper bracket (1). Ensure that the bushings are in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14284 2. Lubricate the caliper bolts (1 and 3). Use silicone grease. Do not lubricate the threads. 3. Lubricate the 2 bolt boots (13 and 4) in the caliper bracket (12). Use silicone grease. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the caliper bolts (1 and 3). Ensure that the bolt boots fit securely in the groove of the caliper bolts. Be sure not to pinch or tear the boots. If the boots are damaged, they must be replaced. Tighten the bolts to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Important: Install NEW copper gaskets. 5. Assemble the brake hose bolt (1) and the NEW copper brake hose gaskets (3) to the brake hose (2). 6. Install the brake hose-to-caliper bolt to the brake caliper. Tighten the bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 7. Remove the 2 wheel lug nuts retaining the rotor to the hub. 8. Install the rear tire and the wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Fill the master cylinder to the proper level with clean brake fluid. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling) . 11. Bleed the brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair) . 12. Inspect the hydraulic brake system for brake fluid leaks. Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14285 may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 1. Remove the caliper from the mounting bracket and support the caliper with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. Refer to Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Front Brake Caliper Replacement) . 2. Remove the front brake pads. 3. Remove the caliper bracket bolts (2). 4. Remove the caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Important: To ensure that the proper clamp load will be present when installed. It is imperative that the threads on the caliper bracket bolts, as well as the mounting holes in the knuckle, be cleaned of all debris and inspected before proceeding with installation. 1. Clean and visually inspect threads of the caliper bracket bolts (2) and mounting holes in the knuckle. 2. Apply THREADLOCKER, GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) or equivalent, to the threads of the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the caliper bracket (1) with the bracket bolts (2). Tighten the caliper bracket bolts to 180 N.m (133 lb ft). 4. Install the front brake pads. 5. Install the caliper. Refer to Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Front Brake Caliper Replacement) . Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 1. Remove the caliper from the mounting bracket and support the caliper with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . 2. Remove the rear brake pads. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14286 3. Remove the caliper bracket bolts (2). 4. Remove the caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Important: To ensure that the proper clamp load will be present when installed. It is imperative that the threads on the caliper bracket bolts, as well as the mounting holes in the knuckle, be cleaned of all debris and inspected before proceeding with installation. 1. Clean and visually inspect threads of the caliper bracket bolts (2) and mounting holes in the knuckle. 2. Apply threadlocker, GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488), or equivalent to the threads of the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the caliper bracket (1) with the bracket bolts (2). Tighten the caliper bracket bolts to 120 N.m (88 lb ft). 4. Install the rear brake pads. 5. Install the caliper. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14287 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Front Brake Caliper Overhaul Front Brake Caliper Overhaul Tools Required * J 8092 Driver Handle 3/4 inch-10 * J 45863 Dust Seal Installer Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all the brake fluid from the caliper. Caution: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston in order to catch or protect the piston while applying compressed air. This could result in serious injury. Important: In the following service procedure, the caliper piston may become damage when it is removed from the brake caliper assembly. If this happens, DO NOT reuse the piston. Discard and replaced with new. 2. Install the brake caliper in a suitable holding devise. 3. Insert a piece of wood in the brake caliper. 4. Cover the brake caliper with a shop towel. 5. Using compressed filtered, non-lubricated air, apply the air to the remove the pistons from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14288 6. If one of the pistons fails to be removed from the brake caliper, perform the following steps. 1. Reposition the piston that has been removed back in the brake caliper. 2. Using a small block of wood and a C-clamp, slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston it is half way in the brake caliper. It does not have to be fully seated. 3. Position a second block of wood in front of the piston that remains in the brake caliper. 4. Cover the brake caliper with a shop towel. 5. Using compress filtered, non lubricated air, apply the air to the remove the pistons from the brake caliper. 7. Remove the pistons (3) from the caliper bores. 8. Remove the piston seals (2) from the caliper bores. Do not use a metal tool. 9. Remove the bleeder valve cap (5). 10. Remove the bleeder valve (6) from the caliper housing (1). 11. Clean the bleeder valve, the caliper bores, the caliper passages and the pistons with denatured alcohol. Dry the parts and blow out the brake fluid passages. Use dry and filtered compressed air. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14289 12. Remove the boots from the caliper bores. Do not scratch the caliper bores. 13. Replace the pistons or the caliper if any of the following conditions exist: * Scoring in the caliper bores * Corrosion in the caliper bores * Pitting in the caliper bores * Damage to the pistons (phenolic) 14. Clean the brake caliper assembly with denatured alcohol. 15. Dry with filtered , lubricated compressed air. Assembly Procedure Important: When applying the clean brake fluid to the piston bores and pistons, only apply the brake fluid to one bore at a time. This is done to ensure that the brake caliper, seals and pistons DO NOT become contaminated with dirt or other foreign material. 1. Apply a small amount of clean DOT-3 brake fluid to the piston, piston seal, and piston bore. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14290 2. Install the piston seal in the brake caliper. 3. Install the dust seal on the piston. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14291 Important: Position the piston in the bore so that it is straight and level. 4. Install the piston in the brake caliper. 5. Position a piece of wood across the piston to be installed. 6. Applying equal pressure by hand while pushing down, install the piston in the bore. 7. Remove the piece of wood. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14292 8. Using the J 8092 (1) and the J 45863 (2) , install the piston dust seal in the brake caliper. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 9. Install the bleeder valve in the brake caliper housing. Tighten the bleeder valve to 13 N.m (115 lb in). 10. Install bleeder valve cap. Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14293 Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Remove the rear brake caliper from the vehicle. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . Caution: Do not place fingers in front of the caliper piston(s) in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. The piston(s) can fly out with force and could result in serious bodily injury. Notice: Use clean cloths to pad interior of caliper housing during piston removal. Use just enough air to ease the pistons out of the bores. If the pistons are blown out, even with the padding provided, it may be damaged. 2. Remove the brake caliper piston from the caliper bore by directing low pressure compressed air into the caliper bore through the fluid inlet hole. 3. Remove the retaining ring that secures the dust boot to the caliper housing. 4. Remove the piston dust boot seal (2) from the seal counterbore in the caliper. Discard the boot seal. 5. Using a small wooden or plastic tool, remove the piston seal (4) from the caliper bore . Discard the piston seal. Important: Do not use abrasives to clean the brake caliper piston. 6. Clean the brake caliper piston bore and seal counterbore, and the caliper piston with denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 7. Dry the caliper piston bore and counterbore, and the piston with non-lubricated, filtered air. 8. Inspect the caliper bore for cracks, scoring, pitting, excessive rust, and/or excessive corrosion. 9. If light rust or light corrosion are present in the caliper bore, attempt to remove the imperfection with a fine emery paper. If the imperfection cannot be removed, replace the caliper assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14294 10. If cracks, scoring, pitting, excessive rust, and/or excessive corrosion are present in the caliper bore, replace the caliper assembly. 11. Inspect the caliper piston for cracks, scoring, and/or damage to the chrome plating. Replace the caliper piston if any of these conditions exist. Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the new piston seal (4) with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 2. Install the lubricated, new piston seal (4) into the caliper bore. 3. Apply a thin coat of Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667) or equivalent, DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container onto the outer surface area of the caliper piston (3). 4. Install the bottom half of the caliper piston (2) into the caliper bore. 5. Install the new piston dust boot seal (1) over the caliper piston (2). 6. Compress the caliper piston (2) to the bottom of the caliper bore. 7. Fully seat the piston dust boot seal (1) into caliper counterbore. 8. Install the retaining ring that secures the dust boot to the caliper housing. 9. Install the bleeder valve and cap to the caliper and tighten the valve securely. 10. Install the rear brake caliper to the vehicle. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications * Replace the disc brake pads when the friction surface (3) is worn to within 0.76 mm (0.030 in) of the mounting plates. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 14298 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Brake Pad Inspection * Inspect the disc brake pads at regular intervals, or whenever the tire and wheel assemblies are removed from the vehicle. * If replacement is necessary, always replace disc brake pads in axle sets. * Inspect both edges of the disc brake pad friction surfaces (3). The highest rate of wear normally occurs at the trailing edge of the disc brake pads. * Inspect the thickness of the disc brake pads (3) in order to ensure that they have not worn prematurely. The disc brake pad wear should be approximately even per axle set. * Both front and rear disc brake pads have integral, audible wear sensors (1). When the disc brake pad wear reaches the minimum allowable thickness, the wear sensor contacts the disc brake rotor (2). The wear indicator will then produce an audible, high-pitched warning noise during wheel rotation. * Replace the disc brake pads when the friction surface (3) is worn to within 0.76 mm (0.030 in) of the mounting plates. * Remove the brake calipers and inspect the friction surfaces of the inner and outer disc brake pads to ensure that they are level. Place the disc brake pad friction surfaces together and measure the gap between the surfaces. If more than 0.13 mm (0.005 in) gap exists midway between the length of the disc brake pads, replace the disc brake pads. * Verify that any disc brake pad shims that may be required are in place and not damaged or excessively corroded. Replace any missing or damaged shims in order to preserve proper disc brake performance. * Replace the disc brake pads if any have separated from the mounting plates. * Inspect the disc brake pads friction surfaces for cracks, fractures, or damage which may cause noise or otherwise impair disc brake performance. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement > Page 14301 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement > Page 14302 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, then no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, then remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 3. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the rear tire and the wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 5. Install a hand tightened lug nut to retain the rotor to the hub. 6. Compress the caliper piston enough for clearance. Use a C-clamp (3). 7. Remove the upper caliper bolt (2). Notice: Use care to avoid damaging pin boot when rotating caliper. Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement > Page 14303 8. Pivot the caliper down in order to access the pads. It is not necessary to remove the caliper. 9. Remove the brake pads (2) from the caliper bracket. 10. Remove the 2 pad clips (1) from the caliper bracket. 11. Inspect the caliper mounting hardware for the following conditions: * Cuts * Tears * Deterioration Replace any hardware if damage exists. Refer to Rear Disc Brake Mounting and Hardware Inspection (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Disc Brake Mounting and Hardware Inspection - Rear) . 12. Inspect the caliper dust boot for the following conditions: * Cuts * Tears * Deterioration Replace the caliper dust boot if damage exists. Refer to Brake Caliper Inspection (See: Brake Caliper/Testing and Inspection) . 13. Inspect the caliper bolts for corrosion or damage. If corrosion exists, use new caliper bolts when installing the caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Bottom the piston into the caliper bore. Use a C-clamp before installing new brake pads in order to compress the piston. Use an old brake pad or wooden block across the face of the piston to avoid damage to the piston or the caliper boot. 2. Install the 2 retainers (1) to the caliper bracket. Important: The wear sensor is on the outside pad. The sensor is positioned at the trailing or downward edge of the pad during forward wheel rotation. 3. Install the pads (2) to the caliper bracket. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement > Page 14304 Notice: Use care to avoid damaging pin boot when rotating caliper. 4. Swing the caliper (3) upward in position around the pads. 5. Lubricate the bolt and the bolt boot. Use silicone grease. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 6. Install the upper caliper bolt (2). Tighten the caliper bolt to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). 7. Remove the wheel lug nut retaining the rotor to the hub. 8. Install the rear tire and the wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . Align the previous marks on the wheel, hub and bearing. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. With the engine OFF, gradually apply the brake pedal to approximately 2/3 of its travel distance. 11. Slowly release the brake pedal. 12. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 10 and 11 until a firm brake pedal is obtained. This will properly seat the brake caliper pistons and brake pads. 13. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the proper level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling) . 14. Burnish the pads and rotors. Refer to Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing (See: Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement > Page 14305 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing Caution: Refer to Road Test Caution . Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures Technical Service Bulletin # 00-05-22-002L Date: 090326 Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-05-22-002L Date: March 26, 2009 Subject: Disc Brake Warranty Service and Procedures Models: 1999-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 1999-2004 Isuzu Light Duty Trucks (Canada Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (Canada Only) 1999-2010 Saturn Vehicles (Canada Only) EXCLUDING 2009-2010 Chevrolet Corvette ZR1 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to inform you that due to improvements in vehicle brake corner and wheel design, assembly plant build processes and dealership required tools like the On-Car Lathe, measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) is no longer a required step when performing base brake service. Due to this change, you are no longer required to enter the LRO measurement on the repair order or in the warranty system failure code section. The bulletin information below and the base brake labor operations have been updated accordingly. Due to this change it is more important than ever to properly maintain your brake lathe (per the Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure in this bulletin). Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002K (Section 05 Brakes). For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all GM's Standard Brake Service Procedures and Policy Guidelines for brake rotor and brake pad service and wear. For additional information, the Service Technical College lists a complete index of available Brake courses. This information can be accessed at www.gmtraining.com > resources > training materials > brakes courseware index. In Canada, refer to Service Know How course 55040.00V and Hydraulic Brake Certification program 15003.16H. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM BRAKE SERVICE. The following four (4) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful brake service. 1. Measure and Document Pre-Service Rotor Thickness* (REQUIRED on Repair Order) determine rotor clean-up/refinish/replace 2. Properly clean ALL brake corner mating surfaces - hub, rotor and wheel 3. Properly clean-up/refinish rotor, measure and document post-service rotor thickness (REQUIRED on Repair Order) Important If it is determined the rotor needs to be refinished, verify lathe equipment is properly calibrated. 4. Properly reassemble the brake corner using proper torque tools, torque specification and torque sequence - wheel lug nuts. * The bulletin refers to Minimum Thickness specification as the minimum allowable thickness after refinish. Always refer to SI to verify the spec stamped on the rotor is the minimum thickness spec after refinish and not the discard spec. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14310 Bulletin Format ***REPAIR ORDER REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14311 Important When using any one of the brake labor operations listed in this bulletin (except for H9709 - Brake Burnish), the following two rotor measurements (1. Original Rotor Thickness, 2. Refinished Rotor Thickness are required and MUST be written/documented on the repair order, or for your convenience, complete the form (GM Brake Service Repair Order Documentation for Required Measurements) shown above and attach it to the repair order. If the Warranty Parts Center generates a request, this Documentation/Form must be attached to the repair order that is sent back. Important Documentation of brake lathe maintenance and calibration as recommended by the lathe manufacturer must be available for review upon request. Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Original And Refinished Thickness - REQUIRED When resurfacing a brake rotor or drum, the ORIGINAL thickness (measured thickness before refinish) and REFINISHED thickness (measured thickness after refinish) MUST be written/documented on the repair order hard copy for each rotor serviced. If a rotor replacement is necessary, only the original thickness measurement needs to be recorded. Repair Order Documentation - Explanation of Part Replacement - REQUIRED If replacement of a brake component is necessary, proper documentation on the repair order is required. See the following examples: ^ Brake rotor replacement - Customer comment was brake pulsation. Rotor was refinished on a prior brake service. After rotor measurement, it was determined that refinishing the rotor again would take it under the Minimum Thickness specification. ^ Brake pad replacement - Customer comment was brake squeak noise. On inspection, found pads contaminated by fluid leak at caliper. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14312 TOOL INFORMATION CORRECTION PLATE PART INFORMATION Refer to TSB 01-05-23-001 for the Brake Align(R) application chart. For vehicles repaired under warranty, Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates should be submitted in the Net Amount at cost plus 40%. Brake Align(R) Run-Out Correction Plates are available through the following suppliers: - Dealer Equipment and Services - Brake Align(R) LLC (U.S. Dealers Only) * We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items, which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14313 WARRANTY INFORMATION Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14314 WORKSHEET - BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION Important Brake lathe calibration should be performed and recorded monthly or if you are consistently measuring high LRO after rotor refinishing. Disclaimer GM Brake Service Procedure GM BRAKE SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the wheel and caliper. 2. Measure rotor thickness. In order to determine if the rotor can be refinished, do the following steps: Important Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14315 If performing routine Brake Service for worn pads only, and the rotors are not damaged and measure within specification - DO NOT REFINISH ROTORS. 1. Remove the rotor(s). 2. Measure the rotor for original thickness using a brake micrometer. Multiple measure points should be taken and the lowest measurement should be recorded. 3. Reference the Minimum Thickness specification stamped on the backside of the rotor or SI for Minimum Thickness specification/other. In most cases, the rotor should be refinished unless the measurement taken makes it obvious that refinishing the rotor would take the measurement under the Minimum Thickness specification (then replacement is necessary). DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. 3. ***Record the lowest ORIGINAL rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy as noted in the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 4. Clean all of the mating surfaces between the hub, the rotor and the wheel using the J 42450A Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit and J 41013 - Whiz Wheel(R). If rotors are not to be refinished - Go To Step 8. Important Cleaning all mating surfaces and making them free of corrosion, burrs and other debris (which includes removal of Hubless rotors) is critical and MUST be performed whether using an On-Car or Bench Lathe Refinish Procedure. 5. Be sure to follow the appropriate refinishing procedure listed below for the type of lathe you are using. Important Only replace the rotors if they do not meet the Minimum Thickness specification. Important DO NOT REFINISH NEW ROTORS. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important Prior to making the cut, install the recommended clip-on style disc silencer supplied with the lathe. Use of this silencer is critical to prevent chatter from occurring during the cut. Bench Type Lathe 1. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. 2. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information, see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure (Bench-Type)" section in this bulletin. 3. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn 4. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 5. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 6. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 7. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Reinstall the rotor(s). Important Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14316 When using the On-Car lathe on vehicles equipped with limited slip (or posi-trac) rear system, it is critical that the rear drive shaft is disconnected/disengaged prior to operation of the On-Car lathe. Remember to mark and re-index the drive shaft correctly on re-assembly to prevent creating driveline vibration. Whenever the lathe drive motor is being switched on, the operator MUST keep their body out of the wheel well area until the machine has reached its normal operating RPM. 2. Refinish the existing rotor on an approved, well-maintained lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Important When raising the vehicle on the lift, be sure to have it at a good working height (waist high is average) to accommodate mounting the On-Car lathe. Optimally, the center piston on the lathe trolley will be mid-travel. If the lathe trolley center piston is completely compressed (bottoming out) or inversely fully extended and hanging off the vehicle hub, this could affect the calibration time of the lathe. 3. Select the correct adapter for the vehicle you're working on and mount it to the hub with the vehicle lug nuts. Hand tighten 34-41 Nm (25-30 lb ft) the nuts using equal torque. DO NOT use impact wrenches, excessive torque will damage the adapter. Important Ensure the adapter sits flush on the rotor hat surface. Be sure to remove any rust, rotor retaining clips, etc. that may preclude the adapter from sitting flat on the mounting surface. 4. Connect the lathe to the adapter, turn on the lathe and activate the computer to compensate for run-out in the hub. 5. Once the computer indicates the compensation process was successful, on the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 6. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 7. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 8. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 9. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. 10. Dismount the lathe, but leave the lathe adapter attached to the vehicle. 6. Once the rotor has been properly machined, wash the rotor with soap and water (use a mild dish washing soap) or wipe it clean with GM approved brake cleaner, P/N 88862650 (Canadian P/N 88901247). Important Thoroughly cleaning the rotor will prevent the possible transfer of finite metal dust left as a by-product of machining to the pad material during the seating process, thus reducing the opportunity for squeaks or other noises to occur. 7. ***Record the REFINISHED rotor thickness measurement on the repair order hard copy. Refer to the "Repair Order Documentation - Rotor Refinish" section of this bulletin. 8. Setting up to measure for Lateral Run Out (LRO): Important Measuring for Lateral Run Out (LRO) (steps 8 - 15) is no longer required however, these steps are being left in the overall procedure as a good check to be performed in the case of a repeat pulsation complaint. If you are not checking for LRO, go to step 16. Bench-Type Lathe 1. Ensure that the mating surfaces of the rotor hat section and the hub mating surface are clean and free of debris. 2. Mount the new, original or refinished rotor onto the vehicle hub. Important Always hold the rotor on the bottom half so any debris that may be dislodged from the vents will fall out instead of falling into the mounting area. Any movement or jarring from the rotor falling over on the studs can release rust from the vents on the rotor. 3. Tilt the top of the rotor in towards the vehicle so you can see the studs and ease the rotor onto the studs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14317 4. Slide the rotor all the way to the hub and hold it in place until you have placed one of the conical washers (with the tapered hole side facing out) and run the first lug nut up tight by hand so the rotor doesn't move when you release it. 5. Place the conical washers on the rest of the studs (with the tapered hole side facing out), start and snug the lug nuts by hand. 6. Using the one half inch drive impact wrench and a torque stick (J 39544) or equivalent, start with the lug nut opposite of the one you first tightened by hand and tighten the lug nuts using a star pattern until they touch the hub but do not completely torque. Then again, starting with the first lug nut you tightened by hand, tighten all the lug nuts in a star pattern to the specific vehicle torque specification. 7. DO NOT reinstall the caliper or the wheel at this time. On-Car Type Lathe 1. Leave the On-Car adapter on the wheel. 2. Proceed to Step 9. 9. Fasten the dial indicator to the steering knuckle so that the indicator needle contacts the rotor outboard friction surface approximately 6.35 mm (0.25 in) from the rotor's outer edge. The stylus should be perpendicular to the friction surface of the rotor. Important Make sure the dial indicator needle tip is screwed tight, a loose tip could cause false readings. 10. Measure for LRO. Follow the procedure below to determine if the LRO is within specification (0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS). 1. Rotate the rotor and locate the point on the rotor where the lowest dial indicator reading is indicated and set the dial indicator to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor from the low point and locate the point with the highest dial indicator reading (rotor "high spot"). Note the amount and mark the location of the "high spot" on the rotor and mark the closest wheel stud relative to this location. If the high point falls between two studs, mark both studs. In instances where the vehicle has "capped lug nuts" you should mark the hub. 11. If the Lateral Run Out (LRO) measurement is 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or LESS, no correction is necessary. Go to Step 15 if this is the first rotor completed. Go to Step 16 if this is the second rotor completed. If the LRO is GREATER than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), go to Step 12. 12. If the LRO measurement is greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), use the following procedure to correct for LRO: Important If the LRO measurement is over 0.279 mm (0.011 in), determine the source or cause of the LRO and correct it (i.e. verify drive axle nut torque specification, refinished rotor is source of LRO due to a lathe qualification issue - see "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure"). Hubless Rotor 1. Remove the rotor and using the Brake Align(R) application chart (found in TSB 01-05-23-001B), choose the correct plate to bring the rotor LRO to 0.050 mm (0.002 in) or less. The plates come in 0.0762 mm (0.003 in), 0.1524 mm (0.006 in) and 0.2286 (0.009 in) compensation. For more information on proper plate selection, see the instruction video/DVD included in the "Brake Align(R)" kit or TSB 01-05-23-001B. 2. Align the V-notch of the selected Brake Align(R) correction plate to the marked wheel stud ("high spot") or between the two points marked (if the "high spot" is between two wheel studs). Important IF Brake Align(R) Correction Plates are not available for the vehicle being serviced, refer to SI Document - Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction for correcting LRO. Important Per Brake Align(R) manufacturer, NEVER attempt to stack two or more Correction Plates together on one hub. NEVER attempt to reuse a previously installed Correction Plate. 3. Reinstall the rotor using the same method and precautions as the first time - found in Step 8. Make sure to index the rotor correctly to the marks made in step 10, otherwise LRO will be comprised. Hubbed / Captured / Trapped Rotor 1. Measure the rotor thickness. 2. Refinish or replace the rotor (see Service Information for further details). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14318 13. Use a Dial Indicator to measure the rotor to verify the LRO is within specification. 14. If using, BENCH LATHE - DO NOT remove conical washers and lug nuts at this time. ON-CAR LATHE - You must remove adapter and install conical washers and lug nuts to retain rotor position. Important For Hubless rotor design, while removing the adapter, you must hold the rotor tight to the hub and install the top conical washer and lug nut first to ensure no debris falls between the surface while removing the adapter. Then, install the remaining conical washers and lug nuts. Otherwise, LRO will be comprised. 15. Perform Steps 1 through 7 on the opposite side of the vehicle (steps 1-12, if performing LRO). 16. Reinstall the rotors on both sides of the vehicle and perform the following steps: 1. Reinstall the calipers and pads. 2. Pump the brakes to pressurize the calipers. 3. Remove the lug nuts/conical washers. 4. Install and properly torque the wheels. Important It is critical to follow the star pattern wheel torque procedure and use the proper tools (torque stick or torque wrench) as referenced in SI. 17. Road test the vehicle to verify the repairs. Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure BRAKE LATHE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE Calibration of the brake lathe should be performed and recorded monthly or whenever post-service brake rotor LRO measurements are consistently reading above specification. BENCH-TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate a Bench-type brake lathe: 1. After refinishing a rotor, loosen the arbor nut and while holding the inside bell clamp to keep it from rotating, rotate the rotor 180 degrees. 2. Retighten the arbor nut and set the dial indicator on the rotor using the same instructions as checking the run out on the vehicle. 3. Rotate the arbor and read the runout. 4. Divide the reading by two and this will give you the amount of runout the lathe is cutting into the rotor. Important If there is any runout, you will need to machine the inside bell clamp in place on the lathe (this procedure is for a Bench type lathe ONLY, DO NOT machine inside the bell clamp on an On-Car type lathe). Machining the Inside Bell Clamp (Bench Type Lathe Only) Any nicks or burrs on the shoulder of the arbor must be removed. An 80-grit stone can be used to accomplish this. Spray WD-40(R) on the shoulder and with the lathe running, hold the stone flat against the shoulder surface using slight pressure. When the burrs are gone, clean the surface. Burrs must also be removed from the hub of the inside bell clamp. This can be accomplished with the stone and WD-40(R). Keep the stone flat on the hub while removing the burrs. After removing the burrs, clean the hub. Place the bell clamp on the arbor of the lathe and use the small radius adapters first and then spacers to allow you to tighten the arbor nut to secure the bell clamp to the lathe. Position the tool bit in the left hand of the rotor truer so you can machine the face of the bell clamp. Machine the face of the bell clamp taking just enough off of it to cut the full face of the clamp the full 360 degrees. Before you loosen the arbor nut, match mark the hub of the bell clamp to the arbor and line up these marks before machining a rotor. A magic marker can be used to make the match marks. Machine a rotor and recheck the calibration. Repeat this procedure on all Inside Bell Clamps used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14319 Important If runout is still present, contact the brake lathe supplier. ON-CAR TYPE LATHE Use the following procedure to calibrate an On-Car brake lathe: 1. Connect the lathe to a vehicle using the appropriate adapter. 2. Attach a vise-grip dial indicator to a fixed point in the wheel well and bring the dial indicator to a flat surface on the cutting head. 3. Turn on the lathe and press the "start" button so the lathe begins to compensate. 4. Once compensation is complete, note the runout as measured by the dial indicator. Measured runout at this point is overstated given that it is outside the rotor diameter. 5. If runout is in excess of 0.1016 mm (0.004 in) (0.050 mm (0.002 in) as measured within the rotor diameter), calibration must be tightened. Follow manufacturer's instructions for tightening the calibration of the lathe. This information is found in the manual supplied with the lathe. Important If the machine is taking a long time to compensate during normal use, prior to checking the lathe calibration, it is recommended that the machine be disconnected from the adapter and the adapter (still connected to the vehicle) is rotated 180 degrees and the machine reattached. This will accomplish two things: - It will re-verify the machine is properly attached to the adapter. - It will change the location of the runout (phase) relative to the machine and thus possibly allow for quick compensation as a result of the position change. The following information has been added as a reference to ensure your Pro-Cut PFM lathe provides a consistent smooth surface finish over long term usage. Cutting Tips / Depth of Cut / Tip Life The cutting tips must be right side up. Reference marks always face up. The cutting tips may not have chips or dings in the surface of the points. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. When cleaning or rotating the cutting bits, make sure that the seat area for the tip on the tool is free and clear of debris. Cutting Head On each brake job, the technician must center the cutting head for that particular vehicle using one of the mounting bolt holes on the slide plate. Once the head is centered, it is vital that the technician use one hand to push the head firmly and squarely back into the dovetail on the slide plate while using the other hand to tighten the Allen-Hex bolt that secures the head. Failure to do this could result in chatter occurring during the cut. Tool Holder Plate (Cutting Head) The tool holder plate is the plate that the cutting arms are attached to. It can bend or break if a technician accidently runs the cutting arms into the hub of the rotor while the rotor is turning. (Cuts of more than 0.508 mm (0.020 in) can also bend this plate). Once bent, the lathe will most likely not cut properly until the tool holder plate is replaced. In order to verify the condition of the tool holder plate on a machine that will not cut right, remove the mounting bolt and remove the cutting head from the slide plate. With the cutting head titled at an angle, lay the long edge of the tool holder plate down on the flat part of the slide plate. If any gap can be seen between the edge and the slide plate, the tool holder plate is bent and the source of vibration. Also check to ensure that the cutting arms are lying flat on the upper side of the tool holder plate. If the mounting arm post is bent, it will show itself by having the back of the cutting arm lifting off the surface of the tool holder. Gib Adjustment / Loose Gib As wear occurs between the slide plate and the box it rides on, you must take up the slack. You do this by way of a moveable wedge, which we call the gib. Your lathe manual details adjustment process, which you should perform when required after monthly checks or whenever surface finish is inconsistent. Brake Pulsation BRAKE PULSATION Brake pulsation is caused by brake rotor thickness variation. Brake rotor thickness variation causes the piston in the brake caliper, when applied, to "pump" in and out of the caliper housing. The "pumping" effect is transmitted hydraulically to the brake pedal. Brake pulsation concerns may result from two basic conditions: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14320 1. Thickness Variation Pulsation is Caused by Lateral Run Out (LRO). LRO on a brake corner assembly is virtually undetectable unless measured (with a dial indicator after the brake service) and will not be detected as brake pulsation during an after brake service test drive. If the brake corner is assembled with excessive LRO (greater than 0.050 mm (0.002 in), thickness variation will develop on the brake rotor over time and miles. Excessive LRO will cause the brake pads to wear the brake rotors unevenly, which causes rotor thickness variation. Pulsation that is the result of excessive Lateral Run Out usually develops in 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi). The more excessive the LRO, the faster the pulsation will develop. LRO can also be induced when uneven torque is applied to wheel nuts (lug nuts). Improper wheel tightening after tire rotation, spare tire usage, brake inspection, etc. can be the cause of brake pulsation. Again, it usually takes 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) AFTER the service event for the condition to develop. The customer does not usually make the connection between the service event and the awareness of the pulsation. The proper usage of torque wrenches and/or torque sticks (torque limiting sockets) will greatly reduce or eliminate the pulsation conditions after wheel service events. The improper use of impact wrenches on wheel nuts greatly increases the likelihood of pulsation after wheel service. The following are examples of pulsation conditions and reimbursement recommendations: - If the customer noticed the condition between 4,800-16,000 km (3,000-10,000 mi) and it gradually got worse, normally the repair would be covered. The customer may tolerate the condition until it becomes very apparent. - If a GM dealer performed a prior brake service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce proper brake lathe maintenance. - If the customer had the brake service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. - If a customer indicated they had wheel service, ask who performed the service. Then; - If a GM dealer performed the service, consider paying for the repair and then strongly reinforce the use of torque sticks at the dealer. Two common size torque sticks cover 90% of all GM products. Each technician needs to use torque sticks properly every time the wheel nuts are tightened. - If the customer had the wheel service done outside of a GM dealership, normally GM would not offer any assistance. 2. Thickness Variation Pulsation Caused by Brake Rotor Corrosion - Rotor corrosion is another form of thickness variation, which can cause a pulsation concern and can be addressed as follows: - Cosmetic Corrosion: In most instances rotor corrosion is cosmetic and refinishing the rotor is unnecessary. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (Lot Rot / Low Miles - 0-321 km (0-200 mi): At times more extensive corrosion can cause pulsation due to thickness variation. This usually happens when the vehicle is parked for long periods of time in humid type conditions and the braking surface area under the pads corrodes at a different rate compared to the rest of the braking surface area. Cleaning up of braking surfaces (burnishing) can be accomplished by 10 - 15 moderate stops from 56- 64 km/h (35 - 40 mph) with cooling time between stops. If multiple moderate braking stops do not correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (without rotor flaking / higher mileage 3,200-8,000 km (2,000-5,000 mi): In some cases, more extensive corrosion that is not cleaned up by the brake pad over time and miles can cause the same type of pulsation complaint due to thickness variation. In these cases, the rotor surface is usually darker instead of shiny and a brake pad foot print can be seen against the darker surface. This darker surface is usually due to build-up, on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" below. - Corrosion - Pulsation Caused by Thickness Variation (with rotor flaking / higher mileage - 8,000 + km (5,000 + miles) : At times, more extensive corrosion over time and miles can cause pulsation due to thickness variation (flaking). This flaking is usually a build up, mostly on the rotor material surface, caused by a combination of corrosion, pad material and heat. When rotor measurements are taken, the low areas are usually close to the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement and the high areas usually measure more than the original rotor thickness (new rotor) measurement (depending on mileage and normal wear). To correct this condition, follow the "Brake Rotor Clean-up Procedure" described below. Important In some flaking instances, cleaning-up this type of corrosion may require more rotor material to be removed then desired. Customer consideration should be taken in these situations and handled on a case by case basis, depending on the amount/percentage of rotor life remaining and the vehicle's warranty time and miles. Brake Rotor Clean-Up Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14321 BRAKE ROTOR CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE Clean-up the rotors on an approved, well-maintained brake lathe to guarantee smooth, flat and parallel surfaces. Check for clean and true lathe adapters and make sure the arbor shoulder is clean and free of debris or burrs. For more information see the "Brake Lathe Calibration Procedure" section in this bulletin. 1. On the outboard area of the rotor, position the cutting tools one eighth of an inch into the brake pad area of the rotor. Feed the cutting tools into the rotor until they cut the rotor to new metal, a full 360 degrees. Zero each dial and back off a full turn. 2. Move the cutting bits to the middle of the rotor and do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. Back off a full turn. 3. Position the cutting bits one eighth of an inch inside the inboard (closest to the hub) edge of the brake pad contact area. Do the same procedure. If zero is passed during the process, reset zero. 4. Back off a full turn and position the cutting bits all the way inboard in preparation to refinish the full rotor surface. Advance both tool cutters to the zero setting plus just enough to clean up the entire rotor surface. 5. After completing the refinish, sand both sides of the rotor for approximately one minute per side using a sanding block and 130-150 grit sandpaper to obtain a non-directional finish. Important Only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. Important In many of these instances, such a minimal amount of material is removed from the rotor that customer satisfaction is not a concern for future brake services. This procedure is intended to "Clean-up" the rotor surface and should be conveyed to the customer as such - not as "cut", "refinish" or "machine", which tends to be terms understood as a substantial reduction of rotor material/life. If the brake lathe equipment being used is not capable of removing minor amounts of material while holding tolerances, further lathe maintenance, repair, updates or equipment replacement may be necessary. Brake Noise BRAKE NOISE Some brake noise is normal and differences in loading, type of driving, or driving style can make a difference in brake wear on the same make and model. Depending on weather conditions, driving patterns and the local environment, brake noise may become more or less apparent. Verify all metal-to-metal contact areas between pads, pad guides, caliper and knuckles are clean and lubricated with a thin layer of high temperature silicone grease. Brake noise is caused by a "slip-stick" vibration of brake components. While intermittent brake noise may be normal, performing 3 to 4 aggressive stops may temporarily reduce or eliminate most brake squeal. If the noise persists and is consistently occurring, a brake dampening compound may be applied to the back of each pad. This allows parts to slide freely and not vibrate when moving relative to each other. Use Silicone Brake Lubricant, ACDelco P/N 88862181 (Canadian P/N 88862496) or equivalent. The following noises are characteristics of all braking systems and are unavoidable. They may not indicate improper operation of the brake system. Squeak/Squeal Noise: - Occurs with front semi-metallic brake pads at medium speeds when light to medium pressure is applied to the brake pedal. - Occasionally a noise may occur on rear brakes during the first few stops or with cold brakes and/or high humidity. Grinding Noise: - Common to rear brakes and some front disc brakes during initial stops after the vehicle has been parked overnight. - Caused by corrosion on the metal surfaces during vehicle non-use. Usually disappears after a few stops. Groan Noise: A groan type noise may be heard when stopping quickly or moving forward slowly from a complete stop. This is normal. On vehicles equipped with ABS, a groan or moan type noise during hard braking applications or loose gravel, wet or icy road conditions is a normal function of the ABS activation. Key Points - Frequently Asked Questions KEY POINTS - FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS - Q: How do on-car lathes react to Axle Float? Does the play affect the machining of the rotor, either surface finish or LRO? Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14322 A: Because the Pro-Cut on-car lathe adjusts in a live mode while spinning the hub/rotor, the dynamics of a floating axle are effectively eliminated. Once the lathe is compensated, there is no difference in the cutting/surface finish and LRO are just the same as with a non-floating axle. - Q: Which lathe is essential for performing brake work, the bench or on-car? A: Dealers must have a well maintained bench lathe and well maintained on-car lathe. These lathes need to be calibrated on a monthly basis. BOTH lathes are essential to providing quality brake service. - Q: What is the expected tip life for an on-car lathe? A: The geometry and composition of the Pro-Cut tips are designed for "single pass" cutting. When using the Pro-Cut the cutting depth should be set to take all material needed to get below rust grooves, eliminate all run-out and resurface the entire disc in a single pass. Cuts of 0.1016-0.381 mm (0.004-0.015 in) will provide the best surface finish and the optimal tip life. No "skim cut" or "finish cut" is needed. Failure to follow this procedure will shorten tip life. The Pro-cut tips will last between 7-12 cuts per corner. With three usable corners, a pair of tips is good for at least 21 cuts. - Q: Why does GM recommend the use of single pass (referred to as "positive rake") bench and on-car brake lathes? A: GM Service and GM Brake Engineering have performed competitive evaluations on a significant number of bench and on-car brake lathes. These tests measured critical performance characteristics such as flatness, surface finish and the ability of the lathe to repeat accuracy over many uses. In each test, single pass lathe designs out performed the competitors. Single pass brake lathes are more productive requiring less time to perform the same procedure. - Q: Is it okay to leave the caliper/pads installed while cutting rotors using an on-car lathe? A: On-car lathes should never be used with the pads and calipers installed on the vehicle. The debris from cutting the rotors can contaminate the brake pads/calipers which can lead to other brake concerns and comebacks. - Q: What information needs to be documented on the Repair Order? A: Any claim that is submitted using the labor operations in this bulletin, must have the Original Rotor Thickness and Refinish Rotor Thickness (if refinished) documented on the repair order. For more information, refer to the "Repair Order Required Documentation" section of this bulletin. All Warranty Repair Orders paid by GM, are subject to review for compliance and may be debited where the repair does not comply with this procedure. Brake Warranty BRAKE WARRANTY Brake Rotors: - Brake rotor warranty is covered under the terms of the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Reference the vehicle's warranty guide for verification. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced during normal/routine pad replacement. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced and is ineffective in correcting brake squeal type noises and/or premature lining wear out. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for cosmetic corrosion. Clean up of braking surfaces can be accomplished by 10-15 moderate stops from 56-64 km/h (35-40 mph) with cooling time between stops. - Rotors should not be refinished or replaced for rotor discoloration/hard spots. - Rotors should be refinished NOT replaced for Customer Pulsation concerns. This condition is a result of rotor thickness variation, usually caused by LRO (wear induced over time and miles) or corrosion (Lot Rot). - When rotor refinishing, only remove the necessary amount of material from each side of the rotor and note that equal amounts of material do not have to be removed from both sides on any brake system using a floating caliper. - Rotors should be refinished for severe scoring - depth in excess of 1.5 mm (0.060 in). Important If the scoring depth is more than 1.5 mm (0.060 in) after the rotor is refinished, it should be replaced. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14323 - It is not necessary to replace rotors in pairs. Rotors may be replaced individually. However, caution should be exercised, as a variance in surface finish may cause a brake pull condition. - New rotors should not be refinished before installation. Original equipment rotor surfaces are ground to ensure smooth finish and parallelism between mounting and friction surfaces. If a new rotor has more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in) Lateral Run Out (LRO) when properly mounted on the hub, correct it using one of the following methods: 1. For hubless rotor designs, use the correction plate procedure found in the "GM Brake Service Procedure for Hubless Rotors" outlined in this bulletin. 2. For hubbed/trapped/captured rotor designs, refinish the rotor using an On-Car lathe and the procedure outlined in this bulletin. - Never reuse rotors that measure under the Minimum Thickness specification. In this instance, the rotor should be replaced. Important If the Minimum Thickness specification is not visible on the rotor, reference Service Information (SI) for the specific vehicle application. DO NOT use any other manufacturers rotor specifications. Brake Pads: Important When determining the warranty coverage (as an example) - if all four front or four rear brake pads are excessively worn evenly, that would NOT be covered under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to driving habits or trailering. However, if the brake pads are excessively worn un-evenly, side-to-side or same side/inner-to-outer pads, then consideration should be given to cover this under warranty since this type of wear is most likely due to poor operation of other braking components. - Consideration should be given for covering brake pads up to 39,000 km (24,000 mi) (excluding owner abuse, excessive trailering, or the situations that would not be considered normal use). - Installation of new rotors does not require pad replacement. Do not replace pads unless their condition requires it - excessively worn, damage or contaminated. Brake Wear: Several factors impact brake lining wear and should be taken into account when reviewing related issues: - heavy loads / high temperatures / towing / mountainous driving / city driving / aggressive driving / driver braking characteristics (left foot or two feet) The following are conditions that may extend brake lining wear: - light loads / highway driving / conservative driving / level terrain Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14324 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor Lateral Runout Correction Information Bulletin No.: 01-05-23-001B Date: January 31, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Brake Align(R) System for Brake Rotor Lateral Runout Correction Models: 2008 and Prior Passenger Cars Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-05-23-001A (Section 05 - Brakes). This bulletin is being issued to update General Motors position on correcting brake rotor lateral runout (Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002B for additional brake rotor service procedures). Certain conditions may apply to individual vehicles regarding specific repairs. Refer to those specific repairs in applicable service bulletins. Make sure other possible sources of brake pulsation, such as ABS pedal feedback, have been addressed before checking rotor runout. Anytime a new or refinished rotor is installed on a vehicle, the rotor must have .050 mm (.002 in) or less of lateral runout. This specification is important to prevent comebacks for brake pulsation. Until now, the only acceptable methods to correct brake rotor runout were to index or replace the rotor or to refinish the rotor using an on-vehicle brake lathe. GM has approved a new technology for the correction of lateral runout on new or refinished rotors. This new method is called Brake align(R)*. It will allow the technician to meet the .050 mm (.002 in) or less requirement for lateral runout by installing a specially selected, tapered correction plate between the rotor and the hub. The Brake Align(R) Correction system does NOT require the use of an on-vehicle brake lathe to correct for lateral runout. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items which may be available from other sources. The Brake Align(R) Starter Kit will include an ample supply of Correction Plates, in various correction sizes, that will cover most current GM passenger car applications. It will also include a Brake Align(R) tool kit containing a dial indicator and retaining washers along with other useful tools. Service Procedure Follow all the procedures referred to in Corporate Bulletin Number 00-05-22-002B. Dealers who have purchased the Brake Align(R) Starter Kit may use the following simplified runout correction procedure: The existing rotors must first be machined on an approved, well-maintained bench lathe to guarantee smooth, flat, and parallel surfaces. Should the rotors require replacement, please note that it is not necessary to machine new rotors. Make sure all the mating surfaces of the rotor and the hub are clean, using the J 42450-A wheel Hub Cleaning Kit. Mount the new or refinished rotor onto the vehicle hub using the retaining washers provided in the kit. Do not reinstall the caliper or wheel at this time. Tighten all the wheel nuts to the proper specification, using J 39544 Torque Socket or the equivalent. Fasten the dial indicator to the steering knuckle so that the indicator needle contacts the rotor friction surface approximately 12.7 mm (1/2 in) from the rotors outer edge. Rotate the rotor and observe the total lateral runout. Index the rotor on the hub to achieve the lowest amount of lateral runout. This will require removal and reassembly of the rotor until the lowest total lateral runout reading is obtained. If this reading is .050 mm (.002 in) or less, the assembled rotor is within specification. The brake system may be reassembled. If total lateral runout is greater than .050 mm (.002 in), proceed with determining the correct Brake Align(R) Correction as follows: Rotate the rotor to locate the lowest dial indicator reading and set the dial to zero. Rotate the rotor to determine and locate the highest amount of lateral runout. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14325 Note the AMOUNT and LOCATION of the "high spot" on the rotor and mark the closest wheel stud relative to this location. Remove the rotor. Select the appropriate Brake Align(R) Runout Correction Plate for this vehicle using the Application Chart. Make sure the selection corrects the amount of runout that was diagnosed. Never attempt to stack two or more Correction Plates together on one hub. Never attempt to re-use a previously installed Correction Plate. Following the Brake Align(R) procedures and diagram, install the Correction Plate onto the vehicle between the hub and the rotor. The V-notch in the Correction Plate is to be installed and aligned with the noted location of the "high spot" on the vehicle hub and marked wheel stud. Install the rotor onto the vehicle with the Correction Plate placed between the hub and the rotor. Be sure to install the rotor onto the hub in the same location as identified in Step 7. The rotor should then be secured onto the hub and tightened to the proper specification. The rotor should be dial indicated once more to assure that the rotor is now within specification. The brake system is now ready for the remaining service and assembly. Once the caliper has been installed, check to ensure that the rotor rotates freely. Parts Information Brake Align(R) Runout Correction Plates are available through the suppliers shown. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14326 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14327 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14328 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes- Disc Brake Warranty Service And Procedures > Page 14329 Brake Align Order Form Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14330 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Front Brakes Rotor Discard Thickness ..................................................................................................................... ............................................... 28.6 mm (1.126 in) Rotor Maximum Allowable Assembled Lateral Runout ..................................................................................................................... 0.06 mm (0.002 in) Rotor Maximum Allowable Scoring ................................................................................................................................................... 1.50 mm (0.059 in) Rotor Maximum Thickness Variation .............................................................................................................................................. 0.025 mm (0.001 in) Rotor Minimum Allowable Thickness after Refinishing .................................................................................................................... 29.0 mm (1.142 in) Rotor Thickness - New .................................................................................................................................. ........................................ 30 mm (1.181 in) Rear Brake Rotors Rotor Discard Thickness* .................................................................................................................... ................................................ 9.0 mm (0.354 in) Rotor Maximum Allowable Assembled Lateral Runout ..................................................................................................................... 0.06 mm (0.002 in) Rotor Maximum Allowable Scoring ................................................................................................................................................... 1.50 mm (0.059 in) Rotor Maximum Allowable Thickness Variation ............................................................................................................................. 0.025 mm (0.001 in) Rotor Minimum Allowable Thickness after Refinishing .................................................................................................................... 9.35 mm (0.368 in) Rotor Thickness - New .................................................................................................................................. ..................................... 11.0 mm (0.433 in) * All brake rotors have a discard dimension cast into them. Replace any rotor that does not meet this specification. After refinishing the rotor, replace any rotor that does not meet the minimum thickness specification. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired. * The indexing method of correcting assembled LRO is most effective when the LRO specification is only exceeded by a relatively small amount: 0.025-0.127 mm (0.001-0.005 in). Indexing is used to achieve the best possible match of high spots to low spots between related components. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing) . * The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 in). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates) . * The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction On Vehicle Lathe) . If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14333 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Correction Plates Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates Tools Required * J 39544-KIT Complete Torque Socket Set-10 Pieces, or equivalent * J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face upward. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement. For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 in), the 0.076 mm (0.003 in) correction plate would be used. If the measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 in), the 0.152 mm (0.006 in) correction plate would be used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14334 5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure. Important: * Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. * Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. 6. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to align with the high spot mark (3), that was positioned to face upward. 7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 10. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 11. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14335 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Indexing Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing Tools Required * J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent * J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 1. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure. 2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 3. Index the brake rotor in a different orientation to the hub/axle flange. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 6. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14336 7. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 8. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 9. Compare the amount of change between this measurement and the original measurement. 10. If this measurement is within specifications, proceed to step 14. 11. If this measurement still exceeds specifications, repeat steps 1-9 until the best assembled LRO measurement is obtained. 12. Matchmark the final location of the rotor to the wheel studs if the orientation is different than it was originally. 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14337 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Tools Required J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from contacting any rotating components, such as the brake rotor. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement) . 7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10. 8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish. 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: * If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. * If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle. 10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . 12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14338 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . Review the following acceptable methods for bringing the brake rotor assembled LRO to within specifications. Determine which method to use for the specific vehicle being repaired. * The indexing method of correcting assembled LRO is most effective when the LRO specification is only exceeded by a relatively small amount: 0.025-0.127 mm (0.001-0.005 in). Indexing is used to achieve the best possible match of high spots to low spots between related components. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing) . * The correction plate method of correcting assembled LRO involves the addition of a tapered plate between the brake rotor and the hub/axle flange. The correction plate method can be used to correct LRO that exceeds the specification by up to 0.23 mm (0.009 in). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates) . * The on-vehicle brake lathe method is used to bring the LRO to within specifications through compensating for LRO while refinishing the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction On Vehicle Lathe) . If the assembled LRO cannot be corrected using these methods, then other components must be suspected as causing and/or contributing to the LRO concern. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Correction Plates Tools Required * J 39544-KIT Complete Torque Socket Set-10 Pieces, or equivalent * J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14339 1. Rotate the brake rotor to position the high spot, identified and marked during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure, to face upward. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Select the correction plate, following the manufacturer's instructions, which has a specification closest to the assembled LRO measurement. For example: If the assembled LRO measurement was 0.076 mm (0.003 in), the 0.076 mm (0.003 in) correction plate would be used. If the measurement was 0.127 mm (0.005 in), the 0.152 mm (0.006 in) correction plate would be used. 5. Determine the positioning for the correction plate (1) using the high spot mark (3) made during the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement procedure. Important: * Do NOT install used correction plates in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. * Do NOT stack up, or install more than one correction plate onto one hub/axle flange location, in an attempt to correct brake rotor assembled LRO. 6. Install the correction plate (1) onto the hub/axle flange, with the V-shaped notch (2) orientated to align with the high spot mark (3), that was positioned to face upward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14340 7. Install the brake rotor to the hub/axle flange. Use the matchmark made prior to removal for proper orientation to the flange. 8. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 9. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 10. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 11. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 12. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - Indexing Tools Required * J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent * J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14341 Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 1. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure. 2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 3. Index the brake rotor in a different orientation to the hub/axle flange. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1) and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 6. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 7. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 8. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 9. Compare the amount of change between this measurement and the original measurement. 10. If this measurement is within specifications, proceed to step 14. 11. If this measurement still exceeds specifications, repeat steps 1-9 until the best assembled LRO measurement is obtained. 12. Matchmark the final location of the rotor to the wheel studs if the orientation is different than it was originally. 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . 14. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14342 Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction - On Vehicle Lathe Tools Required J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . * Brake rotor assembled LRO exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 1. Ensure that the caliper and caliper bracket that are already being supported, are clear from contacting any rotating components, such as the brake rotor. 2. Remove the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts that were installed during the assembled LRO measurement procedure and/or the indexing correction procedure. 3. Inspect the mounting surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Set up the lathe, following the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Refinish the brake rotor, following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions. 6. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement) . 7. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. After replacing the rotor, proceed to step 10. 8. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish. 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: * If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. * If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 9. Remove the lathe from the vehicle. 10. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 11. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement still exceeds the maximum allowable specification, refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . 12. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement Tools Required * J 39544-KIT Torque-Limiting Socket Set, or equivalent * J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit * J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit * J 45101 Hub and Wheel Runout Gage * J 45101-100 Conical Brake Rotor Washers Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * Brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) exceeding the maximum allowable specification can cause thickness variation to develop in the brake rotor over time, usually between 4 800-11 300 km (3,000-7,000 mi). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14343 * Brake rotor thickness variation MUST be checked BEFORE checking for assembled lateral runout (LRO). Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement (See: Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement) . 1. Matchmark the position of the brake rotor to the wheel studs if this has not been done already. Important: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, any rust or contaminants should be cleaned from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in excessive assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. 2. Inspect the mating surface of the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles, corrosion, rust, or debris remaining. If the wheel hub/axle flange and/or if the brake rotor mating surfaces exhibit these conditions, perform the following steps: 1. Remove the brake rotor from the vehicle. Refer to Front Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Rotor Replacement) and/or Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement) . 2. Using the J 42450-A , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 3. Using the J 41013 , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the brake rotor. 4. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Install the rotor to the hub/axle flange using the matchmark made prior to removal. 4. Hold the rotor firmly in place against the hub/axle flange and install one of the J 45101-100 (1), and one lug nut (2) onto the upper-most wheel stud. 5. Continue to hold the rotor secure and tighten the lug nut firmly by hand. 6. Install the remaining J 45101-100 and lug nuts onto the wheel studs and tighten the nuts firmly by hand in a star-pattern. 7. Using the J 39544-KIT , or equivalent, tighten the lug nuts in a star-pattern to specification, in order to properly secure the rotor. Refer to Tire and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14344 Wheel Removal and Installation . 8. If the brake rotor has been REFINISHED or REPLACED with a new rotor, proceed to step 14. 9. If the brake rotor meets the following criteria, proceed to step 10. * The rotor is within specifications and is being REUSED. * The rotor has NOT been refinished. * The rotor does NOT exhibit thickness variation exceeding the maximum allowable level. 10. Mount a dial indicator, J 45101 , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from the outer edge of the rotor. 11. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 12. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: * Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) * Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) 13. If the brake rotor assembled LRO is within specifications, proceed to step 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO exceeds the specification, refinish the rotor to ensure true parallelism. Refer to Brake Rotor Refinishing (See: Service and Repair/Procedures) . After refinishing the rotor, proceed to step 14. 14. Mount a dial indicator, J 45101 , or equivalent, to the steering knuckle and position the indicator button so it contacts the brake rotor friction surface at a 90 degree angle, approximately 13 mm (0.5 in) from the outer edge of the rotor. 15. Measure and record the assembled LRO of the brake rotor. 1. Rotate the rotor until the lowest reading is displayed on the indicator dial, then set the dial to zero. 2. Rotate the rotor until the highest reading is displayed on the dial. 3. Mark the location of the high spot relative to the nearest wheel stud, or studs. 4. Measure and record the amount of LRO. 16. Compare the brake rotor assembled LRO to the following specification: * Front brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) * Rear brake rotor maximum allowable assembled lateral runout: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) 17. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . 18. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement is within specification, install the brake caliper and depress the brake pedal several times to secure the rotor in place before removing the J 45101-100 and the lug nuts. Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection Brake Rotor Surface and Wear Inspection Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14345 Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement) . 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Inspect the friction surfaces of the brake rotor for the following Braking Surface Conditions: * Heavy rust and/or pitting Light surface rust can be removed with an abrasive disc. Heavy surface rust and/or pitting must be removed by refinishing the rotor. * Cracks and/or heat spots * Excessive blueing discoloration 4. If the friction surfaces of the brake rotor exhibit one or more of the Braking Surface Conditions, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. 5. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the scoring depth of any grooves present on the rotor friction surfaces. 6. Compare the groove scoring depth recorded to the following specification: Brake rotor maximum allowable scoring: 1.50 mm (0.059 in) 7. If the brake rotor scoring depth exceeds the specification, or if an excessive amount of scoring is present, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement Caution: Two different designs of the front brake rotors and front brake pads are used on this vehicle. Do NOT interchange first design and second design parts, or a loss of braking and personal injury could occur. Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement) . 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousanths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousanths-of-an-inch, measure and record the thickness of the brake rotor at four or more points, evenly spaced around the rotor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction > Page 14346 Ensure that the measurements are only taken within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the outer edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 in), for each measurement. 4. Compare the lowest thickness measurement recorded to the specifications listed in Disc Brake Component Specifications (See: Specifications/Disc Brake Component Specifications) . 5. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is above the minimum allowable thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may be able to be refinished, depending upon surface and wear conditions which may be present. 6. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the minimum allowable thickness after refinishing specification, the rotor may not be refinished. 7. If the lowest thickness measurement of the brake rotor is at or below the discard thickness specification, the rotor requires replacement. Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement Brake Rotor Thickness Variation Measurement Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: Any disc brake rotor that exhibits thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level must be refinished or replaced. Thickness variation exceeding the maximum acceptable level can cause brake pulsation. 1. If the inboard friction surface of the brake rotor is not accessible, reposition and support the caliper with the brake pads. Refer to Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake Pads Replacement) and/or Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement (See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake Pads Replacement) . 2. Clean the friction surfaces of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 3. Using a micrometer calibrated in thousandths-of-a-millimeter, or ten-thousandths-of-an-inch, measure and record the thickness of the brake rotor at 4 or more points, evenly spaced around the rotor. Ensure that the measurements are only taken within the friction surfaces and that the micrometer is positioned the same distance from the outer edge of the rotor, about 13 mm (1/2 in), for each measurement. 4. Calculate the difference between the highest and lowest thickness measurements recorded to obtain the amount of thickness variation. 5. Compare the thickness variation measurement to the following specification: Brake rotor maximum allowable thickness variation: 0.02 mm (0.001 in) Important: Whenever a brake rotor is refinished or replaced, the assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the rotor must be measured to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. 6. If the brake rotor thickness variation measurement exceeds the specification, the rotor requires refinishing or replacement. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures Brake Rotor Refinishing Tools Required * J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit * J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Important: * The disc brake rotors do not require refinishing as part of routine brake system service. New disc brake rotors do not require refinishing. Do not refinish disc brake rotors in an attempt to correct the following conditions: - Brake system noise - squeal, growl, groan - Uneven and/or premature disc brake pad wear - Superficial or cosmetic corrosion/rust of the disc brake rotor friction surface - Scoring of the disc brake rotor friction surface less than the maximum allowable specification * Before refinishing a brake rotor, the rotor MUST first be checked for adequate thickness to allow the rotor to be refinished and remain above the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement (See: Testing and Inspection/Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement) . Disc brake rotors should only be refinished if they have adequate thickness to be refinished and if one or more of the following conditions exist: - Thickness variation in excess of the maximum allowable specification - Excessive corrosion/rust and/or pitting - Cracks and/or heat spots - Excessive blueing discoloration - Scoring of the disc brake rotor surface in excess of the maximum allowable specification * Disc brake rotors may need to be refinished as part of the process for correcting brake rotor assembled lateral runout (LRO) that exceeds the maximum allowable specification. Important: If the vehicle is equipped with cross-drilled rotors, use a lathe with positive rake tooling. This setup requires less cutting pressure, which will result in less vibration, and a better surface finish. Also, use a vibration dampener when cutting. Otherwise, refinish according to the following instructions. Important: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the hub/axle flange, clean any rust or contaminants from the hub/axle flange and the brake rotor mating surfaces. Failure to do this may result in increased assembled lateral runout (LRO) of the brake rotor, which could lead to brake pulsation. 1. Using the J 42450-A , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface of the hub/axle flange. 2. Using the J 41013 , thoroughly clean any rust or corrosion from the mating surface and mounting surface of the brake rotor. 3. Inspect the mating surfaces of the hub/axle flange and the rotor to ensure that there are no foreign particles or debris remaining. 4. Mount the brake rotor to the brake lathe according to the lathe manufacturer's instructions, ensuring that all mounting attachments and adapters are clean and free of debris. 5. Ensure that any vibration dampening attachments are securely in place. 6. With the brake lathe running, slowly bring in the cutting tools until they just contact the brake rotor friction surfaces. 7. Observe the witness mark on the brake rotor. If the witness mark extends approximately three-quarters or more of the way around the brake rotor friction surface on each side, the brake rotor is properly mounted to the lathe. 8. If the witness mark does not extend three-quarters or more of the way around the brake rotor, re-mount the rotor to the lathe. 9. Following the brake lathe manufacturer's instructions, refinish the brake rotor. 10. After each successive cut, inspect the brake rotor thickness. Refer to Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement (See: Testing and Inspection/Brake Rotor Thickness Measurement) . 11. If at any time the brake rotor exceeds the minimum allowable thickness after refinish specification, the brake rotor must be replaced. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14349 12. After refinishing the brake rotor, use the following procedure in order to obtain the desired non-directional finish: 1. Follow the brake lathe manufacturer's recommended speed setting for applying a non-directional finish. 2. Using moderate pressure, apply the non-directional finish: * If the lathe is equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with 120-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. * If the lathe is not equipped with a non-directional finishing tool, apply the finish with a sanding block and 150-grit aluminum oxide sandpaper. 3. After applying a non-directional finish, clean each friction surface of the brake rotor with denatured alcohol, or an equivalent approved brake cleaner. 13. Remove the brake rotor from the brake lathe. 14. Measure the assembled LRO of the brake rotor to ensure optimum performance of the disc brakes. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement (See: Testing and Inspection/Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Measurement) . 15. If the brake rotor assembled LRO measurement exceeds the specification, bring the LRO to within specifications. Refer to Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction (See: Testing and Inspection/Brake Rotor Assembled Lateral Runout Correction) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14350 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing Brake Pad and Rotor Burnishing Caution: Refer to Road Test Caution . Burnishing the brake pads and brake rotors is necessary in order to ensure that the braking surfaces are properly prepared after service has been performed on the disc brake system. This procedure should be performed whenever the disc brake rotors have been refinished or replaced, and/or whenever the disc brake pads have been replaced. 1. Select a smooth road with little or no traffic. 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 48 km/h (30 mph). Important: Use care to avoid overheating the brakes while performing this step. 3. Using moderate to firm pressure, apply the brakes to bring the vehicle to a stop. Do not allow the brakes to lock. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until approximately 20 stops have been completed. Allow sufficient cooling periods between stops in order to properly burnish the brake pads and rotors. Front Brake Rotor Replacement Front Brake Rotor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14351 Rear Brake Rotor Replacement Rear Brake Rotor Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14352 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Backing Plate: > 08-05-26-001 > Jun > 08 > Brakes Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle Backing Plate: Customer Interest Brakes - Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-05-26-001 Date: June 11, 2008 Subject: Information on Rattle Type Noise Heard from Rear of Vehicle Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala If a customer comments on a rattle type noise that can be heard from the rear of the vehicle while driving over sharp bumps, such as potholes or railroad tracks, this condition may be caused by the parking brake shoe retaining clip becoming loose AND allowing the shoes to contact the support plate. If routine diagnosis using SI does not reveal any obvious cause, inspect the parking brake shoe to make sure it is not loose in the retaining clip before replacing any suspension components. If it is determined that the shoes are loose, replace the park brake support plate. To reduce unnecessary warranty, please make every effort to inspect all components before ordering any new parts. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Backing Plate: > 08-05-26-001 > Jun > 08 > Brakes - Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle Backing Plate: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-05-26-001 Date: June 11, 2008 Subject: Information on Rattle Type Noise Heard from Rear of Vehicle Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala If a customer comments on a rattle type noise that can be heard from the rear of the vehicle while driving over sharp bumps, such as potholes or railroad tracks, this condition may be caused by the parking brake shoe retaining clip becoming loose AND allowing the shoes to contact the support plate. If routine diagnosis using SI does not reveal any obvious cause, inspect the parking brake shoe to make sure it is not loose in the retaining clip before replacing any suspension components. If it is determined that the shoes are loose, replace the park brake support plate. To reduce unnecessary warranty, please make every effort to inspect all components before ordering any new parts. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Important: * Before performing the ABS Automated Bleed Procedure, first perform a manual or pressure bleed of the base hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . * The automated bleed procedure must be performed when a new brake pressure modulator valve (BPMV) is installed, because the secondary circuits of the new BPMV are not prefilled with brake fluid. * The automated bleed procedure is recommended when one of the following conditions exist: * Base brake system bleeding does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel * Extreme loss of brake fluid has occurred * Air ingestion is suspected in the secondary circuits of the brake modulator assembly The ABS Automated Bleed Procedure uses a scan tool to cycle the system solenoid valves and run the pump in order to purge any air from the secondary circuits. These circuits are normally closed off, and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation. The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped in these circuits to flow out away from the brake modulator assembly, which is then forced out at the brake corners by the pressure bleeder. Automated Bleed Procedure Notice: The Auto Bleed Procedure may be terminated at any time during the process by pressing the EXIT button. No further Scan Tool prompts pertaining to the Auto Bleed procedure will be given. After exiting the bleed procedure, relieve bleed pressure and disconnect bleed equipment per manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly relieve pressure may result in spilled brake fluid causing damage to components and painted surfaces. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Inspect the brake system for leaks and visual damage. Refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Repair or replace components as needed. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Prepare the brake bleeding equipment and the vehicle for a pressure bleed of the base hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . 6. Inspect the battery state of charge. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test . 7. Install a scan tool. 8. Turn the ignition ON, with the engine OFF. 9. With the scan tool, perform the following steps: 1. Select Diagnostics 2. Select the appropriate vehicle information 3. Select Chassis 4. Select Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5. Select Special Functions 6. Select Automated Bleed 10. With an assistant ready, raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . Important: * Apply the brake pedal when instructed, using moderate effort. * Ensure the pedal remains applied until instructed to release by the scan tool. * Do not exceed the time period allowed by the scan tool for having the bleeder valves open. * The bleed sequence for each corner is as follows: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14372 - Left front - Right front Right rear - Left rear 11. Perform the automated bleed procedure as instructed by the scan tool. 12. If the automated bleed procedure is aborted, a malfunction exists. If a DTC is detected, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to diagnose the DTC. 13. After completion of the automated bleed procedure, press and hold the brake pedal to inspect for pedal firmness. 14. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleed procedure completely. 15. Remove the scan tool. 16. Install the tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 17. Lower the vehicle. 18. Adjust the brake fluid level. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling) . 19. Road test the vehicle while confirming the brake pedal remains high and firm. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14373 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding Manual Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. Important: If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding, disconnected the brake pipes from the master cylinder, replaced the ABS pressure modulator valve, or disconnected the jumper lines from the master cylinder to the ABS pressure valve, you MUST use the pressure bleeding procedure to remove all the air from the system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir remains at least half-full during this bleeding procedure. Add fluid as needed to maintain the proper level. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 4. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 5. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 6. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 7. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 8. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. 9. Tighten the bleeder valve, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 10. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 7-9 until all air is purged from the same wheel hydraulic circuit. 11. With the right rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the right rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 13. With the left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left front hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 14. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 15. With the left rear wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely, after all air has been purged from the left rear hydraulic circuit, install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 16. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat steps 6-10. 17. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 18. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 19. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. Important: If it is determined that air was induced into the system upstream of the ABS modulator prior to servicing, the Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure (See: ) must be performed. 20. If the brake pedal feels spongy, repeat the bleeding procedure again. If the brake pedal still feels spongy after repeating the bleeding procedure, perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection) . 2. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system in order to purge any air that may still be trapped in the system. 21. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14374 22. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Pressure Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) Tools Required * J 29532 Diaphragm Type Brake Pressure Bleeder, or equivalent * J 35589-A Brake Pressure Bleeder Adapter Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Place a clean shop cloth beneath the brake master cylinder to prevent brake fluid spills. 2. With the ignition OFF and the brakes cool, apply the brakes 3-5 times, or until the brake pedal effort increases significantly, in order to deplete the brake booster power reserve. 3. If you have performed a brake master cylinder bench bleeding on this vehicle, replaced the ABS pressure modulator valve, or disconnected the brake lines between master cylinder and ABS on this vehicle, you must perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the brake master cylinder reservoir is full to the maximum-fill level. If necessary, add Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. If removal of the reservoir cap is necessary, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the cap prior to removal. 2. With the rear brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder, loosen and separate the front brake pipe from the front port of the brake master cylinder. 3. Allow a small amount of brake fluid to gravity bleed from the open port of the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the brake pipe to the master cylinder port, and rotate the line at the master cylinder at least 30 degrees, so that the line will be positioned BELOW the MAX fill line on the brake master cylinder reservoir. Tighten the line nut securely. 5. Have an assistant slowly depress the brake pedal fully and maintain steady pressure on the pedal. 6. Loosen the same brake pipe to purge air from the open port of the master cylinder. 7. Tighten the brake pipe, then have the assistant slowly release the brake pedal. 8. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat steps 3.5-3.7 until all air is purged from the same port of the master cylinder. 9. With the front brake pipe installed securely to the master cylinder - after all air has been purged from the front port of the master cylinder loosen and separate the rear brake pipe from the master cylinder, then repeat steps 3.5-3.7, ensuring that the line is rotated below the master cylinder MAX fill line. 10. After completing the final master cylinder port bleeding procedure, ensure that both of the brake pipe-to-master cylinder fittings are properly tightened, and that they remain in their new rotated positions below the MAX fill line of the brake fluid reservoir. 4. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. Clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 5. Install the J 35589-A to the brake master cylinder reservoir. 6. Check the brake fluid level in the J 29532 , or equivalent. Add Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container as necessary to bring the level to approximately the half-full point. 7. Connect the J 29532 , or equivalent, to the J 35589-A . 8. Charge the J 29532 , or equivalent, air tank to 175-205 kPa (25-30 psi). 9. Open the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve to allow pressurized brake fluid to enter the brake system. 10. Wait approximately 30 seconds, then inspect the entire hydraulic brake system in order to ensure that there are no existing external brake fluid leaks. Any brake fluid leaks identified require repair prior to completing this procedure. 11. Install a proper box-end wrench onto the RIGHT REAR wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 12. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve. 13. Submerge the open end of the transparent hose into a transparent container partially filled with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 14. Repeat steps 11-13 for the LEFT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. 15. Loosen the bleeder valve to purge air from the wheel hydraulic circuit. It is important that both bleeder valves be open at the same time. Allow fluid to flow until air bubbles stop flowing from the bleeder, then tighten the bleeder valve. 16. With the right rear and left front wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve tightened securely - after all air has been purged from the right rear and left front hydraulic circuit - install a proper box-end wrench onto the LEFT REAR and RIGHT FRONT wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14375 17. Install a transparent hose over the end of the bleeder valve, then repeat step 15. 18. After completing the final wheel hydraulic circuit bleeding procedure, ensure that each of the 4 wheel hydraulic circuit bleeder valves are properly tightened. 19. Loosen the rear master cylinder jumper line nut slightly (just enough to rotate the line), and rotate the rear master cylinder hydraulic pipe back to the original position, and tighten the line nut. 20. Reposition the front master cylinder jumper line to the original position in a similar manner to step 19. 21. Close the J 29532 , or equivalent, fluid tank valve, then disconnect the J 29532 , or equivalent, from the J 35589-A . 22. Remove the J 35589-A from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 23. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R) GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 24. Slowly depress and release the brake pedal. Observe the feel of the brake pedal. 25. If the brake pedal feels spongy perform the following steps: 1. Inspect the brake system for external leaks. Refer to Brake System External Leak Inspection (See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Brake System External Leak Inspection) . 2. If equipped with Antilock Brakes, using a scan tool, perform the antilock brake system automated bleeding procedure to remove any air that may have been trapped in the BPMV. Refer to Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure (See: ) . 26. Turn the ignition key ON, with the engine OFF. Check to see if the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated. Important: DO NOT allow the vehicle to be driven until it is diagnosed and repaired. 27. If the brake system warning lamp remains illuminated, refer to Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes (See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptoms - Hydraulic Brakes) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14376 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Hydraulic Brake System Flushing Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. 1. Inspect the brake fluid for the following conditions, indicating brake fluid contamination: * Fluid separation, indicating 2 types of fluid are present; a substance other than the recommended brake fluid has been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Swirled appearance - oil-based substance - Layered appearance - silicone-based substance * Fluid discoloration, indicating the presence of moisture or particles that have been introduced into the brake hydraulic system - Cloudy appearance - moisture - Dark appearance/suspended particles in fluid - dirt, rust, corrosion, brake dust 2. Inspect the master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and the reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets for swelling, indicating brake fluid contamination. 3. If the brake fluid WAS contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, indicated by fluid separation and/or a swollen master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm and/or swollen reservoir-to-master cylinder grommets, perform the following: 1. Remove ALL of the following components listed from the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 2. Clean out all the hydraulic brake pipes using denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the brake pipes using non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Repair or replace ALL of the following components listed and install them to the vehicle. Each component contains internal rubber seals/linings which have been contaminated by the contaminated brake fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Refer to the procedures indicated: * Master Cylinder Overhaul (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Overhaul) or Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) ; also perform the following: Clean the brake master cylinder reservoir using denatured alcohol, or equivalent, then dry the reservoir using non-lubricated, filtered air. Inspect the reservoir for cracks and/or damage and replace if necessary. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement) . Replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. * Front Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Front Brake Hose Replacement) * Rear Brake Hose Replacement (See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Hose Replacement) * Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Brake Caliper Overhaul) or Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Brake Caliper Replacement) * Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul) or Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) * Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement (See: Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement) 4. If the brake fluid was NOT contaminated with an oil-based or a silicone-based substance, but WAS contaminated with water or dirt, rust, corrosion, and/or brake dust, replace the brake master cylinder reservoir cap diaphragm. The diaphragm may have allowed the moisture or Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Antilock Brake System Automated Bleed Procedure > Page 14377 particles to enter the hydraulic system. 5. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir to the maximum-fill level with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canada P/N 992667) or equivalent, DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 6. Pressure bleed the hydraulic brake system. Begin the procedure with the pressure bleeder reservoir filled to the maximum-fill level with the correct brake fluid as indicated. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: )Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: ) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Brake Caliper: Technician Safety Information Caliper Piston Removing Caution Caution: Do not place fingers in front of the caliper piston(s) in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. The piston(s) can fly out with force and could result in serious bodily injury. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 14382 Brake Caliper: Vehicle Damage Warnings Brake Caliper Notice Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 14383 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Brake Caliper Inspection 1. Inspect the brake caliper housing (1) for cracks, excess wear, and/or damage. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires replacement. 2. Inspect the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) for cracks, tears, cuts, deterioration and/or improper seating in the caliper body. If any of these conditions are present, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 3. Inspect for brake fluid leakage around the caliper piston dust boot seal (2) and on the disc brake pads. If there is any evidence of brake fluid leakage, the brake caliper requires overhaul or replacement. 4. Inspect for smooth and complete travel of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores: The movement of the caliper pistons into the caliper bores should be smooth and even. If the caliper piston is frozen or difficult to bottom, the caliper requires overhaul or replacement. * For single piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the piston. Using a large C-clamp (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the piston in the bore. * For dual piston caliper applications, insert a discarded inner brake pad (2) or block of wood in front of the pistons. Using 2 large C-clamps (1) installed over the body of the caliper (3) and against the brake pad or block of wood, slowly bottom the pistons evenly into the bores. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Front Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Replacement Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14386 Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Inspect the fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, then no brake fluid needs to be removed from the reservoir before proceeding. If the brake fluid level is higher than midway between the maximum-full point and the minimum allowable level, then remove brake fluid to the midway point before proceeding. 3. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 4. Remove the rear tire and the wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 5. Hand tighten 2 wheel lug nuts to retain the rotor to the hub. 6. Install a large C-clamp (3) over the top of the brake caliper (2) and against the back of the outboard brake pad. 7. Tighten the C-clamp (3) until the caliper piston is pushed into the caliper bore enough to slide the caliper off the rotor. 8. Remove the C-clamp (3) from the caliper. 9. Remove the brake hose-to-caliper bolt (1) from the caliper. Discard the 2 copper brake hose gaskets (3). These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. 10. Plug the opening in the rear brake hose (2) to prevent excessive brake fluid loss and contamination. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14387 11. Remove the caliper bolts (1 and 3). 12. Remove the caliper (3) from the rotor (4) and the caliper bracket (1). 13. Inspect the caliper bracket bolt boots on the caliper bracket for the following conditions: * Cuts * Tears * Deterioration Replace any damaged caliper bracket bolt boots. Refer to Rear Disc Brake Hardware Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake Hardware Replacement) . 14. Inspect the caliper bolts (2) for corrosion or damage. If corrosion is found, use new caliper bolts, including bushings, when installing caliper. Installation Procedure 1. Install the caliper (3) over the rotor (4) and the caliper bracket (1). Ensure that the bushings are in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14388 2. Lubricate the caliper bolts (1 and 3). Use silicone grease. Do not lubricate the threads. 3. Lubricate the 2 bolt boots (13 and 4) in the caliper bracket (12). Use silicone grease. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the caliper bolts (1 and 3). Ensure that the bolt boots fit securely in the groove of the caliper bolts. Be sure not to pinch or tear the boots. If the boots are damaged, they must be replaced. Tighten the bolts to 44 N.m (32 lb ft). Important: Install NEW copper gaskets. 5. Assemble the brake hose bolt (1) and the NEW copper brake hose gaskets (3) to the brake hose (2). 6. Install the brake hose-to-caliper bolt to the brake caliper. Tighten the bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 7. Remove the 2 wheel lug nuts retaining the rotor to the hub. 8. Install the rear tire and the wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Fill the master cylinder to the proper level with clean brake fluid. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling (See: Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Procedures/Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling) . 11. Bleed the brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair) . 12. Inspect the hydraulic brake system for brake fluid leaks. Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Front Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14389 may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 1. Remove the caliper from the mounting bracket and support the caliper with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. Refer to Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Front Brake Caliper Replacement) . 2. Remove the front brake pads. 3. Remove the caliper bracket bolts (2). 4. Remove the caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Important: To ensure that the proper clamp load will be present when installed. It is imperative that the threads on the caliper bracket bolts, as well as the mounting holes in the knuckle, be cleaned of all debris and inspected before proceeding with installation. 1. Clean and visually inspect threads of the caliper bracket bolts (2) and mounting holes in the knuckle. 2. Apply THREADLOCKER, GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488) or equivalent, to the threads of the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the caliper bracket (1) with the bracket bolts (2). Tighten the caliper bracket bolts to 180 N.m (133 lb ft). 4. Install the front brake pads. 5. Install the caliper. Refer to Front Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Front Brake Caliper Replacement) . Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Notice: Support the brake caliper with heavy mechanic wire, or equivalent, whenever it is separated from its mount and the hydraulic flexible brake hose is still connected. Failure to support the caliper in this manner will cause the flexible brake hose to bear the weight of the caliper, which may cause damage to the brake hose and in turn may cause a brake fluid leak. 1. Remove the caliper from the mounting bracket and support the caliper with heavy mechanics wire or equivalent. It is not necessary to disconnect the hydraulic brake flexible hose from the caliper. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . 2. Remove the rear brake pads. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14390 3. Remove the caliper bracket bolts (2). 4. Remove the caliper bracket (1). Installation Procedure Important: To ensure that the proper clamp load will be present when installed. It is imperative that the threads on the caliper bracket bolts, as well as the mounting holes in the knuckle, be cleaned of all debris and inspected before proceeding with installation. 1. Clean and visually inspect threads of the caliper bracket bolts (2) and mounting holes in the knuckle. 2. Apply threadlocker, GM P/N 12345493 (Canadian P/N 10953488), or equivalent to the threads of the brake caliper bracket bolts (2). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the caliper bracket (1) with the bracket bolts (2). Tighten the caliper bracket bolts to 120 N.m (88 lb ft). 4. Install the rear brake pads. 5. Install the caliper. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14391 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Front Brake Caliper Overhaul Front Brake Caliper Overhaul Tools Required * J 8092 Driver Handle 3/4 inch-10 * J 45863 Dust Seal Installer Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Disassembly Procedure 1. Drain all the brake fluid from the caliper. Caution: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston in order to catch or protect the piston while applying compressed air. This could result in serious injury. Important: In the following service procedure, the caliper piston may become damage when it is removed from the brake caliper assembly. If this happens, DO NOT reuse the piston. Discard and replaced with new. 2. Install the brake caliper in a suitable holding devise. 3. Insert a piece of wood in the brake caliper. 4. Cover the brake caliper with a shop towel. 5. Using compressed filtered, non-lubricated air, apply the air to the remove the pistons from the brake caliper. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14392 6. If one of the pistons fails to be removed from the brake caliper, perform the following steps. 1. Reposition the piston that has been removed back in the brake caliper. 2. Using a small block of wood and a C-clamp, slowly tighten the C-clamp until the piston it is half way in the brake caliper. It does not have to be fully seated. 3. Position a second block of wood in front of the piston that remains in the brake caliper. 4. Cover the brake caliper with a shop towel. 5. Using compress filtered, non lubricated air, apply the air to the remove the pistons from the brake caliper. 7. Remove the pistons (3) from the caliper bores. 8. Remove the piston seals (2) from the caliper bores. Do not use a metal tool. 9. Remove the bleeder valve cap (5). 10. Remove the bleeder valve (6) from the caliper housing (1). 11. Clean the bleeder valve, the caliper bores, the caliper passages and the pistons with denatured alcohol. Dry the parts and blow out the brake fluid passages. Use dry and filtered compressed air. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14393 12. Remove the boots from the caliper bores. Do not scratch the caliper bores. 13. Replace the pistons or the caliper if any of the following conditions exist: * Scoring in the caliper bores * Corrosion in the caliper bores * Pitting in the caliper bores * Damage to the pistons (phenolic) 14. Clean the brake caliper assembly with denatured alcohol. 15. Dry with filtered , lubricated compressed air. Assembly Procedure Important: When applying the clean brake fluid to the piston bores and pistons, only apply the brake fluid to one bore at a time. This is done to ensure that the brake caliper, seals and pistons DO NOT become contaminated with dirt or other foreign material. 1. Apply a small amount of clean DOT-3 brake fluid to the piston, piston seal, and piston bore. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14394 2. Install the piston seal in the brake caliper. 3. Install the dust seal on the piston. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14395 Important: Position the piston in the bore so that it is straight and level. 4. Install the piston in the brake caliper. 5. Position a piece of wood across the piston to be installed. 6. Applying equal pressure by hand while pushing down, install the piston in the bore. 7. Remove the piece of wood. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14396 8. Using the J 8092 (1) and the J 45863 (2) , install the piston dust seal in the brake caliper. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 9. Install the bleeder valve in the brake caliper housing. Tighten the bleeder valve to 13 N.m (115 lb in). 10. Install bleeder valve cap. Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14397 Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Remove the rear brake caliper from the vehicle. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . Caution: Do not place fingers in front of the caliper piston(s) in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. The piston(s) can fly out with force and could result in serious bodily injury. Notice: Use clean cloths to pad interior of caliper housing during piston removal. Use just enough air to ease the pistons out of the bores. If the pistons are blown out, even with the padding provided, it may be damaged. 2. Remove the brake caliper piston from the caliper bore by directing low pressure compressed air into the caliper bore through the fluid inlet hole. 3. Remove the retaining ring that secures the dust boot to the caliper housing. 4. Remove the piston dust boot seal (2) from the seal counterbore in the caliper. Discard the boot seal. 5. Using a small wooden or plastic tool, remove the piston seal (4) from the caliper bore . Discard the piston seal. Important: Do not use abrasives to clean the brake caliper piston. 6. Clean the brake caliper piston bore and seal counterbore, and the caliper piston with denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 7. Dry the caliper piston bore and counterbore, and the piston with non-lubricated, filtered air. 8. Inspect the caliper bore for cracks, scoring, pitting, excessive rust, and/or excessive corrosion. 9. If light rust or light corrosion are present in the caliper bore, attempt to remove the imperfection with a fine emery paper. If the imperfection cannot be removed, replace the caliper assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 14398 10. If cracks, scoring, pitting, excessive rust, and/or excessive corrosion are present in the caliper bore, replace the caliper assembly. 11. Inspect the caliper piston for cracks, scoring, and/or damage to the chrome plating. Replace the caliper piston if any of these conditions exist. Installation Procedure 1. Lubricate the new piston seal (4) with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 2. Install the lubricated, new piston seal (4) into the caliper bore. 3. Apply a thin coat of Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667) or equivalent, DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container onto the outer surface area of the caliper piston (3). 4. Install the bottom half of the caliper piston (2) into the caliper bore. 5. Install the new piston dust boot seal (1) over the caliper piston (2). 6. Compress the caliper piston (2) to the bottom of the caliper bore. 7. Fully seat the piston dust boot seal (1) into caliper counterbore. 8. Install the retaining ring that secures the dust boot to the caliper housing. 9. Install the bleeder valve and cap to the caliper and tighten the valve securely. 10. Install the rear brake caliper to the vehicle. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14406 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Rear of Engine Compartment 1 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 2 - Brake Booster 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch Right Front of the Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14407 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14408 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14409 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from brake fluid level sensor. 2. Remove the brake fluid level sensor. Using needle nose pliers, carefully depress the retaining tabs on the end of the brake fluid level sensor (1) and press the sensor through the reservoir to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Place the brake fluid level sensor (1) into the reservoir, press into place to secure the sensor retaining tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the brake fluid level sensor (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Pipe Replacement Brake Pipe Replacement Tools Required J 45405 Pipe Flaring Tool Kit Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Caution: Always use double walled steel brake pipe when replacing brake pipes. The use of any other pipe is not recommended and may cause brake system failure. Carefully route and retain replacement brake pipes. Always use the correct fasteners and the original location for replacement brake pipes. Failure to properly route and retain brake pipes may cause damage to the brake pipes and cause brake system failure. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Important: When servicing brake pipes, note the following: * If sectioning brake pipe, use replacement pipe of the same type and outside diameter. * Use fittings of the appropriate size and type. * Only create flares of the same type or design as originally equipped on the vehicle. 1. Inspect the section of brake pipe to be replaced. 2. Release the brake pipe to be replaced from the retainers, as required. 3. Select an appropriate location to section the brake pipe, if necessary. * Allow adequate clearance in order to maneuver the J 45405 . * Avoid sectioning the brake pipe at bends or mounting points. 4. Using a string or wire, measure the length of the pipe to be replaced including all pipe bends. 5. Add to the measurement taken the appropriate additional length required for each flare to be created. 6.35 mm (0.250 in) for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe Important: Ensure that the brake pipe end to be flared is cut at a square, 90 degree angle to the pipe length. 6. Using the pipe cutter included in the J 45405 , carefully cut the brake pipe squarely to the measured length. 7. Remove the sectioned brake pipe from the vehicle. 8. Select the appropriate size of brake pipe and tube nuts, as necessary. The brake pipe outside diameter determines brake pipe size. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 14414 9. Strip the nylon coating from the brake pipe ends to be flared, if necessary. * Select the appropriate blade on the coating stripping tool included in the J 45405 , by unthreading the blade block from the stripping tool and installing the block with the desired blade facing the tool rollers. 6.35 mm (0.250 in) blade for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe * Insert the brake pipe end to be flared into the stripping tool to the depth of the ledge on the tool rollers. * While holding the brake pipe firmly against the stripping tool roller ledges, rotate the thumbwheel of the tool until the blade contacts the brake pipe coated surface. Important: Do not gouge the metal surface of the brake pipe. * Rotate the stripping tool in a clockwise direction, ensuring that the brake pipe end remains against the tool roller ledges. * After each successive revolution of the stripping tool, carefully rotate the thumbwheel of the tool clockwise, in order to continue stripping the coating from the brake pipe until the metal pipe surface is exposed. * Loosen the thumbwheel of the tool and remove the brake pipe. Important: Ensure that all loose remnants of the nylon coating have been removed from the brake pipe. * Inspect the stripped end of the brake pipe to ensure that the proper amount of coating has been removed. 6.35 mm (0.250 in) for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe 10. Chamfer the inside and outside diameter of the pipe with the de-burring tool included in the J 45405 . 11. Install the tube nuts on the brake pipe, noting their orientation. 12. Clean the brake pipe and the J 45405 of lubricant, contaminants, and debris. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 14415 13. Loosen the die clamping screw of the J 45405 . 14. Select the corresponding die set and install the die halves into the die cage with the full, flat face of one die facing the clamping screw, and the counterbores of both dies facing the forming ram. 15. Place the flat face of an unused die (1) against the die halves in the clamping cage and hold firmly against the counterbored face of the dies. 16. Insert the prepared end of the pipe to be flared through the back of the dies until the pipe is seated against the flat surface of the unused die (1). 17. Remove the unused die (1). 18. Ensure that the rear of both dies are seated firmly against the enclosed end of the die cage. 19. Firmly hand tighten the clamping screw (2) against the dies. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 14416 20. Select the appropriate forming mandrel and place into the forming ram. 21. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve clockwise to the closed position. 22. Rotate the body of the J 45405 until it bottoms against the die cage. 23. While guiding the forming mandrel into the exposed end of pipe to be flared, operate the lever of the J 45405 until the forming mandrel bottoms against the clamping dies. 24. Rotate the hydraulic fluid control valve counterclockwise to the open position to allow the hydraulic forming ram to retract. 25. Loosen the die clamping screw and remove the dies and pipe. 26. If necessary, lightly tap the dies until the die halves separate. 27. Inspect the brake pipe flare for correct shape and diameter (a). 7.10 mm (0.279 in) +/- 0.18 mm (0.007 in) flare diameter for 4.76 mm (3/16 in) diameter pipe 28. If necessary, using the removed section of pipe as a template, shape the new pipe with a suitable brake pipe bending tool. Important: When installing the pipe, maintain a clearance of 19 mm (3/4 in) from all moving or vibrating components. 29. Install the pipe to the vehicle with the appropriate brake pipe unions as required. 30. If previously released, secure the brake pipe to the retainers. 31. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair) . 32. With the aid of an assistant, inspect the brake pipe flares for leaks by starting the engine and applying the brakes. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 14417 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Hose Replacement Front Brake Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the brake hoses and brake pipe fitting. Important: Install a rubber cap or plug to the exposed brake pipe fitting end to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 4. Use a backup wrench on the hose fitting, disconnect the brake pipe fitting from the brake hose, then cap or plug the brake pipe fitting end. Do not bend the brake pipe or the bracket. 5. Remove the brake hose retaining clip from the hose mounting bracket. 6. Remove the hose from the bracket. 7. Remove the brake hose to caliper bolt (4) from the brake caliper (2). 8. Remove the brake hose (5) from the brake caliper (2). 9. Remove and discard the two copper brake hose gaskets (3). These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 14418 Important: Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets (3). 1. Assemble the NEW copper brake hose gaskets (3), and the brake hose bolt (4) to the brake hose. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the brake hose to caliper bolt to the brake caliper. Tighten the brake hose to brake caliper bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 3. With the weight of the vehicle on the suspension, install the brake hose into the bracket. There should not be any kinks in the hose. Align the hose fitting with the notch in the bracket. Use the hose paint stripe as a visual aid. 4. Install the retainer onto the hose fitting at the bracket. 5. Remove the rubber cap or plug from the exposed brake pipe fitting end. 6. Connect the brake pipe fitting to the brake hose: * Use a backup wrench on the hose fitting. * Do not bend the bracket or pipe. Tighten the brake pipe fitting to 18 N.m (13 lb ft). 7. Install the front tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 8. Ensure that the hose does not make contact with any part of the suspension. Check the hose in extreme right and extreme left turn conditions. If the hose makes contact, remove the hose and correct the condition. 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair) . 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 14419 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Hose Replacement Rear Brake Hose Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Clean all dirt and foreign material from the brake hoses and brake pipe fitting. Important: Install a rubber cap or plug to the exposed brake pipe fitting end to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 4. Use a backup wrench on the hose fitting, disconnect the brake pipe fitting from the brake hose, then cap or plug the brake pipe fitting end. Do not bend the brake pipe or the bracket. 5. Remove the brake hose retaining clip from the hose mounting bracket. 6. Remove the hose from the bracket. 7. Remove the brake hose to caliper bolt (1) from the brake caliper. 8. Remove the brake hose (2) from the brake caliper. 9. Remove and discard the two copper brake hose gaskets (4). These gaskets may be stuck to the brake caliper and/or the brake hose end. Installation Procedure Important: Install NEW copper brake hose gaskets (4). 1. Assemble the NEW copper brake hose gaskets (4), and the brake hose bolt (1) to the brake hose (2). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the brake hose to caliper bolt (1) to the brake caliper. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pipe Replacement > Page 14420 Tighten the brake hose to brake caliper bolt to 54 N.m (40 lb ft). 3. With the weight of the vehicle on the suspension, install the brake hose into the bracket. There should not be any kinks in the hose. Align the hose fitting with the notch in the bracket. Use the hose paint stripe as a visual aid. 4. Install the retainer onto the hose fitting at the bracket. 5. Remove the rubber cap or plug from the exposed brake pipe fitting end. 6. Connect the brake pipe fitting to the brake hose: * Use a backup wrench on the hose fitting. * Do not bend the bracket or pipe. Tighten the brake pipe fitting to 18 N.m (13 lb ft). 7. Install the rear tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 8. Ensure that the hose does not make contact with any part of the suspension. If the hose makes contact, remove the hose and correct the condition. 9. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair) . 10. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 14425 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Replacement > Page 14426 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Bracket Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. 1. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 2. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 3. Install suitable fittings to the master cylinder ports that match the type of flare seat required and also provide for hose attachment. 4. Install transparent hoses to the fittings installed to the master cylinder ports, then route the hoses into the master cylinder reservoir. 5. Fill the master cylinder reservoir to at least the half-way point with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 6. Ensure that the ends of the transparent hoses running into the master cylinder reservoir are fully submerged in the brake fluid. 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress and release the primary piston as far as it will travel, a depth of about 25 mm (1 in), several times. Observe the flow of fluid coming from the ports. As air is bled from the primary and secondary pistons, the effort required to depress the primary piston will increase and the amount of travel will decrease. 8. Continue to depress and release the primary piston until fluid flows freely from the ports with no evidence of air bubbles. 9. Remove the transparent hoses from the master cylinder reservoir. 10. Install the master cylinder reservoir cap and diaphragm. 11. Remove the fittings with the transparent hoses from the master cylinder ports. Wrap the master cylinder with a clean shop cloth to prevent brake fluid spills. 12. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Master Cylinder Reservoir Filling Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: When adding fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir, use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. The use of any type of fluid other than the recommended type of brake fluid, may cause contamination which could result in damage to the internal rubber seals and/or rubber linings of hydraulic brake system components. Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Visually inspect the brake fluid level through the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, the brake system should be inspected for wear and possible brake fluid leaks. 3. If the brake fluid level is at or below the half-full point during routine fluid checks, and an inspection of the brake system did not reveal wear or brake fluid leaks, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 4. If brake system service was just completed, the brake fluid may be topped-off up to the maximum-fill level. 5. If the brake fluid level is above the half-full point, adding brake fluid is not recommended under normal conditions. 6. If brake fluid is to be added to the master cylinder reservoir, clean the outside of the reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. Use only Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14431 clean, sealed brake fluid container. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14432 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Remove the master cylinder from the vehicle. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Master Cylinder Replacement) . 2. Secure the master cylinder in a vise. Do not clamp the master cylinder body, secure only at the flange. 3. Remove the brake fluid level sensor. Using needle nose pliers, carefully depress the retaining tabs on the end of the brake fluid level sensor (1) and press the sensor through the reservoir to remove. 4. Carefully tap out the reservoir retaining pins. 5. Remove the reservoir from the master cylinder by pulling the reservoir straight up and away from the cylinder. 6. Remove the seals from the master cylinder. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14433 1. Inspect the reservoir (1) for cracks or deformation. If found, replace the reservoir. 2. Clean the reservoir with denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 3. Dry the reservoir with non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Lubricate the new seals (2) and the outer surface area of the reservoir-to-housing barrels with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667) or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 5. Install the lubricated seals (2), make sure they are fully seated. 6. Install the reservoir (1) to the master cylinder, by pressing the reservoir straight down on the master cylinder until the pin holes are aligned. 7. Carefully tap the reservoir retaining pins into place to secure the reservoir. 8. Place the brake fluid level sensor into the reservoir, press into place to secure the sensor retaining tabs. 9. Remove the master cylinder from the vise. 10. Install master cylinder to the vehicle. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Master Cylinder Replacement) . Master Cylinder Replacement Master Cylinder Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14434 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the brake fluid level sensor. 2. Disconnect the brake pipes from the master cylinder. Important: Install a rubber cap or plug to the exposed brake pipe fitting ends in order to prevent brake fluid loss and contamination. 3. Plug the open brake pipe ends. 4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts. 5. Remove the master cylinder from the vehicle. 6. Drain the master cylinder reservoir of all brake fluid. Installation Procedure 1. Bench bleed the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding (See: Procedures/Master Cylinder Bench Bleeding) . 2. Install the master cylinder to the vacuum brake booster. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 3. Install the master cylinder mounting nuts. Tighten the master cylinder mounting nuts to 33 N.m (24 lb ft). 4. Remove the plugs from the brake pipes 5. Connect the brake pipes to the master cylinder. Tighten the brake pipe fittings at the master cylinder to 18 N.m (13 lb ft). 6. Connect the electrical connector to the brake fluid level sensor. 7. Bleed the brake system. Refer to Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Manual) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair)Hydraulic Brake System Bleeding (Pressure) (See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14435 Brake Master Cylinder: Overhaul Master Cylinder Overhaul Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . Disassembly Procedure 1. Remove the brake master cylinder from the vehicle. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) . 2. Secure the mounting flange of the brake master cylinder in a bench vise so that the rear of the primary piston is accessible. 3. Clean the outside of the master cylinder reservoir on and around the reservoir cap prior to removing the cap and diaphragm. 4. Remove the reservoir cap and diaphragm from the reservoir. 5. Inspect the reservoir cap and diaphragm for the following conditions. If any of these conditions are present, replace the affected components. * Cuts or cracks * Nicks or deformation 6. Remove the master cylinder reservoir from the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement) . 7. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress the primary piston (2) and remove the piston retainer. 8. Remove the primary piston assembly from the cylinder bore. 9. Plug the cylinder inlet ports and the rear outlet port. Apply low pressure, non-lubricated, filtered air into the front outlet port, in order the remove the secondary piston (1) with the primary (6) and secondary (5) seals, and the return spring. 10. Discard the primary piston assembly, the piston retainer, and the seals and seal retainer from the secondary piston. Assembly Procedure Important: Do not use abrasives to clean the brake master cylinder bore. 1. Clean the interior and exterior of the master cylinder, the secondary piston (1), and the return spring in denatured alcohol, or equivalent. 2. Inspect the master cylinder bore, inlet and outlet ports, the secondary piston (1), and the return spring for cracks, scoring, pitting, and/or corrosion. Replace the master cylinder if any of these conditions exist. 3. Dry the master cylinder and the individual components with non-lubricated, filtered air. 4. Lubricate the master cylinder bore, the secondary piston (1), the return spring, and all of the individual overhaul components with Delco Supreme 11(R), GM P/N 12377967 (Canadian P/N 992667), or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed brake fluid container. 5. Assemble the lubricated, new primary seal (6) and retainer, and new secondary seal (5) onto the secondary piston. 6. Install the lubricated return spring and secondary piston assembly (1) into the cylinder bore. 7. Install the lubricated, new primary piston assembly (2) into the cylinder bore. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14436 8. Using a smooth, round-ended tool, depress the primary piston (2) and install the new piston retainer. 9. Install the master cylinder reservoir to the master cylinder. Refer to Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Reservoir Replacement) . 10. Install the reservoir cap and diaphragm to the reservoir. 11. Install the master cylinder to the vehicle. Refer to Master Cylinder Replacement (See: Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Replacement) . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Actuator: Service and Repair Parking Brake Actuator Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Relieve the park brake system tension at the equalizer assembly. 4. Remove the rear caliper bracket. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement) . 5. Remove the rear rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement) . 6. Disconnect and remove the rear park brake cable from the bracket at the rear wheel. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) (See: Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U)) . 7. Disconnect the park brake cable return spring from the park brake actuator and bracket at the rear wheel. 8. Remove the rear hub. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement . The rear hub, backing plate, park brake cable bracket, and park brake actuator will be removed as an assembly. 9. Remove the 2 retainers (9) and the park brake cable bracket (8) from the park brake actuator (4). Position the rear hub aside . 10. Remove the park brake shoe and actuator (4) from the backing plate (7). 11. Separate the actuator (4) from the park brake shoe . Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14441 1. Assemble the actuator (4) to the park brake shoe. 2. Install the park brake shoe and actuator (4) onto the backing plate (7). 3. Position the park brake shoe, actuator (4), and backing plate (7) over the rear hub. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the park brake cable bracket (8) and the 2 retainers (9) Tighten the bracket retainers to 14 N.m (124 lb in). 5. Install the rear hub. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement . The rear hub, backing plate, park brake cable bracket, and park brake actuator will be installed as an assembly. 6. Install and connect the rear park brake cable to the bracket at the rear wheel. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) (See: Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U)) . 7. Connect the park brake cable return spring to the park brake actuator and bracket at the rear wheel. 8. Install the rear rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement) . 9. Install the rear caliper bracket. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement) . 10. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 11. Adjust the park brake system. Refer to Park Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement Tools Required J 37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Relieve the cable tension at the park brake equalizer. 3. Disconnect the front cable from the connector (2). 4. Remove the front cable from the equalizer. 5. Remove the front cable from the cable guides. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Remove the left side closeout/insulator panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement - Left Side . 8. Remove the lower center pillar panel on the left side and the left side carpet retainers. Refer to Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement . 9. Fold back the carpeting in order to gain access to the front park brake cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 14446 10. Remove the retaining clip and disconnect the cable from the clevis. 11. Use the J 37043 to release the retainer holding cable to the bracket on the pedal assembly. 12. Remove the front cable from the vehicle. Note routing of the cable for installation. Installation Procedure 1. Install the front cable into the vehicle as noted in the removal procedure. 2. Install the front park brake cable into the bracket on the park brake pedal assembly. 3. Insert the cable button end into the clevis and install the retaining clip. 4. Reposition the carpeting properly. 5. Install the left side carpet retainers and the lower center pillar trim panel on the left side . Refer to Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement . 6. Install the left side closeout/insulator panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement - Left Side . 7. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 8. Install the front park brake cable through the park brake cable guides. 9. Install the front park brake cable into the equalizer. 10. Connect the front park brake cable (1) to the rear cable (3) at the connector clip (2). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 14447 11. Tighten the nut on the equalizer (2) in order to remove slack in the cable. 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 14448 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) Tools Required J 37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Relieve the park brake cable tension at the equalizer. 3. Disconnect the front cable from the rear cable that is to be replaced. * For the right rear cable, disconnect the cable (3) from the clip (2). * For the left rear cable, fully remove the equalizer nut from the equalizer stud, which is part of the left rear cable. 4. Disconnect the retainer (1) that holds the cable to the support bracket. Use the J 37043 to release the retainer. 5. Disconnect the park brake cable from the actuator lever. 6. Remove cable retaining pin from the support bracket and remove the park brake cable. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 14449 1. Position the park brake cable into the support bracket and install the cable retaining pin. 2. Install the park brake cable to the actuator lever. 3. Connect the retainer (1) that holds the cable to the support bracket. 4. Connect the rear cable to the front cable. * For the right rear cable, connect the cable (3) to the clip (2). * For the left rear cable, install the equalizer stud to the equalizer nut, which is part of the equalizer assembly. 5. Adjust the park brake. Refer to Park Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . 6. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 14450 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Park Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement Park Brake Cable Equalizer Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Disconnect the left rear park brake cable and adjustment stud assembly from the equalizer assembly by removing the equalizer nut from the adjustment stud. 3. Disconnect the front park brake cable (1) from the right rear cable (3) at the connector clip (2). 4. Remove the equalizer assembly from the front park brake cable. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the equalizer and lightly twist to reposition the equalizer retaining tab. This will release the assembly from the cable. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Front Cable Replacement > Page 14451 1. Install the equalizer assembly to the front park brake cable. 2. Connect the front brake cable (1) to the right rear cable (3) at the connector clip (2). 3. Connect the left rear brake cable and adjustment stud assembly to the equalizer assembly by installing the adjustment stud to the equalizer nut. 4. Adjust the Park Brake System. Refer to Park Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . 5. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Parking Brake Lever Pedal Assembly Replacement Tools Required J 37043 Parking Brake Cable Release Tool Removal Procedure 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Relieve the cable tension at the park brake equalizer. 3. Disconnect the front cable from the connector (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the left side closeout/insulator panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement - Left Side . 6. Remove the left side front carpet retainers. Refer to Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement . 7. Disconnect the electrical connector at the park brake switch. 8. Remove the 3 park brake pedal assembly retraining nuts from the body mounting studs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14455 9. Remove the retaining clip and disconnect the cable button from the clevis. 10. Use the J 37043 to release and remove cable from the bracket on the pedal assembly. 11. Remove the park brake pedal assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Install the park brake assembly onto the body mounting studs. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the 3 park brake pedal assembly retaining nuts. Tighten the nuts to 25 N.m (18 lb ft). 3. Install the front park brake cable into the bracket on the park brake pedal assembly. 4. Insert the cable button into the clevis and install the retaining clip. 5. Connect the electrical connector to the park brake switch. 6. Reposition the carpeting properly. 7. Install the left side carpet retainers and the lower center pillar trim panel on the left side. Refer to Center Pillar Lower Trim Panel Replacement . 8. Install the left side closeout/insulator panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Insulator Panel Replacement - Left Side . 9. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 10. Install the front park brake cable through the park brake cable guides. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14456 11. Connect the front park brake cable (1) to the rear cable (3) at the connector clip (2). 12. Tighten the nut on the equalizer in order to remove slack in the cable. 13. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Release Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14460 Parking Brake Release Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-05-26-001 > Jun > 08 > Brakes - Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle Parking Brake Shoe: Customer Interest Brakes - Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-05-26-001 Date: June 11, 2008 Subject: Information on Rattle Type Noise Heard from Rear of Vehicle Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala If a customer comments on a rattle type noise that can be heard from the rear of the vehicle while driving over sharp bumps, such as potholes or railroad tracks, this condition may be caused by the parking brake shoe retaining clip becoming loose AND allowing the shoes to contact the support plate. If routine diagnosis using SI does not reveal any obvious cause, inspect the parking brake shoe to make sure it is not loose in the retaining clip before replacing any suspension components. If it is determined that the shoes are loose, replace the park brake support plate. To reduce unnecessary warranty, please make every effort to inspect all components before ordering any new parts. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-05-26-001 > Jun > 08 > Brakes - Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle Parking Brake Shoe: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rattle Noise From Rear of Vehicle INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-05-26-001 Date: June 11, 2008 Subject: Information on Rattle Type Noise Heard from Rear of Vehicle Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala If a customer comments on a rattle type noise that can be heard from the rear of the vehicle while driving over sharp bumps, such as potholes or railroad tracks, this condition may be caused by the parking brake shoe retaining clip becoming loose AND allowing the shoes to contact the support plate. If routine diagnosis using SI does not reveal any obvious cause, inspect the parking brake shoe to make sure it is not loose in the retaining clip before replacing any suspension components. If it is determined that the shoes are loose, replace the park brake support plate. To reduce unnecessary warranty, please make every effort to inspect all components before ordering any new parts. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 10-06-04-008A Date: January 24, 2011 Subject: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated at Very Cold Ambient Temperatures When Using Engine Coolant Heater, DTC P0116 and/or P1400 Set (Relocate Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor and Engine Coolant Heater Cord) Models: 2006-2007 Buick Rainier 2009 Buick LaCrosse Super, Allure Super (Canada Only) 2006-2010 Cadillac Escalade 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2009 Chevrolet Impala SS, TrailBlazer 2006-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Express, Silverado Tahoe 2006-2009 GMC Envoy 2006-2010 GMC Savana, Sierra, Yukon 2006-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2006-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with V8 Engine RPO LC9, LH6, LH8, LH9, L76, LS2, LS4, LFA, LZ1, L92, L94, L9H or L20, L96, LMF, LMG, LY2, LY5, LY6 Please Refer to GMVIS Attention: To properly correct this condition, you must follow both of the procedures to relocate the ECT sensor and the engine coolant heater cord. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add cast iron block engine RPOs and to update the Warranty Information coverage period. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-06-04-008 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment that the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates after starting the vehicle when they were using the engine coolant heater in very cold ambient temperatures. This usually occurs in a range of -23 to -40°C (-10 to -40°F) or colder. The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P0116 and/or P1400 set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by the engine control module (ECM) determining that the ignition OFF time requirement has been met at start-up and interpreting the temperature difference between the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor and the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor as being outside of a calibrated range. Correction Important DO NOT replace the ECM for this condition. Relocating the ECT Sensor 1. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. 2. Perform the diagnostic system check - vehicle. Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in SI. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS using the engine coolant heater, proceed to Step 3. ‹› If DTC P0116 and/or P1400 are set and the customer WAS NOT using the engine coolant heater, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. Warning To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14479 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14480 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14481 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14482 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14488 under pressure if the radiator cap or the surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap from the surge tank or the coolant pressure cap from the radiator. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle in SI. 6. Place a clean drain pan under the radiator drain cock or under the lower radiator hose depending on the vehicle. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 7. Loosen the radiator drain cock if equipped or use J 38185 clamp pliers and reposition the clamp on the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 8. Remove the end of the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 9. Drain the engine coolant sufficiently below the level of the ECT sensor. 10. Close the radiator drain cock or connect the lower radiator hose at the radiator. 11. Use the J 38185 clamp pliers to place the clamp into the original position on the hose. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the ECT sensor (2). 14. Remove the ECT sensor (1) from the front of the cylinder head. 15. Remove the corresponding size plug at the rear of the OTHER cylinder head. 16. Coat the threads of the ECT sensor with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 17. Install the ECT sensor in the hole of the cylinder head where the plug was removed. Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). 18. Coat the threads of the plug with sealer. Use GM P/N 12346004 (Canadian P/N 10953480) or an equivalent. 19. Install the plug in the hole of the cylinder head where the ECT sensor was removed Tighten Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb ft). Important Leave enough wire attached to the ECT sensor harness connector in order to create manageable splices that are at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14489 20. Extract a portion of the ECT sensor harness wiring and connector from the protective conduit. Cut off the ECT sensor harness connector and wiring. 21. Determine a routing path for the ECT sensor jumper harness wires so that they can be secured TO or WITHIN an existing protective conduit. Note This step is to set up and verify the length of wiring that is required before cutting. 22. Route the ECT sensor jumper wires and then enclose them in their own protective conduit in order to VERIFY the length that is required. 23. Cut the ECT sensor jumper wires to the appropriate length. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 24. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ORIGINAL ECT HARNESS LOCATION using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. Note Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splice or connector. 25. Splice the ECT sensor jumper wires to the ECT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR using DuraSeal weatherproof splices. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves in SI. 26. Connect the ECT sensor harness connector to the ECT sensor. 27. Secure the ECT sensor jumper wires that are in their own protective conduit TO or WITHIN the existing harness conduit using tie straps. Important You MUST run the engine at the specified RPM and until it reaches normal operating temperature and then allow it to idle as indicated in SI. The engine MUST then be allowed to cool down in order to top off the coolant level as needed. 28. Fill the cooling system to the proper level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling in SI. 29. Pressure test the cooling system. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing in SI. 30. Use a scan tool to clear any DTCs. Relocating the Engine Coolant Heater Cord Important For reference, the procedure and graphics that are shown are from a Chevrolet Silverado, but are similar for the other vehicles listed above. 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Ask the customer where they would prefer the extension cord to exit from the engine compartment in order to determine the required extension cord length. 3. Obtain an extension cord with the following features: - 120 volt - 14/3 gauge - 15A capacity - Three prong - Polarized plug and receptacle - Chemical resistant - Grounded terminals - Designed for use in a cold outdoor environment - Outer jacket resistant to deterioration from moisture, abrasion and exposure to sunlight - Maximum length of 2.5-3 m (8-10 ft) 4. Release enough of the clips that retain the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle to provide the necessary length for repositioning. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the electrical contacts of the heater cord receptacle and the extension cord plug to prevent corrosion. Use GM P/N 12345579 (in Canada, use P/N 10953481) or an equivalent. 6. Connect the heater cord receptacle to the extension cord plug and wipe OFF any excess grease. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14490 7. Wrap electrical tape around the connection as shown. 8. Route the engine coolant heater cord and extension cord behind the alternator and adjacent to the engine coolant crossover pipe as shown. 9. Continue to route the extension cord to the exit location desired by the customer as shown. 10. Review the routing of the coolant heater cord and extension cord to verify that it does not touch any sharp edges that could damage it. 11. Secure the engine coolant heater cord and the extension cord with tie straps as needed. 12. Resecure any of the original clips that retained the engine coolant heater cord to the vehicle that were released to provide length. Part Information The extension cord may be obtained at any of the following outlets: - Lowes* - Home Depot* - Canada: Acklands-Grainger* (www.acklandsgrainger.com), Catalogue Part Number: CWRSJTOW3C14-10 USA: Cords should bear the UL symbol. Canada: Cords should bear the ULc symbol or CSA approval. *We believe these sources and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from these firms or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Brake Shoe: > 10-06-04-008A > Jan > 11 > Engine - MIL ON P0116/P1400 Set In Very Cold Temps > Page 14491 Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under the 5 year / 100,000 mile (160,000 km) emission warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14492 Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Parking Brake Shoe Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Brake Dust Caution . Caution: Refer to Brake Fluid Irritant Caution . Notice: Refer to Brake Fluid Effects on Paint and Electrical Components Notice . 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle . 2. Remove the rear tire and wheel assemblies. Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 3. Relieve the park brake system tension at the equalizer assembly. 4. Remove the rear caliper bracket. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement) . 5. Remove the rear rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement) . 6. Disconnect and remove the rear park brake cable from the bracket at the rear wheel. Refer to Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U) (See: Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Rear Cable Replacement (Z7U)) . 7. Disconnect the park brake cable return spring from the park brake actuator and bracket at the rear wheel. 8. Remove the rear hub. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement . The rear hub, backing plate, park brake cable bracket, and park brake actuator will be removed as an assembly. 9. Remove the 2 retainers (9) and the park brake cable bracket (8) from the park brake actuator (4). Position the rear hub aside . 10. Remove the park brake shoe and actuator (4) from the backing plate (7). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14493 11. Separate the park brake shoe from the actuator. Installation Procedure 1. Assemble the park brake shoe to the actuator (4). 2. Install the park brake shoe and actuator (4) onto the backing plate (7). 3. Position the park brake shoe, actuator (4), and backing plate (7) over the rear hub. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 4. Install the park brake cable bracket (8) and the 2 retainers (9). Tighten the bracket retainers to 14 N.m (124 lb in). 5. Install the rear hub. Refer to Rear Wheel Bearing and Hub Replacement . The rear hub, backing plate, park brake cable bracket, and park brake actuator will be installed as an assembly. 6. Install and connect the rear park brake cable to the bracket at the rear wheel. 7. Connect the park brake cable return spring to the park brake actuator and bracket at the rear wheel. 8. Install the rear rotor. Refer to Rear Brake Rotor Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Rotor Replacement) . 9. Install the rear caliper bracket. Refer to Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement (See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Brake Caliper Bracket Replacement) . 10. Install the rear tire and wheel assemblies . Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation . 11. Adjust the park brake system. Refer to Park Brake Adjustment (See: Adjustments) . 12. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left side instrument panel insulator. 2. Remove the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the mounting screw. 5. Remove the parking brake indicator switch (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the parking brake indicator switch (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the mounting screw. Tighten the mounting screw to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. Check the operation of the switch. 4. Install the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install the left side instrument panel insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14502 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Rear of Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14503 1 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 2 - Brake Booster 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14504 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG, LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14505 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the booster. 3. Remove the brake booster vacuum sensor grommet (2) from the booster. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14506 1. Install the brake booster vacuum sensor grommet (2) to the booster. 2. Install the brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the booster. 3. Connect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Power Vacuum Brake Booster Replacement (5.3L) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Service and Repair Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve and/or Hose Replacement (5.3L) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-05-25-001 > Jun > 09 > ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 Electronic Brake Control Module: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-05-25-001 Date: June 02, 2009 Subject: Intermittent Service Stabilitrak Message After Key Cycle, DTC C0292 Set (Reprogram Electronic Brake Control Module) Models: 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Stabilitrak message is displayed intermittently after the vehicle is first started. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning lights may also come on the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) intermittently. This may be the result of setting DTC C0292. The DTC will appear as a history code. This condition can be very intermittent (every ten key cycles or more) and would occur before the gear selector is taken out of Park. Cause The Service Stabilitrak message and the DTC is a result of the Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) software not updated to the latest version. Some additional key factors that trigger the occurrences of this condition and the EBCM DTC C0292 include the following: - Initial battery voltage is less than 11.8 volts going into CRANK mode. - When starting the vehicle, the customer quickly enters CRANK and then releases to allow for the starter relay control to take over engine start. This quick return to RUN allows the EBCM diagnostics to start monitoring for diagnostic faults. In the case of DTC C0292 , the low voltage is measured at the Yaw/Lateral Accelerometer sensor and the Service StabiliTrak message is then displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Correction Important The TECH 2(R) can provide some additional information or aid during diagnosis. Using a TECH 2(R), interrogate the EBCM Freeze Frame Data or Additional DTC Information to confirm the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A. If the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A, the revised EBCM software calibration improvement will reduce the occurrence of the DTC C0292 diagnostic fault from setting. Reprogram the EBCM with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the EBCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Programming and Setup procedures in SI. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 09-05-25-001 > Jun > 09 > ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Stabiltrak Message/DTC C0292 TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-05-25-001 Date: June 02, 2009 Subject: Intermittent Service Stabilitrak Message After Key Cycle, DTC C0292 Set (Reprogram Electronic Brake Control Module) Models: 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala Condition Some customers may comment that the Service Stabilitrak message is displayed intermittently after the vehicle is first started. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator and Traction Control System (TCS) Warning lights may also come on the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) intermittently. This may be the result of setting DTC C0292. The DTC will appear as a history code. This condition can be very intermittent (every ten key cycles or more) and would occur before the gear selector is taken out of Park. Cause The Service Stabilitrak message and the DTC is a result of the Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) software not updated to the latest version. Some additional key factors that trigger the occurrences of this condition and the EBCM DTC C0292 include the following: - Initial battery voltage is less than 11.8 volts going into CRANK mode. - When starting the vehicle, the customer quickly enters CRANK and then releases to allow for the starter relay control to take over engine start. This quick return to RUN allows the EBCM diagnostics to start monitoring for diagnostic faults. In the case of DTC C0292 , the low voltage is measured at the Yaw/Lateral Accelerometer sensor and the Service StabiliTrak message is then displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Correction Important The TECH 2(R) can provide some additional information or aid during diagnosis. Using a TECH 2(R), interrogate the EBCM Freeze Frame Data or Additional DTC Information to confirm the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A. If the DTC SUB-CODE is 6A, the revised EBCM software calibration improvement will reduce the occurrence of the DTC C0292 diagnostic fault from setting. Reprogram the EBCM with the latest software calibration. Important Select the correct calibration files for the appropriate vehicle configuration (body style) and RPO codes. A revised calibration has been developed to address this condition. Technicians are to reprogram the EBCM using the Service Programming System (SPS) with the latest software available on TIS2WEB. Refer to Electronic Brake Control Module Programming and Setup procedures in SI. As always, make sure your Tech 2(R) is updated with the latest software version. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14529 Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14530 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) (without JL4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14531 Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) (JL4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14532 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 14533 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Electronic Brake Control Module Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Yaw Sensor with Vehicle Lateral Accelerometer Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Remove the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer mounting nuts (2). 4. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 5. Remove the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 14538 1. Install the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer nuts (2). Tighten the nuts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Connect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 4. Install the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install a scan tool. 6. Using the special functions menu on the scan tool, reset the yaw rate sensor. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14543 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Front of the Engine Compartment LF of the Engine Compartment 1 - Mass Air Flow (MAF)/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 2 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZ8/LS4) 3 - Windshield Wiper Motor 4 - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) 5 - A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor 6 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) 7 - Engine Control Module (ECM) 8 - G101 9 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Left Left Rear of Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14544 1 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 2 - Brake Booster 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14545 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG, LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14546 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the brake booster vacuum sensor (1) from the booster. 3. Remove the brake booster vacuum sensor grommet (2) from the booster. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14547 1. Install the brake booster vacuum sensor grommet (2) to the booster. 2. Install the brake booster vacuum sensor (1) to the booster. 3. Connect the brake booster vacuum sensor electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14552 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Left Rear of Engine Compartment 1 - Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (LZG/LS4) 2 - Brake Booster 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch Right Front of the Engine Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14553 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14554 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Brake Fluid Level Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14555 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Level Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from brake fluid level sensor. 2. Remove the brake fluid level sensor. Using needle nose pliers, carefully depress the retaining tabs on the end of the brake fluid level sensor (1) and press the sensor through the reservoir to remove. Installation Procedure 1. Place the brake fluid level sensor (1) into the reservoir, press into place to secure the sensor retaining tabs. 2. Connect the electrical connector to the brake fluid level sensor (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Release Switch: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Pedal Assemblies 1 - Park Brake Switch 2 - Dash Panel 3 - Brake Pedal Position Sensor 4 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14559 Parking Brake Release Switch: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Park Brake Switch Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Indicator Switch Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the left side instrument panel insulator. 2. Remove the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the switch. 4. Remove the mounting screw. 5. Remove the parking brake indicator switch (1). Installation Procedure 1. Install the parking brake indicator switch (1). Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the mounting screw. Tighten the mounting screw to 3 N.m (26 lb in). 3. Connect the electrical connector to the switch. Check the operation of the switch. 4. Install the left carpet retainers. Refer to Front Carpet Retainer Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install the left side instrument panel insulator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Electronic Traction Control Switch Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set Wheel Speed Sensor: Customer Interest ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-05-25-004A Date: October 27, 2008 Subject: Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) Light On, DTCs C0035-C0052 Set (Perform Diagnostic Component Test Procedure and Repair as Necessary) Models: 2007 Buick Terraza 2007-2009 Buick Allure, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2007-2008 Cadillac XLR 2007-2009 Cadillac DTS, SRX, and STS 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Uplander 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2007-2009 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007 Saturn Relay Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-05-25-004 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment that the Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) (if equipped) warning lights are illuminated. Upon investigation, one or more of the following DTCs may be in history or current. Correction Begin diagnostics with the component test procedure listed below. If the cause is not found, proceed to the Circuit/System Testing on the applicable Diagnostic Information and Procedures document for the vehicle you are working on. SI Diagnostic Information and Procedures are being revised to reflect this change in strategy. 1. With the ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 2. Test for 850-1350 ohms between the signal terminal A and the low reference signal terminal B. During the test, check for an intermittent circuit condition by gently moving the wheel speed sensor pigtail harness. If not within the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set > Page 14574 3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle. Reverse the test leads, test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle again. If less than the specified value, replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 4. Spin the wheel while monitoring the voltage between the signal terminal A and the low reference terminal B. The voltage should be greater than 100 mV AC. If less than the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the applicable bearing and hub assembly published labor code. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set Wheel Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-05-25-004A Date: October 27, 2008 Subject: Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) Light On, DTCs C0035-C0052 Set (Perform Diagnostic Component Test Procedure and Repair as Necessary) Models: 2007 Buick Terraza 2007-2009 Buick Allure, LaCrosse, Lucerne 2007-2008 Cadillac XLR 2007-2009 Cadillac DTS, SRX, and STS 2007-2008 Chevrolet Corvette 2007-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Uplander 2007-2008 Pontiac Grand Prix 2007-2009 Pontiac Montana SV6 2007 Saturn Relay Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add models. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-05-25-004 (Section 05 - Brakes). Condition Some customers may comment that the Antilock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak(R) (if equipped) warning lights are illuminated. Upon investigation, one or more of the following DTCs may be in history or current. Correction Begin diagnostics with the component test procedure listed below. If the cause is not found, proceed to the Circuit/System Testing on the applicable Diagnostic Information and Procedures document for the vehicle you are working on. SI Diagnostic Information and Procedures are being revised to reflect this change in strategy. 1. With the ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 2. Test for 850-1350 ohms between the signal terminal A and the low reference signal terminal B. During the test, check for an intermittent circuit condition by gently moving the wheel speed sensor pigtail harness. If not within the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-05-25-004A > Oct > 08 > ABS/TCS - ABS/TCS Lamps ON/DTC's C0035-C0052 Set > Page 14580 3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle. Reverse the test leads, test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the steering knuckle again. If less than the specified value, replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor. 4. Spin the wheel while monitoring the voltage between the signal terminal A and the low reference terminal B. The voltage should be greater than 100 mV AC. If less than the specified range, replace the wheel speed sensor. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the applicable bearing and hub assembly published labor code. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Axle Nut: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 11-03-08-001 Date: April 14, 2011 Subject: Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle Models: 2006-2011 Chevrolet Impala (Including Police Vehicles) Condition Some customers may comment on a growl type noise coming from the front of the vehicle at speeds between 32 and 80 km/h (20 and 50 mph). Cause This condition may be caused by loss of preload on the front wheel bearings. Correction Important DO NOT replace the front wheel bearing and hub for this condition. To diagnose the noise, retorque the existing front axle shaft nut to 220 Nm (162 lb ft) and test drive the vehicle. If the noise is eliminated, replace both front axle shaft nuts with GM P/N 10257766 and tighten to the specification indicated below. On vehicles equipped with the police package (RPOs 9C1 or 9C3), add an additional Nord-Lock washer, GM P/N 20861489 between the hub and nut as shown in the illustration below. Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 14586 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Speed Sensor: > 11-03-08-001 > Apr > 11 > Steering - Growl Type Noise Coming from Front of Vehicle > Page 14592 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14593 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheels/Vehicle Underbody Component Views Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Similar) 1 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Rear (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Rear Similar) Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Similar) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14594 1 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Connector - Right Front (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Connector Left Front Similar) 2 - Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Front (Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Left Front Similar) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14595 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Front Reverse Lockout Solenoid Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Left Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14596 Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Front Reverse Lockout Solenoid Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) - Right Rear Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14597 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Yaw Rate Sensor: Procedures Yaw Rate Reference Table Resetting Circuit Description Optimum vehicle stability enhancement system (VSES) function is dependant on many variables. The characteristics of a specific vehicle, that affect vehicle handling or input signals to the electronic brake control module (EBCM), ultimately determine how the VSES operates. The basic EBCM software must be fine tuned as the vehicle is operated. This logic is referred to as adaptive learning. Adaptive learning is accomplished by maintaining a yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table in the EBCM memory. As the vehicle is operated, the table is populated with data that is later referenced, and sometimes modified, to allow the EBCM to provide the best possible stability control for the specific vehicle. Important: If the data in the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table becomes unreliable, false activations of the VSES, poor VSES performance or false setting of DTC C0186 or C0196 may result. A replacement EBCM may have some unreliable data stored in the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer data table. For this reason, it is important to perform the yaw rate reference table reset procedure after replacing the EBCM. Replacement of the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer or the installation of different size tires may also the data stored in the table to become unreliable. Therefore, the yaw rate reference table reset procedure must be performed. This procedure is to be used only for vehicles equipped with VSES (JL4). 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer harness connector. 3. Start the engine. 4. Apply firm and steady pressure to the brake pedal for at least 10 seconds. 5. Turn OFF the ignition. 6. Reconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer harness connector. 7. Turn ON the ignition and use the scan tool to clear the DTCs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14602 Yaw Rate Sensor: Removal and Replacement Vehicle Yaw Sensor with Vehicle Lateral Accelerometer Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Turn OFF the ignition. 2. Remove the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 3. Remove the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer mounting nuts (2). 4. Disconnect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 5. Remove the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1). Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14603 1. Install the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer (1) . Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice . 2. Install the 2 yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer nuts (2). Tighten the nuts to 6 N.m (53 lb in). 3. Connect the yaw rate sensor/lateral accelerometer electrical connector (2). 4. Install the front floor center console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement (Impala) . 5. Install a scan tool. 6. Using the special functions menu on the scan tool, reset the yaw rate sensor. 7. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle . Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Battery Current Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14610 Battery Current Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14611 Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14612 Battery Current Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Current Sensor Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 2. Remove the positive and negative battery cable. 3. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 4. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 5. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14613 Installation Procedure Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the battery prior to installation. 1. Slide the NEW battery current sensor (1) up onto the battery cable. 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 3. Install the positive and negative battery cable. 4. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Front of the Passenger Compartment, in the Steering Column 1 - Ignition Switch 2 - Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) 3 - Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 14618 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Procedures Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Special Tools BO-48370 Lock Cylinder Cap Installer Ignition Lock Cylinder The column-mount ignition lock cylinder uses 7 of the 10 key cut positions, 1, 2, and 4 through 8, when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on one side and 3 on the other. Important: The ignition lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the tumbler retainers (4) are properly staked into the cylinder. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder assembly (1) positioned so the side with the retention lug is facing upward, spring-loaded retainer facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 3 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 1, the first number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. It may be necessary to move the sidebar (5), already pre-assembled into the uncoded cylinder assembly, out slightly to fully install the tumbler into the correct tumbler slot. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 2 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5 and 7. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 6. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) so that the side with the retention lug is facing downward, spring-loaded retainer facing upward, and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14621 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 2. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 4, 6, and 8. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the cylinder assembly (1), install and stake one tumbler retainer (4) into the recessed area on the cylinder. Be careful not to damage the cylinder assembly in any way while staking the tumbler retainer. 13. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) to the opposite side and repeat the procedure defined in the previous step. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder The front side door lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3 through 10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Important: The front side door lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case assembly (4). Left side shown, right side opposite. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing upward, as shown. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check the correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing downward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14622 are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. Hold the case assembly (4), left side shown, right side opposite, with the pre-staked detent spring retainer facing downward. 13. First insert one detent spring (5) and then one detent ball (6) into the detent spring hole located to the rear and inside of the cylinder case assembly (4). The detent spring and detent ball are not self-retaining and must be held in place until the coded cylinder is installed into the case assembly. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 14. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case assembly (4). Make sure the detent spring (5) and detent ball (6) are held in place until the coded cylinder is fully installed. The detent ball should line up with the V-shaped groove on the rear of the cylinder, which will prevent the detent spring and detent ball from falling out of the case assembly. 15. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case assembly (4). 16. Insert one shutter spring (7) each into the two shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 17. Install the shutter assembly (8) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. 18. Install the lock cylinder cap (9) by aligning the drain hole in the cap with the bottom of the case assembly (4). Snap the cap into place with light hand pressure. Be sure the cap is securely retained on the case assembly. Also, be sure that the shutter springs (7) push the shutter assembly (8) up against the inside surface of the cap. 19. Install the lever (10), left side shown, right side opposite, onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (11) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (10) to the cylinder. Rear Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder - Police Vehicles 9C1 and 9C3 The rear compartment lid lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3-10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14623 Important: The rear compartment lid lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key is not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case (4). 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the drain hole is facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so that the side with the drain hole is facing upward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the open tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers into the tumbler slots located at key Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14624 cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case (4). 13. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case (4). 14. Insert one shutter spring (5) each into the 2 shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 15. Install the shutter assembly (6) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. Important: Be careful not to scratch or dent the cosmetic surface of the cap or damage the lock cylinder in any way while staking the cap. 16. Stake the cap (7) onto the head of the case (4) by using the appropriate staking tool BO-48370. Ensure proper orientation and set the cylinder assembly (14), (which includes the case (4), coded cylinder (1), shutter springs (5), and shutter assembly (6)) and the cap (7) into the staking cup (15) and clamp into vise. Remove any debris and install the cleaned staking ram (16) into staking cup (15) and with a dead blow hammer, hit the staking ram (16) with moderate force 2 or 3 times. Check to determine if cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly (14). Repeat previous step until cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly. Remove assembly from the staking cup (15). If necessary, insert the removal punch (17) into the opposite end of the staking cup and tap lightly. Confirm that the shutter springs (5) push the shutter assembly (6) up against the inside surface of the cap (7). 17. Install the gasket (8) over the end of the cylinder assembly and slide it all the way up the case (4) until it seats behind the cap (7). 18. Install the return spring (9) over the back end of the cylinder (1) with the straight hook facing the rear of the case (4). Engage the straight hook of the return spring with the hook feature on the rear of the case. 19. Install the spacer (10) and lever (11) onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (12) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (11) to the cylinder. Engage the bent hook of the return spring (9) with the lever. 21. Install the theft deterrent switch (13) onto the end of the cylinder (1) and snap the switch legs onto the case (4). Be sure the theft deterrent switch is engaged with the end of the cylinder and is securely attached to the case. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14625 22. Check the operation of the lock assembly. The return spring (9) should provide a counterclockwise snap back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14626 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. Remove the ignition switch. 4. Remove the steering column tilt head components. 5. Remove the turn signal switch housing. 6. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14627 7. Remove the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case in the following way: 1. Use a small blade to push against the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1). 2. Disconnect the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case. 8. Remove the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) from the ignition lock cylinder case (1). 9. Remove the ignition lock cylinder case (1) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the ignition lock cylinder case (1) with the steering column tilt head assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Screw the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) into the ignition lock cylinder case (1). Tighten the 3 TORX(R) screws to 7 N.m (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14628 3. Press the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1) into the slot in the ignition lock cylinder case. Important: Press the turn signal switch housing firmly against the steering column tilt head in order for the screws from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly to align. 4. Install the turn signal switch housing. 5. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. 6. Install the steering column tilt head components. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14629 7. Install the ignition switch only. 8. Install the ignition lock cylinder. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. Caution: Refer to Battery Disconnect Caution. 1. Record all of the vehicle's preset radio stations. 2. Turn OFF all lamps and accessories. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 4. Loosen the negative battery cable terminal nut. 5. Remove the negative battery cable terminal (3) from the battery. Installation Procedure Important: Clean any existing oxidation from the contact face of the battery terminal and battery cable using a wire brush before installing the battery cable to the battery terminal. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14639 1. Install the negative battery cable terminal (2) to the battery. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Tighten the negative battery cable terminal nut. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 3. Set the clock and program the radio stations back into the radio as recorded at the beginning of the procedure. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and Operation. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14640 Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Positive and Negative Cable Replacement Battery Positive and Negative Cable Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure Important: When replacing battery cables be sure to use replacement cables that are the same type, gage, and length. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable (3). 2. Open the positive battery cable terminal lead cover (1). 3. Loosen the positive battery cable terminal lead nut 4. Remove the positive battery cable terminal from the battery. 5. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 6. Disconnect the battery cable connector from the I/P harness electrical connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14641 7. Remove the bussed electrical center (BEC) cover. 8. Remove the positive battery cable junction block lead nut (1). 9. Remove the positive battery cable terminal (2) from the BEC. 10. Remove the ground wire bolt (1) and reposition the wire (5) from the top rail. 11. Remove the battery cable harness retaining clips (2, 3, and 4) from the front rail and fan shroud. 12. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14642 13. Remove the battery cable harness retainers from the engine cradle. 14. Remove the transaxle stud nut (8). 15. Remove the battery cable ground (7) from the transaxle stud. 16. Reposition the positive battery cable boot (4) at the starter solenoid. 17. Remove the starter solenoid BAT terminal nut (3) from the starter. 18. Remove the positive battery cable (2) from the starter motor. 19. Remove the positive battery cable clip (5) from the transmission stud. 20. Lower the vehicle. 21. Remove the positive and negative battery cable from the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14643 22. If replacing the positive and negative battery cable, perform the following: 1. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the battery cable. 2. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 3. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Installation Procedure 1. If the positive and negative battery cable was replaced, perform the following: 1. Slide the battery current sensor (1) onto the battery cable. Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the negative cable terminal. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14644 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the battery cable. 2. Install the positive and negative battery cable to the vehicle. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Install the positive battery cable (2) to the starter motor. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 5. Install the starter solenoid BAT terminal nut (3) to the starter. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 6. Position the positive battery cable boot (4) at the starter solenoid. 7. Install the positive battery cable clip (5) to the transmission stud. 8. Install the battery cable ground (7) to the transaxle stud. 9. Install the transaxle stud nut (8). Tighten the nut to 30 N.m (22 lb ft). 10. Install the battery cable harness retainers from the engine cradle. 11. Lower the vehicle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14645 12. Position the ground wire (5) and install the ground wire bolt (1) to the top rail. Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 13. Install the battery cable harness retaining clips (2, 3, and 4) to the front rail and fan shroud. 14. Install the positive battery cable terminal (2) to the BEC. 15. Install the positive battery cable junction block lead nut (1). Tighten the nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 16. Install the BEC cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection > Page 14646 17. Connect the battery cable connector to the I/P harness electrical connector. 18. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. 19. Install the positive battery cable terminal to the battery. 20. Tighten the positive battery cable terminal lead nut. Tighten the nut to 15 N.m (11 lb ft). 21. Snap closed the positive battery cable terminal lead cover (1). 22. Connect the negative battery cable (3). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views Battery Current Sensor: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Powertrain Component Views > Page 14651 Battery Current Sensor: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14652 Battery Current Sensor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14653 Battery Current Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Current Sensor Replacement (RPO LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the instrument panel (I/P) harness electrical connector (2) from the battery current sensor. 2. Remove the positive and negative battery cable. 3. Cut the tie straps and electrical tape attaching the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 4. Squeeze the battery cable branches together. Important: Note the position of the battery current sensor prior to removal. 5. Slide the battery current sensor (1) off of the battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Current Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 14654 Installation Procedure Important: Ensure that the tape tab is pointing away from the battery prior to installation. 1. Slide the NEW battery current sensor (1) up onto the battery cable. 2. Using NEW tie straps and electrical tape, attach the battery current sensor to the positive battery cable. 3. Install the positive and negative battery cable. 4. Connect the I/P harness electrical connector (2) to the battery current sensor. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray Replacement (LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the battery. 2. Remove the battery tray bolts. 3. Remove the battery tray. Installation Procedure 1. Install the battery tray. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the battery tray bolts. Tighten the bolts to 5 N.m (44 lb in). 3. Install the battery. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications Alternator: Specifications Generator Usage Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 14662 Alternator: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Generator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement (LS4) Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Bracket Replacement (LS4) Generator Bracket Replacement (LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Remove the generator. 2. Remove the idle pulley. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Vehicle Lifting. 4. Remove the lower tensioner bolt and rotate the tensioner to access the generator bracket bolt. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the generator bracket bolts. 7. Remove the generator bracket from the stud. Installation Procedure 1. Install the generator bracket to the stud. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the generator bracket bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 3. Raise the vehicle. 4. Install the lower generator bracket bolt. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement (LS4) > Page 14665 Tighten the bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 5. Install the lower tensioner bolt. Tighten the bolt to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Install the idler pulley. 8. Install the generator. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement (LS4) > Page 14666 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Replacement (LS4) Generator Replacement (LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the engine sight shield. 3. Remove the drive belt. 4. Disconnect the generator electrical connector (2). 5. Position aside the protective boot (1) from the generator output BAT terminal for access. 6. Remove the generator output BAT terminal nut (4) and remove the positive battery lead (3) from the generator. 7. Remove the generator bolts and generator. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator Bracket Replacement (LS4) > Page 14667 Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 1. Install the generator and bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). 2. Install the positive battery lead (3) and generator output BAT terminal nut (4) to the generator. Tighten the nut to 20 N.m (15 lb ft). 3. Position the protective boot (1) to the generator output BAT terminal. 4. Connect the generator electrical connector (2). 5. Install the drive belt. 6. Install the engine sight shield. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Left Front of the Passenger Compartment, in the Steering Column 1 - Ignition Switch 2 - Theft Deterrent Module (TDM) 3 - Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Page 14673 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Ignition Lock Cylinder Control Actuator Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Procedures Key and Lock Cylinder Coding Special Tools BO-48370 Lock Cylinder Cap Installer Ignition Lock Cylinder The column-mount ignition lock cylinder uses 7 of the 10 key cut positions, 1, 2, and 4 through 8, when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on one side and 3 on the other. Important: The ignition lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the tumbler retainers (4) are properly staked into the cylinder. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder assembly (1) positioned so the side with the retention lug is facing upward, spring-loaded retainer facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 3 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 1, the first number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. It may be necessary to move the sidebar (5), already pre-assembled into the uncoded cylinder assembly, out slightly to fully install the tumbler into the correct tumbler slot. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 2 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5 and 7. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 6. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) so that the side with the retention lug is facing downward, spring-loaded retainer facing upward, and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14676 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 2. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 4, 6, and 8. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder assembly (1). The sidebar (5) should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder assembly. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the cylinder assembly (1), install and stake one tumbler retainer (4) into the recessed area on the cylinder. Be careful not to damage the cylinder assembly in any way while staking the tumbler retainer. 13. Rotate the cylinder assembly (1) to the opposite side and repeat the procedure defined in the previous step. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder The front side door lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3 through 10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Important: The front side door lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key in not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case assembly (4). Left side shown, right side opposite. 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing upward, as shown. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the lock cylinder assembly (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check the correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so the side with the rotational stop lug is facing downward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14677 are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder assembly. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate the tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. Hold the case assembly (4), left side shown, right side opposite, with the pre-staked detent spring retainer facing downward. 13. First insert one detent spring (5) and then one detent ball (6) into the detent spring hole located to the rear and inside of the cylinder case assembly (4). The detent spring and detent ball are not self-retaining and must be held in place until the coded cylinder is installed into the case assembly. Caution: Wear safety glasses in order to avoid eye damage. 14. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case assembly (4). Make sure the detent spring (5) and detent ball (6) are held in place until the coded cylinder is fully installed. The detent ball should line up with the V-shaped groove on the rear of the cylinder, which will prevent the detent spring and detent ball from falling out of the case assembly. 15. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case assembly (4). 16. Insert one shutter spring (7) each into the two shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 17. Install the shutter assembly (8) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. 18. Install the lock cylinder cap (9) by aligning the drain hole in the cap with the bottom of the case assembly (4). Snap the cap into place with light hand pressure. Be sure the cap is securely retained on the case assembly. Also, be sure that the shutter springs (7) push the shutter assembly (8) up against the inside surface of the cap. 19. Install the lever (10), left side shown, right side opposite, onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (11) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (10) to the cylinder. Rear Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder - Police Vehicles 9C1 and 9C3 The rear compartment lid lock cylinder uses 8 of the 10 key cut positions, 3-10 when counting from the key head. The tumbler orientations alternate in adjacent locations from side to side with 4 on each side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14678 Important: The rear compartment lid lock cylinder tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place if the key is not fully inserted into the lock cylinder or until the cylinder (1) is assembled into the case (4). 1. Hold the uncoded cylinder (1) positioned so the side with the drain hole is facing downward. 2. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 3. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 3, the third number in the key code. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder (1), the end where the key is inserted. 4. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers (3) into the tumbler slots located at key cut positions 5, 7, and 9. 5. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 6. Rotate the cylinder (1) so that the side with the drain hole is facing upward and then remove the matching key. Remember the tumblers (3) are not self-retaining and must be held in place. 7. Insert one tumbler spring (2) each into the 4 tumbler spring holes. 8. The first tumbler to be loaded will be key cut position number 4. Determine the cut depth at this position and install the corresponding tumbler (3) into the open tumbler slot nearest the front of the cylinder. 9. In the same manner, determine the cut depth and corresponding tumbler and install the 3 remaining tumblers into the tumbler slots located at key Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14679 cut positions 6, 8, and 10. 10. Check for correct loading by holding the tumblers (3) in position and fully inserting the matching key into the cylinder (1). All tumblers should be flush with the outside diameter of the cylinder. 11. Lightly lubricate tumbler (3) surfaces using the lubrication provided. 12. With the matching key fully inserted into the coded cylinder, install the coded cylinder into the case (4). 13. Remove the matching key being careful to keep the coded cylinder (1) fully inserted into the case (4). 14. Insert one shutter spring (5) each into the 2 shutter spring holes located on the front face of the cylinder (1). 15. Install the shutter assembly (6) into the recessed area on the front face of the cylinder (1). Be sure that the ends of the pin on the shutter assembly are positioned in the pin cavities located in the front face of the cylinder. Important: Be careful not to scratch or dent the cosmetic surface of the cap or damage the lock cylinder in any way while staking the cap. 16. Stake the cap (7) onto the head of the case (4) by using the appropriate staking tool BO-48370. Ensure proper orientation and set the cylinder assembly (14), (which includes the case (4), coded cylinder (1), shutter springs (5), and shutter assembly (6)) and the cap (7) into the staking cup (15) and clamp into vise. Remove any debris and install the cleaned staking ram (16) into staking cup (15) and with a dead blow hammer, hit the staking ram (16) with moderate force 2 or 3 times. Check to determine if cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly (14). Repeat previous step until cap is securely staked to the cylinder assembly. Remove assembly from the staking cup (15). If necessary, insert the removal punch (17) into the opposite end of the staking cup and tap lightly. Confirm that the shutter springs (5) push the shutter assembly (6) up against the inside surface of the cap (7). 17. Install the gasket (8) over the end of the cylinder assembly and slide it all the way up the case (4) until it seats behind the cap (7). 18. Install the return spring (9) over the back end of the cylinder (1) with the straight hook facing the rear of the case (4). Engage the straight hook of the return spring with the hook feature on the rear of the case. 19. Install the spacer (10) and lever (11) onto the end of the cylinder (1). 20. Install the retaining ring (12) in the groove at the end of the cylinder (1) to secure the lever (11) to the cylinder. Engage the bent hook of the return spring (9) with the lever. 21. Install the theft deterrent switch (13) onto the end of the cylinder (1) and snap the switch legs onto the case (4). Be sure the theft deterrent switch is engaged with the end of the cylinder and is securely attached to the case. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14680 22. Check the operation of the lock assembly. The return spring (9) should provide a counterclockwise snap back. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14681 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Case Replacement Removal Procedure Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. 1. Disable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. Remove the ignition switch. 4. Remove the steering column tilt head components. 5. Remove the turn signal switch housing. 6. Remove the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14682 7. Remove the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case in the following way: 1. Use a small blade to push against the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1). 2. Disconnect the park lock cable assembly (1) from the ignition lock cylinder case. 8. Remove the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) from the ignition lock cylinder case (1). 9. Remove the ignition lock cylinder case (1) from the steering column tilt head assembly. Installation Procedure 1. Align the ignition lock cylinder case (1) with the steering column tilt head assembly. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Screw the 3 TORX(R) screws (2) into the ignition lock cylinder case (1). Tighten the 3 TORX(R) screws to 7 N.m (62 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14683 3. Press the locking tab on the end of the park lock cable assembly (1) into the slot in the ignition lock cylinder case. Important: Press the turn signal switch housing firmly against the steering column tilt head in order for the screws from the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly to align. 4. Install the turn signal switch housing. 5. Install the turn signal and multifunction switch assembly only. 6. Install the steering column tilt head components. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14684 7. Install the ignition switch only. 8. Install the ignition lock cylinder. 9. Enable the SIR system. Refer to SIR Disabling and Enabling. Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Ignition Lock Cylinder Replacement Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 14689 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 14690 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 14691 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless System - Remote Start Transmitter Diagnostic Tip Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless System - Remote Start Transmitter Diagnostic Tip INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-08-52-004A Date: January 08, 2010 Subject: Diagnostic Tips/Recommendations on GM Accessory 2-Way Remote Start Transmitter When Transmitter Battery is Weak or Dead Models: 2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac DTS, Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Cobalt, HHR, Impala, Silverado, Tahoe 2009-2010 Chevrolet Malibu, Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2007-2009 Pontiac G5, G6, Solstice, Torrent 2008-2009 Pontiac G8 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK, SKY, VUE 2007-2010 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-52-004 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Follow these procedures if a customer comments that their GM Accessory 2-way transmitter stopped communicating with the vehicle. About GM Accessory 2-Way Remote Start The GM Accessory 2-way transmitter has the ability to operate a second vehicle equipped with a 2-way advanced remote start system, but often the 2-way transmitter may only be coded to one vehicle. If the customer presses the left side button twice within one second, the 2-way transmitter will enter second vehicle mode and will not control the original vehicle until a subsequent double press of the left side button places the transmitter back in first vehicle mode. Each vehicle mode of the 2-way transmitter should be thought of as an individual transmitter with its own unique code. Test the Transmitter Battery Note This test should be performed prior to releasing the vehicle or transmitter to the customer. All transmitter batteries should be tested immediately after installation of a 2-way remote start kit or replacement of a transmitter battery using the following procedure. 1. Press the unlock button on the transmitter eight times consecutively. 2. After the eighth press of the unlock button, observe the battery gauge located in the upper right corner of the LCD display. The gauge should read full (three bars inside the battery icon). If after having a new battery installed, the battery goes dead within five months, the transmitter could have high sleep current, causing the battery to go dead. Replace the transmitter. Please follow this diagnostic or repair process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. Determine if Transmitter is in Second Vehicle Mode 1. Press and release any of the face buttons on the 2-way transmitter and observe the display on power-up. 2. If the 2-way transmitter is in second vehicle mode, the second vehicle icon will be displayed on the left side of the transmitter display. Is the 2-way transmitter in second vehicle mode? If Yes, the 2-way transmitter is working properly. - Press and release the left side button twice within one second. The 2-way transmitter should exit second vehicle mode. - Press and release the lock button. Press and release the unlock button. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless System - Remote Start Transmitter Diagnostic Tip > Page 14697 - Confirm that the vehicle responds with the appropriate lock and unlock function. - If Yes , the 2-way transmitter was in mode B. - Press and release the left side button twice within one second. The 2-way transmitter should enter second vehicle mode. - Use the "next available slot" method in the scan tool to program the 2-way transmitter to the 2-way RCDLR. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock Transmitter Programming in SI. - Both vehicle modes of the 2-way transmitter should now be coded to the vehicle. If No: The 2-way transmitter is not exhibiting the failure mode addressed by this bulletin. Refer to normal diagnostic procedures. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of 2-way remote start, refer to the Accessory Parts Catalog or Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-025A. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless System - Remote Start Transmitter Diagnostic Tip > Page 14698 Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Start - 2-Way Advanced Remote Start INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-00-89-025A Date: October 26, 2009 Subject: GM Accessories: 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Part Information Models: 2007-2010 Buick Lucerne 2008-2010 Buick Enclave 2007-2010 Cadillac Escalade ESV, EXT 2008-2010 Cadillac DTS 2007-2009 Chevrolet Equinox, HHR 2007-2010 Chevrolet Avalanche, Cobalt, Silverado, Tahoe 2008-2010 Chevrolet Impala, Malibu 2009-2010 Chevrolet Traverse 2007-2010 GMC Acadia, Sierra, Yukon 2008-2010 HUMMER H2 2007-2009 Pontiac Torrent 2007-2010 Pontiac G5, G6 2008-2010 Pontiac G8 2010 Pontiac Solstice 2007-2010 Saturn AURA, OUTLOOK 2009-2010 Saturn VUE 2010 Saturn SKY Attention: This bulletin does not apply to GMODC dealers. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add part numbers. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-00-89-025 (Section 00 - General Information). This bulletin is being published to provide information on locating service part numbers for GM Accessory, 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems. Dealers should consult the chart below and use the correct service part. Dealers should not use entire kit for warranty or repair work. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless System - Remote Start Transmitter Diagnostic Tip > Page 14699 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless System - Remote Start Transmitter Diagnostic Tip > Page 14700 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless System - Remote Start Transmitter Diagnostic Tip > Page 14701 Parts Information Service parts common to all 2-Way Advanced Remote Start Systems Transmitter Battery 12493150 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Starter Motor: Diagrams Component Connector End Views - Continued Starter Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14705 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Motor Replacement (LS4) Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the starter solenoid BAT terminal nut (3) and remove the positive battery cable (2) from the starter motor. 3. Remove the engine harness terminal (4) from the starter motor. 4. Disconnect the starter motor electrical connector (1). 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14706 6. Remove the starter motor bolts and starter motor. Installation Procedure 1. Position the starter motor to the engine. Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 2. Install the starter bolts. Tighten the bolts to 50 N.m (37 lb ft). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14707 3. Connect the starter motor electrical connector (1). 4. Install the engine harness terminal (4) to the starter motor. 5. Install the positive battery cable (2) and the starter solenoid BAT terminal nut (3) to the starter motor. Tighten the solenoid BAT terminal nut to 10 N.m (89 lb in). 6. Install the air cleaner assembly. 7. Connect the negative battery cable. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Starter Solenoid: Locations Powertrain Component Views Front of the Engine (LS4) 1 - G111 2 - Starter Solenoid 3 - X100 4 - Starter 5 - Cable Pro fuse 6 - G113 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14722 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14723 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14724 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14725 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14726 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14727 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14728 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14729 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14730 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14731 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14732 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14733 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14734 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14735 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14736 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14737 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14738 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14739 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14740 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14741 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14742 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14743 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14744 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14745 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14746 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14747 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14748 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14749 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14750 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14751 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14752 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14753 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14754 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14755 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14756 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14757 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14758 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14759 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14760 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14761 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14762 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14763 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14764 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14765 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14766 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14767 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14768 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14769 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14770 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14771 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14772 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14773 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14774 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14775 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14776 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14777 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14778 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14779 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14780 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14781 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14782 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14783 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14784 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14785 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14786 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14787 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14788 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14789 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14790 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14791 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14792 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14793 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14794 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14795 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14796 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14797 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14798 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14799 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14800 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14801 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14802 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14803 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14804 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14805 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14806 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14807 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14808 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14809 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14810 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14811 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14812 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14813 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14814 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14815 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14816 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14817 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14818 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14819 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14820 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14821 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14822 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14823 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14824 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14825 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14826 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14827 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14828 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14829 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14830 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14831 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14832 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14833 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14834 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14835 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14836 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14837 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14838 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14839 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14840 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14841 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14842 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14843 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14844 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14845 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14846 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14847 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14848 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14849 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Accessory Power Outlet - Center Console 1 (with Floor Console) Accessory Power Outlet - Center Console 2 (with Floor Console) Accessory Power Outlet - Center Console Compartment (with Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14850 Accessory Power Outlet - Center Seat (without Floor Console) Accessory Power Outlet - I/P 1 (without Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14851 Accessory Power Outlet - I/P 2 (without Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14852 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Cigar Lighter Receptacle or 12-Volt Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement Tools Required J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block. 2. Remove the receptacle: 1. Look into the receptacle. There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the front of the receptacle. The J 42059 pushes the plastic latches from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out. 2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the J 42059 into the tab window. The J 42059 will not fit straight into the receptacle. Angle the J 42059 slightly for insertion into the receptacle. 3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window. You must move the J 42059 handle toward horizontal to engage the other tab window. 4. Use the J 42059 to pull the receptacle straight out. 3. If J 42059 tool fails to release the lighter socket from the retainer, perform the following alternate method: 1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket. 2. Remove the plastic latches in the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows. 3. Use the J 42059 as directed above to remove the socket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14853 1. Route the connector through the retainer. Align the accessory power receptacle retainer to the slot in the opening. 2. Install the retainer by pressing into place fully seated. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the receptacle. 4. Align the tabs on the receptacle to the slots in the retainer. Install the accessory power receptacle by pressing into place until fully seated. 5. Install the accessory power receptacle fuse. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14854 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Tools and Equipment Special Tools Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Branching Point > Component Information > Diagrams > JX205 Branching Point: Diagrams JX205 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX205 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Branching Point > Component Information > Diagrams > JX205 > Page 14859 Branching Point: Diagrams JX206 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX206 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Branching Point > Component Information > Diagrams > JX205 > Page 14860 Branching Point: Diagrams JX207 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX207 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Circuit Breaker 1 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Circuit Breaker 2 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 14864 Circuit Breaker 3 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 14873 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 14879 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Fuse: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Bulletin No.: 07-08-43-004C Date: November 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: EI07089 - Windshield Washer Inoperative, Poor Performance (Replace WSW Fuse) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include 2008 Impala. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-43-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customer's may comment that the windshield washer pump operation is intermittent. Correction DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP. Engineering has determined that windshield washer pump intermittent operation or poor performance conditions may be corrected by replacing the current 10 amp WSW fuse with a 15 amp fuse. The WSW (windshield washer) fuse is located in the UBEC (underhood bussed electrical center). Be sure to update the UBEC fuse label to indicate the use of a 15 amp fuse for the Windshield Washer (WSW). Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance > Page 14888 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance Bulletin No.: 07-08-43-004C Date: November 19, 2007 TECHNICAL Subject: EI07089 - Windshield Washer Inoperative, Poor Performance (Replace WSW Fuse) Models: 2006-2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include 2008 Impala. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-43-004B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customer's may comment that the windshield washer pump operation is intermittent. Correction DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP. Engineering has determined that windshield washer pump intermittent operation or poor performance conditions may be corrected by replacing the current 10 amp WSW fuse with a 15 amp fuse. The WSW (windshield washer) fuse is located in the UBEC (underhood bussed electrical center). Be sure to update the UBEC fuse label to indicate the use of a 15 amp fuse for the Windshield Washer (WSW). Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-08-43-004C > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Inoperative/Poor Performance > Page 14894 Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-08-45-002 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 08-08-64-014 > Aug > 08 > A/C - Windows Fog Up With Blower Motor ON Cowl: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Windows Fog Up With Blower Motor ON TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-64-014 Date: August 22, 2008 Subject: Windows Fog Up When HVAC Blower Is Turned Up (Install Water Preventative Filter In Plenum Area) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala Built Prior to 5/1/08 Condition Some customers may comment that the windows fog up when the HVAC blower speed is increased. Cause This condition may be caused by water from the drain hole under the plenum area getting drawn into the HVAC system. Correction Important: DO NOT replace any HVAC components. Technicians are to install a water preventative filter in the plenum area using the procedure below. 1. Set the windshield wiper arms so they are not in the park position (half way preferably). 2. Remove the left air inlet grille panel. Refer to Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement in SI. 3. Remove the plenum water deflector. 4. Assemble the bolt (1), clip (2) and filter (3) as shown. 5. Install the filter and secure the clip (1) as shown. 6. Tighten the bolt. 7. Reinstall the plenum water deflector and the air inlet grille. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 08-08-64-014 > Aug > 08 > A/C - Windows Fog Up With Blower Motor ON > Page 14904 Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 08-08-64-014 > Aug > 08 > A/C - Windows Fog Up With Blower Motor ON > Page 14910 Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuse: Locations Instrument Panel Fuse Block INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK The fuse block is located on the passenger side of the vehicle in the carpet molding. Remove the fuse block door to access the fuses. FUSES ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... USAGE PWR/SEAT .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... Power Seats PWR/WNDW ....................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... Power Window RAP ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................... Retained Accessory Power HTD/SEAT .......................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... Heated Seats AUX ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Auxiliary Outlets AMP ............................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Amplifier S/ROOF ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................ Sunroof XM ......................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... XM Radio CNSTR ............................................................................................................................... .................................................................................. Canister DR/LCK .............................................. ............................................................................................................................................................ Door Locks Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 14913 PWR/MIR ............................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... Power Mirrors AIRBAG ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................... Airbags TRUNK ................................................................................................................................................ .................................................................... Trunk TRUNK ................................................................. ......................................................................................................................................... Trunk Relay Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 14914 Fuse: Locations I/P Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 14915 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 14916 Fuse: Locations Underhood Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 14917 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel Fuse Block > Page 14918 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14921 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14922 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14923 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14924 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14925 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14926 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14927 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14928 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14929 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14930 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14931 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14932 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14933 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14934 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14935 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14936 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14937 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14938 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14939 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14940 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14941 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14942 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14943 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14944 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14945 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14946 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14947 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14948 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14949 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14950 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14951 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14952 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14953 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14954 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14955 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14956 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14957 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14958 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14959 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14960 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14961 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14962 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14963 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14964 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14965 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14966 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14967 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14968 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14969 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14970 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14971 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14972 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14973 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14974 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14975 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14976 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14977 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14978 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14979 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14980 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14981 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14982 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14983 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14984 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14985 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14986 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14987 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14988 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14989 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14990 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14991 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14992 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14993 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14994 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14995 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14996 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14997 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14998 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14999 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15000 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15001 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15002 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15003 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15004 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15005 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15006 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15007 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15008 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15009 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15010 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15011 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15012 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15013 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15014 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15015 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15016 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15017 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15018 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15019 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15020 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15021 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15022 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15023 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15024 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15025 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15026 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15027 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15028 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15029 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15030 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15031 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15032 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15033 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15034 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15035 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15036 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15037 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15038 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15039 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15040 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15041 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15042 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15043 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15044 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15045 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15046 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15047 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block Fuse: Application and ID Underhood Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 15050 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 15051 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 15052 Fuse: Application and ID I/P Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Underhood Fuse Block > Page 15053 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel Harness - Rear of the Instrument Panel Carrier 1 - J282 2 - J203 3 - J239 4 - J250 5 - J218 6 - Instrument Panel Carrier 7 - J259 8 - J269 9 - Fuse Block - Auxiliary Right Front of the Passenger Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15058 1 - Dash Panel 2 - Fuse Block - Instrument Panel 3 - X303 4 - G302 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15059 Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Battery Attachments (LZE/LZ4/LZ8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15060 1 - G102 2 - X105 3 - Fuse Block - Underhood Positive Battery Cable Terminal 4 - Battery 5 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15061 Fuse Block: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15064 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15065 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15066 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15067 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15068 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15069 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15070 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15071 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15072 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15073 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15074 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15075 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15076 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15077 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15078 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15079 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15080 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15081 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15082 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15083 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15084 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15085 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15086 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15087 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15088 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15089 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15090 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15091 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15092 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15093 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15094 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15095 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15096 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15097 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15098 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15099 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15100 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15101 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15102 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15103 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15104 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15105 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15106 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15107 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15108 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15109 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15110 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15111 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15112 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15113 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15114 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15115 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15116 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15117 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15118 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15119 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15120 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15121 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15122 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15123 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15124 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15125 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15126 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15127 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15128 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15129 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15130 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15131 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15132 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15133 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15134 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15135 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15136 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15137 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15138 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15139 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15140 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15141 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15142 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15143 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15144 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15145 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15146 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15147 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15148 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15149 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15150 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15151 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15152 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15153 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15154 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15155 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15156 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15157 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15158 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15159 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15160 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15161 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15162 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15163 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15164 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15165 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15166 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15167 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15168 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15169 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15170 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15171 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15172 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15173 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15174 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15175 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15176 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15177 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15178 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15179 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15180 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15181 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15182 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15183 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15184 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15185 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15186 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15187 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15188 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15189 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15190 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15191 Fuse Block: Connector Views Underhood Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - Underhood - Top View Fuse Block - Underhood - Bottom View Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15192 Fuse Block - Underhood X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15193 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15194 Fuse Block - Underhood X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15195 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15196 Fuse Block - Underhood X3 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15197 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15198 Fuse Block - Underhood X4 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15199 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15200 I/P Fuse Block Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P Top View Fuse Block - I/P X1 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15201 Fuse Block - I/P X2 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15202 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) Fuse Block: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) > Page 15205 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Accessory Wiring Junction Block Replacement Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover (1). 2. Disconnect the positive battery cable from junction box. 3. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). 4. Unlock the tabs on the electrical center board. 5. Lift up on the electrical center board. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) > Page 15206 6. Remove the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center bracket (2) to vehicle. Installation Procedure Notice: Refer to Fastener Notice. 1. Install fasteners (1) securing the electrical center (2) to vehicle. Tighten the fasteners to 10 N.m (86 lb in). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Electrical Center or Junction Block Replacement - Right Side (Impala) > Page 15207 2. Install the fasteners (1) securing the electrical center board (2). Tighten the fasteners to 7 N.m (62 lb in). 3. Connect the positive battery cable. 4. Install the electrical center cover (1). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15212 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15213 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15214 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15215 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15216 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15217 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 15226 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09-08-49-005 > Mar > 09 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings TECHNICAL Bulletin No.:09-08-49-005 Date: March 27, 2009 Subject: Fuel Gage Reads Inaccurate or Empty, Low Fuel Indicator Illuminated, DTCs P0461 and/or P0463 Set (Check Terminals in Connector X405) Models: 2008-2009 Buick Allure (Canada Only), Allure Super (Canada Only), LaCrosse, LaCrosse Super 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Impala SS Condition Some customers may comment that the low fuel indicator comes on and the fuel gage reads empty when there is fuel in the tank. Other comments may be that the fuel gage is inaccurate. Upon further inspection, it may be found that DTC P0461 and/or P0463 have been set. Cause This condition may be due to poor terminal tension at connector X405, resulting in resistance at the affected circuits. Correction Perform a pin drag test on all female terminals within connector X405. If a terminal is found to be loose or have poor tension, replace the affected terminal. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 15236 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 09-08-49-005 > Mar > 09 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings TECHNICAL Bulletin No.:09-08-49-005 Date: March 27, 2009 Subject: Fuel Gage Reads Inaccurate or Empty, Low Fuel Indicator Illuminated, DTCs P0461 and/or P0463 Set (Check Terminals in Connector X405) Models: 2008-2009 Buick Allure (Canada Only), Allure Super (Canada Only), LaCrosse, LaCrosse Super 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Impala SS Condition Some customers may comment that the low fuel indicator comes on and the fuel gage reads empty when there is fuel in the tank. Other comments may be that the fuel gage is inaccurate. Upon further inspection, it may be found that DTC P0461 and/or P0463 have been set. Cause This condition may be due to poor terminal tension at connector X405, resulting in resistance at the affected circuits. Correction Perform a pin drag test on all female terminals within connector X405. If a terminal is found to be loose or have poor tension, replace the affected terminal. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams X100 - X199 X100 Inline Harness Connector End Views X100 Engine Harness to Transmission Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15243 X101 Inline Harness Connector End Views X101 I/P Harness to Engine Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15244 X105 Inline Harness Connector End Views X105 Battery Harness to I/P Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15245 X107 Inline Harness Connector End Views X107 Engine Harness to Front Ignition Coil Harness (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15246 X108 Inline Harness Connector End Views X108 Engine Harness to Rear Ignition Coil Harness (LS4) X111 Inline Harness Connector End Views Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15247 X111 I/P Harness to Engine Harness X116 Inline Harness Connector End Views X116 Crankshaft/Knock Sensor Jumper Harness to Engine Harness (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15248 X120 Inline Harness Connector End Views X120 I/P Harness to Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15249 X122 Inline Harness Connector End Views X122 Forward Lamp Harness to Forward Lamp Harness (9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15250 X123 Inline Harness Connector End Views X123 I/P Harness to the Grille Lamp Jumper Harness (6J3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15251 X141 Inline Harness Connector End Views X141 Forward Lamp Harness to Left Front Headlamp Assembly Harness X142 Inline Harness Connector End Views X142 Forward Lamp Harness to Right Front Headlamp Assembly Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15252 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15253 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams X200 - X299 X200 Inline Harness Connector End Views X200 Body Harness to I/P Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15254 X200 Body Harness To I/P Harness (Pin A1 To C8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15255 X200 Body Harness To I/P Harness (Pin C9 To D8) X201 Inline Harness Connector End Views X201 Steering Column Harness to I/P Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15256 X203 Inline Harness Connector End Views X203 I/P Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15257 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15258 X203 I/P Harness To Body Harness (Pin A1 To C4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15259 X203 I/P Harness To Body Harness (Pin C5 To D8) X208 Inline Harness Connector End Views X208 SEO Auxiliary Harness to Body Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15260 X210 Inline Harness Connector End Views X210 I/P Harness to HVAC Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15261 X223 Inline Harness Connector End Views X223 Body Harness to Body Harness (9C1, 9C3) X250 Inline Harness Connector End Views X250 SIR Coil to the Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15262 X266 Inline Harness Connector End Views X266 I/P Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15263 X267 Inline Harness Connector End Views X267 I/P Harness to I/P Harness(9C1, 9C3, without WX7) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15264 X267A Inline Harness Connector End Views X267A I/P Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3, with WX7) X267B Inline Harness Connector End Views X267B I/P Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3, with WX7) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15265 X275 Inline Harness Connector End Views X275 SIR Coil to Steering Column Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15266 X277 Inline Harness Connector End Views X277 SIR Coil to Steering Wheel Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15267 X278 Inline Harness Connector End Views X278 Inflatable Restraint I/P Module Jumper Harness to the Body Harness X297 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15268 Inline Harness Connector End Views X297 I/P Harness to Grille Lamp Jumper Harness (9C1, 9C3, 6J3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15269 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams X300 - X399 X301 Inline Harness Connector End Views X301 Body Harness to Left Front Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15270 X301 Body Harness To Left Front Door Harness (Pin A1 To D3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15271 X301 Body Harness To Left Front Door Harness (Pin D4 To D8) X302 Inline Harness Connector End Views X302 Body Harness to Right Front Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15272 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15273 X302 Body Harness To Right Front Door Harness (Pin A1 To D6) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15274 X302 Body Harness To Right Front Door Harness (Pin D7 To D8) X311 Inline Harness Connector End Views X311 Body Harness to Left Front Seat Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15275 X313 Inline Harness Connector End Views X313 Body Harness to Right Front Seat Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15276 X322 Inline Harness Connector End Views X322 Body Harness to Roof Wiring Provision Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15277 X340 Inline Harness Connector End Views X340 Console Harness to Body Harness (without Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15278 X340 Console Harness to Body Harness (Floor Console) X355 Inline Harness Connector End Views X355 Body Harness to Left Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15279 X356 Inline Harness Connector End Views X356 Body Harness to Right Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15280 X360 Inline Harness Connector End Views X360 Body Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15281 X362 Inline Harness Connector End Views X362 Body Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15282 X398 Inline Harness Connector End Views X398 Roof Harness to Sunroof Harness (CF5) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15283 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams X400 - X499 X401 Inline Harness Connector End Views X401 Rear Body Harness to Left Tail Lamp Harness X402 Inline Harness Connector End Views X402 Rear Body Harness to Right Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15284 X405 Inline Harness Connector End Views X405 Rear Chassis Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15285 X406 Inline Harness Connector End Views X406 Body Harness to Rear Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15286 X409 Inline Harness Connector End Views X409 Emergency Vehicle Rear Compartment Lid Lamps Harness to Body Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15287 X412 Inline Harness Connector End Views X412 Roof Rail Module - Left Jumper Harness to Body Harness (AY1) X414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15288 Inline Harness Connector End Views X414 Roof Rail Module - Right Jumper Harness to Body Harness (AY1) X490 Inline Harness Connector End Views X490 Roof Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15289 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15290 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams X100 Inline Harness Connector End Views X100 Engine Harness to Transmission Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15291 X101 Inline Harness Connector End Views X101 I/P Harness to Engine Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15292 X105 Inline Harness Connector End Views X105 Battery Harness to I/P Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15293 X107 Inline Harness Connector End Views X107 Engine Harness to Front Ignition Coil Harness (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15294 X108 Inline Harness Connector End Views X108 Engine Harness to Rear Ignition Coil Harness (LS4) X111 Inline Harness Connector End Views Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15295 X111 I/P Harness to Engine Harness X116 Inline Harness Connector End Views X116 Crankshaft/Knock Sensor Jumper Harness to Engine Harness (LS4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15296 X120 Inline Harness Connector End Views X120 I/P Harness to Forward Lamp Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15297 X122 Inline Harness Connector End Views X122 Forward Lamp Harness to Forward Lamp Harness (9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15298 X123 Inline Harness Connector End Views X123 I/P Harness to the Grille Lamp Jumper Harness (6J3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15299 X141 Inline Harness Connector End Views X141 Forward Lamp Harness to Left Front Headlamp Assembly Harness X142 Inline Harness Connector End Views X142 Forward Lamp Harness to Right Front Headlamp Assembly Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15300 X200 Inline Harness Connector End Views X200 Body Harness to I/P Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15301 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15302 X200 Body Harness To I/P Harness (Pin A1 To C8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15303 X200 Body Harness To I/P Harness (Pin C9 To D8) X201 Inline Harness Connector End Views X201 Steering Column Harness to I/P Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15304 X203 Inline Harness Connector End Views X203 I/P Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15305 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15306 X203 I/P Harness To Body Harness (Pin A1 To C4) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15307 X203 I/P Harness To Body Harness (Pin C5 To D8) X208 Inline Harness Connector End Views X208 SEO Auxiliary Harness to Body Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15308 X210 Inline Harness Connector End Views X210 I/P Harness to HVAC Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15309 X223 Inline Harness Connector End Views X223 Body Harness to Body Harness (9C1, 9C3) X250 Inline Harness Connector End Views X250 SIR Coil to the Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15310 X266 Inline Harness Connector End Views X266 I/P Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15311 X267 Inline Harness Connector End Views X267 I/P Harness to I/P Harness(9C1, 9C3, without WX7) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15312 X267A Inline Harness Connector End Views X267A I/P Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3, with WX7) X267B Inline Harness Connector End Views X267B I/P Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3, with WX7) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15313 X275 Inline Harness Connector End Views X275 SIR Coil to Steering Column Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15314 X277 Inline Harness Connector End Views X277 SIR Coil to Steering Wheel Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15315 X278 Inline Harness Connector End Views X278 Inflatable Restraint I/P Module Jumper Harness to the Body Harness X297 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15316 Inline Harness Connector End Views X297 I/P Harness to Grille Lamp Jumper Harness (9C1, 9C3, 6J3) X301 Inline Harness Connector End Views X301 Body Harness to Left Front Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15317 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15318 X301 Body Harness To Left Front Door Harness (Pin A1 To D3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15319 X301 Body Harness To Left Front Door Harness (Pin D4 To D8) X302 Inline Harness Connector End Views X302 Body Harness to Right Front Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15320 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15321 X302 Body Harness To Right Front Door Harness (Pin A1 To D6) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15322 X302 Body Harness To Right Front Door Harness (Pin D7 To D8) X311 Inline Harness Connector End Views X311 Body Harness to Left Front Seat Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15323 X313 Inline Harness Connector End Views X313 Body Harness to Right Front Seat Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15324 X322 Inline Harness Connector End Views X322 Body Harness to Roof Wiring Provision Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15325 X340 Inline Harness Connector End Views X340 Console Harness to Body Harness (without Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15326 X340 Console Harness to Body Harness (Floor Console) X355 Inline Harness Connector End Views X355 Body Harness to Left Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15327 X356 Inline Harness Connector End Views X356 Body Harness to Right Rear Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15328 X360 Inline Harness Connector End Views X360 Body Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15329 X362 Inline Harness Connector End Views X362 Body Harness to I/P Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15330 X398 Inline Harness Connector End Views X398 Roof Harness to Sunroof Harness (CF5) X401 Inline Harness Connector End Views Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15331 X401 Rear Body Harness to Left Tail Lamp Harness X402 Inline Harness Connector End Views X402 Rear Body Harness to Right Tail Lamp Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15332 X405 Inline Harness Connector End Views X405 Rear Chassis Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15333 X406 Inline Harness Connector End Views X406 Body Harness to Rear Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15334 X409 Inline Harness Connector End Views X409 Emergency Vehicle Rear Compartment Lid Lamps Harness to Body Harness (9C1, 9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15335 X412 Inline Harness Connector End Views X412 Roof Rail Module - Left Jumper Harness to Body Harness (AY1) X414 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15336 Inline Harness Connector End Views X414 Roof Rail Module - Right Jumper Harness to Body Harness (AY1) X490 Inline Harness Connector End Views X490 Roof Harness to Body Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15337 X500 - X599 Inline Harness Connector End Views X503 Left Front Door Harness to Left Front Door Trim Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15338 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15339 X503 Left Front Door Harness To Left Front Door Trim Harness (Pin A1 To D6) X503 Left Front Door Harness To Left Front Door Trim Harness (Pin D7 To D8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > X100 - X199 > Page 15340 X600 - X699 Inline Harness Connector End Views X604 Right Front Door Trim Harness to Right Front Door Harness Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Important: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 15345 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Tools Required J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Important: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Notice: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 3. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 15346 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Removal Procedure 1. Locate the relay. 2. Remove any fasteners which hold the relay in place. 3. Remove any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. Important: Use care when removing a relay in a wiring harness when the relay is secured by fasteners or tape. 4. Separate the relay (1) from the wire harness connector (2). Installation Procedure 1. Connect the relay (1) to the wire harness connector (2). 2. Install any connector position assurance (CPA) devices or secondary locks. 3. Install the relay using any fasteners or tape that originally held the relay in place. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 15355 Power Distribution Relay: Service and Repair Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center) Tools Required J 43244 Relay Puller Pliers Removal Procedure 1. Remove the electrical center cover. 2. Locate the relay. Important: * Always note the orientation of the relay. * Ensure that the electrical center is secure, as not to put added stress on the wires or terminals. Using the J 43244 (1) position the tool on opposing corners of the relay (2). Notice: Use J43244 to pull the relay straight out from the electrical center terminals. The use of pliers or a flat bladed tool could damage the electrical center. 3. Remove the relay (2) from the electrical center. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) > Page 15356 1. Install the relay (2) in the same position as removed. 2. Install the electrical center cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 15365 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 15366 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 15367 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 15372 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-49-005 > Mar > 09 > Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings TECHNICAL Bulletin No.:09-08-49-005 Date: March 27, 2009 Subject: Fuel Gage Reads Inaccurate or Empty, Low Fuel Indicator Illuminated, DTCs P0461 and/or P0463 Set (Check Terminals in Connector X405) Models: 2008-2009 Buick Allure (Canada Only), Allure Super (Canada Only), LaCrosse, LaCrosse Super 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Impala SS Condition Some customers may comment that the low fuel indicator comes on and the fuel gage reads empty when there is fuel in the tank. Other comments may be that the fuel gage is inaccurate. Upon further inspection, it may be found that DTC P0461 and/or P0463 have been set. Cause This condition may be due to poor terminal tension at connector X405, resulting in resistance at the affected circuits. Correction Perform a pin drag test on all female terminals within connector X405. If a terminal is found to be loose or have poor tension, replace the affected terminal. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-06-04-039 > Aug > 08 > Electrical/Fuel Systems - Crank But No Start Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical/Fuel Systems - Crank But No Start TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-06-04-039 Date: August 07, 2008 Subject: Crank/No Start, Blown Fuel Pump Fuse (Replace Fuse and Repair Wiring Harness) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala, Impala SS Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle cranks but does not start. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the fuel pump fuse being blown or open. Correction Inspect the wire harness under the rear seat for chafing. The affected wire is circuit 120, gray wire, between connectors C200 and C405. If wire chafing is found, reroute the harness away from the area of chafing and repair any damaged circuits per instructions in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 15386 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 15387 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 15388 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15393 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15394 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15395 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15396 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15397 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 15398 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 15403 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-08-49-005 > Mar > 09 > Instruments Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Inaccurate Fuel Gauge Readings TECHNICAL Bulletin No.:09-08-49-005 Date: March 27, 2009 Subject: Fuel Gage Reads Inaccurate or Empty, Low Fuel Indicator Illuminated, DTCs P0461 and/or P0463 Set (Check Terminals in Connector X405) Models: 2008-2009 Buick Allure (Canada Only), Allure Super (Canada Only), LaCrosse, LaCrosse Super 2008-2009 Chevrolet Impala, Impala SS Condition Some customers may comment that the low fuel indicator comes on and the fuel gage reads empty when there is fuel in the tank. Other comments may be that the fuel gage is inaccurate. Upon further inspection, it may be found that DTC P0461 and/or P0463 have been set. Cause This condition may be due to poor terminal tension at connector X405, resulting in resistance at the affected circuits. Correction Perform a pin drag test on all female terminals within connector X405. If a terminal is found to be loose or have poor tension, replace the affected terminal. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-06-04-039 > Aug > 08 > Electrical/Fuel Systems - Crank But No Start Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical/Fuel Systems - Crank But No Start TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-06-04-039 Date: August 07, 2008 Subject: Crank/No Start, Blown Fuel Pump Fuse (Replace Fuse and Repair Wiring Harness) Models: 2006-2008 Chevrolet Impala, Impala SS Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle cranks but does not start. Cause The cause of this condition may be due to the fuel pump fuse being blown or open. Correction Inspect the wire harness under the rear seat for chafing. The affected wire is circuit 120, gray wire, between connectors C200 and C405. If wire chafing is found, reroute the harness away from the area of chafing and repair any damaged circuits per instructions in SI. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-08-44-008A > Apr > 08 > Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting Radio Receiver: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-08-44-008A Date: April 25, 2008 Subject: XM Radio Does Not Retain Station Setting From Previous Key Cycle and Changes To Channel 1, The Preview Channel, at Vehicle Start-up (Replace Digital Radio Receiver Assembly) Models: 2008 Buick Enclave, Lucerne 2008 Cadillac DTS, Escalade Models, SRX 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Equinox, Impala, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe 2007-2008 GMC Acadia 2008 GMC Sierra, Yukon Models 2008 Pontiac Torrent 2008 HUMMER H2, H2 SUT 2007-2008 Saturn OUTLOOK 2008 Saturn VUE 2008 Suzuki XL-7 with XM Satellite Radio (RPO U2K) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the Suzuki XL-7 model. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-08-44-008 (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment that the XM radio does not retain the station setting from the previous key cycle and changes to channel 1 at vehicle start-up. After start-up, the XM radio will be on the preview channel 1. Cause A software anomaly in the Digital Radio Receiver Assembly may cause this condition. Correction Technicians are to replace the Digital Radio Receiver Assembly with an updated design part. Refer to the Digital Radio Receiver Replacement procedure in SI. Also refer to the Digital Radio Receiver Setup procedure in SI for additional information. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-08-44-008A > Apr > 08 > Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting > Page 15417 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-08-44-008A > Apr > 08 > Audio System - XM Radio(R) Won't Retain Station Setting > Page 15423 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Accessory Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Relay: Locations Electrical Center Identification Views Fuse Block - I/P - Label Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15432 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15433 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15434 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15435 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15436 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15437 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15438 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15439 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15440 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15441 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15442 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15443 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15444 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15445 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15446 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15447 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15448 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15449 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15450 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15451 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15452 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15453 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15454 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15455 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15456 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15457 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15458 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15459 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15460 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15461 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15462 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15463 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15464 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15465 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15466 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15467 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15468 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15469 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15470 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15471 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15472 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15473 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15474 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15475 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15476 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15477 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15478 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15479 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15480 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15481 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15482 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15483 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15484 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15485 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15486 Connector Position Assurance Locks Connector Position Assurance Locks The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of the connector. CPAs are used in various connectors throughout the vehicle. CPAs are also used in all SIR system electrical connectors. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals, of the connector. Connector Repairs Connector Repairs Connector Repairs contains a list of all connector repairs. The connector repairs are listed by the connector manufacturer and then by connector type. If the technician cannot identify the manufacturer of the connector, refer to Identifying Connectors below. Knowing the connector manufacturer will assist in finding the correct connector repair from the following list: * Connector Position Assurance Locks * Terminal Position Assurance Locks * Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (ECM) * Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) * Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) * Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) * Repairing Connector Terminals Connector Anatomy 1 - Connector Positive Assurance (CPA) 2 - Assist Lever 3 - Wiredress Cover 4 - Seal Strain/Relief 5 - Slide Left Hand 6 - Slide Right Hand 7 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 8 - Terminal Positive Assurance (TPA) 9 - Connector Seal 10 - Connector Housing 11 - Inner Connector Identifying Connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15487 Knowing the connector manufacturer is helpful when trying to locating the correct connector repair procedure. There are many different connector designs used on GM vehicles and it is sometimes difficult to identify the connector manufacturer. The information in this document should help with the identification of connector manufactures. The following connector manufacturers make most of the connectors found in GM vehicles: * AFL/EPC (Alcoa Fujikura Ltd./Engineered Plastics Components) * Bosch * Delphi * FCI (Framatome Connectors International) * JAE (Japan Aviation Electronics) * JST (Japan Solderless Terminals) * Kostel * Molex * Sumitomo * Tyco/AMP * Yazaki Identifying the manufacturer of a connector is often difficult. When trying to determine the manufacturer of a connector, look for specific identifying marks that are unique to that connector supplier. Most of these identify marks are hard to find or see. Check the connector carefully and refer to the information below for pictures and descriptions of connector identification markings. * Most of AFLs connectors have EPC on their connector body. Some of the smaller connectors will not have any markings on them. * In some cases Bosch will actually be printed on the connector. If Bosch does not appear on the connector, look for the Bosch logo. The Bosch logo is a circle with a blunted arrow inside. This logo can appear anywhere on the connector and is often very small. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15488 * In some cases Delphi will actually be printed on the connector. If Delphi is not printed on the connector, look for PED. In both cases there is no specific orientation for Delphi or PED and they can appear anywhere on the connector. * FCI connectors may have the FCI logo on their connectors. The logo is the letters FCI with an "A" above it. * JAE connector have JAE in small letters on their connectors. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15489 * JST connectors have JST in small letters on their connectors, similar to that above. The location of the logo will vary with the connector size and style. * Kostel has an "LK" with a circle around it. These connector are usually used as a transmissions connection. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15490 * Most Molex connectors will have the Molex logo on the dresscover of the connector. In some cases the connectors may have MX followed by another letter. The third letter indicates where the connector was made. A connector with MXD is a Molex connector made in Detroit. Sumitomo has a unique symbol on their connector and possibly a part number. The symbol is similar to that of a diamond lying on its side, similar to that shown. The logo could appear anywhere but the most common place is at the wire side of the housing. * Tyco/AMP has many different and unique connector designs. Some may or may not have identifiable marks on them. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15491 * Yazaki has a wedge or arrow shape, similar to that shown. Delphi Connectors (Micro .64) Delphi Connectors (Micro.64) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro.64 connectors. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. The lever lock may be located on the top or sides of the wire dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15492 View of a typical Micro 64 connector. Depress the lock and pull the lever over and past the lock. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15493 View of the connector when released from the component. View of another type of Micro 64 connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15494 Depress the locks that are located on both sides of the wiredress cover and pull the lever over and past the locks. View of the connector when released from the component. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the front of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool push down on one of the locking tabs and pull the cover up until the dress cover releases. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15495 4. Once the front 2 locks are unlocked, lift the front of the dress cover and pull it forward. Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the small slot on the TPA and pushing down until the TPA releases. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. Important: Be careful not to angle or rock the J 38125-21 tool when inserting it into the connector or the tool may break. 6. Insert the J 38125-21 (GM P/N 15381651-2) tool into the round canal between the terminals cavities at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Follow the steps below in order to repair Micro 64 connector terminals. The Micro 64 connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-64 (M jaw) was developed to crimp Micro 64 terminals. The J 38125-64 crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. The J 38125-64 crimping tool is also designed to crimp both the wire and the insulation at the same time. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro 64 terminals. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 1. Cut the wire as close to the damaged terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15496 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert terminal into the appropriate terminal holder until it hits bottom and stops. The correct terminal holder is determined by the wire size. Also ensure that the terminals wings are pointing towards the former on the tool and the release locator. 5. Insert the stripped cable into the terminal. Insulation should be visible on both sides of the terminal insulation wings. 6. Compress the handles until the ratchet automatically releases. 7. Place the terminal into the appropriate cavity and assemble the connector. Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Delphi Connectors (Micro-Pack 100W) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W connectors. These connectors are very similar but use different terminals and have some minor physical differences also. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15497 The first connector design of the Micro-Pack 100W (1) has a white connector interface that holds the terminals. The second design of the Micro-Pack 100W (2) has a gray interface to hold the terminals. Also, the first design has terminal cavities that are further apart (3 mm centerline) and offset from the other row of terminal cavities in the connector. The second design has terminals cavities that are closer together (2.54 mm centerline) and aligned vertically. One other way to identify the second design is the thin strip of material that runs along the outside of the cavities. Important: There are 2 styles of Micro-Pack 100W terminals which are very similar. Ensure that you have the correct terminal before crimping the new terminal to the wire. The first design connector uses the longer terminal (1) that has a raised area in front of the recess in the terminal. The second design connector uses the shorter terminal without the raised area. Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from Micro-Pack 100W connectors. Some Micro-Pack 100W connector disassembly procedures will vary. Use this procedure as a guide. 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15498 2. Locate the nose piece locking tabs that are positioned on the side of the connector nose piece. The connector nose piece acts as a terminal positive assurance (TPA) and may be referred to as such. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to push in one of the locking tabs while gently pulling on the same side of the nose piece. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other locking tab and remove the nose piece. 5. Remove the wire dress cover. The following is a general procedure for wire dress cover removal. Use this procedure as a guide, some dress cover removal procedures may vary. 6. Use fingers to squeeze the 2 locking legs of the cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15499 7. Apply pressure and gently rock the cover until one locking leg is unseated. 8. Continue to apply pressure and rock the cover until the second locking leg is unseated. Repeat procedure for the other side of the dress cover and remove the cover. 9. Use J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) to gently lift the terminal retaining tab while gently pulling the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. If the terminal is severely bent or damaged, it may be possible on some connectors to push the wire out of the front of the connector instead of Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15500 pulling it through. This will prevent damage to the internal seals of the connector. Once the terminal is pushed out of the connector, cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible and pull the wire through the connector. Terminal Repair Procedure The Micro-Pack 100W connectors have small terminals that are difficult to handle and hold when crimping. In order to aid the technician when crimping these terminals, a new crimping tool was developed. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool was developed to crimp Micro-Pack 100W terminals. The J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool has a terminal holding block that will hold the terminal in place while the terminal is being crimped. After the terminal is removed from the connector perform the following procedure in order to repair Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. Important: After cutting the damaged terminal from the wire, determine if the remaining wire is long enough to reach the connector without putting a strain on the wire. If the wire is not long enough, splice a small length of the same gage wire to the existing wire, then crimp the new terminal on the added wire. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Depress the spring loaded locator of the J 38125-101 (W jaw) crimping tool until the terminal holder is completely visible. 4. Insert the terminal into the crimp tool until the core wings are flush with the anvil on the crimp tool. Be sure that the wings are pointed toward the crimp tool former and release the spring locator. The locator will hold the terminal in place. Inspect the alignment of the terminal wings with the crimp tool former. If the terminal wings are wider than the crimp tool former, remove the terminal and bend the terminal wings in slightly. 5. Place stripped wire into terminal. 6. Crimp the new terminal to the wire. If a jam occurs, press the emergency release to open applicator. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15501 After the terminal is crimped to the wire perform the following procedure in order to replace Micro-Pack 100 terminals. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the Terminal Removal Procedure. Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Pull To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal If the terminal is visibly damaged or is suspected of having a faulty connection, the terminal should be replaced. Follow the steps below in order to repair pull-to-seat connectors: 1. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) device and/or the secondary lock. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component or separate the connectors for in-line connectors. 3. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device. 4. Insert the proper pick or removal tool into the front of the connector body. Important: On connectors with more than one terminal the service loop may not be large enough to remove the terminal and crimp on a new one. If the terminal wire does not have a large enough service loop for removal, cut the wire 5 cm (2 in) behind the connector before removal. 5. Grasp the wire at the back of the connector body and gently push the terminal out the front of the connector body. Terminal Repair 1. If the wire needed to be cut in order to remove the terminal, gently push a small length of the same size wire through the back of the connector cavity until there is enough wire exposed in order to crimp on a new terminal. If the wire was not cut, cut the existing wire as close to the old terminal as possible. 2. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 3. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 4. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. Terminal Installation 1. Align the terminal and pull the wire from the back of the connector in order to seat the terminal. 2. If necessary, cut the new wire to proper length and splice with existing circuit. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 3. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply dielectric grease to the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15502 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Delphi Connectors (Push To Seat) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Follow the steps below in order to repair push to seat connectors. 1. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) device, the connector position assurance (CPA) device, and/or the secondary lock. 2. Separate the connector halves (1). 3. Use the proper pick or removal tool (1) in order to release the terminal. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 4. Gently pull the cable and the terminal (2) out of the back of the connector. 5. Re-form the locking device if you are going to reuse the terminal (1). 6. To repair the terminal, refer to Terminal Repair. Terminal Repair 1. Slip the cable seal away from the terminal. 2. Cut the wire as close to the terminal as possible. 3. Slip a new cable seal onto the wire. 4. Strip 5 mm (3/16 in) of insulation from the wire. 5. Crimp a new terminal to the wire. 6. Solder the crimp with rosin core solder. 7. Slide the cable seal toward the terminal. 8. Crimp the cable seal and the insulation. 9. If the connector is outside of the passenger compartment, apply grease to the connector. Reinstalling Terminal Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15503 1. In order to reuse a terminal or lead assembly, refer to Wiring Repairs. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 2. Ensure that the cable seal is kept on the terminal side of the splice. 3. Insert the lead from the back until it catches. 4. Install the TPA, CPA, and/or the secondary locks. Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Delphi Connectors (Weather Pack) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The following is the proper procedure for the repair of Weather Pack(R) Connectors. 1. Separate the connector halves (1). 2. Open the secondary lock. A secondary lock aids in terminal retention and is usually molded to the connector (1). 3. Grasp the wire and push the terminal to the forward most position. Hold the wire in this position. 4. Insert the Weather Pack(R) terminal removal tool J 38125-10A (GM P/N 12014012-1) into the front (mating end) of the connector cavity until it rests on the cavity shoulder (1). 5. Gently pull on the wire to remove the terminal through the back of the connector (2). Important: Never use force to remove a terminal from a connector. 6. Inspect the terminal and connector for damage. Repair as necessary. 7. Reform the lock tang (2) and reset terminal in connector body. 8. Close secondary locks and join connector halves. 9. Verify that circuit is complete and working satisfactorily. 10. Perform system check. Delphi Connectors (12 Way) Delphi Connectors (12-Way) Special Tools J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15504 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Remove the connector position assurance (CPA) and slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15505 4. Release the lower wire dress cover locking tab. 5. Release the upper wire dress cover locking tab. 6. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15506 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 7. Remove the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the TPA. Gently pry the TPA out of the connector. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the locking tabs on both sides of the nose piece. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15507 9. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. FCI Connectors FCI Connectors Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15508 J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. The release tab is located on the top of the wiredress cover. View of connector in released position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15509 4. Use a small flat-blade tool to slide the terminal position assurance (TPA) up one notch on both ends of the connector. The TPA is located underneath the wire dress cover. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15510 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. JST Connectors JST Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, remove the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15511 2. Locate the two indents of the terminal position assurance (TPA) located on the bottom of the connector body. 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully raise the TPA on both sides of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15512 Important: The TPA cannot be removed from the connector while there are terminals present in the connector body. View of the TPA when removed from the connector body. 4. Use the J 38125-12A tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the left side of the terminal release cavity as shown in the graphic. Use the tool to move the terminal release to the right with a gentle prying motion. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15513 5. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Kostal Connectors Kostal Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15514 View of typical connector. View of connector in released position. 1. Locate the assist lever at the back of the connector. Move the assist lever to the rear position. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15515 3. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the dress cover. 4. Slide the dress cover forward and off of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15516 5. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front and rear of the connector. 6. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove the rear TPA from the connector. Important: The front TPA cannot be removed from the connector. Only move it to the release point. 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to move the front TPA to the release position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15517 8. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 9. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Molex Connectors Molex Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15518 2. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 3. The lever should be in the full forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15519 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Remove the dress cover by using a flat bladed tool to release the dress cover locking tabs and lift up on the dress cover. 6. Cut the tie wrap that holds the wires to the connector body. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15520 7. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry one side of the nose piece up to the pre-stage position. When the nose piece is in the pre-staged position, the nose piece will be raised above the connector body the length of the step in the nose piece. 8. Use a small flat-blade tool to pry the other side of the piece to the pre-stage position. If the nose piece is higher than the first step in the nose piece, gently push down on the nose piece until it meets with resistance from the connector body, you should feel the nose piece click into position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15521 9. Insert the J 38125-213 into the small terminal release hole on the nose piece and gently pull on the back of the wire. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Insure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Repairing Connector Terminals Repairing Connector Terminals Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Use the following repair procedures in order to repair the following: * Push to Seat terminals * Pull to Seat terminals Some terminals do not require all of the steps shown. Skip the steps that do not apply for your terminal repair. The J-38125 contains further information. 1. Cut off the terminal between the core and the insulation crimp. Minimize any wire loss. For cable seal terminals, remove the seal. 2. Apply the correct cable seal per gage size of the wire, if used. Slide the seal back along the wire in order to enable insulation removal. 3. Remove the insulation. 4. For sealed terminals only, align the seal with the end of the cable insulation. 5. Position the strip in the terminal. For sealed terminals, position the strip and seal in the terminal. 6. Hand crimp the core wings. 7. Hand crimp the insulation wings. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15522 For sealed terminals, hand crimp the insulation wings around the seal and the cable. 8. Solder all of the hand crimp terminals excepting Micro-Pack 100.64 size. Soldering Micro-Pack 100 World terminals may damage the terminal. Sumitomo Connectors Sumitomo Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15523 3. Remove the dress cover by using a flat-blade tool to release the connector locking tabs and pulling off the dress cover. 4. Relieve the tension on the nose piece retainers by inserting J-38125-12A (12094429) into the single retainer slot on the end of the nose piece and gently prying out the locking tab. Repeat the process for both of the nose piece locking tabs on the opposite side of the nose piece. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15524 5. Once the nose piece retainers are relaxed, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should raise slightly. 6. On the opposite side of the nose piece, use the J-38125-552 (15313892) to pull up the nose piece by hooking the tool under the nose piece and pulling up. The nose piece should release completely. If the nose piece does not come off, repeat the procedure on the opposite side. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15525 7. The illustration above identifies the entry canal where the terminal release tool will be inserted, and the terminal cavity. * Terminal (1) * Entry Canal (2) 8. Insert the J-38125-553 (15315247) tool into the entry canal and pry up on the terminal retainer. The terminal retainer is a small plastic piece on the top of the terminal. The terminal retainer must be held up while the terminal is pulled out of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15526 9. The illustration shows a cutaway view of the connector to aid the technician in releasing the terminal retainer. 10. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Refer to the terminal crimping procedure in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit. Terminal Replacement Procedure After the terminal is crimped to the wire, perform the following procedure in order to replace the terminal. 1. Slide the new terminal into the correct cavity at the back of the connector. 2. Push the terminal into the connector until it locks into place. The new terminal should be even with the other terminals. Ensure that the terminal is locked in place by gently pulling on the wire. 3. To assemble the connector, reverse the connector disassembly procedure. Terminal Position Assurance Locks Terminal Position Assurance Locks The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Tyco/Amp Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (CM 42-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the connector body and pull the CPA out. The CPA is on the wire harness side of connector. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15527 3. Use a small flat-bladed tool to gently pry off the dress cover by inserting the tool under the cover opposite the harness side and prying up. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Using a small flat-bladed tool, push on the side of the nose piece retainer while pushing the nose piece forward with your thumb. This will release the terminal position assurance (TPA). 6. Insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) into the corresponding terminal release cavity. The release cavities are the 2 center rows of cavities on one half of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15528 7. Pressing the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool in the release cavity of the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and crimper in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Door Module) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Side view of connector. View of top of connector. 1. Locate the assist lever and lock on the top of the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15529 2. While depressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock. 3. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15530 4. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the rear of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs. Repeat this procedure for the other locking tab. 5. Once the locking tabs are unlocked, slide the inner connector out of the rear of the connector housing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15531 6. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by pressing on the tang. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tyco/AMP Connectors (Sensor) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15532 2. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) tool into the cavity on the lower right hand face of the connector until the terminal release tang access panel slides over. 3. Ensure that the terminal release tang access panel is in the correct location to access the terminals. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-11A (GM P/N 12094430) into the terminal release tang access slot located behind the access panel of the connector and press down on the terminal while carefully pulling the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tyco/AMP Connectors (0.25 Cap) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component by pressing down on the connector position assurance (CPA). Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15533 2. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting the tool in the small recess on the side of the connector and pushing up until the TPA releases from the connector body. The TPA should raise just slightly. Do not try to remove the TPA. Important: The TPA on this connector cannot be removed unless the terminals are removed first. The TPA will come out of the connector body, but only slightly. When the TPA is slightly raised the terminals can be removed. Using excessive force to remove the TPA with the terminals still in the connector will damage the connector. 3. Repeat the process for the other side of the connector. 4. Ensure that the TPA is in the proper position to remove the terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15534 5. While pushing the terminal forward, insert the J 38125-24 in the release cavity above the terminal you are removing, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to replace the terminal. Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tyco/AMP Connectors (43-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. Slide the lever lock away from the connector body. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs on the dress cover of the connector. Using a small flat-blade tool release all of the locking tabs. 4. Once the locks are unlocked, lift the dress cover off. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15535 Important: Always use care when removing a terminal position assurance (TPA) in order to avoid damaging it. 5. Release the TPA by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the blue locking tabs on both ends of the connector. Gently slide the TPA up to the released position on both ends. 6. For the larger terminals insert the J 38125-13A (GM P/N 12031876-1) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. For the smaller terminals insert the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15536 View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. View of the release tool being used for the larger terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15537 View of the release tool being used for the smaller terminals. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Yazaki Connectors (2-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Insert a small flat-blade tool in the slot below the front loaded terminal position assurance (TPA) and pry up. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15538 3. Remove the TPA by pulling it out of the connector. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-553 (GM P/N 15315247) on a slight upward angle into the cavity below the terminal to be removed. Ensure that the pointed on the end of the tool is facing the bottom of the terminal and it stays in contact with the terminal until it stops on the plastic terminal retainer. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Gently pry the plastic terminal retainer down and carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Yazaki Connectors (16-Way) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. While depressing the lock, pull the two connector halves apart. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15539 2. Use a small flat-blade tool to very carefully push the terminal position assurance (TPA) towards the face of the connector on both sides of the connector. Important: The TPA is fragile and may break if not done carefully. View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15540 View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. 3. Use the J 38125-215 tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. View of the female half of the connector with male terminals. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15541 View of the male half of the connector with female terminals. 4. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers A circuit breaker is a protective device that is designed to open the circuit when a current load is in excess of the rated breaker capacity. If there is a short or other type of overload condition in the circuit, the excessive current will open the circuit between the circuit breaker terminals. Two types of circuit breakers are used. Circuit Breaker - This type opens when excessive current passes through it for a period of time. It closes again after a few seconds, and if the cause of the high current is still present, it will open again. The circuit breaker will continue to cycle open and closed until the condition causing the high current is removed. Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Circuit Breaker - This type greatly increases its resistance when excessive current passes through it. The excessive current heats the PTC device, as the device heats its resistance increases. Eventually the resistance gets so high that the circuit is effectively open. Unlike the ordinary circuit breaker the PTC unit will not reset until the circuit is opened, by removing the voltage from its terminals. Once the voltage is removed the circuit breaker will re-close within a second or 2. Circuit Protection - Fuses Circuit Protection - Fuses Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15542 The fuse is the most common method of an automotive wiring circuit protection. Whenever there is an excessive amount of current flowing through a circuit the fusible element will melt and create an open or incomplete circuit. Fuses are an one time protection device and must be replaced each time the circuit is overloaded. To determine if a fuse is open, remove the suspected fuse and examine the element in the fuse for an open (2). If not broken (1), also check for continuity using a DMM or a continuity tester. If the element is open or continuity is suspect, replace the fuse with one of equal current rating. Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Fusible link is wire designed to melt and break continuity when excessive current is applied. It is often located between or near the battery and starter or electrical center. Use a continuity tester or a DMM at each end of the wire containing the fusible link in order to determine if it is broken. If broken, it must be replaced with fusible link of the same gage size. Repairing a Fusible Link Important: Fusible links cut longer than 225 mm (approximately 9 in) will not provide sufficient overload protection. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Flat Wire Repairs Flat Wire Repairs Notice: The flat wire within the flex wiring harness is not serviceable. If an open or short exists within the flex wiring harness the complete harness must be replaced. GMLAN Wiring Repairs GMLAN Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15543 The GM Local Area Network (GMLAN) System requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working on GMLAN connectors and terminals. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items in order to repair the GMLAN wiring: * DuraSeal splice sleeves * A wire stripping tool * J 38125-8 Crimping Tool (GM P/N 12085115) * J 38125-5 Ultra Torch Special Tool (GM P/N 12085116) The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors GMLAN Repairs Important: When making a repair to any GMLAN network, the original wire length after the repair must be the same length as before the repair. If the network is a twisted pair, the twist must be maintained after the repair is completed. GMLAN has 2 types of networks, low speed and high speed. Low speed GMLAN has a single wire and works at slow speeds. High speed GMLAN has 2 wires in a twisted pair and works at higher speeds. For more information on GMLAN, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation. GMLAN Connector Terminal Repair Important: A service terminal can be used to replace damaged connector terminals for both high speed and low speed GMLAN systems. When making a connector terminal repair on a GMLAN high speed system with twisted pair wires, do not untwist the wires more than necessary to make the repair. The terminals in the GMLAN system are made of a special metal. This metal provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. These terminals are available in the J-38125. If the individual terminals are damaged on any GMLAN connection, use the appropriate connector repair procedure in order to repair the terminal. Refer to Connector Repairs for the appropriate connector repair procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics GMLAN Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If a wire is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm, etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15544 must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper (available from sewing supply stores) in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except coaxial. * Do not use the DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent American wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15545 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Notice: Do not solder repairs under any circumstances as this could result in the air reference being obstructed. If the heated oxygen sensor pigtail wiring, connector, or terminal is damaged the entire oxygen sensor assembly must be replaced. Do not attempt to repair the wiring, connector, or terminals. In order for the sensor to function properly it must have a clean air reference. This clean air reference is obtained by way of the oxygen sensor signal and heater wires. Any attempt to repair the wires, connectors or terminals could result in the obstruction of the air reference and degrade oxygen sensor performance. The following guidelines should be used when servicing the heated oxygen sensor: * Do not apply contact cleaner or other materials to the sensor or vehicle harness connectors. These materials may get into the sensor, causing poor performance. Also, the sensor pigtail and harness wires must not be damaged in such a way that the wires inside are exposed. This could provide a path for foreign materials to enter the sensor and cause performance problems. * Neither the sensor nor vehicle lead wires should be bent sharply or kinked. Sharp bends, kinks, etc., could block the reference air path through the lead wire. * Do not remove or defeat the oxygen sensor ground wire (where applicable). Vehicles that utilize the ground wire sensor may rely on this ground as the only ground contact to the sensor. Removal of the ground wire will also cause poor engine performance. * To prevent damage due to water intrusion, be sure that the peripheral seal remains intact on the vehicle harness connector. The engine harness may be repaired using the J-38125. High Temperature Wiring Repairs High Temperature Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit High Temperature Wiring Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following: * Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature to replace any damaged wire. * Replace any heat shielding that is removed. * Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with SCT1 shrink tubing (available in the J-38125 Terminal Repair kit). * After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source. Identifying High Temperature Wiring Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15546 Wiring that is exposed to high temperature, 135°C (275°F) or higher, for prolonged periods of time need special considerations when making wiring repairs. Areas that may be exposed to higher temperatures can be identified by heat resistant materials that are being used in those areas. These materials may include heat reflective tape, moon tape, and high temperature shrink tubing. Also conduit and other protective coverings may be used. Because conduit or similar coverings are used throughout the vehicle regardless of the temperature, it may be necessary for the technician to determine if an area is exposed to excessive heat before making a wiring repair. Obvious areas of consideration would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter, and exhaust pipes. The J-38125 contains much of the material you will need to perform repairs on areas exposed to high heat. The kit contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections * High temperature SCT1 shrink tubing to protect the splice sleeves * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct crimp tool to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors The J-38125 does not contain wire that is suitable to high temperature exposure. Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature of the same or larger gage size as the original wire when repair damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair. High Temperature Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire rated at 150°C (302°F) continuous temperature rating of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125 and then encapsulate the splice sleeve using the high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the sealed splice. Important: You must perform the following procedures in the order listed. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip keeping all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape. 2. Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. 3. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 4. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent american wire gage (AWG) size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15547 5. Slide a section of high temperature SCT1 shrink tubing down the length of wire to be spliced. Ensure that the shrink tubing will not interfere with the splice procedure. 6. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 7. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. 8. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 9. Insert the wire into the DuraSeal splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 10. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 11. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 12. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15548 13. Center the high temperature SCT1 shrink tube over the DuraSeal splice sleeve. 14. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the high temperature heat shrink tubing. 15. Gradually move the heat from the center to the open end of the tubing. * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. 16. Replace any reflective tape and clips that may have been remove during the repair. Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation Repairing Damaged Wire Insulation If the conductive portion of the wire is not damaged, locate the problem and apply tape around the wire. If the damage is more extensive, replace the faulty segment of the wire. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips and follow the instruction to repair the wire. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit The Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) requires special wiring repair procedures due to the sensitive nature of the circuitry. Follow the specific procedures and instructions when working with the SIR/SRS, and the wiring components, such as connectors Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15549 and terminals. Important: Do not use the terminals in the kit in order to replace damaged SIR/SRS system terminals. Use either an SIR/SRS pigtail or a terminated lead from the SIR Repair Kit Tray. The tool kit J-38125 contains the following items: * DuraSeal splice sleeves, in order to repair the SIR/SRS wiring * A special crimping tool * A heat torch * An instruction manual The DuraSeal splice sleeves have the following 2 critical features: * A special heat shrink sleeve environmentally seals the splice. The heat shrink sleeve contains a sealing adhesive inside. * A cross hatched (knurled) core crimp provides the necessary low resistance contact integrity for these sensitive, low energy circuits. The J-38125 also serves as a generic terminal repair kit. The kit contains the following items: * A large sampling of common electrical terminals * The correct tools in order to attach the terminals to the wires * The correct tools in order to remove the terminals from the connectors SIR/SRS Connector Repair (Plastic Body and Terminal Metal Pin) The terminals in the SIR/SRS system are made with a special plating. This plating provides the necessary contact integrity for the sensitive, low energy circuits. Use the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit for repairing SIR/SRS terminals and connectors. Do not substitute any other terminals for those in the repair kit. The J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit contains: * Various terminated leads for sensing and diagnostic module (SDM) terminal replacement * Various connector positive assurance (CPA) locks for SIR/SRS connectors * Base of steering column pigtail connectors part number 12085514 * Yellow vinyl electrical tape Pigtail repair packs are available for SIR/SRS connectors with eight or less terminals. Only the connector body is available for connectors with more than eight terminals. The terminated leads in the J-38125 SIR/SRS Terminal Repair Kit can be used to replace damaged terminals when replacing the connector body. SIR/SRS Component Wire Pigtail Repair Important: Do not make wire, connector, or terminal repairs on components with wire pigtails. A wire pigtail is a wire or wires attached directly to the device, not by a connector. If a wiring pigtail is damaged, you must replace the entire component, with pigtail. The inflatable restraint steering wheel module coil is an example of a pigtail component. SIR/SRS Wire Repair Important: Refer to Wiring Repairs in order to determine the correct wire size for the circuit you are repairing. You must obtain this information in order to ensure circuit integrity. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics If any wire except the pigtail is damaged, repair the wire by splicing in a new section of wire of the same gage size (0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1.0 mm etc.). Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves and splice crimping tool from the J-38125. Use the following wiring repair procedures in order to ensure the integrity of the DuraSeal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15550 Important: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip with all of the wire strands intact. 1. Open the harness by removing any tape: * Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in order to avoid wire insulation damage. * Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. * Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming together. 2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the location of a splice. Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness branches, or connectors. 3. Strip the insulation: * When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire. * Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size: - Find the wire on the schematic and convert the metric size to the equivalent AWG size. - Use an AWG wire gage. - If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (0.313 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. * Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands. * If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section. 4. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the above table at the beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool nests. 5. Use the Splice Crimp Tool from the J-38125 to crimp DuraSeal splice sleeve. In order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of the Splice Crimp Tool. The crimp tool has three nests, 1 is for the salmon and green splice sleeve, 2 is for the blue splice sleeve, and 3 is for the yellow splice sleeve. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15551 6. Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1) from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper nest. 7. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. 8. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the opposite end of the splice. 9. Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. 10. Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing: * The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. * A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Connector Position Assurance (CPA) The connector position assurance (CPA) is a small plastic insert that fits through the locking tabs of a connector. CPAs are used in all SIR System connectors and also in some connectors of other systems. The CPA ensures that the connector halves cannot vibrate apart. You must have the CPA in place in order to ensure good contact between the mating terminals of a connection. Terminal Position Assurance (TPA) The terminal position assurance (TPA) insert resembles the plastic combs used in the control module connectors. The TPA keeps the terminal securely seated in the connector body. Do not remove the TPA from the connector body unless you remove a terminal for replacement. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips Important: When making a splice in an area that may be exposed to moisture use a crimp and seal splice sleeve instead of a Splice Clip. Refer to Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15552 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original (except fusible link). * The wire insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating. - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately 7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced. 5. Select the proper clip to secure the splice. Follow the instructions in the J-38125 in order to determine the proper clip size crimp tool and anvil. 6. Overlap the 2 stripped wire ends and hold them between thumb and forefinger. 7. Center the splice clip (2) over the stripped wires (1) and hold the clip in place. * Ensure that the wires extend beyond the clip in each direction. * Ensure that no insulation is caught under the clip. 8. Center the crimp tool over the splice clip and wires. 9. Apply steady pressure until the crimp tool closes. Ensure that no strands of wire are cut. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15553 10. Crimp the splice on each end (2). 11. Apply 60/40 rosin core solder to the opening in the back of the clip. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the solder equipment. 12. Tape the splice. Roll on enough tape in order to duplicate the thickness of the insulation on the existing wires. 13. Additional tape can be applied to the wire if the wire does not belong in a conduit or another harness covering. Use a winding motion in order to cover the first piece of tape. Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Important: Use only duraseal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection. Use duraseal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except tefzel and coaxial. Use duraseal splice sleeves where there is special requirements such as moisture sealing. Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using duraseal splice sleeves. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15554 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the desired wire. 2. Cut the wire. * Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. * Ensure that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from other splices, harness branches, and connectors. This helps prevent moisture from bridging adjacent splices and causing damage. 3. Select the proper size and type of wire. * The wire must be of equal or greater size than the original. * The wires insulation must have the same or higher temperature rating (4). - Use general purpose insulation for areas that are not subject to high temperatures. - Use a cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire for areas where high temperatures are expected. Important: Use cross-linked polyethylene wire to replace PVC, but do not replace cross-linked polyethylene with PVC. Cross-linked polyethylene wire is not fuel resistant. Do not use to replace wire where there is the possibility of fuel contact. 4. Strip the insulation. * Select the correct size opening in the wire stripper or work down from the largest size. * Strip approximately7.5 mm (5/16 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced (1). 5. Select the proper duraseal splice sleeve (2) and the required crimp nest tool. Refer to the Crimp and Seal Splice Table. 6. Place the duraseal splice sleeve in the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115) crimp tool nest so that the crimp falls at point 1 on the splice. 7. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to hold the duraseal splice sleeve firmly in the proper crimp tool nest. 8. Insert the wires into the duraseal splice sleeve until the wire hits the barrel stop. The splice sleeve has a stop in the middle of the barrel in order to prevent the wire from passing through the splice (3). 9. Close the handles of the J-38125-8 (GM P/N 12085115), until the crimper handles open when released. The crimper handles will not open until the proper amount of pressure is applied to the splice sleeve. 10. Shrink the insulation around the splice. * Using the heat torch, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel. * Gradually move the heat barrel to the open end of the tubing. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15555 - The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation. - A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is achieved. Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Splicing Inline Harness Diodes Many vehicle electrical systems use a diode to isolate circuits and protect the components from voltage spikes. When installing a new diode use the following procedure. 1. Open the harness. * If the harness is taped, remove the tape. * To avoid wiring insulation damage, use a sewing ripper in order to cut open the harness. * If the harness has a black plastic conduit, pull out the diode. 2. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 3. Check and record the current flow direction and orientation of diode. 4. Remove the inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. Important: If the diode is located next to a connector terminal remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 5. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 6. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. 7. Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Before soldering attach some heat sinks (aluminum alligator clips) across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excessive heat. Follow the manufacturer's instruction for the soldering equipment. 8. Reinstall terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed. Important: To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion, completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points with tape. 9. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable Twisted/shielded cable is used in order to protect wiring from electrical noise. Two-conductor cable of this construction is used between the radio and the Delco-Bose(R) speaker/amplifier units and other applications where low level, sensitive signals must be carried. Follow the instructions below in order to repair the twisted/shielded cable. 1. Remove the outer jacket (1). Use care not to cut into the drain wire of the mylar tape. 2. Unwrap the tape. Do not remove the tape. Use the tape in order to rewrap the twisted conductors after the splice is made. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15556 3. Prepare the splice. Untwist the conductors and follow the splicing instructions for copper wire. Staggering the splices by 65 mm (2.5 in) is recommended. Important: Apply the mylar tape with the aluminum side inward. This ensures good electrical contact with the drain wire. 4. Re-assemble the cable. * Rewrap the conductors with the mylar tape. If the mylar tape is damaged, use 3M product AL-36FR to replace the damaged mylar tape. * Use caution not to wrap the drain wire in the tape (1). * Follow the splicing instructions for copper wire and splice the drain wire. * Wrap the drain wire around the conductors and tape with electrical tape to replace the outer insulation. 5. Tape over the entire cable. Use a winding motion when you apply the tape. Wiring Repairs Wiring Repairs The Wiring Repairs section contains the following types of wiring repair information. Using these elements together will make wiring repair faster and easier: * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Flat Wire Repairs * GMLAN Wiring Repairs * High Temperature Wiring Repairs * Heated Oxygen Sensor Wiring Repairs * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Clips * Splicing Copper Wire Using Splice Sleeves * Splicing Twisted or Shielded Cable * Splicing Inline Harness Diodes * SIR/SRS Wiring Repairs US English/Metric Conversion US English/Metric Conversion Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15557 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15558 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15559 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Component Connector End Views Accessory Power Outlet - Center Console 1 (with Floor Console) Accessory Power Outlet - Center Console 2 (with Floor Console) Accessory Power Outlet - Center Console Compartment (with Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15560 Accessory Power Outlet - Center Seat (without Floor Console) Accessory Power Outlet - I/P 1 (without Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15561 Accessory Power Outlet - I/P 2 (without Floor Console) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15562 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Cigar Lighter Receptacle or 12-Volt Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement Tools Required J 42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover Removal Procedure 1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block. 2. Remove the receptacle: 1. Look into the receptacle. There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the front of the receptacle. The J 42059 pushes the plastic latches from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out. 2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the J 42059 into the tab window. The J 42059 will not fit straight into the receptacle. Angle the J 42059 slightly for insertion into the receptacle. 3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window. You must move the J 42059 handle toward horizontal to engage the other tab window. 4. Use the J 42059 to pull the receptacle straight out. 3. If J 42059 tool fails to release the lighter socket from the retainer, perform the following alternate method: 1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket. 2. Remove the plastic latches in the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows. 3. Use the J 42059 as directed above to remove the socket. Installation Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15563 1. Route the connector through the retainer. Align the accessory power receptacle retainer to the slot in the opening. 2. Install the retainer by pressing into place fully seated. 3. Connect the electrical connector to the receptacle. 4. Align the tabs on the receptacle to the slots in the retainer. Install the accessory power receptacle by pressing into place until fully seated. 5. Install the accessory power receptacle fuse. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15564 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Tools and Equipment Special Tools Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Branching Point > Component Information > Diagrams > JX205 Branching Point: Diagrams JX205 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX205 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Branching Point > Component Information > Diagrams > JX205 > Page 15569 Branching Point: Diagrams JX206 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX206 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Branching Point > Component Information > Diagrams > JX205 > Page 15570 Branching Point: Diagrams JX207 Splice Pack Connector End Views JX207 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component Connector End Views Circuit Breaker 1 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Circuit Breaker 2 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15574 Circuit Breaker 3 (SEO 9C1/9C3) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: Customer Interest Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 15583 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) Electronic Noise Suppressor: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-08-46-002D Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Audio Whine Noise from Radio Speakers When Using OnStar(R) (Install Noise Suppression Filter) Models: 2007-2010 GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 2007-2009 Saab 9-7X Equipped with OnStar(R) (RPO UE1) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-08-46-002C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some customers may comment on an audio whine coming from the radio speakers when using the OnStar(R) system. The amplitude and frequency of the whine will change with an increase or decrease in engine speed. Cause This condition may be caused by electrical noise on the OnStar(R) Vehicle Communication Interface Module (VCIM) battery feed wire being passed to the microphone output pins at the radio. Correction Technicians are to install a noise suppression filter, P/N 1224205, into the OnStar(R) battery voltage circuit, a few centimeters (inches) from the VCIM. The filter package has three attached wires - a single yellow wire at one end with a yellow wire and a black wire at the other. Install the single yellow wire side into the battery voltage circuit towards the VCIM. Install the remaining single yellow wire into the battery voltage circuit toward the fuse and the black wire to ground. Important The noise suppression filter is polarity sensitive. The filter is designed to be most effective when the end with the capacitor ground is connected towards the source of the electrical noise. Install the filter in this polarity first. If the noise level is still not satisfactory, try disconnecting the capacitor ground. In some cases, if the first installation does not correct the noise, try reversing the filter polarity (removing the filter, turning it end for end and then reinstalling it) and grounding the capacitor lead. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 07-08-46-002D > Jul > 09 > Audio System - Noise When Using OnStar(R) > Page 15589 Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) Disclaimer Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Fuse Block: Locations Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views Instrument Panel Harness - Rear of the Instrument Panel Carrier 1 - J282 2 - J203 3 - J239 4 - J250 5 - J218 6 - Instrument Panel Carrier 7 - J259 8 - J269 9 - Fuse Block - Auxiliary Right Front of the Passenger Compartment Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15594 1 - Dash Panel 2 - Fuse Block - Instrument Panel 3 - X303 4 - G302 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15595 Fuse Block: Locations Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Front of Vehicle/Engine Compartment Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Battery Attachments (LZE/LZ4/LZ8) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15596 1 - G102 2 - X105 3 - Fuse Block - Underhood Positive Battery Cable Terminal 4 - Battery 5 Battery Current Sensor Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Instrument Panel/Center Console Component Views > Page 15597 Fuse Block: Locations Powertrain Component Views Powertrain Component Views Right Front of the Engine Compartment 1 - Fuse Block - Underhood 2 - Generator 3 - Brake Fluid Level Switch 4 - Battery 5 - Inflatable Restraint Front End Sensor - Right 6 - G100 7 - Horn Assembly 8 - Windshield Washer Fluid Container 9 - Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch 10 - Windshield Washer Fluid Pump 11 Battery Current Sensor 12 - G102 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Electrical Symbols Electrical Symbols Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15600 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15601 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15602 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15603 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15604 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15605 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15606 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15607 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15608 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15609 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15610 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15611 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15612 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15613 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15614 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15615 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15616 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15617 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15618 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15619 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15620 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15621 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15622 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15623 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15624 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15625 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15626 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15627 General Electrical Diagnosis General Electrical Diagnosis Basic Knowledge Required Without a basic knowledge of electricity, it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures contained in the service manual. You should understand the basic theory of electricity, and know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and resistance (ohms). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram, as well as understand what happens in a circuit with an open or a shorted wire. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15628 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Arrows and Symbols Arrows and Symbols This Service Data uses various symbols in order to describe different service operations. Arrows and Symbols 1 - Front of Vehicle 2 - View Detail 2 - View Detail 3 - Ambient Air Mixed With Another Gas or Indicate Temperature Change 4 - Motion or Direction 5 - View Angle 6 - Dimension (1:2) 7 Ambient/Clean Air Flow or Cool Air Flow 8 - Lubrication Point - Oil or Fluid 9 - Task Related 10 Sectioning (1:3) 11 - Gas Other Than Ambient Air or Hot Air Flow 12 - Lubrication Point - Grease or Jelly 13 - Multidirectional Arrow Decimal and Metric Equivalents Decimal and Metric Equivalents Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15629 Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15630 Checking Aftermarket Accessories Checking Aftermarket Accessories Do not connect aftermarket accessories into the following circuits: Caution: Refer to Restraint System Service Precautions. * SIR circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the SIR symbol. Notice: Refer to OBD II Symbol Description Notice. * OBD II circuits, all such circuits are indicated on circuit diagrams with the OBD II symbol. Always check for aftermarket accessories (non-OEM) as the first step in diagnosing electrical problems. If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the system to verify that these add-on accessories are not the cause of the problems. Possible causes of vehicle problems related to aftermarket accessories include: * Power feeds connected to points other than the battery * Antenna location * Transceiver wiring located too close to vehicle electronic modules or wiring * Poor shielding or poor connectors on antenna feed line * Check for recent service bulletins detailing installation guidelines for aftermarket accessories. Circuit Testing Circuit Testing The Circuit Testing section contains the following diagnostic testing information. Using this information along with the diagnostic procedures will identify the cause of the electrical malfunction. * Using Connector Test Adapters * Probing Electrical Connectors * Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter * Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp * Using Fused Jumper Wires * Measuring Voltage * Measuring Voltage Drop * Measuring Frequency Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15631 * Testing for Continuity * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for a Short to Voltage * Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections * Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions * Testing for Electrical Intermittents * Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure * Circuit Protection - Fuses * Circuit Protection - Circuit Breakers * Circuit Protection - Fusible Links Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions Tools Required J 25070 Heat Gun Many intermittent open or shorted circuits are affected by harness/connector movement that is caused by vibration, engine torque, bumps/rough pavement, etc. In order to duplicate the customer's concern, it may be necessary to manipulate the wiring harness if the malfunction appears to be vibration related. Manipulation of a circuit can consist of a wide variety of actions, including: * Wiggling the harness * Disconnecting a connector and reconnecting * Stressing the mechanical connection of a connector * Pulling on the harness or wire in order to identify a separation/break inside the insulation * Relocating a harness or wires All these actions should be performed with some goal in mind. For instance, with a scan tool connected, wiggling the wires may uncover a faulty input to the control module. The snapshot option would be appropriate here. Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure. Another option is, with the component commanded ON and OFF by the scan tool, move related connectors and wiring and observe the component operation. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation. If harness or connector movement affects the data displayed, component/system operation, or engine operation, inspect and repair the harness/connections as necessary. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics You may need to load the vehicle in order to duplicate the concern. This may require the use of weights, floorjacks, jackstands, frame machines, etc. In these cases you are attempting to duplicate the concern by manipulating the suspension or frame. This method is useful in finding harnesses that are too short and their connectors pull apart enough to cause a poor connection. A DMM set to Peak Min/Max mode and connected to the suspect circuit while testing can yield desirable results. Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Certainly, using the senses of sight, smell, and hearing while manipulating the circuit can provide good results as well. There may be instances where circuit manipulation alone will not meet the required criteria for the fault condition to appear. In such cases it may be necessary to expose the suspect circuit to other conditions while manipulating the harness. Such conditions would include high moisture conditions, along with exceptionally high or low temperatures. The following discusses how to expose the circuit to these kinds of conditions. Salt Water Spray Some compounds possess the ability to conduct electricity when dissolved in water such as ordinary salt. By mixing table salt with water in sufficient quantities, you can enhance the conductive properties of water so that any circuit which may be sensitive to moisture will more readily fail when liberally sprayed with this mixture. Mixing 0.35L (12 oz) of water with approximately 1 tablespoon of salt will yield a salt solution of 5 percent. Fill a normal spray bottle with this mixture. This mixture is sufficient to enhance the water's own conductivity. This may cause the circuit to fail more easily when sprayed. Once the mixture is completed, spray the suspect area liberally with the solution. Then, while monitoring either a scan tool or DMM, manipulate the harness as discussed previously. High Temperature Conditions If the complaint tends to be heat related, you can simulate the condition using the J 25070. Using the heat gun, you can heat up the suspected area or component. Manipulate the harnesses under high temperature conditions while monitoring the scan tool or DMM to locate the fault condition. The high temperature condition may be achieved simply by test driving the vehicle at normal operating temperature. If a heat gun is unavailable, consider Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15632 this option to enhance your diagnosis. This option does not allow for the same control, however. Low Temperature Conditions Depending on the nature of the fault condition, placing a fan in front of the vehicle while the vehicle is in the shade can have the desired effect. If this is unsuccessful, use local cooling treatments such as ice or a venturi type nozzle (one that provides hot or cold air). This type of tool is capable of producing air stream temperatures down to -18°C (0°F) from one end and +71°C (160°F) from the other. This is ideally suited for localized cooling needs. Once the vehicle, component, or harness has been sufficiently cooled, manipulate the harness or components in an effort to duplicate the concern. Duplicating Failure Conditions * If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate and/or capture the failure conditions. * Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. 1. Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. 2. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. 3. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. 4. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Refer to Conditions for Running the DTC in the supporting text if a DTC is being diagnosed. 5. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed. * An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the DMM connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the concern occurs, may help you locate the concern. Measuring Frequency Measuring Frequency Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the frequency of a signal. Important: Connecting the DMM to the circuit before pressing the Hz button will allow the DMM to autorange to an appropriate range. 1. Apply power to the circuit. 2. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (AC) position. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 5. Press the Hz button on the DMM. 6. The DMM will display the frequency measured. Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure measures the voltage at a selected point in a circuit. 1. Disconnect the electrical harness connector for the circuit being tested, if necessary. 2. Enable the circuit and/or system being tested. Use the following methods: * Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. * Turn ON the engine. * Turn ON the circuit and/or system with a scan tool in Output Controls. * Turn ON the switch for the circuit and/or system being tested. 3. Select the V (AC) or V (DC) position on the DMM. 4. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the point of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. The DMM displays the voltage measured at that point. Measuring Voltage Drop Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15633 Measuring Voltage Drop Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure determines the difference in voltage potential between 2 points. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one point of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to the other point of the circuit. 4. Operate the circuit. 5. The DMM displays the difference in voltage between the 2 points. Passenger Car Zoning Passenger Car Zoning All grounds, in-line connectors, pass-through grommets, and splices have identifying numbers that correspond to where they are located in the vehicle. The following table explains the numbering system. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15634 Probing Electrical Connectors Probing Electrical Connectors Important: Always be sure to reinstall the connector position assurance (CPA) and terminal position assurance (TPA) when reconnecting connectors or replacing terminals.0m Frontprobe Disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the mating side (front) of the connector. Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Important: When probing female 0.64 terminals, it is important to use the correct adapter. There have been some revisions to the test adapter for 0.64 terminals. The proper adapter for 0.64 terminals is the J 35616-64B which has a gold terminal and a black wire between the base and tip. Failure to use the proper test adapter may result in damage to the terminal being tested and improper diagnosis. Refer to the following table as a guide in selecting the correct test adapter for frontprobing connectors: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15635 Backprobe Important: * Backprobe connector terminals only when specifically required in diagnostic procedures. * Do not backprobe a sealed (Weather Pack(R)) connector, less than a 280 series Metri-Pack connector, a Micro-Pack connector, or a flat wire (dock and lock) connector. * Backprobing can be a source of damage to connector terminals. Use care in order to avoid deforming the terminal, either by forcing the test probe too far into the cavity or by using too large of a test probe. * After backprobing any connector, inspect for terminal damage. If terminal damage is suspected, test for proper terminal contact. Do not disconnect the connector and probe the terminals from the harness side (back) of the connector. Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure Snapshot is a recording of what a control module on the vehicle was receiving for information while the snapshot is being made. A snapshot may be used Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15636 to analyze the data during the time a vehicle condition is current. This allows you to concentrate on making the condition occur, rather than trying to view all the data in anticipation of the fault. The snapshot contains information around a trigger point that you have determined. Only a single data list may be recorded in each snapshot. The Scan Tool has the ability to store 2 snapshots. The ability to record 2 snapshots allows comparing hot versus cold and good versus bad vehicle scenarios. The snapshots are stored on a first-in, first-out basis. If a third snapshot is taken, the first snapshot stored in the memory will be lost. Snapshots can be 1 of 2 types: * Snapshot - taken from the Snapshot menu choice * Quick Snapshot - taken from the Data Display soft key choice, does not contain DTC information When a snapshot is taken, it is recorded on the memory card and may contain as many as 1200 frames of information. Because the snapshot is recorded onto the memory card, snapshots are not lost if the Scan Tool is powered down. The snapshot replay screen has a plot soft key that can be of great value for intermittent diagnosis. The snapshot plot feature can help you to quickly determine if a sensor is outside of its expected values by plotting 3 parameters at a time. The data will be displayed both graphically and numerically showing the minimum and maximum values for all frames captured. This is helpful, especially if the fault occurs only once and does not set a DTC. Testing for a Short to Voltage Testing for a Short to Voltage Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedure tests for a short to voltage in a circuit. 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the V (DC) position. 2. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 3. Connect the negative lead of the DMM to a good ground. 4. Turn ON the ignition and operate all accessories. 5. If the voltage measured is greater than 1 volt, there is a short to voltage in the circuit. Testing for Continuity Testing for Continuity Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures verify good continuity in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 2. Disconnect the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 3. Disconnect the load. 4. Press the MIN MAX button on the DMM. 5. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 6. Connect the other lead of the DMM to the other end of the circuit. 7. If the DMM displays low or no resistance, the circuit has good continuity. With a Test Lamp Important: Only use the test lamp procedure on low impedance power and ground circuits. 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 5. Connect the other end of the circuit to ground. 6. If the test lamp illuminates (full intensity), then the circuit has good continuity. Testing for Electrical Intermittents Testing for Electrical Intermittents Tools Required Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15637 J 39200 Digital Multimeter Perform the following procedures while wiggling the harness from side to side. Continue this at convenient points (about 6 inches apart) while watching the test equipment. * Testing for Short to Ground * Testing for Continuity * Testing for a Short to Voltage If the fault is not identified, perform the procedure below using the MIN MAX feature on the J 39200 DMM. This feature allows you to manipulate the circuit without having to watch the J 39200. The J 39200 will generate an audible tone when a change is detected. Important: The J 39200 must be used in order to perform the following procedure since the J 39200 can monitor current, resistance or voltage while recording the minimum (MIN), and maximum (MAX) values measured. 1. Connect the J 39200 to both sides of a suspected connector (still connected), or from one end of a suspected circuit to the other. 2. Set the rotary dial of the J 39200 to the V (AC) or V (DC) position. 3. Press the range button of the J 39200 in order to select the desired voltage range. 4. Press the MIN MAX button of the J 39200. The J 39200 displays 100 ms RECORD and emits an audible tone (beep). Important: The 100 ms RECORD mode is the length of time an input must stay at a new value in order to record the full change. 5. Simulate the condition that is potentially causing the intermittent connection, either by wiggling the connections or the wiring, test driving, or performing other operations. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics 6. Listen for the audible Min Max Alert which indicates that a new minimum or maximum value has been recorded. 7. Press the MIN MAX button once in order to display the MAX value and note the value. 8. Press the MIN MAX button again in order to display the MIN value and note the value. 9. Determine the difference between the MIN and MAX values. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is 1 volt or greater an intermittent open or high resistance condition exists. Repair the condition as necessary. * If the variation between the recorded MIN and MAX voltage values is less than 1 volt an intermittent open or high resistance condition does not exist. Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections Tools Required * J 35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit * J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated. Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an intermittent condition. Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following items: * Wiring broken inside the insulation * Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector * Poor terminal to wire connection-Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps, poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire to terminal contact area, etc. * Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. * Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle. * Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components * Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order to verify the customer concern. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder operation. See: Testing and Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15638 Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Testing for Proper Terminal Contact It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always use the J 35616 when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers (BEC) It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in a bussed electrical center (BEC). Use J-35616-35 to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use J-35616-35 can result in improper diagnosis of the BEC. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Separate the connector halves. 2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance, intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the J-38125, test that the retention force is significantly different between a good terminal and a suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question. Flat Wire (Dock and Lock) Connectors There are no serviceable parts for flat wire (dock and lock) connectors on the harness side or the component side. Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact: 1. Remove the component in question. 2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well. 3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation. 4. Insert the appropriate adapter from the on the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question. Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms. * Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Power Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. Refer to Circuit Testing and Ground Distribution Schematics. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Temperature Sensitivity * An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the component/connection is hot. * Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of intermittent condition, where applicable. * If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following: - High ambient temperatures - Underhood/engine generated heat Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15639 - Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load - Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc. * If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following: - Low ambient temperatures-In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Inspect for water intrusion. - The condition only occurs on a cold start. - The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up. * Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related. * If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition. Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Electrical Noise Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Inspect for the following conditions: * A misrouted harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition components, motors, generator etc-These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. * Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or switch-These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating. * Improper installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers, electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc-These accessories may lead to interference while in use, but do not fail when the accessories are not in use. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode. * The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system. Incorrect Control Module * There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate: - A new service control module is installed. - A control module from another vehicle is installed. - Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle. Important: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME software/calibration files that are already present in the control module. This is not an effective repair for any type of concern. * Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Testing for Short to Ground Testing for Short to Ground Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. The following procedures test for a short to ground in a circuit. With a DMM 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Set the rotary dial of the DMM to the ohm position. 4. Connect one lead of the DMM to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. Connect the other lead of the DMM to a good ground. 6. If the DMM does NOT display infinite resistance (OL), there is a short to ground in the circuit. With a Test Lamp 1. Remove the power feed (i.e. fuse, control module) from the suspect circuit. 2. Disconnect the load. 3. Connect one lead of the test lamp to battery positive voltage. 4. Connect the other lead of the test lamp to one end of the circuit to be tested. 5. If the test lamp illuminates, there is a short to ground in the circuit. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15640 Fuse Powering Several Loads 1. Review the system schematic and locate the fuse that is open. 2. Open the first connector or switch leading from the fuse to each load. 3. Connect a DMM across the fuse terminals (be sure that the fuse is powered). * When the DMM displays voltage the short is in the wiring leading to the first connector or switch. * If the DMM does not display voltage refer to the next step. 4. Close each connector or switch until the DMM displays voltage in order to find which circuit is shorted. Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Troubleshooting with a Digital Multimeter Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. Important: Circuits which include any solid state control modules, such as the powertrain control module (PCM), should only be tested with a 10 megohm or higher impedance digital multimeter such as the J 39200 Digital Multimeter (DMM). The J 39200 instruction manual is a good source of information and should be read thoroughly upon receipt of the DMM as well as kept on hand for future reference. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The ohmmeter function on a DMM shows how much resistance exists between 2 points along a circuit. Low resistance in a circuit means good continuity. Important: Disconnect the power feed from the suspect circuit when measuring resistance with a DMM. This prevents incorrect readings. DMMs apply such a small voltage to measure resistance that the presence of voltages can upset a resistance reading. Diodes and solid state components in a circuit can cause a DMM to display a false reading. To find out if a component is affecting a measurement take a reading once, then reverse the leads and take a second reading. If the readings differ the solid state component is affecting the measurement. Following are examples of the various methods of connecting the DMM to the circuit to be tested: * Backprobe both ends of the connector and either hold the leads in place while manipulating the connector or tape the leads to the harness for continuous monitoring while you perform other operations or test driving. Refer to Probing Electrical Connectors. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics * Disconnect the harness at both ends of the suspected circuit where it connects either to a component or to other harnesses. * If the system that is being diagnosed has a specified pinout or breakout box, it may be used in order to simplify connecting the DMM to the circuit or for testing multiple circuits quickly. Troubleshooting With A Test Lamp Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp Tools Required J 35616-200 Test Light - Probe Kit Notice: Refer to Test Probe Notice. A test lamp can simply and quickly test a low impedance circuit for voltage. A DMM should be used instead of a test lamp in order to test for voltage in high impedance circuits. While a test lamp shows whether voltage is present if the impedance is low enough, a DMM indicates how much voltage is present. In other words, if there is not enough current, the test lamp will not illuminate even though voltage is present. The J 35616-200 is Micro-Pack compatible and comprised of a 12-volt light bulb with an attached pair of leads. To properly operate this tool use the following procedures. When testing for voltage: Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15641 1. Attach one lead to ground. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where voltage should be present. 3.5GWhen the bulb illuminates, there is voltage at the point being tested. When testing for ground: 1. Attach one lead to battery positive voltage. 2. Touch the other lead to various points along the circuit where ground should be present. 3. When the bulb illuminates, there is ground at the point being tested. Using Connector Test Adapters Using Connector Test Adapters Notice: Do not insert test equipment probes (DVOM etc.) into any connector or fuse block terminal. The diameter of the test probes will deform most terminals. A deformed terminal will cause a poor connection, which will result in a system failure. Always use the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit in order to front probe terminals. Do not use paper clips or other substitutes to probe terminals. When using the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit, ensure the terminal test adapter choice is the correct size for the connector terminal. Do not visually choose the terminal test adapter because some connector terminal cavities may appear larger than the actual terminal in the cavity. Using a larger terminal test adapter will damage the terminal. Refer to the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit label on the inside of the J-35616 GM-Approved Terminal Test Kit for the correct adapter along with the connector end view for terminal size. Using Fused Jumper Wires Using Fused Jumper Wires Tools Required J 36169-A Fused Jumper Wire Important: A fused jumper may not protect solid state components from being damaged. The J 36169-A includes small clamp connectors that provide adaptation to most connectors without damage. This fused jumper wire is supplied with a 20-A fuse which may not be suitable for some circuits. Do not use a fuse with a higher rating than the fuse that protects the circuit being tested. AFL/ECP Connectors AFL/EPC Connectors Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure Follow the steps below in order to remove terminals from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15642 1. For connectors with a bolt in the dress cover, turn the bolt counterclockwise to remove the connector from the component. 2. Locate the connector position assurance (CPA) on the top of the wire dress cover. Slide the CPA forward. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15643 3. Slide the lever lock forward while pressing down on the lever lock release tab. View showing depressing of the lever lock release tab. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15644 View of connector in released position. 4. Disconnect the connector from the component. 5. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the dress cover. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. 6. Release the rear lower half of the wiredress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15645 7. Release the tabs that are holding the wiredress cover to the connector body. 8. Remove the nose piece by inserting a small flat-blade tool into the slots on both ends of the connector body. Gently pry the nose piece out of the connector. J 38125-216 can also be used to remove the nose piece. 9. Use the J 38125-12A (GM P/N 12094429) tool to release the terminals by lifting the terminal retaining tabs on the inside of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15646 10. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (BSK) Bosch Connectors (BSK) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector from the component. 2. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 3. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15647 4. Insert the J 38125-561 tool into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 5. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Bosch Connectors (ECM) Bosch Connectors (ECM) Tools Required J-38125Terminal Repair Kit Removal Procedure 1. Locate the assist lever on the top of the connector. Move the assist lever to the forward position. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15648 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Locate the dress cover locking tabs at the corners of the connector. Use a small flat-blade tool to release the locking tabs and remove the dress cover. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15649 4. The terminal positive assurance (TPA) is located in the front of the connector. 5. Use a small flat-blade tool to remove TPA from the connector. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15650 6. Use the J 38125-213 or the J 38125-556 (GM P/N 12093647) tool to release the terminals by inserting the tool into the terminal release cavity. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 7. While holding the removal tool in place, gently pull the wire out of the back of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. Repair Procedure Important: Ensure that the dress cover and connector body are both in the released position before reassembling. Failure to do so may cause damage to the connector and component. Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Location of the terminal in the repair tray and the proper crimp tool can be found in the appropriate connector end view. Bosch Connectors (0.64) Bosch Connectors (0.64) Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15651 Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Locate the lever lock on the wire dress cover. While pressing the lock, pull the lever over and past the lock until the lever is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Pull the rubber boot that covers the wires back to expose the end of the connector dress cover. 4. Place the connector locking lever in the center of the connector. 5. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs that are on the wire end of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover and connector body and pry up. 6. Locate the 2 dress cover locking tabs located on the opposite side of the connector. Insert a small flat-bladed tool between the cover at the connector end and pry up. 7. Remove the dress cover. 8. Cut the tie wrap on the wire bundle. Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15652 9. Remove the terminal position assurance (TPA) by inserting a small flat-bladed tool into the small slot in the end of the slider and pushing on the TPA until it comes out of the connector. When the TPA exits the opposite side of the connector, gasp the TPA and pull it completely out of the connector. 10. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 11. Insert the J 38125-560 (GM P/N 15314260) into the 2 triangular cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 12. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125. Terminal Replacement Procedure Chevrolet Impala Workshop Manual (V8-5.3L (2008)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15653 1. Prior to installation the terminal must be aligned so the (1) coding lugs align with the (2) coding grooves on the connector. 2. Once the terminal is aligned, slide the terminal into the cavity until the retainer has engaged in the cavity of the connector. 3. Slide the TPA in the connector body and seat it using a small flat bladed tool. The TPA is seated when it is flush with the contact housing. 4. Secure the wires to the connector body using a tie wrap and replace the dress cover and grommet. Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Bosch Connectors (2.8 JPT) Tools Required J-38125 Terminal Repair Kit Terminal Removal Procedure 1. Pull out the slider on the connector position assurance (CPA) until it is at the end of its travel. 2. Disconnect the connector from the component. 3. Remove the wire dress cover, if necessary. 4. Push the wire side of the terminal that is being removed toward the connector and hold it in position. 5. Insert the J 38125-557 (GM P/N 12122378) into the 2 cavities on each side of the terminal at the front of the connector and push until you feel the tool disengage the terminal retainers. See the release tool cross reference in the Reference Guide of the J-38125 to ensure that the correct release tool is used. 6. Carefully pull the terminal out of the connector. Always remember never use force when pulling a terminal out of a connector. If the terminal is difficult to remove, repeat the entire procedure. Terminal Repair Procedure Use the appropriate terminal and follow the instructions in the J-38125.